SM MX-8090N S3e PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX8090/S3E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-7090N
MODEL MX-8090N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
[14] SERVICE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Function of each key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 5. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, [7] TROUBLESHOOTING
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
3. Weight list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS [9] MAINTENANCE
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance . . 9-1
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 2. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
4. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
5. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
1. Disassembly of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
6. Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2. Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
7. Ambient conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. HDD / mSATA SSD memory contents . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD . . . 11-2
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
[12] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
3. Definition of developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2. DSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
4. Paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
5. Paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
6. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
3. DSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
7. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
4. Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
8. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
5. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
9. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
6. Sensors and detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
10. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32
7. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
11. Waste toner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
8. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
12. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41
9. Drive motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
13. Duplex/paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44
10. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
11. Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
12. Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13. Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
14. Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
15. PWB/Memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 [14] SERVICE TOOL
16. Fuses and thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
17. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
MX-8090N
NOTE FOR SERVICING Service Manual
• When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the follow-
ing points.
 Gas tube
1. Precautions for servicing
 Lightning conductor
• When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the  A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except grounding object by the authorities.
when performing the communication test, etc.  Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an injury or an electric shock. It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
• There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme • Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forcibly
It may cause a burn.
bend, or pull the power cord.
• There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may cause
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
• Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
• Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective material
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
• Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the machine.
• When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other driving It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
sections. • Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
• Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily hands.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside the It may cause an electric shock.
machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
• When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces- 3. Note for installing site
sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
Do not install the machine at the following sites.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with water
• Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low
immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and
• The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to damage humidity.
fingers when servicing. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
• Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner causing paper jam or copy dirt.
may ignite and burn you.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
• When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the specified described later.
replacement battery.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a machine
malfunction or breakdown.
• When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it, be
sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING • Place of extreme vibrations
It may cause a breakdown.
2. Warning for servicing

• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets
the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock.
• If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal smell,
interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage occurs
• Poorly ventilated place
without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, ground-
ing must be made. The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as not
to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a machine
may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a well ventilated
place.
MX-8090N NOTE FOR SERVICING – i

• Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may undergo
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to observe
qualitative change. the following precautions in order to prevent against damage by static
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems. electricity.
• When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine may
undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as ammo-
nium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue print
machine may result in poor quality output. • When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
* There was a trouble in a place where silicon-series gas or volatile
components are generated. Use great care for avoiding this. • Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.
• Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.
• Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation. • When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the proce-
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may result. dure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16"
(30cm)
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
• Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.
MX-8090N NOTE FOR SERVICING – ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items. The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three types.
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
• When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
parts including the cover installed and perform the operation check. table.
• Do not modify the LSU. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than specified
• When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are described
check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes. on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such an exception.
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode or
safety may be at risk. a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid loosen-
ing.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer
unit, the developing unit Screw kinds and tightening torques
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the develop- Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
ing unit, strictly observe the following items. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the copy torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
and print image quality.
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
Drum unit
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
• Avoid working at a place with strong lights. M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
• Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for a
long time. Tapping screws (for iron)
• When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with Tightening Tightening Tightening
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets of torque torque torque
diameter fixed
paper to cover it.) (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
(Plate thickness
material on the OPC drum surface.
0.8mm or above)
Transfer unit M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign (Plate thickness
material on the transfer roller, primary transfer belt, and the second- 0.8mm or above)
ary transfer belt. M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
(Plate thickness
Developing unit
less than 0.8mm)
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
material on the developing unit. (Plate thickness
Fusing unit less than 0.8mm)
• Be careful not to attach finger prints or foreign materials on the fus-
ing belt and the pressure roller. Tapping screw (for plastic)
Tightening Tightening Tightening
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
MX-8090N NOTE FOR SERVICING – iii

MX-8090N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual
1. System diagram
MX-FN21
FINISHER
MX-PN13
A/B/C/D
PUNCH
MODULE
MX-TM10 MX-FD10
TRIMMING FOLDING UNIT MX-ST10 MX-ST10
MODULE MX-FN22 HIGH CAPACITY HIGH CAPACITY
SADDLE STTICH STACKER STACKER MX-TR14
FINISHER EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-CA10 MX-CA10
PAPER CART PAPER CART
MX-MF10 MX-LT10
MULTI BYPASS TRAY LONG PAPER
FEEDING TRAY
MX-SL10N
STATUS INDICATOR
MX-LC12
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
MX-PE13 MX-PX13
FIERY SERVER INTERFACE KIT
MX-PN13
A/B/C/D MX-PE14 MX-PX12 MX-KB16
PUNCH FIERY SERVER INTERFACE KIT
KEYBOARD
MODULE MX-LCX3 N
MX-CF11 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
INSERTER
MX-FN21 MX-TU14
FINISHER EXIT TRAY CABINET
MX-MF11
MULTI BYPASS TRAY
MX-RB13
RELAY UNIT
MX-RB12 N
PAPER PASS
UNIT
MX-RB15
MX-FN22 CURL CORRECTION
SADDLE STTICH UNIT
FINISHER
MX-7090N MX-RB14
MX-TM10 MX-FD10 MX-8090N PAPER PASS UNIT MX-LC13 N
TRIMMING MX-PN13 FOLDING UNIT DIGITAL FULL COLOR
MODULE A/B/C/D MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM LARGE CAPACITY TRAYS
PUNCH
MODULE
MX-RB17*1
CONNECTION
MODULE
*1: Option for 2nd MX-LC13
MX-PF10 AR-SU1 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-SCX1 MX-SCX2

BARCODE FONT KIT STAMP UNIT APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT STAPLE CARTRIDGE STAPLE CARTRIDGE
INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE (For Saddle) (For 100 sheets stapleing)
MX-8090N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. Option list
MX-7090N
Model name Name Remarks
MX-8090N
Paper feed system MX-LC12 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A4
MX-LCX3 N LARGE CAPACITY TRAY OPT A3
MX-MF10 MULTI BYPASS TRAY OPT For Main unit
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT
MX-LC13 N LARGE CAPACITY TRAYS OPT A3
MX-RB14 PAPER PASS UNIT OPT For large capacity trays
MX-RB17 CONNECTION MODULE OPT For large capacity trays
MX-MF11 MULTI BYPASS TRAY OPT For large capacity trays
Paper exit system MX-TR14 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT
MX-TU14 EXIT TRAY CABINET OPT Cannot install the MX-TU14 and the MX-RB12 N
concurrently.
MX-RB12 N PAPER PASS UNIT OPT Cannot install the MX-RB12 N and the MX-TU14
concurrently.
MX-RB13 RELAY UNIT OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-FN21 FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding
MX-FN22 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER OPT 100 sheets binding/saddle 25 sheets binding
MX-PN13A PUNCH MODULE OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-PN13B PUNCH MODULE OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-PN13C PUNCH MODULE OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-PN13D PUNCH MODULE OPT For 100 sheets binding
MX-TM10 TRIMMING MODULE OPT For 100 sheets binding saddle
MX-CF11 INSERTER OPT
MX-ST10/ HIGH CAPACITY STACKER/PAPER CART OPT
CA10
MX-RB15 CURL CORRECTION UNIT OPT
MX-FD10 FOLDING UNIT OPT
EFI MX-PE13 Fiery Server OPT (Local)
MX-PX13 Interface Kit OPT
MX-PE14 Fiery Server OPT (Local)
MX-PX12 Interface Kit
Printer Expansion MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT
Image send expansion AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT
Application/ MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT
Solution MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE OPT(*3) Standard for North America.
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE OPT(*2)
Others MX-KB16 KEYBOARD OPT(*3) Standard for North America.
MX-SL10 N STATUS INDICATOR OPT
MX-SCX1 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT For saddle staple (100 sheets saddle finisher)
MX-SCX2 STAPLE CARTRIDGE OPT For staple
(100 sheets saddle finisher / 100 sheets finisher)
AR-SV1 STAMP CARTRIDGE OPT
*1: Option for North America.

*2: Standard for North America and Europe.
*3: Standard for North America.
3. Weight list
Weight of each model
Model name Weight

Main unit 223.8kg
MX-FN21 61kg
MX-FN22 108kg
MX-TM10 32kg
MX-FD10 66kg
MX-RB12 N 6.1kg
MX-RB13 14.5kg
MX-RB14 27.5kg
MX-RB15 16.4kg
MX-CF11 45kg
MX-LCX3 N 50kg
MX-LC12 28.5kg
MX-LC13 N 131kg
MX-MF11 18kg
*1: Excluding consumable parts.
MX-8090N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-8090N
Service Manual
1. Basic specifications
A. Engine Specification
Photo-conductor OPC (Diameter: Black: 50mm Color (Y/M/C):
kind 50mm x3 lines)
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development
Developer refresh system
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method
Transfer system Intermediate/secondary transfer belt
Separation system Natural separation method
* Sub separation claw is equipped.
Cleaning system Counter blade
Fusing system Belt method
Waste toner No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle
disposal system
Toner supply during Enabled
operation
Outer Color Pastel white, natural wave design
Recommended HAMMERMILL Laser Print (24lb)
Paper Mondi Color Copy (90g)
B. Engine speed (ppm)

(1) Tray 1 - 4, LCC, LCT
Plain Paper 1/2
80cpm machine 70cpm machine
Paper Paper Tray
Mono Color Mono Color
13X19.2(19) LCT/A3LCC/LCT MFT 41 41 37 37
A3W LCT/A3LCC/LCT MFT 43 43 39 39
Tray3 to 4 36 36 34 34
A3/11" x 17"/8K LCT/A3LCC/LCT MFT 45 45 41 41
Tray3 to 4 38 38 36 36
B4/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5" LCT/A3LCC/LCT MFT 51 51 46 46
Tray3to 4 44 44 40 40
A4/B5/16K ALL 80 80 70 70
8.5" x 11" ALL 80 80 70 70
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR LCT/LCT MFT 61 61 55 55
Tray3to 4 50 50 46 46
A4R/8.5" x 11"R A3LCC 61 61 55 55
A5R/5.5" x 8.5"R LCT MFT 61 61 55 55
Tray4 50 50 46 46
SRA3 LCT/A3LCC/LCT MFT 43 43 39 39
SRA4 LCT/A3LCC/LCT MFT 75 75 68 68
A4W LCT/LCT MFT 74 74 67 67
Tray3to 4 60 60 55 55
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 215.9mm or less) LCT/LCT MFT 80 80 70 70
Tray4 80 80 70 70
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 216.0 - 225.0mm) LCT/LCT MFT 75 75 68 68
Tray4 60 60 55 55
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 225.1 - 297.0mm) LCT/LCT MFT 61 61 55 55
Tray4 50 50 46 46
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 297.1mm or more) LCT/LCT MFT 39 39 36 36
(including 13X19.2) Tray4 36 36 33 33
Heavy Paper 1/2 (Low speed 1)

Paper
Monochrome Color Monochrome Color
13X19.2(19)/Extra 21 21 21 21
A3W/SRA3 22 22 22 22
A3/B4/8K/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13.5"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13"/11" x 17" 23 23 23 23
A4/B5/16K/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 38 38 38 38
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/16KR/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R 31 31 31 31
SRA4/A4W 37 37 37 37
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 215.9mm or less) OHP (A4/8.5x11”) 38 38 38 38
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 216.0 - 225.0mm) 37 37 37 37
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 225.1 - 297.0mm) OHP (A4R/8.5x11”R) 31 31 31 31
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 297.1mm or more) (including 13X19.2) 21 21 21 21
MX-8090N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
Paper
13X19.2(19)/Extra 16 16 16 16
A3W/SRA3 17 17 17 17
A3/B4/8K/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13.5"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13"/11" x 17" 18 18 18 18
A4/B5/16K/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 30 30 30 30
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/16KR/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R 24 24 24 24
SRA4/A4W 29 29 29 29
Custom size (Sub scanning direction: 215.9mm or less) 30 30 30 30
(2) Multi Bypass

Plain Paper 1/2
Paper
13X19.2(19) 34 31 31 28
A3W 35 32 33 28
A3/11" x 17"/8K 37 33 34 29
B4/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5" 42 37 39 33
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR 48 48 45 45
A5R/5.5" x 8.5"R 48 48 45 45
B5 80 65 70 59
A4/16K 80 63 70 57
8.5" x 11" 80 63 70 57
Extra 34 31 31 28
SRA3 36 32 33 28
SRA4 58 57 53 52
A4W 57 55 53 52

Paper
13X19.2(19) 20 17 20 17
A3W 21 18 21 18
A3/11" x 17"/8K 22 19 22 19
Envelope *2 25 21 25 21
Post card (High) *1 36 33 36 33
Post card (Low) *1 21 18 21 18
B4/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5"/11" x 17" 22 19 22 19
A4/16K/B5/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 36 33 36 33
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR 29 27 29 27
Extra 20 17 20 17
SRA3 21 18 21 18
SRA4 35 32 35 32
A4W 35 32 35 32
OHP (A4/8.5" x 11") 36 33 36 33
OHP (A4R/8.5" x 11"R) 29 27 29 27
Paper
13X19.2(19) 15 12 15 12
A3W 16 13 16 13
A3/11" x 17"/8K 17 14 17 14
Post card (High) 28 25 28 25
Post card (Low) 16 13 16 13
B4/8.5" x 14"/8.5" x 13"/8.5" x 13.4"/8.5" x 13.5"/11" x 17" 17 14 17 14
A4/16K/B5/A5R/8.5" x 11"/5.5" x 8.5"R 28 25 28 25
A4R/8.5" x 11"R/B5R/7.25" x 10.5"R/16KR 23 20 23 20
Extra 15 12 15 12
SRA3 16 13 16 13
SRA4 28 24 28 24
A4W 27 24 27 24
*1: Envelope : Monarch, Com-9, Com-10, DL, C4, C5, C6

*2: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low before shipment.
C. Printable area Tone Copy Writing

(equivalent to 256 600 x 600dpi, 4bit
A3 Wide * 301 x 449mm 13" x 19" * 319 x 480mm levels *2) 9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
SRA3 316 x 442mm 12" x 18" * 301 x 449mm Print Writing
A3 293 x 412mm 11" x 17" 275 x 424mm PCL:
B4 253 x 356mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 348mm 600 x 600dpi, 1bit
SRA4 312 x 221mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 335mm 600 x 600dpi, 4bit
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
A4 206 x 289mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 332mm
1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit
B5 178 x 249mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 322mm
PS:
A5 144 x 202mm Executive 180 x 258mm 600 x 600dpi, 1bit
Postcard 96 x 140mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 271mm 600 x 600dpi, 4bit
8K 266 x 382mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 208mm 9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi
16K 191 x 262mm 1,200 x 1,200dpi, 1bit
Custom Min: 86mm x 133mm / Max: 319mm x 1292mm
*1: Resolution: 600dpi (default)
* The printable area for 13X19(19.2) / A3W / 12x18 must be as large *2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be
as the A3 / 11x17 page dimension plus crop mark by PCL / PS performed.
driver.
* Long paper must support up to 1,300mm.
E. Copy Ratio
Accuracy of the copy ratio Same magnification:
Void area Lead edge: 4mm +/-1mm
1:1 ±0.5%
Image loss Rear edge: 2mm or more, and 5mm or less
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge: 8mm or less
FR total: 4mm +/- 2mm or less
F. Scanner section
Max Printable 319X1,292mm (1) Resolution/Gradation
area
Guaranteed 319mm Scanning Monochrome Color
printable area Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi (default) 600 x 600dpi
600 x 400dpi
D. Engine resolution DSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
600 x 400dpi (default)
Resolution *1 Copy Writing Exposure lamp White LED
1200 x 1200dpi (B&W only)
Reading gradation 10bit
600 x 600dpi
Output gradation BW: 2levels(1bit)
Gray scale: 8bit
Print Writing
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
600 x 600dpi
1,200 x 1,200dpi (2) Document table
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
Original standard Rear Left
position
Detection Yes
Detection size Automatic detection (Detection types can be changed
in the System Settings)
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts
heater (Scanner
section)
G. Document feeder Paper feeding Right hand feeding
direction
(1) DSPF
Finish stamp Option
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder) *1:image send only

Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
*2:Default 200dpi x 200dpi
(A4/8.5" x 11")
Single: Single:
100 sheets/ 100 sheets/
minutes(600x300dpi, 8bit) minutes(600x300dpi,
*1 8bit) *1
80 sheets/minutes 80 sheets/minutes
(600x400dpi, 8bit) (600x400dpi, 8bit) *1
(600x600dpi, 8bit) (600x600dpi, 8bit)
Duplex: Duplex:
200 pages/minutes 200 pages/minutes
(600x300dpi, 8bit) *1 (600x300dpi, 8bit) *1
(600x400dpi, 8bit) (600x400dpi, 8bit) *1
(600x600dpi, 8bit) (600x600dpi, 8bit)
Thin Paper (Single): Thin Paper (Single):
(600x300dpi, 8bit) *1 (600x300dpi, 8bit) *1
(600x400dpi, 8bit) (600x400dpi, 8bit) *1
(600x600dpi, 8bit) (600x600dpi, 8bit)
Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
direction
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random
position feeding)
Original transport Sheet-through method
method
Original size Standard size
Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Mix paper feed Enabled
(Same series, same
width paper)
Random feeding of Enabled
different types / Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
different widths) allowed:
A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and
11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
Original copy weight Single:
Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode
Duplex: 13 - 34 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Maximum: 180 sheets (17 lb. Bond 64g/ m2)
Max. loading Max. 150 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height:
capacity of 50/64 inch, 19.5mm or less
documents
Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
originals for feeding. paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
breakage, pasted paper, cutout document, document
printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation
other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by
punch unit is allowed.)
Detection Yes
Paper detection Auto detection (Refer to “Original size”)
size
H. Paper feed section
(1) Basic specifications
Type Standard 4-stage paper feed tray (Tandem LCC + 2 tray) + Multi bypass tray (Necessary option exclusive against LCT, and Standard for the other
destinations.)
Full option 4-stage paper feed tray (Tandem LCC + 2 tray) + 2-stage LCT + Multi bypass tray for LCT
Paper edge detection CIS
Dehumidifying heater Service parts
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass tray

Tray Tray 3 Tray 4
(LCC left side) (LCC right side) (Option)
Paper capacity Plain paper (80g/m2) 1,200 sheets 800 sheets 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
Paper size Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.
Paper size detection No Yes (Refer to “Paper size detection table”.)
Paper type settings Yes (Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.)
Changing of paper size User/Serviceman User selection *2 User selection
selection *1
Cassette handle Normal grasp/reverse grasp support (With the lock mechanism)
Default Paper Size Inch series 8.5" x 11" 8.5" x 11" Shipped with the max. paper guide width. -
Setting AB series A4 A4 -
Paper remaining quantity detection Paper empty, 100%/ Paper empty, 100%/ Paper empty, 100%/67%/33% Only detection of
33%/6% 50%/9% paper empty
Paper size display Yes
Auto Tray Switch Selection Priority
Paper Feed Option Multi Bypass Tray2 -> 1 -> 3 -> 4 -> Multi Bypass
(MX-MF10)
LCC (A4/A3) Tray5 -> 2 -> 1 -> 3 -> 4 -> Multi Bypass
A3LCT Tray5 -> 6 -> 2 -> 1 -> 3 -> 4 -> Multi Bypass
A3LCT+A3LCT Tray5 -> 6 -> 7 -> 8 -> 2 -> 1 -> 3 -> 4 -> Multi Bypass
*1: A4/8.5" x 11" can be selected by the user. B5 size is selected by the serviceman.
*2: A4/8.5" x 11" can be selected by the user.
(2) Extra paper capacity
Paper type Tray 4 Multi bypass tray (Option)

Postcard NA 20 sheets
Envelope NA 20 sheets
OHP 40 sheets 20 sheets
Heavy paper 80 sheets 20 sheets
Tab paper 40 sheets 20 sheets
Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
Others 1 sheet 1 sheet
(3) Size of paper which can be fed
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass

Paper feed section Tray 3 Tray 4
(Tandem left) (Tandem right) tray (Option)
Minimum weight 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 60g/m2 55g/m2
Maximum weight 105g/m2 105g/m2 220g/m2 220g/m2 300g/m2
Paper Thin paper No No No No Yes
type Plain paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 176g/m2 No No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 2 177 - 220g/m2 No No Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 3 221 - 256g/m2 No No No No Yes
Heavy paper 4 257 - 300g/m2 No No No No Yes
Embossed paper No No No Yes Yes
Tab paper*3 No No No Yes Yes
Envelope No No No No Yes
OHP Transparency No No No Yes Yes
Label No No No Yes Yes
Grossy paper No No No No Yes
User settings 1 - 11 Yes*6 Yes*6 Yes*6 Yes*6 Yes*6
Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass
Paper feed section Tray 3 Tray 4
(Tandem left) (Tandem right) tray (Option)
Paper 13" x 19" 330 x 483 No No No No Yes
size 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 No No Yes Yes Yes
Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 No No Yes Yes Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 No No Yes Yes Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 No No Yes Yes Yes
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 No No Yes Yes Yes
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 No No Yes Yes Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 No No Yes Yes Yes
Invoice (5.5" x 8.5") *4 216 x 140 - - - - -
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 No No No Yes Yes
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 No No Yes Yes Yes
9 x 12 (A4W) 305 x 229 No No Yes Yes Yes
A3 297 x 420 No No Yes Yes Yes
B4 257 x 364 No No Yes Yes Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 No No Yes Yes Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 No No Yes Yes Yes
A5 *4 210 x 148 - - - - -
A5-R 148 x 210 No No No Yes Yes
SRA3 320 x 450 No No No No Yes
SRA4 320 x 225 No No No No Yes
8K 270 x 390 No No Yes Yes Yes
16K 270 x 195 No No Yes Yes Yes
16K-R 195 x 270 No No Yes Yes Yes
Monarch 98 x 191 No No No No Yes
COM9 98.4 x 225.4 No No No No Yes
COM10 105 x 241 No No No No Yes
DL 110 x 220 No No No No Yes
C4 229 x 324 No No No No Yes
Extra - Custom size *2 No No No Yes Yes
148mm/
Min X (sub scan) No No No 140mm/5.5inch
5.875inch
488mm/19.2inch
Custom range Max X (sub scan) No No No 457mm/18inch
*5
Min Y (main scan) No No No 100mm/4inch 90mm/3.625inch
Max Y (main scan) No No No 305mm/12inch 330mm/13inch
Special - Uncertain paper size No No No No Yes
Width: 90 - 305
Long size paper *7 No No No No Yes
Length: 489 - 1300
*1: B5 size is available only for Japan, AB-series overseas, and Asia dealers.
*2: Custom size for Tray 4 is supported by default. Long paper (MBT): max 1,200mm is supported by SIM (default OFF)
*3: Supported tab width for tab paper is as follows: A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm, 8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
*4: 5.5”x8.5” and A5 are regarded as extra
*5: 1300mm when banner paper is enabled
*6: Depends on the setting of paper property
*7: Long paper maximum width specification is to be set up to 330mm as 305mm but operating out of warranty.
(4) Paper size detection table
8.5x13.5 (216x343)
8.5x13.4 (216x340)
8.5x13 (216x330)
7.25x10.5R
5.5x8.5R
Postcard
8.5x11R
5.5x8.5
8.5x14
8.5x11
13x19
12x18
11x17
SRA3
SRA4
16KR
A3W
A4W
A4R
B5R
A5R
16K
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
8K
Tray1 Auto-
No*1
No*1
No*2
(tandem) AB – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Auto-
No*1
No*1
No*2
Inch – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Tray2 Auto-
No*1
No*1
(tandem) AB – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Auto- No*1
No*1
Inch – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Tray3 Auto-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
– – – – – – – –
AB
Auto-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
– – – – – – –
Inch
Tray4 Auto-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
– – – – – – –
AB
Auto-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
– – – – – –
Inch
Yes: Automatically detected, No: Paper can be set/ Cannot be automatically detected, –:Paper cannot be set.
* 8.5x13.4 and 8.5x13.5: automatic detection is not available. Can be manually changed in the System Settings.
*1: Detection size can be set by System settings.
*2: Possible to set by Simulation.
I. Paper exit section

(1) Exit Capacity
Exit location Center (option) Right side (option)

Exit Capacity 250 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": 64g/m2) 100 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": 80g/m2)
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged
Paper exit section Duplex Main unit center tray Right exit tray
Minimum weight 60g/m2 55g/m2 55g/m2
Maximum weight 300g/m2 300g/m2 256g/m2
Paper Thin paper 55-59g/m2 No Yes Yes
type Plain paper 1 60-89g/m2 Yes Yes Yes
Plain paper 2 90-105g/m2 Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 1 106 - 176g/m2 Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 4 257 - 300g/m2 Yes Yes No
Embossed paper Yes Yes Yes
Tab paper*1 No Yes No
Envelope No Yes No
OHP Transparency No Yes Yes
Label No Yes Yes
Grossy paper Yes Yes Yes
User settings 1 - 11 Yes *4 Yes Yes *4
Paper exit section Duplex Main unit center tray Right exit tray
Paper 13" x 19" 330 x 483 Yes Yes Yes
size 12" x 18" (A3W) 305 x 457 Yes Yes Yes
Ledger (11" x 17") 279 x 432 Yes Yes Yes
Legal (8.5" x 14") 216 x 356 Yes Yes Yes
Asian legal (8.5" x 13.5") 216 x 343 Yes Yes Yes
Mexican legal (8.5" x 13.4") 216 x 340 Yes Yes Yes
Foolscap (8.5" x 13") 216 x 330 Yes Yes Yes
Letter (8.5" x 11") 279 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
Letter R (8.5" x 11"R) 216 x 279 Yes Yes Yes
Invoice R (5.5" x 8.5"R) 140 x 216 Yes Yes Yes
Executive R (7.25" x 10.5"R) 184 x 266 Yes Yes Yes
9 x 12 (A4W) 305 x 229 Yes Yes Yes
A3 297 x 420 Yes Yes Yes
B4 257 x 364 Yes Yes Yes
A4 297 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
A4-R 210 x 297 Yes Yes Yes
B5 257 x 182 Yes Yes Yes
B5-R 182 x 257 Yes Yes Yes
A5-R 148 x 210 Yes Yes Yes
SRA3 320 x 450 Yes Yes Yes
SRA4 320 x 225 Yes Yes Yes
8K 270 x 390 Yes Yes Yes
16K 270 x 195 Yes Yes Yes
16K-R 195 x 270 Yes Yes Yes
Monarch 98 x 191 No Yes No
COM9 98.4 x 225.4 No Yes No
COM10 105 x 241 No Yes No
DL 110 x 220 No Yes No
C4 229 x 324 No Yes No
Extra - Custom size *2 Yes Yes Yes
Min X (sub scan) 140 140 (5.5) 140
Max X (sub scan) 488 (19.2) 488 (19.2) *3 488 (19.2)
Custom range
Min Y (main scan) 90 90(3.265) 90
Max Y (main scan) 330 (13) 330 (13) 330 (13)
Special - Uncertain paper size No Yes Yes
Width: 90 - 305
Long size paper *5 No Yes No
Length: 489 - 1300
*1: Supported tab width for tab paper is as follows: A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm, 8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
*2: Custom envelope size is supported by software switch (default: hidden). Long paper (MBT): max 1,300mm must be supported
*3: 1,300mm when banner paper is enabled
*4: Depends on the setting of Paper Property
*5: Long paper maximum width specification is to be set up to 330mm as 305mm but operating out of warranty.
2 : ‘19/March.
J. Operation panel 2. Copy functions
Size 15.4 inch A. First copy time
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel, Arm type
Display dot number 1,280x 800 dots (WXGA) Engine
LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system
Platen 3.7 sec. 5.1 sec. 4.0 sec. 5.6 sec.
K. Controller board DSPF 6.3 sec. 8.8 sec. 6.5 sec. 9.2 sec.
CPU ARM11: 600MHz B. Job Effectiveness

ARM9: 400MHz (Energy save mode: 75MHz) BLI Standard (DSPF)
SOC Intel Atom E3845 1.91GHz
Interface 80cpm machine 70cpm machine
Engine
Ethernet 1port Monochrome Color Monochrome Color
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T S to S 65cpm 57cpm 58cpm 52cpm
Support TCP/IP(IPv4, IPv6): Yes (81%) (71%) (83%) (74%)
Protocol IPX/SPX: No S to D 60cpm 54cpm 54.3cpm 49.3cpm
EtherTalk: No (75%) (68%) (78%) (70%)
USB 2.0 (high 2port (Front 1+ rear 1) D to D 70.3cpm 67cpm 62.7cpm 59.7cpm
speed) (host) * Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is enabled. (88%) (84%) (89%) (85%)
USB 2.0 (high 1port
speed) (device) * S to S: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies
USB-HUB (host) Internal: 4port * S to D: 10 pages of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies
• For Front USB Port * D to D: 10 pages (20 sides) of A4 / 8.5" x 11" document and 5 copies
• For Rear USB Port
• For IC card reader
• For Keyboard
ACRE expansion I/F Yes
Video I/F Option
(for EFI connection)
Serial I/F 1port
(for coin vendor/
PCI)
Memory See the section "Memory/Hard disk".
Memory slot 1 slot
L. Memory/Hard disk
mSATA
Flash DIMM Memory HDD*1
SSD
ICU ICU REUS1 REUS2 SOC
main sub SOC On- On- On- 2.5"
(REUS1) (REUS2) board board board
16MB 2MB 16GB 1GB 1GB 4GB 1TB
*1: The capacity depends on procurement and sourcing situation.
Memory area Boot/Program area

2 mSATA SSD
M. Warm-up time
Main power SW
Warm-up time *1 80cpm machine: 90sec
70cpm machine: 90sec
Pre heat Yes
Jam recovery time *2 45sec. or less
*1: Result may change depending on conditions.

*2: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
standard condition, Polygon stops.
N. Security
Admin/Service password scheme Yes
3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
Custom PCL6
OS *1 Custom PCL5c Custom PS PPD PC-Fax TWAIN
SPDL2-c
Windows 98 / Me No No No No No No
NT 4.0 SPS or later No No No No No No
2000 No No No No No No
XP*2 No No No No No No
XP x64*2 No No No No No No
Server 2003*2 No No No No No No
Server 2003 x64*2 No No No No No No
Vista No No No No No No
Vista x64 No No No No No No
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Server 2008 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Windows 7 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Windows 8 No No No No No No
Windows 8 x64 No No No No No No
Windows 8.1 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Server 2012 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Server 2012 R2 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Windows 10 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Windows 10 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Server 2016 x 64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM No CD-ROM
Mac 9 No No No No No No
X10.2 No No No No No No
X10.S No No No No No No
X10.6 No No CD-ROM No No No
*1: New 0Ss will be supported according to the Document Systems Division’s rules.
B. PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command) Installed font Option font
PCL5c / PCL6 compatibility STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
ESC/P(VP-1100) --- European BMP font ---
compatible, =2 styles (Roman, Sans-serif)
ESC/P_super compatible
Postscript 3 STD European outline font = 139 styles
Scalable font for List Print STD Arphic Mobile Font ---
4. Image send function C. Image processing
A. Mode (1) Color Mode
Mode Sub mode Scanner

Scanner E-mail B&W Yes
FTP server Grayscale Yes
Shared folder (SMB) Full color Yes
Desktop Auto Color Selection (ACS) Yes
USB memory
HDD
(2) Resolution
Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP -
Level Scanner
Fax -
1 100x100dpi
Data input (metadata) E-mail
2 150x150dpi
FTP server
3 200x200dpi
Shared folder (SMB)
4 300x300dpi
Desktop
5 400x400dpi
Remote PC scan -
6 600x600dpi
B. Support Image (3) Exposure / Original Type
Format /
Mode Scanner
Mode Compression Item
Halftone reproduction Equivalent to
method
256 gradations
Scanner File format TIFF
Exposure Adjustment Auto Yes
(Mono 2 gradation) PDF
Manual 5 levels
PDF/A-1b
Original document type Text Yes
PDF/A-1a
(Selectable in manual mode) Text/Photo Yes
Encrypted PDF
Text/Printed photo Yes
XPS
Photo Yes
Searchable PDF
Printed photo Yes
Office file (pptx, xlsx, docx)
Map Yes
Text file (TXT) (UTF-8)
Magical scan (Area division + Suppress Background) Yes
Rich text file (RTF)
Selection of image quality N/A
XMDF (Reflow type)
File format Color TIFF
(Color/ Grayscale) JPEG
PDF
PDF/A-1b
PDF/A-1a
Encrypted PDF
High compression PDF
XPS
Searchable PDF
Office file (pptx, xlsx, docx)
Text file (TXT) (UTF-8)
Rich text file (RTF)
XMDF (Reflow type)
Compression method Non-compression
(Mono 2 gradation) G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
(Modified Huffman)
G4= MMR (Modified MR)
Compression method JPEG (High/Middle/Low)
(Color/ Grayscale) High compression PDF
Black Letter Emphasis
2-color PDF
Internet Fax File format TIFF-FX(TIFF-F / TIFF-S)
Direct SMTP (Monochrome)
File format TIFF-C
(Color/ Grayscale)
Compression method Non-compression
(Monochrome) G3 (1-dimentional)= MH
(Modified Huffman)
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
Compression method TIFF-C (high/ middle/ low)
(Color/ Grayscale)
Fax File format N/A
(Monochrome)
Compression method MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG
(Monochrome)
File per page (Setting of the number of pages available)
5. Power consumption
A. Power consumption
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.
200 V (North America, etc.) 200 V (Europe, etc.)

Maximum rated power Consumption*1 2880W 3840W
Energy consumption rate Not applicable
TEC value (Measured result) 70cpm machine 7.7kWh 7.9kWh
80cpm machine 8.3kWh 9.0kWh
TEC value (Standard) Tier2 70cpm machine 24.0kWh (0.70kWh*70-25.0kWh)
80cpm machine 31.0kWh (0.70kWh*80-25.0kWh)
Network/Fax waiting power consumption: 1W or less No
* The network protocol is TCP/IP only.
Moving time to pre-heat mode *2 1min. (default) 1min. (default)
Recovery time from pre-heat mode 30 sec.
Moving time to sleep mode *2 15min. (default) 15min. (default)
* Printer mode: 10sec. (default)
Recovery time from sleep mode Less than Warm up time.
*1: Power switch ON, de humidity heater OFF

*2: Range:1-120min. (compliant with the new BA Standard)
6. Dimensions and Weight

Upper(mm)
Outer dimension W982 x D768 x H 1,530mm
(Included operation panel)
Footprint W879 x D768 mm
Dimension occupied by the W1,261 x D768 mm
machine (When the bypass tray is extended/
(When the bypass tray is extended) Operation panel default position) 768mm
812mm
Maximum Dimensions occupied by 1301mm (Panel swing to the right side)
the machine x 812mm (Keyboard is pulled out)
Weight 223.8kg
Main Unit (including photoreceptor /
not including consumable)
982mm
Front(mm)
1,301mm
7. Ambient conditions
Humidity (RH)
85%
1,530mm
60%
1,222mm
20%
879mm
10°C 30°C 35°C
1,261mm (When Tray Extended) Temperature
MX-8090N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. North America, Middle America, South America
Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62NT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
(Reference: 54.2K for A4/Letter 6%)
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 60K MX-75NT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 60K MX-75NT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 60K MX-75NT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62NT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62NT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62NT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62NV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62NV-SA 5
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(3 colors/set)) (3 colors/set))
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62NR-SA 10
200K (Color)
B. Europe, Eastern Europe, Australia, New Zealand

Quantity in
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62GT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 60K MX-75GT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 60K MX-75GT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 60K MX-75GT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62GT-CB 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62GT-MB 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62GT-YB 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62GV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62GV-SB 5
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62GR-SA 10
200K (Color)
C. Asia, Hong Kong

Quantity in
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62AT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 60K MX-75AT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 60K MX-75AT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 60K MX-75AT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62AT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62AT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62AT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62AV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62AV-SA 5
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62AR-SA 10
200K (Color)
MX-8090N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

D. Middle East, Taiwan, Africa, Israel, Philippines
Quantity in
collective package
Toner cartridge (Black) Toner cartridge (Black) x1 65K MX-62FT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 60K MX-75FT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 60K MX-75FT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 60K MX-75FT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Cyan) Toner cartridge (Cyan) x1 40K MX-62FT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Magenta) Toner cartridge (Magenta) x1 40K MX-62FT-MA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Toner cartridge (Yellow) Toner cartridge (Yellow) x1 40K MX-62FT-YA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area coverage 5%
Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 600K MX-62FV-BA 10
Developer Developer x1 400K MX-62FV-SA 5
Drum OPC drum x1 300K (Black) MX-62FR-SA 10
200K (Color)

1 : ‘18/Mar.
2. Maintenance parts list
A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-800FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
Meandering suppress collar x2
Curved washer x2
Fusing roller kit MX-800HK Fusing roller PO x1 300K 10
Fusing roller BRG x2
Heating roller PRO EUR x1
Heating roller BRG x2
Insulation bush x2
Pressure roller kit MX-750LH Pressure roller x1 600K 10
Pressure roller gear x1
Pressure roller BRG x2
Lower separation pawl x5
Lower separation pawl SP x5
24T Gear x1
Web cleaning kit MX-620WB Web roller x1 300K 10
Web guide shaft x1
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
1 Primary transfer belt kit MX-800B1 Primary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Transfer separation pawl x1
CL brush idle gear 1N x1
CL brush drive gear N x1
1st cleaner joint gear N x1
Primary transfer blade kit MX-751TL Primary transfer blade x1 300K 10
Primary transfer CL roller kit MX-751C1 Primary transfer CL roller x1 300K 10
PTC kit MX-620CU Charger wire x1 300K 10
PTC cleaner x1
PTC cleaner B x1
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-800B2 Secondary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Secondary transfer belt cleaning roller x1
Secondary transfer blade kit MX-750TG Secondary transfer blade x1 300K 10
PS paper dust removing unit MX-620PD PS paper dust removing unit x1 300K 10
DV filter kit MX-751FK Filter holder unit x1 Black: 300K 10
Color: 200K 10
Filter kit MX-800FL Ozone filter x2 300K 10
Toner filter x2
Deodorant filter x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container unit x1 100K *1 5 Each color A4 5% coverage
45% color ratio
Main charger kit MX-751MK Main charger unit x1 Black: 300K 10
Drum cleaning blade x1 Color: 200K
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 20
3
3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-800U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-800U2 Secondary transfer belt unit x1 - 1
(For servicing rotation)
Fusing unit MX-800FU1 Fusing unit 230S (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
(Heater lamp 230V)
*1: The life of the toner collection container is 100K (which varies depending on the print contents, the paper sizes, the paper kinds, the use
conditions, and the number of continuous printing) with the color ratio of 45% and A4 size 5% coverage.

1 : ‘18/Mar.
B. Europe/East Europe/Australia/New Zealand/Asia/Middle East
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-800FB Fusing belt x1 300K 10
Meandering suppress collar x2
Curved washer x2
Fusing roller kit MX-800HK Fusing roller PO x1 300K 10
Fusing roller BRG x2
Heating roller PRO EUR x1
Heating roller BRG x2
Insulation bush x2
Pressure roller kit MX-750LH Pressure roller x1 600K 10
Pressure roller gear x1
Pressure roller BRG x2
Lower separation pawl x5
Lower separation pawl SP x5
24T Gear x1
Web cleaning kit MX-620WB Web roller x1 300K 10
Web guide shaft x1
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
1 Primary transfer belt kit MX-800B1 Primary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Transfer separation pawl x1
CL brush drive gear N x1
1st cleaner joint gear N x1
Primary transfer blade kit MX-751TL Primary transfer blade x1 300K 10
Primary transfer CL roller kit MX-751C1 Primary transfer CL roller x1 300K 10
PTC kit MX-620CU Charger wire x1 300K 10
PTC cleaner x1
PTC cleaner B x1
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-800B2 Secondary transfer belt x1 300K 10
Secondary transfer belt cleaning roller x1
Secondary transfer blade kit MX-750TG Secondary transfer blade x1 300K 10
PS paper dust removing unit MX-620PD PS paper dust removing unit x1 300K 10
DV filter kit MX-751FK Filter holder unit x1 Black: 300K 10
Color: 200K 10
Filter kit MX-800FL Ozone filter x2 300K 10
Toner filter x2
Deodorant filter x2
Toner collection container MX-700HB Toner collection container x1 100K *1 5 Each color A4 5% coverage
45% color ratio
Main charger kit MX-751MK Main charger unit x1 Black: 300K 10
Drum cleaning blade x1 Color: 200K
3
3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 - 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-800U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-800U2 Secondary transfer belt unit x1 - 1
(For servicing rotation)
Fusing unit MX-800FU Fusing unit 230W (For servicing rotation) x1 - 1
(Heater lamp 230V)
*1: The life of the toner collection container is 100K (which varies depending on the print contents, the paper sizes, the paper kinds, the use
conditions, and the number of continuous printing) with the color ratio of 45% and A4 size 5% coverage.

3. Definition of developer/drum life end
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified count.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count.
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life end.
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output may differ greatly.
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are output, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode in order to prevent
against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color selection).
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified
amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the developer/drum life, use SIM22-13.
Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm

B/W Full color B/W Full color
Drum 300K 200K 1000K rotations 1000K rotations
Developer 600K 400K 2000K rotations 2000K rotations
4. Production number identification B. Developer

A. OPC drum
The lot number is 8 digits (BK) and 5 digits (CMY) in length. Each digit
indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the developer bag. (For BK, at the right lower
side of the front. For Cl, at the right lower side of the back.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 [BK]
1: Alphabet
The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the con- Indicates the production factory.
tent as follows. 2: Number
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
1: Number Indicates the production month.
For this model, this digit is 2. 5/6: Number
2: Alphabet Indicates the production day.
Indicates the model conformity code. 7: Hyphen
3: Number 8: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year. Indicates the production lot.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
[C,M,Y]
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 1: Number
5/6: Number Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Indicates the day of the production date. 2: Alphabet
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. Indicates the production factory.
7: Number 3: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing. Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December. 4/5: Number
8/9: Number Indicates the production day.
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.

C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the bottom
of the toner cartridge.
: Unit code/Model name

: Color code (Black: BK /Cyan: CY /Magenta: MA /Yellow: YE)
: Destination
: Skating
: Production place
: Production date (YYYYMMDD)
: Serial number
: Version
5. Environmental conditions
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
10°C 30°C 35°C

Temperature
Standard environmental Temperature 21 – 25 °C

conditions Humidity 50  10 %RH
Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
under unsealed state

MX-8090N
[4] Service Manual
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view
(1) (11)
(12)
(13)
(2)
(10)
(9)
(8)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
2 Punch module * This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large stacker) or the saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
3 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for folding
(100-sheet stapling) * output in half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
4 Trimming module * When center stapling is executed, the extended section can be cut.
5 Folding unit * When outputting different paper sizes such as A3 and A4, the larger size paper can be Z-folded to align with the smaller
size paper.
6 Paper cart * This cart is attached to the large capacity stacker.
7 Inserter * The cover paper and the inserted paper inserted to the printed paper can be set. By the off-line finish function, paper can
be directly sent to the finisher or the saddle finisher, executing stapling, punching, and folding.
8 Curl correction unit * Corrects curl of printed paper properly.
9 Paper pass unit * Feeds paper to the main machine.
10 Large capacity trays * This holds paper. The capacity of each tray is max. 2,750 sheets.
11 Bypass tray * In manual paper feed, paper is manually inserted into this tray.
When setting A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R or greater, extend the auxiliary guide.
12 Status indicator * The machine status is indicated by the LED.
13 High capacity stacker * This holds paper. Up to 5250 sheets of paper can be loaded.
Upper stage tray: 250 sheets
Lower stage tray: 5000 sheets (80g/m2)
*: Peripheral device.
MX-8090N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

(4)
(16)
(5)
(17) (6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(15)
(7)
(9)
(14)
(10)
(8) (11)
(12)
(13)

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Right tray * When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
3 Bypass tray In manual paper feed, paper is manually inserted into this tray.
(Standard for some destinations) * When setting A4R or 8-1/2" x 11"R or greater, extend the auxiliary guide.
4 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
5 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
6 Keyboard * This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine.
7 Saddle stitch finisher This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and stapling output and the fold function for folding
(50-sheet stapling) * output in half are also available.
8 Finisher (50-sheet stapling) * This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
9 Punch module * This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large stacker) or the saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
10 Tray 1 (left side) This holds paper. Up to 1,200 sheets of paper can be loaded.
11 Tray 2 (right side) This holds paper. Up to 800 sheets of paper can be loaded.
12 Tray 3 This holds paper.
13 Tray 4 This holds paper.
14 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray The capacity is max. 3,500 sheets of B5, A4, or 8.5" x 11".
(MX-LC12) is installed) *
15 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) paper can be loaded. Up to 3,000 sheets of paper can be loaded.
(MX-LCX3N) is installed) *
16 Front cover (lower) * Open this cover when turning ON/OFF the main power switch, cleaning the main charger of the OPC drum, or cleaning
the writing unit.
17 Front cover (upper) * Open this cover when replacing the toner cartridge or processing a paper jam in the relay unit.
*: Peripheral device.

(4)
(1)
(5)
(3)
(2)
(7)
(6)
No. Name function/Operation

1 Document feeder cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
2 Original guides Set this guide to the original width to scan the original properly.
3 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
4 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
5 Original size detector Detects the size of documents set on the document table (glass surface).
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

2. Internal structure
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(3)
(8)

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that ran out must be
replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
3 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four colors on each of the photoconductive drums are combined
together on the transfer belt. During black and white printing, only the black toner image is transferred onto the transfer
belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
6 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
7 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.
8 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.

3. DSPF
A. Rollers
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 Pickup roller Picks up document and feed it to the document feed roller
2 Document feed roller Perform the document feed operation of documents
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double feed
4 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from paper feed roller to transport roller 2
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides transport power of the transport roller to document
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from transport roller to registration roller
7 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document
8 Registration roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport
9 Registration roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the registration roller, and provides transport power of the registration roller to
document
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the No.1 scan section to the transport roller 4
11 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document
12 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 3 to the document exit roller
13 Transport roller 4 (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the transport roller and provides transport power of the transport roller to document
14 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document
15 Document exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the document exit roller and provides transport power of the document exit roller to
document
B. Sensors and switches
SCOV SPRDMD
SPPD2 STUD
SPED1 SPLS2
SPPD1
SPLS1
STLD SPWS
SPED2
SPPD3 SPOD
SOCD SPPD5
SPPD4
SLCOV
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SCOV Upper door open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the upper door
SLCOV Lower door open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the lower door
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit
SPED1 Document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPED2 Document empty sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the document feed tray
SPLS1 Document length detection short sensor Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPLS2 Document length detection long sensor Transmission type Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper
SPOD Document exit sensor Transmission type Detects document exit of the document

SPPD1 Document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document
SPPD2 Document pass sensor 2 Reflection type Detects pass of the document
SPRDMD Document random sensor Transmission type Detects the document size in random document feed
SPWS Document width sensor Volume type resistor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper
STLD Document feed tray lower limit sensor Transmission type Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray
STUD Document feed tray upper limit sensor Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray
C. Drive motors, clutches, PWB’s, and lamps
STRC
SPUFM
STRRC
SRRC SPFC
SPFFAN
SPOM
SLUM
2
1
DSPF_COPY_LAMP

DSPF_COPY_ Scanner lamp (DSPF) LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
LAMP
SLUM Document feed tray lift motor (DSPF) Stepping motor Lifts the document feed tray.
SPFC Paper feed clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the document feed section roller.
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan DC brushless motor Cools the motors and the clutches in the DSPF section.
SPOM Document exit motor (DSPF) Stepping motor Drives the document exit roller.
SPUFM Transport motor DC brushless motor Drives the transport roller.
SRRC Registration roller clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the registration roller.
STRC Transport roller 2 clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller 2.
STRRC Transport roller 1 clutch (DSPF) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller 1.

1 DSPF control PWB Controls the image data process and all the DSPF.
2 CCD PWB (DSPF) Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.

4. Connectors
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No. Name function/Operation

2 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer. For the
USB cable, use a shielded cable.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type
cable.
4 Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to
malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118"
(3 m) in length.
5 Power plug

5. Operation panel
(5)
(4)
(3)
(7)
(6)
(1) (2)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations. When
a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an
operation.
2 [HOME Screen] button / indicator Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to enable quick
and easy operation of the machine.
3 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
4 [POWER] button Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
5 [POWER SAVE] button / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key blinks when the
machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
7 Fiery Key Touch this key to use Fiery Server Function.
NOTE: Fingers and static electricity pen can be used to operate the touch panel and keys on the panel.

6. Sensors and detectors
OCSW
MHPS
TFD3
TFD2 POD2 POD3
POD1 APPD1
PRTPD
DSW_ADU
DSW_FU FPFD
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
APPD2
PPD2
MPED
MPWD
TH2_LSU MPFD MPLD1
BD
TH1_LSU LPPD
T1LUD T1PPD1 T1PPD2
HUD_M/TH_M DSW_RL
T1PED T2PPD1
T2LUD
T2PED DSW_CS
T1SPD
T2SPD
TNDSET
C3LUD C3PFD
C3PED
C3SS1 C3SS2
C3SS3 C3SS4 C3SPD
C4LUD C4PFD WTBSET
C4PED
C4SS1 C4SS2
C4SS3 C4SS4
C4SPD WTFD
C4PWD
Tonner Hopper unit DV unit PS unit
TCS_K/C/M/Y
CIS
TFSD_K/C/M/Y PTD
PPD2
TH_PS
PDFS-S
PDFS-R
OPC DRUM unit Process registration

sensor unit
REGS_R/PCS_R
REGS_C/PCS_C
CCHPD_K/C/M/Y REGS_F/PCS_F
PTCCHPD

2nd Transfer unit
Main drive unit
2TBMD_R
DHPD_K/C/M/Y
DEDK(M/C/Y)_R
2TBMD_F
2TBMD_HP DEDK(M/C/Y)_L
Fuser unit CCMD_K/C/M/Y

POD1
TS_S
TS_M
TH_UM
TH_US1
FPFD
TS_L
HLPCD
TH_LM1
WEBEND2 TH_LM2

1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL) Light transmission Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode. (Detection is
made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK) Light transmission Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode. (1TUD_BK)
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
2TBMD_F 2nd transfer belt skew detector F Detects the edge of 2nd transfer belt F.
2TBMD_HP 2nd transfer belt skew correction motor Detects paper pass in the transport roller 21.
home position sensor.
2TBMD_R 2nd transfer belt skew detector R Detects the edge of 2nd transfer belt R.
APPD1 ADU paper pass detector 1 Light transmission Detects paper entry in the ADU section.
APPD2 ADU paper pass detector 2 Light transmission Detects paper pass in the transport roller 21.
BD Laser beam sensor Pin diode Detects laser beams.
C3LUD Paper upper limit detector Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 3)
C3PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 3) Light transmission Detects paper.
C3PFD Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 3) Light reflection Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray 3.
C3SPD Paper remaining quantity detector (Paper Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
feed tray 3)
C3SS1 - 4 Paper size detector (Paper feed tray 4) Tact switch Detects the paper size. Detects open/close of the paper feed tray.
C4LUD Paper upper limit detector Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 4)
C4PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 4) Light transmission Detects paper.
C4PFD Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 4) Light reflection Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray 4.
C4PWD Paper width sensor (Paper feed tray 4) Resistance volume Detects the paper width.
C4SPD Paper remaining quantity detector (Paper Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
feed tray 4)
C4SS1 - 4 Paper feed tray size detector Tact switch Detects the paper size. Detects open/close of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 4)
CCHPD_C MC cleaner HP sensor (C) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_C)
CCHPD_K MC cleaner HP sensor (K) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_K)
CCHPD_M MC cleaner HP sensor (M) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_M)
CCHPD_Y MC cleaner HP sensor (Y) Light transmission Detects the MC cleaner home position. (CCHP_Y)
CCMD_C MC cleaner shift sensor (C) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
CCMD_K MC cleaner shift sensor (K) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
CCMD_M MC cleaner shift sensor (M) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
CCMD_Y MC cleaner shift sensor (Y) Light transmission Detects the shift distance of the MC cleaner.
CIS Image position sensor Contact image sensor Detects the paper edge position in the off-center direction in the PS section.
DEDC_L DRUM encoder sensor (C_L) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.
DEDC_R DRUM encoder sensor (C_R) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.
DEDK_L DRUM encoder sensor (K_L) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.
DEDK_R DRUM encoder sensor (K_R) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.
DEDM_L DRUM encoder sensor (M_L) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.
DEDM_R DRUM encoder sensor (M_R) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.
DEDY_L DRUM encoder sensor (Y_L) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.
DEDY_R DRUM encoder sensor (Y_R) Light transmission Detects the drum rotation speed.

DHPD_C Drum phase sensor (C) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (C).
DHPD_K Drum phase sensor (K) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (K).
DHPD_M Drum phase sensor (M) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (M).
DHPD_Y Drum phase sensor (Y) Light transmission Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (Y).
DSW_ADU ADU open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the ADU section.
DSW_CS Transport cover open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the transport cover.
DSW_FU Front door upper open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the front door upper.
DSW_RL Right lower door open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the right lower door.
FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Light reflection Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Light transmission Detects the fusing pressure state.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensor Temperature/humidity Detects the temperature and the humidity. (For the process control)
sensor
LPPD LCC transport detector Light reflection Detects paper transport from the LCC.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Light transmission Detects the scanner home position.
MPED Paper empty detector Light transmission Detects paper.
(Manual paper feed tray)
MPFD Paper feed detector (Manual paper feed) Light transmission Detects paper pass in the manual paper feed section.
MPLD1 Paper length detector Light transmission Detects the paper length.
MPWD Paper width sensor Resistance volume Detects the paper width.
OCSW Document size detection trigger sensor Light transmission Generates the document size detection trigger signal.
PDFS-R Double feed sensor (receiving) Supersonic sensor Detects paper double feed.
PDFS-T Double feed sensor (transmitting) Supersonic sensor Detects paper double feed.
POD1 Fusing paper exit detector Light transmission Detects paper pass in the fusing section.
POD2 Left paper exit detector Light transmission Detects paper exit to the left direction.
POD3 Right paper exit detector Light transmission Detects paper exit to the left direction.
PPD1 Registration pre-detection Light reflection Detects the paper timing before registration.
PPD2 Registration sensor Light reflection Detects the paper registration timing.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector Light transmission Detects paper in the paper exit tray.
(Right paper exit tray)
PTCCHPD PTC cleaner home position sensor Light transmission Detects the PTC cleaner home position. (PTCHP)
PTD Paper Lead Edge detector Light transmission Detects paper lead edge after PS roller.
REGS_C/ Image registration/Density sensor (C) Light reflection Detects image color shift. Detects the toner patch density.
PCS_C
REGS_F/ Image registration/Density sensor (F) Light reflection Detects image color shift. Detects the toner patch density.
PCS_F
REGS_R/ Image registration/Density sensor (R) Light reflection Detects image color shift. Detects the toner patch density.
PCS R
T1LUD Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
tray 1)
T1PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 1) Light transmission Detects paper.
T1PPD1 Paper pass sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Light reflection Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray 1.
T1SPD Paper remaining quantity detector (Paper Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
feed tray 1)
T2LUD Paper upper limit detector (Paper feed Light transmission Detects the upper limit lift position of paper in the paper feed tray.
tray 2)
T2PED Paper empty detector (Paper feed tray 2) Light transmission Detects paper.
T2SPD Paper remaining quantity detector (Paper Light transmission Detects the paper remaining quantity.
feed tray 2)
TCS_C Toner density sensor (C) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (C).
TCS_K Toner density sensor (K) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (K).
TCS_M Toner density sensor (M) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (M).
TCS_Y Toner density sensor (Y) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (Y).
TFD2 Paper exit full detector (Center paper exit Light transmission Detects paper full in the center paper exit tray.
tray)
TFD3 Paper exit full detector (Right paper exit Light transmission Detects paper full in the right paper exit tray.
tray)
TFSD_C Toner remaining quantity sensor (C) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TFSD_K Toner remaining quantity sensor (K) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TFSD_M Toner remaining quantity sensor (M) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TFSD_Y Toner remaining quantity sensor (Y) Piezoelectric sensor Detects the remaining quantity of toner in the toner hopper.
TH_LM1 Fusing temperature sensor 1 Non-contact thermistor Detects the center surface temperature of the fusing roller B.
(Fusing roller B)
TH_LM2 Fusing temperature sensor 2 Contact-type thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing roller B.
(Fusing roller B)
TH_PS Transfer temperature thermistor Thermistor Detects the around temperature of the 1st transfer drive roller.(Used for
correction of color registration)
TH_UM Main fusing temperature sensor Non-contact thermistor Detects the center surface temperature of the fusing belt.
(Fusing belt)

TH_US1 Sub fusing temperature sensor Non-contact thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing belt.
(Fusing belt)
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor (Fusing belt) Contact-type thermistor Detects the edge surface temperature of the fusing belt.
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 Thermistor Detects the temperature in the LSU. (Used for correction of distortion.)
TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 Thermistor Detects the temperature in the LSU. (Used for correction of distortion.)
TNDSET Open/close detector Light transmission Detects open/close of the paper feed trays 1 and 2.
(Paper feed tray 1, 2)
WEBEND2 Web end detector 2 Light transmission Detects web end.
WTBSET Waste toner bottle detector Light transmission Detects installation of the waste toner bottle.
WTFD Waste toner full detector Light transmission Detects full of waste toner.

7. Switches

POW_SW
DSW_R
WH_SW
MSW
DSW_F

DSW_F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door. Opens/closes the power lines of the
fusing section, the motor, and the LSU laser. (DSW_FL)
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door. Opens/closes the power lines of the
fusing section, the motor, and the LSU laser.
MSW Main power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main power.
POW_SW Operation panel power switch Push switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.
WH_SW * Dehumidifier heater switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the power line of the dehumidifier heater.
*: Option

8. Clutches and solenoids
ADUGS
LSUSS_CL DVC_Y
1TURRC DVC_M
DVC_K DVC_C
MPGS PCSS
1TURC
T1PUS
MPFS
T1PUC
TTRC
PTRC2
MPUC T2PUS
T2PUC
C3PUS
C3PUC
C4PUS
C4PUC
PTRC1

1TURC Transfer mode select clutch (Forward rotation) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF of the transfer mode select cam forward rotation.
1TURRC Transfer mode select clutch (Reverse rotation) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF of the transfer mode select cam reverse rotation.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Selects the paper exit gate (ADU gate).
C3PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
C3PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 3) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
C4PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
C4PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 4) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
DVC_C DV clutch (C) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
DVC_K DV clutch (K) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
DVC_M DV clutch (M) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
DVC_Y DV clutch (Y) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the DV unit drive.
LSUSS_CL LSU shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
MPGS Paper feed gate solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the manual paper feed gate.
MPUC Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
PCSS Image density sensor shutter solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Opens/closes the shutter for the image density sensor.
PTRC1 Paper vertical transport clutch (Lower) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the lower section of the vertical
paper transport section.
PTRC2 Paper vertical transport clutch (Upper) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller in the upper section of the vertical
paper transport section.
T1PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
T1PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
T2PUC Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the paper feed section roller.
T2PUS Paper feed solenoid (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic solenoid Lifts the paper pickup roller.
TTRC Transport clutch (Paper feed tray 1, 2) Electromagnetic clutch Turns ON/OFF the transport roller of the paper feed tray 1.

9. Drive motors
PRM TNM_Y
LIAM Y TNM_M
MIM TNM_C
LIAM M TNHM_Y
TNHM_M
LIAM C TNM_K DM_Y
POM TNHM_C
LIAM BK TNHM_K DM_M
2TBM PGM
ADUM1
DM_C CCM_Y
FUM
WEBM2 DM_K CCM_M
BTM
CCM_C
PTCCM
RRM 2TUM CCM_K
PFM
ADUM2
CPFM T1LUM
LCCM
WTM
LCHM2
T2LUM
LCHM1
C3LUM
C4LUM

2TBM 2nd Transfer belt skew correction motor Stepping motor Correct the 2nd transfer belt skew
2TUM 2nd Transfer motor DC brush less motor Drives the 2nd transfer section.
ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Stepping motor Drives the ADU and the transport roller in the right paper exit section.
ADUM2 ADU motor 2 Stepping motor Drives the 1st transport roller in the ADU section.
BTM Transfer motor DC brush less motor Drives the transfer section.
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 3) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 4) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
CCM_C MC cleaning motor (C) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CCM_K MC cleaning motor (K) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CCM_M MC cleaning motor (M) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CCM_Y MC cleaning motor (Y) DC micro motor Slides the MC cleaner.
CPFM Paper feed motor DC brush less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM_C Drum motor C DC brush less motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
DM_K Drum motor K DC brush less motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
DM_M Drum motor M DC brush less motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
DM_Y Drum motor Y DC brush less motor Drives the OPC unit and the DV unit.
FUM Fusing motor DC brush less motor Drives the fusing section.
LCCM LCC paper entry motor Stepping motor LCC transport motor
LCHM1 LCC paper entry motor Stepping motor LCC transport motor
LCHM2 LCC paper entry motor Stepping motor LCC transport motor
LIAM BK LSU skew adjustment motor Stepping motor LSU skew adjustment
LIAM C LSU skew adjustment motor Stepping motor LSU skew adjustment
LIAM M LSU skew adjustment motor Stepping motor LSU skew adjustment
LIAM Y LSU skew adjustment motor Stepping motor LSU skew adjustment
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner unit. (scan, return operations)
PFM PS front transport motor Stepping motor Drives the registration roller.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush less motor Drives the LSU polygon mirror.
POM Paper exit motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section.

PRM Fusing pressure control motor Stepping motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing pressure.
PTCCM PTC cleaning motor DC micro motor Slides the PTC cleaner.
RRM Registration motor Stepping motor Drives the registration roller. (Controls the timing of the transfer
image for the paper.)
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2) DC brush motor Lifts the paper feed tray.
TNHM_C Tone hopper motor (C) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.
TNHM_K Tone hopper motor (K) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.
TNHM_M Tone hopper motor (M) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.
TNHM_Y Tone hopper motor (Y) Stepping motor Sends toner to the DV unit.
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Stepping motor Sends toner to the toner hopper.
WEBM2 Web motor Synchronous motor Winds the fusing web sheet.
WTM Waste toner motor DC brush less motor Transport waste toner.

10. Lamps
CLI CCFT
HL_UM/US/UW
HL_LM
DL2_Y
DL_Y
DL2_M
DL_M
DL2_C
DL_C
DL2_K
DL_K

CCFT LCD backlight LED Backlight for LCD.
CLI Scanner lamp LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL_C Discharge lamp 1 (C) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp 1 (K) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp 1 (M) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp 1 (Y) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL2_C Discharge lamp 2 (C) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
DL2_K Discharge lamp 2 (K) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
DL2_M Discharge lamp 2 (M) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
DL2_Y Discharge lamp 2 (Y) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum immediately after transfer operation.
HL_LM Heater lamp (B) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US/UW Heater lamp (F) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.

11. Gates

1 Reverse gate Discharges paper to the right tray or selects the switch-back transport route to the ADU section.
2 Paper exit gate (ADU gate) Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.

12. Heater
WH_S1
WH_LSU
WH_TND
WH_CS3
WH_CS3
Signal name Name Function/Operation

WH_CS3 * Paper heater (Paper feed tray 4) Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
degraded image quality and paper jams.
WH_LSU * LSU heat-retention heater Dehumidifies the LSU section to prevent it from dew condensation.
WH_S1 * Scanner heat-retention heater Dehumidifies the scanner section to prevent it from dew condensation.
WH_TND * Paper dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which causes
(Paper feed tray 1, 2) degraded image quality and paper jams.
*: Option

13. Fans
POFM2_F
VFM_BA
POFM_F
POFM2_R
ADUFM_F POFM_EX
POFM_R OZFM3
ADUFM_R TBFM
FPRFM_F
POFM2_EX
LSUFM
FPRFM_R FUFM
OZFM2
OZFM1
MFPFM
HDDFM
PSFM2
PSFM1

ADUFM_F ADU cooling fan (F) Cools the ADU paper transport section.
ADUFM_R ADU cooling fan (R) Cools the ADU paper transport section.
FPRFM_F Fusing cooling fan (F) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FPRFM_R Fusing cooling fan (R) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section.
HDDFM HDD cooling fan Cools the HDD.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU.
MFPFM MFP cooling fan Cools the surrounding of the MFP PWB.
OZFM1 Ozone fan motor 1 Discharges ozone generated in the process section.
POFM_EX Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan (F) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan (R) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM2_EX Paper exit cooling fan2 Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM2_F Paper exit cooling fan2 (F) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM2_R Paper exit cooling fan2 (R) Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
PSFM1 Power cooling fan 1 Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan 2 Cools the power unit.
TBFM Toner bottle cooling fan motor Toner cooling fan motor
VFM_BA Machine ventilation fan BA Ventilates air in the machine.

14. Filter
1 1
1
1
4
3

1 Toner filter Prevents toner from splashing from the DV unit.
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
3 Toner filter Absorbs floating toner in the image process section.
4 Deodorant filter Absorbs odor generated in the fusing section.

15. PWB/Memory device
28 1 2
4
5
3
27 6
29
26 9
25
35
8
10
36
24
30 11
23 12
22 13
34
14 31 32
15
16
17
21
19
18
20
33

1 TP-IF PWB PWB Controls the touch panel.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal.
3 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal.
4 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
5 Scanner lamp drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
6 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection.
7 HL control PWB Drives the heater lamp.
8 SCN Mother PWB Process image data, controls the overall scanner, and controls the operation section. Interfaces the
MFP PWB and the operation PWB, the PCU PWB, the LSU PWB, and the FAX unit.
9 TC1 PWB (High voltage TC1 PWB) Generates the primary transfer voltage.
10 MC PWB (High voltage MC PWB) Generates the main charger voltage and the DV bias voltage.
11 Paper feed tray detection PWB (Paper feed tray 1) Opens/closes the paper feed tray and detects paper.
12 SUB AC POWER PWB Controls the power of the heater lamp drive circuit. AC cord 2 power monitor signal (FW signal output).
(Only in the 2-power plug system models)
13 SUB DC POWER PWB Supplies power for the Option, MFP and Scanner.
14 AC power PWB Controls the primary side power.
15 Paper size detection PWB (Paper feed tray 3) Detects the paper size.

16 Paper size detection PWB (Paper feed tray 4) Detects the paper size.
17 MAIN DC POWER PWB Supplies the power for the machine.
18 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
19 Driver PWB Drives the motors.
20 TC2 PWB (High voltage TC2 PWB) Generates the secondary transfer voltage.
21 Paper feed tray detection PWB (Paper feed tray 2) Opens/closes the paper feed tray and detects paper.
22 MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression, decompression, and filing), and controls the whole machine.
23 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
24 Right door interface PWB Interfaces the signals of the sensors in the paper transport section.
25 LD PWB Drives the laser diode and controls the power.
26 LSU PWB Controls the LSU.
27 HM-KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
28 PW-KEY PWB Power display lamp
29 USB I/F PWB USB interface
30 HDD Stores the MFP PWB program data, the filing data, the e-manual data, the watermark data, the log data,
and the authentication data. Also used as a work area.
31 Flash PWB1 Stores ASIC1 program data.
32 Flash PWB2 Stores ASIC2 program data.
33 mSATA SSD Stores MFP PWB program data, snapshot, e-manual data and log data.
34 LCHM Drive PWB 1/2 Drives LCHM motor 1/2
35 PED cis PWB Detects the paper edge
36 Double feed detection PWB Detects double feed of paper

16. Fuses and thermostats
SUB AC POWER PWB

DC POWER PWB
F3
F4
F2
F1
MAIN / SUB
DC POWER PWB
F101
F102
MAIN
DC POWER PWB
F605
F604
F603
F602
F601
TS S
TS M
TS L
Fuses
Type
Signal name Name 200V series 200V series Location
(North America) (Other than North America)
F1 Fuse 20A 250V T10AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F2 Fuse – T10AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F3 Fuse T2AH 250V T2AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F4 Fuse – T2AH 250V AC POWER PWB
F101 Fuse MAIN DC POWER PWB: 15A 250V / SUB DC POWER PWB: 12A 250V DC Power PWB
F102 Fuse 2A 250V DC Power PWB
F601 Fuse 6.3A 250V DC Power PWB
Thermostats
TS L Thermostat L Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS M Thermostat M Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM/HL_UW) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS S Thermostat S Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.

17. Rollers
60 59 52 51 62 61
53
54
49
50
56
55
58
47 57
48 27
45 25
46 26
38 24
37
22
23
20 40
21 39
28
17 42
18 41
19 44
43
13
14 36
15 35
16
34
33
32
31
7 8 9 1 2 3 5 4 6 29 30 11 10 12

1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray to the transport roller 2.
5 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
6 Transport roller 2 Transports paper to the transport roller 9.
22 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport roller 13.

24 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
25 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
26 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
27 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transport paper fed from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 16.
39 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the LCC to the transport roller 15.
45 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller.
47 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts the relative position
between images and paper.
48 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
paper.
49 Transport roller 18 (Drive) Transports paper to the paper exit section.
51 Transport roller 19 (Drive) Transports paper to the right paper exit section or the ADU section.
59 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper to the left side.
60 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to
paper.
61 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper to the right side.
62 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to
paper.

MX-8090N
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with a Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however,
specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number must be
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would not
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current/voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Print engine image distortion 3A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Automatic adjustment) / OPC drum phase adjustment 50-22
adjustment / OPC drum (Automatic adjustment) / Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
phase adjustment / Color 3B Print engine image skew (LSU skew) adjustment (Manual adjustment) 50-20
registration adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
(Print engine section) 3C Color registration offset adjustment (No need to adjust normally) 50-20
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (Document table 4B Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
mode) 4C Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew 5A DSPF parallelism adjustment
adjustment (DSPF mode) 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF front surface mode) 48-1
adjustment 6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 7/ Color balance/density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
7A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
SET Color balance 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup 63-7/8/11
1 adjustment target 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup 67-26/27/28
setup
7B Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (Basic adjustment) 46-74
7C Copy quality 7C Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 46-24
adjustment (Basic (1)
adjustment) 7C Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21
(2)
7D Copy / Image send / 7D Color copy density adjustment (for each color copy mode) (separately 46-1
FAX image quality (1) for the low-density area and the high-density area) (No need to adjust
adjustment normally)
(Individual 7D Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy 46-2
adjustment) (2) mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area)
(No need to adjust normally)
7D Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment (for each color copy 46-10
(3) mode) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment (for each monochrome 46-16
(4) copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density 46-19
(5) scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally no
need to set)
7D Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the 46-32
(6) automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust
normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
7D Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) 46-63
(7) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Color copy, text, line image reproduction adjustment (edge gamma, 46-27
(8) density adjustment) (Text, Map mode) (No need to adjust normally)
7D Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction 46-37
(9) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
7D Color copy mode dark area gradation (black component quantity) 46-38
(10) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
7D Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness adjustment 46-60
MX-8090N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 7/ Color balance/density 7D Copy / Image send / 7D Copy high density image density reproduction setting 46-23
SET1 adjustment FAX image quality (12) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
adjustment 7D Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) 46-25
(Individual (13) (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 7D DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment 46-9
7D Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for each dither (Automatic 46-54
(15) adjustment)
7D Dropout color adjustment (Normally not required) 46-55
(16)
7D Watermark adjustment (Normally not required) 46-66
(17)
7E Printer image 7E Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 67-24
quality adjustment (1)
(Basic adjustment) 7E Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
(2)
7F Printer image 7F Printer density adjustment (Low density section density adjustment) (No 67-36
quality adjustment (1) need to adjust normally)
(Individual 7F Printer high density image density reproduction setting (Supporting the 67-34
adjustment) (2) high density section tone gap) (No need to adjust normally)
7F Printer gamma adjustment for each dither 67-54
(3) (Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
ADJ 8 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 9 DSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 10 Document size detection 10A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
adjustment
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 12 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 13 Print image manual 13A Print image manual magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Print engine) 50-10
magnification ratio, area, 13B Print image manual area adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) (Print engine) 50-10 / 50-1
position adjustment (Manual 13C Print image manual position adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction) (Print 50-10
adjustment) engine) (Each paper feed tray)
13D Paper feed off-center manual adjustment (Manual paper feed unit) (MX-MF11) (Mechanical 50-10
adjustment)
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification 14A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document 48-1
ratio adjustment table mode)
(Manual adjustment) 14B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document 48-1
table mode)
14C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF mode)
14D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(DSPF mode)
ADJ 15 Scan image off-center 15A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment 15B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 50-12 / 50-6
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ 16 Copy image position and 16A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table 50-1
image loss adjustment mode)
(Manual adjustment) 16B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 53-8
16C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 17 Finisher and punch unit adjustments (alignment, punch hole position, staple position) 3-10
ADJ 18 DSPF CCD calibration 18A Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-2
18B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (DSPF mode) 63-3
ADJ 19 DSPF back surface color balance exposure adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-9
ADJ 20 FR density variation 20A FR density uniformity auto correction (32 point adjustment for all colors) 61-11
correction 20B FR density uniformity visual inspection (CMYK 5 point adjustment or CMYK 32point adjustment) 61-12

3. Details of adjustment 3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.70mm in between 40mm - 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit

70mm
40mm
1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low. 70mm
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. 40mm
* The toner is excessively dispersed.

1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove the
developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor cover.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten the
fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar proce-
dure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
2
1
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm from
the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of 0.70 +/
- 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
40mm
70mm
40mm

Note for use of a thickness gauge 5) Measure the distance between the marking position and position
• Do not insert the gauge diagonally. A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 46.4 +/-
0.5mm.
• The gauge must pass freely.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing
• The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller main pole position in the following procedures.
roller oscillation.
Marked point (A) on the drive side (left side) of the MG roller.
A 46.4 + 0.5mm
46.4 + 0.5mm
1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole 6) Loosen the fixing screw of the developing roller main pole adjust-
position ment plate in the rear side of the developing unit, and move the
adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing
unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing roller.
(Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not provide a
correct position.) Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the position comes to the specified range.
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller sur- 7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller main
face. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.) pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjustment plate
with the fixing screw.
2㹼3mm

1-C Toner density control reference value setting ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment
* When developer is replaced.
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
* When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
2) Close the front cabinet.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The develop-
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
ing roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner den-
sity, and the output value is displayed. 2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the
scroll key.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the average
value of the toner density sensor detection level is set (saved) as 3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
the reference toner density control value. mode and press [OK] key.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation is Default value
completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. This Item/Display
Content Setting 70cpm 80cpm
makes known about whether the adjustment operation is com- (mode)
range machine machine
pleted or not. MID A MIDDLE K charging/grid 150-950 625 630
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed mode DLE SPEED bias set value at
and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner density con- GB_K middle speed
trol value is set for each of them. B MIDDLE C charging/grid 150-950 625 630
SPEED bias set value at
CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjust- GB_C middle speed
ment result is not reflected. C MIDDLE M charging/grid 150-950 625 630
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the oper- SPEED bias set value at
ation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal GB_M middle speed
display. D MIDDLE Y charging/grid 150-950 625 630
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the
GB_Y middle speed
reference toner density control value is not completed nor-
LOW A LOW1 K charging/grid 150-950 608
mally. SPEED bias set value at
GB_K low speed 1
Error
Error name Detail of error B LOW1 C charging/grid 150-950 608
display
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level: 0.99V or below. If not, GB_C low speed 1
Control voltage: 8.0V or above.
C LOW1 M charging/grid 150-950 608
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level: 2.28V or above. If not, SPEED bias set value at
Control voltage: 2.0V or below. GB_M low speed 1
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 1.65V +/- D LOW1 Y charging/grid 150-950 608
0.04V SPEED bias set value at
GB_Y low speed 1
CAUTION: When replacing developer, always replace all the three col-
E LOW2 K charging/grid 150-950 604
ors of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be GB_K low speed 2
adversely affected. Black developer can be replaced indi- F LOW2 C charging/grid 150-950 604
vidually. SPEED bias set value at
GB_C low speed 2
CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-
G LOW2 M charging/grid 150-950 604
2.
CAUTION: During execution of this adjustment, do not insert the toner GB_M low speed 2
cartridge. H LOW2 Y charging/grid 150-950 604
CAUTION: When SIM25-2 is executed with a toner cartridge inserted, GB_Y low speed 2
"Toner Check" is displayed to disable the execution button.
In this case, remove the toner cartridge and execute Remark:
SIM25-2 again. Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is output-
ted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX

The default values specified for each model must be changed as fol-
lows:

65cpm machine: + 0 Setting Default
Button Item Display Content
75cpm machine: + 5 range value
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce- LOW A LOW1 K developing bias set 0 - 600 450
SPEED value at low speed 1
dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
DVB_K
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped. B LOW1 C developing bias set 0 - 600 450
CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the DVB_C
MC high voltage power PWB. C LOW1 M developing bias set 0 - 600 450
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC DVB_M
high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to D LOW1 Y developing bias set 0 - 600 450
check the adjustment value. SPEED value at low speed 1
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable DVB_Y
to put down the adjustment value in advance. E LOW2 K developing bias set 0 - 600 450
DVB_K
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
F LOW2 C developing bias set 0 - 600 450
speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the other
modes are automatically set according to the middle speed DVB_C
mode setting in a certain relationship. G LOW2 M developing bias set 0 - 600 450
CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a SPEED value at low speed 2
digital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the output DVB_M
must be made by checking the print image quality. H LOW2 Y developing bias set 0 - 600 450
DVB_Y
2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage
Remark:
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is output-
* When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
ted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. attached to the MC high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and the
scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode and press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing bias set 0 - 600 450
SPEED value at middle speed
DVB_K
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX
B MIDDLE C developing bias set 0 - 600 450
SPEED value at middle speed When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the proce-
DVB_C dure 3) is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is saved.
C MIDDLE M developing bias set 0 - 600 450 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
SPEED value at middle speed
DVB_M CAUTION: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the
D MIDDLE Y developing bias set 0 - 600 450 MC high voltage power PWB.
SPEED value at middle speed Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
DVB_Y high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to
check the adjustment value.
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable
to put down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle

speed mode is set, the adjustment values of the other
modes are automatically set according to the middle speed
mode setting in a certain relationship.
CAUTION: Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a
digital multi meter in this model, a judgment of the output
must be made by checking the print image quality.

2-C Transfer current/voltage adjustment
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
* When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Secondary
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.
transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified voltage
is outputted.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A TC1 LOW 1 CL K Primary transfer bias reference value Color K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
B TC1 LOW 2 CL K Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
C TC1 MIDDLE CL K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
D TC1 LOW 1 CL C C Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
E TC1 LOW 2 CL C Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
F TC1 MIDDLE CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 99
G TC1 LOW 1 CL M M Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
H TC1 LOW 2 CL M Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
I TC1 MIDDLE CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 99
J TC1 LOW 1 CL Y Y Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
K TC1 LOW 2 CL Y Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
L TC1 MIDDLE CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 99
M TC1 LOW 1 BW K Black and K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
N TC1 LOW 2 BW K white Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
O TC1 MIDDLE BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
P TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias reference value Color Standard paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 145
Q TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
R TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
S TC2 PLAIN BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
T TC2 PLAIN2 CL SPX Color Standard paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 145
U TC2 PLAIN2 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
V TC2 PLAIN2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
W TC2 PLAIN2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
X TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 110
Y TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
Z TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AA TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AB TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 110
AC TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
AD TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AE TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AF TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 3 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AG TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AH TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AI TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AJ TC2 HEAVY4 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 4 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AK TC2 HEAVY4 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AL TC2 HEAVY4 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AM TC2 HEAVY4 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AN TC2 OHP CL Color OHP Front surface 0 - 255 110
AO TC2 OHP BW <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AP TC2 ENVELOPE CL Black and Envelope Front surface 0 - 255 83
AQ TC2 ENVELOPE BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 83
AR TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper Front surface 0 - 255 138
AS TC2 THIN BW <Middle speed> Back surface 0 - 255 138
AT TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL Black and Glossy paper Front surface 0 - 255 110
AU TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AV TC2 EMBOSS CL Color Embossed paper Front surface 0 - 255 96
AW TC2 EMBOSS BW <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 80
AX TC2 LABEL CL Black and Label paper <Low Front surface 0 - 255 110
AY TC2 LABEL BW white speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AZ TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer front edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BA TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 145
BB TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BC TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
BD TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BE TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145

Setting Default
range value
BF TC2 BACKEND LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer rear edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BG TC2 BACKEND LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 69
BH TC2 BACKEND LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BI TC2 BACKEND LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BJ TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BK TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BL TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 1 Secondary transfer cleaning negative In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 76
BM TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 2 bias reference value In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 76
BN TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 76
BO TC2 INTERVAL LOW 1 Bias reference value between papers In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 72
BP TC2 INTERVAL LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 72
BQ TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 72
BR TC2 COUNTER LOW 1 Counter bias reference value In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 72
BS TC2 COUNTER LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 72
BT TC2 COUNTER MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 72
BU PTC LOW 1 CL PTC current reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BV PTC LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BW PTC MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 119
BX PTC LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BY PTC LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BZ PTC MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 119
CA PTC EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 187
CB CASE VOLT LOW 1 CL PTC case voltage reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CC CASE VOLT LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CD CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CE CASE VOLT LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CF CASE VOLT LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CG CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CH CASE VOLT EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CI TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 CL Secondary transfer drive roller bias Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CJ TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 CL reference value Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CK TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 98
CL TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CM TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CN TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 98

ADJ 3 Print engine image distortion 3-A Print engine image distortion adjustment
(Automatic adjustment) / OPC drum phase
adjustment / OPC drum phase adjustment (Automatic adjustment) /
adjustment / Color registration Color registration adjustment
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Print engine section) This adjustment performs the print engine image distortion adjustment,
the OPC drum phase adjustment, and the color registration adjust-
ment simultaneously.
* When the color shift occurs.
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.
* When the LSU is replaced.
* When the LSU is removed from the main unit. Auto adjustment of registration&drum position
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed. MAIN F MAIN R SUB SKEW
C 105.0( 0.2) 110.0( -0.1) 103.0( 0.4) -14.5

* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the OPC M 100.0( 0.0) 110.0( -0.2) 99.0( 0.2) -14.5
drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.) Y 98.0( 0.3) 98.0( 0.1) 105.0( 0.0) -14.5
* When ADJ13A Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment ALL_ROTATE -11.0
(BK) (main scanning direction) is performed.

* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the color phase is not proper even after execution of the color
balance adjustment.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
1/ 2
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced. (when it is removed from
the machine) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the developing unit or the OPC drum unit is removed from the [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto-
machine. matic adjustment is started. (It takes about 15 sec to complete the
adjustment.)
3) When the adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display, and the value of the adjustment result is dis-
played.
The current skew level for each color is displayed on the SKEW
display section.
Display/
Content Display NOTE
Item
MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan laser writing position F side) 1.0 - 399.0 Same item with SIM
M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta laser writing position F side) 1.0 - 399.0 50-20.
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow laser writing position F side) 1.0 - 399.0 * However, the
( ) Registration value correction amount from the previous one, main scanning F -399.0 - 399.0(±0.1) adjustment
accuracy is in the
MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Cyan laser writing position R side) 1.0 - 399.0
unit of +/-0.1dot.
M Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Magenta laser writing position R side) 1.0 - 399.0
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning direction (Yellow laser writing position R side) 1.0 - 399.0
( ) Registration value correction amount from the previous one, main scanning R -399.0 - 399.0(±0.1)
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Cyan drum to Black drum) 1.0 - 399.0
M Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Magenta drum to Black drum) 1.0 - 399.0
Y Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction (Yellow drum to Black drum) 1.0 - 399.0
( ) Registration value correction amount from the previous one, sub scanning -399.0 - 399.0(±0.1)
SKEW C Print skew amount calculation result (Cyan) -99.9 - +99.9
M Print skew amount calculation result (Magenta) -99.9 - +99.9
Y Print skew amount calculation result (Yellow) -99.9 - +99.9
ALL_ Skew adjustment rotating direction and the number of dot (K) -99.9 - +99.9
ROTATE
START Modulation control start position 0 - 359 1 step 1degree
( ): Previous value
AMP1 Modulation control amplitude value 0.00 - 15.00
( ): Previous value
AMP2 Modulation control amplitude value 0.00 - 15.00
( ): Previous value
PHASE1 Modulation phase adjustment value 0 - 359
( ): Previous value
PHASE2 Modulation phase adjustment value 0 - 359
( ): Previous value
PHASE/K Tandem phase adjustment value 0 - 359
( ): Previous value
POSITION Drum phase position value 0 - 359
( ): Previous value

5) Enter OFFSET_SKEW_K value and press [EXECUTE] key.
3-B Print engine image skew (LSU skew)
Reference adjustment value.
adjustment (Manual adjustment)
In case Method 1
C-D = 0.1mm/+3
If a more accurate adjustment than the automatic adjustment ADJ3-A
In case Method 2
is required, use this method of adjustment.
If there's skew in A direction; 0.1mm/+5
This adjustment is made by changing the parallelism of the LSU unit
scan laser beams for the OPC drum. If there's skew in B direction; 0.1mm/-5
* ADJ3-A needs to be done before this adjustment. NOTE: If "OFFSET_SKEW_K" value is changed too much,
1) Enter the SIM 61-4 mode. there's a possibility that the color image skew can't be
adjusted.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it, and
press [EXECUTE] key. 6) The image skew (image registration) adjustment pattern is
printed.
3) The image skew (image registration) adjustment pattern is
printed. Repeat the procedures 4) to 5) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
7) If a satisfactory result of black image skew was obtained, Enter
Use the four cross points printed in black to measure the square-
the SIM50-22 mode and try ADJ3-A.
ness.
8) To check the color image skew, repeat the procedure 1) to 3) and
There are following two methods of checking the black image for
print the image skew (image registration).
any skew (right angle).
9) Check the scale value of the most high density position of image
Method 1
skew (image registration) adjustment pattern and adjust the differ-
Measure the distances between opposing corners of the rectangle ence between F side and R side.
print pattern, and compare the two distances to check the square-
The reference of adjustment amount : (pattern F value) - (pattern
ness.
R value).
Method 2
Check the squareness of the vertical and horizontal sides of the
rectangle print pattern by using A3 or 11" x 17" paper sides.
CAUTION: In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper SKEWadjustmentpatternR
j p
to be used in advance.
A B
Diagonal
LineC Diagonal
Diagonal
LineD
About220mm
SKEWadjustmentpatternF
10) Input the adjustment values into OFFSET_SKEW_C/M/Y and

press the [EXECUTE] Key.
11) The image skew (image registration) adjustment pattern is
printed.
Repeat the procedures 9) to 10) until a satisfactory result is
About300mm
obtained.
Method 1
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print pat-
tern.
Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and D
of the diagonal lines.
Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the fol-
lowing range.
C - D = 0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there is
no need to adjust.
Method 2
Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the rectan-
gle print pattern.
Measure the slant (skew) of the vertical side for the horizontal
side of paper as shown in the figure.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to adjust.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following proce-
dure.

4) Check the color image registration.
3-C Color registration offset adjustment
There are 6 color image registration patterns in total; two on each
(No need to adjust normally) of the F side, the R side, and the center and adjust them checking
This adjustment is used to set the offset value for the automatic color each pattern.
registration adjustment (ADJ3-A). The vertical direction in the above figure is that in the main scan-
If there is any difference in color phase at the center and the four cor- ning direction, and the horizontal direction is that in the sub scan-
ners of an actual print image, this adjustment may improve it. Espe- ning direction.
cially when there is any color shift at the center area, this adjustment These are each adjustment values and the check pattern for
may improve it effectively. check.
This adjustment cannot eliminate color shifts in all the areas, but aver-
age the overall color shifts. Adjustment Value Check pattern
After the automatic adjustment, use this color registration offset adjust- OFFSET_*_F Front pattern 1/2
ment to correct color shift partially, performing the adjustment effi- OFFSET_*_R Rear pattern 1/2
ciently. OFFSET_*_SUB All pattern 1/2 *1
NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the *1 To adjust with the center area most focused, adjust so that the
ADJ3-A has been properly made. color shift at the center becomes smaller than that on the F side
and the R side.
[Kinds of adjustment values]
㻯㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㼕㼙㼍㼓㼑㻌㼟㼔㼕㼒㼠㻌㼏㼔㼑㼏㼗㻌㼟㼏㼍㼘㼑㻌
There are following two kinds of registration adjustment values. 㻔㻿㼡㼎㻌㼟㼏㼍㼚㼚㼕㼚㼓㻌㻌㼐㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕
• Base registration adjustment value: XXX(FRONT)/XXX(REAR)/
XXX(SUB)
㻵㼙㼍㼓㼑㻌㼟㼔㼕㼒㼠㻌㼒㼕㼚㼑㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌
They are manual adjustment values and automatic adjustment val- 㼞㼑㼒㼑㼞㼑㼚㼏㼑㻌㼒㼞㼍㼙㼑
㼒㼒
ues, and reflected when the automatic registration adjustment is
imageshiftcheckscale(Main
executed. It varies for every operation of the automatic registration
adjustment.
To keep the manual correction value, SIM44-1 [AR_AUTO] needs scanningdirrection)
to be set "prohibition setting".

• Offset adjustment values: OFFSET_*_F/R/SUB
This is the offset value which is added to the base adjustment value
above, and they aren't changed unless they are adjusted in SIM50-
20.
1) Enter SIM50-20 mode. Adjust the most high density position of the check patterns in
order to be stayed in the color registration adjustment standard
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it.
frame of center.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(Adjust the center of the most high density position to scale 0)
The color image registration check pattern is printed.
To make the whole shift small averagely and to adjust the shift of
each pattern equally.
Example) In case if the pattern 1 is adjust to the scale 0, the
image of pattern 2 shift to opposite direction.
㻾㼑㼍㼞㼜㼍㼠㼠㼑㼞㼚㻞 Rearpattern 㻝

Reference adjustment value:1 scale / 2 adjustment value
If the most high density position is at +10 (The 5th scale), input
㻹㻭㻵㻺㼐㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
the adjustment value -10 from the current value.
㻿㼁㻮
㼐㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻯㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞㼜㼍㼠㼠㼑㼞㼚㻞
㻯㼑㼚㼠㼑㼞㻌㼜㼍㼠㼠㼑㼞㼚 Center pattern 㻝
Centerpattern㻝
㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌㼜㼍㼠㼠㼑㼞㼚㻞 Frontpattern㻝

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame side
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion of the scanner unit B.
adjustment
(Document table mode)
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment

Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table glass.
1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are fix-
ing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scanner
unit A from the drive wire.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side of
the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers on the
front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the edge
of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and fix the
scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner unit
B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the
front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front frame
4-B Scan image (main scanning direction) side.
distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below. (Draw
a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
L scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the right
and the left heights of the scanner rail.
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. 6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is com- 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document
pleted.) table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the
distortion in the main scanning direction is within the specified
range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ4C Scan image distortion adjust-
ment (whole scanner unit).
4-C Scan image distortion adjustment

(Whole scanner unit)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform adjusted with ADJ4A and ADJ4B related to the scan image distortion
the following procedure. adjustment.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand and Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
right-hand side images distortions. adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the scan
image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of the whole
Lc Lc scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
A A A
A

When the front frame side is higher (there is a clearance in B):
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment Turn the height adjustment screw R of the DSPF rear frame clock-
wise.
(DSPF mode)
When the rear frame side is higher (clearance A is more than
1mm): Turn the height adjustment screw L of the DSPF rear frame
5-A DSPF parallelism adjustment counterclockwise.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Repeat steps 2) to 3) until an acceptable result is obtained.
* The DSPF section has been disassembled. 4) After adjustments of A and B, check to insure that the projection
* The DSPF unit has been replaced. on the front right side is in contact with the glass surface of the
* When a DSPF JAM is generated. main unit.
* When a skew is generated in the document feed operation.
* When there is a distortion (skew) in the scan image in the DSPF
unit.
1) Close the DSPF unit and check the clearance between the projec-
tions in the front side and the rear side and the SPF glass holding
resin surface.
5-B DSPF skew adjustment

(Front surface mode)
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
2) Visually check to insure that the clearance A is 1mm or less and Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the duplex
the clearance B is 0mm (in contact). print mode.
If the above requirement is not met, do step 3). SIM64-2 set value
A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with the
paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to the
leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and back
1mm
sides of the paper.
A
A Paper pass direction
0mm
B
3) Turn the height adjustment screw to adjust the DSPF front/rear
frame horizontal level.

2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") 4) Open the DSPF and loosen the screw.
paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for skews
(Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the adjustment
chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
5) Adjust by turning the DSPF skew adjusting screw on the right side
a b
of the DSPF rear frame.
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0mm.
0 - 1.0mm
A
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the left]
If a < b, then turn counterclockwise the DSPF skew
adjusting screw.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the right]
If a > b, then turn clockwise the DSPF skew adjusting screw.
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
5-C DSPF skew adjustment

If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the back
surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) of (Back surface mode)
"ADJ5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)." This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side, * The DSPF section has been disassembled.
then do step 3). * When replacing the DSPF unit.
3) Loosen the hinge screws and lower the two attachments. * The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Make an adjustment chart.
Print the self print pattern (grid pattern) of SIM64-2 in the duplex
ĭ print mode.
SIM64-2 set value
Ĭ A=1, B=1, C=254, D=255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with the
paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to the
leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and back
sides of the paper.

3) Open the upper door, and remove the adjustment cover.
A Paper pass direction
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for skews
(Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the adjustment
chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
4) Turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw on the CCD unit to adjust.
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| ± 1 mm
C D
c d
A B
[Check Method 2]
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction print
line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within 1.0mm.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the left]
0 - 1.0mm If c < d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A
counterclockwise, or turn the adjustment screw B clockwise.
[When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the right]
If c > d, turn the DSPF skew adjustment screw A clockwise,
A or turn the adjustment screw B counterclockwise.
* The adjustment screws A and B must be turned in proper bal-
ance. For example, if the trouble is not removed by turning the
adjustment screw A 180 degrees clockwise, do not turn the
adjustment screw A furthermore, but turn the adjustment screw
B 180 degrees counterclockwise.
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the front
surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) of
"ADJ5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)."
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the
procedures of step 3) or later.

9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment CCD unit base as shown below.
6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table

mode/DSPF front surface mode)
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. NOTE: This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below. is replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.

Go to the copy mode, and make a copy. NOTE: Never loosen the screws marked with X.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and
length in terms of length. the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
scanning direction from the following formula. case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
(Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100% direction) to change the installing position.
(Example) When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the copy CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter than
image. the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction ratio = One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
(100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1 At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the scale
on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in
procedure 9).
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
1.0mm
B
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than
the original)
A
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the fol- 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
lowing procedures.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/- 0.5%,
7) Remove the document table glass. repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
8) Remove the dark box cover.

NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification ratio is CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter than
adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%) and the the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
structure. At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the scale
on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked in
6-B Image focus adjustment procedure 4).
(DSPF back surface mode)
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper is
satisfactorily focused.
If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following steps.
3) Open the door. Remove the screws, and remove the transport PG
upper. A
7) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.

If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 +/- 0.5%,
repeat the procedures of 4) - 6) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation
48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification ratio is
adjusted within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%) and the
specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system
structure.
4) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
5) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws (4 pcs.).
* Never loosen the screws marked with ✕.

Loosening these screws could possibly change the CCD unit
base optical axis. Once the optical axis has been changed, it
cannot be corrected through on-site adjustments. Solving such
a problem requires the replacement of the entire scanner unit.
6) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.

(3) Copy color balance and density check
ADJ 7 Color balance/density CAUTION: Before checking the copy color balance and density, be
adjustment sure to execute the following jobs.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forc-
(1) Note before execution of the color balance/density
ibly. (SIM 44-6)
adjustment
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
* Requisite conditions before execution of the color balance/density
adjustment Method 1
Before execution of the color balance/density adjustment, check to Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy of
insure that the adjustments which affect the color balance/density the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11),
have been completed properly. and check that they are proper.
The importance levels of them are shown below. a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check
in the color copy mode
Since the following items affect the color balance/density
directly, they must be adjusted or set before execution of the To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
image quality adjustments. chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make
Job a copy.
Adjustment item Simulation
No At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user
ADJ 3 Print engine image distortion adjustment / OPC drum 50-20/22 adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
phase adjustment / Color registration adjustment In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
(Print engine section)
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
Though the following items affect the color balance/density, there To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-
is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a trouble 0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/
occurs, they must be checked and adjusted. Printed Photo mode (Manual).
1) The following items must be adjusted properly. In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
Job
Adjustment item Simulation Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
No
ADJ 1 Adjust the ADJ Adjust the developing In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure the
developing unit 1A doctor gap following conditions.
ADJ Adjust the developing CAUTION: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
1B roller main pole position
chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
ADJ Toner density control 25-2
1C reference value setting (Color copy)
Patch 1 is
ADJ 2 High voltage ADJ Adjust the main charger 8-2 slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
adjustment 2A grid voltage SHARP GRAY CHART

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
ADJ Adjust the developing 8-1
2B bias voltage
ADJ Transfer current/voltage 8-6
2C adjustment
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 48-1 Patch 2 is copied.
Note for the color balance/density check and adjustments (Black-and-white copy)
• For the color balance adjustments, be sure to use the paper speci- Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
fied for color (recommended paper). SHARP GRAY CHART

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Note that, if another kind of paper is used for the color balance
adjustment, proper image qualities (color balance, density) may not
be obtained.
• When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in the
Patch 3 is copied.
automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5 sheets of
Patch 1 is not copied.
white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to prevent back copy-
ing and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far as possible.
Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/
(2) Relationship between the servicing job contents and the UKOG-0326FC11)
color balance/density check and adjustment
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the color balance/den- check to insure the following conditions.
sity check and adjustment depend on the machine status and the ser-
(Color copy)
vicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the color balance/density adjustment proce- Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
dures depending on the actual conditions.

There are following four, major cases.
1) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
2) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
3) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed. (Without The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly
replacement of a consumable part) each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.

Color copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) The color difference in gray balance between the F and the R
2) Registrations (one point for the main scanning, and one point for sides is not so great.
the sub scanning) are not shifted. 5) There are no white and black streaks.
3) The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) can be seen. 6) Color texts are clearly reproduced.
7) The background density is not so light.
Void Void
Resolution Resolution
Color difference in gray balance between the F and the R sides

No white and black streaks
Background density
Resolution Registration
Void Void
Color text reproduction capability

Resolution
Resolution
Void Void

Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) There are no white and black streaks.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen. 5) The background density is not so light.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so 6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
great.
Void Void
Density difference between the F and the R sides.

No white and black streaks
Resolution
Void Void
Low-density gradation
Background density
Void Void

Method 2 Method 2
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance adjustment sheet, and check Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and com-
each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black patch in pare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black
order to confirm that the color balance adjustment is proper or not patch to check the color balance.
more precisely.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low High Low density High density

density density
Y
Y
M
M
C
C
Bk
Bk
CMY
CMY blend
blend A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is copied.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. The patch density is changed gradually.
The patch density is changed gradually.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed.
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this Patch B may not be copied.
mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural gray
Patch A must not be copied.
color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode. (When the
color balance target is DEF 1.) If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
(4) Printer color balance/density check color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is DEF
CAUTION: Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be 1.)
sure to execute the following procedures in advance.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forc-
ibly. (SIM 44-6) 7-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
Method 1 * When the CCD unit is replaced.
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. * When a U2 trouble is occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The print * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
test pattern is printed. (1) Note before adjustment
• Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens surface
are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• Check to confirm that the SIT chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) are free
from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level to
the darker level. The density changing direction must not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.

(2) Adjustment procedures SET 1 Color balance adjustment target setup
1) Set the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-0356FCZZ) to the refer- a. General
ence position on the left rear frame side of the document table. When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain
Set the chart in order that the arrow mark is placed on the left color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
side.
There are following three kinds of the target.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set to
a desired level.
This setting is required in the following cases.
* When the color balance and density adjustments are executed man-
ually (SIM46-21) (SIM67-25)
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
SET 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup

Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which
emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired level.
target In advance, the user's unique color balance must
be registered as the service color balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the CCD changed, the color balance target of the user's color
balance adjustment is also changed. When,
gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accu-
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is
racy is lower when compared with the adjustment method using
set to the factory color balance target set with SIM
the SIT chart. 63-11. The default setting (factory setting) of the
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. color balance is same as the factory color balance
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, [EXE- target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
CUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, [EXE-
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
CUTE] returns to the normal display.
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
target target is changed, this color balance target is also
changed accordingly.

Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3) Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-74/46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). purpose of registration
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can be This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is cus-
adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. When, how- tomized with SIM 46-21.
ever, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the same bal- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required.
ance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 63-11. After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7 to regis-
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the ter the service color balance target data by using adjustment pattern
copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46- that was printed in this mode.
24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is changed, this
CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print-
target is also changed accordingly. ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is
revised.

It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created with The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM 64-7
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the same can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the printed
color balance target to another machine. pattern is normal.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. (When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
discoloration and dirt. [EXECUTE] key to print.)
The service color balance target data is registered immediately after A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. machine can be used.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the adjust- Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color balance of ment pattern).
the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. Never use If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with SIM
such a pattern for the adjustment. 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM
The accuracy of the service color balance target data can be judges as 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
follows. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting the The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
service color balance target in SIM 46-74/46-24 is unsatisfactory or
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image (adjust-
abnormal.
ment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (KCMY)
adjustment (Auto) may be improper. can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance tar-
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged
get data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
as abnormal.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was made
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21.
This procedure may have been executed erroneously 7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
a. Setting procedure
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same
service color balance target)
color balance as the factory color balance target)
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual adjust-
CAUTION: This procedure must not be executed when the copy color
ment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern). balance was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color bal-
ance requested by the user and it was registered as the
CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print- service color balance target with SIM 63-7.
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM
63-11, be sure to execute this procedure.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment is 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an optional
color balance is requested by the user, make an adjustment.
3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for the
3) Press [SETUP] key.
user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly adjusted the factory color balance target.
and printed in the copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjust-
ment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ7C (2)) on the document table.
SET 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup

Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select
balance (gamma) one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color reproduction.
target
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance (gamma) balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM 67-25
target to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is same as the
factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
C User color balance Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance
(gamma) target target is also changed accordingly.

Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
Color balance target in the printer color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3) Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF1)

Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color
Hue balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
ĩłĪ operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
table in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table
Direction in an actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3) SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust- If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required.
ment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual)
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance can be with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27 to reg-
adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. When, how- ister the service color balance target data by use of the printed adjust-
ever, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set to the same bal- ment pattern.
ance as the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26.
CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print-
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created with
67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target is changed, SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the same
this target is also changed accordingly.
color balance target to another machine.
Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do not
purpose of registration
fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from discol-
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is cus- oration and dirt.
tomized with SIM 67-25.

The service color balance target data is basically registered immedi- CAUTION: This procedure must not be executed when the copy color
ately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. balance was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color bal-
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance ance requested by the user and it was registered as the
adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the adjust- service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
ment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color balance of When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM
the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. Never use 67-26, be sure to execute this procedure.
such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be judged 1) Enter the SIM 67-28 mode.
as follows.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting the
3) Press [YES] key.
service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or abnor-
mal. The service color balance target and the color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
the factory color balance target.
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance tar-
get data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27. 7-B Copy/Printer color balance and density
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was made adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25. (Basic adjustment)
This procedure may have been executed erroneously. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
a. Setting procedure replaced.
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the * When the CCD unit is replaced.
service color balance target) * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual adjust- * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
ment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image (adjust- * U2 trouble has occurred.
ment pattern).
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
CAUTION: In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for print- * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
ing the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment is
a. General
required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an optional
color balance is requested by the user, make an adjustment. SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
3) Press [SETUP] key.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly adjusted (automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance and
and printed in the printer color balance adjustment (Manual density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in this
adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ7E (2)) on the document table. mode.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
machine can be used. matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-24). It
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image (adjust- saves considerable time when compared with performing each of the
ment pattern). auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjustment individu-
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal- ally.
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color bal- The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to adjust
ance requested by the user and it was registered as the service the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black auto-
color balance target with SIM 67-27. matically.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments of all
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read. the copy/printer modes are revised.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C, M
and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - P
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged
as abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same
color balance as the factory color balance target)

b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ8B Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic adjustment). (SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM63-11/63-8)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*2) NO
Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)

Though the FACTORY
color balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds)
Cancel SIM46-74.
is changed, satisfactory
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result. are not obtained
(SIM63-11), or the
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text SERVICE target is
selected.
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density.
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color YES
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
Execute ADJ8C(2) (Copy color balance and density

adjustment) (Manual adjustment).
Are the color balance and density NO
(SIM46-21/44-21/63-7) (*3)
at the specified level? *1:
When the color balance and
YES density are customized and
Execute ADJ10E(1) (Printer color balance and registered as the SERVICE
density adjustment) (Automatic adjustment). target, select the SERVICE
(SIM67-24) target.
*2:
NO Is the PCL printer If the initial setting of the
function provided? Automatic color balance target change
halftone image correction is
not properly adjusted,
Change the color balance and density target.
satisfactory color balance and
(SIM67-26/67-28)
YES density cannot be obtained. In
NO this case, check the print
engine for any problems.
Check the printer color balance and density adjustment result with the self print *3:
check pattern. Though the FACTORY If satisfactory color balance and
color balance and density density are not obtained with
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print target (available in 3 ADJ8C(2) (Copy color balance
check pattern, and check the printer check pattern, and check the printer kinds) is changed, and density adjustment) (Manual
color balance and density. color balance and density. satisfactory color balance adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
and density are not check the print engine for any
obtained (SIM67-26), or
problems.
the SERVICE target is
selected. *4:
Are the color balance NO If there is any streak or unclear
and density at the copy on the printed check
specified level? YES pattern, check the print engine
for any problems.
YES
Execute ADJ8E(2) (Printer color balance
End and density adjustment)
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25/67-27)

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the pro-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. cedure 5) on the document table.
The high density process control is performed, and the copy color Place the color patch image so that the fine lines are on the left
patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. side. At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) color patch image (adjustment pattern).
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the pro-
cedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch image so
that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, place 5 sheets PRINTER CALIBRATION
of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pat-
tern).
7) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.

When the color balance is customized with the manual color bal-
ance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's request and
the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 67-
27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color balance, select the
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key. [SERVICE] target.
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal- The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically per-
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request, and formed and the color balance check patch image is printed out.
the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service target, If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pattern,
if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the [SER- check the print engine for any problems.
VICE] target.
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed and
prints the color balance check patch image.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pattern,
check the print engine for any problems.
Low density High density

;
Low High %
density density
Y
$M
M # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

C
Bk
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-

played. Press [OK] key.
The initial setting of the halftone image correction is performed.
9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,
press it.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. The halftone image correction is performed.
The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.) adjustment operation is completed.
Cancel SIM46-74.

CAUTION: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are 7-C Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
completed. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (auto- * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can- replaced.
celed, the adjustment result is invalid. * The CCD unit has been replaced.
11) Check the copy color balance and density. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density check.) * U2 trouble has occurred.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure,
perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 8C (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
7-C (1)
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not Copy color balance and density adjustment
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 8C (Automatic adjustment)
(2)). a. General
12) Check the printer color balance and density. The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to adjust
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.) the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black auto-
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained matically.
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments of all
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM the copy modes are revised.
67-26 and execute SIM67-28 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is not There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment.
obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24 is
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 8E (2)). used.)
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe- 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 8E
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
(2)).
reduce the number of service calls.
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even after
execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there may be If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can use
this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
another cause.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not work
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
effectively.
If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal problem
occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained, service
must recalibrate the machine to specification.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

b. Adjustment procedure
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ8C(1) Copy color balance and density adjustment

(automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

(Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the

FACTORY target or the SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*3)
When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.

When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed,
the adjustment is completed. Automatic color balance target change
Cancel SIM46-24 Change the color balance and

density target. (SIM63-11/63-8)
Check the color balance and density adjustment result. NO
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color bal- Though the
ance and density. FACTORY color
balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the is changed, satisfactory color
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color bal- balance and density are not
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.) obtained (SIM63-11),
or the SERVICE
target is selected.
Are the color balance and den- NO YES

sity at the satisfactory level?
Execute ADJ8C(2) (Manual copy color

YES balance and density adjustment).
(SIM46-21/44-21/63-7).(*2)
Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*3) *1:
When the copy color balance and density are
customized and registered as the SERVICE
Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction. target, select the SERVICE target.
(SIM44-21) *2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
not obtained with ADJ8C(2) (Manual copy
Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) color balance and density adjustment)
(SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) any problems.
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check *3:
the color balance and density. If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
NO for any problems.
Are the color balance and den-
*4:
sity at the satisfactory level?
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
YES for any problems.
End

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING
automatically selected.) THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed.
This operation takes several minutes.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
6) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table. When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on adjustment is completed.
the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on the After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch displayed.
image (adjustment pattern) paper. Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is
displayed.
7) Check the color balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density check.)
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color bal-
ance and density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, perform
the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction. (SIM
44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the
copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy color
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may be
another cause.
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key. repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color bal- When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained from the
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request and automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in procedure 4),
the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 63-7, change the factory color balance target with SIM 63-11 and repeat the
if the color balance is adjusted to that color balance, select the procedures from 1).
service target. If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is not
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed to obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual adjust-
print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the operation ment (SIM 46-21) (ADJ7C (2)).
panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed. Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to execute the
automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained, perform
the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ7C(2)).
execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there may be
another cause.
Low High
density density Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
Y repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
M
7-C (2)
C Copy color balance and density adjustment
Bk
(Manual adjustment)
a. General
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situation.
When the result of auto adjustment described above is not existing
within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required.
When there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the
color balance.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the half- adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better effi-
tone image correction is performed.
ciency.
NOTE:

#OPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT -ANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

FLOWCHART 3)-
3TART
%XECUTE!$*# #OPYCOLORBALANCEANDDENSITYADJUSTMENT
-ANUAL ADJUSTMENT

%NTERTHE3)- MODEANDSELECT!X PAPER
!UTOMATICSELECTION
0RESS ;%8%#54%= KEY

4HE ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN IS PRINTED
2EFER TO THE PRINTED ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN AND SELECT A

TARGET ADJUSTMENT COLOR WITH THE COLOR KEYS # - 9 +
3ELECT A TARGET ADJUSTMENT LEVEL WITH THE SCROLL KEY
%NTERTHEADJUSTMENTVALUEWITH KEY
0RESS ;%8%#54%= KEY

4HE ADJUSTMENT CHECK PATTERN IS PRINTED
#HECK THE PATCH COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY IN THE PROCESS

GRAY OF THE COLOR BALANCE CHECK PATTERN )F THE GRAY COLOR IS
SLIGHTLY SHIFTED TO -AGENTA THE COLOR BALANCE IS PROPERLY
ADJUSTED
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE ./

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI
SFACTORY LEVEL
9%3
#ANCEL THE 3)- MODE
0ERFORM THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION

3)-
#HECK THE COPY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ADJUSTMENT RESULT WITH THE
TEST CHART

5SE THE TEST CHART 5+/' &#::5+/' &#
TO MAKE A COPY IN THE 4EXT0RINTED 0HOTO MODE AND CHECK
THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY
!RE THE COLOR BALANCE ./

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI
SFACTORY LEVEL
9%3
#HECK TO CONFIRM THAT THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTIONIS

PROPERLY SET

0ERFORM THE INITIAL SETTING OF THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION

3)-
0ERFORM THE HALFTONEIMAGECORRECTION3)-
5SE THE TEST CHART 5+/' &#::5+/' &#

TO MAKE A COPY IN THE 4EXT0RINTED 0HOTO MODE AND CHECK
THE COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY

)F SATISFACTORY COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY ARE NOT
OBTAINED WITH THE ADJUSTMENT CHECK THE PRINT
ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
./ !RE THE COLOR BALANCE

AND DENSITY AT THE SATI )FTHEINITIALSETTINGOFTHEHALFTONEIMAGE
SFACTORY LEVEL CORRECTION IS NOT PROPERLY ADJUSTED SATISFACTORY
COLOR BALANCE AND DENSITY CANNOT BE OBTAINED )N
9%3 THIS CASE CHECK THE PRINT ENGINE FOR ANY PROBLEMS
3ETTHE3%26)#%TARGETFORTHEAUTOMATICCOPYCOLOR
BALANCEADJUSTMENT3)-
%ND

1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document according to necessity
automatically selected.) in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to
check the adjustment result.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color bal-
ance is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
If not, execute the following procedures. image correction.)
NOTE:
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment data
as the reference data for the halftone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ7C (2) (Color balance adjust-
ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this procedure.
Low High When ADJ7C (1) (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
density density with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
; 8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible
execution)
/
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
% [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/
$M UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document according to necessity
in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjust-
CMY ment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the spec-
1) The max. density section is not blurred. ified level, there may be another cause.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied. Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK NOTE:
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually. If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
required.
reversed.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service target,
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in the next
Patch B may not be copied. color balance adjustment.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard color
balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pat-
tern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is con-
verted into the natural gray color balance by the color correction
table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is
DEF 1.)
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When SIM
46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and density,
all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high and
patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the adjustment
values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each process
(CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX) approaches
the black/gray patch level as far as possible.

7-D Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjustments
ADJ7B and ADJ7C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-01 Color copy density adjustment (for each color   - - - - - - - -
copy mode) (separately for the low-density area
and the high-density area)
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each - -   - - - - - -
monochrome copy mode) (separately for the
low-density area and the high-density area) (No
need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density - - - -   - - - -
adjustment (for each mode)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image density - - - - - -   - -
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance - - - -   - - - -
adjustment (separately for the low-density area
and the high-density area)
46-09 DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density          -
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment   - - - - - - - -
(for each color copy mode)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment - -   - - - - - -
(for each monochrome copy mode) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) - -  - - -  -  -
mode document density scanning operation
(exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-21 Copy color balance and density adjustment     - - - - - -
(Manual adjustment)
46-23 Copy high density image density reproduction     - - - - - -
setting (Normally unnecessary to the setting
change)
46-24 Copy color balance and density adjustment     - - - - - -
(Automatic adjustment)
46-25 Copy color balance adjustment (Single color -  - - - - - - - -
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-26 Single color copy mode color balance default -  - - - - - - - -
setting
46-27 Color copy, text, line image reproduction   - - - - - - - -
adjustment (edge gamma, density adjustment)
(Text, Map mode)
46-30 Copy mode sub scanning direction resolution   - - - - - - - -
setting
46-32 Document low density image density - -  - - -  -  -
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
46-36 2-color (red, black) copy mode fine color -  - - - - - - - -
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color - -   - -    
document reproduction adjustment
46-38 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black   - - - - - - - -
component quantity) adjustment
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment - - - - - - - -  -
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment - - - - - - - -  -
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE
Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal - - - - - - - -  -
text mode)
(Fine text mode)
(Super fine mode)
(Ultra fine mode)
(600dpi mode)
46-46 FAX send image density adjustment (RGB_RIP) - - - - - - - -  -
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send          
image (JPEG) compression ratio setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy mode     - - - - - -
heavy paper and the image process mode
(dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode heavy     - - - - - 
paper and the image process mode (dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for     - - - - - 
each dither (Automatic adjustment) (No need to
adjust normally)
46-55 Dropout color setting - - - - - - -  - -
46-58 Pseudo resolution UP function setting     - - - - - -
46-59 Pseudo resolution UP function adjustment     - - - - - 
46-60 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness adjustment          
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment          -
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image         - -
process, automatic exposure mode operation
conditions setting (Normally unnecessary to the
setting change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density         - -
46-65 Color correction table setting   - - - - - - - 
46-66 Watermark adjustment     - - - - - -
46-74 Printer/Copy color balance and density     - - - - - 
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
46-90 High-compression PDF image process - - - -   - - - -
operation setting (Normally unnecessary to the
setting change)
46-91 Black text emphasis fine adjustment - - - -   - - - -

Setting Default
7-D (1) Item/Display Content
range value
Color copy density adjustment (for each color V TWO COLOR 2-color LOW 1 - 99 50
copy mode) (separately for the low-density (COPY TO COPY) (red/black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
area and the high-density area) (copy document)
(No need to adjust normally) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting
the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" mode and
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low den-
sity and high density part at each copy density individually. change the adjustment value.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the copy When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
by each the copy mode individually.
density is decreased.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the copy
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
mode individually.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
* When there is request from the user.
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50 7-D (2)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Monochrome copy density adjustment
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 (for each monochrome copy mode)
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(separately for the low-density area and the
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50 high-density area)
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 (No need to adjust normally)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually.
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low den-
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
sity and high density part at each copy density individually.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the copy
HIGH 1 - 99 50 by each the copy mode individually.
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the copy
HIGH 1 - 99 50 mode individually.
I TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is request from the user.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (Copy document) 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY)
Setting
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 Display/Item Content Default
range
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph (Color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) (COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
R LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) (COPY TO COPY)
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
T SINGLE COLOR Single color (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
U TWO COLOR 2-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(red/black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50

7-D (4)
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting Monochrome copy density, gamma
the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" mode and adjustment (for each monochrome copy
change the adjustment value. mode) (No need to adjust normally)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density level in each monochrome copy mode.
density is decreased. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. * When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy * When there is request from the user.
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll key.
copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
7-D (3) A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
(for each color copy mode)
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
(No need to adjust normally) E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
This adjustment is used to execute the color balance adjustment for F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
each density level in each color copy mode. G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma by I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
each the copy mode individually. J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key. N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color key. O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll key. P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 When the adjustment value is increased, the density is increased.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 decreased.
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 adjusted.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point to
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
printed out.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 The density at each density level (point) can be checked by refer-
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 ring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more practi-
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 cal to make a copy and check it.
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color balance
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 and the density for each density level (point).
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is increased.
copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the copy
When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is
decreased. until a satisfactory result is obtained.
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected with
the color keys are collectively adjusted.
7-D (5)
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point to
the high density point can be adjusted collectively. Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is mode document density scanning operation
printed out. (exposure operation) conditions setting
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color balance (Normally no need to set)
and the density for each density level (point). Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of document,
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. change the setting.
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal This setting is required in the following cases.
copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the * When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. automatic copy mode.

* When a document with images near its lead edge is copied. Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
* When a document with colored background is copied. When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
image density is increased by control. When the density of the docu-
ment of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased by
2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
control.
STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or Document table/DSPF mode
"PART", in some cases.
3 to 7mm
Default
Item/Display Content Set value
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2, MODE2
MODE3
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ PRESCAN
Stop (for copy) STOP/PRESCAN
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for scanner) STOP/PRESCAN AE WIDTH = FULL
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
NOTE:
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images) Document table mode

MODE 2 Normal gamma
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is 3 to 7mm
scanned, and the output image density is determined
according to the scanned density. (The output image
density is even for all the surface.)
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned 100mm
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
according to the density in each area of document. (The
output image density may not be even for all the surface.)
AE WIDTH = PART
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
output image density is even for all the surface.)
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
FULL mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the
document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
PART mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm DSPF mode
width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
3 to 7mm
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
Document density detection area

Set
7-D (6) Display/Item Content Default
value
Document low density image density H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
reproduction adjustment in the automatic TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed photo
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
(No need to adjust normally) (Background (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
density adjustment in the scanning section) J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background density PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
in monochrome auto copy mode. (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text/Printed photo 1-9 5
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the docu- L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5
ment. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density image of M COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
the document. PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
* When there is request from the user. N COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
O COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 5
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key. TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. P COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
and the low density image is decreased. background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
Setting Default and the low density image is decreased.
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196 7-D (8)
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
Color copy, text, line image reproduction
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) adjustment (edge gamma, density
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196 (No need to adjust normally)
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
Adjustment 1
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the repro-
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 ducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally.
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface) With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 lines can be varied.
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode
(manual).
7-D (7) * When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be
Copy/Scan low density image density changed.
adjustment (for each mode) * When there is request from the user.
(No need to adjust normally) 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low density 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
area in the copy/scanner mode.
Adjust-
This adjustment is required in the following cases. Display/Item (Copy
Content ment Default
mode)
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the docu- range
ment. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density image of A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
the document. (SLOPE) skew adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode. C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. (SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
Set (INTERCEPT) adjustment
Display/Item Content Default
value E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma skew 1 - 99 50
A COLOR COPY : Text/Printed photo 1-9 3 (SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5 When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy) gamma at the line edge section is changed.
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3 When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
is decreased.
(color copy)

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are
increased, the image density at the line edge section is increased, 7-D (9)
and vice versa. Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color
4) Press [OK] key. document reproduction adjustment
5) Make a copy in color text/printed photo copy mode (manual), (No need to adjust normally)
check the copy. Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin character image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
and line image. image in monochrome copy mode.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27 This adjustment is required in the following cases.
mode and change the adjustment value. * When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red image in
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is case of making a color copy of the color document in monochrome
obtained. copy mode.
Adjustment 2 1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in the 2) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
Text/Map copy mode. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy mode 5) Press [YES] key.
images. This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow images
* When there is request from the user. when copying color documents with red and yellow images in the
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. monochrome mode.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
An individual adjustment is available in each of the copy mode and the
Adjust- printer mode.
Display/Item (Copy
Content ment Default
mode)
range Setting Default
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 Item Display Content
range value
(SLOPE) skew adjustment A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) for 0 - 1000 137
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50 Default Default mode
(INTERCEPT) adjustment B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) for 0 - 1000 827
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50 Default Default mode
(SLOPE) skew adjustment C R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) for 0 - 1000 333
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50 Fluorescence Fluorescence pen mode
(INTERCEPT) adjustment D G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) for 0 - 1000 333
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma skew 1 - 99 50 Fluorescence Fluorescence pen mode
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode) E R-Ratio RIP Print gray setting (R) 0 - 1000 299
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50 F G-Ratio RIP Print gray setting (G) 0 - 1000 587
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
* B-Ratio Default: The value of gray making setting (B) for Default
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
mode is obtained from the formula below.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is changed,
1000 - R-Ratio Default - G-Ratio Default
the gamma (contrast) is changed.
* B-Ratio Fluorescence: The value of gray making setting (B) for Fluo-
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is rescence pen mode is obtained from the formula below.
increased, and vice versa.
1000 - R-Ratio Fluorescence - G-Ratio Fluorescence
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is increased,
* B-Ratio RIP: The value of Print gray making setting (B) is obtained
the image density is increased, and vice versa.
from the formula below.
4) Press [OK] key.
1000 - R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP
5) Make a copy in the color Text/Map copy mode (manual), and
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial val-
check the output print.
ues (Default).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
adjustment value. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased, the
copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment value
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
is decreased, the density is increased.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, the
copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the density in also decreased.

Display/Item (Copy mode) Select button Content Default
7-D (10)
AUTO AUTO (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
Color copy mode dark area gradation (black (-) LUT1 judgment
component quantity) adjustment NOMAL
(No need to adjust normally) (+) LUT1
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (+) LUT2
(except character and line image) 4) Press the black ingredient amount select button.
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part changes. When reproduction as solid of black image is required:
This adjustment is required in the following cases. Selects + button
* When reproduction as solid of black image is required. When there is desire to darken copy of black image:
* To make the black background and the dark area darker Selects + button
* When change of gradation of the shade part is required. When a dark color image is reproduced in the black:
* When there is request from the user. Selects + button
1) Enter the SIM 46-38 mode. 5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy.
2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode
key. and change the adjustment value.
3) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
Display/Item (Copy mode) Select button Content Default

MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text/Printed NORMAL
(-) LUT1 photo
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph NORMAL
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
TEXT PHOTO (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL
(-) LUT1 Photograph
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
CP ORG/TEXT (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
PRT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text Printed
(+) LUT1 photo
(Manual)
(+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Printed photo
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT2
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light NORMAL
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2

7-D (11)
* When changing the sharpness of copy image in copy mode. (obtain
Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness crispy image) (decreases moire)
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) * When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image shade
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color copy part (for decrease of asperity)
mode. * To make the black background and the dark area darker.
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image shade * To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
part.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto) Apply to auto copy
LEVEL L image in auto copy mode Soft emphasis 2 mode only
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY AUTO FILTER SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for copy/push SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Apply to copy/push
LEVEL CENTER scan/FAX mode CENTER 2 scan/FAX mode
HIGH HIGH 3
C CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Apply to auto push
FILTER LEVEL CENTER push scan mode (color Text, Printed Photo / CENTER 2 scan mode only
HIGH Printed Photo images) HIGH 3
D COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the high
ON color copy mode ON 1 density image except
E COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON) text and line image
ON copy mode ON 1
When setting ON,
F SINGLE COLOR : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
smoothness in the
ON single color copy mode ON 1
image shade part
G 2 COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in OFF 0 1 (ON) improves by applying
ON 2-color copy mode ON 1 soft filter.
H 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON) (asperity decreases)
ON copy mode ON 1
I B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
J COLOR PUSH : RGB OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON scan color mode ON 1
K B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1
L COLOR PRINT: CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C,M,Y image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON color print mode ON 1
M COLOR PRINT: K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON print mode ON 1
N B/W PRINT OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON print mode ON 1
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter pro-

cess mode).
• Adjustment item A:
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pattern
state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
numeric value to decrease moire.
• Adjustment item B, C:
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
moire.
• Adjustment item D - N:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode
and change the adjustment value.

7-D (12) 7-D (13)
Copy high density image density Copy color balance adjustment
reproduction setting (Normally unnecessary (Single color copy mode)
to the setting change) (No need to adjust normally)
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there is This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in the
necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, change single color copy mode to the user's request.
the setting. The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are case of color.
following, change the setting. This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there is a
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. request from the user.
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of high When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
density. required in the following cases.
* When there is request from the user. * When it is required to change the color balance in the single color
a. Adjustment procedure copy mode.
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode. * When there is request from the user.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key. a. Adjustment procedure
Setting
Display/Item Content Default 2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
range
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0 3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
(0:ENABLE density correction mode 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
1:DISABLE) Enable
1 CMY engine maximum Default
Display/Item Adjustment range
density correction mode C M Y
Disable A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B K 0 K engine maximum density 0-1 1 B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
(0: ENABLE 1: correction mode Enable C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
DISABLE) 1 K engine maximum density D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
correction mode DIsable E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500 F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
TARGET maximum density correction
G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
correction
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
E YELLOW Scanner target value for YELLOW 0 - 999 500
MAX TARGET maximum density correction K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for BLACK 0 - 999 500 L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
TARGET maximum density correction M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
G RATIO LOW Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0 N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
correction (LOW)(1/100) O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
H RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0
correction (HIGH)(1/100) 5) Press [OK] key.
I DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0 - 255 255 6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the copy.
THRESHOLD If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
J SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH) 100 - 500 and change the adjustment value.
THRESHOLD (1/100) 500
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone gap
is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 to
item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
CAUTION: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If
these values are changed, density of the high density part
is changed.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy
color balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)

If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode and
7-D (14) change the adjustment value.
DSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following cases,
make changes to the setting: 7-D (15)
* When copy in DSPF mode differs from copy in document table Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
mode. each dither (Automatic adjustment)
* When copy density in DSPF mode is low or too high.
a. General
This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain mode.
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.)
* The CCD unit has been replaced. b. Adjustment procedures
* U2 trouble has occurred. 1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected. The
a. Adjustment procedure color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode. 3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the procedure
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the printed patch
image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side. Place 5 sheets of
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
white paper on the printed patch image (adjustment pattern).
LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D
(COPY HIGH)".
Setting Default
Item Button Display Content
range value
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 49
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted.
LOW (Low density side) The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnormal-
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 49 ity.
LOW exposure adjustment 5) Press [OK] key.
(Low density side)
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: exposure adjustment 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
HIGH (High density side) The halftone image correction is performed.
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50 7) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Select item
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50 Content
(Mode/Image)
HIGH exposure adjustment
HEAVYPAPER Copier/gamma for heavy paper
(High density)
BLACK EDGE Black edge
G BALANCE DSPF color balance R 1 - 99 50
COLOR EDGE Color edge
SIDEB: R
COLOR ED Color error diffusion
H BALANCE DSPF color balance G 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
I BALANCE DSPF color balance B 1 - 99 50 B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi
SIDEB: B B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi low
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. WOVEN1 Watermark mode 1
In case of increase of image density, input large numeric value. Or WOVEN2 Watermark mode 2
in case of diluting the image density, input small numeric value. WOVEN3 Watermark mode 3
4) Press [OK] key. WOVEN4 Watermark mode 4
5) Make a copy in the DSPF mode and check the copy.

A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
In the monochrome mode, only the monochrome pattern is
printed.
9) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the procedure
7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the printed patch
image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side. Place 5 sheets of
white paper on the printed patch image (adjustment pattern).

The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted, and
the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
press [OK] key.
11) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.)
NOTE: Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
values.

7-D (16)
Dropout color adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the range of reproduction of color
document images as monochrome images in the image send mode
(monochrome manual text mode).
In other words, it is used to adjust the level of chroma of color images
which are reproduced as monochrome images.
When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout becomes
easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the adjustment
value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult to widen the
reproduction range.
Setting Default
range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
3) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome man-

ual text mode) and check the adjustment result.
When black characters When the color section is not

are fainted, Document dropped out,
Decrease the adjustment value. Color dropout Increase the value.
Reproduced
image
SIM value 0 SIM value 6

SIM value 3
(Minimum value) (Maximum value)
(Default)
The reproduction range is widened. The reproduction range is narrowed.
Effect and adverse effect when decreasing the value Effect and adverse effect when increasing the value
[Effect] [Effect]
When black characters are fainted by color shift, etc, the black area is Colors (of low chroma) which are difficult to be dropped out can be
outputted clearly. dropped out.
[Adverse effect] [Adverse effect]
Dropout of color sections becomes difficult. Black characters are fainted or cracked.

7-D (17)
Watermark adjustment
(Normally not required)
a. General
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result is
This adjustment is used to adjust the reproduction capability of the not obtained from the adjustment in the system setting mode.)
watermark in the copy/printer mode.
* When there is request from the user. (When a satisfactory result is
This adjustment is used for watermark documents (primary output). not obtained from the adjustment with the printer driver.)
The result of this adjustment affects the result of watermark print (sec-
ondary output).
In the printer mode, the watermark density can be adjusted by the
printer driver. That adjustment is based on the result of this adjust- 2) Select the PATTERN mode, then select an adjustment item in the
ment. following list according to the situation.
NOTE: Normally there is no need to adjust the PATTERN mode
(items K and L), the COPY MODE, and the POSITION
mode.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Description NOTE
range value
A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is changed to increase or decrease
(Color: Black / Adjustment for light the density of the watermark of background documents
images) (primary output).
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 19 To increase the watermark density, increase the
(Color: Black, Density: Standard) adjustment value.
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 To decrease the watermark density, decrease the
(Color: Black, Density: Dark) adjustment value.
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 19
(Color: Cyan / Adjustment for light NOTE: When the adjustment value is increased, the
images) watermark area which is originally not
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 23 reproduced becomes difficult to disappear.
(Color: Cyan, Density: Standard) When the adjustment value is decreased, the
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 27 watermark area which is originally reproduced
(Color: Cyan, Density: Dark) becomes easy to disappear.
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level 0 - 255 15
(Color: Magenta / Adjustment for
light images)
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level 0 - 255 18
(Color: Magenta, Density: Standard)
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level 0 - 255 21
(Color: Magenta, Density: Dark)
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment value of the watermark
print/contrast adjustment in the system setting is
changed by 1.
When this value is increased, the variation is also
increased. When the value is decreased, the variation is
also decreased.
When the adjustment value is 0, the result of the contrast
adjustment is not reflected.
(* The adjustment value must be set to 1 or greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark Normally
positive copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43. set to the
In that case, however, the containing characters of the default.
watermark document (primary output) can be easily
reproduced.
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For half-tone index watermark type 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing characters of watermark
negative copy (secondary output) more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the containing characters of the
watermark document (primary output) can be easily
reproduced.

Changing adjustment values of adjustment items A - I and
Watermark The watermark color is available in Cyan, Magenta, and Black.
trade off
color
Kinds of Containing Characters embedded in a watermark, such as "COPY
watermarks Adjustment characters INHIBITED," are called containing characters.
(Mode selected Density values of Kinds of There are two kinds: "Character appearing" and "Background
Effect watermarks appearing."
in the value adjustment
watermark items A - I When a watermark of "Character appearing" is copied, the
copy mode) background disappears and the containing characters appear.
Characters Decrease. The adjustment The watermark images When a watermark of "Background appearing" is copied, the
appearing. value is become easy to watermark of the character area disappears and the containing
decreased. disappear. characters become outline characters.
The containing characters Principle of A watermark is composed of two dots: fine dots and rough dots.
become lighter. watermarks Since fine dots disappear when copied, they are called
Increase. The adjustment The containing characters disappearing patterns.
value is become darker. Since rough dots remain when copied, they are called
increased. The watermark images remaining patterns.
become difficult to In a watermark of "Character appearing," the background is a
disappear. disappearing pattern and the containing characters are
remaining patterns.
Background Decrease. The adjustment The containing characters
In a watermark of "Background appearing," the background is a
appearing. value is become easy to
remaining pattern and the containing characters are
decreased. disappear.
disappearing patterns.
The watermark images
become easy to NOTE: Watermarks have the following characteristics:
disappear. Note for • A watermark is presumed to be synthesized with text
watermarks documents. If it is used with photos or images, the containing
Increase. The adjustment The watermark images
characters may be seen in the watermark document
value is become darker.
(primary output) or the containing characters may not appear
increased. The containing characters
properly in the watermark copy (secondary output).
become difficult to
• When a watermark is synthesized with newspapers or other
disappear.
dark-background documents, the containing characters may
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. not appear in the watermark copy (secondary output).
• Containing characters may not appear in the watermark
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result. copy (secondary output) depending on the kind of the copier
Descriptions on the watermark which makes the watermark copy (secondary output) and
the copy mode.
Containing • Containing characters may not appear clearly in the
characters watermark copy (secondary output) depending on the copy
Copy / Print Copy
mode in which the watermark document (primary output) is
made.
• When the print engine status changes, the containing
COPY INHIBITED
characters may not be concealed properly in the watermark
document (primary output). In this case, follow the
COPY INHIBITED
procedures below to conceal the containing characters.
* Use SIM46-24 to execute the color balance adjustment.
COPY INHIBITED
* Use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance adjustment
for each dither.
Document Watermark document Watermark copy * Adjust the watermark print contrast in the system setting.
(Copy document or (Primary output) (Secondary output) • Though the watermark of cyan or magenta is selected in the
Print data) (Copy or Printer output) (This machine or other black and white mode, the black watermark is synthesized.
(This machine) company's machine) • For a document which is judged as monochrome with ACS
selected, though the watermark color is specified as cyan or
magenta, the black watermark is synthesized.
• The preview screen of the watermark only indicates the
setting of the watermark color, and does not indicate an
actual copy image.
• When the document control (printer mode) is used together,
it is advisable to use "Characters appearing" setting. If
"Background appearing" setting is used together, the
detection accuracy of document control may be reduced.
• In the printer mode watermark, setting of 1200dpi and a
watermark cannot be used together.

Watermark adjustment in the system setting
7-E Printer image quality adjustment
System setting - Security setting - Watermark print -
Contrast tab (Basic adjustment)
Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
Watermark kind
Density Adjustment
density adjustment
mode selection
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment, the
Character To increase the Decrease the contrast value.
copy color balance/density adjustment must have been completed
appearing text density (Default: 5)
properly.
To decrease the Increase the contrast value. (Default
text density value: 5)
Background To increase the Increase the contrast value. (Default This adjustment is required in the following cases.
appearing text density value: 5) * Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjustment
To decrease the Decrease the contrast value. is required.
text density (Default: 5)
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
CAUTION:
Note for adjusting the watermark with SIM46-54 7-E (1)
When the color balance automatic adjustment is executed with Printer color balance adjustment
SIM46-74 or SIM46-24 but the containing characters are repro- (Automatic adjustment)
duced, use SIM46-54 to execute the color balance automatic
a. General
adjustment for each dither.
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust the
However, note the following items. print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) automati-
• When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 42, the cally with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of WOVEN1
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments of all
and WOVEN2 of SIM46-54.
the print modes are revised.
• When either of item K or L of the PATTERN mode is 43, the
adjustment must be executed for the both modes of WOVEN3
and WOVEN4 of SIM46-54. There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment.
• WOVEN1 and WOVEN2 must be adjusted in a pair as well as 1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24 is
used.)
WOVEN3 and WOVEN4.
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
If it is ignored, the containing characters remain reproduced.
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not work
effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the ser-
viceman functions to recover the normal color balance though the
machine condition is greatly changed. If the machine has a fatal
problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining the normal color bal-
ance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
Execute ADJ8E(1) (Printer color balance and density

adjustment) (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper.
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Select the FACTORY target or the SERVICE target,
and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
Automatic adjustment color balance target change
performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM67-26/67-28)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or
unclear copy. (*4) NO
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone

image correction is automatically performed.) (*2) Though the FACTORY
target (available in 3 kinds) is
Cancel SIM67-24. changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
SERVICE target is
selected.
NO Is the PCL printer
function provided?
YES
YES
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25/67-27)
(*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
density adjustment.
*1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print registered as the SERVICE target, select the SERVICE
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the target.
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density. *2:
If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
Are the color balance and *3:
NO
density at the satisfactory If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
level? with ADJ8E(2) (Printer color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the
print engine for any problems.
*4:
YES
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End

1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is NOTE:
automatically selected.) After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This operation
procedure 2) on the document table. takes several minutes.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is
the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on the displayed.
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE" is
image (adjustment pattern) paper. displayed.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
6) Check the color balance and density.
PRINTER CALIBRATION (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.)
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is not
obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ7E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ7E
(2)).
execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there may be
another cause.
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. 7-E (2)

When the color balance is customized with the manual color bal- Printer color balance adjustment
ance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's request and (Manual adjustment)
the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 67- a. General
27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color balance, select the The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to adjust
service target. the printer density of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the following situa-
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed and tion. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not exist-
prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the opera- ing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required.
tion panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed. When there is request from the user for changing (customizing) the
color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could not
PRINTER CALIBRATION adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance
adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better effi-
ciency.

b. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure automatically selected.)
flowchart (SIM67-25)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
Start 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color bal-
ance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.
adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.) PRINTER CALIBRATION
Check the printed adjustment check pattern, Low density High density
and select a target adjustment color with the
color keys (C,M,Y,K). ;
Select a target adjustment density level with the

/
scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. %

$M
CMY
Check the patch color balance and density in the
process gray of the color balance check pattern.
blend
(If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta, # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3
the color balance is properly adjusted.)

Are the color balance
NO
and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
YES
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
NO Is the PCL printer The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
function provided? Patch B may not be copied.
YES
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard color
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
density adjustment.
balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density.
the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When the color
balance target is DEF 1.)
NO 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
Are the color balance and
density at the satisfactory
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
level? 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When SIM
YES 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and density,
all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
Set the SERVICE target for the To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
automatic printer color balance decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
adjustment. (SIM67-27)
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
End
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high and
*1: patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the adjustment
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
engine for any problems.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each process
(CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX) approaches
the black/gray patch level as far as possible.

6) Check the color balance and density. Setting
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.) range
NOTE: B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE density correction mode
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register the 1: DISABLE) Enable
color balance as the service target. 1 K engine maximum
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not density correction mode
required. Disable
If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in the next
correction
color balance adjustment.
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
correction
7-F Printer image quality adjustment E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
(Individual adjustment) TARGET YELLOW maximum density
correction
a. General
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode TARGET BLACK maximum density
only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic correction
adjustments ADJ7E (1) and ADJ7E (2) or there is a request from the G PRINTER Printer total toner limit set up 0-3 0
user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment. TOTAL TONER
LIMIT SETUP
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
H RATIO LOW High density correction blend 0 - 100 33
ratio (LOW)(1/100)
7-F (1) I RATIO HIGH High density correction blend 0 - 100 0
Printer density adjustment ratio (HIGH)(1/100)
(Low density section density adjustment) (No J DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0 - 255 250
THRESHOLD
need to adjust normally)
K SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH)(1/ 100 - 400
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low density THRESHOLD 100) 500
area in the printer mode.
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone gap
is better.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density sec-
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 to
tion, or to reproduce low-density images.
item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed, density
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.
of the high density part is changed.
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the
increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density on
printer color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic
low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
adjustment)
7-F (2)
7-F (3)
Printer high density image density
Printer gamma adjustment for each dither
reproduction setting (Supporting the high
(Automatic adjustment)
density section tone gap)
a. General
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the printer
mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high density This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density in
section. the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode.
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following cases, a This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes and
change of setting must be made. images.
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. b. Adjustment procedures
* To lower the density in the high density section. 1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode.
a. Adjustment procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected. The
color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
Setting cedure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
range printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0 Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
(0: ENABLE density correction mode (adjustment pattern).
1:DISABLE) Enable
1 CMY engine maximum
density correction mode
Disable

PRINTER CALIBRATION PRINTER CALIBRATION
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The color balance adjustment is automatically performed. The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and the
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnormal- machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
ity. 10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and
5) Press [OK] key. the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE] key is
pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the screen is
shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image), press
Display Content [EXECUTE] key.
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/Image),
Printer heavy paper automatic density press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are registered.
correction amount 11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.)
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN21 (1200dpi 1bit SuperLow) NOTE: Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo) values.
B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit Photo) ADJ 8 Manual paper feed tray paper size
SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
(width) sensor adjustment
SCREEN12 (600dpi 4bit Graphics) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
SCREEN13 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics) * The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
Printer B/W toner save automatic density
correction amount
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
4BIT_GRAPHICS SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics) * U2 trouble has occurred.
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot Screen1) * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN15(Dot Screen2) * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
DOT_SCREEN1_BW SCREEN16(Dot Screen1 BW)
DOT_SCREEN2_BW SCREEN17(Dot Screen2 BW)
SHIGH SCREEN18(SHIGH)
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
cedure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
(adjustment pattern).

3) Press [EXECUTE] key. When each of the above operations has been completed, the "COM-
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal dis- PLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has failed, the
play. "ERROR" message appears.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size. ADJ 10 Document size detection
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal dis- This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
play.
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
feed guide is recognized.
* When U2 trouble has occurred.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal dis-
play.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
10-A Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
sensor
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal dis-
play. With the document cover open, without placing a document on the
table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized. 3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
played. If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are saved
to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting

ADJ 9 DSPF tray paper size (width) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
sensor adjustment * The operation panel has been replaced.
* The DSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The DSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.
2) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).

When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds and
the display is reversed. When all the four points are pressed and
the touch panel adjustment is completed, the display returns to
the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display frame
and the detection position when the touch panel is pressed.
The maximum width detection level is recognized. * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such as
a needle or a pin).
4) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.

ADJ 12 Fusing paper guide position ADJ 13 Print image manual magnification
adjustment ratio, area, position adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the following (Manual adjustment)
cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section. 13-A Print image manual magnification ratio
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section. adjustment (Main scanning direction)
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the (Print engine)
paper rear edge section. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two positions * When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
in the front/rear frame direction.
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to shift
the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
* Make sure to shift this paper guide parallel to the standard F/R
fixing position. 1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray.
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll key
㼀㼔㼑㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼍㼞㼐㻌㼒㼕㼤㼕㼚㼓㻌㼜㼛㼟㼕㼠㼕㼛㼚 and the numeral key.
The check pattern is printed out.
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is 240 +/-
Center line 0.5mm.
10 scales in direction B from center.
240 0.5mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

6) Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed by
0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio
in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
The standard fixing positions for Front and Rear sides are at the 3 decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning
scales and 1 scale in direction B from the marking scale center, direction is decreased.
respectively. However, the position may be varied depending on
Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
the situation.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper, change the position in the
error direction A.
13-B Print image manual area adjustment (Main
* When an image deflection or unclear image is generated in the
lead edge area of paper, change the position in the arrow direc-
scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
tion B. (Print engine)
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.

NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute the When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
print image manual magnification ratio adjustment (ADJ13A) changed by 0.1mm.
(main scanning direction) (print engine). NOTE:
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as fol-
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an lows:
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items B - J Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "R" to select the NOTE:
paper feed tray which is to be used for executing test printing.
When the amount of the rear edge void is different between each
paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item (DENB-
The adjustment pattern is printed. XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below are The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all
in the range of the standard values. paper feed tray.
That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to
Content Standard adjustment value
adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray.
X Lead edge void area 4.0 +/- 1.0mm
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 +/- 2.0mm that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
Z1 + Z2 = 4.0 ± 2.0mm lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
Z1 > 0.0mm adjustment value of item (SUB-XXX) in SIM 50-10. Refer to
Z2 > 0.0mm ADJ13-C.
Z1
2.0 2.0mm
13-C Print image manual position adjustment (Main
scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Print engine) (Each paper feed tray)
X
4.0 1.0mm * When a paper tray is replaced.
Y
2.0 - 5.0mm * When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When ADJ13A Print image manual magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine) is performed.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
Z2 * U2 trouble has occurred.
2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
condition, execute the simulation 50-1. NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the fol-
NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. lowing item.
5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. * The print image manual magnification ration adjustment (ADJ13A)
(main scanning direction) (Print engine) has been properly adjusted.
6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with
the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
REAR adjustment
Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed correction 1 - 99 50
scanning value
direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
print area DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
correction DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
value
DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
DENB-LC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 55
DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
value
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.

SIM 50-10 display item
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 99
B MAIN-STD Standard correction amount (offcenter direction) 1 - 99 50
C SUB-STD Standard correction amount (Paper feed direction) 1 - 99 55
D MAIN-SFT Print position adjustment 2nd page shift correction amount (Off center direction) 0-3 0
E SUB-SFT Print position adjustment 2nd page shift correction amount (Paper feed direction) 0-3 0
F MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
H MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
I MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
J MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
K MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value (LCC) 1 - 99 50
L MAIN-LCT-MFT Print off center adjustment value (LCT manual feed) 1 - 99 50
M MAIN-LCT1 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 1 series, first stage) 1 - 99 50
N MAIN-LCT2 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 1 series, second stage) 1 - 99 50
O MAIN-LCT3 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 2 series, first stage) 1 - 99 50
P MAIN-LCT4 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 2 series, second stage) 1 - 99 50
Q MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (ADU) 1 - 99 50
R SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual feed (Main machine) 1 - 99 50
S SUB-CS1 timing adjustment Standard tray 1 - 99 50
T SUB-CS2 1 - 99 50
U SUB-CS3 1 - 99 50
V SUB-CS4 1 - 99 50
W SUB-LC LCC /LCT/LCT manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
X SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 48
Y SUB-HV-A Heavy paper1,2 1 - 99 50
Z SUB-HV-B Heavy paper3,4 1 - 99 50
AA SUB-GLOSSY Glossy paper 1 - 99 50
PAPER
AB SUB-EMBOSS Embossed paper 1 - 99 50
AC SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
AD SUB-ENV Envelope 1 - 99 50
AE SWT ACA-MAIN MAIN correction value update switching OFF 0-1 0 1
ON 1
AF SWT ACA-SUB SUB correction value update switching OFF 0-1 0 1
ON 1
AG SWT MAIN-REAL Real time switching OFF 0-3 0 1
1ST ON 1
BW ON 2
ON 3
AH SWT COR COR correction control switching OFF 0-1 0 1
ON 1
AI MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
AJ PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual feed 1-9 1 3(CS2)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
LCT1_1 LCT 1 series, first stage (*2) 6
LCT1_2 LCT 1 series, second stage (*2) 7
AK DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO Not select 1
AL ALT FEED Other cassette paper Normal operation 0-1 0 0(NORMAL)
feed selection switch Output from all paper feeding ports except for "PAPER" specified 1

*For item A (BK-MAG) adjustment position Paper size in the main 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the correct
scanning direction position.
Larger than 216 mm, Measure the dimension of the lead edge void area in the front and
 ± 120 mm in the main scanning direction from the image center the rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
position before printing in the main scanning direction (160 mm from all the following conditions are satisfied.
the BD sensor in the LSU unit)
RV
216 mm or less 2.0mm 2.0mm
 ± 60 mm in the main scanning direction from the image center posi-
tion before printing in the main scanning direction (160 mm from the
BD sensor in the LSU unit)
Regarding adjustment direction HV

+ Direction: Expansion direction (about 0.1 mm with respect to adjust- (Rear edge void) (Lead edge void)
ment value 1)
- Direction: Reduction direction (about 0.1 mm with respect to adjust-
ment value 1)
* Items F to Q (MAIN - ) adjustment value is decreased by 1, the main

scanning printing position moves 0.1 mm to the front side.
* Items F to Q (MAIN - ) adjustment value is increased by 1, the main
scanning printing position moves 0.1 mm to the rear side.
* Items R to X (SUB - ) adjustment value is decreased by 1, the sub
scanning printing position for each paper feed tray moves 0.1 mm to FV
the front side. 2.0mm 2.0mm
* Items R to X (SUB - ) adjustment value is increased by 1, the sub
scanning position for each paper feed tray moves 0.1 mm to the rear RV: REAR VOID AREA
end side FV: FRONT VOID AREA
* Item Y to AD (SUB - ) adjustment value is decreased by 1, the sub RV + FV = 4.0 +/- 2.0mm
scanning position for each paper type moves 0.1 mm to the front side. RV > 0.0mm
* Item Y to AD (SUB - ) adjustment value is increased by 1, the sub FV > 0.0mm
scanning position for each paper type moves 0.1 mm to the rear end
HV: Lead edge void
side.
HV = DENA adjustment value / 10 +/- 1.0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
*1: Displayed only when A4/A3 LCC is connected.
6) Change the adjustment value.
*2: Displayed only when 2-stage LCT is installed.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the [EXE-
*3: Displayed when two 2-stage LCTs are installed.
CUTE] key.
Heavy paper A: Heavy paper 1 - 2, Embossed paper, Label sheet, Tab
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
sheet, Glossy paper
printed.
Heavy paper B: Heavy paper 3 - 4
When the MAIN adjustment value is increased, the image FV of 5)
is increased and the RV is decreased.
1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode. When the SUB adjustment value is increased, the image HV of 5)
2) Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key. is increased and the rear edge void is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is changed
Display/Item Content Setting range
by about 0.1mm.
NO Not select 1
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5) are
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in proce- satisfied.
dure 2). In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating the
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. above procedures, perform the following procedure.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

7) In the case of tandem tray
13-D Paper feed off-center manual adjustment
Loosen two red screws, and adjust the position of the paper feed
guide. (Manual paper feed unit) (MX-MF11)
(Mechanical adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the manual paper feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
1) Enter the Sim. 50-10 mode.
2) Select a paper feed source for an adjustment target with the scroll
button.
3) Set A4 (11 X 8.5) or A3 (11 X 17) paper on the paper feed tray
selected in the procedure 2.
4) Enter 50 as default value of off-center adjustment, and press [OK]
button.
6) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the correct
position.
When the adjustment pattern is printed virtually at the center, go
to the procedure 10).
If not, go to the procedure 7).
7) Turn the manual paper feed unit off-center adjustment screw to
adjust the off-center.
Adjust so that the adjustment pattern is virtually at the center.
8) In the case of paper feed tray 3/4

Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2 pcs.)
at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray, and
change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direction.
Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
When the off-center adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the

paper position is shifted to the rear frame side. When it is turned
counterclockwise, the paper is shifted to the front frame side.
9) Check the image position on the adjustment pattern.
Perform the procedures 7 thru 9 until the adjustment pattern
comes virtually at the center.
10) When the adjustment pattern comes virtually to the center by the
adjustment, perform the fine adjustment with the simulation.
(90cpm machine only)
Enter the adjustment value, and press [EXECUTE] button.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image is shifted to
the front frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, the image is shifted to the rear frame side.
A change in the adjustment value by 1 corresponds to a shift by
about 0.1mm.
NOTE:
The adjustment item (SUB-XXX-HV-XXX) is used to make the fine
adjustment of heavy paper/OHP/envelopes for the adjustment item
(SUB-XXX) of each paper feed tray.

11) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the correct 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below.
position.
Measure the void area sizes of the adjustment pattern on the front
edge and the rear edge, and check that the sizes satisfy all the
following conditions.
RV 2.5mm or less

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the copy
mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 +/- 0.5%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 +/
- 0.5%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
FV 2.5mm or less
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following proce-
RV: REAR VOID AREA dure.
FV: FRONT VOID AREA 5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
RV + FV  5.0 mm When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification
RV = 2.5mm or less ratio is increased.
FV = 2.5mm or less When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifica-
Perform the procedures 10 and 11 until the above conditions are tion ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
satisfied. Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%).
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio 14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
(Document table mode)
(Manual adjustment)
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scanning
(main scanning direction) (Manual
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
adjustment) (Document table mode)
CAUTION: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magnifi- * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
cation ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of SIM
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. Therefore, this
adjustment must be executed only when there is a special 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below.
necessity.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing posi-
tion adjustment) must have been completed.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy. 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original images.
Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)

cation ratio Original dimension
100%
original
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than 10 20 90 100 110 copy
the original) 10 50 100 150 200 250
10 50 100 150 200 250
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 (%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
(Example 2) If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
Copy B +/- 0.5%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than If it is not within the specified range, perform the following proce-
the original) dures.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified DSPF
range (100 +/- 0.5%). Setting Default
Item Display Content
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 +/ range value
- 0.5%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following proce- magnification ratio adjustment
dure. (CCD)
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. magnification ratio adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification (CCD)
ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifica- magnification ratio adjustment
tion ratio is changed by about 0.1%. (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is magnification ratio adjustment
within the specified range (100 +/- 0.5%). (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
14-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
(main scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode) 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with the
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: scroll key.
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. surface)
* When U2 trouble occurs. SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back
surface)
* When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF mode copy image in
the main scanning direction is not proper. 7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When the DSPF is disassembled. When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed by 1,
a. Adjustment procedures
the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the document 8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
tray of the DSPF.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and both
surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
14-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(sub scanning direction)
Paper pass direction (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
A4 size This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
(Both the front surface * When the copy magnification ratio of the DSPF mode copy image in
and the back surface)
10mm 10mm the sub scanning direction is not proper.
* When the DSPF is disassembled.

1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the DSPF * When a U2 trouble occurs.
document tray. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and both 1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. adjustment mode (document table).
10mm
Paper pass direction

A4 size A
A=B
10mm
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. B
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original images.
10
50
2) Check the copy image center position.

If A - B = +/- 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
100
10
original
150
50
200
100
A'
copy
150
200
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following A' - B' = 1.0mm
formula:
(100%)
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 (%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) B'
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
+/- 0.5%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following proce-
dures.
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following proce-
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. dures.
SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Front
surface) 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio (Back 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
surface)
The entered value is set.
7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-key, When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position
and press [OK] key. is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification 6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
ratio is increased.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satisfied.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is changed by 0.1%.
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 15-B Scan image off-center adjustment
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is obtained. (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
ADJ 15 Scan image off-center
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
adjustment * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
(Manual adjustment) * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
15-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual * When the DSPF section is disassembled.
adjustment) (Document table mode) * When the DSPF unit is replaced.
CAUTION: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ15A
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. must have been properly adjusted.

1) Prepare the adjustment chart. Setting Default
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back surface range value
of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport direc- C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
tion. amount EDGE image loss amount
setting (SIDE1) setting
Paper transport direction D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
REAR image loss amount
Front surface Back surface
(SIDE1) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE1) setting
F Image loss LEAD_ Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 40
amount EDGE image loss amount
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) setting
H TRAIL_ Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 20
Draw a line at the center of the (SIDE2) setting
front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
transport direction. document off-center
adjustment
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF. J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the adjustment
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the front K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface and the back surface of the copy paper. surface magnification
ratio (Sub scan)
original copy * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
timing is delayed.
a * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter-
b measures against the case when shades are produced.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
(SIM50-12)
If the difference is within the range of 0 +/- 2.7mmm there is no SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
need to perform the adjustment. SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. (SIM50-6)
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
SIM50-12 OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
Setting Default 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
range value (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 (In the case of SIM50-6: When the adjustment value is increased,
center adjustment
the print image is shifted to the rear.)
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image position

is shifted to the rear frame side.
ADJ 16 Copy image position and image
1step = 0.1mm loss adjustment
SIM50-6 (Manual adjustment)
Setting Default
range value
16-A Copy image position, image loss, and void
A SIDE1 Front surface document 1 - 99 50 area adjustment (Manual adjustment)
scan position (Document table mode)
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface document 1 - 99 50
scan position * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
adjustment (CCD) * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.

* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. 4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that the 200% in the document table mode.
ADJ3 Print engine image skew, image position, image magnifi- When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
cation ratio, void area adjustments has been completed nor- image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% copy
mally. scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure below. (Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied in
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction either of different copy magnification ratios.)
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide plate. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen. Scale image 4.0mm position
Paper lead
edge
100%
5mm
200%
5mm 10mm
5) Image loss adjustment

When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in the
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values. below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, change
these adjustment items.
Setting Default
range value Paper lead edge
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
adjustment reference position
value (OC)
Copy area
B Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
Maginification ratio : 400%
area setting loss area setting
C value SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
setting 1 2 3 4
D Void area DENA Print lead edge 1 - 99 40 5mm 10mm
adjustment adjustment
E DENB Sub scanning 1 - 99 30
direction print range Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm
adjustment
F FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20 Adjust- Standard
REAR area adjustment Item/ Default
Content ment adjustment
Display value
G Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50 range value
adjustment OC center adjustment LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4.0
H Magnification SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 adjustment image loss +/- 1.0mm
ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio adjustment
correction OC adjustment (CCD) SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
I Sub scanning DENB- Manual feed 1 - 99 50 loss +/- 1.0mm
direction print MFT correction value adjustment
J area DENB- Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
correction CS1 value When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
K value DENB- Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the image
CS2 value loss is decreased.
L DENB- Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
CS3 value changed by 0.1mm.
M DENB- Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
CS4 value
N DENB-LC LCC/LCT/LCT 1 - 99 50
manual paper feed
correction value
O DENB- ADU correction value 1 - 99 55
ADU
P DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
correction value

16-B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual R Front surface
FACE
adjustment) (DSPF mode)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. L T
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. Put the position
* When U2 trouble occurs. marks.
* When the DSPF section is disassembled. F

Draw arrows.
This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in the
DSPF mode.
R Back surface
If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is BACK
shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document table
may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image in the
DSPF mode.
L T
1) Make a copy in the DSPF mode, and check for any shade on the
lead edge section of the copy image.
Put the position
marks.
Papar lead edge F
Draw arrows.
Image area
Setting Default
Shadow image of DSPF range value
A SIDE1 Front surface document 1 - 99 50
scan position adjustment
(CCD)
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge sec-
scan position adjustment
tion of the copy image, perform the following procedures. (CCD)
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key. C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. amount EDGE image loss amount
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home posi-
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
tion to the DSPF scanning position is increased. When the set
REAR loss amount setting
value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by (SIDE1)
0.1mm. E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is obtained. EDGE image loss amount
(SIDE1) setting
CAUTION: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
ADJ16C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (DSPF mode). setting (SIDE2) setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
16-C Copy image position, image loss, void area REAR loss amount setting
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIDE2)
(DSPF mode) EDGE image loss amount
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: (SIDE2) setting
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When the DSPF section is disassembled. surface magnification
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. ratio (Sub scan)
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
The adjustment chart can be made by the following procedures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, the
front end, and the rear end as well as the identification marks of
the front surface and the back surface.

* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan (Rear edge image loss adjustment)
timing is delayed. 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to confirm
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the front surface
loss is increased. and the back surface.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter- Paper rear edge
measures against the case when shades are produced.
(Lead edge image loss adjustment)

1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to the
following values.
(Standard set value)
LEAD EDGE (SIDE 1): Copy image
20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
LEAD EDGE (SIDE 2):
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
increased.) Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to confirm
dure.
that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 +/- 1.0mm on the front
surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge must be 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2) with
10-key, and press [OK] key.
aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
the image lead edge.
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment)

Copy image
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF mode. Check to confirm
that the image losses on the front frame side and the rear frame
side are 2.0 +/- 2.0mm on the front surface and the back surface.
Paper F Image loss

Image loss side edge 2.0 2.0mm
4.0 1.0mm
Copy image
dure.
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
press [OK] key.
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the presumed
image lead edge.
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image position Copy image
is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.) Paper R Image loss
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) side edge 2.0 2.0mm
dure.
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) / FRONT/
REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)

ADJ 17 Finisher and punch unit
adjustments (alignment, punch
hole position, staple position)
* When the finisher is disassembled.
* When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
* When the punch unit is disassembled.
* When the punch control PWB is replaced.
* When the alignment is improper.
* When the punch hole position is shifted.
* When the staple position is shifted.

2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
4K finisher (100 sheet staple) (MX-FN21)
Item Display Content Setting range Default value

A BUFFER SHIFT1 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 1 50 - 150 100
B BUFFER SHIFT2 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 2 50 - 150 100
C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
D STAPLE FRONT(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
E STAPLE FRONT(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
F STAPLE REAR(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
G STAPLE REAR(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
H STAPLE CENTER Stapling position adjustment (Center 2 positions) 85 - 115 100
I PUNCH Y Punch hole position adjustment (Y: Main scanning direction) 85 - 115 100
J PUNCH X Punch hole position adjustment (X: Sub scanning direction) 50 - 150 100
K PUNCH SKEW Punch mode skew adjustment 98 - 102 100
L PUNCH SKEW SHIN Punch mode skew adjustment (thin paper) 99 - 103 100
4K saddle stitch finisher (100 sheet staple) (MX-FN22)
Item Display Content Setting range Default value

A BUFFER SHIFT1 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 1 50 - 150 100
B BUFFER SHIFT2 Buffer paper shift amount adjustment 2 50 - 150 100
C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
D STAPLE FRONT(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
E STAPLE FRONT(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Front 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
F STAPLE REAR(S-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Small width) 70 - 130 100
G STAPLE REAR(W-WIDTH) Stapling position adjustment (Rear 1 position/Wide width) 70 - 130 100
H STAPLE CENTER Stapling position adjustment (Center 2 positions) 85 - 115 100
I PUNCH Y Punch hole position adjustment (Y: Main scanning direction) 85 - 115 100
J PUNCH X Punch hole position adjustment (X: Sub scanning direction) 50 - 150 100
K PUNCH SKEW Punch mode skew adjustment 98 - 102 100
L PUNCH SKEW SHIN Punch mode skew adjustment (thin paper) 99 - 103 100
M SDL FOLD Saddle folding position adjustment 80 - 120 100
N SDL STPL Saddle stitch position adjustment 80 - 120 100
O SDL DIVIDE Saddle separation position adjustment 85 - 115 100
P SDL WIDTH Saddle alignment width adjustment 80 - 120 100
Q STPL/FOLD 1 Stapling/Folding position adjustment value 13 x 19 42 - 58 50
R UNBOUND FOLD 1 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value A4R/LTRR 42 - 58 50
S UNBOUND FOLD 2 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value B4/LGL 42 - 58 50
T UNBOUND FOLD 3 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value A3/LDR 42 - 58 50
U UNBOUND FOLD 4 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value SRA3/12 x 18 42 - 58 50
V UNBOUND FOLD 5 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value 13 x 19 42 - 58 50
W UNBOUND FOLD 6 Not-stapled folding position adjustment value (User-defined size) 42 - 58 50
X TRIMMER REG S (*) Trimmer registration position adjustment (Small size) 50 - 150 100
Y TRIMMER REG L (*) Trimmer registration position adjustment (Large size) 50 - 150 100
Z TRIMMER CUT S (*) Trimmer cut position adjustment (Small size) 50 - 150 100
AA TRIMMER CUT L (*) Trimmer cut position adjustment (Large size) 50 - 150 100
(*): Setting can be made only when the trimmer unit is installed.
3) Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.

4) Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.

<Descriptions of keys>
ADJ 18 DSPF CCD calibration Display Content
OC SHADING OC analog correction level correction, and shading
18-A Shading adjustment (Calibration) correction data making (Document table mode)
DSPF Analog correction level correction, and shading correction
(DSPF mode)
SHADING data making (DSPF mode)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced. <Result display>
* When a U2 trouble occurs. Display Content
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced. COMPLETE Normal completion
ERROR Abnormal completion
(1) Note before adjustment
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scanning
glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it with
18-B CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
alcohol.)
(DSPF mode)
2) Open the DSPF document scanning section, insert the shading
adjustment sheet (UKOG-0333FCZZ), and close the DSPF docu- This adjustment is required in the following cases:
ment scanning section. * When the DSPF CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scanning
glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it with
alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the scanner adjustment chart (UKOG-
0356FCZZ) are free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
* When inserting the shading adjustment sheet, insert it along the

rear edge frame so that the rear edge of the shading adjust-
ment sheet comes to the root of the actuator.

4) Select [DSPF SHADING].
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The shading adjustment process is
started.)
* The shading adjustment sheet is transported by about 25mm,
and shading data are obtained during transport.
* During shading adjustment, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is dis-
played.
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during shading adjustment,
the operation is interrupted.
* When shading adjustment is completed normally, [EXECUTE]
key returns to the normal display and "COMPLETE" is dis-
played.

(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the scanner adjustment chart face-down in the DSPF paper ADJ 19 DSPF back surface color balance
feed tray. exposure adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
This adjustment is to manually adjust the color balance of R, G, and B
on the DSPF back surface in the following cases:
• There is a difference in hue between the front surface and the back
surface of a duplex copy (scan) after executing SIM63-03 (auto-
matic adjustment of the scanner and the DSPF color balance and
color coefficient).
• The color balance is requested to be changed (customized) by the
user.
1) Place the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/Z1) on the
document table (OC), and press START key twice in the Text/Print
Photo mode to make a 2-sided copy.
2) Use the 2-sided copy made in procedure 1) as an original to make
a 2-sided copy in the Text/Print mode with the DSPF.
3) Check the tint of the front and the back surfaces.
If the scanner adjustment chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 If there is any difference, execute procedures 4) and later.
to set the CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the
4) Referring to the color sample below, check the hue on the back
adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
surface to confirm which color is shifted from that on the front sur-
method using the scanner adjustment chart.
face.
3) When a color key is selected, the adjustment value of the selected Adjustment value
color is displayed. Low 50 High
* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) key is selected, the
When R is increased, red is emphasized.
selected key is highlighted and the adjustment value of the R
When R is decreased, cyan is emphasized.
selected color is displayed.
When G is increased, green is emphasized.
* Only one color key can be selected, and the selected key is G
When G is decreased, magenta is emphasized.
highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
When B is increased, blue is emphasized.
* If there is a page over [UP], an active display is shown and the B
When B is decreased, yellow is emphasized.
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display grays
out and the operation is invalid. 5) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
If there is a page under [DOWN], an active display is shown and For the color (R, G, B) which is shifted, the value is adjusted.
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the dis- 6) Select "DSPF" and select the color (G:R / H:G / I:B) to be adjusted
play grays out and the operation is invalid. with the scroll key.
4) When [DSPF] key is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color auto- 7) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
matic adjustment execution screen is displayed.
The adjustment value can be set in the range of (1 - 99).
5) Press [EXECUTE] key and it is highlighted and the color auto All the initial values are set to 50.
adjustment is executed.
To increase the color density, increase the adjustment value. To
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the automatic adjust- decrease, decrease the adjustment value.
ment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
8) Make a duplex copy of UKOG-0326FCZZ/Z1) and a user docu-
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed in ment, as needed, in the Text/Print mode with the DSPF, and
the initial screen. check the adjustment result.
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis- Repeat procedures 3) - 8) until the difference in hue between the
played. front surface and the back surface is eliminated or until the user
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error satisfaction is obtained.
patch numbers are displayed. [Supplement] Since the read value varies according to the document
When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to the initial type, thickness, and other conditions, perform the adjustment by using
screen. (The previous value is displayed) the user document if necessary.
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played. When [RESULT] key is pressed, the display returns to the
initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is dis-
played.)

2) [Setting the correction value back to default value (for
ADJ 20 FR density variation correction readjustment)]
Clear the adjustment by Sim 61-13 (Laser Power Auto/
Make sure followings are confirmed prior to the adjustment:
Manual correction data clear). Make sure to execute this
• Charge unevenness is not occurring adjustment again after the clearance.
• A paper tray with A4 (LT) size papers is available. 7) Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjust-
• The auto correction of FR density uniformity will clear the correction ment) after completing all the adjustments.
value in “ADJ20B manual correction of FR density uniformity”. Do
not execute auto correction if you wish to maintain the manual cor- 20-B FR density uniformity visual inspection
rection value.
(CMYK 5 point adjustment or CMYK 32point
• Execute Sim 61-13 if any one of DV unit, Drum Process unit and
LSU unit has been replaced.
adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
20-A FR density uniformity auto correction • Ununiformed density toward main scan direction has been
observed:
(32 point adjustment for all colors)
1) Enter Simulation 61-12.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases.
2) Press [VISUAL INSPECTION] key.
• Ununiformed density toward main scan direction has been observed
Press [DATA] to confirm present manual correction value.
1) Enter Simulation 61-11.
3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [AUTO CORRECTION] key.
The adjustment pattern will be output.
Press [DATA] to confirm present auto correction value.
4) Check the adjustment pattern in the step 3).
3) Select the density level to adjust and press [EXECUTE] key.
Select either [5 POINT CORRECTION] or [32 POINT CORREC-
The adjustment pattern will be output.
TION], enter adjustment value and press [EXECUTE] key.
* Default Mode: Middle
Larger the adjustment value, the higher the density and vice
4) Place the adjustment pattern in the step 3) and the arrows on the versa.
adjustment pattern should be placed on left side (A4R/LTR direc-
tion) on the document table. and press [EXECUTE] key. Also put
five blank sheets on top of the adjustment pattern.
5) The adjustment result pattern will be printed automatically.

Check whether density on front and rear side matches.
5) After scanning the adjustment pattern and the adjustment result

pattern will be printed automatically. Check whether density on
front and rear side matches.
6) After step5) if you furthermore require this adjustment, press

[RETRY] key and repeat the step 3) to 5).
NOTE: [Setting the correction value back to default value (for
readjustment)]
Clear the adjustment by Sim 61-13 (Laser Power Auto/
Manual Correction Data Clear). Make sure to execute this
adjustment again after the clearance.
6) Press [RETRY] and repeat the steps in 3) to 5), if the density 7) Execute Simulation 46-74 (Copy/Printer color balance adjust-
between front and rear is still unevenness with result in step 5). ment) after completing all the adjustments.
NOTE: 1) As you repeat this procedure, the accuracy of this
adjustment will increase that expected to remedy the
color unevenness between front and rear.

[6] SIMULATION
MX-8090N
Service Manual
1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis) data
check, clear
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc) data
transport
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine
Simulation mode
Easy mode Displays commonly used simulations for each category
allowing easy access for technicians to change settings,
perform maintenance and adjustments
Classic mode All simulations are listed and can be accessed by
entering the main code, then sub code as per previous
model series
2. Function of each key
3) Touch the (#) key → Asterisk (*) key → Clear key → Asterisk
(*) key → Ready for input of main code of simulation
No. Name Function

1 TEST key Change test mode
2 Mode setting key Change mode (Easy mode, Classic mode)
3 Language setting key Change language in simulation mode
4 INFO key Display operation of current display
5 EXIT key Exit from simulation mode
6 BACK key Back to the previous display
7 CLEAR key Clear input value
3. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode
1) Double click the HOME key
2) Touch the Ver. Display section (10 key mode input mode
screen)
MX-8090N SIMULATION 6 – 1
4. List of simulation codes
A. List of Easy mode
Installation
The first menu The second menu SIM number SIM Title
1 Adjustment 1 Process 25-2 Automatic developer adjustment
46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto adjustment
50-22 Auto adjustment of registration & drum position
2 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position adjustment
3 Copy 46-21 Color copy gradation manual adjustment
4 Printer 67-25 Printer gradation manual adjustment
64-05 Printer self print (PCL)
5 Image Quality Adjustment 63-02 Shading execution
63-03 Scanner color balance auto adjustment
44-06 High density / engine halftone process control compulsory execution
44-26 Half tone density correct execution
2 Registration Settings 1 Function/Option settings 26-01 Paper output system setup
26-02 Size setup
26-03 Auditor setup
26-50 Function setting
26-65 Finisher alarm mode setup (staple limit)
26-78 ROPE password setting
2 Counter mode 26-05 A3(11x17) countup
26-08 Banner size countup
26-52 A blank paper count mode setup
3 FAX/Image send settings 66-01 Image send software SW. setting
4 Toner setting 26-18 Toner save mode setup
26-69 Toner near end setting
5 FSS setting 27-02 FSS function setup (input)
27-04 FSS function setup
27-07 FSS function setup (function)
27-09 FSS function adjustment
27-14 FSS test mode setup
27-15 FSS connect status
27-16 FSS alert setting
27-17 FSS paper order alert setting
3 Data display 1 Counter display 22-01 Counter display
22-09 Paper feed counter display
22-13 Process cartridge display
2 System/Version 22-05 ROM version data display
22-10 Machine system display
3 List printing 22-06 Data print mode
23-02 JAM/trouble data print mode
4 USB storage 56-99 Export all log data
4 Version upgrade 1 49-01 Firmware update
2 49-03 E-manual update
3 49-05 Water mark update
4 49-06 OCR data update
5 49-10 ACU update
5 Error release 1 13 U1 trouble cancellation
2 14 Trouble cancellation (other)
3 15 Paper feed trouble cancellation
4 16 U2 trouble cancellation
6 Ready for transport 1 06-90 Load move for shipment
10 History 1 Date list Use SIM
Maintenance
22-08 Org./staple counter display
2 JAM history data display 22-03 JAM history data display
22-12 SPF JAM history data display
2 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-10 Manual image position adjustment
2 Process 25-02 Automatic developer adjustment
44-02 Process control gain adjustment
3 Image Quality Adjustment 44-02 Process control gain adjustment
44-06 High density / engine halftone process control compulsory execution
44-26 Half tone density correct execution
61-13 Laser power correction data clear
61-11 Laser power auto correction
63-03 Scanner color balance auto adjustment
63-05 Standard scanner gamma setup
4 Cleaning 06-04 Charger cleaner check
43-31 Fuser web cleaning check
5 Replacing developer 25-02 Automatic developer adjustment
3 Counter clear 1 24-01 JAM/trouble counter data clear
2 24-02 Paper feed counter clear
3 24-03 Org./output counter data clear
4 24-04 Maintenance counter clear
4 Registration Settings 1 21-01 Maintenance cycle setup
5 Version upgrade 1 49-01 Firmware update
2 49-03 E-manual update
3 49-05 Water mark update
4 49-06 OCR data update
5 49-10 ACU update
6 Error release 1 13 U1 trouble cancellation
2 14 Trouble cancellation(other)
3 15 Paper feed trouble cancellation
4 16 U2 trouble cancellation
Adjustment and Settings

1 Adjustment 1 Positioning 50-01 Copy edge adjustment
50-05 Print edge adjustment
50-06 SPF edge adjustment
50-10 Manual image position adjustment
50-12 Original center offset setup
48-01 Ratio adjustment
48-05 Motor speed adjustment
2 Image Quality Automatic 50-22 Auto adjustment of registration & drum position
Adjustment 50-20 Registration adjustment
3 Image Quality Adjustment 61-14 Laser power setting collective input
61-13 Laser power correction data clear
46-54 Copy gradation auto adjustment(at dither)
46-52 Copy gradation data clear(at dither)
67-54 Printer gradation auto adjustment(at dither)
67-52 Printer gradation data clear(at dither)
67-21 Print output manual adjustment
2 Process 1 25-02 Automatic developer adjustment
2 44-02 Process control gain adjustment
3 46-74 Copy/printer gradation auto adjustment
3 Scanner/SPF 1 41-01 PD sensor check
2 41-02 Document size photo-sensor setup
3 46-09 Exposure adjustment(SFP)
4 63-02 Shading execution
5 53-06 SPF tray adjustment
6 53-08 SPF scanning position adjustment
7 63-03 Scanner color balance auto adjustment
8 63-05 Standard scanner gamma setup
4 Paper feeding, 1 40-02 Bypass tray adjustment
Transport and paper 2 40-12 Tray adjustment
ejection 3 03-10 Finisher adjustment
4 03-42 Folding unit adjustment
5 03-62 Stacker adjustment
5 Copy 1 46-21 Color copy gradation manual adjustment
2 44-21 Half tone process control standard value register setup
3 46-24 Copy gradation auto adjustment
4 46-54 Copy gradation auto adjustment(at dither)
5 63-07 Copy gradation auto adjustment target setup:service
6 63-08 Copy gradation auto adjustment target clear:service
7 63-11 Copy gradation auto adjustment target select
6 Printer 1 67-24 Printer gradation auto adjustment
2 67-25 Printer gradation manual adjustment
3 67-26 Printer gradation auto adjustment target select
4 67-27 Printer gradation auto adjustment target setup:service
5 67-28 Printer gradation auto adjustment target clear:service
7 Touch panel 1 65-01 Touch panel adjustment
8 Function/Option 1 64-02 Self print(B/W) : service
settings
B. List of Classic mode

Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section DSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. DSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
30 Inserter sensor check Inserter
31 Inserter individual load check Inserter
40 Paper folding unit sensor check Paper folding unit
41 Paper fold unit individual load check Paper folding unit
42 Paper folding unit adjustment Paper folding unit
50 Decurler sensor check Decurler
51 Decurler individual load check Decurler unit
60 Stacker sensor check Stacker unit
61 Stacker individual load check Stacker unit
62 Stacker adjustment Stacker unit
70 Booklet maker sensor check Booklet maker
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
control circuit of those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
those.
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
transport clutch (LTRC).
10 LCT warm air heater temperature setting LCT
11 LCT fan Duty setting LCT
14 LCT temperature and humidity sensor monitor display LCT
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
4 Used to check the cleaning operation of the PTC and the main charger. Process
6 Used to perform fusing pressure release and applying, and to check the operations of the control circuits. Fusing
7 Used to refresh the fuser belt. Fusing
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
7 6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for
each color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) DSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
10 Main charger total current output setting Process
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Toner supply section
2 Used to check the operations of the toner remaining quantity sensor and the control circuit. Toner supply section
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble. LCC/LCT
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
12 Used to check the DSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the DSPF
number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
41 Used to check JAM code information.
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
43 JAM data details display
60 Used to display the utility counter mode history data.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
81 Used to export paper feed time list.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter value and the toner hopper remaining quantity counter.
(After replacing developer, clear these counters.)
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
5 Used to display the toner density correction data. (Not used in the market.) Process
10 Developer/drum serial no setting
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this Paper feed
simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
26 3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale)
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start
to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
60 Used to setup the utility counter mode history data.
61 Used to setup the threshold for coverage.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
66 Simulation password setting.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
85 Simulation function setting.
27 2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
10 Used to check the operations of the Main unit double feed sensor.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
12 Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection level. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
2 Used to set the fusing operation and preheating.
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
31 Used to check fusing web cleaning.
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
35 Fusing nip operation check Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
44 6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photoconductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
17 Process refresh execution Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to check the deflection of the OPC drum. Process
32 Used to perform the bias modulation execution.
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
48 Used to set the copy output resolution.
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
55 Used to adjust the drop out color in the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
65 Used to set the color correction table.
66 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
68 Used to adjust the auto resolution judgment.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images.
91 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of black text.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
6 Used to perform the OCR update.
10 Used to perform the ACU update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 : ‘19/March.
50 5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (DSPF mode) DSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC
drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
23 Used to set the temperature correction.
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the DSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF mode document scan position.
9 DSPF dirt detection setting.
10 DSPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM and HDD (including user authentication data and address data)
2 to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
7 Used to export system log data.
8 Used to perform ICC profile update.
15 Used to restore MFP EEPROM data.
99 Used to export system log data.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
2 Used to set the laser power (FIERY)
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
11 Used to correct the laser power automatically.
12 Laser power manual correction LSU
13 Used to clear the laser power correction value.
14 Used to set the laser power correction.
2 62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the
2
system area)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
20 Used to check the operation of the mirroring hard disk. Mirroring hard disk
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
67 17 Printer reset Printer
21 Print output manual adjustment
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. Printer
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
41 Used to set the threshold for judging the selected color printing or the black color printing in the black and Printer
white mode.
42 Used to adjust the gradation by increasing /decreasing the selected color componet amount or the black Printer
color component amount in the black and white mode.
43 2 Color mode balance adjustment Printer
46 Used to adjust print image enhancement
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) Printer
5. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1
1-1 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section DSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The DSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
scan resolution (operation speed). ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI Item/Display Operation mode Default value
(372.0mm/s) (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
600DPI 600DPI (496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
(264.0mm/s) 400DPI 400DPI
1200DPI 1200DPI (396.0mm/s)
(132.0mm/s) 600DPI 600DPI
(264.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(496.0mm/s) (496.0mm/s)
1-2 400DPI 400DPI
(396.0mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check 600DPI 600DPI
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner (264.0mm/s)
(reading) section and the related circuits.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure 2-2
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. Purpose Operation test/check
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
tion.
sors and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
circuits.
1-5
Section DSPF
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
(reading) unit and the control circuit. played.
Section Scanner (reading) The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Operation/Procedure are highlighted.
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
Display Content
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. SSET DSPF installation detector
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SOCD DSPF open/close sensor
resolution (operation speed). SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SLCOV DSPF lower door open/close sensor
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1
(372.0mm/s) (372.0mm/s) SPPD2 DSPF document pass sensor 2
400DPI 400DPI SPPD3 DSPF document pass sensor 3
(372.0mm/s) SPPD4 DSPF document pass sensor 4
600DPI 600DPI SPPD5 DSPF document pass sensor 5
(264.0mm/s)
SPOD DSPF document exit sensor
1200DPI 1200DPI
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor
(132.0mm/s)
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor
STMPU DSPF stamp unit installation detection
SWD_LEN DSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SWD_AD DSPF document detection volume output AD value
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
2-3 No,/Display item Content
24 FFANLK Finisher fan motor lock detection
Purpose Operation test/check 25 FSJOGD Finisher stapler alignment interference detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads 26 FSAD Finisher staple safety SW
in the automatic document feeder and the 27 FSHTD Finisher shutter open detection
control circuit. 28 FCD Finisher connection detection
Section DSPF 29 FFDD Finisher front cover open detection
30 F24V Finisher 24V output interruption detection
Operation/Procedure
31 FPSW1 Finisher PUSHSW1 detection
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel 32 FPSW2 Finisher PUSHSW2 detection
key. 33 FPSW3 Finisher PUSHSW3 detection
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 34 FAED21 Finisher tray 2 area detection 1
The selected load performs the operation. 35 FAED22 Finisher tray 2 area detection 2
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 36 FAED23 Finisher tray 2 area detection 3
Finisher (100-sheet stapling)

Display Content
SPFM DSPF transport motor No,/Display item Content
SPOM DSPF document exit motor 1 FNS103 Staple tray paper sensor
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor 2 FNS122 Finisher tray 1 area 1 sensor
SPFFAN DSPF cooling fan motor 3 FNS123 Finisher tray 1 area 2 sensor
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch 4 FNS124 Finisher tray 1 area 3 sensor
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch 5 FNS146 Discharge paper surface detection
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch 6 FNS149 YO paper surface sensor
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch 7 FNS118 Process tray paper surface sensor
STMPS Stamp solenoid 8 FNS143 Lower tray paper surface sensor
9 FNS114 YOHP sensor
10 FNS112 Take-up switch home position sensor
11 FNS135 Paper holding lever home position sensor
12 FNS111 Roller nip home position sensor
3 13 FNS142 Buffer flapper home position sensor
14 FNS102 Discharged paper detection
15 FNS101 Entry port paper detection
3-2
16 FNS131 Staple drive home position detection
Purpose Operation test/check 17 FNS128 Staple area sensor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- 18 FNSW110 Tray 1 interference switch
sors and the detectors in the finisher and 19 FNS134 Staple cart sensor
the control circuit. 20 FNS132 Staple lead edge position detection
21 FNS133 Staple empty detection
Section Finisher
22 FNS104 Tray 1 paper detection
Operation/Procedure
23 FNS105 Tray 2 paper detection
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 24 FNS130 Tray 3 paper detection
played. 25 FNPCH_CON Punch unit connection detection
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active 26 FNSW2 PUSHSW2 detection
are highlighted. 27 FNSW1 PUSHSW1 detection
28 FNS107 Staple shift home position detection
NOTE: When the punch module is installed, the code names are
29 FNS108 Alignment plate front home position sensor
displayed at the back of the sensor display.
30 FNS109 Alignment plate rear home position sensor
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) 31 FNS106 Shutter open detection
No,/Display item Content 32 FNS110 Oscillation guide open detection
1 PDPPD1 Finisher paper pass paper transport detector 1 33 FNSW3-1 DIPSW1 detection
2 PDPPD2 Finisher paper pass paper transport detector 2 34 FNSW3-2 DIPSW2 detection
3 PDOS Finisher paper pass cover open/close sensor 35 FNSW3-3 DIPSW3 detection
4 FED Finisher entry port paper detection 36 FNSW3-4 DIPSW4 detection
5 FAED1 Finisher tray 1 area detection 1 37 FNS129 Finisher front cover sensor
6 FAED2 Finisher tray 1 area detection 2 38 FNSW103 Stapler safety switch
7 FAED3 Finisher tray 1 area detection 3 39 FNSW101 Finisher front cover switch
8 FFJHPD Finisher alignment home position detection front 40 FNS148 Shutter close detection
9 FRJHPD Finisher alignment home position detection rear 41 FNSW102 Oscillation guide switch
10 FBED1 Finisher tray 1 paper detection 42 FNS125 Tray 2 area 1 sensor
11 FBED2 Finisher tray 2 paper detection 43 FNS126 Tray 2 area 2 sensor
12 FCCD Finisher tray approach detection 44 FNS127 Tray 2 area 3 sensor
13 FSLD1 Finisher tray 1 paper surface detection 45 FNS113 Rear edge falling home position sensor
14 FPDD1 Finisher discharged paper detection 46 FNS138 YO rear home position sensor
15 FSLD2 Finisher tray 2 paper surface detection 47 FNS139 YO front home position sensor
16 FASHPD Finisher rear edge assist home position detection 48 FNS136 Guide sub rear home position sensor
17 FSWHPD Finisher oscillation guide home position detection 49 FNS137 Guide sub front home position sensor
18 FSWOPD Finisher oscillation guide open detection 50 FN24V-DET 24V-DETECT
19 FSTPD Finisher staple tray paper detection 51 FN24V1-DET 24V1-DETECT
20 FSHPD Finisher staple drive home position detection 52 FNAC-RELAY-ON Relay on signal
21 FSTHPD Finisher staple shift home position detection 53 FNS115 Gripper home position sensor
22 FSD Finisher staple empty detection 54 FNS140 Gripper front/rear sensor
23 FSTD Finisher staple lead edge position detection 55 FNS116 Gripper base front sensor
No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
56 FNS117 Gripper base rear sensor 9 FSS229 Folding home position sensor
57 FNM19-LD Load tray upper motor arm 10 FSS223 Staple drive home position sensor
58 FNM20-LD Load tray lower motor arm 11 FSS208 Pushing home position
59 FNFAN2-ALM Power supply fan alarm 12 FSS203 Vertical path sensor
60 FNFAN1-ALM PWB cooling fan alarm 13 FSS226 Bundle paper exit path sensor 1
61 FNFAN5-ALM Upper tray fan alarm 14 FST-CON Trimmer connection detection
62 FNFAN4-ALM Lower tray fan alarm 15 FSS225 Staple 2 sensor
63 FNS200 Cut staple sensor 16 FSS224 Staple 1 sensor
64 FNSDL_CON Saddle connection detection 17 FSS207 Roller guide home position sensor
65 FNFOLD_CON Folding unit connection detection 18 FSS227 Bundle paper exit bus sensor 2
66 FNGBC_CON GBC punch connection detection 19 FSS218 Rear edge sorting home position
67 FNFLD-ETR-ST- Folding unit EntryStartAck signal 20 FSS201 Entry port path sensor
ACK 21 FS24V-DET Interlock power supply (24V) detection
68 FNFLD-EJCT-ST Folding unit EjectStart signal
69 PIS150 Transfer unit bus sensor Punch module (Finisher (50-sheet stapling))
70 PISW200 Transfer unit front cover switch No,/Display item Content
71 PIUNITMOT_ALM Transfer unit transport motor lock detection 1 FPE Punch motor lock detection
signal 2 FPUC Punch unit connection detection
72 PIPASSUNIT-CON Transfer unit connection detection 3 FPHPD Punch home position detection
4 FPSHPD Punch side registration home position detection
Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling)
5 FPFDD Punch front door open detection
No,/Display item Content 6 FPDD Punch dust detection
1 FSSUC Finisher saddle staple unit detection 7 FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW
2 FSPIND Finisher saddle entry port paper detection
3 FSPDD Finisher saddle paper exit detection Punch module (Finisher (100-sheet stapling))
4 FSDTPD Finisher saddle tray paper detection
No,/Display item Content
5 FS1PD Finisher saddle paper detection 1
1 FCS105 Punch motor clock detection
2 FCPCB2 Punch dust sensor
3 FCS104 Punch home position detection
8 FSLGE Finisher paper pushing plate motor lock detection
4 FCS101 Punch horizontal registration home position detection
9 FSLGHPD Finisher paper pushing plate home position detection
5 FCPCB31 Punch horizontal registration A3 sensor
10 FSLGTD Finisher paper pushing plate lead edge position
6 FCPCB32 Punch horizontal registration LD sensor
detection
7 FCPCB33 Punch horizontal registration B4 sensor
11 FSFOE Finisher paper folding motor lock detection
8 FCPCB34 Punch horizontal registration A4R sensor
12 FSFOHPD Finisher paper folding home position detection
9 FCPCB35 Punch horizontal registration B5R sensor
13 FSPPHPD Finisher paper positioning plate home position
detection 10 FCS102 Punch hole motor position sensor
14 FSPPPD Finisher paper positioning plate paper detection 11 FCS103 Punch hole motor 2-hole/3-hole sensor
15 FSAHPD Finisher alignment plate home position detection 12 FCSW1-1 Punch DIPSW1
16 FSSHPD Finisher stitcher home position detection 13 FCSW1-2 Punch DIPSW2
17 FSVPPD Finisher vertical path paper detection
DIPSW (Finisher (50-sheet stapling))
18 FSCRPD Finisher semi-circular roller phase detection
19 FSGHPD Finisher guide home position detection No,/Display item Content
20 FSSHP1 Finisher stitch operation home position detection 1 1 FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection
21 FSSHP2 Finisher stitch operation home position detection 2 2 FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection
22 FSSD1 Finisher saddle needle presence detection 1 3 FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection
23 FSSD2 Finisher saddle needle presence detection 2 4 FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection
24 FSGHPC Finisher paper folding guide home position sensor 5 FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection
connection detection 6 FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection
25 FSFOHPC Finisher paper folding home position sensor 7 FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection
connector connection detection 8 FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection
26 FSSHPC Finisher stitcher home position sensor connection
detection DIPSW (Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling))
27 FSLGTC Finisher paper pushing plate lead edge position
sensor connector connection detection No,/Display item Content
28 FSINDD Finisher inlet port cover open detection 1 FSDSW1 S-DIPSWS1 detection
29 FSINDSW Finisher saddle inlet port door detection 2 FSDSW2 S-DIPSWS2 detection
30 FSFDSW Finisher front door open detection SW 3 FSDSW3 S-DIPSWS3 detection
31 FSPSW1 Finisher S-PUSHSW detection 4 FSDSW4 S-DIPSWS4 detection
32 FSBHPC Finisher paper pushing plate home position sensor 5 FSDSW5 S-DIPSWS5 detection
connector connection detection 6 FSDSW6 S-DIPSWS6 detection
7 FSDSW7 S-DIPSWS7 detection
Saddle finisher (100-sheet stapling) 8 FSDSW8 S-DIPSWS8 detection

Folding unit (100-sheet stapling)
1 FSS213 Pushing clock sensor
2 FSS214 Folding clock sensor No,/Display item Content
3 FSS228 Saddle tray paper sensor 1 FLENTRY Paper transfer start request
4 FSS219 Rear edge holding shift home position 2 FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response
5 FSS221 Rear edge holding home position 3 FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor
6 FSS206 Alignment plate home position 4 FLS31 Separation timing sensor
7 FSS205 Lead edge stopper home position 5 FLS32 Folding position accurate detection sensor
8 FSS222 Pulling separation home position 6 FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor
No,/Display item Content No,/Display item Content
7 FLS25 Lead edge guide home position sensor 12 FSWM Finisher oscillation motor
8 FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper home position sensor 13 FASM Finisher rear edge assist motor
9 FLS23 Upper stopper section home position sensor 14 FINRRS Finisher inlet port roller separation solenoid
10 FLS22 Discharged 1 paper sensor 15 FBRRS Finisher buffer roller separation solenoid
11 FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) home 16 FFDRRS Finisher paper exit roller separation solenoid
position sensor 17 FBES Finisher buffer rear edge holding solenoid
12 FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (paper exit tray) full sensor 18 FSHC Finisher shutter open/close clutch
13 FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) paper 19 FAORC Finisher bundle exit lower roller clutch
sensor
14 FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
15 FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal No,/Display item Content
16 FLSW1 Front cover sensor 1 FNM101 Entry port transport motor
17 FLS20 Entry port sensor 2 FNM104 Paper delivery transport motor
18 FLS21 Discharged paper 2 sensor 3 FNM108 Front alignment motor
19 FLSW3-1 DipSW1 4 FNM107 Stapler shift motor
20 FLSW3-2 DipSW2 5 FNM105 Load tray upper motor
21 FLSW3-3 DipSW3 6 FNM115 Staple motor
22 FLSW3-4 DipSW4 7 FNM110 Oscillation guide motor
23 FLSW3-5 DipSW5 8 FNM102 Buffer transport motor
24 FLSW3-6 DipSW6 9 FNM106 Load tray lower motor
25 FLSW3-7 DipSW7 10 FNM119 Roller nip motor
26 FLSW3-8 DipSW8 11 FNM114 YO motor
27 FLSW1 PushSW1 12 FNM120 Guide motor
28 FLSW2 PushSW2 13 FNM113 Rear edge falling motor
29 FLFAN3_LOCK Power supply fan lock detection signal 14 FNM117 Gripper belt motor
15 FNM116 Gripper arm motor
Trimming module (100-sheet stapling)
16 FNM121 Take-up transport motor
No,/Display item Content 17 FNM112 Take-up swing motor
1 FTS108 Cutter motor clock sensor 18 FNM118 Paper holding lever motor
2 FTS105 Registration home position sensor 19 FNM109 Rear alignment motor
3 FTS106 Press motor home position sensor 20 FNCL102 Shutter clutch
4 FTS104 Rear estrangement motor home position sensor 21 FNM122 Paper delivery lower transport motor
5 FTS102 Front estrangement motor home position sensor 22 FNSL101 Oscillation safety switch solenoid
6 FTS103 Paper delivery sensor 23 FNFAN102 PWB cooling fan
7 FTS101 Inlet sensor 24 FNFAN103 Upper tray cooling fan
8 FTS111 Waste paper full sensor 25 FNFAN104 Lower tray cooling fan
9 FTS109 Waste paper box detection sensor 26 PIM301 Transfer unit transport motor lock (*1)
10 FTSW1-1 DIPSW1 detection
11 FTSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection *1: Operates only when the transport unit is installed.
Saddle stitch finisher (50-sheet stapling)
14 FTSW2 PUSHSW detection No,/Display item Content
1 FPPM Finisher saddle paper positioning motor
2 FSIFM Finisher saddle entry port transport motor
3 FSFM Finisher saddle transport motor
3-3 4 FSFOM Finisher paper folding motor
Purpose Operation test/check 5 FSGM Finisher guide motor
6 FSJM Finisher saddle alignment motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in 7 FSFSTM Finisher stitch motor front
the finisher and the control circuit. 8 FSRSTM Finisher stitch motor rear
Section Finisher 9 FSLGM Finisher paper holding motor
Operation/Procedure 10 FSFS Finisher saddle flapper solenoid
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. 11 FS1DFS Finisher paper deflection plate 1 solenoid
12 FS2DFS Finisher paper deflection plate 2 solenoid
13 FSFCS Finisher transport plate contact solenoid
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling)
Finisher (50-sheet stapling) No,/Display item Content
1 FSM200 Entry port transport motor
2 FSM201 Transport motor
1 PDPGS Finisher paper pass paper gate solenoid
3 FSM212 Alignment roller (lead edge roller) motor
2 PDPTM Finisher paper pass paper transport motor
4 FSSL206 Inlet port path select solenoid
3 PDCF Finisher paper pass cooling fan
5 FSSL205 Lead edge stopper solenoid
4 FFM Finisher paper transport motor 1
6 FSSL203 Lead edge separation solenoid 1
5 FAM Finisher bundle paper exit motor
7 FSSL204 Lead edge separation solenoid 2
6 FFJM Finisher alignment motor front
8 FSM202 Alignment motor
7 FRJM Finisher alignment motor rear
9 FSM203 Lead edge stopper motor
8 FFSM Finisher staple motor
10 FSM204 Roller guide motor
9 FTLM1 Finisher tray 1 lift motor
11 FSM210 Rear edge holding motor
10 FTLM2 Finisher tray 2 lift motor
12 FSM211 Rear edge shift motor
11 FFSM Finisher staple motor
13 FSM213 Flapping motor
No,/Display item Content Setting Default
14 FSM214 Pull-in roller (separation) motor range value
15 FSM209 Staple motor G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
16 FSM206 Folding motor REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width)
17 FSM205 Push motor (W-WIDTH)
H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100
Punch module (Finisher (50-sheet stapling)) CENTER (Center 2 positions)
I PUNCH Y *1 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
adjustment
1 FPNM Punch motor (Y: Main scanning direction)
2 FPSM Punch side registration motor J PUNCH X *1 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
adjustment
Folding unit (100-sheet stapling) (X: Sub scanning direction)
No,/Display item Content K PUNCH Punch mode skew 98 - 102 100
1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid SKEW *1 adjustment
2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid L PUNCH Punch mode skew 99 - 103 100
SKEW SHIN *1 adjustment (thin paper)
3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid
4 FLM11 Folding transport motor *1: Not saved when the punch is not installed.
5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor
6 FLM13 Exit port motor 2 Saddle stitch finisher (100-sheet stapling)
7 FLM14 Exit port motor 1 Setting Default
8 FLM5 Inlet port motor range value
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor SHIFT1 adjustment 1
11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100
12 FLM10 Lead edge holding guide motor SHIFT2 adjustment 2
13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (intermediate tray) motor C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (normal) D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (reverse) FRONT (Front 1 position/Small
(S-WIDTH) width)
Trimming module (100-sheet stapling) E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide
No,/Display item Content (W-WIDTH) width)
1 FTM101 Trimmer transport motor F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
2 FTM103 Inlet port separation motor REAR (Rear 1 position/Small
3 FTM104 Paper delivery separation motor (S-WIDTH) width)
4 FTM102 Registration motor G STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100
5 FTM106 Cutter motor REAR (Rear 1 position/Wide width)
6 FTSL101 Registration solenoid (W-WIDTH)
7 FTM105 Press motor H STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 85 - 115 100
CENTER (Center 2 positions)
8 FTSL102 Paddle solenoid
I PUNCH Y *2 Punch hole position 85 - 115 100
adjustment (Y: Main
scanning direction)
J PUNCH X *2 Punch hole position 50 - 150 100
3-10 adjustment (X: Sub
Purpose Adjustment scanning direction)
K PUNCH Punch mode skew 98 - 102 100
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
SKEW *2 adjustment
Section Finisher L PUNCH Punch mode skew 99 - 103 100
Operation/Procedure SKEW SHIN *2 adjustment (thin paper)
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch M SDL FOLD Saddle folding position 80 - 120 100
adjustment
panel.
N SDL STPL Saddle stitch position 80 - 120 100
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) O SDL DIVIDE Saddle separation position 85 - 115 100
adjustment
Finisher (100-sheet stapling)
P SDL WIDTH Saddle alignment width 80 - 120 100
Setting Default adjustment
range value Q STPL/FOLD 1 Stapling/Folding position 42 - 58 50
A BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100 adjustment value 13x19
SHIFT1 adjustment 1 R UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
B BUFFER Buffer paper shift amount 50 - 150 100 FOLD 1 adjustment value A4R/LTRR
SHIFT2 adjustment 2 S UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
C ALIGNMENT Alignment width adjustment 50 - 150 100 FOLD 2 adjustment value B4/LGL
D STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100 T UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
FRONT (Front 1 position/Small width) FOLD 3 adjustment value A3/LDR
(S-WIDTH) U UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
E STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100 FOLD 4 adjustment value SRA3/
FRONT (Front 1 position/Wide width) 12x18
(W-WIDTH) V UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
F STAPLE Stapling position adjustment 70 - 130 100 FOLD 5 adjustment value 13x19
REAR (Rear 1 position/Small width) W UNBOUND Not-stapled folding position 42 - 58 50
(S-WIDTH) FOLD 6 adjustment value (User-
defined size)
Setting Default 3-31
range value
X TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100 Purpose Operation check
REG S *1 adjustment (Small size) Function (Purpose) Inserter individual load check
Y TRIMMER Trimmer registration position 50 - 150 100
Section Inserter
REG L *1 adjustment (Large size)
Z TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100 Operation/Procedure
CUT S *1 adjustment (Small size) 1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
AA TRIMMER Trimmer cut position 50 - 150 100 touch panel key.
CUT L *1 adjustment (Large size) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation.
*1: Setting can be made only when the trimmer unit is installed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation.
*2: Not saved when the punch is not installed. [Display items]
Display Content
TRSH_M Horizontal transport motor
3-30 TRSV_M Vertical transport motor
Purpose Operation check PLOUT2_M No. 2 pull-out motor
Function (Purpose) Inserter sensor check PLOUT1_M No. 1 pull-out motor
FEED2_M No. 2 paper feed motor
Section Inserter
FEED1_M No. 1 paper feed motor
Operation/Procedure PIKUP2_M No. 2 pickup motor
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed PIKUP1_M No. 2 pickup motor
on the screen is highlighted. TRYLFT2M No. 2 lift motor
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages. TRYLFT1M No. 1 lift motor
Display Sensor name

INSENT Inlet port sensor
INSOUT Paper exit sensor 3-40
VTRS2 No. 2 vertical transport sensor Purpose Operation check
VTRS1 No. 1 vertical transport sensor
Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit sensor check
PLOUT2 No. 2 pull-out sensor
PLOUT1 No. 1 pull-out sensor Section Paper folding unit
INSFEED2 No. 2 paper feed sensor Operation/Procedure
INSFEED1 No. 1 paper feed sensor 1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed
NEREND1 No. 1 near end detection on the screen is highlighted.
LWRLMT2 No. 2 lower limit detection
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
LWRLMT1 No. 1 lower limit detection
UPRLMT2 No. 2 upper limit detection Sensor name Content
UPRLMT1 No. 1 upper limit detection (Display)
INSHP2 No. 2 pickup arm HP detection FLENTRY Paper reception start request
INSHP1 No. 1 pickup arm HP detection FLEXIT_ACK Paper exit start response
INSEXT Outlet port sensor FLS30 Speed reduction timing sensor
INSSZ13 No. 1 paper size sensor 3 FLS31 Separation timing sensor
INSSZ12 No. 1 paper size sensor 2 FLS32 Folding position accurate sensor
INSSZ11 No. 1 paper size sensor 1 FLS33 Upper stopper section paper sensor
PPRLNG2 No. 2 length sensor FLS25 Lead edge hold guide HP sensor
PPRLNG1 No. 1 length sensor FLS24 Internal 3-fold stopper HP sensor
PPREND2 No. 2 paper end detection FLS23 Upper stopper section HP sensor
PPREND1 No. 1 paper end detection FLS22 Paper exit 1 paper sensor
NEREND2 No. 2 near end detection FLS28 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) HP sensor
FECVROP1 No. 1 paper size sensor FLS26 Internal 3-fold tray (Paper exit tray) full sensor
INSSZ25 No. 2 paper size sensor 5 FLS27 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) paper sensor
INSSZ24 No. 2 paper size sensor 4 FLS29 Folding unit pull-out sensor
INSSZ23 No. 2 paper size sensor 3 FLORIHAN_LOCK Brushless motor lock detection signal
INSSZ22 No. 2 paper size sensor 2 FLFSW1 Front cover sensor
INSSZ21 No. 2 paper size sensor 1 FLS20 Inlet port senor
INSSZ15 No. 1 paper size sensor 5 FLS21 Paper exit 2 sensor
INSSZ14 No. 1 paper size sensor 4 FLSW3-1 DipSW1
INSFDRSW Front door SW FLSW3-2 DipSW2
VTRCVRSW Vertical transport cover SW FLSW3-3 DipSW3
FECVROP2 No. 2 cover open detection FLSW3-4 DipSW4
FLSW3-5 DipSW5
FLSW3-6 DipSW6
FLSW3-7 DipSW7
FLSW3-8 DipSW8
FLSW1 PushSW1
FLSW2 PushSW2
FLFAN3_LOCK Power fan lock detection signal
3-41 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Operation check O FOLD IN T1 LTRR internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
Function (Purpose) Paper fold unit individual load check LTRR folding position adjustment
P FOLD IN T2 LTRR internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
Section Paper folding unit
LTRR folding position adjustment
Operation/Procedure Q FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the T1 A4R folding position adjustment
touch panel key. R FOLD OUT A4R external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. T2 A4R folding position adjustment
S FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold first 50 - 150 100
3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation. T1 LTRR folding position adjustment
[Display item] T FOLD OUT LTRR external 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
T2 LTRR folding position adjustment
No,/Display Content U FOLD Q1 A4R 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
1 FLSOL2 Folding/Straight branch solenoid A4R position adjustment
2 FLSOL3 Separation solenoid V FOLD Q2 A4R 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
3 FLSOL5 Internal 3-fold stopper solenoid A4R position adjustment
4 FLM11 Folding transport motor W FOLD Q1 LTRR 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
5 FLM15 Folding position adjustment motor LTRR position adjustment
6 FLM13 Outlet port motor 2 X FOLD Q2 LTRR 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
7 FLM14 Outlet port motor 1 LTRR position adjustment
8 FLM5 Inlet port motor Y FOLD Q1 LGL LGL 4-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
9 FLSOL4 Internal 3-fold tray branch solenoid position adjustment
10 FLM8 Upper stopper motor Z FOLD Q2 LGL LGL 4-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
11 FLM9 Internal 3-fold stopper adjustment motor position adjustment
12 FLM10 Lead edge hold guide motor AA FOLD H1 A4R A4R 2-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
13 FLM7 Internal 3-fold tray (Intermediate tray) motor
AB FOLD H1 LTRR 2-fold first position 50 - 150 100
14 FLCL3 Folding position adjustment clutch (Normal)
LTRR adjustment
15 FLCL4 Folding position adjustment clutch (Reverse)
AC FOLD IN S Z-fold X position fine 46 - 53 50
FINE adjustment designation data
AD FOLD IN T Internal 3-fold X position fine 36 - 60 48
FINE adjustment designation data
3-42 AE FOLD OUT T External 3-fold X position 36 - 60 48
Purpose Adjustment FINE fine adjustment designation
data
Function (Purpose) Paper folding unit adjustment
AF FOLD Q1 4-fold X position fine 46 - 60 48
Section Paper folding unit FINE adjustment designation data
Operation/Procedure AG FOLD Q2 4-fold Y position fine 50 - 60 52
1) Select an adjustment item with the touch panel scroll key. FINE adjustment designation data
AH FOLD H FINE 2-fold X position fine 46 - 54 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. adjustment designation data
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A FOLD S1 A3 A3 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
B FOLD S2 A3 A3 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
C FOLD S1 B4 B4 Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100
position adjustment
D FOLD S2 B4 B4 Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100 Variation
position adjustment Item Content
value
E FOLD S1 A4R A4R Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100 A When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
position adjustment a is increased.
F FOLD S2 A4R A4R Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100 When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
position adjustment a is decreased.
G FOLD S1 LDR LDR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100 B When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
position adjustment b is increased.
H FOLD S2 LDR LDR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100 When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
position adjustment b is decreased.
I FOLD S1 LGL LGL Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100 C When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
position adjustment a is increased.
J FOLD S2 LGL LGL Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100 When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
position adjustment a is decreased.
K FOLD S1 LTRR Z-fold first folding 50 - 150 100 D When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
LTRR position adjustment b is increased.
L FOLD S2 LTRR Z-fold second folding 50 - 150 100 When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
LTRR position adjustment b is decreased.
M FOLD IN T1 A4R internal 3-fold first 50 - 150 100 E When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
A4R folding position adjustment a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
N FOLD IN T2 A4R internal 3-fold second 50 - 150 100
a is decreased.
A4R folding position adjustment
Variation Variation
Item Content Item Content
value value
F When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm R When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased. b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
b is decreased. b is decreased.
G When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm S When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased. a is increased.
a is decreased. a is decreased.
H When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm T When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased. b is increased.
b is decreased. b is decreased.
I When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
J When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
K When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
Variation
L When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm Item Content
value
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of U When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is decreased. a is increased.
a is decreased.
V When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
W When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
X When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
Variation b is increased.
Item Content
value When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
M When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm b is decreased.
a is increased. Y When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of a is increased.
0.1mm
a is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
N When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm a is decreased.
b is increased. Z When the adjustment value is increased, the length of
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of b is increased.
0.1mm
b is decreased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
O When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm b is decreased.
a is increased.
a is decreased.
P When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
Variation
Item Content
value
AA When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
b is decreased.
AB When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
b is increased.
Variation When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of
Item Content b is decreased.
value
Q When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.1mm
a is increased.
a is decreased.
Variation 3-50
Item Content
value
Purpose Operation check
AC When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased. Function (Purpose) Decurler sensor check
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of Section Decurler
a is decreased.
Operation/Procedure
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed
on the screen is highlighted.
2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
No,/Sensor name (Display) Content

1 DCS100 Decurler unit transport path sensor
2 DCTRS_MOT_FAULT Decurler transport motor driver IC error
Item Content Variation
detection signal
value
3 DCSW100 Decurler unit front cover switch
AD When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
4 DCMOT_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 3 alarm signal
a is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 5 DCTOP_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 1 alarm signal
a is decreased. 6 DCBTM_FAN_LOCK Decurler unit fan 2 alarm signal
7 DCSW1-1 DIPSW1detection
8 DCSW1-2 DIPSW2 detection
11 DCSW2 PUSHSW detection
12 PDPPD1 Finisher paper relay paper transport
detector 1
13 PDPPD2 Finisher paper relay paper transport
Variation detector 2
Item Content
value 14 PDOS Finisher paper relay cover open/close
AE When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm sensor
a is increased. 15 FFANLK Finisher fan motor lock detection
a is decreased.
3-51
Purpose Operation check
Function (Purpose) Decurler individual load check
Section Decurler unit
Operation/Procedure
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
Variation
Item Content
value
touch panel key.
AF When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation.
a is increased. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation.
a is decreased. [Display item]
No./Display Content
1 DCM100 Decurler transport motor
2 DCFAN100 Decurler unit fan 1
5 PDPTM Finisher paper relay paper transport motor
6 PDPGS Finisher paper relay paper gate solenoid
7 PDCF Finisher paper relay cooling fan
Variation 8 PBM102 Relay unit transport motor 2
Item Content
value
AG When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
b is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 3-60
b is decreased.
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Stacker sensor check
Section Stacker
Operation/Procedure
1) When each sensor is turned ON, the sensor name displayed
on the screen is highlighted.
Variation 2) Use the touch panel scroll key to shift between pages.
Item Content
value <Stacker 1>
AH When the adjustment value is increased, the length of 0.5mm
a is increased. NO. Display item Content
When the adjustment value is decreased, the length of 1 S1SN01 Inlet port senor
a is decreased.
2 S1SN02 External tray paper exit sensor
NO. Display item Content 3-61
3 S1SN03 Stack tray paper exit sensor
4 S1SN04 Interface transport section inlet port senor
5 S1SN05 Interface transport section outlet port sensor Function (Purpose) Stacker individual load check
6 S1SN11 Offset home sensor Section Stacker
7 S1SN12 Front side jogger home sensor
Operation/Procedure
8 S1SN13 Rear side jogger home sensor
9 S1SN30 Lead edge jogger home sensor
1) Press the name of the signal to which a load is applied with the
10 S1SN14 Stack tray home sensor
touch panel key.
11 S1SN15-1 Lateral beam sensor (Lower stage) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation.
12 S1SN15-2 Lateral beam sensor (Upper stage) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key again to stop the operation.
13 S1SN16-1 Longitudinal beam sensor (Rear) <Stacker 1>
14 S1SN16-2 Longitudinal beam sensor (Front)
15 S1SN17 Stack tray 75% load position sensor NO. Display Content
16 S1SN18 Stack tray 50% load position sensor 1 S1P_LED Operation panel LED
17 S1SN19 Stack tray 25% load position sensor 2 S1PM01 Transport motor
18 S1SN21 Stack position sensor 3 S1PM02 Stack tray paper exit motor
19 S1SN23 Tray (cart) set sensor 4 S1PM03 External tray paper exit motor
20 S1SN24 Stack tray paper empty sensor 5 S1SL01 Gate solenoid 1
21 S1SN25 Stack tray 100% load position sensor 6 S1SL02 Gate solenoid 2
22 S1SN26 Stack tray extendable position sensor 7 S1PM11 Offset motor
23 S1SN28 Tray DC motor encoder sensor 8 S1PM12 Front side jogger motor
24 S1SN06 External tray full sensor 9 S1PM13 Rear side jogger motor
25 S1SW01 Stack tray cover switch 10 S1PM22 Lead edge jogger motor
26 S1SW02 Upper door open/close detection switch 11 S1M21 Stack tray lift motor
27 S1SW03 Tray lift interlock switch 12 S1FAN1 Fan motor
28 S1SW04 Tray limit switch
<Stacker 2>
<Stacker 2>
NO. Display Content
NO. Display item Content 1 S2P_LED Operation panel LED
1 S2SN01 Inlet port senor 2 S2PM01 Transport motor
2 S2SN02 External tray paper exit sensor 3 S2PM02 Stack tray paper exit motor
3 S2SN03 Stack tray paper exit sensor 4 S2PM03 External tray paper exit motor
4 S2SN04 Interface transport section inlet port senor 5 S2SL01 Gate solenoid 1
5 S2SN05 Interface transport section outlet port sensor 6 S2SL02 Gate solenoid 2
6 S2SN11 Offset home sensor 7 S2PM11 Offset motor
7 S2SN12 Front side jogger home sensor 8 S2PM12 Front side jogger motor
8 S2SN13 Rear side jogger home sensor 9 S2PM13 Rear side jogger motor
9 S2SN30 Lead edge jogger home sensor 10 S2PM22 Lead edge jogger motor
10 S2SN14 Stack tray home sensor 11 S2M21 Stack tray lift motor
11 S2SN15-1 Lateral beam sensor (Lower stage) 12 S2FAN1 Fan motor
12 S2SN15-2 Lateral beam sensor (Upper stage)
13 S2SN16-1 Longitudinal beam sensor (Rear)
14 S2SN16-2 Longitudinal beam sensor (Front)
15 S2SN17 Stack tray 75% load position sensor 3-62
16 S2SN18 Stack tray 50% load position sensor Purpose Adjustment
17 S2SN19 Stack tray 25% load position sensor
18 S2SN21 Stack position sensor
Function (Purpose) Stacker adjustment
19 S2SN23 Tray (cart) set sensor Section Stacker
20 S2SN24 Stack tray paper empty sensor Operation/Procedure
21 S2SN25 Stack tray 100% load position sensor 1) Select an adjustment item with the touch panel scroll key.
22 S2SN26 Stack tray extendable position sensor
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
23 S2SN28 Tray DC motor encoder sensor
24 S2SN06 External tray full sensor 3) Press [OK] key.
25 S2SW01 Stack tray cover switch
Setting Default
26 S2SW02 Upper door open/close detection switch Item Display Item
range value
27 S2SW03 Tray lift interlock switch
A STACKER1 Stacker first series side 92 - 108 100
28 S2SW04 Tray limit switch
SIDE jogger position adjustment
POSITION1 (All sizes)
B STACKER1 Stacker first series side 92 - 108 100
POSITION2 (Width 210mm or above, and
length 400mm or above)
C STACKER1 Stacker first series side 92 - 108 100
POSITION3 (Width > Length, Width =
Length)
D STACKER1 Stacker first series side 92 - 108 100
POSITION4 (Width < Length for other
than Large size)
Setting Default
Item Display Item
range value 4
E STACKER1 Stacker first series lead edge 92 - 108 100
TOP jogger position adjustment
POSITION1 (All sizes) 4-2
F STACKER1 Stacker first series lead edge 92 - 108 100 Purpose Operation test/check
TOP jogger position adjustment
POSITION2 (Width 210mm or above, and
sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
ity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of
G STACKER1 Stacker first series lead edge 92 - 108 100
TOP jogger position adjustment those.
POSITION3 (Width > Length, Width = Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Length)
Operation/Procedure
H STACKER1 Stacker first series lead edge 92 - 108 100
TOP jogger position adjustment The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
POSITION4 (Width < Length for other played.
than Large size) The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
I STACKER2 Stacker second series side 92 - 108 100 are highlighted.
POSITION1 * (All sizes) A4LCC sensor
J STACKER2 Stacker second series side 92 - 108 100 Display Content
SIDE jogger position adjustment LPFD LCC transport detector
POSITION2 * (Width 210mm or above, and
LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
K STACKER2 Stacker second series side 92 - 108 100
LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
POSITION3 * (Width > Length, Width = LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
Length) LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
L STACKER2 Stacker second series side 92 - 108 100 LRE LCC lift motor encoder
SIDE jogger position adjustment L24VM LCC24V power monitor
POSITION4 * (Width < Length for other LLSW LCC upper limit switch
than Large size) LCCD LCC main unit connection detection
M STACKER2 Stacker second series lead 92 - 108 100
TOP edge jogger position A3LCC sensor
POSITION1 * adjustment (All sizes)
Display Content
N STACKER2 Stacker second series lead 92 - 108 100
TOP edge jogger position LPFD LCC transport detector
POSITION2 * adjustment (Width 210mm or LUD LCC tray upper limit detector
above, and length 400mm or LDD LCC tray lower limit detector
above) LPED LCC tray paper empty detector
O STACKER2 Stacker second series lead 92 - 108 100 LCLD LCC tray open/close detector
TOP edge jogger position LDSW LCC upper open/close detection switch
POSITION3 * adjustment (Width > Length, LRE LCC lift motor encoder
Width =Length) L24VM LCC24V power monitor
P STACKER2 Stacker second series lead 92 - 108 100 LLSW LCC upper limit switch
TOP edge jogger position
LPUSW LCC paper upper surface detection switch
POSITION4 * adjustment (Width < Length
LRRSW LCC reverse winding detection switch
for other than Large size)
LTLSW LCC tray lift switch
* Displayed only when the stacker 2 is installed. LTLD LCC tray lock sensor
LIPSW LCC illegal paper detection SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
3-70
Paper feed option: Paper pass unit sensor
Display Content
Function (Purpose) Booklet maker sensor check L1DDR01 Machine - Relay connection sensor
Section Booklet maker L1DDR02 Interface unit upper open/close sensor
Operation/Procedure L1DDR03 Interface unit PG open/close sensor
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. L1DFR01 Interface transport sensor 1
L1DFR02 Interface transport sensor 2
L1DFR03 Interface transport sensor 3
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Paper feed option: Paper pass unit sensor, Multi bypass tray
<Booklet Maker> sensor
Display Content
NO. Display Content L1MPFS Manual paper feed sensor
1 BKCONECT Booklet maker connection detection L1MTS Manual feed transport sensor
2 BKPAPER_D Booklet paper detection signal L1DFB01 Manual feed paper entry sensor
3 BKPOWER_D Booklet power ON detection L1MPES Manual feed paper sensor
4 BKHSTOP Booklet hard stop signal L1MSLIDE Manual feed slide detector
5 BKSSTOP Booklet soft stop signal L1MULS Upper limit sensor
6 BKIF_CON Booklet IF connection detection L1MLLS Lower limit sensor
L1MPVS1 Remaining quantity sensor 1
L1MPVS2 Remaining quantity sensor 2
L1MLSW Lift switch
Display Content 4-3
L1MLS Manual feed tray paper length sensor
L1MSIZ1 Size sensor 1
L1MSIZ2 Size sensor 2 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
L1MSIZ3 Size sensor 3 in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
L1MSIZ4 Size sensor 4 the control circuit of those.
L1MSIZ5 Size sensor 5 Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
LCT unit sensor Operation/Procedure
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
Display Content
touch panel key.
L1DFTRC TRC signal (1 series)
L1DO001 2 series installation detection 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
L1DO002 Interface unit installation detection The selected load performs the operation.
L1DO003 Horizontal transport unit installation detection When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
L1DO004 Manual feed unit installation detection
L1DD001 Machine - LCT1 connection sensor
A4LCC
L1DD002 LCT1 front door open/close sensor Display Content
L1DD003 Transport open/close sensor 1 (1 series) LPFM LCC transport motor
L1DD004 Transport open/close sensor 2 (1 series) LLM LCC lift motor
L1DD005 Vertical transport open/close sensor (1 series) LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
L1DD006 Horizontal unit insertion sensor LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
L1DF001 Vertical transport sensor 1 (1 series) LTRC LCC transport clutch
L1DF002 Vertical transport sensor 2 (1 series)
L1DF003 Vertical transport sensor 3 (1 series) A3LCC
L1DF004 Vertical transport sensor 4 (1 series)
Display Content
L1DF005 LCT paper exit sensor (1 series)
LPFM LCC transport motor
L1DF006 Horizontal transport sensor 1
LLM LCC lift motor
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
LTRC LCC transport clutch
LTLED LCC tray LED lamp
LTLS LCC tray lock solenoid
LCT unit sensor: Cassette tray 1 sensor
LFAN LCC separation auxiliary fan
Display Content
L1DF101 Paper exit sensor 1cs Paper feed option: Paper pass unit
L1DT101 Cassette insertion detection switch 1cs
Display Content
L1DT102 Upper limit switch 1cs
L1MTR01 Paper pass unit transport motor
L1DT103 Paper empty sensor 1cs
L1CLR01 Paper pass unit transport clutch
L1DT104 Lift motor encoder 1cs
L1LDR01 Paper pass unit LED
L1DT105 LCC tray lock sensor 1cs
L1DT106 Upper limit sensor 1cs LCT unit
L1DT107 Lower limit sensor 1cs
L1DT108 Reverse winding detection switch 1cs Display Content
L1DT109 Tray descending switch 1cs L1MT001 Transport motor 1 (1 series)
L1DT110 Paper upper surface sensor 1cs L1PW001 Heat-retention heater relay (1 series)
L1DT111 Paper length sensor 1cs L1CL001 Horizontal transport clutch
L1DT112 Size sensor 1 1cs
LCT cassette tray 1
L1DT113 Size sensor 2 1cs
L1DT114 Size sensor 3 1cs Display Content
L1DT115 Size sensor 4 1cs L1MT101 Lift motor 1cs
L1MT102 Inlet fan motor 1cs
LCT unit sensor: Cassette tray 2 sensor L1MT103 Outlet fan 1cs
Display Content L1MT104 Assist fan motor 1cs
L1DF201 Paper exit sensor 2cs L1SL101 Suction valve solenoid 1cs
L1DT201 Cassette insertion detection switch 2cs L1SL102 Lock solenoid 1cs
L1DT202 Upper limit switch 2cs L1CL101 Paper feed clutch 1cs
L1DT203 Paper empty sensor 2cs L1CL102 Transport clutch 1cs
L1DT204 Lift motor encoder 2cs L1HT101 Hot air heater 1cs
L1DT205 LCC tray lock sensor 2cs L1LD101 Lift LED 1cs
L1DT206 Upper limit sensor 2cs L1CHK101 Wind pressure measuring operation 1cs
L1DT207 Lower limit sensor 2cs
LCT cassette tray 2
L1DT208 Reverse winding detection switch 2cs
L1DT209 Tray descending switch 2cs Display Content
L1DT210 Paper upper surface sensor 2cs L1MT201 Lift motor 2cs
L1DT211 Paper length sensor 2cs L1MT202 Inlet fan motor 2cs
L1DT212 Size sensor 1 2cs L1MT203 Outlet fan 2cs
L1DT213 Size sensor 2 2cs L1MT204 Assist fan motor 2cs
L1DT214 Size sensor 3 2cs L1SL201 Suction valve solenoid 2cs
L1DT215 Size sensor 4 2cs L1SL202 Lock solenoid 2cs
L1CL201 Paper feed clutch 2cs
L1CL202 Transport clutch 2cs
Display Content
L1HT201 Hot air heater 2cs
L1LD201 Lift LED 2cs
L1CHK201 Wind pressure measuring operation 2cs
4-5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC)
and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC).
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
Check the ON operation
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
highlighted.
Check the OFF operation
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
Button Content
LTRC A4LCC, A3LCC, multi-stage LCT transport clutch
4-10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) LCT warm air heater temperature setting
Section LCT
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key to save the setting value into the EEPROM and
the RAM.
A WARM AIR TEMP. (PLAIN) Warm air heater temperature setting: Normal paper 20 - 80 45
B WARM AIR TEMP. (HEAVY1,2) Warm air heater temperature setting: Heavy paper 1, 2 20 - 80 45
C WARM AIR TEMP. (HEAVY3,4) Warm air heater temperature setting: Heavy paper 3, 4 20 - 80 45
D WARM AIR TEMP. (THIN) Warm air heater temperature setting: Thin paper 20 - 80 45
E WARM AIR TEMP. (GROSSY) Warm air heater temperature setting: Glossy paper 20 - 80 45
F WARM AIR TEMP. (OTHER) Warm air heater temperature setting: Other 20 - 80 45
G WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (PLAIN) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 1
Normal paper 1: Disable
H WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (HEAVY1,2) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 0
Heavy paper 1, 2 1: Disable
I WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (HEAVY3,4) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 0
Heavy paper 3, 4 1: Disable
J WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (THIN) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 1
Thin paper 1: Disable
K WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (GROSSY) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 0
Glossy paper 1: Disable
L WARM AIR CONTROL DISABLE (OTHER) Warm air heater temperature setting control disable: 0: Enable 0-1 1
Other 1: Disable
4-11
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) LCT fan Duty setting
Section LCT
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key to save the setting value into the EEPROM and
the RAM.
When the set value is 50, the fan duty is 50%.
NOTE: When the fan duty is set to 0 - 14%, the fan does not rotate.

A VACUUM FAN DUTY (PLAIN - L) Suction fan Duty: Normal paper Large size 30 - 100 60
B VACUUM FAN DUTY (PLAIN - M) Suction fan Duty: Normal paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
C VACUUM FAN DUTY (PLAIN - S) Suction fan Duty: Normal paper Small size 30 - 100 60
D VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - L) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Large size 30 - 100 90
E VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - M) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Middle size 30 - 100 90
F VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - S) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Small size 30 - 100 90
G VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - L) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Large size 30 - 100 90
H VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - M) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Middle size 30 - 100 90
I VACUUM FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - S) Suction fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Small size 30 - 100 90
J VACUUM FAN DUTY (THIN - L) Suction fan Duty: Thin paper Large size 30 - 100 60
K VACUUM FAN DUTY (THIN - M) Suction fan Duty: Thin paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
L VACUUM FAN DUTY (THIN - S) Suction fan Duty: Thin paper Small size 30 - 100 60
M VACUUM FAN DUTY (GROSSY - L) Suction fan Duty: Glossy paper Large size 30 - 100 60
N VACUUM FAN DUTY (GROSSY - M) Suction fan Duty: Glossy paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
O VACUUM FAN DUTY (GROSSY - S) Suction fan Duty: Glossy paper Small size 30 - 100 60
P VACUUM FAN DUTY (OTHER - L) Suction fan Duty: Other Large size 30 - 100 60
Q VACUUM FAN DUTY (OTHER - M) Suction fan Duty: Other Middle size 30 - 100 60
R VACUUM FAN DUTY (OTHER - S) Suction fan Duty: Other Small size 30 - 100 60
S BLOWER FAN DUTY (PLAIN - L) Separation fan Duty: Normal paper Large size 30 - 100 60
T BLOWER FAN DUTY (PLAIN - M) Separation fan Duty: Normal paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
U BLOWER FAN DUTY (PLAIN - S) Separation fan Duty: Normal paper Small size 30 - 100 60
V BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - L) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Large size 30 - 100 90
W BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - M) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Middle size 30 - 100 90
X BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - S) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Small size 30 - 100 90
Y BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - L) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Large size 30 - 100 90
Z BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - M) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Middle size 30 - 100 90
AA BLOWER FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - S) Separation fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Small size 30 - 100 90
AB BLOWER FAN DUTY (THIN - L) Separation fan Duty: Thin paper Large size 30 - 100 60
AC BLOWER FAN DUTY (THIN - M) Separation fan Duty: Thin paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
AD BLOWER FAN DUTY (THIN - S) Separation fan Duty: Thin paper Small size 30 - 100 60
AE BLOWER FAN DUTY (GROSSY - L) Separation fan Duty: Glossy paper Large size 30 - 100 60
AF BLOWER FAN DUTY (GROSSY - M) Separation fan Duty: Glossy paper Middle size 30 - 100 60
AG BLOWER FAN DUTY (GROSSY - S) Separation fan Duty: Glossy paper Small size 30 - 100 60
AH BLOWER FAN DUTY (OTHER - L) Separation fan Duty: Other Large size 30 - 100 60
AI BLOWER FAN DUTY (OTHER - M) Separation fan Duty: Other Middle size 30 - 100 60
AJ BLOWER FAN DUTY (OTHER - S) Separation fan Duty: Other Small size 30 - 100 60
AK ASSIST FAN DUTY (PLAIN - L) Side assist fan Duty: Normal paper Large size 0 - 100 10
AL ASSIST FAN DUTY (PLAIN - M) Side assist fan Duty: Normal paper Middle size 0 - 100 10
AM ASSIST FAN DUTY (PLAIN - S) Side assist fan Duty: Normal paper Small size 0 - 100 10
AN ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - L) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Large size 0 - 100 10
AO ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - M) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Middle size 0 - 100 10
AP ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY1,2 - S) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 1, 2 Small size 0 - 100 10
AQ ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - L) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Large size 0 - 100 30
AR ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - M) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Middle size 0 - 100 10
AS ASSIST FAN DUTY (HEAVY3,4 - S) Side assist fan Duty: Heavy paper 3, 4 Small size 0 - 100 10
AT ASSIST FAN DUTY (THIN - L) Side assist fan Duty: Thin paper Large size 0 - 100 10
AU ASSIST FAN DUTY (THIN - M) Side assist fan Duty: Thin paper Middle size 0 - 100 10
AV ASSIST FAN DUTY (THIN - S) Side assist fan Duty: Thin paper Small size 0 - 100 10
AW ASSIST FAN DUTY (GROSSY - L) Side assist fan Duty: Glossy paper Large size 0 - 100 10
AX ASSIST FAN DUTY (GROSSY - M) Side assist fan Duty: Glossy paper Middle size 0 - 100 10
AY ASSIST FAN DUTY (GROSSY - S) Side assist fan Duty: Glossy paper Small size 0 - 100 10
AZ ASSIST FAN DUTY (OTHER - L) Side assist fan Duty: Other Large size 0 - 100 10
BA ASSIST FAN DUTY (OTHER - M) Side assist fan Duty: Other Middle size 0 - 100 10
BB ASSIST FAN DUTY (OTHER - S) Side assist fan Duty: Other Small size 0 - 100 10
4-14 Display item Content Display range
CS3 TEMP. CS3 CS temperature sensor: Temperature: 0 -
Purpose Check Temperature 255degrees C
Function (Purpose) LCT temperature and humidity sensor mon- CS3 CS temperature sensor: AD value: 0 - 65535
itor display AD value
CS3 RH CS3 CS humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100%
Section LCT Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535
Operation/Procedure CS3 CS humidity sensor:
When the machine enters the simulation mode, the current data AD value
are displayed. CS4 HEATER CS4 CS heater temperature Temperature: 0 -
TEMP. sensor: Temperature 255degrees C
Since the value varies depending on the use conditions and the CS4 CS heater temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
operating conditions, use the value as a reference only. sensor: AD value
* Data are revised every 5 sec. CS4 WARM CS4 CS warm air outlet port Temperature: 0 -
AIR TEMP. temperature sensor: 255degrees C
Display item Content Display range Temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
LCT1 TEMP. LCT1 series temperature Temperature: 0 - 255 CS4 CS warm air outlet port
sensor: Temperature degrees C temperature sensor: AD value
LCT1 series temperature AD value: 0 - 65535 CS4 TEMP. CS4 CS temperature sensor: Temperature: 0 -
sensor: AD value Temperature 255degrees C
LCT1 RH LCT1 series humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100% CS4 CS temperature sensor: AD value: 0 - 65535
Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535 AD value
LCT1 series humidity sensor: CS4 RH CS4 CS humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100%
AD value Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535
LCT2 TEMP. LCT2 series temperature Temperature: 0 - 255 CS4 CS humidity sensor:
sensor: Temperature degrees C AD value
LCT2 series temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
sensor: AD value * The AD value is displayed by converting the above display range
LCT2 RH LCT2 series humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100% into hexadecimal number.
Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535 * "C" is displayed as "deg" because of he display fonts.
LCT2 series humidity sensor:
AD value
CS1 HEATER
TEMP.
CS1 CS heater temperature
sensor: Temperature
Temperature: 0 -
255degrees C
5
CS1 CS heater temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
sensor: AD value 5-1
CS1 WARM CS1 CS warm air outlet port Temperature: 0 -
AIR TEMP. temperature sensor: 255degrees C Purpose Operation test/check
Temperature AD value: 0 - 65535 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
CS1 CS warm air outlet port LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
temperature sensor: AD value cuit.
CS1 TEMP. CS1 CS temperature sensor: Temperature: 0 -
Temperature 255degrees C Section Operation panel
CS1 CS temperature sensor: AD value: 0 - 65535 Operation/Procedure
AD value The LCD is changed as shown below.
CS1 RH CS1 CS humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100%
Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX -
CS1 CS humidity sensor: MIN - the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
AD value The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
CS2 HEATER CS2 CS heater temperature Temperature: 0 - checked.
TEMP. sensor: Temperature 255degrees C
CS2 CS heater temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
sensor: AD value
CS2 WARM CS2 CS warm air outlet port Temperature: 0 - 5-2
AIR TEMP. temperature sensor: 255degrees C Purpose Operation test/check
Temperature AD value: 0 - 65535
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
CS2 CS warm air outlet port
temperature sensor: AD value lamp and the control circuit.
CS2 TEMP. CS2 CS temperature sensor: Temperature: 0 - Section Fusing
Temperature 255degrees C Operation/Procedure
CS2 CS temperature sensor: AD value: 0 - 65535
AD value 1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
CS2 RH CS2 CS humidity sensor: Humidity: 0 - 100% 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Humidity AD value: 0 - 65535 The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
CS2 CS humidity sensor:
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
AD value
CS3 HEATER CS3 CS heater temperature Temperature: 0 - Heater lamp operation check method:
TEMP. sensor: Temperature 255degrees C Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
CS3 CS heater temperature AD value: 0 - 65535 lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
sensor: AD value clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
CS3 WARM CS3 CS warm air outlet port Temperature: 0 - frame fusing section.
AIR TEMP. temperature sensor: 255degrees C
Temperature AD value: 0 - 65535 Display Content
CS3 CS warm air outlet port HL_UM Heater lamp main (Front surface of paper heat roller)
temperature sensor: AD value HL_US Heater lamp sub (Front surface of paper heat roller)
HL_LM Heater lamp main (Back surface of paper heat roller)
HL_UW Upper assist heater lamp (Warm-up)
5-3 Item display name Content
Purpose Operation test/check Transport/ LCCM LCC transport motor
process RRM Registration motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
FRS Fusing lower separation pawl solenoid
lamp and the control circuit.
FUM Fusing motor
Section Scanner (reading) POM_F Paper exit motor (normal rotation)(*1)
Operation/Procedure POM_R Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)(*1)
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. WTM Waste toner transport motor
2TWTM Secondary transfer waste toner motor
PTRC2 Vertical transport clutch upper
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec. PTRC1 Tray vertical transport clutch
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. TTRC Tandem transport clutch
Descriptions of loads (for DSPF) LCCC LCC transport clutch
DVC_K Developing clutch K
Display Content DVC_C Developing clutch C
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp DVC_M Developing clutch M
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp DVC_Y Developing clutch Y
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid
Descriptions of loads (except DSPF)
PFM PS front motor
Display Content Paper feed CPFM Paper feed motor
OC COPY LAMP OC copy lamp T1LUM Tandem tray 1 lift motor
T2LUM Tandem tray 2 lift motor
C3LUM Tray 3 lift motor
C4LUM Tray 4 lift motor
5-4 MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
Purpose Operation test/check T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch
charge lamp and the control circuit.
C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch
Section Process MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
Operation/Procedure MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. T1PUS Tray 1 pickup solenoid
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected. T2PUS Tray 2 pickup solenoid
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. C3PUS Tray 3 pickup solenoid
C4PUS Tray 4 pickup solenoid
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
LSU LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are
Item name Content displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the
DL_K Discharge lamp K same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
DL_C Discharge lamp C change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the
DL_M Discharge lamp M operation is stopped.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
DL2_K After-transfer discharge lamp K
DL2_C After-transfer discharge lamp C
6-2
DL2_M After-transfer discharge lamp M
DL2_Y After-transfer discharge lamp Y Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
motor and its control circuit.
Section Others
6 Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
6-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits. Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
Operation/Procedure sound.
Display Content
POFM Paper exit fan motor rear exhaust
Paper exit fan motor front
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Paper exit fan motor rear
Load operation check method: OZFM12 Ozone exhaust fan motor 1
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, Ozone exhaust fan motor 2
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation OZFM3 Ozone exhaust fan motor 3
sound. PSFM Power cooling fan motor
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor
Display Content List of cleaner operations
FPRFM Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor F Cleaning operation
Display Content
Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor R counter
TBFM Toner bottle cooling fan motor MC MC(K)COUNT MC cleaner operation
LSUFM LSU fan motor MC(C)COUNT check (Color can be
ADUFM ADU transport cooling fan motor MC(M)COUNT selected.)
MFPFAN Controller fan motor, HDD fan motor MC(Y)COUNT
POFM2_EX Paper exit cooling fan2 (For Europe) PTC PTC COUNT PTC cleaner operation
POFM2_F Paper exit cooling fan2 (F) (For Europe) check
POFM2_R Paper exit cooling fan2 (R) (For Europe) ALL All counter MC cleaner operation
VFM_BA Machine ventilation fan BA (For Europe) check (Color cannot be
selected. All colors
cleaning) + PTC cleaner
operation check
6-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans- 6-6
port unit and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform fusing pressure release
Operation/Procedure and applying, and to check the operations
1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button. of the control circuits.
Section Fusing
Display Content
1TC MID The cam is operated at the process speed in the plain paper Operation/Procedure
mode. 1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
1TC L1 The cam is operated at the process speed of low speed 1 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fus-
(220m/s).
ing pressure release are repeated.
1TC L2 The cam is operated at the process speed of low speed 2
(165m/s). During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
played.
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode
selected in 1) is performed. PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying - Fusing
applying pressure release - (Fusing pressure
Button Display Content Remarks FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
1TC MID BLACK Monochrome mode Black mode position - release
position Color mode position -
COLOR Color mode position Black mode position -
FREE Drum separation Drum separation position
position - (Black mode position) 6-7
(Repeated in this
Purpose others
sequence.)
1TC L1 BLACK Monochrome mode Black mode position - Function (Purpose) Used to refresh the fuser belt.
position Color mode position - Section fusing
COLOR Color mode position Black mode position -
Drum separation position
Operation/Procedure
FREE Drum separation
position - (Black mode position) 1) Press EXECUTE key. and start fuser presure releasing.
(Repeated in this 2) The EXECUTE button is highlighted during decompression of
sequence.) the fuser.
1TC L2 BLACK Monochrome mode Black mode position -
position Color mode position -
3) After completion of the fuser / decompression operation, the
COLOR Color mode position Black mode position - screen transits to the screen for waiting for execution of the
FREE Drum separation Drum separation position fuser belt refreshing.
position - (Black mode position) 4) Press EXECUTE key.
(Repeated in this The EXECUTE button changes to highlighted, and the fuser
sequence.) belt refresh processing is started.
After the fuser refresh processing is completed, the screen
returns to the normal end screen.
6-4 5) Press EXIT or BACK key to exit the simulation

Function (Purpose) Used to check the cleaning operation of the
6-90
PTC and the main charger.
Purpose Setting
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
Operation/Procedure
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. enable position)
2) [MC] On the execution menu, the color is designated with K, C,
Section Scanner
M, and Y. (Two or more colors can be selected.)
Operation/Procedure
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
7-9
7
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode
7-1
(Used to check the copy operation and the
Purpose Setting image quality for each color).
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of Section
aging.
Operation/Procedure
Section Others 1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure (Two or more colors can be selected.)
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key. The key of the selected color is highlighted.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode. Copying is performed with the selected color.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. ation menu in the simulation mode.
AGING Aging operation setup K Setup/cancel of black

INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting C Setup/cancel of cyan
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting M Setup/cancel of magenta
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting Y Setup/cancel of yellow
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting 7-12
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
7-6 setting (for aging operation)
Purpose Setting Section DSPF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging Operation/Procedure
cycle. 1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
(Setting range:0 - 255)
Section
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Operation/Procedure
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
key.
2) Press [OK] key. Setting Default
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. range value
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). A ORIGINALS Document scan quantity 0 - 255 0
specification (for aging)
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Item Display Setting range Default value

A CYCLE TIME(SEC) 1 - 900 3
8
8-1
7-8
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Purpose Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time. the developing voltage in each print mode
Section and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure * When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultane-
ously.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
Section Process (Developing)
warm-up is displayed
Operation/Procedure
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Setting Default 8-2
range value
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K developing 0 - 600 450
SPEED bias set value at Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
DVB_K middle speed the main charger grid voltage in each
B MIDDLE C developing 0 - 600 450 printer mode and the control circuit.
SPEED bias set value at * When the middle speed is adjusted, the
DVB_C middle speed low speed are also adjusted simultane-
C MIDDLE M developing 0 - 600 450 ously.
Section Process (Charging)
DVB_M middle speed
D MIDDLE Y developing 0 - 600 450 Operation/Procedure
SPEED bias set value at 1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
DVB_Y middle speed panel.
LOW A LOW1 K developing 0 - 600 450 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
DVB_K low speed 1 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
B LOW1 C developing 0 - 600 450 on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
SPEED bias set value at * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
DVB_C low speed 1 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
C LOW1 M developing 0 - 600 450
DVB_M low speed 1 The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
D LOW1 Y developing 0 - 600 450 output for 30 sec.
SPEED bias set value at When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
DVB_Y low speed 1
E LOW2 K developing 0 - 600 450 Default value
Item/ Setting
SPEED bias set value at Button Content 70 cpm 80 cpm
Display range
DVB_K low speed 2 machine machine
F LOW2 C developing 0 - 600 450 MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid 150 - 625 630
SPEED bias set value at SPEED bias set value 950
DVB_C low speed 2 GB_K at middle
G LOW2 M developing 0 - 600 450 speed
SPEED bias set value at B MIDDLE C charging/grid 150 - 625 630
DVB_M low speed 2 SPEED bias set value 950
H LOW2 Y developing 0 - 600 450 GB_C at middle
SPEED bias set value at speed
DVB_Y low speed 2 C MIDDLE M charging/grid 150 - 625 630
SPEED bias set value 950
GB_M at middle
speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid 150 - 625 630
GB_Y at middle
speed
LOW A LOW1 K charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_K at low speed 1
B LOW1 C charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_C at low speed 1
C LOW1 M charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_M at low speed 1
D LOW1 Y charging/grid 150 - 608
GB_Y at low speed 1
E LOW2 K charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_K at low speed 2
F LOW2 C charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_C at low speed 2
G LOW2 M charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_M at low speed 2
H LOW2 Y charging/grid 150 - 604
GB_Y at low speed 2
8-6
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Setting Default
range value
A TC1 LOW 1 CL K Primary transfer bias reference value Color K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
B TC1 LOW 2 CL K Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
C TC1 MIDDLE CL K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
D TC1 LOW 1 CL C C Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
E TC1 LOW 2 CL C Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
F TC1 MIDDLE CL C Middle speed 0 - 255 99
G TC1 LOW 1 CL M M Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
H TC1 LOW 2 CL M Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
I TC1 MIDDLE CL M Middle speed 0 - 255 99
J TC1 LOW 1 CL Y Y Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
K TC1 LOW 2 CL Y Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
L TC1 MIDDLE CL Y Middle speed 0 - 255 99
M TC1 LOW 1 BW K Black and K Low speed 1 0 - 255 95
N TC1 LOW 2 BW K white Low speed 2 0 - 255 91
O TC1 MIDDLE BW K Middle speed 0 - 255 99
P TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias reference value Color Standard paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 145
Q TC2 PLAIN CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 158
R TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
S TC2 PLAIN BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
T TC2 PLAIN2 CL SPX Color Standard paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 145
U TC2 PLAIN2 CL DPX Back surface 0 - 255 158
V TC2 PLAIN2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 138
W TC2 PLAIN2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 138
X TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 1 Front surface 0 - 255 110
Y TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
Z TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AA TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AB TC2 HEAVY2 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 2 Front surface 0 - 255 110
AC TC2 HEAVY2 CL DPX <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 103
AD TC2 HEAVY2 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 110
AE TC2 HEAVY2 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 103
AF TC2 HEAVY3 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 3 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AG TC2 HEAVY3 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AH TC2 HEAVY3 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AI TC2 HEAVY3 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AJ TC2 HEAVY4 CL SPX Color Heavy paper 4 Front surface 0 - 255 96
AK TC2 HEAVY4 CL DPX <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 87
AL TC2 HEAVY4 BW SPX Black and Front surface 0 - 255 96
AM TC2 HEAVY4 BW DPX white Back surface 0 - 255 87
AN TC2 OHP CL Color OHP Front surface 0 - 255 110
AO TC2 OHP BW <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AP TC2 ENVELOPE CL Black and Envelope Front surface 0 - 255 83
AQ TC2 ENVELOPE BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 83
AR TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper Front surface 0 - 255 138
AS TC2 THIN BW <Middle speed> Back surface 0 - 255 138
AT TC2 GLOSSY PAPER CL Black and Glossy paper Front surface 0 - 255 110
AU TC2 GLOSSY PAPER BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
AV TC2 EMBOSS CL Color Embossed paper Front surface 0 - 255 96
AW TC2 EMBOSS BW <Low speed 2> Back surface 0 - 255 80
AX TC2 LABEL CL Black and Label paper Front surface 0 - 255 110
AY TC2 LABEL BW white <Low speed 1> Back surface 0 - 255 110
Setting Default
range value
AZ TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer front edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BA TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 145
BB TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BC TC2 FRONT EDGE LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
BD TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 145
BE TC2 FRONT EDGE MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 145
BF TC2 BACKEND LOW1 SPX Secondary transfer rear edge bias In low speed 1 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BG TC2 BACKEND LOW1 DPX reference value Back surface 0 - 255 69
BH TC2 BACKEND LOW2 SPX In low speed 2 print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BI TC2 BACKEND LOW2 DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BJ TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE SPX In middle speed print Front surface 0 - 255 69
BK TC2 BACKEND MIDDLE DPX Back surface 0 - 255 69
BL TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 1 Secondary transfer cleaning negative In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 76
BM TC2 CLEANING MINUS LOW 2 bias reference value In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 76
BN TC2 CLEANING MINUS MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 76
BO TC2 INTERVAL LOW 1 Bias reference value between papers In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 109
BP TC2 INTERVAL LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 109
BQ TC2 INTERVAL MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 109
BR TC2 COUNTER LOW 1 Counter bias reference value In low speed 1 print 0 - 255 109
BS TC2 COUNTER LOW 2 In low speed 2 print 0 - 255 109
BT TC2 COUNTER MIDDLE In middle speed print 0 - 255 109
BU PTC LOW 1 CL PTC current reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BV PTC LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BW PTC MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 119
BX PTC LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 119
BY PTC LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 119
BZ PTC MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 119
CA PTC EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 187
CB CASE VOLT LOW 1 CL PTC case voltage reference value Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CC CASE VOLT LOW 2 CL Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CD CASE VOLT MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CE CASE VOLT LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 0
CF CASE VOLT LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CG CASE VOLT MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0
CH CASE VOLT EMBOSS Both Low speed 2 0 - 255 0
CI TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 CL Secondary transfer drive roller bias Color Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CJ TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 CL reference value Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CK TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE CL Middle speed 0 - 255 98
CL TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 1 BW Black and Low speed 1 0 - 255 98
CM TC2 DRIVEROLL LOW 2 BW white Low speed 2 0 - 255 98
CN TC2 DRIVEROLL MIDDLE BW Middle speed 0 - 255 98
8-10
Function (Purpose) Main charger total current output setting
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
2) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
3) Press [OK] key.
Button Item Display Content Setting range Default value

MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (middle speed mode) K 60 - 110 70
B MIDDLE SPEED MC_C Main charger total current (middle speed mode) C 60 - 110 70
C MIDDLE SPEED MC_M Main charger total current (middle speed mode) M 60 - 110 70
D MIDDLE SPEED MC_Y Main charger total current (middle speed mode) Y 60 - 110 70
LOW1 A LOW1 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) K 60 - 110 70
B LOW1 SPEED MC_C Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) C 60 - 110 70
C LOW1 SPEED MC_M Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) M 60 - 110 70
D LOW1 SPEED MC_Y Main charger total current (low speed 1 mode) Y 60 - 110 70
LOW2 A LOW2 SPEED MC_K Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) K 60 - 110 70
B LOW2 SPEED MC_C Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) C 60 - 110 70
C LOW2 SPEED MC_M Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) M 60 - 110 70
D LOW2 SPEED MC_Y Main charger total current (low speed 2 mode) Y 60 - 110 70
9 Display
TNM_K Toner motor K
Content
TNM_C Toner motor C

9-2 TNM_M Toner motor M
Purpose Operation test/check TNM_Y Toner motor Y
TNHM_K Hopper motor K
TNHM_C Hopper motor C
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
TNHM_M Hopper motor M
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
TNHM_Y Hopper motor Y
cuit.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure
10-2
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played. Purpose Operation test/check
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
are highlighted. remaining quantity sensor and the control
circuit.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1
Section Toner supply section
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to display "No toner remaining" or "Toner
remaining" in the toner hopper.
No toner remaining: Normal display
9-3 Toner remaining: Highlighted display
Display Content
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
TFSD_K Hopper remaining quantity sensor K
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
TFSD_C Hopper remaining quantity sensor C
and its control circuit.
TFSD_M Hopper remaining quantity sensor M
Section Duplex TFSD_Y Hopper remaining quantity sensor Y
Operation/Procedure
The selected load performs the operation. 13
Display Content 13--

ADUM1 ADU motor 1 Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
ADUM2 ADU motor 2
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
10
10-1
Purpose Operation test/check 14
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the 14--
related circuit.
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Section Toner supply section
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
Operation/Procedure troubles.
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. Section
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
Operation/Procedure
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
tridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making
a few black background copy in the single color copy mode
of the target color.
15 Target Default
Display
range/
Display Description
counter value No. of
15-- digits
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) quantity (BW) quantity of black
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble. and white
TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
Section LCC/LCT
(COL) quantity of color
Operation/Procedure Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. quantity of black and white
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
of full color
TOTAL (2COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
of 2-color
TOTAL (3COL) Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
16 of 3-color
TOTAL Total use quantity 0 Max. 8
(SGL_COL) of single color
16-- Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) copy counter
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. COPY (COL) Full color copy 0 Max. 8
counter
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB COPY (2COL) 2-color copy 0 Max. 8
Operation/Procedure counter
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. COPY Single color copy 0 Max. 8
(SGL_COL) counter
Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
print counter
PRINT (COL) Full color print 0 Max. 8
counter
21 PRINT (2COL) 2-color print
counter
0 Max. 8
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print 0 Max. 8

21-1 counter
Purpose Setting PRINT Single color print 0 Max. 8
(SGL_COL) counter
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle. Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
Section filing document filing
Operation/Procedure print counter
DOC FIL (COL) Color document 0 Max. 8
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance filing print counter
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean- DOC FIL 2-color document 0 Max. 8
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not (2COL) filing print counter
clarify. DOC FIL Single color 0 Max. 8
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch (SGL_COL) document filing
panel. print counter
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
other counter
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) OTHER (COL) Color other counter 0 Max. 8
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 300K
22-2
COUNTER counter (Total) 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
(TOTAL) 999: Free Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: Default 200K Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed
COUNTER counter (Color) 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
and troubles. (When the number of total
(COLOR) 999: Free
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
22 The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
Display Content Default value

22-1
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter 0
Check TROUBLE Trouble counter 0
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
22-3 Display Content
FOLDING UNIT Folding unit
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check DECURLER Decurler unit
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the ACU High compression PDF unit
misfeed count of each position. FIERY Fiery
* Presumption of the faulty point by this FONT UNICODE Unicode font data
data is possible.
Section
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
firmware version, and the counter list.
22-4
Section
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
tory.
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
Section (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) Item Print list mode Print content
DATA PATTERN NO.1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
NO.2 SIM50-24 data
NO.3 Data related to the process control
22-5 2SIDED PRINT 1-SIDED Simplex surface print (Default)
Purpose Others 2-SIDED Duplex surface print
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
unit (section).
1).
Section Firmware
Operation/Procedure
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. 22-8
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
Display Content (counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF,
Serial No. (The codes for November and and the scan (reading) unit.
S/N
December are "X" and "Y" respectively.) Section
BUNDLE Bundle version
Operation/Procedure
ICU-MAIN ICUM (MAIN section)
ICU-BIOS ICUM (BIOS section) The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner
ASIC-MAIN ASIC (MAIN section) related counters are displayed.
ASIC-SUB ASIC (SUB section)
Number of
ASIC2 ASIC2
digits of Default
LANGUAGE Language support data version Display Content
display or value
LANGUAGE (LIST) Language data for list printing type
EOSA ESCP font ROM SPF Document feed quantity 8 digits 0
UNICONTENTS Contents data for display SCAN Scan counter 8 digits 0
SIM-TEXT Language data for simulation STAPLER Staple counter 8 digits 0
PCL (PROFILE) Color profile data PUNCHER Puncher counter 8 digits 0
POWER-CON Power controller program STAMP Stamp counter 8 digits 0
FONT BARCODE Font data for bar code SADDLE Saddle staple counter 8 digits 0
FONT PS PS font data STAPLER
FONT PCL PCL font data SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold 8 digits 0
FONT SPDL Simple PDL font data counter
FONT OFFICE Office Direct font data COVER Cover open/close counter 8 digits 0
WATER MARK Water mark data HP_ON HP detection count 8 digits 0
E-MANUAL Users manual data TRIMMER Trimmer counter 8 digits 0
OCR-DIC OCR dictionary data FOLDING Paper folding counter 8 digits 0
SCU SCU INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1) 8 digits 0
DSPF DSPF INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2) 8 digits 0
PCU PCU INSERTER Inserter offline counter 8 digits 0
LCT/LCC/LCT(A3LCC)/ OFFLINE
LCT/LCC/LCT(A3LCC)/LCT(A3LCT)
LCT(A3LCT) DECURLER De-curler counter 8 digits 0
LCT2(A3LCT) A3LCT GBC PUNCH GBC punch counter 8 digits 0
FINISHER/FINISHER OC LAMP TIME Displays the total lighting *****:** 0
Finisher
(FIN100)/ FINISHER time of the lamp in the OC
SADDLE/ section.
Saddle
SADDLE(FIN100) DSPF LAMP Displays the total lighting *****:** 0
TRIMMER Trimmer TIME(*1) time of the lamp in the
INSERTER Inserter DSPF section.
The lamp lighting time is displayed in ** hours ** minutes. No. of Default
Display item Content
The lamp lighting time is accumulated in all the modes. digits value
*1: Displayed only when the DSPF is installed. LCC_RETRY LCC paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
(*1)
LCT1_RETRY LCT1 paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
(*1)
22-9 LCT2_RETRY LCT2 paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check (*1)
LCT3_RETRY LCT3 paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print (When connected in two) (*1)
quantity) of each paper feed section. LCT4_RETRY LCT4 paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC (When connected in two) (*1)
Operation/Procedure LCT_MFT_RETRY LCT Manual paper feed retry 8 digits 0
counter (*1)
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
*1: Displayed only when the option is installed.
No. of Default
digits value
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter 8 digits 0
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter 8 digits 0 22-10
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter 8 digits 0 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter 8 digits 0 Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
MFT Manual paper feed counter 8 digits 0 (option, internal hardware).
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter 8 digits 0
(A4LCCorA3LCC) (*1) Section
LCT1 Upper stage LCT paper feed 8 digits 0 Operation/Procedure
counter (*1) The system configuration is displayed.
LCT2 Lower stage LCT paper feed 8 digits 0
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
counter (*1)
played.)
LCT3 Upper stage LCT paper feed 8 digits 0
counter (When connected in
Item display
two) (*1) Display content Content
name
LCT4 Lower stage LCT paper feed 8 digits 0
MACHINE MX-7090N Main unit
counter (When connected in
MX-8090N
two) (*1)
SPF STANDARD Duplex single pass feeder
LCT_MFT LCT manual paper feed 8 digits 0
counter (*1) STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
ADU ADU paper feed counter 8 digits 0 LCC MX-LC12 A4 large capacity tray
TRAY1_TTL Accumulated tray 1 paper feed 8 digits 0 MX-LCX3 N A3 large capacity tray
counter MX-LC13 N Large capacity tray
TRAY2_TTL Accumulated tray 2 paper feed 8 digits 0 PUNCHER MX-PN13A Punch module
counter MX-PN13B
TRAY3_TTL Accumulated tray 3 paper feed 8 digits 0 MX-PN13C
counter MX-PN13D
TRAY4_TTL Accumulated tray 4 paper feed 8 digits 0 FINISHER MX-FN21 4K finisher (100 sheets staple)
counter MX-FN22 4K saddle finisher
MFT_TTL Accumulated manual paper 8 digits 0 (100 sheets staple)
feed counter (*1) MX-FN19 4K finisher (50 sheets staple)
LCC_TTL Accumulated side LCC paper 8 digits 0 MX-FN20 4K saddle finisher
feed counter (A4LCC or (50 sheets staple)
A3LCC) (*1) INSERTER MX-CF11 Inserter
LCT1_TTL Accumulated upper stage LCT 8 digits 0 PS STANDARD PS expansion kit
paper feed counter (*1) SECURITY MX-FR58U Data security kit (commercial
LCT2_TTL Accumulated lower stage LCT 8 digits 0 version)
paper feed counter (*1) ICU_PWB *****MB ICU_REUS memory capacity
LCT3_TTL Accumulated upper stage LCT 8 digits 0 (REUS1)
paper feed counter (When ICU_PWB *****MB ICU_SOC memory capacity
connected in two) (*1) (SOC)
LCT4_TTL Accumulated lower stage LCT 8 digits 0 HDD *****GB Hard disk capacity
paper feed counter (When
SSD *****MB SSD capacity
connected in two) (*1)
NIC STANDARD NIC
LCT_MFT_TTL Accumulated LCT manual 8 digits 0
BARCODE MX-PF10 Barcode font kit
paper feed counter (*1)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
ADU_TTL Accumulated ADU paper feed 8 digits 0
counter ACM(*1) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
TRAY1_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0 EAM(*1) MX-AMX3 External account module
(Paper feed tray 1) OFFICE DRT STANDARD Direct print expansion kit
TRAY2_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0 CURL MX-RB15 Curl correction unit
(Paper feed tray 2) TRIMMING MX-TM10 Trimming module
TRAY3_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0 (100 sheets saddle finisher)
(Paper feed tray 3) STACKER1 MX-ST10 Stacker
TRAY4_RETRY Paper feed retry counter 8 digits 0 STACKER2 MX-ST10 Stacker (2 connection)
(Paper feed tray 4) FOLDING UNIT MX-FD10 Folding unit
MFT_RETRY Manual paper feed retry 8 digits 0
counter (*1) *1: Option units are displayed only when they are installed.
22-12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the DSPF misfeed positions
and the number of misfeed at each posi-
tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
siderably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
22-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.
Number of Life meter (+/- Number of

Display item Content Counter RPM
use days 1% unit) remaining days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING UNIT Fusing unit
FUSING BELT Fusing belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING MOTOR Fusing motor Not displayed Max. 8 0 - 999 Not displayed Not displayed
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release drive Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
PRESSURE ROLLER Pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PAWL Separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
SEPARATE PLATE Separation plate Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB UNIT(L) Fusing lower web unit Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
FUSING WEB SEND(L) Fusing lower web cleaning send Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
counter
TC1 UNIT Primary transfer unit
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PTC PTC counter Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PTC CLEAN PTC cleaner Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
TC2 UNIT Secondary transfer unit
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TC2 TRANSFER BLADE Secondary transfer blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
PS PAPER PS paper dust removing Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
OZONE/TONER FILTER Ozone filter/Toner filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE UNIT(K)/(C)/(M)/ Developer unit K/C/M/Y
(Y)
DEVE CLUTCH(K)/(C)/ Developer clutch K/C/M/Y
(M)/(Y)
DEVE CTRG(K) Developer cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(C) Developer cartridge C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(M) Developer cartridge M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DEVE CTRG(Y) Developer cartridge Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM UNIT(K)/(C)/(M)/ Drum unit K/C/M/Y
(Y)
DRUM CTRG(K) Drum cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM CTRG(C) Drum cartridge C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM CTRG(M) Drum cartridge M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM CTRG(Y) Drum cartridge Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(K) Main charger K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(C) Main charger C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(M) Main charger M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MAIN CHARGER(Y) Main charger Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
MC CLEAN(K) MC cleaner (K) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
MC CLEAN(C) MC cleaner (C) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
Number of Life meter (+/- Number of
Display item Content Counter RPM
use days 1% unit) remaining days
MC CLEAN(M) MC cleaner (M) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
MC CLEAN(Y) MC cleaner (Y) Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
DRUM BLADE(K) Drum blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM BLADE(C) Drum blade C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM BLADE(M) Drum blade M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
DRUM BLADE(Y) Drum blade Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365(*1)
TONER CTRG(K) Toner cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG(C) Toner cartridge C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG(M) Toner cartridge M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG(Y) Toner cartridge Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
*1: For outside the range, "-----" is displayed.
22-14
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity

Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K) Toner cartridge use counter (K) 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-25%
TONER (C) Toner cartridge use counter (C) 25-50%
TONER (M) Toner cartridge use counter (M) 50-75%
TONER (Y) Toner cartridge use counter (Y) 75-100%
22-18 No. of Default

Display Content
digits value
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Network NET SCN Network scanner 8 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history. scanner ORG_2CL document read quantity
counter (2-Color scan
Section job)
Operation/Procedure NET SCN Network scanner 8 0
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed. ORG_SGL document read quantity
counter (Single-color
Display item scan job)
Content Internet INTERNET Number of internet FAX 8 0
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time FAX FAX OUTPUT output
of operation start) INTERNET Number of internet FAX 8 0
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time FAX SEND sending page
of operation end) OUTPUT
INTERNET Number of internet FAX 8 0
FAX RECEIVE receive
INTERNET Number of internet FAX 8 0
22-19 FAX SEND send
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of 8 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check COUNTER E-MAIL send
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters FTP FTP Number of FTP send 8 0
related to the scan - image send. COUNTER
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send 8 0
Section
USB CNT Number of times of USB 8 0
Operation/Procedure storage
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner TRIAL Trial mode counter (B/W 8 0
Change the display with scroll key. MODE_B&C & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
No. of Default HDD_B/W quantity (B/W)
Display Content
digits value SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
Network NET SCN Network scanner 8 0 HDD_CL quantity (Color)
scanner ORG_B/W document read quantity SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
counter (B/W scan job) HDD_2CL quantity (2-color)
NET SCN Network scanner 8 0 SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record 8 0
ORG_CL document read quantity HDD_SGL quantity (Single color)
counter (Color scan job)
22-40 22-41
Purpose Error contents display Purpose JAM code contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the
contents. contents.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code. 1) Select the JAM code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed. Display can be changed by [ENGINE] and [SPF] keys.
22-42
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.
Counter Content Max.

JAM CODE/ number
Display data TOTAL TOTAL Remarks
Display Content TROUBLE DATE/TIME of
COUNT(BW) COUNT(CL)
CODE histories
PAPER JAM PAPER JAM Number of Generated Generated Total output Total output The head is the latest, and the
COUNT machine JAM JAM code date/time quantity of quantity of 50 bottom is the oldest. The max.
troubles (Machine) (YY/MM/DD black and color number of histories is 50.
SPF JAM SPF JAM Number of Generated HH:MM:SS) white When 50 is exceeded, the
COUNT SPF JAM JAM code 50 oldest one is not displayed
troubles (SPF) sequentially.
TROUBLE TROUBLE Number of Generated The head is the latest, and the
COUNT troubles trouble code bottom is the oldest. The max.
number of histories is 30.
30
When 30 is exceeded, the
oldest one is not displayed
sequentially.
22-43 Item Content Description

P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display JN Job No First after JOB start or not
Section OF Offset Paper exit: Offset
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position
Operation/Procedure
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. SP Staple Paper exit: Staple
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper
feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed. *1: Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1.
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is dis- Display data and contents (HISTORY2)
played. Item Content
When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature and NO. History number
humidity data are displayed. DATE/TIME Occurrence date
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys. TH_M External air temperature sensor temperature/AD
value
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
HUD_M External air humidity sensor humidity/AD value
Item Content TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 temperature/AD value
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor temperature/AD value
SIM22-09 display content) TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar temperature/AD value
with SIM27-18 display content) TH_UM_D Fusing upper main thermistor (differential) AD value
TH_US1 Fusing upper sub thermister1 temperature/AD value
Display data and contents (HISTORY1) TH_US1_CS Fusing upper sub thermister1 (compensation)
Item Content Description temperature/AD value
NO No History number TH_US1_D Fusing upper sub thermister1 (differential) AD value
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date TH_LM1 Fusing lower main thermister1 temperature/AD value
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W) TH_LM1_CS Fusing lower main thermister1 (compensation)
TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color) temperature/AD value
P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size TH_LM1_D Fusing lower main thermister1 (differential) AD value
Item Content Display Content
TH_LM2 Fusing lower main thermistor 2 temperature/AD value K16 AB series K16
TH_PS PS temperature sensor temperature/AD value 16R fixed form K16R
K32 K32
Detail display content of HISTORY1
32R K32R
Display Content 66 SRA3
NON Inch series No paper size 67 SRA3R
WLG fixed form Double Legal 68 SRA4
WLR Double Legal-R 69 SRA4R
LD Ledger 06A 318 x 469 mm
LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter) 06B 469 x 318 mm
LG Legal 06C 234 x 318 mm
LGR Legal-R 06D 318 x 234 mm
FC Foolscap 06E 312 x 440 mm
FCR Foolscap-R 06F 440 x 312 mm
LT Letter 70 220 x 312 mm
LTR Letter-R 71 312 x 220 mm
IV Invoice (Mini) 82 Domestic DBL Postcard
IVR Invoice-R (Mini) 83 special DBL Postcard-R
EC Executive 84 (Envelope) Postcard
ECR Executive-R 85 Postcard-R
A3W A3W (12x18 in) 87 119 x 277 mm
AWR A3W (12x18 in)-R 89 120 x 235 mm
12 22x17 08B 90 x 205 mm
13 22x17R 08D 90 x 185 mm
14 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
15 22x34R 91 216 x 277 mm
16 34x44 93 197 x 267 mm
17 34x44R 95 190 x 240 mm
18 44x68 97 162 x 229 mm
19 44x68R 99 142 x 205 mm
01A 9x12 09B 119 x 197 mm
01B 9x12R 09D 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asian-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asian -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Other Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 AB series A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R fixed form A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 Other A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Oversea Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 special Monarch-R
B5 B5 0C4 (Envelope) DL
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
54 A0x2 0C8 C5
55 A0x2 R 0C9 C5-R
A0 A0 0CA C6
A0R A0R 0CB C6-R
B0 B0 0CC C65
B0R B0R 0CD C65-R
B1 B1 0CE ISOB5
B1R B1R 0CF ISOB5-R
B2R B2 0D0 Size6-1/2
B2R B2R 0D1 Size6-1/2-R
K8 K8 0D2 Size9
K8R K8R 0D3 Size9-R
Display Content 22-90
0D8 Oversea Com-10
0D9 special Com-10-R
0DA (Envelope) Inch series E-version Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
0DB Inch series L-version Section
0DC Inch series panorama size
Operation/Procedure
0DD Inch series name card large
0DE Inch series identification photo
1) Change the display with scroll key.
0DF Inch series name card small 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
0EC Other Extra (Special large size) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
0ED Extra (Special small size)
0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed) Category Item Content
0F0 Long size Machine status MACHINE STATUS LIST Machine status list
0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in list *1
a coin vendor.) Printer test PCL SYMBOL SET LIST SPDL symbol set list *2
page PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST SPDL internal font list *2
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T) PCL EXTENDED FONT SPDL extended font list
Display Content LIST *2
UST User type PS FONT LIST PS internal font list *2
LHP Letter head paper KANJI FONT LIST PS KANJI font list *2
PNP Perforated sheet PS EXTENDED FONT LIST PS extended font list *2
RCL Recycled paper NIC PAGE NIC page
COL Color paper Address INDIVIDUAL LIST Address registration list
PLN Standard paper registration list GROUP LIST Group list
*1 MEMORY BOX LIST Memory box list
PRP Pre printed
OHP OHP Transparency Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing folder
HV Heavy paper filing list *1 FOLDER LIST list
LBL Label sheet Common PAPER SETTING LIST Paper setting list
ENV Envelope MACHINE Machine identification
IDENTIFICATION settings list
HG Postcard
SETTINGS LIST
TAB Tab sheet
OPERATION SETTINGS Operation settings list
THN Thin paper
LIST
US1 User type 1
KEYBOARD SETTINGS Keyboard settings list
US2 User type 2 LIST
US3 User type 3 DEVICE CONTROL LIST Device control list
US4 User type 4 Home screen HOME SCREEN LIST Home screen list
US5 User type 5 Copy setting COPY SETTINGS LIST Copy settings list
US6 User type 6 Printer setting PRINTER SETTINGS LIST Printer settings list
US7 User type 7 FAX/Image METADATA SET LIST Meta data set list
US8 User type 8 send SCAN SETTINGS LIST Scan settings list
US9 User type 9 FAX SETTINGS LIST Fax settings list
US10 User type 10 I-FAX SETTINGS LIST Internet fax settings list
US11 User type 11 Document DOCUMENT FILING Document filing settings
HV2 Heavy paper 2 filing list SETTINGS LIST list
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used) SHARP OSA SHARP OSA SETTINGS SHARP OSA settings list
HV3 Heavy paper 3 setting LIST
HV4 Heavy paper 4 Network NETWORK SETTINGS Network settings list
GLS Glossy paper setting LIST
EMB Embossed paper Security SECURITY SETTINGS Security settings list
ECO Eco Crystal Paper setting LIST
Energy save ENERGY SAVE LIST Energy save settings list
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB) setting
Image quality IMAGE QUALITY Image quality
Display Content
adjustment ADJUSTMENT LIST adjustment list
SHD Shading.
Image sending IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
PCL Process control
activity report ACTIVITY REPORT (FAX) report (FAX)
SIM Test mode (Sim)
IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
ICP Interruption copy ACTIVITY REPORT (SCAN) report (scanner)
CP Copy IMAGE SENDING Image sending activity
FXS FAX send scan ACTIVITY REPORT report (Internet FAX)
AXS AXIS (INTERNET FAX)
FXP FAX reception print Transfer table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER Receive rejection
PR Printer list LIST number table
FXC FAX communication report print ALLOW/REJECT MAIL & Receive rejection/allow
00A Zaurus print DOMAIN NAME LIST address
SLF Self/Test print INBOUND ROUTING LIST Transfer table list
00C Document counter DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST To administrator transfer
RMT Remote maintenance list
00E SIM 52-01
*1 When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
model, this setting is invalid.
CFP Confidential print
NET Network scanner
*2 When Fiery is set, this setting is invalid.
PRF Proof print
23
23-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 24
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of 24-1
troubles of misfeed is considerably great, Purpose Data clear
the judgment is made that repair is Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
required.)
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
Section nance, clear the counters.)
Operation/Procedure Section
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. Operation/Procedure
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Item Button display Content
DATA PATTERN NO.1 JAM/Trouble history print 3) Press [YES] key.
NO.2 Paper feed counter, JAM history The target counter is cleared.
details, and temperature/humidity
history print MACHINE Machine JAM counter
SPF DSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
23-80
24-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- Purpose Data clear
tion and the paper transport section. Used Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
to output the list of the operation status of ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
the sensor and the detectors in the paper Section
feed section and the paper transport sec-
Operation/Procedure
tion.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
The target counter is cleared.
paper transport is outputted.
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors Display Content
in the paper feed and transport section. TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- ADU ADU paper feed counter
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. MFT Manual paper feed counter (*1)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC or A3 LCC)
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection operation LCT1 Upper stage LCT paper feed counter (*1)
or load operation name) LCT2 Lower stage LCT paper feed counter (*1)
STANDARD Reference value (ms) LCT3 Upper stage LCT paper feed counter
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the final (When connected in two) (*1)
paper LCT4 Lower stage LCT paper feed counter
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job on the (When connected in two) (*1)
final paper LCT_MFT LCT manual paper feed counter (*1)
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs ADU ADU Paper feed counter
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
*1: Displayed only when the option is installed.
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the
market.
24-3
Purpose Data clear
23-81 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF, and the
scan (reading) unit counter.
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
SIM23-80. Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
1) Connect the USB flash drive to the main unit.
The target counter is cleared.
Display Content
Display Display
Fusing FUSING UNIT Fusing unit (counter)
SPF Document feed quantity
FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter)
SCAN Number of times of scan
Fusing belt (Number of use days)
STAPLER Staple counter
Fusing belt (Accumulated
PUNCHER Puncher counter
traveling distance)
STAMP Number of stamps
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller (Counter)
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
Fusing roller (Number of use
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
days)
COVER Cover open/close counter
Fusing roller (Accumulated
HP_ON HP detection count traveling distance)
TRIMMER Trimmer counter FUSING MOTOR Fusing motor (Number of use
FOLDING Paper folding counter days)
INSERTER Inserter counter (Tray 1) Fusing motor (Accumulated
INSERTER2 Inserter counter (Tray 2) traveling distance)
INSERTER OFFLINE Inserter offline counter FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release drive
DECURLER De-curler counter (Number of rotations)
STACKER Stacker counter PRESS ROLLER Pressure roller (Counter)
STACKER2 Stacker2 counter Pressure roller (Number of use
GBC PUNCH GBC punch counter days)
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time Pressure roller (Accumulated
DSPF LAMP TIME (*1) DSPF section lamp total lighting time traveling distance)
SEPARATE PAWL Separation pawl (Counter)
*1: Display only when the DSPF is installed. Separation pawl (Number of use
days)
Separation pawl (Accumulated
traveling distance)
24-4
SEPARATE PLATE Separation plate (Counter)
Purpose Data clear Separation plate (Number of use
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the days)
printer counters of the transport unit and Separation plate (Accumulated
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- traveling distance)
nance, clear the counters.) WEB UNIT(L) Fusing lower web unit (Counter)
Fusing lower web unit (Number
Section of use days)
Operation/Procedure Fusing lower web cleaning send
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. counter (Counter)
Transfer TC1 UNIT Primary transfer unit (counter)
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter)
3) Press [YES] key.
Primary transfer belt (Number of
The target counter is cleared. use days)
Primary transfer belt
Display Content (Accumulated traveling distance)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter)
(Counter) Transfer blade (Number of use
Maintenance counter (Total) days)
(Number of use days) Transfer blade (Accumulated
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) traveling distance)
(Counter) TC CL ROLLER Transfer cleaning roller (Counter)
Maintenance counter (Color) Transfer cleaning roller (Number
(Number of use days) of use days)
Transfer cleaning roller
(Accumulated traveling distance)
TC2 UNIT Secondary transfer unit (Counter)
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter)
Secondary transfer belt (Number
of use days)
Secondary transfer belt
TC2 TRANS BLADE Secondary transfer blade
(Counter)
Secondary transfer blade
(Number of use days)
Secondary transfer blade
PTC PTC PTC counter (Counter)
PTC counter (Number of use
days)
PTC counter (Accumulated
traveling distance)
PTC CLEAN PTC counter (RPM)
Display Content Display Content
Drum DRUM UNIT K Drum unit K (Counter) Other PS PAPER PS paper dust removing
DRUM UNIT C Drum unit C (Counter) (Counter)
DRUM UNIT M Drum unit M (Counter) PS paper dust removing
DRUM UNIT Y Drum unit Y (Counter) (Number of use days)
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge K (Counter) OZONE/TONER Ozone filter/Toner filter (Counter)
Drum cartridge K (Number of use FILTER Ozone filter/Toner filter (Number
days) of use days)
Drum cartridge K (Accumulated DEVE CLUTCH K DV Clutch K (Counter)
traveling distance) DEVE CLUTCH C DV Clutch C (Counter)
DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge C (Counter) DEVE CLUTCH M DV Clutch M (Counter)
Drum cartridge C (Number of use DEVE CLUTCH Y DV Clutch Y (Counter)
days)
* The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by
Drum cartridge C (Accumulated
traveling distance) being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge M (Counter) * When "MAIN CHARGER K" is cleared, "MC CLEAN K" is also
Drum cartridge M (Number of use cleared. (as well as CMY)
days)
Drum cartridge M (Accumulated
traveling distance)
24-5
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge Y (Counter)
Drum cartridge Y (Number of use Purpose Data clear
days) Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter value
Drum cartridge Y (Accumulated and the toner hopper remaining quantity
traveling distance) counter. (After replacing developer, clear
Main charger MAIN CHARGER K Main charger K (Counter) these counters.)
Main charger K (Number of use
days)
Section
Main charger K (Accumulated Operation/Procedure
traveling distance) 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
MAIN CHARGER C Main charger C (Counter) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Main charger C (Number of use
days)
3) Press [YES] key.
Main charger C (Accumulated The target counter is cleared.
traveling distance) NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, the counters related to devel-
MAIN CHARGER M Main charger M (Counter) oper are automatically cleared.
Main charger M (Number of use
days) Button
Main charger M (Accumulated Content
display
traveling distance) DV_UT_K DV unit print counter (K)
MAIN CHARGER Y Main charger Y (Counter) DV_UT_C DV unit print counter (C)
Main charger Y (Number of use DV_UT_M DV unit print counter (M)
days)
DV_UT_Y DV unit print counter (Y)
Main charger Y (Accumulated
DV_K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
traveling distance)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
MC CLEAN K MC cleaner K (RPM)
Number of day that used developer (day) (K)
MC CLEAN C MC cleaner C (RPM)
DV_C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
MC CLEAN M MC cleaner M (RPM)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
MC CLEAN Y MC cleaner Y (RPM)
Number of day that used developer (day) (C)
Drum blade DRUM BLADE K Drum blade K (Counter)
DV_M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Drum blade K (Number of use
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
days)
Number of day that used developer (day) (M)
Drum blade K (Accumulated
traveling distance) DV_Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
DRUM BLADE C Drum blade C (Counter) Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Drum blade C (Number of use Number of day that used developer (day) (Y)
days) HP_K Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (K)
Drum blade C (Accumulated Hopper loop count (K)
traveling distance) HP_C Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (C)
DRUM BLADE M Drum blade M (Counter) Hopper loop count (C)
Drum blade M (Number of use HP_M Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (M)
days) Hopper loop count (M)
Drum blade M (Accumulated HP_Y Remaining toner counter in the intermediate hopper (Y)
traveling distance) Hopper loop count (Y)
DRUM BLADE Y Drum blade Y (Counter)
Drum blade Y (Number of use NOTE: The "developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed in
days) SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is not
Drum blade Y (Accumulated cleared when this simulation is executed.
traveling distance) When the toner hopper is replaced with a new one or when
toner in the hopper is cleaned, execute "HP_*."
CAUTION: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
24-35
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
Purpose Data clear error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status reference toner density level is not set normally.
data. CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new devel-
Section oper is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, under-
Operation/Procedure toner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. CAUTION: Execute without insertion of the toner cartridge.
2) Press [YES] key. Result display item name
The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared. Display Default
range value
AT DEVE ADJ_L1_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L1_C adjustment value at 1 - 255 128
25 AT DEVE ADJ_L1_M low speed 1 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L1_Y 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L2_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
25-1 AT DEVE ADJ_L2_C adjustment value at 1 - 255 128
Purpose Operation test/check AT DEVE ADJ_L2_M low speed 2 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE ADJ_L2_Y 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
oping section.
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C adjustment value at 1 - 255 128
Section Process (Developing section) AT DEVE ADJ_M_M middle speed 1 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. AT DEVE VO_L1_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_L1_C adjustment control 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_L1_M voltage in low speed 1 1 - 255 128
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
AT DEVE VO_L1_Y 1 - 255 128
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
AT DEVE VO_L2_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
played.
AT DEVE VO_L2_C adjustment control 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_L2_M voltage in low speed 2 1 - 255 128
Sensor
name Sensor name AT DEVE VO_L2_Y 1 - 255 128
(Display) AT DEVE VO_M_K Automatic developer 1 - 255 128
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) AT DEVE VO_M_C adjustment control 1 - 255 128
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C) AT DEVE VO_M_M voltage in middle 1 - 255 128
AT DEVE VO_M_Y speed 1 - 255 128
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K) Display during execution of the simulation
TSG_C Toner sensor control voltage input value (C) Sensor
TSG_M Toner sensor control voltage input value (M) name Sensor name
TSG_Y Toner sensor control voltage input value (Y) (Display)
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
Display Default
Content TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
item value
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed Middle TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
LOW1 Process speed: Low speed 1 speed TSG_K Toner sensor control voltage input value (K)
LOW2 Process speed: Low speed 2 TSG_C Toner sensor control voltage input value (C)
TSG_M Toner sensor control voltage input value (M)
TSG_Y Toner sensor control voltage input value (Y)
25-2 Error content
Purpose Setting Error

Error name Details of error display
display
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or the
density when replacing developer. (Auto- control voltage exceeds 207.
matic adjustment) EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- control voltage is less than 52.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128 ± 3.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 25-4
The developing motor rotates for 1 min 30 sec, and the toner den- Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
is displayed.
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
ket.)
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level. Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
Display 25-10
range
Purpose Setting
YLD_CNT_FB Toner supply FB rate by the yield count 50 - 200
DELTA_DVB Delta DVB -500 - 500
Function (Purpose) Developer/drum serial no. setting (Not used
(Process control DVB - Target DVB) in the market)
IDL_DVB Target DVB 100 - 600 Section
PROCON_DVB Process control DVB 100 - 600 Operation/Procedure
DV_LIFE Developer life area 1 - 32
COVERAGE_ Average print rate area 1 - 29
AREA
ENV_AREA Environment area 1 - 16
MULTI_TIME Toner supply drive time area 1-8 26
(Specified by the DV motor rotation time)
PRO_FB_CNT No. of remaining times of toner supply for 0 - 65535
26-1
the process control result
PRO_FB_INT Interval of toner supply for the process 0 - 65535 Purpose Setting
control result Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the
PRO_FB_RATIO Correction rate of one-time toner supply -10 - 10 right paper exit tray.
for the process control result
RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (+) 0 - 65535 Section Paper exit
CNT(+) (No. of times of compulsory toner supply) Operation/Procedure
RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (-) 0 - 65535 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
CNT(-) (No. of times of compulsory printing of
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
one-color background image)
AUTO_DV_ARE Environment area at automatic 1 - 16 This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit.
A developer adjustment
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
25-5
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction 26-2
data. (Not used in the market.) Purpose Setting
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large
Operation/Procedure capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
The toner density correction data are displayed. is changed, this simulation must be exe-
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
Display
Display Content Section Paper feed
range
TCS_B_AVE. Average value of the toner sensor output 0 - 255 Operation/Procedure
block Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
TSG_HUM Current TSG environment correction -127 - 127
value (Medium speed) Item Setting value Content
TSG_COV Current TSG print ratio correction value -127 - 127 TRAY1 0 8.5 x 11
(Medium speed) 1 A4
TSG_LIFE Current TSG developer life correction -127 - 127 2 B5
value (Medium speed) A4 LCC 0 8.5 x 11
TSG_ENV Current TSG accumulated drive area -127 - 127 1 A4
correction value (Medium speed) 2 B5
DELTA_TSG Control voltage correction value -255 - 255 G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
DELTA ΔVspeed correction value (Medium -127 - 127 1 LBS
VSPEED(M) speed)
DELTA ΔVspeed correction value (Low speed) -127 - 127
VSPEED(L) Setting value
Destination
TSG_REF Control voltage reference value (Medium 0 - 255 TRAY1 A4 LCC G/LBS SET
speed) U.S.A 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
TSG_TOTAL Current applying TSG (Medium speed) 0 - 255 CANADA 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
TCS_AVE. Toner sensor output average value 0 - 255 INCH 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11 LBS
TN_EMP_W Number of times of detecting the toner 0 - 255 JAPAN B5 A4 GRAM
empty threshold value w or above TAIWAN A4 A4 GRAM
TN_EMP_X Number of times of detecting the toner 0 - 255 EUROPE A4 A4 GRAM
empty threshold value x or above U.K. A4 A4 GRAM
TN_EMP_Y Number of times of detecting the toner 0 - 255 AUS. A4 A4 GRAM
empty threshold value y or above AB A4 A4 GRAM
TN_REM_CNT Remaining toner counter in the 0- CHINA A4 A4 GRAM
intermediate hopper 400000 KOREA A4 A4 GRAM
TNM_PPS PPC correction coefficiency for 50 - 150 BRAZIL A4 A4 GRAM
calculating the TM rotation umber
HP_B_AVE. Intermediate hopper transport amount 30 - 50
average value
26-3 Default
value
Purpose Setting COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_O
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. TIMING timing of the paper lead edge UT
(Setting must be made according to the by the sensor after the paper
auditor use conditions.) passes the fusing section is
used as the money charging
Section Auditor timing.
Operation/Procedure FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear edge
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
by the sensor after the paper
passes the fusing section is
Default
Item/Display Content used as the money charging
value
timing.
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
timing of the paper rear edge
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
by the paper exit sensor of
AUDITOR vendor is used.
the right paper exit tray or of
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode the after process unit is used
(Only the copy mode can be as the money charging
controlled.) timing.
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode in which IMS ON Image send mode is limited. OFF
signals for the DocuLyser CONTROL OFF Image send mode is not
connected to the PCU are
limited.
used for communication in
PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE
parallel I/F.
CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 3
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
MODE are allowed to select.
signals for the intercard
MODE2 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
connected to the PCU are
always set to P VENDOR1
used for communication in
and VENDOR MODE is
parallel I/F.
always set to MODE3.
OUTSIDE P OTHER Mode for an external auditor NONE
MODE3 OUTSIDE AUDITOR is
AUDITOR connected to the SCU.
always set to P OTHER and
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
VENDOR MODE is always
(*1)
set to MODE3.
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode (*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode (*2) Refer to the details of the vendor mode.
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
document filing print Details of the vendor mode
OFF No support for the auditor in Completion Insufficient money during Completion
document filing print of the copy job of the
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF specified specified
performed in the duplex print BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
mode. (no money (Money
(Money (No money
If the remaining money remaining) remaining)
remaining) remaining)
expires during continuous Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
printing, the sheets in the MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
machine are discharged
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
without being printed on the
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
back surfaces.
OFF Continuous printing is not
Operation 1:
performed in the duplex print
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for which can be changed in the system setting.
printing every surface in all Operation 2:
the printing process.) Auto clear is not made.
If the remaining money
Operation 3:
expires during printing, the
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back surface. Details of the printer control
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE1 I) Selectable all VENDOR MODE
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE2 I) Printing of the copy job (not including the reprint in copy
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
mode) and print job (including the reprint in printer mode/self-
print in printer mode) are exclusively controlled using READY
signal from the vender.
II) If READY signal from the vender gets ready during printing,
the print job in progress will be completed and other print jobs
will be held on the job queue, and then the copy job becomes
executable.
III) If READY signal becomes NotReady, the copy job in

progress will be canceled after the print stops, and then the
print of the printer job will resume.
MODE3 I) If READY signal from the auditor becomes NotReady during To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key
printing the copy job/print job (including Self-print)/all kinds of and enter the correct character.
reprint jobs, all of copy/print/any kinds of reprint jobs on the job 2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).
queue will be canceled right after the print of the job in progress
NOTE:
stops.
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode
function.
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
26-5 function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula-
Purpose Setting tion mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
Number of times of key input
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/ 10-key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11x17 size)
1 1 - - - - - - - - -
Section 2 A B C a b c 2 - - -
Operation/Procedure 3 D E F d e f 3 - - -
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
5 J K L j k l 5 - - -
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
6 M N O m n o 6 - - -
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 -
3) Press [OK] key. 8 T U V t u v 8 - - -
The set value in step 2) is saved. 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 -
0 0 - - - - - - - - -
Item/Display Content Default value
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color)
C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2 26-8
D MAINTE (COL) Maintenance counter (Color)
Purpose Setting
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color) Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-6 1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.
Purpose Setting
1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. 3) Press [OK] key.
Section Default
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Content value
range value
(Taiwan)
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. LONG Total counter (B/W)
The selected set content is saved. SIZE(S)
B TOTAL Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
U.S.A. United States of America (COL) LONG Total counter (Color)
CANADA Canada SIZE(S)
INCH Inch series, other destinations C MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
JAPAN Japan (B/W) LONG Maintenance
TAIWAN Taiwan SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
EUROPE Europe D MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
(COL) LONG Maintenance
U.K. United Kingdom
SIZE(S) counter (Color)
AUS. Australia
E DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
AB AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
LONG Developer counter
CHINA China SIZE(S) (B/W)
KOREA Korea F DEV(COL) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
BRAZIL Brazil LONG Developer counter
SIZE(S) (color)
G TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Total counter (B/W)
26-7 SIZE(L)
Purpose Setting H TOTAL Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
(COL) LONG Total counter (Color)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID. SIZE(L)
Section I MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
Operation/Procedure (B/W) LONG Maintenance
SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key. J MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be (COL) LONG Maintenance
inputted. SIZE(L) counter (Color)
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly. K DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Developer counter
Refer to the following list and enter characters. SIZE(L) (B/W)
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
ted.
Default
Setting Default Destination Default value C Default value D
Item/Display Content value
range value U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
(Taiwan)
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
L DEV(COL) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
LONG Developer counter INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
SIZE(L) (color) JAPAN 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
TAIWAN 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
U.K. 1 (Not Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed)
26-10 AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Purpose Setting AB 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
KOREA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
scanner.
BRAZIL 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-30
2) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Setting
The set value in step 1) is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default) standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
Section
26-18 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner 0 Control allowed
save mode operation. 1 Control inhibited
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
2) Press [OK] key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
to the power frequency, etc.
3) Press [OK] key. U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
The set value in step 2) is saved. CANADA 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 1 (CE not supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AB 1 (CE not supported)
Item/ Setting Default JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
Content NOTE
Display range value TAIWAN 1 (CE not supported) KOREA 1 (CE not supported)
A COPY 0 Copy toner 0-3 0 EUROPE 0 (CE supported) BRAZIL 1 (CE not supported)
(0: OFF save mode
1: SV1 NOT available
2: SV2 1 Copy toner 1: Toner
3: SV3) save mode 1 save LOW 26-32
2 Copy toner
Purpose Setting
save mode 2
3 Copy toner 3: Toner Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing
save mode 3 save HIGH cleaning operation.
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner 0-3 0 Section Fusing
(0: OFF save mode
Operation/Procedure
1: SV1 NOT available
2: SV2 1 Printer toner 1: Toner 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3: SV3) save mode 1 save LOW Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set.
2 Printer toner 2) Press [OK] key.
save mode 2
3 Printer toner 3: Toner Default
save mode 3 save HIGH Item/Display Content Setting range
value
C COPY TS 0 Setting of copy 0-1 Linked A CLEANING User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0
DISPLAY toner save is with the PRINT SET function is Enable. (YES)
(0: YES displayed. set value User fusing cleaning 1 NO
1: NO) 1 Setting of copy of function is Disable.
toner save is SIM26-6.
not displayed.
D PRINTER 0 Setting of 0-1 Linked
TS printer toner with the
DISPLAY save is set value
(0:YES displayed. of
1:NO) 1 Setting of SIM26-6.
printer toner
save is not
displayed.
26-35 26-49
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
trouble history when a same trouble mode.
occurred repeatedly. There are two display Section
modes: display as one trouble and display
Operation/Procedure
as several series of troubles.
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
Section
Operation/Procedure Item/Setting value Content Default value
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH
0 Only once display.
1 Any time display.
2) Press [OK] key. 26-50

The set value in step 1) is saved. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
Section
26-38
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the panel.
maintenance life is reached.
Section 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Default
value
2) Press [OK] key.
A BW 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
The set value in step 1) is saved. REVERSE 1 Destination
BW reverse copy Enable values Item
Default A
value B COLOR 2-color/Single color copy mode Enable/ Refer
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 MODE Disable setting Destination
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance values Item
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue) B
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/ C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 (YES)
Stop when the maintenance FUNCTION The number of paper exit is
life is over (Print Stop) limited.
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1 1 Finisher special paper
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end The number of paper exit is not
1: STOP) (Print Continue) limited.
1 Continue/Stop setting of print D COLOR 0 All colors and monochrome Refer
when the fusing web is end MODE counters are displayed. Destination
(Print Stop) (PRINTER) 1 All are displayed except for the values Item
3-color print counter. D
2 Monochrome and full color print
counters are displayed.
26-41 E FEED 0 Paper feed tray color display ON 0
Purpose Setting TRAY during paper feed
COLOR 1 Paper feed tray color display
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
OFF during paper feed
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
F BANNER 0 Long size print disable 0
in the center binding mode. SIZE 1 Long size print enable
Section PRINT
Operation/Procedure G MACHINE 1 The machine adjustment button 1(YES)
ADJ is displayed.
0 The machine adjustment button
is not displayed.
0 AMS Disable
H STATUS 0 Disable status display light 0 (NO)
1 AMS Enable
LIGHT setting.
2) Press [OK] key. SETTING 1 Enable status display light
setting.
I GBC 0 Switching the setting of AB type / 0 (INCH)
<Default value of each destination> PUNCH 1 inch type of GBC punch unit 1 (AB)
SET Refer
U.S.A 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable) Destination
CANADA 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable) values Item
INCH 0 (Disable) AB 0 (Disable) H
JAPAN 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
TAIWAN 0 (Disable) KOREA 0 (Disable) J BOOKLET 0 Disable the setting of BOOKLET 0 (NO)
EUROPE 1 (Enable) BRAZIL 0 (Disable) MODE MAKER indication.
SETTING 1 Enable the setting of BOOKLET
MAKER indication.
Default 26-52
value
K POWER 0 Display setting of auto power Refer Purpose Setting
SHUT-OFF 1 shut off Destination Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
SET values Item (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
J or not.
L USB 0 USB device settings 0 (NO)
DEVICE 1
Section
M NEAR LINE 0 Disable the setting of near line. 0 (NO) Operation/Procedure
SETTING 1 Enable the setting of near line. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
*Item F. Maximum width specification is 305mm but can be set up 0 Count up
to 330mm. 1 No count up
*1: Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
2) Press [OK] key.
Destination Item A Item B Item D Item H Item J The set value in step 1) is saved.
U.S.A 1 (Enable) 0 2 0 (INCH) 1 (Display)
CANADA 1 (Enable) 0 2 0 (INCH) 1 (Display) Destination Default
INCH 1 (Enable) 0 2 0 (INCH) 1 (Display) U.S.A 0 (Counted)
JAPAN 1 (Enable) 7 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) CANADA 0 (Counted)
TAIWAN 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) INCH 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 0 (Hide) JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
U.K. 0 (Disable) 0 2 1 (AB) 0 (Hide) TAIWAN 0 (Counted)
AUS. 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) EUROPE 0 (Counted)
AB 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) U.K. 0 (Counted)
CHINA 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) AUS. 1 (Not counted)
KOREA 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) AB 0 (Counted)
BRAZIL 1 (Enable) 0 2 1 (AB) 1 (Display) CHINA 0 (Counted)
KOREA 1 (Not counted)
*2: Item B: COLOR MODE set value BRAZIL 0 (Counted)
(OFF: Displayed/ON: Not displayed)
Mode 2-Color/Single
Set value
Single 2-color Counter
0 OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF ON OFF
2 ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF
4 OFF OFF ON
5 OFF ON ON
6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON
*3: C: FINISHER FANCTION

The limited is full when loading more than 100 sheets including
OHP paper / postcard / envelope / tab paper / label paper.
(*It will become full if 100 sheets are stacked even if even 1 piece of
OHP paper / postcard / envelope / tab paper / label paper)
26-61
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold of coverage coun-
ter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Used to set the threshold of coverage counter
Change the display with scroll key on the touch panel.
Items Display Data Contents Display range Default Value

A BW LEVEL1 The threshold of BK coverage count1(0.1% unit) 1 to 998 10
B BW LEVEL2 The threshold of BK coverage count2(0.1% unit) 2 to 999 150
C Color LEVEL1 The threshold of CL coverage count1(0.1% unit) 1 to 998 10
D Color LEVEL2 The threshold of CL coverage count2(0.1% unit) 2 to 999 150
E Coverage CMY The calculation standard of the threshold CMY
0 to 1 0 (CMY)
Items CMYK CMYK

Purpose Setting range value
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. PREPARATION preparation
Section (0:YES 1:NO) message is
displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1 The toner
Use the touch key to set. preparation
message is not
100 sheets staple finisher/100 displayed.
sheets staple saddle finisher B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner 0-9 4
Item Content
Setting Setting Default TONER preparation at
value range value LEVEL remaining toner
LIMIT Number of sheets of ON ON or ON level of 5%
COPIES stapling: Limited OFF 10% 1 Toner
Number of sets of OFF preparation at
stapling: Not Limited remaining toner
level of 10%
15% 2 Toner
preparation at
26-66 remaining toner
level of 15%
Purpose Setting
20% 3 Toner
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password for the simula- preparation at
tion. remaining toner
Section level of 20%
25% 4 Toner
Operation/Procedure preparation at
1) The current password for the simulation is displayed. remaining toner
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. level of 25%
30% 5 Toner
3) Press [SET] key.
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 30%
26-69 35% 6 Toner
preparation at
Purpose Setting
remaining toner
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for level of 35%
toner near end. 40% 7 Toner
preparation at
Section
remaining toner
Operation/Procedure level of 40%
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 45% 8 Toner
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. preparation at
remaining toner
3) Press [OK] key. level of 45%
The set value in step 2 is saved. 50% 9 Toner
preparation at
remaining toner
level of 50%
C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near 0-1 0
END(0:YES 1:NO) end message is
displayed.
1 The toner near
end message is
not displayed.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting
range value Item/Display Content Default value
range
D TONER END 1 Operation 1 1-3 2
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
2 Operation 2 SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
3 Operation 3 (M) (shade delete amount:
E TONER END 1 Remaining 1-3 1 quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
JUDGMENT toner counter B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
(accumulated SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
rotation time of (S) delete quantity) amount:
the toner adjustment 0.1mm/step)
hopper)
2 Toner end
judgment by
ATC (Exhaust 26-74
use in the
intermediate Purpose Setting
hopper) Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
3 Toner end
judgment by
Section
bottle end Operation/Procedure
(Introduction 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
process, etc.)
2) Press [OK] key.
F TONER E-MAIL 0 E-mail alert 0-1 0
ALERT Toner Low
Setting Default
status send Item/Display Content
range value
timing near near
toner end A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
(0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
1 E-mail alert
Toner Low 1 OSA trial mode is
status send canceled.
timing near
toner end
G TONER MIB UNIT 0 Receive the 0-2 0
remaining toner 26-78
level MIB in 1% Purpose Setting
increment.
1 Receive the
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
remaining toner operation panel.
level MIB in 5% Section
increment.
Operation/Procedure
2 Receive the
remaining toner 1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
level MIB in The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
25% increment. In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
H MIB TONER LOW 0 At TONER 0-1 0 to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
INDICATION LOW, the
remaining 2) Press [SET] key.
amount value is
acquired from
the remaining
26-79
toner amount
MIB. Purpose Setting
1 At TONER Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
LOW, LOW (-3) of user data delete result.
is acquired from
the toner Section
remaining Operation/Procedure
amount MIB.
The value for the display operation specification after comple-
tion of user data delete is set.
26-73 2) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Setting
Default
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide Item/Display Content Setting range
value
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan- A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
tity) adjustment pop-up display ON
Section User data delete result NO 0
pop-up display OFF
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
26-85
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the function of the simulation
27-2
mode.
Purpose Setting
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
Operation/Procedure
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. ber. (FSS function)
2) Press [OK] key.
Section
Default Operation/Procedure
value 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
A DISP SET Password input display for YES 1 0 [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
transferring between each
simulation ON
Password input display for NO 0 3) Press [SET] key.
transferring between each The set value in step 2) is saved.
simulation OFF
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
• If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time when
the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(C) NEAR_END timing setting (C) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(M) NEAR_END timing setting (M) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 3
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END timing setting (Y) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
M TONER ORDER TIMING Toner order timing Toner order alert send at the fixed 0-1 0 1
CONTROL control toner remaining quantity
Toner under alert send when 1
presuming the toner consumption
27-5 27-6
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
tion allows the host computer to check the (FSS function)
machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
Setting Default
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW". Item/Display Content
range value
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key A (0:YES 1:NO) 0 Manual service call 0-1 0
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. Enable
2) Press [SET] key. 1 Manual service call
Disable
2) Press [OK] key.

27-7 27-10
Purpose Setting Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
(FSS function) information. (FSS function)
Section Section
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [OK] key. The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Target history Serial communication retry history
Setting Default High density process control error history
range value Halftone process control error history
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO) Automatic registration adjustment error history
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1 History of high density error between papers
B ALERT Alert call enable 0 0 (YES) History of half-tone error between papers
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1 History of automatic registration adjustment error
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX) Scanner gain adjustment retry history
(0: FAX Not used. 1 DSPF gain adjustment retry history
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2 Paper transport time between sensors
2: HTTP) CIS retry history
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert

Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Service call When pressing Service call. 27-11
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is Purpose Others
reached.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
a new product)
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
Alert resend
Section
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
27-9
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Purpose Setting
Display item
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
Occurrence date Retry Content
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading Item name
(Display) number
gain adjustment retry number.
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
(FSS function)
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry
Section FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history
Operation/Procedure FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. LCC1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
LCC2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
3) Press [OK] key.
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
The set value in step 2) is saved. SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
ADJ1 adjustment retry
Setting Default SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
range value ADJ2
A FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%) SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
transport time between ADJ3
sensors (SPF)
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
B GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11 ADJ4
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES)
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
RETRY
ADJ5
C JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 20 10
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
judgment threshold value (TIMES)
ADJ1 adjustment retry
(Alert judgment threshold
DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history display
value for continuous JAM's)
ADJ2
(Setting of the number of
JAM's continuously made DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
at which it is judged as an ADJ3
alert.) DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 0 - 99 30 ADJ4
PERIOD period setting (DAYS) DSPF GAIN 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
ADJ5
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.
27-12
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
tion)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
tration adjustment error history is displayed.
Display item Content Occurrence date (Display) Error code (digits)

HV_ERR1 High density error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
H_TONE ERR1 Halftone error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_HV_ERR1 History of high density error between papers 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_HT_ERR1 History of half-tone error between papers1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_HT_ERR2 History of half-tone error between papers 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
P_AUTO REG ADJ1 History of automatic registration adjustment error 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 Max. 4 digits
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
Code between Reference

Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
Code between Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
Main FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
DSPF FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
27-14 27-16
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.
test mode. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
Setting Default
A CONNECTION 1 The FSS connection test 0-1 0 Item/Display Content
range value
TEST MODE mode is enable. (OFF)
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance Alert send 0 0
(1: ON 0: OFF) 0 The FSS connection test
ALERT alert send Enable
mode is disable. (*1)
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
*1: The FSS connection test mode can be changed only from Disable to
Disable
Enable, and cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
2) Press [OK] key. ORDER ALERT alert send Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Disable
C TONER CTRG Toner Alert send 0 0
ALERT cartridge Enable
27-15 (0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1
alert send Disable
Purpose Operation test/check Enable setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status. D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
Section (0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable
send Enable Alert send 1
Operation/Procedure setting Disable
The FSS operating status is displayed. E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
ALERT send Enable Enable
Default (0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1
value Disable
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0 F PAPER ORDER Paper order Alert send 0 0
FSS connection operated ALERT alert send Enable
status. 1 Operated (0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Disable
27-17 TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection
Purpose Setting DSW_R Right door open/close detection
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert. DSW_RL Right lower door open/close detection
Section DSW_FU Front door upper open/close detection SW
DSW_FL Front door lower open/close detection SW
Operation/Procedure
DSW_CS Transport cover open/close detection
1) Select an item to be set. DHPD_K Drum phase detection K
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. DHPD_C Drum phase detection C
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification DHPD_M Drum phase detection M
is set. DHPD_Y Drum phase detection Y
3) Press [SET] key. WTFD Waste toner full detection
WTBSET Waste toner box installation detection
Item/ Setting Default CCHP_K MC cleaner HP-K
Content NOTE
Display range value CCHP_C MC cleaner HP-C
PAPER Setting of paper kind for 0-2 0 0: Standard CCHP_M MC cleaner HP-M
TYPE paper order alert paper and CCHP_Y MC cleaner HP-Y
SET recycled paper CCMD_K MC cleaner shift detection K
1: Standard CCMD_C MC cleaner shift detection C
paper only CCMD_M MC cleaner shift detection M
2: Recycled CCMD_Y MC cleaner shift detection Y
paper only
LPPD LCC paper entry detection
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
T2PPD1 Tandem tray 2 transport detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 paper entry detection 1
sheets] (A3)
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 paper entry detection 2
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box HLPCD Fusing pressure release detection
sheets] (A4) WEB_END1 Web end detection 1
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of WEB_END2 Web end detection 2
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box PTCHP PTC initial detection
sheets] (B4) PTCMD PTC cleaner shift detection
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of PRTPD Right paper exit paper empty detection
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box FPFD Fusing upper paper entry detection
sheets] (B5) 1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation CL detection
A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert 1TUD_K Primary transfer belt separation K detection
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
sheets)
A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert 30-2
FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time Purpose Operation test/check
sheets) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert sors and the detectors in the paper feed
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the section and the control circuits.
sheets) Section
B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert Operation/Procedure
FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
sheets)
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
TNDSET Tandem tray close detection
30 T1SPD
T1LUD
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 1 upper limit detection
T1PED Tray 1 paper empty detection
30-1 T2SPD Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Purpose Operation test/check T2LUD Tray 2 upper limit detection
T2PED Tray 2 paper empty detection
C3PFD Tray 3 transport detection
sors and the detectors in other than the
C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detection
paper feed section and the control circuits.
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detection
Section C3SPD Tray 3 paper remaining quantity detection
Operation/Procedure C3SS1 Tray 3 paper size detection 1
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- C3SS2 Tray 3 paper size detection 2
played. C3SS3 Tray 3 paper size detection 3
C3SS4 Tray 3 paper size detection 4
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
C4PFD Tray 4 transport detection
lighted.
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detection
PPD1 Resist pre-detection C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detection
PPD2 Resist detection C4SPD Tray 4 paper remaining quantity detection
POD1 Fusing rear detection C4SS1 Tray 4 paper size detection 1
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection C4SS2 Tray 4 paper size detection 2
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection C4SS3 Tray 4 paper size detection 3
C4SS4 Tray 4 paper size detection 4 40-7
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection (Detection at "1")
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section Paper feed
Purpose Must not be used unless a special change
is required. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the Main 3) Press [OK] key.
unit double feed sensor. The set value in step 2) is saved.
Section
Default
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Content
value
<check the operations> A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
Press [DPA EXE] key. B P1 POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
C P2 POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) 140
After completion of the detection operation, the sensor status is dis-
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
played.
<Item, setting range, and default values>
Default 40-12
Display Content Range
value
GAIN Gain adjustment value 1 - 100 50 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the tray 4 width detection
<On sensor names> level.
Sensor name Default Section Paper feed
Content Range
(Display) value Operation/Procedure
DPAOUT Paper thickness 0 - 1023 800
1) Set the tray 4 paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
analog value
STATUS Paper detection NO PAPER ONE PAPER
state ONE PAPER The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
DOUBLE PAPER 3) Set to the tray 4 paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
<Gain reset> 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Gain initial value: 50 The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
* Do not use this setting unless specially required. When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MAX POSITION Tray 4 max. width

MIN POSITION Tray 4 min. width
40
40-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 41
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment.
41-1
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
Operation/Procedure
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. played.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). lighted.
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
Close: Highlighted
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. sensor status Document present: Highlighted
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width

P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
41-2 Setting
Display Content Default
range
Purpose Adjustment
PLAIN Used to change the fusing -20 0
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor PAP&WUP&RDY GR temperature setting of -15
detection level. plain paper, WUP, and -10
Section Ready series -5
Operation/Procedure 0
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without +5
place a document on the document table. +10
+15
The sensor level without document is recognized.
+20
2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press PLAIN PAPER 2 Used to change the fusing -20 0
[EXECUTE] key. temperature setting of -15
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. plain paper 2. -10
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. -5
0
Sensor +5
Content Setting range Default value
name +10
PD1 Document sensor 1 0 - 255 128 +15
PD2 Document sensor 2 +20
PD3 Document sensor 3 HEAVY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
PD4 Document sensor 4 temperature setting of -15
PD5 Document sensor 5 heavy paper series -10
PD6 Document sensor 6 -5
PD7 Document sensor 7 0
+5
+10
+15
41-3 +20
Purpose Operation test/check THIN PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of thin -15
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
paper series -10
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
-5
Section 0
Operation/Procedure +5
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document +10
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time. +15
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128) +20
RECYCLED PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0
Item/Display Content Detection level range GR temperature setting of -15
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close) recycled paper series -10
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255 -5
PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255 0
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255 +5
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255 GLOSSY PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
temperature setting of -15
gloss paper series -10
-5
0
43 +5
+10
+15
43-1
+20
Purpose Setting ENV PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each temperature setting of -15
mode. envelope series -10
-5
Section
0
Operation/Procedure +5
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B. +10
2) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. +15
3) Select an item to be set with displayed value. +20
Setting Setting
Display Content Default Display Content Default
range range
EMBOSS PAPER GR Used to change the fusing -20 0 WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 HH environment fine -7
embossed paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
OHP PAPER Used to change the fusing -20 0 PLAIN PAP ADJ HH Normal paper HH -10 0
temperature setting of -15 environment fine -7
OHP paper -10 adjustment -5
-5 -3
0 0
+5 +3
+10 +5
+15 +7
+20 +10
FUSING CONDITION Fusing condition 0 0 HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper HH -10 0
ADJ adjustment setting 1 ADJ HH environment fine -7
2 adjustment -5
3 -3
4 0
5 +3
ENV PAPER PRESS Envelop paper pressure 0 0 +5
PATTERN adjustment 1 +7
2 +10
WUP&RDY GR ADJ WUP/Ready LL -10 0 SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper HH -10 0
LL environment fine -7 HH environment fine -7
adjustment -5 adjustment -5
-3 -3
0 0
+3 +3
+5 +5
+7 +7
+10 +10
PLAIN PAP ADJ LL Normal paper LL -10 0
environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
HEAVY PAPER GR Heavy paper LL -10 0
ADJ LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
SPECIAL PAPER ADJ Special paper LL -10 0
LL environment fine -7
adjustment -5
-3
0
+3
+5
+7
+10
2 : ‘19/March.
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing operation and pre-
heating.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
70 CPM machine
Default value (SW A) Default value (SW B)

Setting
Item/Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C A B C
A WARMUP FUMON TH_UM Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
T
B WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 20 20 20 20 20 20
C WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 84 84 84 84 84 84
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
at alpha degrees C or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 0 - 255 72 72 72 72 72 72
degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
C or below (Timer from Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME Setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
C or above (Timer from Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60
warm-up of alpha degrees C or above
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After-rotation time after completion of a job 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
J TH_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
K TH_LM E-STAR TH_LM set value when preheating 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
L TH_US E-STAR TH_US set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
M TH_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 160 160 160 180 180 190
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper (60-89g/m2) is selected in the System. setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
2
SW-B Setting value when plain paper (90-105g/m2) is selected in the System. setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - -
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH - - -
Group C AB_B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A CHINA
80 CPM machine

Setting
range
A B C A B C
A WARMUP FUMON TH_UM Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
T
B WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 20 20 20 20 20 20
C WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 84 84 84 84 84 84
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up 0 - 200 0 0 0 0 0 0
at alpha degrees C or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 0 - 255 72 72 72 72 72 72
degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME AF - AH applying time (Timer from completion of 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
Ready)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME AJ - AL applying time (Timer from completion of 0 - 255 255 255 255 255 255 255
Ready)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which AN - AP is applied 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME After-rotation time after completion of a job 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
J TH_UM E-STAR TH_UM set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
2 : ‘19/March.
Setting
range
A B C A B C
K TH_LM E-STAR TH_LM set value when preheating 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
L TH_US E-STAR TH_US set value when preheating 30 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150
M TH_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 160 160 160 180 180 195
Code descriptions
SW-A Setting value when plain paper (60-89g/m2) is selected in the System. setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
2
SW-B Setting value when plain paper (90-105g/m2) is selected in the System. setting/Common Setting/Device setting/Paper Weight setting.
Group Destination
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH - - -
43-20
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
The set value in step 2) is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content 70 CPM 80 CPM
range
machine machine
A WARMUP FUMON TH_UM T Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 50 50
LL environment
B WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50 50
C WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 85 85
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
above under LL environment
E HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
above under LL environment
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
below under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value of the setting value applying time in warm-up of 120 degrees C or 1 - 99 50 50
above under LL environment (Timer from Ready completion)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value of the threshold value alpha to apply the setting value in warm-up of 1 - 99 50 50
alpha degrees C or above under LL environment
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50 50
J TH_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
K TH_LM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
L TH_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
M TH_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
Code descriptions
43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
70 CPM machine 80 CPM machine
A WARMUP FUMON HL_US T HH Fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50
B WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 1 - 99 50 50
C WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time 1 - 99 50 50
D HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH FM preliminary rotation start TH_UM when warming up at 1 - 99 50 50
alpha degrees C or above
E HI_WU_END_TIME HH Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 1 - 99 50 50
degrees C or above
F LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF - AH application time (timer from 1 - 99 50 50
Ready complete)
G HI_WARMUP_TIME HH Correction value for AJ - AL application time (timer from 1 - 99 50 50
Ready complete)
H HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Threshold value alpha to which AN - AP is applied 1 - 99 50 50
I JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH After-rotation time after completion of a job 1 - 99 50 50
J TH_UM E-STAR HH TH_UM set value when preheating 1 - 99 50 50
K TH_LM E-STAR HH TH_LM set value when preheating 1 - 99 50 50
L TH_US E-STAR HH TH_US set value when preheating 1 - 99 50 50
M TH_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50 50
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper)
43-24
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 99)
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2 is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Default value
Default value Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content (70 CPM machine) (80 CPM machine)
range
Group Group Group Group Group Group
A B C A B C
A COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (Heavy paper) 1 - 60 5 5 5 5 5 5
B COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP) 1 - 60 10 10 10 10 10 10
C COOL_DOWN_ENVELOPE Cool down time (Envelope) 1 - 60 15 15 15 15 15 15
D FUS_MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval (*1) 1 - 26 20 20 20 20 20 20
E POWER_SET Power voltage setting 1-3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1: 100V, 2: 110 - 120V, 3: 220V - 240V
*1: When the web feed amount is changed (increased), the web life will be shortened to cause the machine to stop by detecting "End" before
display of "Near End." In addition, the life meter of the fusing web unit in SIM22-13 will not be displayed normally.
Code descriptions
Group Destination
Group B U.S.A CANADA INCH - - -
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (The cassette is specified.)

43-31
4) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and printing is started.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
When printing is executed, a jam is always generated. (As
web cleaning motor and the control circuit.
shown in the figure below.)
Section 5) Leave the jam paper for about 30sec, then remove the jam
Operation/Procedure paper.
Press [EXECUTE] key. 6) Measure the width of the gloss change section (nip) of the jam
The fusing web cleaning motor is operated. paper, and check to confirm that it is in the range of about
10.5mm - 12mm.
Fusing web unit installation * If the difference between F and R is considerably great, the
Operation Remark
detection state
fusing pressure may be insufficient.
Fusing web unit not installed No operation * During the operation,
Fusing web unit installed Operates the fusing web Setting Default
predefined cleaning feed counter Item/Display item Content
range value
pulse times is counted up.
A PAPER MFT Cassette selection 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 2
CS2 3
CS3 4
43-32
CS4 5
Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the
Paper feed direction Black
forcible operation of web cleaning when job background
end.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure Gloss change
section
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Nip width
3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Setting Default
Item/Display Item
range value
A JOB END Fusing web motor Enable 0-1 0 1
COMP ACT forcible operation Disable 1
CHECK condition when job end
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity of 1 - 255 110
COMP ACT compulsory action of the fusing
INTERVAL web motor at job end
C JOB END Number of forcible operations of 1 - 10 5
COMP ACT the fusing web motor when job
CNT end
43-35
Purpose Adjustment and setting
Function (Purpose) Fusing nip operation check
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
1) Prepare a black-background image, and put it on the cassette
with the black background facing upward.
Operation/Procedure
44 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
44-1 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Setting NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Setting Default
Display Content Remarks
range value
HV Enable/Disable setting of the high density process control Black text Allow
in normal operation on white
HT Enable/Disable setting of the medium density process background Allow
control in normal operation (Inhibit:
TN_PIX_SUP Enable/Disable setting of toner supply control by the yield 0=NO) Allow When set to Disable, the all-color FB ratio is fixed to
count White text 100%.
TN_FB Enable/Disable setting of FEEDBACK toner supply control on black Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by
background the process control feedback.
(Allow:
TN_INT Enable/Disable setting of the interval toner supply control Allow When set to Disable, toner supply is not made by
1=YES)
the developer traveling distance.
TN_RECV Enable/Disable setting of developer recovery Allow When set to Disable, the developer recovery mode
is not available in HV process control.
TN_ADJ Enable/Disable setting of the sensor output adjustment Allow When set to Disable, the control voltage adjustment
is not made in process control.
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Allow When set to Disable, the fall amount is not detected.
detection control (ENP_INT and ENP_NEW are not available.)
TN_EMP_INT Setting of Enable/Disable of the toner falling distance Allow When set to Disable, near end when EMP is
detection control of job interruption detected in a job
TN_EMP_NEW Enable/Disable setting of fall amount detection control of a Allow
new cartridge
TN_PIX_TBL Enable/Disable setting of the yield count correction table Allow
calculation
FIERY_HT Enable/Disable setting of Fiery printer correction feedback Allow Displayed only when option Fiery controller is
of half-tone process control connected.
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of printer correction feedback of Allow Not displayed when option Fiery controller is
half-tone process control installed
MD VG Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease grid Allow
voltage correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Allow
environment grid voltage correction
MD VG MC Enable/Disable setting of the grid correction by the MC Allow
total current correction
MD VG DV Enable/Disable setting of the grid correction by the Allow
developer bias absolute value
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease laser Allow
power voltage correction
MD LD EV Enable/Disable setting of environmental area and the Allow
membrane decrease count laser power voltage correction
MD LD HV Enable/Disable process control laser power voltage Allow
correction
MD DL Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Allow
discharge light quantity correction
MD DL2 Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by membrane decrease
MD DL EV Enable/Disable setting of the membrane decrease Inhibit
environment discharge quantity correction
MD DL2 EV Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by environmental change
MD DL2 TC Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by the transfer current
MD DL2 GB Enable/Disable setting of the discharge light quantity Allow
correction after transfer by grid voltage
MD MC Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction Allow
by an increase in the resistance
MD MC EV Enable/Disable setting of the MC total current correction Allow
by environmental change
AR_AUTO Auto registration adjustment Enable/Disable setting Allow
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable/Disable setting Allow
PAR AUTO Enable/Disable setting of registration adjustment between Allow
papers
SKEW_AUTO Enable/Disable setting of print skew auto adjustment Allow
DM_VCTL Enable/Disable setting of the drum motor modulation Allow
control
Setting Default
Display Content Remarks
range value
PTC_ENV PTC environment correction Enable/Disable setting Black text Allow Enable: Correction ON
1TC Primary transfer output correction Enable/Disable setting on white Allow
2TC Secondary transfer output correction Enable/Disable background Allow
setting (Inhibit:
0=NO)
White text
on black
background
(Allow:
1=YES)
Class
ificati Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Item/Display range value
on
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image PROC M PCS_F Linearity correction
0 - 255 20
density sensor (registration sensor). ON _V1 coefficients (F side)
N PCS_F
Section Process _V2
0 - 255 41
Operation/Procedure O PCS_F
0 - 255 82
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- _V3
matically. P PCS_F
0 - 255 122
_V4
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
Q PCS_F
played. 0 - 255 163
_V5
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. R PCS_C Linearity correction
0 - 255 20
_V1 coefficients
Class S PCS_C
Setting Default 0 - 255 41
ificati Content _V2
Item/Display range value
on
T PCS_C
PROC A REGS_ Light emitting quantity 0 - 255 82
1 - 255 21 _V3
ON/ F LED adjustment value
U PCS_C
EGIS B REGS_ 0 - 255 122
1-255 21 _V4
T C LED
V PCS_C
C REGS_ 0 - 255 163
1 - 255 21 _V5
R LED
W PCS_R Linearity correction
D REGS_ Transfer belt substrate 0 - 255 20
_V1 coefficients (R side)
F detection level value (F
X PCS_R
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 0 - 255 41
_V2
emitting quantity
Y PCS_R
adjustment is completed. 0 - 255 82
_V3
E REGS_ Transfer belt substrate
Z PCS_R
C detection level value (C 0 - 255 122
_V4
side) when the light 0 - 255 0
emitting quantity AA PCS_R
0 - 255 163
adjustment is completed. _V5
F REGS_ Transfer belt substrate AB PCS_F Diffuse reflection 100 -
500
R detection level value (R _CL_ka normalization coefficients 2000
side) when the light 0 - 255 0 AC PCS_C 100 -
500
emitting quantity _CL_ka 2000
adjustment is completed. AD PCS_R 100 -
500
G REGS_ Specular reflection dark _CL_ka 2000
F voltage (F side) 0 - 255 0 AE BELT_ Belt substrate F side
DARK PCS_F monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
H REGS_ Specular reflection dark MAX (Process control)
C voltage (C side) 0 - 255 0 AF BELT_ Belt substrate F side
DARK PCS_F monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
I REGS_ Specular reflection dark MIN (Process control)
R voltage (R side) 0 - 255 0 AG BELT_ Belt substrate F side
DARK PCS_F monitor difference
0 - 255 0
PROC J PCS_F Diffuse reflection dark DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
0 - 255 0 MIN)
ON _DARK voltage (F side)
K PCS_C Diffuse reflection dark AH BELT_ Belt substrate C side
0 - 255 0 PCS_C monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
_DARK voltage (C side)
L PCS_R Diffuse reflection dark MAX (Process control)
0 - 255 0 AI BELT_ Belt substrate C side
_DARK voltage (R side)
PCS_C monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
MIN (Process control)
AJ BELT_ Belt substrate C side
PCS_C monitor difference
0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_C_MAX-
MIN)
Class Class
Setting Default Setting Default
ificati Content ificati Content
Item/Display range value Item/Display range value
on on
PROC AK BELT_ Belt substrate R side REGI BG PATCH Toner patch detection
ON PCS_R monitor max. value 0 - 255 0 ST _REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0
MAX (Process control) _R_M
AL BELT_ Belt substrate R side BH PATCH Toner patch detection
PCS_R monitor min. value 0 - 255 0 _REGS level R (M) 0 - 255 0
MIN (Process control) _R_Y
AM BELT_ Belt substrate R side
PCS_R monitor difference Error name Error content
0 - 255 0
DIF (BELT_PCS_F MAX-
F sensor adjustment REGS_F LED error
MIN)
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
REGI AN BELT_ Belt substrate F side adjustments.
ST REGS_ monitor max. value
0 - 255 0 C sensor adjustment REGS_C LED error
F_ (Registration)
MAX
adjustments.
AO BELT_ Belt substrate F side
R sensor adjustment REGS_R LED error
REGS_ monitor min. value 0 - 255 0
F_ MIN (Registration)
adjustments.
AP BELT_ Belt substrate F side
F Color sensor PCS_F_CL_ka calculation error
REGS_ monitor difference
0 - 255 0 adjustment The target is not reached
F_ DIF (BELT_REGS_F MAX-
abnormality
MIN)
Process control F BELT_PCS_F DIF error
AQ BELT_ Belt substrate C side
sensor adjustment The difference between the max. value and the
REGS_ monitor max. value 0 - 255 0
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
C_MAX (Registration)
greater than the specified value when the transfer
AR BELT_ Belt substrate C side belt rotates 1 turn
C Color sensor PCS_C_CL_ka calculation error
C_MIN (Registration)
adjustment The target is not reached
AS BELT_ Belt substrate C side abnormality
REGS_ monitor difference
0 - 255 0 Process control C BELT_PCS_C DIF error
C_DIF (BELT_REGS_C MAX-
MIN)
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
AT BELT_ Belt substrate R side greater than the specified value when the transfer
REGS_ monitor max. value belt rotates 1 turn
0 - 255 0
R_ (Registration)
R Color sensor PCS_R_CL_ka calculation error
MAX
adjustment The target is not reached
AU BELT_ Belt substrate R side abnormality
Process control R BELT_PCS_R DIF error
R_ MIN (Registration)
AV BELT_ Belt substrate R side abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
REGS_ monitor difference greater than the specified value when the transfer
0 - 255 0
R_ DIF (BELT_REGS_R MAX- belt rotates 1 turn
MIN)
Registration BELT_REGS_F_ DIF error
AW PATCH Toner patch detection substrate F scan The difference between the max. value and the
_REGS level F (K) 0 - 255 0 abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
_F_K greater than the specified value when the transfer
AX PATCH Toner patch detection belt rotates 1 turn
_REGS level F (C) 0 - 255 0 Registration BELT_REGS_C_ DIF error
_F_C substrate C scan The difference between the max. value and the
AY PATCH Toner patch detection abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
_REGS level F (M) 0 - 255 0 greater than the specified value when the transfer
_F_M belt rotates 1 turn
AZ PATCH Toner patch detection Registration BELT_REGS_R_ DIF error
_REGS level F (Y) 0 - 255 0 substrate R scan The difference between the max. value and the
_F_Y abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
BA PATCH Toner patch detection greater than the specified value when the transfer
_REGS level C (K) 0 - 255 0 belt rotates 1 turn
_C_K
BB PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level C (C) 0 - 255 0
_C_C
BC PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level C (M) 0 - 255 0
_C_M
BD PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level C (Y) 0 - 255 0
_C_Y
BE PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level R (K) 0 - 255 0
_R_K
BF PATCH Toner patch detection
_REGS level R (C) 0 - 255 0
_R_C
44-4 44-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sity process control operation. control forcibly.
Section Process Section Process
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 1) Select a target adjustment speed with [MDDLE] [LOW1]
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. [LOW2] key.
3) Press [OK] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- The high density process control is performed by the selected pro-
cess speed.
cially required.
Setting Default NOTE: In normal confirmation, MIDDLE is selected and executed.

range value
If you need to focus on paper type, select the corresponding mode
A PCS TARGET Sensor target value set 1 - 255 204
and execute.
value
B LED_F_OUTPUT F sensor light emitting 1 - 255 21 Modes that have not been selected are also corrected in conjunc-
quantity set value tion.
C LED_C_OUTPUT C sensor light emitting 1 - 255 21
quantity set value MIDDLE Plain paper
D LED_R_OUTPUT R sensor light emitting 1 - 255 21 LOW1 Heavy paper1 / Heavy paper2
quantity set value LOW2 Heavy paper3 / Heavy paper4
E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment target 1 - 255 8
LIMIT limit value In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
F BELT GROUND Effective difference 1 - 255 1 In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
DIF between upper/loser (Refer to the table below.)
values of belt one-round In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
surface
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) reference 0 - 255 60 Result display Content description
STANDARD DIF calculation difference COMPLETE Normal complete
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) reference 0 - 255 0 ERROR Abnormal end
STANDARD DIF calculation difference
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output interval 1 - 255 60
INTERVAL
J Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 50 Details of error display Content description
value (yellow) CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
K M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 50 BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
value (magenta) K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
L C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 50 C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
value (cyan) M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
M K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 45 Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
value (black) TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
N Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (yellow)
O M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (magenta)
P C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (cyan)
Q K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW1 value LOW1 (black)
R Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (yellow)
S M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (magenta)
T C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (cyan)
U K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 100
LOW2 value LOW2 (black)
V HV BK_GROUND Surface light reception 1 - 255 60
LIMIT effective area value at the
patch position
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Display
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
range
CPY/PRN P BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB: 0-850
(*1) (PROCON) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0-600
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB: 0-800
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** DV: 0-600
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB: 0-850
(NORMAL (MIDDLE)) (display for middle speed) DV: 0-600
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) GB: 0-800
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** DV: 0-600
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L1) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB: 0-850
(NORMAL (LOW1)) (display for low speed) DV: 0-600
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** DV: 0-600
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L2) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal GB: 0-850
(NORMAL (LOW2)) (display for low speed 2) DV: 0-600
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** DV: 0-600
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER 1/6 TN/TC LEFT TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1-8
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1 - 15
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023
RIGHT TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1 - 11
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity area 1-8
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity AD value 0 - 1023
DRUM LEFT MD K DRUM COUNT Membrane decrease drum traveling distance 0 - 20
MD C DRUM COUNT area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNT
MD Y DRUM COUNT
LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** LIFE grid voltage correction display (KCMY) 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LIFE) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
EV MD K REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Environment grid voltage correction display 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
2/6 VG_DV MD K REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Grid voltage skew correction display (CMYK) 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG_DV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
VG_MC MD K REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Current grid voltage correction display (KCMY) 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG_MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
ALL MD K REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Grid voltage correction ALL display (KCMY) 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD M REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(ALL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser power voltage 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
Display
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
range
OTHER 3/6 LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Environment laser power correction (KCMY) 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
LD DVB MD K REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Laser power correction (KCMY) for DV vias 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD DVB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
LD EHT MD K REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Laser power correction (KCMY) for Halftone 0 - 255
MD C REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** process control
MD M REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD EHT) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge light 0 - 100
MD C REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
4/6 DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment -100 - 100
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** discharge light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL2 MD K REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease after-transfer 0 - 100
MD C REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** discharge light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL2 EV MD K REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Drum membrane decrease after-transfer -100 - 100
MD C REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** environmental discharge light quantity correction
MD M REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (%)
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2 EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
DL2 TC MD K REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** After-transfer discharge light quantity correction -100 - 100
MD C REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (%) by the transfer current
MD M REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2 TC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
5/6 DL2 GB MD K REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** After-transfer discharge light quantity correction 0 - 100
MD C REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** (%) by the grid bias
MD M REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL2 GB) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MC MD K REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Current correction (KCMY) by the MC discharge 0 - 90
MD C REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** time
MD M REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(MC) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MC EV MD K REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M *** Environment MC current correction (KCMY) -90 - 90
MD C REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD M REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(MC EV) : L1 *** L2 *** M ***
6/6 CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control execution number 0 - 99999999
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control execution umber 0 - 99999999
*1: The left of the correction value is the result of execution. The right is the reference value.
44-12 Display item Description Display range
HUD_M External air humidity sensor Humidity:
Purpose Operation data display humidity 0.0 - 100.0% (+/-0.1)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the External air sensor AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
high density process control and the image TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 Temperature:
density sensor (registration sensor). temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
LSU thermistor 1 A/D value -0.1 degrees C)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- AD value: 0 - 255
ing) TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 Temperature:
Operation/Procedure temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. LSU thermistor 2 A/D value -0.1 degrees C)
AD value: 0 - 255
Display Display Default TH_UM Fusing upper main Temperature:
Item Content thermistor temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
item range value
Fusing upper main degrees C)
TARGET HV TARGET Sensor target setting 0.00 - 0
thermistor (differential) AD AD value: 0 - 1023
M(K/C/M/Y) value (middle speed) 255.00
value
HV TARGET Sensor target setting 0.00 - 0
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main Temperature:
L1(K/C/M/Y) value (low speed 1) 255.00
thermistor (compensation) 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
HV TARGET Sensor target setting 0.00 - 0
temperature -0.1 degrees C)
L2(K/C/M/Y) value (low speed 2) 255.00
Fusing upper main AD value: 0 - 1023
PHT Halftone process control 0.00 - 0 thermistor (compensation)
TARGET target between paper 255.00 AD value
M(K/C/M/Y) (middle speed)
TH_UM_D Fusing upper main AD value: 0 - 1023
PHT Halftone process control 0.00 - 0 thermistor (detection) AD
TARGET target between paper 255.00 value
L1(K/C/M/Y) (low speed 1)
TH_US1 Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
PHT Halftone process control 0.00 - 0 temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
TARGET target between paper 255.00 Fusing upper sub thermistor degrees C)
L2(K/C/M/Y) (low speed 2) (differential) AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
ADK_SL(K/ Development –9.99 - 0 TH_US1_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
C/M/Y) characteristics gradient 9.99 (compensation) temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
coefficient (K/C/M/Y) Fusing upper sub thermistor -0.1 degrees C)
ADK_INT(K/ Developing –999.9 - 0 (compensation) AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
C/M/Y) characteristics intercept 999.9 TH_US1_D Fusing upper sub thermistor AD value: 0 - 1023
coefficient (K/C/M/Y) (detection) AD value
PCS_F_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0 TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor Temperature:
DARK potential (F side) 2 temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
PCS_C_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0 Fusing upper sub thermistor degrees C)
DARK potential (C side) 2 AD value
PCS_R_ Diffuse reflection dark 0 - 255 0 TH_LM1 Fusing lower main Temperature:
DARK potential (R side) thermistor temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
REGS_F_D Regular reflection dark 0 - 255 0 Fusing lower main degrees C)
ARK potential (F side) thermistor (differential) AD AD value: 0 - 1023
REGS_C_D Regular reflection dark 0 - 255 0 value
ARK potential (C side) TH_LM1_CS Fusing lower main Temperature:
REGS_R_D Regular reflection dark 0 - 255 0 thermistor (compensation) 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
ARK potential (R side) temperature -0.1 degrees C)
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 Fusing lower main AD value: 0 - 1023
patch 1 thermistor (compensation)
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 AD value
patch 2 TH_LM1_D Fusing lower main AD value: 0 - 1023
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 thermistor (detection) AD
patch 3 value
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 TH_LM2 Fusing lower main Temperature:
patch 4 thermistor 2 temperature 0 - 255 degrees C (+/-1
Fusing lower main degrees C)
thermistor 2 AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
TH_PS PS temperature sensor Temperature:
44-14 temperature 0.0 - 255.0 degrees C (+/
PS temperature sensor AD -0.1 degrees C)
Purpose Operation data display value AD value: 0 - 255
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
perature and humidity sensor.
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
LSU
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Display item Description Display range

TH_M External air temperature Temperature:
sensor temperature -40.0 - 150.0 degrees C
External air temperature (+/-0.1 degrees C)
sensor AD value AD value: 0 - 1023
44-15 44-21
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
Section Process get.
Operation/Procedure Section Process
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [OK] key. The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required. are displayed.
Display Content
Item/ Setting Default
Content COMPLETE Normal complete
Display range value
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0- 6 ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
between the previous OPC drum idle 255 ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
rotation and the next one) setting (h) ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
B AREA1 Environmental area difference judgment 0-5 2 ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
threshold value setting (difference [YMCK] Halftone process control error [YMCK]
between the previous OPC drum idle OTHER Other errors
rotation and the current one)
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions (AND 1 - 15 1
condition of the previous OPC drum idle
rotation and the current one) 44-22
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting (sec) in 0- 0 Purpose Operation data display
the process control when recovered 255
from power ON, preheating/sleep mode. Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
E FLAG Enable / disable setting of the disable 0 0 level in the halftone process control opera-
OPC drum idle rotation enable 1 tion.
Section Process
The execution YES/NO of the OPC drum idle rotation is determined
by the AND condition of TIME, AREA1, and AREA 2. Operation/Procedure
To execute the OPC drum idle rotation, set item B (AREA 1) to "0," 1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP], [2ND STEP] key.
and item C (AREA2) to "15." The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
However, idle rotation is performed in a certain interval while in shut control operation is displayed.
off. This must be fully explained to the user.
ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 16)
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
44-17 BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Process refresh execution
Section Process 44-24
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation data display
1) Select a refresh item with the touch panel key. Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. the correction level in the halftone process
3) The refresh operation is executed. control operation.
NOTE: Do not execute this simulation unless specially required. Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Display items and descriptions of contents
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
Display Content
2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
BLADE REFRESH Blade development refresh
DRUM REFRESH Drum refresh Category Display item Content
DEVE REFRESH Development refresh Coefficient [DITHER_RAW_VALUE] Printer halftone correction value
* DEVE REFLESH execution consume (before correction)
W-Letter A3 100% worth of toner.
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
value MID] reference value (for Mid)
Display of results and descriptions of items
[SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
Display Content LOW1] reference value (for Low1)
COMPLETE Normal completion [SENSOR_TARGET Halftone process control
ERROR Abnormal end LOW2] reference value (for Low2)
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control
value correction amount
[COPY_LOW1 Copier Low 1 conversion
COVERSION VALUE] amount
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
* correction amount
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control
DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT_ Printer automatic density
VALUE] adjustment correction amount
Category Display item Content 44-26
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process
correction control correction amount Purpose Adjustment/Setup
value [BEFORE Previous printer halftone Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
PRINTER_S_VALUE] process control correction trol compulsory.
amount
Section Process
* It is not displayed when the FIERY printer option is installed. Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment speed with [MIDDLE] [LOW1]
[LOW2] key.
44-25 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Setting The halftone process control is performed by the selected process
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the speed and the operation data are displayed.
correction value for the halftone process When the Result key is pressed, the adjustment result is displayed.
control.
Section Process NOTE: In normal confirmation, MIDDLE is selected and executed.
Operation/Procedure If you need to focus on paper type, select the corresponding mode
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key. and execute.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the Modes that have not been selected are also corrected in conjunc-
touch panel. tion.
MIDDLE Plain paper
4) Press [OK] key. LOW1 Heavy paper1 / Heavy paper2
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- LOW2 Heavy paper3 / Heavy paper4
cially required.
COMPLETE Normal complete
Default
Setting ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
Item/Display Content value
range ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
K CMY
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
A HIGHTLIGHT 0 - 128 Highlight correction 20 20 ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
VALUE LIMIT amount limit value
[YMCK] Halftone process control error [YMCK] error
B MAX VALUE 0 - 128 Maximum density value 20 20
OTHER Other errors
LIMIT correction limit value
44-27
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
tone process control.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Default
Item/Category Display Content Setting range
value
A Process INITIAL YES When warming up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
control NO OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
Enable/ counters
B Disable SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process 0-3 0 3
setting canceling power shut-off) control Enable
Process control 1
Disable
BK process 2
control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can control Enable
be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control 1
Disable
BK process 2
control Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
D Process HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Color process 0-2 0 0
control ON the power and after passing TIME. control Enable
Enable/ Process control 1
Disable Disable
setting BK process 2
control Enable
E HUM The temperature and humidity in the Color process 0-2 0 0
machine are monitored in every 2 hours control Enable
only during a job, and the change in the Process control 1
temperature/humidity is above the Disable
specified level compared with that in BK process 2
execution of the previous process control Enable
control.
F REV1 YES When a certain level of the accumulated Allow 0-1 0 0
NO traveling distance of BK or M position Inhibit 1
OPC drum unit is reached after the
power is supplied.
G REV2_BK YES When a certain level of the accumulated Allow 0-1 0 0
NO traveling distance of BK position OPC Inhibit 1
drum unit is reached after execution of
the previous density correction.
H REV2_CL YES When a certain level of the accumulated Allow 0-1 0 0
NO traveling distance of M position OPC Inhibit 1
drum unit is reached after execution of
the previous density correction.
I REFRESH MODE YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation 0-1 0 1
manual process control key by key display YES
NO operations Key operation 1
display NO
Default
value
J Process DAY After color job after passing a certain 0: Disable of the 0 - 999 0 1
control days from execution of the previous specified days
execution color process control. When next judgment
condition warming up if there is no color job. 1 - 999: 1 - 999 999
setting days passing
K HI-COV The average print ratio is monitored in a Process control 0-2 0 0
certain interval, and the high print interval setting
process control execution is judged. for every 10
pages
High print 1
judgment
disable
Judgment at the 2
30th paper
(continuous).
L LO-COV Low print document continuous printing Allow 0-1 0 0
process control execution judgment Inhibit 1
M TonerCA-END When the toner cartridge remaining Allow 0-1 0 1
quantity reached 25% or below, the Inhibit 1
process control interval is changed.
N JOB STOP Enable/Disable setting of execution Allow 0-1 0 1
[REV2_BK], [REV2_CL], [HI-COV], and Inhibit 1
[LO-COV] judgment during a job.
O AVERAGE-PAGE Average print ratio paper number 1: 10 pages - 1-5 1 3
setting 5: 50 pages
Corresponds to 5
1 step/
10 pages.
P LIMIT PAGE Setting of the job connection number of 1: 10 pages - 1 - 99 1 10
sheets/limitation of the number of 99: 990 pages
sheets Corresponds to 99
1 step/
10 pages.
Q PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value
When 100 is entered, it corresponds to 1kp at 5% print.
R PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner 1 - 999 10
count specified value
S INTERVAL TIME Setting of the leaving time when turning ON the power 1 - 255 3
(including the sleep recovery time) (h: hour) (1 - 255; 1 - 255h passed)
T HUM HOUR [HUM] temperature/humidity monitoring time 1 - 24 2
Interval setting (10 minutes unit)
U HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the 1-9 2
execution of the previous process control of "HUM"
V Process BK_RATIO [REV2_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance value 1 - 999 15
control magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 20 corresponds to
execution 10,000mm.)
W condition M_RATIO [REV2_CL] M position OPC drum traveling distance value 1 - 999 15
setting magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 20 corresponds to
10,000mm.)
X REV1_RATIO [REV1_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance value 1 - 255 20
magnification ratio setting (%) (Entry of 100 corresponds to
70,000mm.)
Y LOW_RATIO LOW mode process control execution interval 1 - 999 15
Z COLOR BORDER Setting of the magnification 0: BK process control is 0 - 999 20
ratio of the upper limit of the M executed without ratio
position OPC drum traveling judgment of the M OPC
distance when BK process drum traveling distance.
control is executed. 1 - 999;1 - 999(%)
AA BK ONLY Enable/Disable setting of the Enable 5 times 0-6 0 5
BK process control execution Enable 1 - 5 times 1-5
when monochrome printing is Inhibit 6
continued, and setting of the
number of repetitions.
AB P2P PV_CL Interval of number of sheets of color patch making of 0 - 255 30
process control between papers
AC P2P PV_BK Interval of number of sheets of BK patch making of process 0 - 255 60
control between papers
AD HT_DIF Used to judge the execution of HT process control. 1 - 255 40
Bias variation difference value
Default
value
AE Registration RG_ON_SYNC CL Power ON process control Synchronization/ 0-2 0 0
adjustment ALL Asynchronization switch 1
setting CL/BK 2
AF RG_PH_ADJ TIMER Setting of the span of the modulation adjustment timer 0 - 199 72
execution (Hour)
AG RG_PERM_TIMER Setting of the span from execution disable to enable 0 - 15 0
(X 10 minute)
AH RG_HOUR_TIMER Setting of the span of timer execution 0 - 15 6
(HOUR)
AI RG_BW_SYNC Enable/Disable setting of the registration Allow 0-1 0 1
adjustment in a monochrome job. Inhibit 1
AJ Secondary 2TRAN_CLEAN_T IME1 Secondary transfer cleaning processing time determination 5 - 999 200
transfer threshold value 1
AK cleaning 2TRAN_CLEAN_T IME2 Secondary transfer cleaning processing time determination 5 - 999 300
setting threshold value 2
AL 2TRAN_CLEAN_T IME3 Secondary transfer cleaning processing time determination 5 - 999 500
threshold value 3
AM MC cleaner MC_CLEAN_TIME MC automatic cleaning 0: Not executed 0 - 99 0 3
control execution interval 5 - 99: Executed 1 - 99
AN MC_CLEAN_DUR Enable/Disable setting of the MC Enable 0-1 0 0
ING_JOB automatic cleaning execution during Disable 1
job.
AO MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_1 Setting of idle discharge time after MC automatic cleaning 0 - 300 0
(sec)
AP MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_2 Setting of idle discharge time after MC cleaning in Sim (sec) 0 - 300 0
AQ MC_DISCHARGE_TIME_3 Setting of idle discharge time after MC cleaning from 0 - 300 30
system setting (sec)
AR DRUM_REVERSE Drum reverse rotation control setting Enable 0-1 0 1
Disable 1
AS BLADE_CLEAN_TIME Setting blade refresh interval Disable 0 - 99 0 10
Interval setting 1 - 99
AT MC_CLEAN_LL_1 Judgment on MC cleaning at WUP Disable 0-1 0 0
under low humidity environment Enable 1
AU MC_CLEAN_LL_2 Judgment on MC cleaning under low Disable 0-1 0 1
humidity environment Enable 1
AV PTC_CLEAN_TIME_CL PTC automatic cleaning interval (Color) 0 - 300 50
AW PTC_CLEAN_TIME_BK PTC automatic cleaning interval (Monochrome) 0 - 300 100
AX Registration PAR_CNT SYNC Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment 1 - 999 (sheet) 700
adjustment between sheets, interval of number of sheets
AY setting PAR_TIMER SYNC Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 240 (minute) 30
between sheets, interval of time
AZ PAR_TEMP SYNC Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 99 degrees C 0
between sheets, difference in temperature
BA Secondary 2TBMD The secondary transfer belt meandering Enable 0-1 0 0
transfer control enable / disable setting Disable 1
meandering
control
Default
44-29 Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Purpose Setting E CPY TO Halftone 0- 0: CALCULATED 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the PRT process 1 (Color balance
process control during a job. TABLE control calculation value)
copier - 1: DEFAULT
Section Process printer
Operation/Procedure conversion
table select
F HT Setting of 1 - 255 20
panel.
RETRY halftone
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. correction
3) Press [OK] key. retry
G HT Setting of 1 - 255 3
Default TARGET halftone
value RETRY correction
A COPY During copy 0- 0: No execution 2 reference
job 2 1: HV only value
B PRINTER During print 2: HV  HT 2 registration
job retry setting
C FAX During FAX 2
* "1: HV only" in items A to D also includes execution of engine
print job
halftone correction.
D SELF During self 2
PRINT print * The display of A to E is item name: detailed display.
Example: COPY: HV  HT
HV: High density process control
44-32
HT: Halftone process control
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the bias modulation cali-
bration.
44-31
Section
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
market.) Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the deflection of the OPC 1) Press the [EXECUTE] key.
drum. 2) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the bias modulation calibra-
Section Process tion is started.
Operation/Procedure During the execution of the bias modulation Calibrator is dis-
played as "Executing ...".
NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu- * If you press the EXECUTE button during execution, the oper-
lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
ation is interrupted and the screen returns to the initial screen.
3) When the bias modulation calibration is completed, the EXE-
CUTE button returns to the normal display.
When the operation is normally completed, the screen returns
to the initial screen and the adjustment result is displayed.
When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
<Each of the display items and Description>
Display
range
MODULATION_ BK_ bias modulation setting 0-3
ADJ_BK
MODULATION_ C_ bias modulation setting 0-3
ADJ_C
MODULATION_ M_ bias modulation setting 0-3
ADJ_M
MODULATION_ Y_ bias modulation setting 0-3
ADJ_Y
BK_AREA **/-- BK_ adhesion amount difference area 1 - 11
BK_AREA --/** BK_ adhesion amount difference Previous 1 - 11
area
C_AREA **/-- C_ adhesion amount difference area 1 - 11
C_AREA --/** C_ adhesion amount difference Previous 1 - 11
area
M_AREA **/-- M_ adhesion amount difference area 1 - 11
M_AREA --/** M_ adhesion amount difference Previous 1 - 11
area
Y_AREA **/-- Y_ adhesion amount difference area 1 - 11
Y_AREA --/** Y_ adhesion amount difference Previous 1 - 11
area
BK_RIBB BK_ Drum Rib Position ~ Reference Phase 0 - 360
Difference Angle
C_RIBB C_ Drum Rib Position ~ Reference Phase 0 - 360
Difference Angle
M_RIBB M_ Drum Rib Position ~ Reference Phase 0 - 360
Difference Angle
Y_RIBB Y_ Drum Rib Position ~ Reference Phase 0 - 360
Difference Angle
<Detailed error indication and explanation of each error

(except for high density process control operation)>
Display item Content Detail
Interruption Forced interruption -
PATCH_REF Patch adhesion amount An adhesion amount
AD_F_BK abnormality F_BK exceeding the threshold
PATCH_REF Patch adhesion amount value was detected
AD_F_C abnormality F_C
PATCH_REF Patch adhesion amount
AD_F_M abnormality F_M
AD_F_Y abnormality F_Y
AD_R_BK abnormality R_BK
AD_R_C abnormality R_C
AD_R_M abnormality R_M
AD_R_Y abnormality R_Y
<Detailed error indication and explanation of each error (for
Display item Content Detail
high density process control operation)>
BIAS_HP_DE Bias HP detection error BK The rib could not be
TECT_K detected within the Display item Content
BIAS_HP_DE Bias HP detection error C prescribed time. F_SEN_ADJ_ERR F Sensor adjustment abnormal
TECT_C C_SEN_ADJ_ERR C Sensor adjustment abnormal
BIAS_HP_DE Bias HP detection error M R_SEN_ADJ_ERR R Sensor adjustment abnormal
TECT_M K_HV_ERR K color high density process control abnormal
BIAS_HP_DE Bias HP detection error Y C_HV_ERR C color high density process control abnormal
TECT_Y M_HV_ERR M color high density process control abnormal
BASEV_F Belt base material detection Difference of the average Y_HV _ERR Y color high density process control abnormal
error F value of the ground
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
BASEV_R Belt base material detection before and after the patch
error R is out of range
44-37
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with scroll keys.
Default
item Display Content Setting range
value
A MUL_MC_ADJ Allow /Inhibit setting of the multi-grid bias correction Inhibit 0-1 0 1(Allow)
Allow 1
B MUL_DV_ADJ Allow /Inhibit setting of the multi-DV bias correction Inhibit 0-1 0 0(Inhibit)
Allow 1
C MODULATION_ADJ_BK BK_ Bias modulation setting OFF 0-3 0 1(Light)
LIGHT 1
MIDDLE 2
DARK 3
D MODULATION_ADJ_C C_ Bias modulation setting OFF 0-3 0 1(Light)
LIGHT 1
MIDDLE 2
DARK 3
E MODULATION_ADJ_M M_ Bias modulation setting OFF 0-3 0 1(Light)
LIGHT 1
MIDDLE 2
DARK 3
F MODULATION_ADJ_Y Y_ Bias modulation setting OFF 0-3 0 1(Light)
LIGHT 1
MIDDLE 2
DARK 3
44-43 Display/ Mode Content
Item
Purpose Data display
PROCON K ID Collectively change the value of the register K of
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa- TARGET DOWN the process control reference value (The high
tion of the developing unit. (-2) density process control target value decreases.)
Section Developing system K ID Collectively change the value of the register K of
DOWN the process control reference value (The high
Operation/Procedure
(-1) density process control target value decreases.)
The identification number and the identification signal level of the K ID UP Collectively change the value of the register K of
developing unit are displayed. (+1) the process control reference value (The high
density process control target value increases.)
Display K ID UP Collectively change the value of the register K of
Item/Display Content NOTE
range (+2) the process control reference value (The high
A DVCH K developing unit 1-9 The model density process control target value increases.)
KIND K identification number identification number K Collectively change the value of the register K of
B DVCH C developing unit 1-9 of the developing unit NORMAL the process control reference value to the
KIND C identification number which is backed up in (0) default value
C DVCH M developing unit 1-9 the EEPROM of the C ID Collectively change the value of the register C of
KIND M identification number machine. DOWN the process control reference value (The C high
D DVCH Y developing unit 1-9 (-2) density process control target value decreases.)
KIND Y identification number C ID Collectively change the value of the register C of
E DV_TYP_ K developing unit 0-1 0 = High (Open) DOWN the process control reference value (The C high
SEL_K identification 1 = Low (GND) (-1) density process control target value decreases.)
detection C ID UP Collectively change the value of the register C of
F DV_TYP_ C developing unit 0-1 (+1) the process control reference value (The C high
SEL_C identification density process control target value increases.)
detection C ID UP Collectively change the value of the register C of
G DV_TYP_ M developing unit 0-1 (+2) the process control reference value (The C high
SEL_M identification density process control target value increases.)
detection C Collectively change the value of the register C of
H DV_TYP_ Y developing unit 0-1 NORMAL the process control reference value to the
SEL_Y identification (0) default
detection M ID Collectively change the value of the register M of
I DVCH_A K developing unit 0 - 255 AD value of the DOWN the process control reference value (The M high
D_K identification AD developing unit (-2) density process control target value decreases.)
value identification voltage M ID Collectively change the value of the register M of
J DVCH_A C developing unit 0 - 255 DOWN the process control reference value (The M high
D_C identification AD (-1) density process control target value decreases.)
value M ID UP Collectively change the value of the register M of
K DVCH_A M developing unit 0 - 255 (+1) the process control reference value (The M high
D_M identification AD density process control target value increases.)
value M ID UP Collectively change the value of the register M of
L DVCH_A Y developing unit 0 - 255 (+2) the process control reference value (The M high
D_Y identification AD density process control target value increases.)
value M Collectively change the value of the register M of
NORMAL the process control reference value to the
* The developing unit is identified by the combination of items E, F, (0) default
G, H and items I, J, K, and L. Y ID Collectively change the value of the register Y of
DOWN the process control reference value (The Y high
(-2) density process control target value decreases.)
44-62 Y ID Collectively change the value of the register Y of
DOWN the process control reference value (The Y high
Purpose Setup/Adjustment (-1) density process control target value decreases.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution Y ID UP Collectively change the value of the register Y of
conditions. (+1) the process control reference value (The Y high
density process control target value increases.)
Section Process Y ID UP Collectively change the value of the register Y of
Operation/Procedure (+2) the process control reference value (The Y high
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of density process control target value increases.)
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28. Y Collectively change the value of the register Y of
NORMAL the process control reference value to the
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending (0) default
on the condition. PROCON HIGH Collectively change the value of the density
MODE QUALITY correction execution timing mod (It is set when
Select an item to be set. 2 the color image quality is given priority.)
HIGH Collectively change the value of the density
• To change the image density in the high density area, select
QUALITY correction execution timing mode (It is set when
PROCON TARGET. (SIM44-4/46-23/67-34) 1 the color image quality is given priority.)
• To change the frequency of the process control operations, PRINT Collectively change the value of the density
select PROCON MODE. (SIM44-28) PERFOR correction execution timing mode (It is set when
MANCE1 the job speed is given priority.)
PRINT Collectively change the value of the density
PERFOR correction execution timing mode (It is set when
MANCE2 there are little color jobs and many monochrome
jobs.)
Display/ Mode Content Setting Default
Item range value
PROCON NORMAL Collectively change the value of the density M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
MODE correction execution timing mode to the default PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
value TONE (Color tone
CUSTOM Revive the values set by the SIM44-28 ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
When PROCON TARGET is selected. (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
1) Select the density level. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
When PROCON MODE is selected. O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
1) Select the execution frequency of the process control. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
3) Press [YES] key. (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
46 R LIGHT (COLOR Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
46-1 S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) HIGH 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy T SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
mode.
document)
Section U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch V TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
panel. (COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(copy document)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 46-2
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the mode.
adjustment value.
Section
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
Operation/Procedure
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
sity is decreased. 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Setting Default 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
range value * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 adjustment value.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
HIGH 1 - 99 50 sity is decreased.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 range value
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
A
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
B
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 AUTO3 Auto 3 LOW 1 - 99 50
C
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
D
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
E
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
document) TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
F
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50 Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50 PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) G
PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
H
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Setting Default * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
Item/Display Content item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
range value
MAP MAP LOW 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
I
HIGH 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
AUTO1(COPY Auto 1 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 increased, and vice versa.
J
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
AUTO2(COPY Auto 2 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
K Mode Item/Display Content
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 range value
AUTO3(COPY Auto 3 (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 LOW A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
L
TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
M
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
N PHOTO(COPY Photo (Copy E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TO COPY) document) F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
PRINTED Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
O PHOTO(COPY (Copy H RIP - 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
TO COPY) document) HIGH A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
P
HIGH 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
46-4
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image H RIP - 1 - 99 50
send mode.
Section
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. balance RGB.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
panel.
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
Setting Default panel.
Mode Item/Display Content
range value 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO area and the high density area.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 target color is increased, and vice versa.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
range value
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
correction amount
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
correction amount
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 46-9
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
H RIP - 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
Section
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
send mode.
Section item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
panel. mode, and the fax mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is Density level
increased, and vice versa. Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point)
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
Setting Default H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
Item Button Display Content
range value
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: exposure adjustment M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
LOW (Low density side) N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
C COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52 O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
SIDEA: exposure adjustment P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
HIGH (High density side) Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
D SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 49 46-16
SIDEB: exposure adjustment Purpose Adjustment
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 49 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
SIDEB: exposure adjustment sity and the gamma (for each monochrome
LOW (Low density side) copy mode).
C COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 Section
Operation/Procedure
D SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
SIDEB: exposure adjustment panel.
HIGH (High density side) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R R
F BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G G 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
SIDEB: B B increased, and vice versa.
Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value
(Point)
46-10 A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
Purpose Adjustment B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
the gamma (for each color copy mode).
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
Section F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key. H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
touch panel.
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
3) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
panel. M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is

46-19
TEXT Text
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo Purpose Setting
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo density scanning (exposure) of mono-
MAP Map chrome auto copy mode documents.
LIGHT Light document
Section
COPY ORG Copy document
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
(Point)
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 saved.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 Default
Item/Display Content Set value
value
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
MODE2, MODE3
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
Default Density level Default
Item/Display Content Set value Item/Display Setting range
value (Point) value
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ PRESCA L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
Stop (for copy) STOP/ N M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Stop (for scanner) STOP/ P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL 46-23
NOTE: Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images) high density section (High density tone gap
MODE 2 Normal gamma supported).
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
scanned, and the output image density is determined Section
according to the scanned density. (The output image Operation/Procedure
density is even for all the surface.) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined 0 Enable
according to the density in each area of document. (The
1 Inhibit
output image density may not be even for all the
surface.) 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined Setting Default
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The Item/Display Content
range value
output image density is even for all the surface.) A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome (0: ENABLE density correction mode:
FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the 1: DISABLE) Enable
document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN 1 CMY engine highest
mode. density correction mode:
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome Disable
PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x B K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode. (0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
correction mode: Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500
46-21 TARGET maximum density correction
Purpose Adjustment D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
correction
adjustment)
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
Section TARGET YELLOW maximum density
Operation/Procedure correction
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
TARGET BLACK maximum density
touch panel. correction
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch G RATIO LOW Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0
panel. correction (LOW)(1/100)
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. H RATIO HIGH Mix ratio of High density 0 - 100 0
correction (HIGH)(1/100)
I DITHER Dither threshold (LOW) 0 - 255 255
THRESHOLD
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) J SLOPE Slope threshold (HIGH)(1/100) 100 - 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is THRESHOLD 500
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
and B to "0".
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value. The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
Density level Default * To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value A and B to "1".
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 The tone gap may occur in high density part.
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500 NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 values are changed, the density in the high density area is
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 changed.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
46-24 46-26
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color
(Auto adjustment) balance set value to the default.
Section Section
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 2) Press [YES] key.
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. default value.
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,
then the adjustment result pattern is printed. 46-27
4) Press [OK] key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
The halftone correction target registration is processed. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy
5) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it. images, texts, and line image edges.
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust- Section
ment is completed. Operation/Procedure
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have panel.
completed successfully. For example, when the copy color 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed
and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not
effective. Item/Display Setting Default
Content
(Copy mode) range value
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
46-25 (SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (INTERCEPT) adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin- C COLOR TEXT Color character edge gamma 1 - 99 50
gle color copy mode) (SLOPE) skew adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
Section
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
Operation/Procedure E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the (SLOPE) skew adjustment (Text/Map
touch panel. mode)
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
panel.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
target color is increased, and vice versa. character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge
Default value is decreased.
C M Y When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased,
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200 the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255 vice versa.
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
G ORANGE 0 - 255 0 150 255
H NAVY 0 - 255 255 200 0
I LIGHT GREEN 0 - 255 150 0 150
J LIGHT BLUE 0 - 255 150 20 0
K AQUA MARINE 0 - 255 170 0 50
L PURPLE 0 - 255 128 255 0
M PINK 0 - 255 0 150 20
N YELLOW GREEN 0 - 255 128 0 255
O BEIGE 0 - 255 0 50 170
46-30 46-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
scanning direction in the copy mode. density reproducibility in the monochrome
Section auto copy mode.
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- Operation/Procedure
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key. 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode 1 0-1 0 0 When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
RESOLUTION selection Mode 2 1 background and the low density image is increased. When the
SW (COPY: COLOR) adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
Setting Default
Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400% Item/Display Content
Mode range value
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
ratio] ratio] ratio]
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
Mode 1 OC 600 600 600
(SIDE1) surface)
DSPF 600 600 -
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF back 1 - 250 196
Mode 2 OC 400 600 600 (SIDE2) surface)
DSPF 400 600 - D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) back surface)
46-36
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
Default value Default

C M Y value
OUTCOLOR A RED R output color 0 - 255 0 255 200 -
(Output color B GREEN G output color 0 - 255 255 0 255 -
coefficient) C BLUE B output color 0 - 255 255 150 0 -
D CYAN C output color 0 - 255 255 0 0 -
E MAGENTA M output color 0 - 255 0 255 0 -
F YELLOW Y output color 0 - 255 0 0 255 -
G ORANGE O output color 0 - 255 0 150 255 -
H NAVY N output color 0 - 255 255 200 0 -
I LIGHT GREEN LG output color 0 - 255 150 0 150 -
J LIGHT BLUE LB output color 0 - 255 150 20 0 -
K AQUA MARINE AM output color 0 - 255 170 0 50 -
L PURPLE PU output color 0 - 255 128 255 0 -
M PINK P output color 0 - 255 0 150 20 -
N YELLOW GREEN YG output color 0 - 255 128 0 255 -
O BEIGE BE output color 0 - 255 0 50 170 -
CHROMA A RED / BLACK Red extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(Chroma (The red recognition area is adjusted.)
adjustment) B KS:CHROMATIC Chromatic color extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(The chromatic color recognition area is adjusted.)
46-37 Item/Display Select Default
Content
(Copy mode) button value
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text/Printed NORMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability (-) LUT1 photo (Manual)
of monochrome mode color. NOMAL
Section (+) LUT1
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT2
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (+) LUT1
4) Press [YES] key. (+) LUT2
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
images when copying color documents with red and yellow images PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
in the monochrome mode. NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
An individual adjustment is available in each of the copy mode and
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph NORMAL
the printer mode. (Manual)
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
Setting Default
Item Display Content (+) LUT1
range value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) for 0 - 1000 137 (+) LUT2
Default Default mode TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) for 0 - 1000 827 PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
Default Default mode NOMAL
C R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) for 0 - 1000 243 (+) LUT1
Fluorescence Fluorescence pen mode (+) LUT2
D G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) for 0 - 1000 354 MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
Fluorescence Fluorescence pen mode (-) LUT1
E R-Ratio RIP Print gray setting (R) 0 - 1000 299 NOMAL
F G-Ratio RIP Print gray setting (G) 0 - 1000 587 (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
* B-Ratio Default: The value of gray making setting (B) for Default
CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
mode is obtained from the formula below. TXT PRT Text Printed
(-) LUT1
1000 - R-Ratio Default - G-Ratio Default NOMAL photo (Manual)
* B-Ratio Fluorescence: The value of gray making setting (B) for (+) LUT1
Fluorescence pen mode is obtained from the formula below. (+) LUT2
1000 - R-Ratio Fluorescence - G-Ratio Fluorescence CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual)
* B-Ratio RIP: The value of Print gray making setting (B) is
obtained from the formula below. NOMAL
(+) LUT1
1000 - R-Ratio RIP - G-Ratio RIP
(+) LUT2
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial CPY TO CPY/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
values (Default). PHOTO (-) LUT1 Printed photo
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased, NOMAL (Manual)
the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment (+) LUT1
value is decreased, the density is increased. (+) LUT2
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light document NORMAL
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust- ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 (Manual)
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased. NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
AUTO AUTO (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
46-38 judgment
(-) LUT1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup NOMAL
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component (+) LUT1
amount in the color copy mode. (+) LUT2
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
3) Press the black component amount select key.
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.
(except character and line image)
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
changes.
46-47 Operation Setting Default
mode range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup PUSH E SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy SCAN (C) (*1) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
and scan images (JPEG). (COLOR) sion mode 2)
(Scanner 1
Section color) Low
Operation/Procedure compres-
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. sion
MIDDLE Medium 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2 compres-
3) Press [OK] key. sion mode
The set value is saved. 2
Medium
Operation Setting Default compres-
Item/Display Content sion
mode range value
FILLING A FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) MIDDLE Medium 2
(COLOR) (C) compres- 3 compres-
Filing sion sion mode
(Color (Color) 3
mode) High
MIDDLE Medium 1
compres-
compres-
sion
sion
(Color) PUSH F SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
SCAN (G) (*1) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
HIGH High 2
(GRAY) sion mode 2)
compres-
(Scanner 1
sion
mono- Low
(Color)
chrome compres-
FILLING B FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
halftone sion
(GRAY) (G) compres-
mode) MIDDLE Medium 1
Filing sion
2 compres-
(Mono- (Halftone)
sion mode
chrome MIDDLE Medium 1
2
halftone compres-
Medium
mode) sion
compres-
(Mono-
sion
chrome
MIDDLE Medium 2
halftone
3 compres-
mode)
sion mode
HIGH High 2
3
compres-
High
sion
compres-
(Mono-
sion
chrome
halftone *1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image
mode) compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
PRINT C PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
HOLD (C) compres- NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
(COLOR) sion in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other
Print hold (Color) hand, however, the image quality of some documents may
(Color MIDDLE Medium 1 be remarkably reduced.
mode) compres-
sion
(Color)
HIGH High 2 46-48
compres- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
sion
Function (Purpose) Used to change the copy output resolution
(Color)
to 600dpi or 1200dpi depending on the
PRINT D PRINT LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
HOLD (G) compres- printing quality.
(GRAY) sion Section
Print hold (Halftone)
Operation/Procedure
(Mono- MIDDLE Medium 1
chrome compres- 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
halftone sion
mode) (Mono- Item Button display Content Default value
chrome AUTO 600DPI ED AUTO 600DPI DT
halftone 600DPI DT
mode) TEXT/PRT PHOTO 600DPI ED Text/Printed 600DPI DT
HIGH High 2 600DPI DT Photo
compres- 1200DPI DT
sion TEXT/PHOTO 600DPI DT Text/ 600DPI DT
(Mono- 1200DPI DT Photograph
chrome
PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI DT Printed photo 1200DPI DT
halftone
1200DPI DT
mode)
PHOTO 600DPI DT Photograph 1200DPI DT
1200DPI DT
46-51 46-54
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto-
mode heavy paper mode and the image matic density adjustment (dither).
process mode. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
[PAPER/DITHER]. self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the feed tray is used.)
touch panel. 2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the [EXECUTE] key.
touch panel. Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. automatically printed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- 3) Press [OK] key.
putted. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is After completion of the halftone image correction, the screen
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust shifts to the dither selection menu.
the image density. 5) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
Item/Display Content Color
Select item
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY Content
(Mode/Image)
DITH1 Black edge K HEAVYPAPER Copier/gamma for heavy paper
DITH2 Color edge KCMY BLACK EDGE Black edge
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY COLOR EDGE Color edge
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K COLOR ED Color error diffusion
DITH7 Monochrome dither (1200dpi) K B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
DITH8 Monochrome dither (600dpi) K B/W 1200 Monochrome dither 1200dpi
DITH9 Monochrome dither (600dpi low) K B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
B/W 600 LOW Monochrome dither 600dpi low
Density level Default WOVEN1 Watermark mode 1
(Point) value WOVEN2 Watermark mode 2
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500 WOVEN3 Watermark mode 3
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500 WOVEN4 Watermark mode 4
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 The 48 patch self print is printed.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 7) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 [EXECUTE] key.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
dither selection menu.
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 8) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 items (dither), press [OK] key.
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 46-55
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the drop out color in the
image send mode (monochrome manual
46-52 text mode).
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy Operation/Procedure
mode heavy paper and the image process In the image send mode (monochrome manual text mode), the
mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54 range where color images are reproduced as monochrome images
or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset is adjusted.
to the initial value.) 1) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Section When the adjustment value is increased, colors dropout
Operation/Procedure becomes easy to narrow the reproduction range. When the
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key. adjustment value is decreased, color dropout becomes difficult
to widen the reproduction range.
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Setting Default
3) Press [YES] key. range value
A CHROMA Dropout color range adjustment 0-6 3
2) Scan the document in the image send mode (monochrome
manual text mode), and check the adjustment result.
46-58
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu-
tion. (Smoothing process)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll
key.
3) Press [OK] key.
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi
The setting is reflected only the image edge area.
Content Setting Default

Mode Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text/Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
photo ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT photo (copy ON 1
document)
K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text/Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
photo ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
H LIGHT Light document OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
I COPY TO Auto (copy OFF 0 0 (OFF)
COPY/AUTO document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
K CPY TO CPY/ Text Printed OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT photo (copy ON 1
document)
L CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy document) ON 1
46-60
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.

A SCREEN FILTER LEVEL H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto)
L copy mode Soft emphasis 2
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY CL AUTO FILTER SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for copy/push scan/FAX SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
LEVEL CENTER mode CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto push scan mode SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER (color Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
D COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in color copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
E COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
F SINGLE COLOR : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in single color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
G 2 COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to C/M/Y OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
H 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to K images of OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON the 2-color copy mode ON 1
I B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
J COLOR PUSH : RGB OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
K B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON monochrome mode ON 1
L COLOR PRINT: CMY OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print C, OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON M, Y images ON 1
M COLOR PRINT: K OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print K OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON images ON 1
N B/W PRINT OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON print images ON 1
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- [BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text
tion level. 2, Color text 2
I SEGMENT ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
Section [THIN LINE] adjustment: Thin line
Operation/Procedure J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment mode. [TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on
dots
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
panel.
[TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. dots
4) Press [OK] key. L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[TXT ON SCR AREA adjustment: Detection
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- 1] area 1 of text on dots
cially required. M SEGMENT ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- [TXT ON SCR AREA adjustment:
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur 2] Detection area 2 of
for some documents. text on dots
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
NOTE: [HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line
Both "ADMIN SEG AUTO" and "ADMIN SEG MAN" are linked number judgment
"Machine Adjustment" - "Image Quality Adjustment" - "Image Qual- O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
ity Adjustment" - "Area Separation Level Adjustment". [BK] adjustment: No
If user executes "Area Separation Level Adjustment", the value of chrome judgment
this Sim which was adjusted by service man is overwrited. P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[CL] adjustment: Chrome
And if service man use this adjustment, the value of "Area Separa- judgment
tion Level Adjustment" which was adjusted by user is overwrited. Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
In the MX-7090/8090, the item Z: SWITCH [LOCK] function does [TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
not work. background
R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Item/Display Content [SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto density dots
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print) S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print) [SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium
density dots
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
[SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print)
density dots
ADMIN ID DOWN(-3) Change the area separation adjustment
U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
SEG ID DOWN(-2) item of AUTO mode.
[SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
AUTO ID DOWN(-2) V SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
ID UP(+1) [SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
ID UP(+2) W SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
ID UP(+3) [LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line
NORMAL screen
ADMIN ID DOWN(-3) Change the area separation adjustment X SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
SEG ID DOWN(-2) item of Text/Printed Photo mode. [SMALL SCR 1] adjustment: Dot in a
MAN ID DOWN(-2) small area 1
ID UP(+1) Y SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
ID UP(+2) [SMALL SCR 2] adjustment: Dot in a
small area 2
ID UP(+3)
Z SEGMENT: SWITCH Priority image quality 0-1 0
NORMAL
[LOCK] ON / OFF: Priority
image lock
Setting Default
range value
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[LINE SCR] line screen
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[HIGH LPI] High line number
judgment select
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send
SEND] dots
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
1
G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text
1
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the LV_C adjustment (chroma)
ACS, the area separation, the background S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0
image process, and the auto exposure paper mode select
mode. T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select
Section U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0
Operation/Procedure paper mode select
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0
panel. paper mode select
W SW_CHANGE_ Mode 0: Mode judgment 0-6 0
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
MODE0 select
3) Press [OK] key. X SW_CHANGE_ Mode 1: Mode judgment 0-6 1
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- MODE1 select
cially required. Y SW_CHANGE_ Mode 2: Mode judgment 0-6 2
MODE2 select
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ-
Z SW_CHANGE_ Mode 3: Mode judgment 0-6 3
ent from the default value, image quality trouble may occur MODE3 select
for some documents. AA SW_CHANGE_ Mode 4: Mode judgment 0-6 4
MODE4 select
Setting Default
Item/Display Content AB SW_CHANGE_ Mode 5: Mode judgment 0-6 5
range value
MODE5 select
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
AC SW_CHANGE_ Mode 6: Mode judgment 0-6 6
reference area select
MODE6 select
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
priority level adjustment
C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
priority level adjustment
46-63
D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
threshold value Purpose Adjustment/Setup
adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low
E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment 0-6 3 density section.
target area adjustment
Section
F AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
detection division result Operation/Procedure
adjustment: 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
For color copy panel.
G AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
detection division result
adjustment: 3) Press [OK] key.
For monochrome copy When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
H AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4 background and the low density image is increased. When the
detection division result adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
adjustment:
and the low density image is decreased.
For color scan
I AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4 Setting Default
detection division result Item/Display Content
range value
adjustment:
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
For monochrome scan
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
_LV_L_U density threshold value
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
adjustment (lower limit)
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
LV_L_O density threshold value
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
adjustment (upper limit)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
LV_C detection level
adjustment (chroma) F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
_ONOFF OFF switch : (color density)
OFF OFF 1
_CC For color copy H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
_ONOFF OFF switch : (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
OFF OFF 1
_MC For mono- I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
chrome copy (COPY TO COPY) Character
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) (color copy)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
_CS For color scan PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) TO COPY) (color copy)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch :For OFF 1 K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 5
_MS monochrome TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
scan L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 5
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
LV_L adjustment (value) PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
Setting Default
range value
N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 5
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
46-65
Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment mode.
2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
4) Press [OK] key.
When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
mode.
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Setting Default
Category Mode Item/Display Content
range value
OC COPY A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 0
(Document B TEXT Text 0 - 12 3
table) C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 0
D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text photograph 0 - 12 1
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
G LIGHT ORIGINAL Pencil 0 - 12 0
H COPY TO COPY/TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Copy document/Text print 0 - 12 2
I COPY TO COPY/TEXT Copy document/Text 0 - 12 3
J COPY TO COPY/PHOTO Copy document/Printed photo 0 - 12 2
K AUTO0 Auto mode judgment 0 0 - 12 0
L AUTO1 Auto mode judgment 1 0 - 12 0
M AUTO2 Auto mode judgment 2 0 - 12 1
N AUTO3 Auto mode judgment 3 0 - 12 1
O AUTO4 Auto mode judgment 4 0 - 12 0
P AUTO5 Auto mode judgment 5 0 - 12 0
Q AUTO6 Auto mode judgment 6 0 - 12 0
PREVIEW A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 0
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 0
F MAP Map 0 - 12 3
Setting Default
Category Mode Item/Display Content
range value
SPF1 COPY A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 4
(Automatic B TEXT Text 0 - 12 7
document C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 4
feeder (DSPF) D PHOTO Photograph 0 - 12 5
front)
F MAP Map 0 - 12 7
SPF1 PREVIEW A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 4
front)
F MAP Map 0 - 12 7
SPF2 COPY A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 8
back)
F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
PREVIEW A TEXT PRINTED PHOTO Text print 0 - 12 8
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0 - 12 8
F MAP Map 0 - 12 11
46-66
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of watermarks in the copy/printer mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of watermarks in the
copy/printer mode.
1) Select the adjustment mode.
2) Select an adjustment item according to the necessity.
4) Make a copy, and check the adjustment result.
Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
PATTERN A WOVEN DEN BK LOW Watermark density level (Black LOW) 0 - 255 15 The adjustment value is
B WOVEN DEN BK MIDDLE Watermark density level (Black MIDDLE) 0 - 255 19 changed to increase or
C WOVEN DEN BK HIGH Watermark density level (Black HIGH) 0 - 255 23 decrease the density of the
D WOVEN DEN C LOW Watermark density level (Cyan LOW) 0 - 255 19 watermark of background
documents (primary output).
E WOVEN DEN C MIDDLE Watermark density level (Cyan MIDDLE) 0 - 255 23
To increase the watermark
F WOVEN DEN C HIGH Watermark density level (Cyan HIGH) 0 - 255 27
density, increase the
G WOVEN DEN M LOW Watermark density level (Magenta LOW) 0 - 255 15 adjustment value.
H WOVEN DEN M MIDDLE Watermark density level (Magenta MIDDLE) 0 - 255 18 To decrease the watermark
I WOVEN DEN M HIGH Watermark density level (Magenta HIGH) 0 - 255 21 density, decrease the
adjustment value.
NOTE:
When the adjustment value
is increased, the watermark
area which is originally not
reproduced becomes
difficult to disappear.
is decreased, the watermark
area which is originally
reproduced becomes easy
to disappear.
J CONTRAST Contrast adjustment 0 - 255 2 This is used to adjust the
variation in the watermark
density when the adjustment
value of the watermark print/
contrast adjustment in the
system setting is changed
by 1.
When this value is
increased, the variation is
also increased. When the
value is decreased, the
variation is also decreased.
is 0, the result of the
contrast adjustment is not
reflected. (* The adjustment
value must be set to 1 or
greater.)
K HT TYPE (POSI) For halftone index watermark type positive 42 - 43 42 To reproduce the containing
L HT TYPE (NEGA) For halftone index watermark type negative 42 - 43 42 characters of watermark
copy (secondary output)
more clearly, set to 43.
In that case, however, the
containing characters of the
watermark document
(primary output) can be
easily reproduced.
Setting Default
Category Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
COPY MODE A TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text/Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1 Normally set to the default.
select Enable/Disable ON 1 No need to change in the
B TEXT Text mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1 market.
Disable ON 1
C PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
D PHOTOGRAPH Photograph mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph mode OFF 0-1 0 1
select Enable/Disable ON 1
F MAP Map mode select Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable ON 1
G LIGHT Light density document OFF 0-1 0 1
mode select Enable/ ON 1
Disable
H TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
(CPY TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
text/ printed photo mode
I TEXT (CPY TO CPY) Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
Disable of selection of the ON 1
text mode
J PRINTED PHOTO (CPY Copy document: Enable/ OFF 0-1 0 1
TO CPY) Disable of selection of the ON 1
printed photo mode
K AUTO Automatic mode select OFF 0-1 0 1
Enable/Disable ON 1
L DEFAULT MODE When the default TEXT/ 0-5 0 0
exposure mode PRINTED PHOTO
background is ON, the TEXT 1
exposure mode to be set PRINTED PHOTO 2
is specified. PHOTOGRAPH 3
TEXT/PHOTO 4
MAP 5
POSITION A LINE SPACE 1 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(24P - 36P)(*1)
B LINE SPACE 2 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(37P - 48P)(*1)
C LINE SPACE 3 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(49P - 64P)(*1)
D LINE SPACE 4 Line space in the watermark print box 0 - 200 20
(65P - 80P)(*1)
E BLANK H/B 1 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (24P - 36P)(*2)
F BLANK H/B 2 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (37P - 48P)(*2)
G BLANK H/B 3 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (49P - 64P)(*2)
H BLANK H/B 4 Upper margin/Lower margin in the watermark print 0 - 200 10
box (65P - 80P)(*2)
I BLANK L/R 1 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 60
(24P - 36P)(*3)
J BLANK L/R 2 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 90
(37P - 48P)(*3)
K BLANK L/R 3 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 120
(49P - 64P)(*3)
L BLANK L/R 4 Left margin/Right margin in the watermark print box 0 - 200 150
(65P - 80P)(*3)
*1: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the line space is varied by 0.1mm.
*2: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the upper and the lower margins are varied by 0.1mm.
*3: When the adjustment value is varied by +/-1, the left and the right margins are varied by 0.1mm.
46-68 46-90
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the automatic resolution Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high-
judgement. compression PDF images.
Section Section
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
panel. 2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. 4) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Mode Item/Display Content
range value range value
RESULT HIGH Judgement result : High TEXT A GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0
A 0-3 3
RESOLUTION resolution SENSITIVITY selection
RESULT MID Judgement result : B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
B 0-3 2
RESOLUTION1 Slight high resolution FINDLINES selection
RESULT MID Judgement result : C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
C 0-3 1
RESOLUTION2 Slight low resolution FINDLINES SW SW (H)
RESULT LOW Judgement result : Low D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
D 0-3 1
RESOLUTION1 resolution FINDLINES SW SW (V)
RESULT UNKNOWN Judgement result : E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
E 0-3 1
RESOLUTION Cannot judge INDEXING SEL number
F LANGUAGE SEL Language setting 0-1 0 adjustment SW
AUTO RESOLUTION Automatic resolution F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
G 0-2 1
MODE judgement mode INDEXING ADJ adjustment
COLOR A LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
46-74 INTENT selection
Purpose Adjustment C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
ADJUSTMENT adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto D R-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 299
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R)
ment (Auto adjustment) E G-RATIO Gray scale 0 - 1000 587
Section ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G)
Operation/Procedure BG LAYER A BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
INTENT 1 setting
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
uously. INTENT 2 priority setting
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic SOFT CIC A SKEW Skew 0-1 0
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic CORRECTION correction
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations. switch
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is B FILTER Filter switch 0-1 0
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is C CIC MODE High 0-1 0
compression
printed.
mode switch
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, D OUTPUT Resolution 0-3 0
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. RESOLUTION setting
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment pattern is printed.
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment
result pattern is printed.
7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
ment is completed.
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the
adjustment procedure for both copy and print mode have
completed successfully. For example, when the copy color
balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed
and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not
effective.
46-91
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of black text.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set.
When COLOR key or MONO key is pressed, the adjustment value
is set and a copy is made simultaneously.
Setting Default
Item Display Content Description
range value
A SEGMENT PARAM COMMON Area separation setting select 0: Other than image send mode black text 0-1 0
SPECIAL emphasis (simple, high compression)
1: Image send mode black text
emphasis (simple, high compression)
B BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment The JPEG compression ratio of the 0-2 1
[Color: High compression mode] background layer is selected.
C BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [COL: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0: Low 0-2 1
[Color: Ultra fine mode] 1: Middle
D BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: COMPACT] JPEG recompression level adjustment 2: High 0-2 1
[Gray: High compression mode]
E BG: JPEG QUALITY LV [GRY: ULTRA FINE] JPEG recompression level adjustment 0-2 1
[Gray: Ultra fine mode]
F FG: TARGET AREA TYPE0 Front ground extraction area select 0: type0 0-2 0
TYPE1 1: type1
TYPE2 2: type2
G FG: TEXT DENSITY [COL] Front ground black text density The black text density in the front ground 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Color] layer is changed.
H FG: TEXT DENSITY [GRY] Front ground black text density 0: Dark - 5: Default - 10: Light 0 - 10 5
adjustment [Gray]
I ULTRA FINE MODE OFF High compression/Ultra Fine mode 0: High compression mode 0-1 0
ON select 1: Ultra fine mode
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the initial value, an image quality trouble may occur.
48 Item/Display Content
Setting
range
Default
value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
48-1 magnification ratio adjustment
(CCD)
Purpose Adjustment
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica- magnification ratio adjustment
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction (CCD)
and the sub scanning direction). C SPF (MAIN) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
Section
(Main scan)
Operation/Procedure D SPF (SUB) DSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch magnification ratio adjustment
panel. (Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) DSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (Main scan)
The set value is saved. F COPY Copy magnification correction 1-7 4
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification CORRECTIO (Sub scan)
N (SUB)
ratio is increased.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
48-5
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
Purpose Adjustment is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi- the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Setting Default
Section Scanner section Item/Display Content
range value
Operation/Procedure A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
panel. C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed)
3) Press [OK] key. E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved. (Reference speed)
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment.
2) Select a target adjustment item on the touch panel.

48-6
Purpose Adjustment
4) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
The set value is saved.
motor.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
Section and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
Operation/Procedure to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [MID] [LOW A] [LOW B]
LOW C] keys on the touch panel.
Setting Default
Mode Select Item/Display Content
range value
COLOR/MONO MID A RRM (COLOR) Registration motor correction value (Color) 49
COLOR/MONO MID B RRM (MONO) Registration motor correction value (Monochrome) 49
HEAVY1,2 LOW A A RRM (COLOR/MONO) Registration motor correction value 1-99 52
HEAVY3 LOW B A RRM (COLOR/MONO) 52
HEAVY4 LOW C A RRM (COLOR/MONO) 52
COLOR/MONO MID C BTM Belt motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID D BTM2 Belt motor 2 correction vale 1-99 48
COLOR/MONO MID E DM-K Drum K motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID F DM-C Drum C motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID G DM-M Drum M motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID H DM-Y Drum Y motor correction value 1-99 47
COLOR/MONO MID I FUM Fusing motor correction value 39
HEAVY1,2 LOW A B 40
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 41
HEAVY4 LOW C 41
COLOR/MONO MID J CPFM Paper feed motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A C 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID K PFM PS front motor correction value 48
HEAVY1,2 LOW A D 51
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 51
HEAVY4 LOW C 51
COLOR/MONO MID L POM Paper exit motor correction value 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A E 56
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A F FUSER SETTING Fusing speed switch timing value 35
HEAVY3 LOW B 1-99 43
HEAVY4 LOW C 43
HEAVY1,2 LOW A G FS-OFFSET Fusing acceleration ratio 70
HEAVY4 LOW C 70
HEAVY1,2 LOW A H RRM-START RRM acceleration start timing 150
HEAVY4 LOW C 150
HEAVY1,2 LOW A I RRM-END RRM acceleration end timing 200
HEAVY4 LOW C 200
Setting Default
Mode Select Item/Display Content
range value
HEAVY1,2 LOW A J RRM-OFFSET RRM acceleration ratio 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 60
COLOR/MONO MID M LCCM LCC motor correction values 1-99 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A K 50
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID N LCHM1 LCC horizontal transfer motor1 correction values 1-99 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A L 50
HEAVY 3 LOW B 50
HEAVY 4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID O LCHM2 LCC horizontal transfer motor2 correction values 1-99 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A M 50
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
COLOR/MONO MID P COR-IM Imaging motors all correction values 1-99 50
COLOR/MONO MID Q COR-PP Paper transport motors all correction values 50
HEAVY1,2 LOW A N 50
1-99
HEAVY3 LOW B 50
HEAVY4 LOW C 50
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and vice versa. Change by +/-1 corresponds to 0.1%.
However, with respect to FUSER SETTING, RRM START, and RRM END, when the paper enters the fixing state, the change is 1 mm for every
±1
(The larger the value is, the downstream in the conveying direction, the smaller the value, the more upstream in the conveying direction)
Error
49 Display item Content
display
LCT(A3LCC) A3LCC program A3LCC
LCT(A3LCT) A3LCT program A3LCT
49-1
LCT2(A3LCT) A3LCT program A3LCT2
Purpose FINISHER(FIN100) 100 sheets staple 4K finisher F100
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. program
SADDLE(FIN100) 100 sheets staple 4K finisher saddle S100
Section
program
Operation/Procedure TRIMMER 100 sheets staple trimmer program TRIM
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory. INSERTER Inserter program INS
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the FOLDING UNIT Folding unit program FOLD
operation panel section.) DECURLER Decurler unit program DEC
STACKER1 Stacker unit program STC1
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
STACKER2 Stacker unit program STC2
4) Select a target firmware.
ACU High compression PDF unit program ACU
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
6) Press [YES] key.
49-3
The selected firmware is updated.
Purpose
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis- Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual.
played. Section
Operation/Procedure
Error
Display item Content 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
display
UPSIDE BUNDLE Bundle version (upper part) UPBDL * When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
BOTTOM BUNDLE Bundle version (bottom) BTMBDL MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
ICU-MAIN ICU Main Program ICUM pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
ICU-BIOS ICU BIOS program ICUB 2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
ASIC-MAIN ASIC main program ASICM play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
ASIC-SUB ASIC sub-program ASICS The current version and the update version are displayed.
ASIC2 ASIC2 program ASIC2
LANGUAGE Language support data program LANG
LANGUAGE(LIST) List print language data LANGL [EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
EOSA embedded OSA program EOSA active from gray out.
UICONTENTS UI display program UICON 4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
SIM-TEXT Language data for simulation SIMT updated.
PCL (PROFILE) Color profile data PCLP When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
SCU SCU program SCU played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
DSPF DSPF program DSPF
PCU PCU program PCU
LCT(A4LCC) A4LCC program A4LCC

Item/Display item Description
range value
Purpose B Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. area setting loss area setting
C value SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
Section
area adjustment
Operation/Procedure D Void area DENA Print lead edge 1 - 99 40
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. adjustment adjustment
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark E DENB Sub scanning 1 - 99 30
update. direction print
range adjustment
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. F FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. REAR void area
5) Press [YES] key. adjustment
G Off-center OFFSET_ OC document 1 - 99 50
The selected watermark is updated.
adjustment OC off-center
adjustment
H Magnification SCAN_ SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
49-6 ratio SPEED_ scanning
correction OC magnification
Purpose ratio adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the OCR update. (CCD)
Section I Sub scanning DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
direction print correction value
Operation/Procedure J area DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit. correction value
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the OCR update. K value DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value
3) The current version and the update version are displayed.
L DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. value
5) Press [YES] key. M DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
The selected OCR is updated. value
N DENB-LC LCC/LCT/LCT 1 - 99 50
manual paper
feed correction
49-10 value
Purpose O DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 55
value
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the ACU firmware update.
P DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
Section correction value
Operation/Procedure A.(RRC-A)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. The timing of detection of the image lead edge after starting the
2) Press [YES] key. document scan is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When the
value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B.(LEAD)
50 The lead edge image loss amount is specified. Difference between
the document lead edge scan start position and the document lead
50-1 edge (0.1mm/step)
Purpose Adjustment * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
C.(SIDE)
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ment The side image loss amount is specified.
(Document width - Document edge scan range)/2 (0.1mm/step)
Section
(Rear edge image loss amount is fixed to 0. (No adjustment))
Operation/Procedure
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
D.(DEN-A)
panel.
The void amount made at the paper lead edge is specified.
(0.1mm/step)
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
default.
E.(DEN-B)
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
The void amount made at the paper rear edge is specified. (0.1mm/
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
step)
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
F.(FRONT/REAR)
Setting Default The void amount made at the right and the left edges of paper is
Item/Display item Description
range value adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50 * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
adjustment edge reference
value position (OC)

50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0+/-2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range Remarks
value
A DEN-C Printer print lead edge adjustment 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value for fitting the print lead edge for the
printer
When the adjustment value of this item is decreased
by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by
0.1mm.
B DEN-B Sub scanning direction print range 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge.
adjustment When the adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is
decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in
the sub scanning direction for the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 The void amount made at the right and the left edges
of paper is adjusted. When the value is increased,
the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed correction value 1 - 99 50
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
I DENB-LC LCC/LCT/LCT manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 55
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-9 1 2(CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
LCT1_1 LCT first series first 6
stage (*2)
LCT1_2 LCT first series second 7
stage (*2)
LCT2_1 LCT second series, first 8
stage (*3)
LCT2_2 LCT second series, 9
second stage (*3)
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO selection Not select 1

*3: Displayed only when two units of 2-stage LCT are connected.

50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (DSPF mode)
Section DSPF
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Setting Default
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan position
adjustment (CCD)
scan position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image loss LEAD_ Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
D SIDE1 FRONT_ Front surface side 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) setting
E TRAIL_ Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 40
(SIDE1) setting
G SIDE2 FRONT_ Back surface side 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) setting
(SIDE2) setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification
ratio (Sub scan)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing

is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
*3: Displayed only when two units of 2-stage LCT are connected.

50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 99
B MAIN-STD Standard correction amount (offcenter direction) 1 - 99 50
C SUB-STD Standard correction amount (Paper feed direction) 1 - 99 55
D MAIN-SFT Print position adjustment 2nd page shift correction amount (Off center direction) 0-3 0
E SUB-SFT Print position adjustment 2nd page shift correction amount (Paper feed direction) 0-3 0
F MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
H MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
I MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
J MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
K MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value (LCC) 1 - 99 50
L MAIN-LCT-MFT Print off center adjustment value (LCT manual feed) 1 - 99 50
M MAIN-LCT1 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 1 series, first stage) 1 - 99 50
N MAIN-LCT2 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 1 series, second stage) 1 - 99 50
O MAIN-LCT3 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 2 series, first stage) 1 - 99 50
P MAIN-LCT4 Print off center adjustment value (LCT 2 series, second stage) 1 - 99 50
Q MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (ADU) 1 - 99 50
R SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual feed (Main machine) 1 - 99 50
S SUB-CS1 timing adjustment Standard tray 1 - 99 50
T SUB-CS2 1 - 99 50
U SUB-CS3 1 - 99 50
V SUB-CS4 1 - 99 50
W SUB-LC LCC /LCT/LCT manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
X SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 48
Y SUB-HV-A Heavy paper1,2 1 - 99 50
Z SUB-HV-B Heavy paper3,4 1 - 99 50
AA SUB-GLOSSY Glossy paper 1 - 99 50
PAPER
AB SUB-EMBOSS Embossed paper 1 - 99 50
AC SUB-OHP OHP 1 - 99 50
AD SUB-ENV Envelope 1 - 99 50
AE SWT ACA-MAIN MAIN correction value update switching OFF 0-1 0 1
ON 1
AF SWT ACA-SUB SUB correction value update switching OFF 0-1 0 1
ON 1
AG SWT MAIN-REAL Real time switching OFF 0-3 0 1
1ST ON 1
BW ON 2
ON 3
AH SWT COR COR correction control switching OFF 0-1 0 1
ON 1
AI MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
AJ PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual feed 1-9 1 3(CS2)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*1) 6
AK DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO Not select 1
AL NORMAL Other cassette paper Normal operation 0-1 0 0(NORMAL)
ALL OTHER feed selection switch Output from all paper feeding ports except for "PAPER" specified 1

*For item A (BK-MAG) adjustment position Paper size in the main scanning direction
Larger than 216 mm,
 ± 120 mm in the main scanning direction from the image center position before printing in the main scanning direction (160 mm from the BD
sensor in the LSU unit)
216 mm or less
 ± 60 mm in the main scanning direction from the image center position before printing in the main scanning direction (160 mm from the BD
sensor in the LSU unit)
Regarding adjustment direction

+ Direction: Expansion direction (about 0.1 mm with respect to adjustment value 1)
- Direction: Reduction direction (about 0.1 mm with respect to adjustment value 1)
* Items F to Q (MAIN - ) adjustment value is decreased by 1, the main scanning printing position moves 0.1 mm to the front side.
* Items F to Q (MAIN - ) adjustment value is increased by 1, the main scanning printing position moves 0.1 mm to the rear side.
* Items R to X (SUB - ) adjustment value is decreased by 1, the sub scanning printing position for each paper feed tray moves 0.1 mm to the
front side.
* Items R to X (SUB - ) adjustment value is increased by 1, the sub scanning position for each paper feed tray moves 0.1 mm to the rear end
side
* Item Y to AD (SUB - ) adjustment value is decreased by 1, the sub scanning position for each paper type moves 0.1 mm to the front side.
* Item Y to AD (SUB - ) adjustment value is increased by 1, the sub scanning position for each paper type moves 0.1 mm to the rear end side.

*3: Displayed when two 2-stage LCTs are installed.
50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
Setting Default
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment

50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Setting Default
range value
A CYAN(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction F side (Cyan laser writing position F side) 1 - 399 200
B CYAN(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction R side (Cyan laser writing position R side) 1 - 399 200
C MAGENTA(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction F side (Magenta laser writing position F side) 1 - 399 200
D MAGENTA(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction R side (Magenta laser writing position R 1 - 399 200
side)
E YELLOW(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction F side (Yellow laser writing position F side) 1 - 399 200
F YELLOW(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction R side (Yellow laser writing position R side) 1 - 399 200
G CYAN(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction CYAN (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
H MAGENTA(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction MAGENTA (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
I YELLOW(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction YELLOW (Black drum reference) 1 - 399 200
J OFFSET_C_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value CYAN (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
F
K OFFSET_C_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value CYAN (REAR) 1 - 99 50
R
L OFFSET_M_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
F
M OFFSET_M_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (REAR) 1 - 99 50
R
N OFFSET_Y_MAIN_F Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
O OFFSET_Y_MAIN_ Registration adjustment value main scan direction offset value MAGENTA (REAR) 1 - 99 50
R
P OFFSET_C_SUB Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value CYAN 1 - 99 50
Q OFFSET_M_SUB Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value MAGENTA 1 - 99 50
R OFFSET_Y_SUB Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value YELLOW 1 - 99 50
S OFFSET_C_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value CYAN (Heavy paper 1/2) 1 - 99 50
V12
T OFFSET_M_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value MAGENTA (Heavy paper 1/2) 1 - 99 50
V12
U OFFSET_Y_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value YELLOW (Heavy paper 1/2) 1 - 99 50
V12
V OFFSET_C_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value CYAN (Heavy paper 3/4) 1 - 99 50
V34
W OFFSET_M_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value MAGENTA (Heavy paper 3/4) 1 - 99 50
V34
X OFFSET_Y_SUB_H Registration adjustment value sub scan direction offset value YELLOW (Heavy paper 3/4) 1 - 99 50
V34
Y MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
Z PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
AA DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Select 0-1 0 1(NO)
NO Not select 1

50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) Remarks
value
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 200 Same item with SIM50-20.
(VALUE) amount main scan direction F * However, the adjustment
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 0 accuracy is in the unit of +/-
from the previous one, main scan F 0.1dot.
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 200
(VALUE) amount main scan direction R
() REG_M_R (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 0
from the previous one, main scan R
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment correction 1.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 200
(VALUE) amount sub scan direction
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction amount -399.0 - 399.0 (+/-0.1) 0
from the previous one, sub scan
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC Skew adjustment rotating direction -99.9 - +99.9 (+/-0.1) 0
and the number of dot (CMY)
ALL_ Skew adjustment rotating direction
ROTATE and the number of dot (K)
START KCMY START_POINT Modulation control start position (1: 0 - 359 0 1step 1°
Current value)
() Modulation control start position (2:
The previous value)
AMP1 KCMY AMP Modulation control amplitude value 1 0.00 - 15.00(±0.25) 0 Adjustment unit:±0.25
(1: Current value)
() Modulation control amplitude value 2
(2: The previous value)
AMP2 KCMY AMP2 Modulation control amplitude value 2 0.00 - 15.00(±0.25) 0 Adjustment unit:±0.25
(2: Current value)
() Modulation control amplitude value 2
PHASE1 KCMY PHASE_ADJ Modulation phase adjustment value 0 - 359 0
(1:Current value)
() Modulation phase adjustment value
PHASE2 KCMY PHASE_ADJ2 Modulation phase adjustment value 0 - 359 0
2 (1:Current value)
() Modulation phase adjustment value
2 (2: The previous value)
PHASE/K CMY PHASE_ADJK Tandem phase adjustment value K 0 - 359 0
(1: Current value)
() Tandem phase adjustment value K
POSITION CMY POSITION Drum phase position value (1: 0 - 359 0
Current value)
() Drum phase position value (2: The
previous value)

Error displays in case of abnormal end
Error code Error display Error content
Error code Error display Error content Sub 47 DATA_SUB_Y_R_all_widt Data not designated
Forcible - SUSPENDED Door open scanning h 47 SUB_Y_R all_width
end error - SUSPENDED CA end adjustment 48 DATA_SUB_Y_R_any_wi Data not designated
- - OFF end error dth 48 SUB_Y_R any_width
Basic error 1 TONNER EMPTY 01 Toner empty 52 DATA_SUB_K_F_all_widt Data not designated
2 BEFORE BEHAVIOR 02 Other conditions h 52 SUB_K_F all_width
4 SENSOR CALIBRATION Caribration error F 53 DATA_SUB_K_F_any_wid Data not designated
F 04 th 53 SUB_K_F any_width
5 SENSOR CALIBRATION Caribration error C Main 50 DATA_MAIN_K_F_all 50 Data not designated
C 05 scanning MAIN_K_F all
6 SENSOR CALIBRATION Caribration error R adjustment 51 DATA_MAIN_K_F_any 51 Data not designated
R 06 error MAIN_K_F any
7 TIME OVER 07 Time error 55 DATA_MAIN_K_R_all 55 Data not designated
8 PROCESS CONTROL 08 Process control error MAIN_K_R all
Sub 10 DATA_SUB_K_F_all 10 Data not designated 56 DATA_MAIN_K_R_any 56 Data not designated
scanning SUB_K_F all MAIN_K_R any
adjustment 11 DATA_SUB_K_F_any 11 Data not designated 57 DATA_MAIN_K_R_all_wid Data not designated
error SUB_K_F any th 57 MAIN_K_R all_width
12 DATA_SUB_K_F_all_widt Data not designated 58 DATA_MAIN_K_R_any_wi Data not designated
h 12 SUB_K_F all_width dth 58 MAIN_K_R any_width
13 DATA_SUB_K_F_any_wid Data not designated 60 DATA_MAIN_C_F_all 60 Data not designated
th 13 SUB_K_F any_width MAIN_C_F all
15 DATA_SUB_K_R_all 15 Data not designated 61 DATA_MAIN_C_F_any 61 Data not designated
SUB_K_R all MAIN_C_F any
16 DATA_SUB_K_R_any 16 Data not designated 62 DATA_MAIN_C_F_all_wid Data not designated
SUB_K_R any th 62 MAIN_C_F all_width
17 DATA_SUB_K_R_all_widt Data not designated 63 DATA_MAIN_C_F_any_wi Data not designated
h 17 SUB_K_R all_width dth 63 MAIN_C_F any_width
18 DATA_SUB_K_R_any_wi Data not designated 65 DATA_MAIN_C_R_all 65 Data not designated
dth 18 SUB_K_R any_width MAIN_C_R all
20 DATA_SUB_C_F_all 20 Data not designated 66 DATA_MAIN_C_R_any 66 Data not designated
SUB_C_F all MAIN_C_R any
21 DATA_SUB_C_F_any 21 Data not designated 67 DATA_MAIN_C_R_all_wid Data not designated
SUB_C_F any th 67 MAIN_C_R all_width
22 DATA_SUB_C_F_all_widt Data not designated 68 DATA_MAIN_C_R_any_wi Data not designated
h 22 SUB_C_F all_width dth 68 MAIN_C_R any_width
23 DATA_SUB_C_F_any_wid Data not designated 70 DATA_MAIN_M_F_all 70 Data not designated
th 23 SUB_C_F any_width MAIN_M_F all
25 DATA_SUB_C_R_all 25 Data not designated 71 DATA_MAIN_M_F_any 71 Data not designated
SUB_C_R all MAIN_M_F any
26 DATA_SUB_C_R_any 26 Data not designated 72 DATA_MAIN_M_F_all_wid Data not designated
SUB_C_R any th 72 MAIN_M_F all_width
27 DATA_SUB_C_R_all_widt Data not designated 73 DATA_MAIN_M_F_any_wi Data not designated
h 27 SUB_C_R all_width dth 73 MAIN_M_F any_width
28 DATA_SUB_C_R_any_wi Data not designated 75 DATA_MAIN_M_R_all 75 Data not designated
dth 28 SUB_C_R any_width MAIN_M_R all
30 DATA_SUB_M_F_all 30 Data not designated 76 DATA_MAIN_M_R_any 76 Data not designated
SUB_M_F all MAIN_M_R any
31 DATA_SUB_M_F_any 31 Data not designated 77 DATA_MAIN_M_R_all_wi Data not designated
SUB_M_F any dth 77 MAIN_M_R all_width
32 DATA_SUB_M_F_all_widt Data not designated 78 DATA_MAIN_M_R_any_w Data not designated
h 32 SUB_M_F all_width idth 78 MAIN_M_R any_width
33 DATA_SUB_M_F_any_wi Data not designated 80 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_all 80 Data not designated
dth 33 SUB_M_F any_width MAIN_Y_F all
35 DATA_SUB_M_R_all 35 Data not designated 81 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_any 81 Data not designated
SUB_M_R all MAIN_Y_F any
36 DATA_SUB_M_R_any 36 Data not designated 82 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_all_wid Data not designated
SUB_M_R any th 82 MAIN_Y_F all_width
37 DATA_SUB_M_R_all_widt Data not designated 83 DATA_MAIN_Y_F_any_wi Data not designated
h 37 SUB_M_R all_width dth 83 MAIN_Y_F any_width
38 DATA_SUB_M_R_any_wi Data not designated 85 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_all 85 Data not designated
dth 38 SUB_M_R any_width MAIN_Y_R all
40 DATA_SUB_Y_F_all 40 Data not designated 86 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_any 86 Data not designated
SUB_Y_F all MAIN_Y_R any
41 DATA_SUB_Y_F_any 41 Data not designated 87 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_all_wid Data not designated
SUB_Y_F any th 87 MAIN_Y_R all_width
42 DATA_SUB_Y_F_all_widt Data not designated 88 DATA_MAIN_Y_R_any_wi Data not designated
h 42 SUB_Y_F all_width dth 88 MAIN_Y_R any_width
43 DATA_SUB_Y_F_any_wid Data not designated Adjustment 90 RANGE_SKEW_K 90 Adjustment range error
th 43 SUB_Y_F any_width range error SKEW_K
45 DATA_SUB_Y_R_all 45 Data not designated 91 RANGE_SUB_C 91 Adjustment range error
SUB_Y_R all SUB_C
46 DATA_SUB_Y_R_any 46 Data not designated 92 RANGE_SKEW_C 92 Adjustment range error
SUB_Y_R any SKEW_C

Error code Error display Error content 50-23
Adjustment 93 RANGE_SUB_M 93 Adjustment range error
range error SUB_M Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
94 RANGE_SKEW_M 94 Adjustment range error market.)
SKEW_M Function (Purpose) Used to set the registration for temperature
95 RANGE_SUB_Y 95 Adjustment range error adjustment.
SUB_Y
Section
96 RANGE_SKEW_Y 96 Adjustment range error
SKEW_Y Operation/Procedure
97 RANGE_MAIN_C_F 97 Adjustment range error 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
MAIN_C_F panel.
99 RANGE_MAIN_C_R 99 Adjustment range error 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MAIN_C_R
101 RANGE_MAIN_M_F 101 Adjustment range error
MAIN_M_F
103 RANGE_MAIN_M_R 103 Adjustment range error 50-24
MAIN_M_R Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
105 RANGE_MAIN_Y_F 105 Adjustment range error market.)
MAIN_Y_F
107 RANGE_MAIN_Y_R 107 Adjustment range error Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
MAIN_Y_R 50-20 and 22.
Skew 109 SKEW_MOTOR_ERROR Skew motor error Section
motor error 109
Operation/Procedure
Encoder 110 ENCODER_K_ERROR Encoder error K
error 110 NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division,
111 ENCODER_C_ERROR Encoder error C and is not necessary for the market.
111
112 ENCODER_M_ERROR Encoder error M
112
113 ENCODER_Y_ERROR Encoder error Y
113
50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
panel.

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm

When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
51 ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
51-1
by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the Item/Display item Content Setting Default
secondary transport voltage. range value
A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage 1 - 99 48
Section ON timing setting
Operation/Procedure B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch OFF timing setting
panel. C FRONT EDGE Secondary transfer front 1 - 99 30
ON TIMING edge bias ON timing
setting
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) D BACKEND OFF Secondary transfer 1 - 99 60
TIMING backend bias OFF timing
setting
51-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the DSPF registration roller.
(This adjustment is performed when there
is a considerable variation in the print
image position on the paper or when paper
jams frequently occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
Content Transport Setting Default

Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A REGI2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 70
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 2 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)

Content Transport Setting Default
Item/Button Display item
(Mode, document, paper feed speed) direction range value
A ENGINE TRAY1 (S) Tray 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Small size) less
B TRAY2 (S) Tray 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
C MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
D MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
(Plain paper/Large size) above
E MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Small size) less
F MANUAL HEAVY A PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper A/Large size) above
G MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper B/Small size) less
H MANUAL HEAVY B PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper B/Large size) above
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 40
J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 40
K MANUAL LABEL Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 40
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
M ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
N ADU HEAVY A PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
O ADU HEAVY A PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
P ADU HEAVY B PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
Q ADU HEAVY B PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
R TRAY3/4(S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
S TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (S) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
T TRAY3/4(L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
U TRAY3/4 HEAVY A PAPER (L) Tray 3, 4/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 40
V TRAY4 OHP Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 40
W TRAY4 LABEL Tray 4/deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 40
X LCC/LCT (S) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
Y LCC/LCT HEAVY A PAPER (S) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
Z LCC/LCT HEAVY B PAPER (S) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
AA LCC/LCT (L) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 20
AB LCC/LCT HEAVY A PAPER (L) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 50
AC LCC/LCT HEAVY B PAPER (L) LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or 1 - 99 60
AD LCT MANUAL OHP LCT, warp adjustment value (OHP) manual feed - 1 - 99 40
adjustment value
AE LCC/LCT LABEL LCC/LCT, deflection adjustment value (Label) - 1 - 99 40
Note on "Large size" and "Small size"

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
* The adjustment unit is a distance of 0.1mm unit.
* The smaller the set value of the warp amount for each of the specified items is, the smaller the warp is. The greater the set value is, the
greater the warp is.
* DSPF REGI1 is the registration amount adjustment in the paper feed side. DSPF REGI2 is the registration amount adjustment at just before
scanning.
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

53-8
53
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
53-6
erence and the DSPF mode document
Purpose Adjustment scan position.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the Section
DSPF document width.
Operation/Procedure
Section Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
Operation/Procedure AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment
1) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. (Auto adjustment)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
The maximum width detection level is recognized. table.
3) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. adjustment value is saved.)
The A4R width detection level is recognized. Setting Default
5) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. range value
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
7) Open the DSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. reference position
MANUAL: DSPF mode document scan position adjustment
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
Setting Default
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value range value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value A ADJUST DSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 10
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
stop position adjustment)
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the DSPF mode is shifted to the right.
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
53-7
shifted by 0.1mm.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF document size
width sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 66
B AD_P1 Intermediate position (L) 0 - 1023 438
C AD_P2 Intermediate position (S) 0 - 1023 699
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 893

53-9
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection setting
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display item, Details of display Content
range value
A SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_START OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0-1 0 0
ON setting (when starting) ON 1 (OFF)
B SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB OFF DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0-1 0 1
ON setting (After a job) ON 1 (ON)
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV WEAK DSPF front surface optimum scan position detection level Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE setting Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
D OC_DIRT_LV WEAK OC dirt level setting Low 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
E SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
STRONG High 2
F SIDEB_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK DSPF back surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0-2 0 1
STRONG High 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF front surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
H SIDEB_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF DSPF back surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
I SIDEB_EXT_SHADING_SET SPF back surface extended shading setting Default 0-4 0 0
Both 1
OFF
Both ON 2
ON at 3
startup /
OFF
after
JOB
OFF at 4
startup /
ON after
JOB
53-10
55
Function (Purpose) DSPF dirt detection execution.
55-1
Section
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Operation/Procedure required.)
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
control operations. (SOFT SW)
Item Content
OC Forcible execution of OC/DSPF SIDE A and the result Section
display are made. Operation/Procedure
DSPF Forcible execution of DSPF SIDE B and the result display
are made.
55-2
required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

55-3
56
required.)
56-1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW) Purpose Backup
Section Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
Operation/Procedure
PWB.)
Section
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
only) Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Section
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. EEPROM - HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key. HDD - EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 56-2
range value
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1 Purpose Data backup
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank:
20H]
HDD (including user authentication data
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit and address data) to the USB memory.
65 - 90
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit (Corresponding to the device cloning and
[Alphabet:
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right edge) the storage backup.)
41H("A") -
5AH("Z")] Section
48 - 57
[Numeral: Operation/Procedure
30H("0") - 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
39H("9")] 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
input
<IMPORT>
C 1
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, HDD
M 2
Y 3 <EXPORT>
R 4 From EEPROM, HDD To USB MEMORY
G 5 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
B 6 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging type 0 1 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
1 com-
PATTERN posing OR process 1
2 method type (Machine with the DSK installed)
PATTERN No-delete- 2 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
3 compo- 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
sition type
<IMPORT>
Input value From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, HDD
Print Blank A B C D E F
<EXPORT>
Input value 32 65 66 67 68 69 70
From EEPROM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
Print G H I J K L M 4) Press [SET] key.
Input value 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Print N O P Q R S T
Input value 78 79 80 81 82 83 84
Print U V W X Y Z 0
Input value 85 86 87 88 89 90 48
Print 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input value 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Print 8 9
Input value 56 57

56-3 56-7
Purpose Data backup Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to Function (Purpose) Used to import the syslog data to a USB
the USB memory. flash drive.
Section Section
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
<IMPORT> 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE 56-8
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Function (Purpose) Used to import the ICC profile data to a
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is USB flash drive.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
56-4
2) Select the ICC profile data to be imported.
Purpose Data backup
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
USB memory.
Section 56-15
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Backup
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Function (Purpose) MFP EEPROM data restore
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
1) Confirm that new EEPROM attached on the PWB
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and, press [YES] key.
displayed. in case of an abnormal end "ERROR" is displayed.
56-5
56-99
Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
memory in the TEXT format.
Function (Purpose) Used to import the log data to a USB flash
Section
drive.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
1) Insert the USB flash drive into the main unit.
2) Select the log item data to be imported.
Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. Item Contents
SIM56-5 Import SIM56-5 data.
SIM56-6 Import SIM56-6 data.
56-6 SIM00-11 Import SIM00-11 data.
SIM56-4 Import SIM56-4 job log data.
SIM56-7 Import SIM56-7 system log data.
Function (Purpose) Used to output the JAM/trouble data. SIM56-2 Perform simplified output of SIM56-2.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Select the output target item with the touch panel key.
4) Press [YES] key.

60 61
60-1 61-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
(read/write) of the MFP PWB. tion and laser detection.
Section Section LSU
Start the test. When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Result display Description
OK Success Display Content
NG Fail LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble) LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
INVALID Execution disable LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
SLOT Description
ICUM SLOT1 ICU standard 1 SLOT1
ICUM SLOT2 ICU standard 2 SLOT2
ICU1 SLOT1 ICU1 standard DIMM1
ICU1 SLOT2 ICU1 expansion DIMM2
ICU2 SLOT1 ICU2 standard DIMM3
ACRE SLOT ACRE ACRE
61-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [PR600/
FAX(FIERY)], [PR1200(FIERY)] on the touch panel.
panel.
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Default value
Setting
Category Item/Display Content 70 CPM 80 CPM
range
machine machine
PR600 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 141 155
(Fiery) B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 141 155
C LASER POWER MIDDLE(M) Laser power setting middle speed/M 0 - 255 141 155
D LASER POWER MIDDLE(Y) Laser power setting middle speed/Y 0 - 255 141 155
E LASER POWER LOW1(K) Laser power setting low speed 1/K 0 - 255 84 84
F LASER POWER LOW1(C) Laser power setting low speed 1/C 0 - 255 84 84
G LASER POWER LOW1(M) Laser power setting low speed 1/M 0 - 255 84 84
H LASER POWER LOW1(Y) Laser power setting low speed 1/Y 0 - 255 84 84
I LASER POWER LOW2(K) Laser power setting low speed 2/K 0 - 255 130 130
J LASER POWER LOW2(C) Laser power setting low speed 2/C 0 - 255 130 130
K LASER POWER LOW2(M) Laser power setting low speed 2/M 0 - 255 130 130
L LASER POWER LOW2(Y) Laser power setting low speed 2/Y 0 - 255 130 130
M LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 141 155
N LASER POWER LOW1(BW) Laser power setting low speed 1/BW 0 - 255 84 84
O LASER POWER LOW2(BW) Laser power setting low speed 2/BW 0 - 255 130 130
P LASER DUTY MIDDLE(K) Laser DUTY select middle speed/K 0 - 255 0 0
Q LASER DUTY MIDDLE(C) Laser DUTY select middle speed/C 0 - 255 0 0
R LASER DUTY MIDDLE(M) Laser DUTY select middle speed/M 0 - 255 0 0
S LASER DUTY MIDDLE(Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed/Y 0 - 255 0 0
T LASER DUTY LOW1(K) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/K 0 - 255 0 0
U LASER DUTY LOW1(C) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/C 0 - 255 0 0
V LASER DUTY LOW1(M) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/M 0 - 255 0 0
W LASER DUTY LOW1(Y) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/Y 0 - 255 0 0

Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
PR600 X LASER DUTY LOW2(K) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/K 0 - 255 0 0
(Fiery) Y LASER DUTY LOW2(C) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/C 0 - 255 0 0
Z LASER DUTY LOW2(M) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/M 0 - 255 0 0
AA LASER DUTY LOW2(Y) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AB LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AC LASER DUTY LOW1(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AD LASER DUTY LOW2(BW) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AE LASER DUTY MIDDLE(K 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /K 0 - 255 0 0
AF LASER DUTY MIDDLE(C 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /C 0 - 255 0 0
AG LASER DUTY MIDDLE(M 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /M 0 - 255 0 0
AH LASER DUTY MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) Laser Duty select middle speed /Y 0 - 255 0 0
AI LASER DUTY LOW1(K 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /K 0 - 255 0 0
AJ LASER DUTY LOW1(C 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /C 0 - 255 0 0
AK LASER DUTY LOW1(M 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /M 0 - 255 0 0
AL LASER DUTY LOW1(Y 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low1 speed /Y 0 - 255 0 0
AM LASER DUTY LOW2(K 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /K 0 - 255 0 0
AN LASER DUTY LOW2(C 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /C 0 - 255 0 0
AO LASER DUTY LOW2(M 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /M 0 - 255 0 0
AP LASER DUTY LOW2(Y 1BIT) Laser Duty select Low2 speed /Y 0 - 255 0 0
AQ LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) Laser power setting correction value Y1 0 - 255 0 0
AR LASER DUTY LOW1(BW 1BIT) Laser power setting correction value Y2 0 - 255 0 0
AS LASER DUTY LOW2(BW 1BIT) Laser power setting correction value Y3 0 - 255 0 0
(Fiery) B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 141 155
X LASER DUTY LOW2(K) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/K 0 - 255 0 0
Y LASER DUTY LOW2(C) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/C 0 - 255 0 0

61-3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY600],
[COPY1200], [PR600/FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
panel.
When the laser power are increased, the print density is
increased and the line width of line images are increased.
Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
COPY600 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 141 155
B LASER POWER MIDDLE(C) Laser power setting middle speed/C 0 - 255 141 155
J LASER POWER LOW2(C) Laser power setting low speed 2/ 0 - 255 130 130
AE LASER POWER K1 Laser power setting correction value K1 0 - 255 100 100
AF LASER POWER K2 Laser power setting correction value K2 0 - 255 100 100
AG LASER POWER K3 Laser power setting correction value K3 0 - 255 100 100
AH LASER POWER K4 Laser power setting correction value K4 0 - 255 100 100
AI LASER POWER C1 Laser power setting correction value C1 0 - 255 100 100
AJ LASER POWER C2 Laser power setting correction value C2 0 - 255 100 100
AK LASER POWER C3 Laser power setting correction value C3 0 - 255 100 100
AL LASER POWER C4 Laser power setting correction value C4 0 - 255 100 100
AM LASER POWER M1 Laser power setting correction value M1 0 - 255 100 100
AN LASER POWER M2 Laser power setting correction value M2 0 - 255 100 100
AO LASER POWER M3 Laser power setting correction value M3 0 - 255 100 100
AP LASER POWER M4 Laser power setting correction value M4 0 - 255 100 100
AQ LASER POWER Y1 Laser power setting correction value Y1 0 - 255 100 100
AR LASER POWER Y2 Laser power setting correction value Y2 0 - 255 100 100
AS LASER POWER Y3 Laser power setting correction value Y3 0 - 255 100 100
AT LASER POWER Y4 Laser power setting correction value Y4 0 - 255 100 100
COPY1200 A LASER POWER MIDDLE(BW) Laser power setting middle speed/BW 0 - 255 141 155
B LASER POWER LOW1(BW) Laser power setting low speed1/BW 0 - 255 84 84
C LASER POWER LOW2(BW) Laser power setting low speed2/BW 0 - 255 130 130
D LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser duty select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
E LASER DUTY LOW1(BW) Laser duty select speed1/BW 0 - 255 0 0
F LASER DUTY LOW2(BW) Laser duty select low speed2/BW 0 - 255 0 0

Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER MIDDLE(K) Laser power setting middle speed/K 0 - 255 141 155
J LASER POWER LOW2(C) Laser power setting low speed 2/ 0 - 255 130 130
AE LASER DUTY MIDDLE(K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/K 0 - 255 0 0
AF LASER DUTY MIDDLE(C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/C 0 - 255 0 0
AG LASER DUTY MIDDLE(M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/M 0 - 255 0 0
AH LASER DUTY MIDDLE(Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AI LASER DUTY LOW1(K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/K 0 - 255 0 0
AJ LASER DUTY LOW1(C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/C 0 - 255 0 0
AK LASER DUTY LOW1(M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/M 0 - 255 0 0
AL LASER DUTY LOW1(Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AM LASER DUTY LOW2(K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/K 0 - 255 0 0
AN LASER DUTY LOW2(C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/C 0 - 255 0 0
AO LASER DUTY LOW2(M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/M 0 - 255 0 0
AP LASER DUTY LOW2(Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/Y 0 - 255 0 0
AQ LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AR LASER DUTY LOW1(BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 1/BW 0 - 255 0 0
AS LASER DUTY LOW2(BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/BW 0 - 255 0 0

Default value
Setting
range
machine machine
PR1200 Y LASER DUTY LOW2(C) Laser DUTY select low speed 2/C 0 - 255 0 0
3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.

61-4
4) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table
Purpose Adjustment (A4R direction), and press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust- The adjustment result pattern is outputted.
ment pattern. (LSU unit)
5) IF correction is still required, press [RETRY] key.
Section When [DATA] is pressed:
Operation/Procedure The display is shifted to the auto adjustment result display screen.
1) Select a target item with scroll key on the touch panel.
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 61-12
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. Purpose Adjustment
When select "SKEW CHK" key: Function (Purpose) Laser power manual correction
Start skew motor's operation check, if it is working normally, display
Section LSU
"OK",else, "NG".
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default Press an item button to be adjusted.
range value When [MEASURING INSTRUMENT] is pressed:
A K_SKEW Skew Motor Adjustment K 1 - 50(dot) 25
1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
B C_SKEW Skew Motor Adjustment C 1 - 50(dot) 25
C M_SKEW Skew Motor Adjustment M 1 - 50(dot) 25 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
D Y_SKEW Skew Motor Adjustment Y 1 - 50(dot) 25 3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
E OFFSET_SKEW Skew Offset value K 1 - 50(dot) 25 4) Enter the adjustment value of 5points by the density meter.
_K
F OFFSET_SKEW Skew Offset value C 1 - 50(dot) 25
_C Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
G OFFSET_SKEW Skew Offset value M 1 - 50(dot) 25 adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
_M played.
H OFFSET_SKEW Skew Offset value Y 1 - 50(dot) 25 6) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key.
_Y When [VISUAL INSPECTION] is pressed:
I SKEW_OFFSET Print skew offset value 1 - 1999 1000
1) Select the adjustment density pattern.
adjustment
J MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
K PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-5 1 4(CS3) 3) The adjustment pattern is printed out.
selection paper feed 4) Press [5POINT CORRECTION] or [32POINT CORRECTION].
CS1 Tray 1 2
5) Enter an adjustment value.
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4 6) Press [EXECUTE] key.
CS4 Tray 4 5 Execute the manual correction of the laser power. Then the
adjustment result pattern is outputted and the data are dis-
played.
7) To perform the correction again, press [RETRY] key.
61-11
When [DATA] is pressed:
Purpose Adjustment The display is shifted to the manual adjustment result display
Function (Purpose) Used to correct the laser power automati- screen.
cally.
Items Contents Outline
Section LSU
MEASURING Density meter correction * Adjustment with the
Operation/Procedure INSTRUMENT density meter.
Select a target item on the touch panel key. VISUAL Visual check adjustment Adjustment by visual
INSPECTION check
Items Contents Outline DATA Data display screen Data display during
AUTO Automatic correction Adjustment by scanner execution of the manual
CORRECTION correction
DATA Data display screen Data display when
executing the automatic *: Since a special tool is required for measurement, this simulation
correction is executed only in the factory.
When [AUTO CORRECTION] is pressed:

1) Select a density to be corrected.

61-13 62-2
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the laser power correction Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
value. (partial).
Section LSU Section
2) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Laser power auto correction value (K-Y) 32 points and laser
power manual correction value (K-Y) 32 points are return back
to the default value. 62-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
61-14
(all areas).
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power at once. Operation/Procedure
Section LSU 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [YES] key.
This Sim mode allows change of laser power settings easily, and all Read/write operations are performed.
at once. However, this change will not change the initial value of
SIM 61-3 (Laser power settings).
The laser power set in this Sim mode will be: 62-6
Initial value of Sim 61-3 x Initial value of Sim 61-14 (%)
1) Press a target item.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
Item Setting range Default hard disk.
K/BW -2 Fine (80%) 0 Section
-1 Slight fine (90%) Operation/Procedure
0 Normal (100%)
1) Select the self diag area.
1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%)
C -2 Fine (80%) 0 The self diag operation is performed.
-1 Slight fine (90%) NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD,
0 Normal (100%) use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
1 Slight thick (110%)
2 Thick (120%) SHORT S.T Partial area diag
M -2 Fine (80%) 0 EXTENDED S.T All area diag
-1 Slight fine (90%)
0 Normal (100%) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
1 Slight thick (110%) normal display.
2 Thick (120%) Normal completion - "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.
Y -2 Fine (80%) 0 Abnormal end - "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
-1 Slight fine (90%) * If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
0 Normal (100%) some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
1 Slight thick (110%) tion.
2 Thick (120%)
62-7
62 Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log.
62-1 Section
Purpose Data clear Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the HDD format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.

62-8 62-13
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk.
Section Section
2) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format. The operation manual data are deleted.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display. normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
NG" is displayed. 62-14
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing manage-
62-10
ment data.
Purpose Data clear
Section HDD
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data. Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [YES] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. The document filing management data are cleared.
2) Press [YES] key. At the same time, the job log data are also cleared.
Used to delete the job log data. This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the * The document filing function does not work normally.
normal display.
* The job log is not recorded normally.
NOTE:
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions.
62-11
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver-
Purpose Data clear sion.
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Operation test/check
2) Press [YES] key. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the mirror-
Used to delete the document filing data. ing hard disk.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the Section Mirroring hard disk
normal display. Operation/Procedure
Enter the simulation mode, and the operation status of the HDD is
displayed.
62-12 The status display is renewed in every second.
Purpose Setting
Display Content description
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
OK Normal operation
in a hard disk trouble.
NONE Not connected
Section REBUILDING Data rebuilding
Operation/Procedure ERROR Error occurrence
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. TROUBLE Trouble
2) Press [OK] key.

The set value is saved.
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
data storage area is cleared.
Item Content Default value

A 0 Enable 1
1 Disable

Display
63 Button
item
Description Remarks
OC DSPF First scan DSPF

FACE front surface white
63-1 WHITE reference level
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check LEVEL 1ST
DSPF Second scan DSPF
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
FACE front surface white
result.
WHITE reference level
Section Scanner LEVEL 2ND
Operation/Procedure DSPF ANALOG Analog gain
GAIN ODD adjustment value
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
(odd number)
panel.
ANALOG Analog gain
GAIN adjustment value
Display
Button Description Remarks EVEN (even number)
item
DIGITAL Digital gain
OC ANALOG Analog gain
(odd number)
(odd number)
ANALOG Analog gain
EVEN (even number)
EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average
value (odd number)
(odd number)
EVEN sampling average
value (even number)
EVEN (even number)
TARGET Target value
VALUE
ODD sampling average
BLACK Black output level
value (odd number)
LEVEL
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
EVEN sampling average
CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop
value (even number)
number over
TARGET Target value
VALUE 2: STAGE2. The
target value is less
BLACK Black output level
than the specified
LEVEL
level.
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
3: STAGE3. The gain
CODE 1: STAGE1. Loop
set value is
number over
negative.
2: STAGE2. The
4: END is not
target value is less
asserted. (Gain
than the specified
adjustment)
level.
5: STAGE2 Retry Max
3: STAGE3. The gain
6: STAGE2.
set value is
Underflow
negative.
7: Black shading error
4: END is not
asserted. (Gain 8: Other error
adjustment) 9: END is not
5: STAGE2 Retry Max asserted. (White
shading)
6: STAGE2.
Underflow 10: END is not
asserted. (Black
7: Black shading error
shading)
8: Other error
11: END is not
9: END is not
asserted. (Light
asserted. (White
quantity correction)
shading)
12: END is not
10: END is not
asserted. (Scan)
asserted. (Black
13: Register check
shading)
error (When
11: END is not
starting/Gain)
asserted. (Light
14: Register check
error (Before light
12: END is not
asserted. (Scan)
DSPF First scan DSPF
13: Register check
BACK back surface white
error (When
starting/Gain)
LEVEL 1ST
14: Register check
DSPF Second scan DSPF
error (Before light
BACK back surface white
LEVEL 2ND

63-2 63-5
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading. Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
Section balance and gamma default setting.
1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and Operation/Procedure
press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
Used to perform shading. 2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the default.
normal display.
63-7
63-3 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Purpose Adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal- copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
ance and gamma auto adjustment. Section
Section Scanner Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
1) Place the chart on the reference position of the left rear frame 2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
side of the document table. For the DSPF mode, put the chart SIM46-21 on the document table.
backside up on the DSPF tray. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key. The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4) Press [OK] key.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per- The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
formed. adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the scanned adjustment pattern sheet.
normal display. The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key. NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the copy color bal-
ance is manually adjusted.
B Point B target value

63-4 C Point C target value
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check D Point D target value
E Point E target value
Function (Purpose) Used to display the chart patch density.
F Point F target value
Section G Point G target value
Operation/Procedure H Point H target value
1) Place the chart on the reference position of the left rear frame I Point I target value
side of the document table. For the DSPF mode, put the chart J Point J target value
backside up on the DSPF tray. K Point K target value
L Point L target value
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
M Point M target value
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. N Point N target value
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned. O Point O target value
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to P Point P target value
the normal display. BASE Background sampling value
4) Select a data display mode.
GAMMA THROUGH Chart scan data

COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the chart scan 63-8
data Purpose Adjustment/Setup
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
chart scan data
of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
SIT CHECK Chart scan data/Check result
ment.
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys. Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.

Operation/Procedure
63-11
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Default
value
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this DEF 1
color target is selected, the color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode and print
balance is made.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color
balance. When this target is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and
print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is
selected, the color balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color table in an actual copy mode and
print is made.
64
64-1
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, Specification of the print pattern 1 - 68 1
22, 29) (* For details, refer to the below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19,
21, 22, 29)
B DOT1 Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1 - 255 1
(DOT1>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
except above: 1 - 255)
C DOT2 Space dot number setting (N parameter) 0 - 255 236
(DOT2>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2 - 255
D DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 255
(FIXED "255" IF A:9) (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17 - 19: 2 - 8 2 (STANDARD
(*1) PHOTO except above: 1 - 8) DITHER)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photo 5
PRIINTED PHOTO Printed photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-9 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*2) 6
LCT1_1 LCT tray 1 (*3) 6
LCT2_1 LCT2 tray1 (*4) 8

H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Plain paper 1-9 1 1
PLAIN2 Plain paper 2 2 (PLAIN1)
HEAVY Heavy paper 3
OHP OHP 4
ENVELOPE Envelope 5
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 6
GROSSY Glossy paper 7
*1 Displayed by the value of the item A is switched.

Item A: 17 to 19 (2 to 8 IF A = 17 to 19) Other than above (1 to 8)
*4: Displayed only when two LCTs are installed.
Print pattern of Item A
Pattern Color select M parameter N parameter

Gradatio Exposure
NO./Content Pattern size generating When Enable/ Default Enable/ Default
Condition n select select
section none Disable value Disable value
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC  K only  ×  1  236
• When the print width is 100 or above and all colors are selected, printing is made in the three colors of
CMY.
• Printing is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
• For the first writing, LD1 is fixed regardless of void.
2 Dot print All surface  K only  ×  2  2
9 Each color Fixed range × -  ×  10  1
10% area (4 colors
(A4/4R) fixed)
density print • Each interval is 41.86mm (989dots).
• When m is out of the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
• K printing is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt Fixed range × -  × × 1 × 1
print (4 colors
fixed)
11 4-color dot All surface × -  ×  2  2
print (sub (each color (4 colors
scan) 1/4) fixed)
• Each color is printed in 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
• At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
17 All All surface Halftone  K only   × 1 × 1
background (IMG-ASIC (Up to 3
(halftone) rear colors)
process) • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 Fixed range  K only ×  × 1 × 1
gradations (Up to 3
pattern colors)
(Other • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
dither) • 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations are printed in the next
line. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 Fixed range  K only ×  × 1 × 1
gradations (Up to 3
pattern colors)
(Dither for Same as above.
text)
21 4-point dot All color LSU-ASIC × -  ×  2  2
print (main (each color (4 colors
scan) 1/4) fixed)
• Each color is printed in 1/4 of the main scan paper size.
• At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
22 Slant line All surface LSU-ASIC  K only  ×  1  254
29 Dot print All surface LSU-ASIC  K only  ×  1  3
1200dpi

64-2
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-1 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29, 33 - 35) (* For details, refer to the below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19,
21, 22, 29, 33 - 35)
B DOT1 Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-1 1
(DOT1>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11, : 2 - 255
C DOT2 Space dot number setting (N parameter) 0-0 236
(DOT2>=2 IF A: 2, 11) (Self print pattern: For m by n) (Pattern 2, 11, : 2 - 255
D DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1-1 255
(FIXED "255" IF A:9) (Pattern 9: 255 Fixed
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1-1 1
F EXPOSURE NONE Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A:17 - 19) TEXT/PRINTED specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17 - 19: 2 - 8 2 (STANDARD
(*1) PHOTO except above: 1 - 8) DITHER)
TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photo 3
TEXT Text 4
PHOTO Photo 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-9 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*2) 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Plain paper 1-9 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 3
OHP OHP 4
ENVELOPE Envelope 5
GROSSY Glossy paper 7
*1 Displayed by the value of the item A is switched.

Item A: 17 to 19 (2 to 8 IF A = 17 to 19) Other than above (1 to 8)

M N
Pattern
Pattern Gradation Exposure parameter parameter
NO./Content generating
size select select Enable/ Enable/
section Default value Default value
Disable Disable
1 Grid pattern All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  236
• When the print width is 100 or above and all colors are selected, printing is made in the three colors
of CMY.
• For the first writing, LD1 is fixed regardless of void.
2 Dot print All surface  ×  2  2
9 Each color 10% Fixed  ×  10  1
area (A4/4R) range • Each interval is 41.86mm (989dots).
density print • When m is out of the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
• K printing is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print Fixed  × × 1 × 1
range
11 4-color dot print All surface    2  2
(sub scan) (each • Each color is printed in 1/4 of the sub scan paper size.
color 1/4) • At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
17 All background All surface Halftone   × 1 × 1
(halftone) (IMG-ASIC rear • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations Fixed process) ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Other range • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
dither) • 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations are printed in
the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations Fixed ×  × 1 × 1
pattern (Dither range Same as above.
for text)
21 4-point dot print All color LSU-ASIC  ×  2  2
(main scan) (each • Each color is printed in 1/4 of the main scan paper size.
color 1/4) • At N=0, 4 colors are printed in all the surface.
22 Slant line All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  254
29 Dot print All surface LSU-ASIC  ×  1  3
1200dpi
33 All background Fixed Halftone (IMG- ×  × 1 × 1
(halftone) range ASIC rear • 1200 dpi dither (1200 dpi version of PN 17)
1200dpi process)
34 256 gradations ×  × 1 × 1
pattern 1200dpi • 1200 dpi dither (1200 dpi version of PN 18)
35 256 gradation ×  × 1 × 1
patterns (Dither • 1200 dpi dither for text (1200 dpi version of PN 19)
for text) 1200dpi

64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*2) 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY 600DPI Image quality setting Standard 0 1
600DPI(HIGH QUALITY) High quality 1 600DPI(HIGH
1200DPI Fine 2 QUALIYT)
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN1 Paper type Plain paper 0 0
GLOSSY Glossy paper 2
HEAVY1 Heavy paper 3

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
4 Halftone pattern (COLOR)
5 Halftone pattern (B/W)
6 Background dot print


64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 128
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*2) 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
600DPI(HIGH High quality 1 600DPI(HIGH
QUALITY) QUALITY)
1200DPI Fine 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1
PLAIN2 Plain paper 2 1 (PLAIN)
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Presentation 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE For TONER SAVE 6
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Pure black print set. 0 0
OFF not set. 1 (ON)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)
Print pattern of Item A *2: Displayed only when A4/A3 LCC is connected.
Pattern No. Content *3: Displayed only when 2-stage LCT is installed.
1 COLOR *4: Displayed only when two LCTs are installed.
2 B/W
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W
4 Service chart (COLOR)
5 Service chart (B/W)

64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Set the print conditions. The test print (self print) is performed.
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 128
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC (*2) 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 2
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 2
600DPI(HIGH QUALITY) High quality 1 600DPI(HIGH
1200DPI Fine 2 QUALITY)
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1 (CALIB)
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Presentation 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Pure Black set. 0 0
OFF not set. 1 (ON)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)
O CMY INK SIMULATION OFF CMYK simulation OFF 0 0
SWOP SWOP 1 (OFF)
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3
Print pattern of Item A *2: Displayed only when A4/A3 LCC is connected.
Pattern No. Content *3: Displayed only when 2-stage LCT is installed.
1 COLOR *4: Displayed only when two LCTs are installed.
2 B/W

If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
65 is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
<Check target key>
65-1
Purpose Adjustment 15.4 Inch LCD model
HOME
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
FIERY
play section) detection coordinates.
Section Operation panel section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen. 66
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu. 66-1
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the
soft SW while checking with the LCD.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is
cleared.
2) Press [DATA] key.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
* When [SW NO] key is pressed, the display returns to the ini-
tial screen.
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
10-key.
* [1] - [0]
65-2
[0] - [1]
Purpose Operation check/test 4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set-
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis- ting is saved.
play section) detection coordinates. After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
Section display.
Operation/Procedure
Touch the touch panel.
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of 66-2
the touched position is displayed in real time. Purpose Setting

Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
default value for the country code.
;<

Section FAX

Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
screen is displayed.

* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed, the display is shifted to

the country code list screen.

* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of

"PRESENT:".
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The

entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
[SET] key becomes active.
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of "NEW:" is cleared.
65-5 3) When [SET] key is pressed after entering the country code,
[EXECUTE] key becomes active. The country code is dis-
Purpose Operation check/test
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key "NEW:" is cleared.
input.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and [YES]
Section and [NO] keys become active. The country name is displayed
Operation/Procedure on the tile line.
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on 5) When [YES] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW
the screen. corresponding to the country code is initialized.
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],
[YES], and [NO] keys become inactive.

Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page)
66-29
* When [DEST CODE] key is pressed on the initial screen, the dis-
play is shifted to the country code list screen. Purpose Clear
Use scroll keys to select the country select page. Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data
(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/
<Country code list> Desktop expansion table, the group expan-
JAPAN 00000000 sion table, the program registration table,
U.S.A. 10110101 the interface memory box table, the meta
AUSTRALIA 00001001 data, InboundRouting, and the Document
U.K. 10110100 Admin table).
FRANCE 00111101 Section FAX
GERMANY 00000100
Operation/Procedure
SWEDEN 10100101
NEWZEALAND 01111110
CHINA 00100110 2) Press [YES] key.
SINGAPORE 10011100 The telephone book data area cleared.
TW 11111110 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] key returns to
MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101 the normal display and [YES] and [NO] keys gray out.
SLOVAKIA 11111100
OTHER3 11111011
FINLAND 00111100
NORWAY 10000010
66-61
DENMARK 00110001 Purpose Setting
NETHERLANDS 01111011 Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW
ITALY 01011001 (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing
SWITZERLAND 10100110 the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
AUSTRIA 00001010
Section FAX
INDONESIA 01010100
THAILAND 10101001 Operation/Procedure
MALAYSIA 01101100 1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
INDIA 01010011 2) Press [DATA] key.
PHILIPPINES 10001001 The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
HONGKONG 01010000
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
RUSSIA 10111000
10-key.
SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
SPAIN 10100000 * [1] - [0]
PORTUGUESE 10001011 [0] - [1]
LUXEMBURG 01101001 4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the set-
BELGIUM 00001111 ting is saved.
CZECH 00101110
HUNGARY 01010001
GREECE 01000110
POLAND 10001010
BRAZIL 00010110 67
KOREA 01100001
VIETNAM 10111100 67-17
Purpose Reset
Function (Purpose) Printer reset
66-10 Section Printer
Purpose Data clear Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
image data. (The confidential data are also 2) Press [YES] key.
cleared.) The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
Section FAX NIC setting.)
Operation/Procedure When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
2) Press [YES] key.
3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
machine.

67-21
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Print output manual adjustment
Section
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: After adjustment by SIM46-74, a further adjustment when
you want to change the color with an emphasis on gray bal-
ance.
1) Select [COPY(GRAY)] or [PRINTER(GRAY)] key.
3) For each of the two test patterns, search for a target neutral
gray patch.
4) Enter the coordinate number of the selected patch.
Of the two test patterns, input the X and Y coordinates of the
selected patch with the thinner pattern to A and B, and the X
and Y coordinates of the selected patch with the darker pattern
to C and D.
[Please quit this mode] is displayed, exit SIM67-21.
2) Two test patterns are output and it is automatically transferred

to the setting value input screen.
NOTE: When SIM 46-74 is executed, the adjustment values are

cleared.

67-24 67-26
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
adjustment) printer mode auto color balance adjust-
Section Printer ment.
Operation/Procedure Section Printer
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
Default
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. Item/Display Content
value
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in DEF 1
The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and value the automatic color balance operation is
the adjustment result is printed. table slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is
select selected, the color balance is converted into
4) Press [OK] key. natural gray color balance by the color table in
The halftone correction target registration is processed. an actual printer mode and print is made.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in
the automatic color balance operation is
slightly shifted to natural gray color balance.
67-25 When this target is selected, the color balance
Purpose Adjustment/Setup is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in
an actual copy mode and print is made.
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in
adjustment)
the automatic color balance operation is
Section Printer slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is
Operation/Procedure selected, the color balance is converted into
the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the color table in an actual copy mode and print is
touch panel. made.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
touch panel.
67-27
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is mode auto color balance adjustment.
increased, and vice versa. Section Printer
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in Operation/Procedure
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment 1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
value.
2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet
printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table.
Item/Display Setting range Default value
A POINT1 1 - 999 500 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
B POINT2 1 - 999 500 The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
C POINT3 1 - 999 500 4) Press [OK] key.
D POINT4 1 - 999 500
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
E POINT5 1 - 999 500
adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern
F POINT6 1 - 999 500
sheet patch images.
G POINT7 1 - 999 500
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
H POINT8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 1 - 999 500 Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
J POINT10 1 - 999 500 NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color bal-
K POINT11 1 - 999 500 ance is manually adjusted.
L POINT12 1 - 999 500
M POINT13 1 - 999 500 B Point B target value
N POINT14 1 - 999 500 C Point C target value
O POINT15 1 - 999 500 D Point D target value
P POINT16 1 - 999 500 E Point E target value
Q POINT17 1 - 999 500 F Point F target value
G Point G target value
H Point H target value
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
P Point P target value
BASE Background sampling value

67-28 Display Content Key
Purpose Adjustment/Setup HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper CMYK
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo CMYK
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
SCREEN2 600dpi 1bit Graphics CMYK
of the printer mode auto color balance
SCREEN3 600dpi 4bit Photo CMYK
adjustment.
SCREEN4 600dpi 4bit Graphics CMYK
Section Printer SCREEN5 1200dpi 1bit Photo CMYK
Operation/Procedure SCREEN6 1200dpi 1bit Graphics CMYK
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. SCREEN7 B/W 600 dpi 1bit Photo K
SCREEN8 B/W 600 dpi 4bit Photo K
2) Press [YES] key.
SCREEN9 B/W 1200dpi 1bit Photo K
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance SCREEN11 B/W 600 dpi 1bit Graphics K
adjustment is set to the default. SCREEN12 B/W 600 dpi 4bit Graphics K
The service color balance target and the color balance target SCREEN13 B/W 1200dpi 1bit Graphics K
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color SCREEN14 DotScreen1 CMYK
balance as the factory color balance target. SCREEN15 DotScreen2 CMYK
SCREEN16 DotScreen1_BW K
SCREEN17 DotScreen2_BW K
67-31 SCREEN18 SHIGH CMYK
SCREEN19 1200dpi SHIGH CMYK
Purpose Data clear
SCREEN20 600dpi SuperLow CMYK
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value. SCREEN21 1200dpi SuperLow CMYK
Section Printer SCREEN22 ExtraHigh CMYK
Operation/Procedure * When only the K data are displayed, [C], [M], and [Y] keys are
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. grayed out, disabling the key operations.
2) Press [YES] key. * When "600dpi 1bit SCREEN" is displayed, [EXECUTE] key is
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are grayed out, disabling the key operations.
cleared.
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
67-34
67-33
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
Purpose Adjustment/Setup printer high density section. (Support for
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer the high density section tone gap)
screen. Section Printer
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
touch panel. 0 Enable
1 Disable
2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Setting Default
5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Display Content
range value
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in A CMY(0:ENABL 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment E 1:DISABLE) density correction
value. mode: Enable
1 CMY engine highest
Setting Default density correction
range value mode: Disable
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128 B K(0:ENABLE 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128 1:DISABLE) density correction
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128 mode: Enable
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128 1 K engine highest
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128 density correction
mode: Disable
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
TARGET CYAN maximum density
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
correction
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128 correction
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128 E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128 TARGET YELLOW maximum density
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128 correction
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128 F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128 TARGET BLACK maximum density
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128 correction
G PRINTER Printer total amount 0-3 0
TOTAL TONER regulation setting value
LIMIT SETUP

Setting Default 67-42
Display Content
range value
H RATIO LOW High concentration correction 0 - 100 33 Purpose Adjustment
mixing ratio (for LOW) (1/ Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gradation by increasing /
100) decreasing the selected color componet
I RATIO HIGH High concentration correction 0 - 100 0 amount or the black color component
mixing ratio (for HIGH) (1/ amount in the black and white mode.
100)
J DITHER Dither threshold (For LOW) 0 - 255 250 Section Printer
THRESHOLD Operation/Procedure
K SLOPE Slope threshold (For HIGH) 100 - 400 1) Select Mode1 or Mode2.
THRESHOLD (1/100) 500
2) Select an item to be set.
• When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items
A and B to "0." Mode Default
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone value
gap is reduced. Black F1 Black : Light F2
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
• To increase the density in the high density section further, set MODE color) F3 Black : Dark
items A and B to "1." 1 G1 Selected color : Light G2
The tone gap may occur in high density part. COLOR G2 Selected color : Normal
(Selected color)
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these G3 Selected color : Dark
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed.
67-43
67-36 Purpose Adjustment
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) 2 Color mode balance adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den- Section Printer
sity section. Operation/Procedure
Section Printer 1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Enter the set value with 10-keys.
1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. 3) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default value
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images Item/Display Content Color
range C M Y
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
A RED R output CMY 0 - 255 0 235 224
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
color
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight B GREEN G output CMY 0 - 255 180 0 241
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble. color
C BLUE B output CMY 0 - 255 235 159 0
Setting Default color
range value
D CYAN C output CMY 0 - 255 182 0 25
A A PATCH INPUT C A patch input value C 0 - 13 1 color
B A PATCH INPUT M A patch input value M 0 - 13 1 E MAGENTA M output CMY 0 - 255 0 217 0
C A PATCH INPUT Y A patch input value Y 0 - 13 1 color
D A PATCH INPUT K A patch input value K 0 - 13 1 F YELLOW Y output CMY 0 - 255 0 0 234
color
67-41
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 67-46
Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold for judging the Purpose Adjustment
selected color printing or the black color Function (Purpose) Used to adjust print image enhancement
printing in the black and white mode. Section
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an adjustment item with scroll key.
1) Select a set value with the scroll key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-keys
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Press [OK] key
3) Press [OK] key.
Item/ Setting Default
Content
Setting Default Display range value
range value A PROCESS Edge judgment 0-1 0
A C1 Mode1 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5 (0:CMYK 1:K)
B V1 Mode1 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0 B CANCEL (600dpi) Edge cancellation 0 - 255 64
C C2 Mode2 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5 C CANCEL (1200dpi) Edge cancellation 0 - 255 64
D V2 Mode2 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0

67-52 Display Content
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
Printer heavy paper automatic density
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the correction amount
printer screen. 1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
Section Printer SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
Operation/Procedure SCREEN21 (1200dpi 1bit SuperLow)
1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel. 600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit Photo)
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SIM67-54, it is reset to the default. SCREEN11 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
Display Content SCREEN13 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen Printer B/W toner save automatic
Printer heavy paper automatic density density correction amount
correction amount 4BIT_GRAPHICS SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5 (1200dpi 1bit Photo) DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot Screen1)
SCREEN6 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics) DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN15(Dot Screen2)
SCREEN21 (1200dpi 1bit SuperLow) DOT_SCREEN1_BW SCREEN16(Dot Screen1 BW)
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo) DOT_SCREEN2_BW SCREEN17(Dot Screen2 BW)
SCREEN2 (600dpi 1bit Graphics) SHIGH SCREEN18(SHIGH)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 4bit Photo) 6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/LT or A3 or 11" x 17" paper is auto-
SCREEN9 (1200dpi 1bit Photo) matically selected.)
SCREEN11 (600dpi 1bit Graphics) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
SCREEN12 (600dpi 4bit Graphics) 7) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
SCREEN13 (1200dpi 1bit Graphics) procedure 6) on the document table so that the thin lines on
Printer B/W toner save automatic the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
density correction amount
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
4BIT_GRAPHICS SCREEN4 (600dpi 4bit Graphics)
patch image (adjustment pattern).
DOT_SCREEN1 SCREEN14(Dot Screen1)
DOT_SCREEN2 SCREEN15(Dot Screen2)
DOT_SCREEN1_BW SCREEN16(Dot Screen1 BW) The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
DOT_SCREEN2_BW SCREEN17(Dot Screen2 BW) the color balance check patch image is printed out.
SHIGH SCREEN18(SHIGH) 9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
67-54 To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
Purpose Adjustment press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
(Automatic adjustment for each dither) Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
Section Printer tered.
Operation/Procedure 10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, the graphic mode, the dot screen mode and the
SHIGH mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/LT or A3 or 11" x 17" paper is auto-
matically selected.)
2) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).

[7] TROUBLESHOOTING
MX-8090N D. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and dis-
1. Error code and troubleshooting plays the trouble message.
A. General A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is nearly
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- expired or is expired.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or may
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user and not be stopped.
the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, this The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the machine to the LCD and lamp.
minimize the damage. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is
B. Function and purpose repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a trou-
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages
ble.)
must be cleared by a simulation.
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be Monitors the machine
conditions.
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows to Detects/analyzes
arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This avoids the content.
stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable
part.)
C. Self diag message kinds Warning

࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the Trouble

Πρήσ
user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by a ൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble (Preliminary
warning of life expiration of a consumable part, etc.) ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others -
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-8090N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode
Operable mode
Judgeme Scan Scan
Trouble content Trouble code Copy Scan List FAX FAX
nt block (Push To Print
scan (Pull) print send print
) HDD
Security trouble Security module MFP E7(C0,C1) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
HDD trouble SSD breakdown E7(A7) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD breakdown E7(03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
HDD-ASIC breakdown E7(04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Operation Operation U9(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
communication trouble communication trouble
Scanner communication SCU communication A0(02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
trouble error E7(80)
Engine communication PCU communication A0(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble error E7(90)
Option communication ACU communication A0(04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble error
Printer port system Printer port system F9(00)  ✕ ✕  ✕   
trouble trouble *13 *14
Backup battery voltage Backup battery voltage U1(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
fall trouble fall *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
Operation disable Controller fan motor L4(28,30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 1 trouble
Operation disable Memory error (included U2(00,11,41,42) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 2 not installed the *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
expansion RAM)
Serial number U2(30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
discrepancy *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
HDD registration data U2(50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
check sum error *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
External communication U7(50,51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable (RIC)
Memory error (included U2(40) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
not installed the
expansion RAM)
Connection trouble A0(10,15,17,18,19,20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(MFP detection) E7(60,61,62)
Operation disable Memory check error E7(96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 3 when booting
Image memory trouble, E7(01,49,91,92,93,94) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
decode error
Image memory trouble, E7(42,46,47,48) ✕ 17 ✕ ✕ ✕   
decode error (related to
ACRE)
Operation disable Personal counter not PC(00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 4 installed trouble
Power controller trouble Power controller trouble L8(20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Special function trouble Special function error U2(60,70)        
*16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16
Laser trouble LSU breakdown PCU E7(20,24,28,29,A0) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
L6(10) *10
Engine trouble 1 Connection trouble A0(21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(PCU detection) E7(50,55)
F1(50)
Engine trouble 2 PCU troubles (motor, H5(01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
fusing, etc) U2(90,91) *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
*20
PCU troubles (motor, C1(01,10,14,40) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
fusing, etc) C4(00,20,21,25,30,31,35) *10
F2(22,40,64,70,74,91)
H2(00,01,02,03,04,05,06,
07)
H3(00,01,02)
H4(00,01,02,30,31,32)
H7(10,11)
L4(02,03,06,07,08,12,16,
17,18,19,20,31,32,34,35,
36,39,40,41,42,43,44,48,
49,57,60,61,71)
L8(01,02,11,12)
Operable mode
Judgeme Scan Scan
) HDD
Color system trouble General PCU color PCU C1(03,05,07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
system breakdown E7(21,22,23,25,26,27,A1, *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *10 *19 *19
A2,A3) *19
F2(23,24,25,41,42,43,65,
66,67,71,72,73,75,76,77,
92,93,94)
Paper feed tray 0 trouble Paper feed tray 0 U6(63,68,69) 3    3 3  3
breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 1 trouble Paper feed tray 1 F3(12) 3    3 3  3
breakdown *10
breakdown *10
breakdown *10
breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 5 trouble Paper feed tray 5 U6(09) 3    3 3  3
breakdown *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *10 *20 *20
*20
Paper feed tray 5 U6(23,24,29) 3    3 3  3
breakdown UE(10,11,12,13,14,15,16, *10
17)
breakdown UE(20,21,22,23,24,25,26 *10
,27)
breakdown UE(30,31,32,33,34,35,36 *10
,37)
breakdown UE(40,41,42,43,44,45,46 *10
,47)
Paper feed tray other Paper feed tray other U6(20,21,22,51,54,80,81, 11    11 11  11
trouble breakdown 82,83,84) *10
Finisher trouble After process breakdown F0(03,08,10,11,14,15,18, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
19,20,23,25,28,29,30,31, *10
32,33,34,37,40,41,42,43,
44,45,46,47,48,49,51,52,
53,54,55,56,70,71,72,73,
74,75,76,77,80,81,82,83,
84,86)
F1(00,03,15,19,20,21,22,
23,30,32,33,34,37,38,52,
55,60,90,96,97,98,99)
Inserter trouble Inserter breakdown F1(64,65,66,67) 3    3 3  3
(except for *10
communication trouble)
Other troubles Other troubles EE(EC,EL,EU)        
Double feed detection Double feed detection FF(00)        
trouble trouble
Process control trouble Process control F2(39,49,50,51,52,53,58,        
breakdown (PCU 78,A0,A1,A2,A3) *12
detection)
Operation disable Connection trouble SCU A0(22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (SCU detection)
Color system trouble SCU color system UC(02) 9 9 9 9   9 
(SCU detection) breakdown (SCU
detection)
Color system trouble SCU color system UC(12) 8 8 8 8   8 
(DSPF detection) breakdown (DSPF
detection)
Anti-copy trouble Anti-copy system UC(20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
Anti-copy trouble (DSPF Anti-copy system (DSPF UC(30) 7 7 7 7   7 
detection) detection)
Scanner trouble 1 EEPROM system U2(80,81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
*20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
Scanner trouble 2 Scanner section L1(00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
breakdown (mirror, L3(00)
motor, lens, copy lamp)
CCD trouble CCD breakdown E7(10,11,14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕ 
(shading, etc)
DSPF/DF trouble DSPF/DF breakdown U5(00,16,20,30,31) 6 6 6 6   6 
Operable mode
Judgeme Scan Scan
) HDD
SPF back surface General troubles in the SCU E6(10,11,14) 7 7 7 7   7 
trouble SPF back surface
scanning section
Trouble content
Trouble content PCU F2(45)        
E7(35,36,37)
Error history MFP U2(05)        
: Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section
6: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode
7: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode/single surface scan mode
8: When detected in other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the duplex color scan mode
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the monochrome mode
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred
11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK
*12: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
*13: When Fiery server is installed, PCL does not operate
*14: Only Fiery server list print (self print) is disabled
15: When in U2-22. trouble notification cannot be made. When in U2-23, If either of the FAX soft switch cannot be restored.
*16: Message is displayed
17: Job execution enable only in a format other than high compression PDF
*19: When the color mode is set to disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the monochrome
mode
*20: Message is displayed
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
MFP event Each block

manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6 Saved in the PCU
F3 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16 sim task
SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: U6 trouble cancel (LCC/LCT)
F3 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence Error code Content

U2 50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
First A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
(Low priority) 20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error
47 Combination error between MFP and ACRE firmware (ACRE ASIC)
Last 42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
(High priority) A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
F. Error code list
Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP ○
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP ○
04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM error MFP ○
10 Color profile error MFP ○
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP ○
17 Inconsistency between the UI data and the CPU firmware version MFP ○
18 Incompatible ASIC-MAIN firmware MFP ○
19 MFPC starting (synchronization) error MFP ○
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP ○
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU ○
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU ○
C1 01 Charger cleaner trouble (K) PCU ○
03 Charger cleaner trouble (C) PCU ○
05 Charger cleaner trouble (M) PCU ○
07 Charger cleaner trouble (Y) PCU ○
10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) PCU ○
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU ○
40 High voltage MC PWB trouble PCU ○
C4 00 PTC trouble PCU ○
01 PTC (Pre Transfer Charger) cleaner trouble PCU ○
20 Primary transfer output open trouble Primary ○
transfer
21 Primary transfer output short trouble Primary ○
transfer
25 High voltage 1TC PWB trouble PCU ○
30 Secondary transfer output open trouble Secondary ○
transfer
31 Secondary transfer output short trouble Secondary ○
transfer
35 High voltage 2TC PWB trouble PCU ○
E6 10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU ○
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU ○
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU ○
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP ○
03 HDD trouble (When the mirroring kit is not installed) MFP ○
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP ○
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU ○
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU ○
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU ○
20 LSU laser detection and deterioration error (K) PCU ○
21 LSU laser deterioration error (C) PCU ○
22 LSU laser deterioration error (M) PCU ○
23 LSU laser deterioration error (Y) PCU ○
24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) PCU ○
25 LSU LD driver trouble (C) PCU ○
26 LSU LD driver trouble (M) PCU ○
27 LSU LD driver trouble (Y) PCU ○
28 LSU - PCU connection error PCU ○
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU ○
35 Communication trouble with the CIS-ASIC PCU ○
36 CIS-ASIC black level detection abnormality PCU ○
37 CIS-ASIC white level detection abnormality PCU ○
47 Combination error between MFP and ACRE firmware (ACRE ASIC) MFP ○
48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC memory error MFP ○
49 Water Mark data error MFP ○
50 Combination error between PWB and firmware (PCU PWB detection) PCU ○
55 PWB information sum error (engine detection) PCU ○
60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection) MFP ○
61 Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the PCU PWB MFP ○
(MFPC PWB detection)
62 Controller connection error MFP ○
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP ○
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP ○
91 FAX reception image data error MFP ○
92 Copy image data error MFP ○
93 Copy, image send, filing, print image data process error MFP ○
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP ○
96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error MFP ○
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
E7 A0 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (K) PCU ○
A1 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (C) PCU ○
A2 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (M) PCU ○
A3 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write error (Y) PCU ○
A7 SSD trouble MFP ○
C0 TPM PWB data access error MFP ○
C1 Security check error MFP ○
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU ○
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU ○
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU ○
F0 03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor section abnormality (FNM110) PCU ○
08 Finisher stapler shift motor section abnormality (FNM107) PCU ○
10 Finisher staple motor section abnormality (FNM115) PCU ○
11 Finisher bundle exit motor section abnormality (FNM116) PCU ○
14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor section abnormality (FNM113) PCU ○
15 Finisher tray lift motor section abnormality (FNM106) PCU ○
18 Finisher rear edge hold motor section abnormality (FNM118) PCU ○
19 Finisher paper alignment motor F section abnormality (FNM108) PCU ○
20 Finisher paper alignment motor R section abnormality (FNM109) PCU ○
23 Shutter trouble (FNCL102) PCU ○
25 Finisher paper transport roller lift motor section abnormality (FNM119) PCU ○
28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift motor section abnormality (FNM112) PCU ○
29 Finisher PWB cooling fan abnormality (FNFAN102) PCU ○
30 Communication trouble between the finisher and the saddle PCU ○
31 Finisher saddle folding motor section abnormality (FSM206) PCU ○
32 Finisher relay unit transport motor section abnormality (PIM301) PCU ○
33 Finisher punch shift motor section abnormality (FCM101) PCU ○
34 Finisher punch motor section abnormality (FCM102 PCU ○
37 Finisher backup RAM trouble PCU ○
40 Communication trouble between the finisher saddle and the trimmer. PCU ○
41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper motor section abnormality (FSM203) PCU ○
42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide motor section abnormality (FSM204) PCU ○
43 Finisher saddle alignment motor section abnormality (FSM212) PCU ○
44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor section abnormality (FSM210) PCU ○
45 Finisher saddle staple motor section abnormality (FSM209) PCU ○
46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor section abnormality (FSM211) PCU ○
47 Finisher saddle flap motor section abnormality (FSM213) PCU ○
48 Finisher saddle push motor section abnormality (FSM205) PCU ○
49 Finisher saddle separation motor section abnormality (FSM214) PCU ○
51 Finisher trimmer cutter motor abnormality (FTM106) PCU ○
52 Finisher trimmer registration motor section abnormality (FTM102) PCU ○
53 Finisher trimmer inlet port separation motor abnormality (FTM103) PCU ○
54 Finisher trimmer paper exit separation motor section abnormality PCU ○
(FTM104)
55 Finisher trimmer bundle press motor section abnormality (FTM105) PCU ○
56 Paper remaining trouble in the finisher trimmer PCU ○
60 Communication trouble between the stacker first series and the PCU ○
downstream units.
61 Stacker first series offset unit abnormality PCU ○
62 Stacker first series front side jogger abnormality PCU ○
63 Stacker first series rear side jogger abnormality PCU ○
64 Stacker first series lead edge jogger abnormality PCU ○
65 Stacker first series stack tray abnormality PCU ○
70 Communication trouble between the finisher and the folding unit PCU ○
71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide motor section abnormality (FLM10) PCU ○
72 Folding unit backup RAM trouble PCU ○
73 Folding unit power fan abnormality PCU ○
74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit motor section abnormality (FLM14) PCU ○
75 Folding unit upper stopper motor section abnormality (FLM8) PCU ○
76 3-fold stopper motor section in the folding unit is abnormal (FLM9) PCU ○
77 Folding unit transport motor section abnormality (FLM11) PCU ○
80 Finisher power cooling fan motor abnormality (FNFAN101) PCU ○
81 Finisher upper tray fan abnormality (FNFAN103) PCU ○
82 Finisher lower tray fan abnormality (FNFAN104) PCU ○
83 Finisher paper guide motor section abnormality (FNM120) PCU ○
84 Finisher grip section abnormality (FNM117) PCU ○
85 Booklet finisher detection trouble PCU ○
86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor section abnormality (FNM114) PCU ○
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
F0 90 Communication trouble between the stacker second series and the PCU ○
downstream units
91 Stacker second series offset unit abnormality PCU ○
92 Stacker second series front side jogger abnormality PCU ○
93 Stacker second series rear side jogger abnormality PCU ○
94 Stacker second series lead edge jogger abnormality PCU ○
95 Stacker second series stack tray abnormality PCU ○
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU ○
21 Abnormality of relay unit fan motor inside the machine (FDCM) PCU ○
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU ○
55 After-process unit ROM error PCU ○
60 Communication trouble between peripheral devices (Inserter detection) PCU ○
64 No. 1 pickup motor trouble PCU ○
65 No. 2 pickup motor trouble PCU ○
66 No. 1 lift motor trouble PCU ○
67 No. 2 lift motor trouble PCU ○
90 Communication trouble between the decurler and the downstream units. PCU ○
96 Decurler transport motor abnormality (DCM100) PCU ○
97 Decurler unit fan 1 (Upper cooling fan) abnormality (DCFAN100) PCU ○
98 Decurler unit fan 2 (Lower cooling fan) abnormality (DCFAN103) PCU ○
99 Decurler unit fan 3 (Transport motor cooling fan) abnormality (DCFAN101) PCU ○
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU ○
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU ○
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU ○
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU ○
39 Process temperature sensor trouble PCU ○
40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) PCU ○
41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) PCU ○
42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) PCU ○
43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y) PCU ○
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU ○
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU ○
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU ○
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble (C) PCU ○
52 CL drum phase sensor trouble (M) PCU ○
53 CL drum phase sensor trouble (Y) PCU ○
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU ○
64 Toner supply operation trouble (K) PCU ○
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU ○
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU ○
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU ○
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU ○
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) PCU ○
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) PCU ○
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) PCU ○
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU ○
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU ○
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU ○
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU ○
78 Registration/BK image density sensor trouble PCU ○
79 Temperature thermistor of transfer unit trouble PCU ○
A0 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (K) PCU ○
A1 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (C) PCU ○
A2 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (M) PCU ○
A3 After-transfer discharge lamp open trouble (Y) PCU ○
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU ○
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU ○
32 Main body cassette 3 lift trouble PCU ○
42 Main body cassette 4 lift trouble PCU ○
F9 00 Communication error between MFP and the printer section when booting MFP ○
FF 00 Double feed detection trouble (PCU) PCU ○
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU ○
01 Non-contact thermistor lower main detection thermistor open PCU ○
(TH_LM1_AD2)
02 Non-contact thermistor upper sub detection thermistor open PCU ○
(TH_US1_AD2)
03 Non-contact thermistor upper main compensation thermistor open PCU ○
(TH_UM_CS)
04 Non-contact thermistor lower main compensation thermistor open PCU ○
(TH_LM1_AD1)
2 : ‘19/March.
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
H2 05 Non-contact thermistor upper sub compensation thermistor open PCU ○
(TH_US1_AD1)
06 Upper edge section thermistor open (TH_US2) PCU ○
07 Lower edge section thermistor open (TH_LM2) PCU ○
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU ○
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU ○
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU ○
2 H4 00 Fusing section low temperature (TH_UM) PCU ○
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU ○
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU ○
30 Upper main thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_UM) PCU ○
31 Lower main thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_LM1) PCU ○
32 Upper sub thermistor differential input abnormality (TH_US1) PCU ○
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU ○
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU ○
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_LM) PCU ○
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU ○
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU ○
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU ○
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU ○
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU ○
07 Transfer belt motor trouble PCU ○
08 Waste toner transport motor lock PCU ○
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU ○
17 Drum motor lock trouble (K) PCU ○
18 Drum motor lock trouble (C) PCU ○
19 Drum motor lock trouble (M) PCU ○
20 Drum motor lock trouble (Y) PCU ○
25 2nd transfer belt motor trouble PCU ○
30 Controller fan motor / HDD cooling fan motor MFP ○
31 Paper exit cooling fan F trouble PCU ○
32 Power source cooling fan 1 trouble PCU ○
33 Machine ventilation fan BA trouble PCU ○
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU ○
35 Paper exit exhaust fan trouble PCU ○
36 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU ○
38 Paper exit cooling fan2 F trouble PCU ○
40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble PCU ○
43 Paper exit cooling fan R trouble PCU ○
44 Power source cooling fan 2 trouble PCU ○
48 ADU transport cooling fan motor F trouble PCU ○
49 ADU transport cooling fan motor R trouble PCU ○
56 Paper exit cooling fan2 R trouble PCU ○
57 Toner bottle cooling fan motor trouble PCU ○
58 Paper exit cooling fan2 trouble PCU ○
60 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor F trouble PCU ○
61 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor R trouble PCU ○
63 2nd transfer belt skew correction motor trouble PCU ○
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU ○
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU ○
02 Full wave signal error PCU ○
11 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave not detected PCU ○
12 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave signal width abnormality PCU ○
20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/SCN mother board MFP ○
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP ○
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP ○
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP ○
05 Erroneous detection of account management data MFP ○
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP ○
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP ○
2 40 mSATA SSD system storage data area error MFP ○
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP ○
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP ○
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP ○
60 Watermark check error MFP ○
70 OCR dictionary check error MFP ○
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU ○
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
U2 81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU ○
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU ○
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU ○
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU ○
16 Document feed unit fan trouble SCU ○
20 SPF paper feed transport motor trouble SCU ○
30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble SCU ○
31 Document feed unit tray lift down trouble SCU ○
U6 09 LCC lift motor trouble PCU ○
20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB communication error PCU ○
21 LCC transport motor trouble PCU ○
22 LCC 24V power abnormality PCU ○
23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble (Reverse winding detection) (A3 LCC) PCU ○
24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble PCU ○
29 LCT1 lift trouble PCU ○
33 LCT2 reverse winding detection trouble PCU ○
34 LCT2 lock detection trouble PCU ○
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU ○
53 Communication trouble between LCT’s PCU ○
54 Option installation combination trouble PCU ○
63 Manual feed tray descending trouble PCU ○
68 Manual feed tray paper feed position abnormality PCU ○
69 Manual feed tray lift trouble PCU ○
80 Relay unit transport motor trouble PCU ○
81 Power unit cooling fan motor trouble PCU ○
82 EEPROM trouble PCU ○
83 Room temperature thermistor breakdown PCU ○
84 Room humidity thermistor breakdown PCU ○
85 Transport motor 1 trouble (2 series) PCU ○
86 24V power trouble (2 series) PCU ○
87 Power unit cooling fan motor trouble (2 series) PCU ○
88 EEPROM trouble (2 series) PCU ○
89 Room temperature thermistor breakdown (2 series) PCU ○
90 Room humidity thermistor breakdown (2 series) PCU ○
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP ○
51 Vendor machine error MFP ○
U9 01 Touch panel trouble SCU ○
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU ○
12 CPT - ASIC abnormal trouble (DSPF detection) SCU ○
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU ○
30 Anti-copy MODULE trouble (DSPF detection) SCU ○
UE 10 LCT1 suction fan motor trouble PCU ○
11 LCT1 exhaust fan motor trouble PCU ○
12 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor open PCU ○
13 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor low temperature trouble PCU ○
14 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor high temperature trouble PCU ○
15 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor open PCU ○
16 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor low temperature PCU ○
17 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor high temperature PCU ○
20 LCT2 suction fan motor trouble PCU ○
30 LCT3 suction fan motor trouble PCU ○
Trouble code
Trouble
detection
code code
UE 35 LCT3 warm air outlet port thermistor open PCU ○
40 LCT4suction fan motor trouble PCU ○
G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-17 Inconsistency between the UI data and
the CPU firmware version
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Trouble content
interruption of the power during the version-up operation,
Detail MFP
etc. PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Combination error between the UI contents data and the
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
CPU UI firmware version.
procedure again.Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up mode.
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error A0-18 Incompatible ASIC-MAIN firmware

Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
Detail MFP
interruption of the power during the version-up operation,
etc. SCU PWB trouble. Cause Combination version error in MFP ASIC
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
procedure again. Use Sim49-1 to perform the firmware version up
Replace the SCU PWB.
A0-19 MFPC starting (synchronization) error

A0-04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU)
(ACRE) ROM error Trouble content
Detail Starting error caused by defective MFP PWB
Cause Defective of Flash ROM, memory devices
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Insert and extract mSATA SSD
Detail MFP
Insert and extract ASIC1 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG1)
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) (ACRE) ROM data error. Insert and extract ASIC2 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG2)
An error occurs during firmware upgrading for some
reasons. Check and replace the following parts individually.
Check & Remedy Perform firmware upgrading again. If still the same remained, replace parts will be returned to
the old one each time.
Replace mSATA SSD
A0-10 Color profile error Replace ASIC1 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG1)
Replace ASIC2 Flash ROM (ASIC-PG2)
Replace MFP PWB
Trouble content Color profile error
Detail MFP
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal.
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware and
A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data ver-
the color profile sion (MFP)
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and the
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program EEPROM data version.
firmware Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed with a
security kit enable.
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data ver- C1-03 Charger cleaner trouble (C)
sion (PCU)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The main charger unit (C) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (C).
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and the
Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (C) HP
EEPROM data version.
sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
discharge lamp.
Harness disconnection of the drum unit (C) HP sensor,
the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer discharge lamp.
A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data ver- HP sensor dirt.
sion (SCU) Charger cleaner motor (C) trouble.
PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger cleaner.
Trouble content
Check disconnection of the main charger unit./Replace.
Detail SCU Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum unit
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and the (C) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after-transfer
EEPROM data version. discharge lamp.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware. Check the harness of the drum unit (C) HP sensor, the
discharge lamp, and the after-transfer discharge lamp.
(Since the earth wire is common to them, check the three
C1-01 Charger cleaner trouble (K) positions.)
Clean the HP sensor.
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./
Trouble content
Replace PWB.
Detail PCU Replace the charger cleaner motor (C).
Cause The main charger unit (K) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (K).
Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (K) HP C1-05 Charger cleaner trouble (M)
sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer
discharge lamp.
Harness disconnection of the drum unit (K) HP sensor, Trouble content
the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer discharge lamp. Detail PCU
HP sensor dirt. Cause The main charger unit (M) is not installed properly.
Charger cleaner motor (K) trouble. There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (M).
PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble. Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (M) HP
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger cleaner. sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer
Check disconnection of the main charger unit./Replace. discharge lamp.
Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum unit Harness disconnection of the drum unit (M) HP sensor,
(K) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after-transfer the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer discharge lamp.
discharge lamp. HP sensor dirt.
Check the harness of the drum unit (K) HP sensor, the Charger cleaner motor (M) trouble.
discharge lamp, and the after-transfer discharge lamp. PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble.
(Since the earth wire is common to them, check the three Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger cleaner.
positions.) Check disconnection of the main charger unit./Replace.
Clean the HP sensor. Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum unit
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./ (M) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after-transfer
Replace PWB. discharge lamp.
Replace the charger cleaner motor (K). Check the harness of the drum unit (M) HP sensor, the
(Since the earth wire is common to them, check the three
positions.)
Clean the HP sensor.
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./
Replace PWB.
Replace the charger cleaner motor (M).
C1-07 Charger cleaner trouble (Y) C1-40 High voltage MC PWB trouble
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (Y) is not installed properly. Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage MC
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (Y). PWB CN1
Connector connection trouble of the drum unit (Y) HP 2) Harness (MC-K-ERR, MC-CMY-ERR) pin
sensor, the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer disconnection
discharge lamp. (connector CN1-1,8,9,10pin)
Harness disconnection of the drum unit (Y) HP sensor, 3) 24V fuse meltdown
the discharge lamp, or the after-transfer discharge lamp. 4) High voltage error circuit (MC-K-ERR, MC-CMY-ERR)
HP sensor dirt. breakage
Charger cleaner motor (Y) trouble. Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and connector CN1
PCU PWB connector connection trouble/PWB trouble. 2) Check or replace the harness MC PWB input
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-4 to check the operation of the charger cleaner. connector CN1-1,8,9,10pin
Check disconnection of the main charger unit./Replace. 3) 4)Replace the MC PWB
Check for disconnection of the connector of the drum unit
(Y) HP sensor, the discharge lamp, and the after-transfer
discharge lamp. C4-00 PTC trouble
Check the harness of the drum unit (Y) HP sensor, the
(Since the earth wire is common to them, check the three Trouble content
positions.) Detail PCU
Clean the HP sensor. Cause The PTC unit is not properly installed.
Check disconnection of the PCU PWB connector./ PTC unit trouble.
Replace PWB. High voltage 2TC PWB trouble.
Replace the charger cleaner motor (Y). PCU PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
C1-10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) Replace the high voltage 2TC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (K) is not installed properly. C4-01 PTC (Pre Transfer Charger) cleaner
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (K).
The developer unit (K) is not installed properly. trouble
There is an abnormality in the developer unit (K).
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB connector. Trouble content Shifting the charger cleaner is not completed within the
Breakage of the high voltage harness. specified time.
High voltage MC PWB trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Charger unit trouble
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. HP sensor, motor, PCU PWB, harness connection trouble
Check the output of the developing bias with SIM8-1.
Check & Remedy Check the charger unit, the PCU PWB, and the harness
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
connection.
Check disconnection of the developer unit./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector./Replace.
Replace the high voltage MC PWB.
C4-20 Primary transfer output open trouble
Trouble content When the primary transfer output is delivered, the output
voltage exceeds the specified level.
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color) Detail Primary transfer
Cause Primary transfer unit abnormality.
Trouble content Primary transfer unit insertion trouble.
1TC output harness disconnection, breakage.
Detail PCU
Primary transfer unit separation operation trouble.
Cause The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed properly.
OPC drum abnormality (Does not rotate.)
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (CMY).
High voltage 1TC PWB trouble.
The developer unit (CMY) is not installed properly.
PCU PWB trouble.
There is an abnormality in the developer unit (CMY).
PCU PWB - high voltage 1TC PWB harness
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB connector.
disconnection, breakage.
Breakage of the high voltage harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the primary transfer unit.
High voltage MC PWB trouble.
Reinsert the primary transfer unit.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check or replace the 1TC output harness.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Replace the high voltage 1TC PWB.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the developer unit./Replace.
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the high
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
voltage 1TC PWB, and replace as needed.
connector./Replace.
Replace the high voltage MC PWB
C4-21 Primary transfer output short trouble C4-31 Secondary transfer output short
trouble
Trouble content When the primary transfer output is delivered, the output
voltage does not reach the specified level.
Trouble content When the secondary transfer output is delivered, the
Detail Primary transfer output voltage does not reach the specified level.
Cause Primary transfer unit abnormality. Detail Secondary transfer
Primary transfer unit insertion trouble.
Cause Secondary transfer unit abnormality.
Primary transfer unit insertion trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Secondary transfer unit not installed.
2TC output harness disconnection, breakage
disconnection, breakage.
Check & Remedy Replace the primary transfer unit. PCU PWB trouble.
Reinsert the primary transfer unit. PCU PWB - high voltage 2TC PWB harness
Replace the high voltage 1TC PWB. disconnection, breakage.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check or replace the secondary transfer unit.
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the high Check or replace the primary transfer unit.
voltage 1TC PWB, and replace as needed. Check or replace the 2TC output harness.
Replace the high voltage 2TC PWB.
C4-25 High voltage 1TC PWB trouble Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the high
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage 1TC
C4-35 High voltage 2TC PWB trouble
PWB CN1
2) Hrness(1TC-S-ERR, 1TC-O-ERR) pin disconnection Trouble content
(connector CN1-1,7,8pin) Detail
3) 24V fuse meltdown
Cause 1) Input harness disconnection in the high voltage 2TC
4) High voltage error circuit(1TC-S-ERR, 1TC-O-ERR)
PWB CN1
breakage
2) Harness (2TC-ERR, PTC-ERR) pin disconnection
5) ConnectorCN23 disconnection on the PCU PWB
(connector CN1-1,7,8pin, or PCU PWB connector CN12-
Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and connector CN1 24,26,38pin)
2) Check or replace the harness input connector CN1- 3) 24V fuse meltdown
1,7,8pin 4) High voltage error circuit(2TC-ERR, PTC-ERR)
3) 4)Replace high voltage 1TC PWB breakage
5) Replace PCU PWB 5) Connector CN12 disconnection on the PCU PWB
6) PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy 1) Check the harness and connector CN1
C4-30 Secondary transfer output open 2) Check or replace the harness 2TC PWB input
trouble connector CN1-1,7,8pin, or PCU PWB input connector
CN12-24,26,38pin
3) 4)Replace the high voltage 2TC PWB
Trouble content When the secondary transfer output is delivered, the 5) Check the connector CN12 on the PCU PWB
output voltage exceeds the specified level. 6) Replace PCU PWB
Detail Secondary transfer
Cause 2TC output harness disconnection, breakage
High voltage 2TC PWB trouble. E6-10 Shading error (Black correction)
PCU PWB trouble.
disconnection, breakage. Detail SCU
Secondary transfer unit abnormality. Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
Primary transfer unit insertion trouble. CCD unit trouble.
Secondary transfer unit not installed. DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the 2TC output harness. Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CCD unit.
Replace the high voltage 2TC PWB. Check the CCD unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the DSPF PWB.
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the high
Check or replace the secondary transfer unit. E6-11 Shading error (White correction)
Check or replace the primary transfer unit.
Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CCD unit harness.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate.
CCD unit trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Shading SIM not executed / Shading ROM abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CCD unit.
Check the installing state of the harness to the copy lamp
unit.
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the DSPF PWB.
E6-14 CCD-ASIC error E7-11 Shading error (White correction)

Detail SCU Detail SCU
Cause DSPF PWB trouble. Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan level
Check & Remedy Check the DSPF PWB. when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
E7-01 MFP image data error Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
CCD unit abnormality.
Trouble content SCU PWB abnormality.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
MFPC PWB trouble. unit.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of the Check or replace the scanner lamp.
MFPC PWB. Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the reference
white board.
Check or replace the CCD unit.
E7-03 HDD trouble (When the mirroring kit is Check or replace the SCU PWB.
not installed)
E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC PWB
Detail SCU
and HDD.
Cause SCU PWB trouble.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality (FAT
breakage). Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of the
MFPC PWB and HDD.
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the E7-20 LSU laser detection and deterioration
HDD. error (K)
Replace the HDD.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble content
Cause RAID PWB trouble.
(When the A HDD which has been used for mirroring is installed. Detail PCU
mirroring kit is Both HDD's go into trouble under the use environment of Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
not installed) mirroring. Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the RAID PWB, and replace if necessary. LSU harness, connector trouble
(When the Replace the HDD. LSU BD PWB/LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
mirroring kit is (For details, refer to the HDD and RAID PWB Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
installed) replacement procedures under mirroring environment.) Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness.
Replace the LSU.
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
E7-21 LSU laser deterioration error (C)
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when booting. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble.
LSU connector trouble
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction) Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness and connector.
Trouble content Replace the LSU.
Detail SCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF. E7-22 LSU laser deterioration error (M)
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
CCD unit abnormality.
Trouble content
SCU PWB abnormality.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit. Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble.
Check the SCU PWB. LSU connector trouble
LSU LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check connection of the LSU connector.
Replace the LSU.
E7-23 LSU laser deterioration error (Y) E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error

Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble. Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU PWB
LSU connector trouble and the LSU control ASIC.
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble. Improper connection of the communication connector
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB .
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
Check connection of the LSU connector. control PWB
Replace the LSU. PCU PWB trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
LSU trouble.
E7-24 LSU LD driver trouble (K) Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the LD Replace the PCU PWB.
driver is not performed normally. Replace the LSU.
Detail PCU
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble.
LSU connector trouble. E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Trouble content
Check connection of the LSU harness. Detail PCU
Replace the LSU. Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator used in
the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU control PWB.
E7-25 LSU LD driver trouble (C) Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the LD

driver is not performed normally.
E7-35 Communication trouble with the CIS-
Detail PCU ASIC
LSU connector trouble. Trouble content Communication trouble (clock synchronization) between
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble. the CPU and the CIS-ASIC in the PCU PWB
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU. Detail MFP
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Cause “Connector/harness trouble between the PCU PWB and
Check connection of the LSU harness. the PED Cis PWB.
Replace the LSU. PED Cis PWB trouble, PCU PWB trouble.
PS unit drawer connector insertion trouble."
Check & Remedy “Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the PED
E7-26 LSU LD driver trouble (M) Cis PWB.
Check the PED Cis PWB, and the PCU PWB.
Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the LD If the trouble is not canceled, replace the PED Cis PWB
driver is not performed normally. and the PCU PWB.”
Detail PCU
LSU connector trouble.
E7-36 CIS-ASIC black level detection abnor-
LD PWB/LSU control PWB trouble. mality
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU.
Trouble content The black reference plate scan level when the lamp is
lighted is abnormal.
Replace the LSU.
Detail MFP
Cause “The CIS unit is not installed properly.
Harness trouble between the CIS unit and the PED Cis
E7-27 LSU LD driver trouble (Y) PWB.
CIS unit trouble, PED Cis PWB trouble.
Trouble content The LSU LD is lighted, the initialization process of the LD Dirt on the reference black plate.”
driver is not performed normally. Check & Remedy “Check the installing state of the CIS unit
Detail PCU Check the harness between the CIS unit and the PED Cis
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode trouble. PWB.
LSU connector trouble. Clean the reference black plate.
LD PWB, LSU control PWB trouble. If the trouble is not canceled, replace the CIS unit and the
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-01 to check the operations of the LSU. PED Cis PWB.”
Replace the LSU.
E7-37 CIS-ASIC white level detection abnor- E7-50 Combination error between PWB and
mality firmware (PCU PWB detection)
Trouble content The white reference plate scan level when the lamp is Trouble content
lighted is abnormal. Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause A PWB/firmware/LSU which is not compatible with the
Cause “The CIS unit is not installed properly. machine specifications is detected.
Harness trouble between the CIS unit and the PED Cis PCU PWB trouble
PWB. LSU trouble
CIS unit trouble, PED Cis PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Dirt on the reference white plate.” Check or replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy “The CIS unit is not installed properly. Check or replace the PCU PWB.
Harness trouble between the CIS unit and the PED Cis
PWB.
CIS unit trouble, PED Cis PWB trouble. E7-55 PWB information sum error (engine
Dirt on the reference white plate.”
detection)
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information sum error

E7-47 Combination error between MFP and Detail PCU
ACRE firmware (ACRE ASIC) Cause EEPROM device trouble.
EEPROM device contact trouble.
Device access error due to noises.
Trouble content Unknown ACRE board recognition information is detected Check & Remedy Replace the PWB.
by MFP
Detail MFP
Cause ACRE board whose firmware is not compatible with MFP E7-60 Combination error between PWB and
is connected.
Check & Remedy “Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
Use SIM49-1 or SIM49-10 to perform the firmware
version-up procedure” Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
E7-48 Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC machine specifications is detected in the MFPC PWB.
memory error MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble content • DDR calibration error
• DIMM insertion trouble, etc.
Detail MFP E7-61 Combination error between the MFPC
Cause Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM trouble, memory
slot trouble. PWB and the PCU PWB
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM insertion trouble. (MFPC PWB detection)
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) connection trouble.
Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) Detail MFP
DIMM memory. Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the PCU
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) DIMM PWB.
memory, and replace if necessary. MFPC PWB trouble.
Check connection of the scanner expansion PWB PCU PWB trouble.
(ACRE). Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and the
Check the scanner expansion PWB (ACRE), and replace PCU PWB.
if necessary. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary. Replace the PCU PWB.
E7-49 Water Mark data error E7-62 Controller combination error
Trouble content Detail

Detail MFP Cause Combination error between the scanner and MFP PWB
Cause Watermark data trouble. Check & Remedy Check MFP PWB and scanner combination
HDD trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.
2 : ‘19/March.
E7-80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error E7-93 Copy, image send, filing, print image
data process error
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content An image data process error occurs in the following
Cause SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble. operation mode:
SCU PWB trouble. • Copy (in ERDH)
MFPC PWB trouble. • Copy composing system function (Water mark)
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC PWB. • When in image send
Check the ground. • When filing documents
Replace the SCU PWB. • When displaying the preview
Replace the MFPC PWB. • When printing with the GDI/PCL printer
• Copy composing system function (Water mark)
Detail MFP
E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error Cause Image data process abnormality
HDD trouble
Image compression data corruption
Trouble content
MFPC PWB trouble
Detail MFP
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the
PCU PWB trouble.
memory.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Replace the HDD.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check the ground. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-94 Image file data process error (when
E7-91 FAX reception image data error importing file data)
Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs. Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when
importing filing data
Detail MFP
Detail MFP
Cause Image data process abnormality
HDD trouble Cause Image data process abnormality
HDD trouble
2 mSATA SSD trouble or contact error
Image compression data corruption Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error DIMM memory trouble or contact error
FAX control PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the memory.
memory. Replace the HDD.
Replace the HDD. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace or check installation of the SD card. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Replace the FAX control PWB. E7-95 MFP PWB DIMM memory check
error
E7-92 Copy image data error
Trouble content MFP PWB DIMM memory access trouble
Detail MFP
Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs. Cause Memory data corruption occurs
(In Non ERDH) Printer PWB trouble
Detail MFP DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Cause Image data process abnormality Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of the
HDD trouble memory.
Image compression data corruption Replace the printer PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble DIMM memory socket check
DIMM memory trouble or contact error Replace the DIMM memory.
memory.
Replace the HDD. E7-96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Trouble content MFPC PWB DIMM memory access trouble
Detail MFP
Cause Memory data corruption occurs
MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
memory.
DIMM memory socket check
Replace the DIMM memory.
E7-A0 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write E7-C0 TPM PWB data access error
error (K) (Error on option DSK connection)
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/LD Trouble content
driver for Black Detail
Detail PCU Cause TPM PWB error, poor connection
Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble. Installed TPM PWB used with other MFP
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble. Check & Remedy Turn power off and on
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of the Check and confirm TPM PWB insertion
LD PWB and the PCU PWB.
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble, replace E7-C1 Security check error
the LSU.
(Error on option DSK connection)
E7-A1 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write Trouble content

error (C) Detail
Cause TPM PWB error
Program error
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/LD Security function, setting error
driver for Cyan Check & Remedy Turn power off and on
Detail PCU Check and confirm TPM PWB insertion
Cause EEPROM/LD driver trouble.
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of the EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
error
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble, replace
the LSU. Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
adjustment is outside of 128 +/-10.
Detail PCU
E7-A2 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
error (M) Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/LD Replace the developing unit.
driver for Magenta Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble. EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Over toner)
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble, replace Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
the LSU. adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208 or
above.
Detail PCU
E7-A3 LSU EEPROM/LD driver read/write Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
error (Y) Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Write error in write sequence of the serial EEPROM/LD Replace the developing unit.
driver for Yellow Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
EEPROM/LD driver access circuit trouble. EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Under toner)
If the above remedies cannot delete the trouble, replace Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
the LSU. adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is 51 or
less.
Detail PCU
E7-A7 SSD trouble Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
Trouble content PCU PWB trouble.
Detail
Replace the developing unit.
Cause SSD trouble
Improper connection of SSD
MFP PWB trouble
Data error of the file system management part
Check & Remedy Remove and insert the SSD
Replace the SSD
Replace the MFP PWB
F0-03 Finisher paper exit roller lift motor sec- F0-15 Finisher tray lift motor section
tion abnormality (FNM110) abnormality (FNM106)
Trouble content Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation abnormality. Trouble content The operation of the lift motor for the upper and the lower
Detail PCU trays of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit roller harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown, area sensor
lift motor. breakdown.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray lift
the sensor. motor and the lower tray lift motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, and motor, and the sensor part.
F0-08 Finisher stapler shift motor section
abnormality (FNM107)
F0-18 Finisher rear edge hold motor section
Trouble content The shift operation of the finisher stapler is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Trouble content The operation of the paper hold arm in the staple compiler
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. of the finisher is abnormal.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift Detail PCU
motor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
the sensor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper hold
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part. motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
the sensor.
F0-10 Finisher staple motor section Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
F0-19 Finisher paper alignment motor F
Trouble content The operation of the finisher staple is abnormal.
section abnormality (FNM108)
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Trouble content The operation of the front alignment plate in the staple
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor. compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and Detail PCU
the sensor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment
motor F.
F0-11 Finisher bundle exit motor section Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
the sensor.
abnormality (FNM116) Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
Trouble content The grip expansion arm drive motor of the finisher for
staple bundle exit is abnormal. HP sensor abnormality. F0-20 Finisher paper alignment motor R
Detail PCU section abnormality (FNM109)
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
trouble, HP sensor breakdown, disconnection of harness
or connector. Trouble content The operation of the rear alignment plate in the staple
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper arm compiler of the finisher.
motor (FNM116). Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment
motor R.
F0-14 Finisher paper rear edge falling motor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
the sensor.
section abnormality (FNM113) Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
Trouble content The rear edge falling operation in the staple compiler of
the finisher is abnormal. F0-23 Shutter trouble (FNCL102)
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Trouble content The operation of the shutter open/close in the paper exit
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. section.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the rear edge falling
Detail PCU
motor.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the shutter clutch.
Check connection from the control PWB to the clutch and
the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the clutch, and the sensor part.
F0-25 Finisher paper transport roller lift motor F0-32 Finisher relay unit transport motor sec-
section abnormality (FNM119) tion abnormality (PIM301)
Trouble content The separation operation of the transport roller in the Trouble content The operation of the paper transport in the paper relay
buffer section of the finisher or the path select operation unit of the finisher is abnormal.
of the flapper is abnormal. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay paper
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper transport transport motor.
roller lift motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and Turn OFF/ON the power. Replace the control PWB and
the sensor. the motor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
F0-33 Finisher punch shift motor section

F0-28 Finisher paper alignment roller lift motor abnormality (FCM101)
section abnormality (FNM112)
Trouble content The horizontal registration shift operation of the punch
Trouble content The lifting operation of the paper takeup roller arm in the unit in the finisher is abnormal.
staple compiler of the finisher is abnormal. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch shift
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper alignment motor.
roller lift motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and the sensor.
the sensor. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
F0-34 Finisher punch motor section

F0-29 Finisher PWB cooling fan abnormality abnormality (FCM102)
(FNFAN102)
Trouble content The punching operation of the punch unit in the finisher is
Trouble content The operation of the PWB cooling fan in the finisher is abnormal.
abnormal. Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the control PWB Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
cooling fan. the sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
Replace the control PWB and the fan motor.
F0-37 Finisher backup RAM trouble

F0-30 Communication trouble between the fin-
isher and the saddle Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM. The red
values are abnormal.
Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the Detail PCU
saddle Cause Finisher control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip breakdown.
No response for the command send from the saddle unit Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB trouble,
disconnection of connector or harness. F0-40 Communication trouble between the fin-
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector between isher saddle and the trimmer
the finisher and the saddle. Replace the control PWB of
the saddle unit.
Trouble content Communication trouble between the saddle unit and the
trimmer unit.
When a command is sent from the saddle unit to the
F0-31 Finisher saddle folding motor section trimmer unit, no response is made by the trimmer unit.
abnormality (FSM206) Detail PCU
Trouble content Saddle unit folding roller operation abnormality disconnection of connector or harness.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check the connector between
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of the saddle and the trimmer unit. Replace the control PWB
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. of the saddle unit. Replace the control PWB of the
trimmer unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle paper
folding motor.
the sensor.
F0-41 Finisher saddle lead edge stopper motor F0-46 Finisher saddle rear edge shift motor
section abnormality (FSM203) section abnormality (FSM211)
Trouble content The operation of the finisher saddle unit lead edge Trouble content The operation of the rear edge shift motor of the finisher
stopper motor is abnormal. saddle unit is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle lead Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear
edge stopper motor. edge shift motor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
the sensor. the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part. Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part.
F0-42 Finisher saddle folding roller guide F0-47 Finisher saddle flapper motor section
motor section abnormality (FSM204) abnormality (FSM213)
Trouble content The operation of the saddle unit folding roller guide is Trouble content The operation of the rear edge flapper unit of the saddle
abnormal. unit is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle folding Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle flapper
roller guide motor. motor.
F0-43 Finisher saddle alignment motor F0-48 Finisher saddle push motor section
section abnormality (FSM212) abnormality (FSM205)
Trouble content The jogger shift operation in the staple compiler of the Trouble content The pushing operation of the saddle unit is abnormal.
saddle unit is abnormal. Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle push
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle paper motor.
alignment motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
F0-49 Finisher saddle separation motor

F0-44 Finisher saddle rear edge hold motor section abnormality (FSM214)
section abnormality (FSM210)
Trouble content The operation of the takeup separation roller of the saddle
Trouble content The operation of the rear edge hold member of the saddle unit is abnormal.
unit is abnormal. Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle rear separation motor.
edge hold motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
F0-51 Finisher trimmer cutter motor

F0-45 Finisher saddle staple motor section abnormality (FTM106)
abnormality (FSM209)
Trouble content The cutter operation of the trimmer unit is abnormal.
Trouble content The staple operation of the saddle unit is abnormal. Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer cutter
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle staple motor.
motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and
F0-52 Finisher trimmer registration motor sec- F0-56 Paper remaining trouble in the finisher
tion abnormality (FTM102) trimmer
Trouble content PCU Trouble content Paper bundle remained in the trimmer is not discharged
Detail The operation of the registration taking unit of the trimmer by the automatic paper exit operation.
unit is abnormal. Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Cause Trimmer inlet port sensor breakdown
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. The paper bundle is bent and cannot be transported.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer
registration motor. transport motor.
Check the paper bundle can be transported or not.
F0-53 Finisher trimmer inlet port separation

motor abnormality (FTM103) F0-60 Communication trouble between the
stacker first series and the downstream
Trouble content The separation operation of the inlet port roller of the units.
trimmer unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU Trouble content Communication trouble with a downstream unit
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Detail PCU
Cause Stacker unit ID setting failure (Setting failure of the DIP
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer inlet switch on the control PWB), noises on the communication
port separation motor. line, control PWB trouble, connector connection failure,
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and harness breakage, disconnection of an AC cable to a
the sensor. downstream unit
Check & Remedy “Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connection between the
stacker and the downstream unit of the stacker.
Replace the control PWB of the downstream unit of the
F0-54 Finisher trimmer paper exit separation stacker.”
motor section abnormality (FTM104)
Trouble content The separation operation of the paper exit roller of the
F0-61 Stacker first series offset unit abnormal-
trimmer unit is abnormal. ity
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of Trouble content “Abnormal operation of the offset motor which shifts the
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. stack tray paper exit roller
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer paper Offset home sensor detection trouble”
exit separation motor. Detail PCU
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble,
the sensor. motor trouble, sensor trouble
Check & Remedy “Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the offset motor.
Use SIM03-60 to check the offset home sensor signal.
Replace the control PWB. Check connection of the
F0-55 Finisher trimmer bundle press motor connector and harness from the control PWB to the offset
section abnormality (FTM105) motor. Check connection of the connector and harness
from the control PWB to the offset home
sensor.”
Trouble content The nip and separation operations of the bundle press
roller of the trimmer unit are abnormal.
Detail PCU F0-62 Stacker first series front side jogger
abnormality
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the trimmer bundle
press motor. Trouble content Abnormal operation of the front side jogger motor for
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor and driving the alignment plate (front side)
the sensor. Alignment plate (front side) home position front side
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part. jogger home sensor detection trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble,
motor trouble, sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the front side
jogger motor.
Use SIM03-60 to check the front side jogger home sensor
signal.
connector and harness from the control PWB to the front
side jogger motor. Check connection of the connector and
harness from the control PWB to the
front side jogger home sensor.
F0-63 Stacker first series rear side jogger F0-65 Stacker first series stack tray abnormal-
abnormality ity
Trouble content Abnormal operation of the rear side jogger motor for Trouble content Abnormal operation of the stack tray lift motor
driving the alignment plate (rear side) Abnormality of the tray DC motor encoder sensor for
Alignment plate (rear side) home position rear side jogger detecting the motor rotation
home sensor detection trouble Tray limit switch (upper limit, lower limit) operation
Detail PCU Stack tray home sensor abnormality, stack tray 25% load
Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble, position sensor abnormality, stack tray 50% load position
motor trouble, sensor trouble sensor abnormality, stack tray 75% load position sensor
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the rear side abnormality, stack tray 100% load position sensor
jogger motor. abnormality, stack tray extendable position sensor
Use SIM03-60 to check the rear side jogger home sensor abnormality
signal. Detail PCU
Replace the control PWB. Check connection of the Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble,
connector and harness from the control PWB to the rear motor trouble, sensor trouble
side jogger motor. Check connection of the connector and Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the stack tray lift
harness from the control PWB to the motor.
rear side jogger home sensor. Use SIM03-60 to check the tray DC motor encoder
sensor signal.
Use SIM03-60 to check the operation of the tray limit
F0-64 Stacker first series lead edge jogger switch (upper limit, lower limit).
Use SIM03-60 to check each tray position sensor signal
abnormality and to check that two or more sensors are not
simultaneously ON.
Trouble content Abnormal operation of the lead edge jogger motor for Replace the control PWB. Check connection of the
driving the alignment plate (lead edge) connector and harness from the control PWB to the stack
Alignment plate (lead edge) home position lead edge tray lift motor. Check connection of the connector and
jogger home sensor detection trouble harness from the control PWB to the
Detail PCU tray DC motor encoder sensor. Check connection of the
Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble, connector and harness from the control PWB to the tray
motor trouble, sensor trouble limit switch (upper limit, lower limit). Check connection of
the connector and harness from the control PWB to each
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the lead edge
tray position sensor.
jogger motor.
Use SIM03-60 to check the lead edge jogger home
sensor signal.
Replace the control PWB. Check connection of the F0-70 Communication trouble between the fin-
connector and harness from the control PWB to the lead isher and the folding unit
edge jogger motor. Check connection of the connector
and harness from the control PWB to the
lead edge jogger home sensor. Trouble content Communication trouble between the finisher and the
folding unit.
No response for a command from the folding unit.
Detail PCU
disconnection of connector or harness.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connection between the
finisher and the folding unit. Replace the control PWB of
the folding unit.
F0-71 Folding unit lead edge holding guide

motor section abnormality (FLM10)
Trouble content The operations of the folding unit lead edge holding guide
is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit lead
edge holding guide motor.
the sensor.
F0-72 Folding unit backup RAM trouble
Trouble content Data cannot be written into the backup RAM of the folding
unit. The red values are abnormal.
Detail PCU
Cause Folding unit control PWB trouble, EEPROM chip
breakdown.
Check & Remedy Replace the folding unit control PWB.
F0-73 Folding unit power fan abnormality F0-80 Finisher power cooling fan motor abnor-
mality (FNFAN101)
Trouble content Cooling fan abnormality in the power unit section of the
folding unit
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the power unit section
Detail PCU of the finisher is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Detail PCU
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan motor. trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Check connection from the control PWB to the fan motor.
F0-74 Folding unit folding tray paper exit

motor section abnormality (FLM14) F0-81 Finisher upper tray fan abnormality
(FNFAN103)
Trouble content The paper exit operation to the folding unit is abnormal.
Detail PCU Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the upper tray of the
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, disconnection of finisher is abnormal.
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
folding tray paper exit motor. trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the upper tray fan.
the sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan motor.
F0-75 Folding unit upper stopper motor F0-82 Finisher lower tray fan abnormality
section abnormality (FLM8) (FNFAN104)
Trouble content The operation of the upper stopper of the folding unit is
Trouble content The operation of the cooling fan in the lower tray of the
abnormal.
finisher is abnormal.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the folding unit
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the lower tray fan.
upper stopper motor.
the sensor.
F0-83 Finisher paper guide motor section
F0-76 3-fold stopper motor section in the fold- abnormality (FNM120)
ing unit is abnormal (FLM9)
Trouble content The operation of the paper lead edge guide unit at the
paper exit port of the finisher is abnormal.
Trouble content The operation of the 3-fold stopper in the folding unit is
Detail PCU
abnormal.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper guide
motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the 3-fold stopper
motor in the folding unit.
the sensor.
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor.
the sensor.
F0-84 Finisher grip section abnormality
F0-77 Folding unit transport motor section (FNM117)
abnormality (FLM11)
Trouble content The bundle grip operation when discharging paper bundle
from the staple compiler of the finisher is abnormal.
Trouble content The folding and transport operations of the folding unit
Detail PCU
are abnormal.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the gripper motor.
harness or connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-41 to check the operation of the folding unit
the sensor.
transport motor.
the sensor.
F0-85 Booklet finisher detection trouble F0-92 Stacker second series front side jogger
abnormality
Trouble content Booklet relay PWB connection detection abnormally
Detail PCU Trouble content Abnormal operation of the front side jogger motor for
Cause Booklet relay PWB trouble, Finisher control PWB trouble, driving the alignment plate (front side)
disconnection of harness or connector, Booklet maker Alignment plate (front side) home position front side
mode setting failure of system setting. jogger home sensor detection trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection from Booklet relay PWB to Finisher Detail PCU
control PWB, Replace the Booklet relay PWB, Replace Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble,
the Finisher control PWB, Check the Booklet Maker mode motor trouble, sensor trouble
of system setting, Check if Sim26-50 “J” is “1”. Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the front side
jogger motor.
Use SIM03-60 to check the front side jogger home sensor
F0-86 Finisher discharged paper hold motor signal.
section abnormality (FNM114) Replace the control PWB. Check connection of the
connector and harness from the control PWB to the front
side jogger motor. Check connection of the connector and
Trouble content The operation of the paper hold lever at the paper exit harness from the control PWB to the
port of the finisher is abnormal. front side jogger home sensor.
Detail PCU
harness or connector, HP sensor breakdown. F0-93 Stacker second series rear side jogger
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the discharged
paper hold motor.
abnormality
the sensor. Trouble content Abnormal operation of the rear side jogger motor for
Replace the control PWB, the motor, and the sensor part. driving the alignment plate (rear side)
Alignment plate (rear side) home position rear side jogger
home sensor detection trouble
F0-90 Communication trouble between the Detail PCU
stacker second series and the down- Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble,
motor trouble, sensor trouble
stream units. Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the rear side
jogger motor.
Trouble content Communication trouble with a downstream unit Use SIM03-60 to check the rear side jogger home sensor
Detail PCU signal.
Cause Communication trouble with the stacker and the Replace the control PWB. Check connection of the
downstream unit of the stacker connector and harness from the control PWB to the rear
Stacker unit ID setting failure (Setting failure of the DIP side jogger motor.
switch on the control PWB), noises on the communication Check connection of the connector and harness from the
line, control PWB trouble, connector control PWB to the rear side jogger home sensor.
connection failure, harness breakage, disconnection of an
AC cable to a downstream unit
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connection between the F0-94 Stacker second series lead edge jogger
stacker and the downstream unit of the stacker. abnormality
Replace the control PWB of the downstream unit of the
stacker.
Trouble content Abnormal operation of the lead edge jogger motor for
driving the alignment plate (lead edge)
Alignment plate (lead edge) home position lead edge
F0-91 Stacker second series offset unit abnor- jogger home sensor detection trouble
mality Detail PCU
Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble,
Trouble content Abnormal operation of the offset motor which shifts the motor trouble, sensor trouble
stack tray paper exit roller Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the lead edge
Offset home sensor detection trouble jogger motor.
Detail PCU Use SIM03-60 to check the lead edge jogger home
Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble, sensor signal.
motor trouble, sensor trouble Replace the control PWB.
Check connection of the connector and harness from the
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the offset motor.
control PWB to the lead edge jogger motor.
Use SIM03-60 to check the offset home sensor signal.
control PWB to the lead edge jogger home sensor.
connector and harness from the control PWB to the offset
motor.
control PWB to the offset home sensor.
F0-95 Stacker second series stack tray abnor- F1-55 After-process unit ROM trouble
mality
Trouble detection PCU
Trouble content Abnormal operation of the stack tray lift motor Cause Main firmware trouble.
Abnormality of the tray DC motor encoder sensor for Conflict the main firmware version and the boot version.
detecting the motor rotation Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware of the finisher.
Tray limit switch (upper limit, lower limit) operation
Stack tray home sensor abnormality, stack tray 25% load
position sensor abnormality, stack tray 50% load position F1-60 Communication trouble between
sensor abnormality, stack tray 75% load position sensor peripheral devices (Inserter detection)
abnormality, stack tray 100% load position sensor
abnormality, stack tray extendable position sensor
abnormality Trouble content Communication abnormality between the units connected
Detail PCU to the downstream of the inserter.
Cause Control PWB trouble, disconnection of connector trouble, No response for a command from the inserter. Motor
motor trouble, sensor trouble abnormality.
Check & Remedy Use SIM03-61 to check the operation of the stack tray lift Detail PCU
motor. Cause Noise on the communication line
Use SIM03-60 to check the tray DC motor encoder Control PWB trouble.
sensor signal. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Use SIM03-60 to check the operation of the tray limit Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
switch (upper limit, lower limit). Check connection of the connector with the downstream
Use SIM03-60 to check each tray position sensor signal units of the inserter.
and to check that two or more sensors are not Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of the
simultaneously ON. inserter.
connector and harness from the control PWB to the stack
tray lift motor. Check connection of the connector and F1-64 No. 1 pickup motor trouble
harness from the control PWB to the
tray DC motor encoder sensor. Check connection of the
connector and harness from the control PWB to the tray Trouble content Abnormality of the paper feed roller driving motor in the
limit switch (upper limit, lower limit). Check connection of upper side paper feed section of the inserter
the connector and harness from the control PWB to each Detail PCU
tray position sensor. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position sensor
breakdown, connection harness / connector connection
trouble.
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 1 pickup
motor.
error Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness F1-65 No. 2 pickup motor trouble
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Trouble content Abnormality of the paper feed roller driving motor in the
PCU PWB trouble.
lower side paper feed section of the inserter
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Detail PCU
finisher and the PCU PWB.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position sensor
Replace the finisher control PWB.
breakdown, connection harness / connector connection
trouble.
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2 pickup
motor.
F1-21 Abnormality of relay unit fan motor Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
inside the machine (PDCF) Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Trouble content The operation of the relay unit fan motor inside the
machine is abnormal. F1-66 No. 1 lift motor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Trouble content Abnormality of the tray lift-up driving motor in the upper
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. side paper feed section of the inserter
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the relay unit fan Detail PCU
inside the machine. Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position sensor
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan motor. breakdown, connection harness / connector connection
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. trouble.
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 1 lift
motor.
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
model is installed.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-67 No. 2 lift motor trouble F1-99 Decurler unit fan 3
(Transport motor cooling fan)
Trouble content Abnormality of the tray-lift-up driving motor in the lower abnormality (DCFAN101)
side paper feed section of the inserter
Detail PCU
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is abnormal.
Cause Motor lock, control PWB trouble, home position sensor
breakdown, connection harness / connector connection Detail PCU
trouble. Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB
Check & Remedy Use Sim. 3-31 to check the operation of the No. 2 lift trouble, disconnection of harness or connector.
motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler unit
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor. fan 3 (Transport motor cooling fan).
Replace the control PWB and the sensor part. Check connection from the control PWB to the fan motor.
F1-90 Communication trouble between the

F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)
decurler and the downstream units.
Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for a
Trouble content Communication trouble between the decurler and the
certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it is
units connected to the downstream of the decurler.
detected as a trouble.
Cause Noise on the communication line, control PWB trouble, Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K)
disconnection of connector or harness. and the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
Check connection of the connector between the decurler PCU PWB trouble.
unit and the downstream units of the decurler.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp (K)
Replace the control PWB of the downstream units of the
[DL_K].
decurler.
Check the discharge lamp PWB (K).
Check the harness and the connector.
F1-96 Decurler transport motor abnormality
(DCM100)
F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)
Trouble content The transport operation of the decurler transport motor is
abnormal. Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for a
Detail PCU certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it is
Cause Motor driver IC overcurrent detection, overheat detection. detected as a trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler Detail PCU
transport motor. Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (C)
Replace the control PWB. and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F1-97 Decurler unit fan 1 (Upper cooling fan) Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp (C)
[DL_C].
abnormality (DCFAN100) Check the discharge lamp PWB (C).
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is abnormal. Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M)
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler unit
fan 1 (Upper cooling fan). Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for a
Check connection from the control PWB to the fan motor. certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it is
Replace the control PWB. Replace the fan motor. detected as a trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (M)
F1-98 Decurler unit fan 2 (Lower cooling fan) and the PCU PWB.
abnormality (DCFAN103) Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp (M)
Trouble content The operation of the fan in the decurler unit is abnormal.
[DL_M].
Detail PCU Check the discharge lamp PWB (M).
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, control PWB Check the harness and the connector.
trouble, disconnection of harness or connector. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-51 to check the operation of the decurler unit
fan 2 (Lower cooling fan).
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y)
Trouble content When the discharge lamp open sensor is kept ON for a Trouble content
certain time from turning ON the discharge lamp, it is Detail PCU
detected as a trouble. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Detail PCU Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y) Developing unit trouble.
and the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the discharge lamp (Y) harness.
[DL_Y]. Replace the developing unit.
Check the discharge lamp PWB (Y). Replace the PCU PWB.
F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble
F2-39 Process temperature sensor trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment trouble.
Detail PCU Color image density sensor trouble.
Cause Process thermistor trouble. Sensor harness and connector connection trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble. Image density sensor dirt.
PCU PWB trouble. Calibration plate dirt.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor. Transfer unit lift operation trouble
Check connection of the process thermistor harness and PCU PWB trouble.
the connector. Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the sensor harness and the
connector.
Clean the image density sensor.
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) Replace the calibration plate.
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Trouble content
Check connection of the sensor connector and the Detail PCU
harness. Cause The LSU temperature is outside of -28 degrees C - 78
Replace the developing unit. degrees C.
Replace the PCU PWB. LSU thermistor trouble.
LSU thermistor harness and connector connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) LSU control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content Replace the LSU.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble. F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Trouble content
Check connection of the sensor connector and the Detail PCU
harness. Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Replace the developing unit. Drum phase sensor harness and connector connection
Replace the PCU PWB. trouble
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K".
Replace the drum phase sensor.
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness and
Trouble content the connector.
Detail PCU Repair the drum drive section.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality. Replace the PCU PWB.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble (C) F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (K)

Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. Cause Toner motor trouble.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector connection Toner density sensor trouble.
trouble Connector/harness trouble.
Drum drive section trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C", Developing unit trouble.
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y". Tone hopper section trouble
Replace the drum phase sensor. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness and Replace the toner density sensor.
the connector. Connector and harness check.
Repair the drum drive section. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the toner hopper section.
F2-52 CL drum phase sensor trouble (M)

F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Harness and connector connection trouble. Cause Toner motor trouble.
Drum drive section trouble. Toner density sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C", PCU PWB trouble.
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y". Toner cartridge trouble.
Replace the drum phase sensor. Developing unit trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Tone hopper section trouble
Repair the drum drive section. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the toner density sensor.
Connector and harness check.
F2-53 CL drum phase sensor trouble (Y) Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the toner hopper section.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble. F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M)
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_C", Detail PCU
"DHPD_M", "DHPD_Y". Cause Toner motor trouble.
Replace the drum phase sensor. Toner density sensor trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Connector/harness trouble.
Repair the drum drive section. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Toner cartridge trouble.
Tone hopper section trouble
F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor.
(HUD_M/TH_M) Connector and harness check.
Trouble content Replace the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU Replace the developing unit.
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble. Check the toner hopper section.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
harness and the connector.
F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)

Cause Toner motor trouble. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB and
PCU PWB trouble. toner cartridge
Toner cartridge trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Tone hopper section trouble Check the connector and the harness between the PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. PWB and the toner cartridge.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Connector and harness check.
Replace the PCU PWB. F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)
Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the toner hopper section. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB and
toner cartridge
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit Check the connector and the harness between the PCU
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) PWB and the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M)
Trouble content
F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB and
Detail PCU toner cartridge
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner cartridge trouble. Check the connector and the harness between the PCU
PCU PWB trouble. PWB and the toner cartridge.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)
F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB and
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.) toner cartridge
Toner cartridge trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Check the connector and the harness between the PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. PWB and the toner cartridge.
F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) F2-78 Registration/BK image density sensor
trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit Detail PCU
detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor
Toner cartridge trouble.
sensitivity adjustment trouble).
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Image density (resist) sensor connector and harness
Replace the PCU PWB. connection trouble
Image density (registration) sensor dirt.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness of the
image density (resist) sensor.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor.
Clean or replace the transfer belt.
F2-79 Temperature thermistor of transfer unit F2-A3 After-transfer discharge lamp open
trouble trouble (Y)
Trouble content Temperature detection is out of range. (Out of -28 to 78 Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept
degrees C) open for a specified time from turning ON the after-
Detail PCU transfer discharge lamp.
Cause Transfer thermistor trouble. Detail PCU
Transfer thermistor connector connection trouble. Cause Connection trouble between the after-transfer discharge
PCU PWB trouble. lamp PWB and the PCU PWB
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness of After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble
transfer thermistor. PCU PWB trouble
Check PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer
Replace transfer thermistor or PCU PWB. discharge lamp (Y) [DL2_Y].
Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (Y).
F2-A0 After-transfer discharge lamp open Replace the PCU PWB.
trouble (K)
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept
open for a specified time from turning ON the after-
Trouble content
transfer discharge lamp.
Cause Connection trouble between the after-transfer discharge Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
CLUD1 sensor trouble.
lamp PWB and the PCU PWB
After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of
discharge lamp (K) [DL2_K].
LUD1.
Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (K).
Replace the lift unit.
F2-A1 After-transfer discharge lamp open F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
trouble (C)
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
open for a specified time from turning ON the after-
CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Connection trouble between the after-transfer discharge Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
lamp PWB and the PCU PWB Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble Replace the lift unit.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer
discharge lamp (C) [DL2_C].
Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (C). F3-32 Main body cassette 3 lift trouble
Trouble content C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU
F2-A2 After-transfer discharge lamp open Cause C3LUD sensor trouble.
trouble (M) Cassette 3 lift motor trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB, the
lift unit, and the paper feed unit
Trouble content The after-transfer discharge lamp open sensor is kept Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD.
open for a specified time from turning ON the after- Check the lift unit.
Detail PCU
Cause Connection trouble between the after-transfer discharge F3-42 Main body cassette 4 lift trouble
lamp PWB and the PCU PWB
After-transfer discharge lamp PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble Trouble content C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-4 to check lighting of the after-transfer Detail PCU
discharge lamp (M) [DL2_M]. Cause C4LUD sensor trouble.
Check the after-transfer discharge lamp PWB (M). Cassette 4 lift motor trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB, the
Replace the PCU PWB. lift unit, and the paper feed unit
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD.
Check the lift unit.
2 : ‘19/March.
F9-00 Communication error between MFP and H2-02 Non-contact thermistor upper sub
the printer section when booting detection thermistor open
(TH_US1_AD2)
Trouble content Booting of the printer section cannot be recognized when
booting.
Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Detail MFP
Detail PCU
Cause MFPC (section) PWB trouble.
Cause Thermistor trouble
MFPC (section) PWB - printer (section) PWB connection
2 trouble.
Control PWB trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC (section) PWB. AC power trouble
Check connection between the MFPC (section) PWB and Fusing unit not installed.
the printer (section) PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector from
the thermistor to the control PWB.
FF-00 Double feed detection trouble(PCU)

H2-03 Non-contact thermistor upper main
Trouble content Double feed sensor abnormality detection compensation thermistor open
Detail Printer (section) PWB
(TH_UM_CS)
Cause Double feed sensor abnormality.
Harness / circuit trouble related to the double feed sensor.
Insertion failure of the drawer connector of the PS unit. Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Check & Remedy Check the circuit related to the double feed sensor and Detail PCU
the harness and the connector. Cause Thermistor trouble
Replace the double feed detection PWB and the sensor. Control PWB trouble
AC power trouble
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble Fusing unit not installed.
(TH_UM_AD2) Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector from
Trouble content
Detail PCU H2-04 Non-contact thermistor lower main
Cause Thermistor trouble compensation thermistor open
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble (TH_LM1_AD1)
Fusing unit not installed Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Detail PCU
Replace the thermistor.
Control PWB trouble
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
AC power trouble
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Fusing unit not installed.
H2-01 Non-contact thermistor lower main
detection thermistor open
(TH_LM1_AD2) H2-05 Non-contact thermistor upper sub
compensation thermistor open
Trouble content The thermistor is open. (TH_US1_AD1)
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Control PWB trouble
Detail PCU
AC power trouble
Control PWB trouble
AC power trouble
H2-06 Upper edge section thermistor open H3-02 Fusing section high temperature
(TH_US2) trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content The thermistor is open. Trouble content

Cause Thermistor trouble Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Control PWB trouble Thermistor trouble
Fusing section connector connection trouble PCU PWB trouble
AC power trouble Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Fusing unit not installed. HL control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector from Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
the thermistor to the control PWB. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater
lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H2-07 Lower edge section thermistor open Replace the thermistor.
(TH_LM2) Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Trouble content The thermistor is open. Replace the HL control PWB.
Detail PCU
Control PWB trouble H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
Fusing section connector connection trouble trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
AC power trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector from Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level
the thermistor to the control PWB. within the specified time from turning ON the power relay.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
trouble (TH_UM) Thermostat trouble.
Trouble content HL control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Power unit trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Thermistor trouble Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
PCU PWB trouble Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble lamp.
HL control PWB trouble Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater
Replace the thermostat.
lamp.
Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit.
harness.
Replace the HL control PWB. H4-01 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_LM)
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level
trouble (TH_LM) within the specified time from turning ON the power relay.
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Thermistor trouble.
Detail PCU Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermostat trouble.
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
HL control PWB trouble.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Power unit trouble.
HL control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
lamp.
lamp.
Replace the heater lamp.
harness.
H4-02 Fusing section low temperature H4-32 Upper sub thermistor differential input
trouble (TH_US) abnormality (TH_US1)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level Trouble content The upper sub compensation thermistor and the upper
within the specified time from turning ON the power relay. sub differential thermistor do not exceed the specified
Detail PCU value within the specified time from turning ON the upper
Cause Thermistor trouble. sub heater lamp.
Heater lamp trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble. Cause The upper sub heater lamp does not turn ON. Thermistor
Thermostat trouble. breakdown, harness trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
HL control PWB trouble. heater lamp.
Power unit trouble. When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. thermistor and its harness.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU
Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the PWB.
heater lamp. When the lamp does not light up, check for disconnection
Replace the thermistor. in the heater lamp and breakage of the thermostat.
Replace the heater lamp. Check the interlock switch.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and the
Replace the thermostat. PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam
H4-30 Upper main thermistor differential Trouble content
input abnormality (TH_UM) Detail PCU
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
Trouble content The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not remains.)
exceed the specified value within the specified time from POD1 sensor trouble
turning ON the HL_UM. Fusing unit installation trouble
Detail PCU POD1 sensor connector and harness connection trouble
Cause HL_UM does not turn on. PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor trouble. Fusing unit, drive section trouble
Harness trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
PCU PWB trouble Check installation of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
Check or repair the fusing drive section.
heater lamp.
Check connection of the POD1 sensor connector and the
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the
harness.
thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU
PWB.
When the lamp does not light up, check for disconnection
in the heater lamp and breakage of the thermostat.
Check the interlock switch. H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and the (TH_UM_AD2)
PCU PWB.
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level
within the specified time from stopping a job due to fall in
the fusing temperature.
H4-31 Lower main thermistor differential
Detail PCU
input abnormality (TH_LM1) Cause Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
Trouble content The lower main compensation thermistor and the lower PCU PWB trouble.
main differential thermistor do not exceed the specified Thermostat trouble.
value within the specified time from turning ON the lower Connector, harness connection trouble.
main heater lamp. HL control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Power unit trouble.
Cause The lower main heater lamp does not turn ON. Thermistor Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
breakdown, harness trouble, PCU PWB trouble Replace the heater lamp.
Check & Remedy Use SIM05-02 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
When the heater lamp flashes normally, check the
thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the PCU
PWB.
lamp.
When the lamp does not light up, check for disconnection
in the heater lamp and breakage of the thermostat.
Check the interlock switch.
Check the lamp control circuit of the AC PWB and the
PCU PWB.
H7-11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
(TH_LM)
Trouble content A lock signal is not detected within the specified time in
ON operation of the paper feed motor after warming-up or
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified level
canceling a jam.
within the specified time from stopping a job due to fall in
the fusing temperature. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Paper feed motor trouble
Paper feed motor harness and connector connection
trouble
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
Connector, harness connection trouble. motor.
HL control PWB trouble. Replace the paper feed motor.
Power unit trouble. Check connection of the paper feed motor harness and
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. the connector.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
Replace the power unit. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the heater fusing motor.
lamp.
Detail PCU
Cause Fusing motor trouble
Fusing motor harness and connector connection trouble
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing motor.
Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified time. Replace the Fusing motor.
Detail SCU Check connection of the fusing motor harness and the
Cause Scanner unit trouble. connection.
SCU PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble. L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble
Scanner motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. Trouble content A change in the primary transfer position sensor cannot
Replace the scanner unit. be detected within the specified time in lifting operation of
Replace the SCU PWB. the primary transfer unit.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Detail PCU
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble
Replace the scanner motor.
Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
L3-00 Scanner return trouble Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified time. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the
Detail SCU transfer unit.
Cause Scanner unit trouble Install the primary transfer belt unit.
SCU PWB trouble Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Scanner control PWB trouble Clean the transfer unit position sensor.
Harness and connector connection trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Scanner home position sensor trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Scanner motor trouble Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the SCU PWB. L4-07 Transfer belt motor trouble
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Replace the scanner motor. transfer belt motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Transfer belt trouble.
Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and
the transfer belt motor.
Control PWB trouble.
Circuit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the transfer belt
motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
PWB and the transfer belt motor.
L4-08 Waste toner transport motor lock L4-19 Drum motor lock trouble (M)
Trouble content The waste toner lock sensor is detected during rotation of Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
the drum motor. drum motor (M).
Cause Waste toner transport motor trouble. Cause Drum motor trouble
Waste toner transport pipe clogging Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB and
Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and the drum motor
the waste toner transport motor. Control circuit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the waste toner Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum motor.
transport motor (WTM). Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
Check the waste toner transport pipe for clogging. PWB and the developing motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the PCU Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor.
PWB and the waste toner transport motor.
L4-20 Drum motor lock trouble (Y)

L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Trouble content A change in the fusing pressure release sensor signal drum motor (Y).
cannot be detected within the specified time after Detail PCU
outputting the fusing pressure release motor. Cause Drum motor trouble
Detail PCU Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB and
Cause Fusing pressure release sensor trouble. the drum motor
Fusing pressure release motor trouble. Control circuit trouble
Pressure release drive gear and pressure release idle Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum motor.
gear trouble. Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
PCU PWB trouble. PWB and the developing motor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
Replace the pressure release drive gear and the pressure L4-25 2nd transfer belt motor trouble
release idle gear.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
2nd transfer belt motor.
Detail MFP
L4-17 Drum motor lock trouble (K) Cause 2nd transfer belt motor trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble between PCU
PWB and 2nd transfer belt motor
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the Control circuit trouble
drum motor (K). Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the 2nd transfer
Detail PCU belt motor.
Cause Drum motor trouble Check the 2nd transfer belt motor, and replace if
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB and necessary.
the drum motor Check connection of the harness and connectors of the
Control circuit trouble 2nd transfer belt motor, and replace if necessary.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum motor. Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
PWB and the developing motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor. L4-30 Controller fan motor / HDD cooling fan
motor trouble
L4-18 Drum motor lock trouble (C)
controller fan motor.
Detail MFP
drum motor (C).
Cause Fan motor trouble, controller PWB trouble, SCN-Mother
Detail PCU
PWB trouble, fan motor/SCN-Mother PWB harness
Cause Drum motor trouble connection trouble, controller PWB/SCN-Mother PWB
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB and connection trouble, control circuit trouble
the drum motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM06-02 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Control circuit trouble
Check the controller PWB, the SCN-Mother PWB, and
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-01 to check the operation of the drum motor. the harness and the connector between the fan motor
Check the harness and the connector between the PCU and the SCN-Mother PWB.
PWB and the developing motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the drum motor.
L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan F trouble
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan F operation.
Detail PCU
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of the
fan connector or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
L4-32 Power source cooling fan 1 trouble L4-38 Paper exit cooling fan2 F trouble
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not
specified time in the power cooling fan 1 operation. detected within the specified time.
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of the Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of the
ozone exhaust fan or other trouble. fan connector or other trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
PWB and the fan. PWB and the fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
L4-33 Machine ventilation fan BA trouble L4-40 Ozone fan motor 1 trouble
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ozone
specified time in the machine ventilation fan BA fan motor 1.
operation. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and
Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of the the fan motor.
ozone exhaust fan or other trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU Fan motor trouble.
PWB and the fan. The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. (No
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. power supply to the fan motor)
L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble PWB and the fan motor.
Replace the fan motor.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan operation L4-41 Ozone fan motor 2 trouble
signal is not detected within the specified time.
LSU fan trouble.
Harness, connector trouble. Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ozone
LSU control PWB trouble. fan motor 2.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the fan operation. Detail PCU
Check the LSU fan, and replace if necessary. Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and
Check the harness/connector, and replace if necessary. the fan motor.
Check the LSU control PWB, and replace if necessary. PCU PWB trouble.
Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. (No
L4-35 Paper exit exhaust fan trouble power supply to the fan motor)
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not PWB and the fan motor.
detected within the specified time. Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU Replace the fan motor.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU L4-42 Ozone fan motor 3 trouble
PWB and the fan.
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not
detected within the specified time.
L4-36 Fusing cooling fan trouble Detail PCU
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
detected within the specified time. PWB and the fan.
Detail PCU Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan R trouble
PWB and the fan.
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not
Detail PCU
PWB and the fan.
L4-44 Power source cooling fan 2 trouble L4-57 Toner bottle cooling fan motor trouble
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the power Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected within the
source cooling fan 2. specified time in the toner bottle cooling fan operation.
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of the
the fan motor. fan connector or other trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
Fan motor trouble. PWB and the fan motor.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. (No Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the power.
power supply to the fan motor)
Check the harness and the connector between the PCU L4-58 Paper exit cooling fan2 trouble
PWB and the fan motor.
Replace the fan motor. Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not
Detail PCU
L4-48 ADU transport cooling fan motor F trou- Cause The fan does not rotate because of disconnection of the
ble Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector between the PCU
PWB and the fan.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
transport cooling fan motor F.
Detail PCU
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and L4-60 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor
the fan motor. F trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. (No Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not
power supply to the fan motor) detected within the specified time.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Detail PCU
Check the harness and the connector between the PCU Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB and
PWB and the fan motor. the fan motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the fan motor. Fan motor trouble.
L4-49 ADU transport cooling fan motor R trou- Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
ble PWB and the fan motor.
Trouble content The lock signal is detected during rotation of the ADU Replace the fan motor.
transport cooling fan motor R.
Detail PCU
Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB and L4-61 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor
the fan motor. R trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Fan motor trouble.
The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble. (No Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not
power supply to the fan motor) detected within the specified time.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Detail PCU
Check the harness and the connector between the PCU Cause Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB and
PWB and the fan motor. the fan motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the fan motor. Fan motor trouble.
L4-56 Paper exit cooling fan2 R trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
PWB and the fan motor.
Trouble content When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not Replace the PCU PWB.
detected within the specified time. Replace the fan motor.
Detail PCU
PWB and the fan.
L4-63 2nd transfer belt skew correction motor L8-11 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave
trouble not detected
Trouble content The initial signal of 2nd transfer belt skew correction Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected.
motor is not detected within the specified time. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Cause 2nd transfer belt skew correction motor trouble. Power unit trouble.
2nd transfer belt skew correction motor home position Harness trouble.
sensor trouble. Disconnection of the AC cord 2.
2nd transfer unit is not installed. AC SUB PWB trouble.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB, Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
the skew correction motor and the home position sensor. Replace the power unit.
Check & Remedy Replace the skew correction motor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor. Check the connection of the AC cord 2.
Check the harness and the connector between the PCU Replace the AC SUB PWB
PWB, the skew correction motor and the home position
sensor.
L8-12 AC Cord 2 (power for fusing) full wave
signal width abnormality
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
Trouble content The frequency of the full wave signal is judged as
Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM
abnormal.
within the specified time after starting rotation of the
Detail PCU
polygon motor.
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
Power unit trouble.
Cause Polygon motor trouble. Harness trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble. AC SUB PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU.
Replace the AC SUB PWB.
Check the power waveform.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error

L8-20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected. SCN mother board
Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Power unit trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Cause SCN mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection
Replace the power unit. trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. MFPC PWB trouble.
SCN mother board trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the SCN mother board PWB
L8-02 Full wave signal error and the MFPC PWB.
Check the ground of the main unit.
Trouble content Replace the SCN mother board.
Detail PCU
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
detected. PC-- Personal counter not detected
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or 45Hz or
less.)
Detail MFP
PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. The personal counter is not detected.
Power frequency, waveform abnormality. SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the power unit. Replace the SCU PWB.
Check the power waveform.
U1-01 Battery trouble
Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall

Detail MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check and Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
Remedy 2.5V or above.
Replace the battery.
2 : ‘19/March.
U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error U2-40 mSATA SSD system storage data area
error
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble Detail MFP
EEPROM socket contact trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Cause A file error occurs in the mSATA SSD system storage 2
data partition.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the HDD
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
are written into the mSATA SSD and the machine is
automatically booted.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
Check the power environment.
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error
Trouble content
U2-05 Erroneous detection of account Detail MFP
management data Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data area,
disabling backup of the saved file of the machine
adjustment values in the mSATA SSD.
Trouble content HDD trouble
Detail MFP MFPC PWB trouble
Cause Breakage of the authentication DB is detected. Check & Remedy Backup the data by following the procedure for the
Check & Remedy When breakage of the authentication DB is detected, the trouble which can be released by turning OFF and
MFP is rebooted and the DB tables are reconstructed, ON the power of the main unit, and format the HDD 2
generating "U2-05". by SIM62.
The message, however, is not displayed and only the Or, replace the HDD and perform SIM16.
trouble history is saved.
The authentication data are cleared.
U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system
storage data area) error
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check
sum error Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in the
Detail MFP mSATA SSD and the HDD cannot be found or is broken.
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble Both of the mSATA SSD set data and the HDD system
EEPROM socket contact trouble saved data area are broken.
MFPC PWB trouble Check & Remedy Backup the data by following the procedure for the
Strong external noises. mSATA SSD and the HDD breakage and format the
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing data HDD by SIM62. 2
(about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the EEPROM.) Or, replace the HDD and perform SIM16.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Perform the mechanical adjustment because the
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after mechanical adjustment values are formatted.
perform the works.)
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check
sum error
U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB
manufacturing No. data inconsistency Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved in Cause HDD trouble
the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB. MFPC PWB trouble
Detail MFP Strong external noises.
Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB, the Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error (address
EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before book, image send system registration data (senders
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB. record, meta data)) and register again.
MFPC PWB trouble Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the HDD.
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was mounted (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
on the PWB before replacement is mounted on the new replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
PWB. Manual, and perform the works.)
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
perform the works.)
U2-60 Watermark check error U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error

Detail MFP Detail PCU
Cause Watermark data trouble Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
HDD trouble PCU PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble EEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the HDD. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum error
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after detection data are calculated again to reset the proper
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service check sum data.)
Manual, and perform the works.)
U5-00 Document feed unit communication

U2-70 OCR dictionary check error error
Trouble detection MFP
Trouble content
Cause OCR dictionary error Detail SCU
Check & Remedy Use Sim49-6 to install the OCR dictionary data.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power.
Trouble content Replace the SCU PWB.
Detail SCU Replace the DSPF PWB.
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
SCU PWB trouble
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble U5-16 Document feed unit fan trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Replace the SCU PWB. Trouble content
Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket. Detail SCU
Check the SIM adjustment value of the following items, Cause When the fan is operated, the fan operation signal is not
and adjust again if they are improper. detected within the specified time.
• Scanner-related adjustments Fan motor trouble.
• Touch panel-related adjustments Connector, harness connection trouble.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check that the fan is rotating.
Replace the fan motor.
U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the DSPF PWB.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. U5-20 SPF paper feed transport motor trouble
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SCU PWB trouble. Trouble content
EEPROM socket contact trouble. Detail
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. Cause SPF paper feed transport motor trouble
Replace the SCU PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Check & Remedy Use Sim2-3 to check the operation
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum error
Check the SPF paper feed transport motor and
detection data are calculated again to reset the proper
connection of the connector and the harness
check sum data.)
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error U5-30 Document feed unit tray lift up trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Detail PCU
Cause STUD does not turn ON 5 times continuously within the
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
specified time.
PCU PWB trouble
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. DSPF PWB trouble.
Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
adjust again if they are improper.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
U5-31 Document feed unit tray lift down U6-22 LCC 24V power abnormality
trouble
Trouble content The DV 24V power is not supplied to the LCC / A3 2-
stage LCT.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail SCU
Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector and
Cause STLD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
the harness.
STUD/STLD sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble / A3 2-stage LCT control PWB
trouble. Power unit trouble
DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the power line.
Check & Remedy Replace the STUD/STLD sensor.
Check the 24V voltage with the power unit, the LCC
control PWB, and the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
U6-09 LCC lift motor trouble U6-23 A3 LCC tray descending trouble
(Reverse winding detection) (A3 LCC)
Trouble content No variation in the motor rotation sensor signal (encoder
sign) is detected within the specified time after booting or Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the LCC tray is reversely
stopping the LCC lift motor. wound. (A3 LCC / A3 2-stage LCT)
Detail PCU The lower limit position (full state) is not detected within
Cause LCC lift motor rotation sensor trouble the specified time (A4: 10sec, A3: 8sec) from the start of
LCC control PWB trouble descending the LCT1 tray.
LCC lift mechanism trouble (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
LCC lift motor trouble Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the LCC Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON
sensor and the lift motor. The wire is reversely wound.
Check the LCC lift motor rotation sensor, and replace if Reverse winding detection SW trouble
necessary. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if necessary. LCC control PWB trouble. (A3 LCC)
Check the LCC lift mechanism, and repair if necessary. A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble (A3 2-stage LCT)
Check the LCC lift motor, and replace if necessary. Remaining quantity sensor abnormality, LCT1 tray lift
Use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. motor lock, connector and harness connection trouble,
PWB trouble
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
U6-20 LCC control PWB - PCU PWB Check & Remedy Check the wire.
Replace the reverse winding SW and the LCC control
communication error PWB. / Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. (A3
Trouble content LCC / A3 2-stage LCT)
Detail PCU Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations of
Cause Communication error between the LCC control PWB and the remaining quantity sensor and the LCT1 lift motor.
the PCU PWB. Check the wiring.
Connection trouble of the harness and the connector (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
between the machine and the LCC and those of the LCC
control PWB.
LCC control PWB trouble U6-24 A3 LCC tray lock detection trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Malfunction due to noises.
Trouble content The LCC / A3 2-stage LCT tray lock mechanism
Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model. malfunctions.
Check the connection of the harness and the connector Detail PCU
between the machine and the LCC and those of the LCC
Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown
control PWB, and replace if necessary.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if necessary.
Tray lock sensor trouble
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary.
trouble
Check & Remedy Check the tray lock mechanism.
U6-21 LCC transport motor trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the tray lock sensor.
Trouble content Transport motor abnormality Replace the LCC control PWB. / Replace the A3 2-stage
Detail PCU LCT control PWB.
Cause Motor lock
Motor RPM abnormality
Overcurrent to the motor U6-28 LCT1 paper feed position abnormality
trouble Trouble content The upper limit sensor turns OFF before turning ON the
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the transport pickup SOL. (Normally the upper limit sensor turns OFF
motor. after turning OFF the pickup SOL when starting lifting up.)
Replace the motor
Detail PCU
Replace the LCC / A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
Cause Sensor trouble. The pickup roller remains in the lower
position. (Mechanism trouble)
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations of
the upper limit sensor and lift operations.
Wiring check.
U6-29 LCT1 lift trouble U6-39 LCT2 lift trouble
Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified time Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified time
(A4 LCC: 10sec, A3 LCC: 8sec) when lifting up. (A3 3- (A4 LCC: 10sec, A3 LCC: 8sec) when lifting.
stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT) (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
The upper limit is not detected within the specified time The upper limit is not detected within the specified time
when lifting. The limit SW ON is detected when lifting. The when lifting. The limit SW ON is detected when lifting. The
encoder signal does not vary when lifting. (A3 2-stage encoder signal does not vary when lifting. (A3 2-stage
LCT) LCT)
Cause Upper limit sensor abnormality, tray lift motor lock, Cause Upper limit sensor abnormality, tray lift motor lock,
connector and harness connection trouble, PWB trouble connector and harness connection trouble, PWB trouble
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT) (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Sensor trouble, upper limit SW trouble, A3 2-stage LCT Sensor trouble, upper limit SW trouble, LCT control PWB
control PWB trouble, broken gear, lift motor trouble (A3 2- trouble, broken gear, lift motor trouble (A3 2-stage LCT)
stage LCT) Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation of
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation of the upper limit sensor and the lift operation. Check the
the upper limit sensor and the lift operation. Check the wiring.
wiring. Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. (A3
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. (A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT) Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation of
Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation of the upper limit sensor, the upper limit SW, the encoder
the upper limit sensor, the upper limit SW, the encoder sensor, and the lift motor.
sensor, and the lift motor. Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. (A3
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. (A3 2-stage LCT)
2-stage LCT)
U6-43 LCT3 reverse winding detection trouble

U6-33 LCT2 reverse winding detection
trouble Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the tray is reversely wound.
Detail PCU
Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the tray is reversely wound. Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON
Detail The wire is reversely wound.
Reverse winding detection SW trouble
Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON
The wire is reversely wound.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Reverse winding detection SW trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness Check & Remedy Check the wire.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Replace the reverse winding SW.
Check & Remedy Check the wire. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the reverse winding SW. Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
U6-44 LCT3 lock detection trouble
U6-34 LCT2 lock detection trouble Trouble content It is detected that the tray lock mechanism malfunctions.
Detail PCU
Trouble content It is detected that the tray lock mechanism malfunctions. Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown
Detail Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown Tray lock sensor trouble
Tray lock sensor trouble Check & Remedy Check the tray lock mechanism.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
U6-49 LCC - Main unit combination trouble U6-63 Manual feed tray descending trouble
Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified time Trouble content The lower limit position is not detected within the
(A4 LCC: 10sec, A3 LCC: 8sec) when lifting. specified time (10sec) from the start of descending the
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT) manual feed tray.
The upper limit is not detected within the specified time Detail PCU
when lifting. The limit SW ON is detected when lifting. The Cause Lower limit sensor trouble.
encoder signal does not vary when lifting.(A3 2-stage Manual feed tray lift motor lock.
LCT) Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Detail PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Upper limit sensor abnormality, tray lift motor lock, Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations of
connector and harness connection trouble, PWB trouble the lower limit position sensor and the manual fed tray lift
(A3 3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT) motor.
Sensor trouble, upper limit SW trouble, A3 2-stage LCT Wiring check.
control PWB trouble, broken gear, lift motor trouble (A3 2- Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
stage LCT)
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation of
the upper limit sensor and the lift operation. Check the U6-68 Manual feed tray paper feed position
wiring.
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. (A3
abnormality
3-stage LCT / A4 3-stage LCT)
Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation of Trouble content The upper limit sensor turns OFF before turning ON the
the upper limit sensor, the upper limit SW, the encoder pickup SOL. (Normally the upper limit sensor turns OFF
sensor, and the lift motor. after turning OFF the pickup SOL when starting lifting up.)
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble. (A3 Detail PCU
2-stage LCT) Cause Sensor trouble.
PWB trouble.
U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble The pickup roller remains in the lower position.
(Mechanism trouble)
Trouble content An LCC of a different model which is not supported by the Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations of
machine is installed. (Improper combination of the the upper limit sensor and lift operations.
machine and the LCC model code.) Wiring check.
Detail PCU
Cause LCC control PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble U6-69 Manual feed tray lift trouble
Check & Remedy Check to confirm the LCC model.
Check the LCC control PWB, and replace if necessary. Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified time
Check the PCU PWB, and replace if necessary. (10sec) when lifting up.
Detail PCU
Cause Upper limit sensor trouble.
U6-53 Communication trouble between LCT’s Tray lift motor lock.
Trouble content Communication error between the A3 2-stage LCT (1 PWB trouble.
series) and the A3 2-stage LCT (2 series) Communication Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operations of
test error when turning ON the power or after canceling the upper limit sensor and lift operations.
the exclusive simulation. Wiring check.
Detail PCU Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector and
the harness
A3 2-stage LCT (1 series) control PWB trouble, A3 2- U6-73 LCT4 reverse winding detection trouble
stage LCT (2 series) control PWB trouble
Malfunction caused by noises Trouble content It is detected that the wire of the tray is reversely wound.
Check & Remedy Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON the power. Detail PCU
Check the connector and the harness of the Cause Reverse winding detection SW ON
communication line. The wire is reversely wound.
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB Reverse winding detection SW trouble
U6-54 Option installation combination trouble Check & Remedy Check the wire.
Replace the reverse winding SW.
Trouble content Relay unit installation detection signal abnormality, front Check connection of the connector and the harness.
LCT installation detection signal abnormality, 2- series Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
installation detection signal abnormality
Detail PCU
Cause Combination error
Check & Remedy Check the combination of options.
Check connection of the harness and the connector from
control PWB to each option unit.
U6-74 LCT4 lock detection trouble U6-83 Room temperature thermistor
breakdown
Trouble content It is detected that the tray lock mechanism malfunctions.
Detail PCU Trouble content Room temperature thermistor open or short
Cause Tray lock mechanism breakdown Detail PCU
Cause Room temperature thermistor harness connection trouble
Tray lock sensor trouble
Room temperature thermistor trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of the
room temperature thermistor.
Replace the temperature and humidity sensor.
Check the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
U6-79 LCT4 lift motor trouble U6-84 Room humidity thermistor breakdown
Trouble content The upper limit is not detected within the specified time
Trouble content Humidity thermistor open or short
when lifting.
Detail PCU
The upper limit SW ON is detected when lifting.
The encoder signal does not vary when lifting. Cause Humidity thermistor harness connection trouble
Humidity thermistor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Sensor trouble, upper limit SW trouble, A3 2-stage LCT
control PWB trouble, broken gear, lift motor trouble
humidity thermistor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-02 and SIM04-03 to check the operation of
Replace the temperature and humidity sensor.
the upper limit sensor, the upper limit SW, the encoder
sensor, and the lift motor.
Fix the trouble, and use SIM15 to cancel the trouble.
U6-85 Transport motor 1 trouble (2 series)
U6-80 Relay unit transport motor trouble
Trouble content Transport motor abnormality
Detail PCU
Trouble content Relay unit transport motor abnormality
Cause Motor lock
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock
Over current to the motor
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the transport
motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the relay unit
Replace the motor.
transport motor.
Replace the motor. Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control
PWB.
U6-86 24V power trouble (2 series)
U6-81 Power unit cooling fan motor trouble
Trouble content The DC24V power is not supplied to the A3 2-stage LCT.
Detail PCU
Trouble content A3 2-stage LCT power unit section cooling fan motor
abnormality Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector and
the harness.
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, A3 2-stage LCT
Power unit trouble
control PWB trouble, harness and connector connection
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness of the power line.
trouble
Check the 24V voltage with the power unit and the A3
Check & Remedy Check connection from the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB
2-stage LCT control PWB.
to the motor.
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. Replace the
motor.
U6-87 Power unit cooling fan motor trouble (2
series)
U6-82 EEPROM trouble
Trouble content A3 2-stage LCT power unit section cooling fan motor
Trouble content The EEPROM contents are garbled. abnormality
Cause A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Cause Motor lock, motor harness short/open, A3 2-stage
Malfunction caused by noises LCT control PWB trouble, harness and connector
Check & Remedy Replace the A3 2-stage LCT controller PWB. connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection from the A3 2-stage LCT control
PWB to the motor.
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. Replace the
motor.
U6-88 EEPROM trouble (2 series) U9-01 Touch panel trouble
Trouble content The EEPROM contents are garbled. Trouble content Communication error, Read / Write error, ICU internal
Detail PCU error
Cause A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Detail SCU
Malfunction caused by noises Cause SCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection signal between the SCU CPU and the
touch panel controller.
U6-89 Room temperature thermistor break-

down (2 series) UC-02 CPT - ASIC error
Trouble content
Trouble content Room temperature thermistor open or short
Detail DSPF
Detail PCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.)
Cause Room temperature thermistor harness connection trouble
Room temperature thermistor trouble Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
room temperature thermistor. UC-12 CPT - ASIC abnormal trouble
Replace the temperature and humidity sensor. (DSPF detection)
Trouble content Access abnormality to the CPT - ASIC (when the ASIC
operates abnormally)
U6-90 Room humidity thermistor breakdown (2
Detail SCU
series) Cause B to B connector connection trouble.
DSPF PWB trouble.
Trouble content Humidity thermistor open or short CPT - ASIC trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the B to B connector.
Cause Humidity thermistor harness connection trouble Replace the DSPF PWB or the Option PWB.
Humidity thermistor trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of the UC-20 DOCC ASIC error
humidity thermistor.
Replace the temperature and humidity sensor. Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
U7-50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine
communication error
UC-30 Anti-copy MODULE trouble
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial (DSPF detection)
vendor.
Detail MFP
Trouble content Access abnormality to the DOCC-ASIC (when the ASIC
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
operates abnormally)
(SIM26-3).
Detail DSPF
Vendor machine trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble. Cause B to B connector connection trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. DSPF PWB trouble.
Strong external noises. DOCC-ASIC trouble.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power. Check & Remedy Check the B to B connector.
Check the connector and the harness in the Replace the DSPF PWB or the Option PWB.
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine (SIM26-
3). UE-10 LCT1 suction fan motor trouble
Trouble content Suction fan motor abnormality
Detail PCU
U7-51 Vendor machine error Cause Motor lock
Trouble content Overcurrent to the motor
Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor) Harness and connector connection trouble
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble. A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the suction fan
Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the vendor. motor.
(XX is the detail code.) Check connection of the harness and the connector.
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code. Replace the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
UE-11 LCT1 exhaust fan motor trouble UE-15 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor
open
Trouble content Exhaust fan motor abnormality
Detail PCU Trouble content The thermistor is open.
Cause Motor lock Detail PCU
Harness and connector connection trouble
Connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the exhaust fan
the thermistor to the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
motor.
Check connection of the harness and the connector.
UE-16 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor low
temperature
UE-12 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor open
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level within
Trouble content The thermistor is open. the specified time after turning ON the power relay.
Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble Cause Thermistor trouble.
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Warm air heater trouble
Warm air heater harness and connector connection Warm air heater harness and connector connection
trouble trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector from the warm air A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
heater (thermistor) to the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. Thermostat trouble.
AC power trouble
Insertion detection switch 2 trouble
Heater relay PWB trouble
UE-13 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor low
Check & Remedy Check the thermistor and its harness.
temperature trouble Check the thermistor input circuit section of the A3 2-
stage LCT control PWB.
Trouble content The temperature does not reach the specified level within Check for disconnection of the warm air heater and the
the specified time after turning ON the power relay. thermostat.
Check the insertion detection switch 2.
Detail PCU
Check the heater relay PWB.
Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble
Check the heater control circuit of the AC PWB and that
Warm air heater trouble
of the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
Warm air heater harness and connector connection
trouble
Thermostat trouble.
UE-17 LCT1 warm air outlet port thermistor
AC power trouble high temperature
Trouble content The temperature at the warm air outlet port exceeds the
Check & Remedy Check the warm air heater (thermistor) and its harness.
specified level.
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the A3 2-
Detail PCU
Check for disconnection of the warm air heater and the Cause Thermistor trouble.
thermostat. Warm air heater harness and connector connection
Check the insertion detection switch 2. trouble
Check the heater relay PWB. Heater relay PWB trouble
Check the heater control circuit of the AC PWB and that A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
of the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB. Check & Remedy Check the thermistor and its harness.
UE-14 LCT1 warm air heater thermistor high Check the heater relay PWB.
Check the heater control circuit of the A3 2-stage LCT
temperature trouble control PWB.
Trouble content The warm air heater temperature exceeds the specified
level. UE-20 LCT2 suction fan motor trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Warm air heater (thermistor) trouble Trouble content Suction fan motor abnormality
A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock
trouble
Overcurrent to the motor
Check & Remedy Check the warm air heater (thermistor) and its harness. Harness and connector connection trouble
Check the thermistor input circuit section of the A3 2- A3 2-stage LCT control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM04-03 to check the operation of the suction fan
motor.
control PWB.
Replace the A3 2-stage LCT controller PWB.
open
Overcurrent to the motor
motor.
temperature
trouble trouble
AC power trouble
Detail PCU
trouble
Thermostat trouble.
specified level.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock
trouble
motor.
control PWB.
open
motor.
temperature
trouble trouble
AC power trouble
Detail PCU
trouble
Thermostat trouble.
specified level.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock
trouble
motor.
control PWB.
open
motor.
temperature
trouble trouble
AC power trouble
Detail PCU
Check the heater control circuit of the AC PWB and
that of the A3 2-stage LCT control PWB.
trouble
Thermostat trouble.
specified level.
Detail PCU
of the A3 2- stage LCT control PWB. Check & Remedy Check the thermistor and its harness.
level.
Detail PCU
trouble
control PWB.
2. JAM and troubleshooting JAM code JAM content
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM
A. JAM code list (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
(1) PCU JAM cause (Some parts are overlapped with the PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
SCU code table.) PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM
Main unit (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
JAM code JAM content PPD1_NL1 PPD1 not-reached JAM
MFT_LE Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 paper)
TRAY1_LE Tray 1 paper feed JAM PPD1_NL2 PPD1 not-reached JAM
(200K for the paper feed counter)*1 (large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed
TRAY2_LE Tray 2 paper feed JAM paper)
(200K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD1_NL3 PPD1 not-reached JAM
TRAY3_LE Tray 3 paper feed JAM (large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper)
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD1_NL4 PPD1 not-reached JAM
TRAY4_LE Tray 4 paper feed JAM (large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper)
(100K for the paper feed counter)*1 PPD1_NLM PPD1 not-reached JAM
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD not-reached) (large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM paper)
TRAY1 Tandem tray 1 PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
T1PPD1_S1 T1PPD1 remaining JAM PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
T1PPD2_N1 Tandem tray 1 paper feed JAM PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(T1PPD2 not-reached JAM) PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
T1PPD2_S1 T1PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
TRAY2 Tandem tray 2 paper feed JAM PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
(T2PPD1 not-reached JAM) PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM
T2PPD1_N3 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
paper) PPD1_SL1 PPD1 remaining JAM
T2PPD1_N4 T2PPD1 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed (large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed paper)
T2PPD1_S2 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 2 paper feed paper) (large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed paper)
T2PPD1_S3 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) PPD1_SL3 PPD1 remaining JAM
T2PPD1_S4 T2PPD1 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper)
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM (C3PFD not-reached JAM) PPD1_SL4 PPD1 remaining JAM
C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper)
C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) PPD1_SLM PPD1 remaining JAM
C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) (large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed
TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM (C4PFD not-reached JAM) paper)
C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper) PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
LPPD1_NL LPPD not-reached JAM PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM
LPPD1_NL1 LPPD not-reached JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM
(tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
paper)
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
LPPD1_NL2 LPPD not-reached JAM
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM
paper)
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL1 PPD2 not-reached JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper)
LPPD1_NLM LPPD not-reached JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed
paper)
LPPD1_SL LPPD remaining JAM
PPD2_NLM PPD2 not-reached JAM
LPPD1_SL1 LPPD remaining JAM (large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed
paper) PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
LPPD1_SL2 LPPD remaining JAM PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
paper) PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
LPPD1_SL3 LPPD remaining JAM PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper) PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
LPPD1_SL4 LPPD remaining JAM PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
LPPD1_SLM LPPD remaining JAM PPD2_SL1 PPD2 remaining JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed (large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed paper)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) (large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed paper)
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM PPD2_SL3 PPD2 remaining JAM
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) (large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper)
JAM code JAM content JAM code JAM content
PPD2_SL4 PPD2 remaining JAM P_FPFD_N2 FPFD not-reached JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper) (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
PPD2_SLM PPD2 remaining JAM P_FPFD_N3 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray manual paper feed P_FPFD_N4 FPFD not-reached JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper)
paper) P_FPFD_NL FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
PPD2_NM_D PPD2 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_NL1 FPFD not-reached JAM
(manual paper feed tray paper) (large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 P_FPFD_NL2 FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD2_N1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed paper)
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NL3 FPFD not-reached JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 (large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper)
PPD2_N2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_NL4 FPFD not-reached JAM
(tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) (large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 P_FPFD_NLM FPFD not-reached JAM
PPD2_N3_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (large capacity manual paper feed paper)
(cassette 3 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_NA FPFD not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2
P_FPFD_SM FPFD remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper)
PPD2_N4_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
P_FPFD_S1 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
(cassette 4 paper feed paper)
P_FPFD_S2 FPFD remaining JAM (tandem tray 2 paper feed paper)
P_FPFD_S3 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 3 paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) P_FPFD_S4 FPFD remaining JAM (tray 4 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 P_FPFD_SL FPFD remaining JAM
PPD2_NL1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_SL1 FPFD remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 (large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_SL2 FPFD remaining JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed paper) (large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 P_FPFD_SL3 FPFD remaining JAM
PPD2_NL3_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper) P_FPFD_SL4 FPFD remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 (large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper)
PPD2_NL4_D PPD2 not-reached JAM P_FPFD_SLM FPFD remaining JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper) (large capacity manual paper feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 P_FPFD_SA FPFD remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_NLM_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (large capacity paper feed tray POD1_NA POD1 not-reached JAM
manual paper feed paper) (In the case of a jam at the second surface)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
PPD2_NA_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) POD1_SA POD1 remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 (In the case of a jam at the second surface)
PPD2_SM_D PPD2 remaining JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 POD2_NB POD2 not-reached JAM
PPD2_S1_D PPD2 remaining JAM (In the case of a jam before switchback)
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper) POD2_SB POD2 remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 (In the case of a jam before switchback)
PPD2_S2_D PPD2 remaining JAM POD2_SA POD2 remaining JAM
(tandem tray 2 paper feed paper) (In the case of a jam after switchback)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM
PPD2_S3_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 3 paper feed paper) POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
PPD2_S4_D PPD2 remaining JAM (cassette 4 paper feed paper)
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
PPD2_SL_D PPD2 remaining JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 DPF_SM Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
(Manual feed paper)
PPD2_SL1_D PPD2 not-reached JAM
(large capacity paper feed tray1 paper feed paper) DPF_S1 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 (Tray 1 feed paper)
PPD2_SL2_D PPD2 not-reached JAM DPF_S2 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
(large capacity paper feed tray2 paper feed paper) (Tray 2 feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 DPF_S3 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
PPD2_SL3_D PPD2 not-reached JAM (Tray 3 feed paper)
(large capacity paper feed tray3 paper feed paper) DPF_S4 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 (Tray 4 feed paper)
PPD2_SL4_D PPD2 not-reached JAM DPF_SL Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
(large capacity paper feed tray4 paper feed paper) (Side LCC feed paper)
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS)*2 DPF_SL1 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
PPD2_SLM_D PPD2 remaining JAM (large capacity paper feed tray (Large capacity feed Tray 1 feed paper)
manual paper feed paper) DPF_SL2 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 (Large capacity feed Tray 2 feed paper)
PPD2_SA_D PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper) DPF_SL3 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
(Delay of paper just before the jam from PS) *2 (Large capacity feed Tray 3 feed paper)
P_FPFD_NM FPFD not-reached JAM (manual paper feed tray paper) DPF_SL4 Compulsory stop by double-feed detection
P_FPFD_N1 FPFD not-reached JAM (Large capacity feed Tray 4 feed paper)
(tandem tray 1 paper feed paper)
DPF_SLM Compulsory stop by double-feed detection FNTIME Early reaching JAM
(Large capacity feed Manual feed paper) FSS201_N Saddle inlet port pass sensor delay JAM
DPF_SA Compulsory stop by double-feed detection FSS201_S Saddle inlet port pass sensor remaining JAM
(ADU re-feed paper) FSS203_N Saddle vertical pass sensor delay JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM FSS226_N Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 delay JAM
DRUM Drum JAM (drum lock detection) FSS226_S Saddle transport paper pass sensor 1 remaining JAM
FUSER Fuser JAM (fusing winding detection) FSS227_N Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 delay JAM
PRI_JAM PRI JAM (Image preparation wait time-out) FSS227_S Saddle paper exit pass sensor 2 remaining JAM
FSSTPLJ Saddle staple JAM
LCC_ERR LCC JAM (LCC communication abnormality detection) FSM202 Saddle section saddle alignment motor JAM
FIN_ERR Finisher JAM FSM203 Saddle section lead edge stopper motor JAM
(Finisher communication abnormality detection) FSM204 Saddle section folding roller guide motor JAM
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM FSM210 Saddle section rear edge hold motor JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request) FSM211 Saddle section rear edge shift motor JAM
NO_MATCH Parameter inconsistency FSM213 Saddle section SADDLE flapping motor JAM
MFT_RT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FSM214 Saddle section SEPARATION motor JAM
TRAY1_RT Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FSM206 Saddle section folding motor JAM
TRAY2_RT Tray 2 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) FSM205 Saddle section PUSH motor JAM
TRAY3_RT Tray 3 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper)
TRAY4_RT Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) MX-TM10
MFT_1ST Manual feed tray paper feed JAM JAM code JAM content
(Check the paper set condition)
FTS103_N Trimmer paper exit sensor delay JAM
TRAY1_1ST Tray 1 feed tray paper feed JAM
FTS103_S Trimmer paper exit sensor remaining JAM
FTS101_N Trimmer inlet port sensor relay JAM
FTS101_S Trimmer inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FTM103 Trimmer section inlet port separation motor JAM
(Check the paper set condition) FTM104 Trimmer section paper exit separation motor JAM
TRAY4_1ST Tray 4 feed tray paper feed JAM FTM102 Trimmer section registration motor JAM
(Check the paper set condition) FTM106 Trimmer section CUTTER motor JAM
FTM105 Trimmer section bundle press motor JAM
*1: In SIM22-41, the descriptions are abbreviated on the screen
because of the limitation on the number of characters (100K for MX-FD10
the paper feed counter).
JAM code JAM content
*2: In SIM22-41, the description of "(Delay of paper just before the FLS30_N Speed reduction timing sensor delay JAM
JAM from PS)" is omitted because of the limitation on the FLS30_S Speed reduction timing sensor emaining JAM
number of characters. FLS31_N Separation timing sensor delay JAM
FLS31_S Separation timing sensor emaining JAM
FLS32_N Folding position adjustment sensor delay JAM
MX-RB15
FLS32_S Folding position adjustment sensor remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content FLS33_N Upper stopper section paper detection sensor delay
DCS100_N Decurler unit transport pass sensor not-reached JAM JAM
DCS100_S Decurler unit transport pass sensor remaining JAM FLS33_S Upper stopper section paper detection sensor
DCTIME Early reaching JAM remaining JAM
DCPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow FLS22_N Outlet port 1 sensor delay JAM
FLS22_S Outlet port 1 sensor remaining JAM
MX-RB13 FLS27_N Folding tray empty sensor delay JAM
JAM code JAM content FLS27_S Folding tray empty sensor remaining JAM
PIS150_N Transport unit pass sensor not-reached JAM FLS20_N Inlet port sensor delay JAM
PIS150_S Transport unit pass sensor remaining JAM FLS20_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FLS21_N Outlet port 2 sensor delay JAM
GBC punch FLS21_S Outlet port 2 sensor remaining JAM
FLM8 Folding section upper stopper motor JAM
FLM9 Folding SECTION 3-fold stopper motor JAM
GBCJ GBC punch unit JAM
FLM10 Folding section lead edge hold guide motor JAM
MX-FN21/22 FLM7 Folding section folding tray paper exit motor JAM
FLENT_ERR EntryStart time out JAM
FLEJT_ERR EjectStartAck time out JAM
FNS101_N Inlet port not-reached JAM (FN pass)
FNS101_S Inlet port remaining JAM (FN pass)
FNS102_N Paper exit not-reached JAM
FNS102_S Paper exit remaining JAM
FNM110 Paper exit roller lift motor JAM
FNM117 Gripper motor JAM
FNM115 Staple JAM
FNM114 Discharged paper HOLD motor JAM
FNM113 Paper rear edge fall motor JAM
FNM116 Gripper arm motor JAM
FNM112 Paper alignment roller lift motor JAM
FNM118 Paper rear edge hold motor JAM
FCM102 Punch JAM
FNPAOF Paper attribute data reception overflow
MX-CF11 MX-LC13 N
INSTR1_LE Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM LCT1_1_RT Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed JAM
(60K for the paper feed counter)*1 (Check the paper)
INSTR2_LE Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM LCT1_2_RT Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed JAM
(60K for the paper feed counter)*1 (Check the paper)
INSTR1_RT Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM (Check the paper) LCT2_1_TR Expanded Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed JAM
INSTR2_RT Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM (Check the paper) (Check the paper)
INSTR1_1ST Inserter tray 1 paper feed JAM LCT2_2_TR Expanded Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed JAM
(Check the paper set condition) (Check the paper)
INSTR2_1ST Inserter tray 2 paper feed JAM LCT1_1_1ST Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed JAM
(Check the paper set condition) (Check the paper set condition)
INSFED1_N No. 1 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM LCT1_2_1ST Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed JAM
INSFED1_S No. 1 paper feed sensor remaining JAM (Check the paper set condition)
INSFED2_N No. 2 paper feed sensor not-reached JAM LCT2_1_1ST Expanded Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed JAM
INSFED2_S No. 2 paper feed sensor remaining JAM (Check the paper set condition)
INSPL1_N No. 1 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM LCT2_2_1ST Expanded Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed JAM
INSPL1_S No. 1 pull-out sensor remaining JAM
L1DF101_NL1 Paper exit sensor 1cs not-reached JAM
INSPL2_N No. 2 pull-out sensor not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
INSPL2_S No. 2 pull-out sensor remaining JAM
L1DF101_SL1 Paper exit sensor 1cs remaining JAM
INSVTR1_N No. 1 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM
INSVTR1_S No. 1 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM
INSVTR2_N No. 2 vertical transport sensor not-reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
INSVTR2_S No. 2 vertical transport sensor remaining JAM L1DF201_SL2 Paper exit sensor 2cs remaining JAM
INSOUT_N Paper exit sensor not reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
INSOUT_S Paper exit sensor remaining JAM L1DF001_NL1 Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) not-reached JAM
INSENT_N Inlet port sensor not-reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
INSENT_S Inlet port sensor remaining JAM L1DF001_SL1 Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) remaining JAM
INSEXT_N Outlet port sensor not-reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
INSEXT_S Outlet port sensor remaining JAM L1DF001_NLM Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) not-reached JAM
INSLUP1J No. 1 lift motor JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
INSLUP2J No. 2 lift motor JAM L1DF001_SLM Vertical transport sensor 1 (1-series) remaining JAM
INSPICM1J No. 1 pickup motor JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
INSPICM2J No. 2 pickup motor JAM L1DF002_NL1 Vertical transport sensor 2 (1-series) not-reached JAM
MX-MF11 L1DF002_SL1 Vertical transport sensor 2 (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DF002_NLM Vertical transport sensor 2 (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1MPFS_NLM Manual paper feed sensor not-reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
(Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
L1DF002_SLM Vertical transport sensor 2 (1-series) remaining JAM
L1MPFS_SLM Manual paper feed sensor remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
L1DF003_NL1 Vertical transport sensor 3 (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1MTS_NLM Manual paper transport sensor not-reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
L1DF003_SL1 Vertical transport sensor 3 (1-series) remaining JAM
L1MTS_SLM Manual paper transport sensor remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
L1DFB01_NLM Manual feed paper entry sensor not-reached JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
L1DF003_SLM Vertical transport sensor 3 (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DFB01_SLM Manual feed paper entry sensor remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
MFT2_LE Multi-stage LCT manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
(200K for the paper feed counter)
MFT2_RT Multi-stage LCT manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
(Check the paper)
MFT2_1ST Multi-stage LCT manual feed tray paper feed JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
MX-LCX3N/LC12
JAM code JAM content (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
LCC_LE Side A4LCC paper feed JAM L1DF004_SLM Vertical transport sensor 4 (1-series) remaining JAM
(200K/100K for the paper feed counter)*1 (Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed)
LCC A4/A3LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached JAM) L1DF005_NL1 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
(side A4/A3LCC paper feed paper) L1DF005_SL1 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM
LCC_RT A4/A3LCC feed tray paper feed JAM (Check the paper) (Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed)
LCC_1ST A4/A3LCC paper feed JAM L1DF005_NL2 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM
(Check the paper set condition) (Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed)
L1DF005_SL2 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DF005_NL3 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1DF005_SL3 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM
L1DF005_NL4 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM
L1DF005_SL4 LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM L2DF005_NL3 LCT paper exit sensor (2-series) not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) (Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed)
L1DF005_NLM LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) not-reached JAM L2DF005_SL3 LCT paper exit sensor (2-series) remaining JAM
(Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed) (Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed)
L1DF005_SLM LCT paper exit sensor (1-series) remaining JAM L2DF005_NL4 LCT paper exit sensor (2-series) not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed) (Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed)
L1DF006_NL3 Horizontal transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM L2DF005_SL4 LCT paper exit sensor (2-series) remaining JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) (Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed)
L1DF006_SL3 Horizontal transport sensor 1 remaining JAM
L1DF006_NL4 Horizontal transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM MX-ST10
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) S1SN01_N Inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
L1DF007_NL3 Horizontal transport sensor 2 not-reached JAM S1SN02_N External tray paper exit sensor not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) S1SN02_S External tray paper exit sensor remaining JAM
L1DF007_SL3 Horizontal transport sensor 2 remaining JAM S1SN03_N Stack tray paper exit sensor not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) S1SN03_S Stack tray paper exit sensor remaining JAM
L1DF007_NL4 Horizontal transport sensor 2 not-reached JAM S1SN04_N Interface transport section JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) S1SN05_N Interface outlet port sensor not-reached JAM
L1DF007_SL4 Horizontal transport sensor 2 remaining JAM S1SN05_S Interface outlet port sensor remaining JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) S1PM11 Offset unit abnormality
L1DF008_NL3 Horizontal transport sensor 3 not-reached JAM S1PM12 Front side jogger
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) S1PM13 Rear side jogger
L1DF008_SL3 Horizontal transport sensor 3 remaining JAM S1PM22 Lead edge jogger abnormality
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) S1M21 Stack tray abnormality
L1DF008_NL4 Horizontal transport sensor 3 not-reached JAM S1TSISW Tray safety interlock SW operation
S2SN01_N Inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
S2SN02_N External tray paper exit sensor not-reached JAM
S2SN02_S External tray paper exit sensor remaining JAM
L1DF009_NL3 Horizontal transport sensor 4 not-reached JAM
S2SN03_N Stack tray paper exit sensor not-reached JAM
S2SN03_S Stack tray paper exit sensor remaining JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) S2SN04_N Interface transport section JAM
L1DF009_NL4 Horizontal transport sensor 4 not-reached JAM S2SN05_N Interface outlet port sensor not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) S2SN05_S Interface outlet port sensor remaining JAM
L1DF009_SL4 Horizontal transport sensor 4 remaining JAM S2PM11 Offset unit abnormality
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) S2PM12 Front side jogger
L1DF010_NL3 Horizontal transport sensor 5 not-reached JAM S2PM13 Rear side jogger
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) S2PM22 Lead edge jogger abnormality
L1DF010_SL3 Horizontal transport sensor 5 remaining JAM S2M21 Stack tray abnormality
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) S2TSISW Tray safety interlock SW operation
L1DF010_NL4 Horizontal transport sensor 5 not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) MX-RB14
L1DFR01_NL1 Interface transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM
L1DFR01_SL1 Interface transport sensor 1 remaining JAM
L2DF001_NL3 Vertical transport sensor 1 (2-series) not-reached
JAM (Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed)
L1DFR01_NLM Interface transport sensor 1 not-reached JAM
L1DFR01_SLM Interface transport sensor 1 remaining JAM
JAM code JAM content 3. Image send communication report
L1DFR02_NL3 Interface transport sensor 2 not-reached JAM code
L1DFR02_SL3 Interface transport sensor 2 remaining JAM A. Outline and code system descriptions
After completion of communication, the communication report table,
the communication management table, and the protocol are described
on the communication report column.
(Multi-stage LCT tray 4 paper feed) The communication report code is composed as follows:
L1DFR02_NLM Interface transport sensor 2 not-reached JAM Communication report: XX (XXXX)
(Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed) The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
L1DFR02_SLM Interface transport sensor 2 remaining JAM Communication report code of 00 to 99 (Refer to communication
report main code.)
(Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed) The lower 4 digits of the communication report code:
L1DFR03_SL1 Interface transport sensor 3 remaining JAM Used by the serviceman.
(Multi-stage LCT tray 1 paper feed) The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to com-
L1DFR03_NL2 Interface transport sensor 3 not-reached JAM munication report sub code 1.)
(Multi-stage LCT tray 2 paper feed) The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to com-
L1DFR03_SL2 Interface transport sensor 3 remaining JAM munication report sub code 2.)
L1DFR03_NL3 Interface transport sensor 3 not-reached JAM CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2 are
(Multi-stage LCT tray 3 paper feed) in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal nota-
L1DFR03_SL3 Interface transport sensor 3 remaining JAM tion.)
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the
these models.
B. Details
L1DFR03_NLM Interface transport sensor 3 not-reached JAM
(Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed) (1) Communication report main code
L1DFR03_SLM Interface transport sensor 3 remaining JAM
(Multi-stage LCT manual paper feed) Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
code (Send side)
(2) SCU JAM case (Some parts are overlapped with the 0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
PCU code table.) 1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
JAM code JAM content 3 FTT EOP
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request) 4 MCF EOM
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM 5 PIP, PIN MPS
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM 7 No signal, DCN DCN
SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM 8 PPR PPS-EOP
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM 9 PPS-EOM
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM 11 RNR RR
SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM 12 CTR CTC
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM 13 ERR EOR-Q
SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM 14 PPS-PRI-Q
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM 16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM 17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end 18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
P_SHORT Short size JAM 19 FTT PPS-EOP
SDFS_S Double feed detection JAM/Accompanied feed JAM 20 MCF PPS-EOM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM 21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
CAUTION: For report codes 16 to 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICATION.
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 to 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
75 NG75 XXXX *1 • Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
• When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
• Check for disconnection of cables.
• A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
• The port is set to DISABLE.
• Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
• When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
• Error of the disposition-modifier.
• The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
• In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
• Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.
• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Cannot be stored in memory.
• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 When image conversion for image send cannot be made after send reservation.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
• Errors in ( ) are not used.
(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used —
10 Not used —
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used —
19 Not used —
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In conversion for sending, the number of the IMS management pages exceeds the upper limit (1 communication Send
reservation: 999 sheets, Total communication reservation: 5,000 sheets). (This trouble occurs also in OSA scan, resulting OSAScan
in memory over.)
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
Endian error
Version error
Tag data error
Tag parameter error
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
Header size error
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."
MX-8090N
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE Service Manual
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the machine. 2) Update method using FTP
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for repair 3) Update method using the Web page
to the machine. 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be methods.)
repaired. Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
B. Notes for update When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as power-
off during updating, etc., and when retries of these methods are
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update failed, the method 4) is employed.
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s Firmware types
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations of
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or USB
memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu
The machine detects the media
and executes the program automatically.
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-8090N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 4) Press [ALL] key.
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware into All the firmware programs are selected.
the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation panel.) * Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.
2) Enter the SIM49-01. * In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine side
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to the are ignored.
update screen. To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with the
* The number of key changes according to the number of the sfu firmware display key.
file in the media or USB memory inserted. * If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to the and cannot be pressed.
SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE CON- 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]” becomes
TAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the screen. clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected firemware.
Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is displayed.
the file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is
pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen waits Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is pulled out Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded success-
on the file list screen, the error is detected by the [FILE] key fully.
pressing, and the first screen appears. 7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated played.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
B. Firmware update using FTP

FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and
the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update the pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the [Reboot]
key, the machine will restart to complete the update. The browser
firmware.
will shift to the following screen.
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html)
"Close the browser and open again to display latest information."
and enter the servicing page menu. will be displayed.
Default password: "service" 5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firmware
to the machine. Update processing begins. While processing
takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." appears.

2 : ‘19/March.
D. Firmware update using the CN update function d. Keys used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the nor-
(1) Outline mal mode.
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called the
CN update.
[UP] [BACK]
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
• Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring data
from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB,
the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options by means of a
USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the following
points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a section [MENU]
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware [DOWN] [OK]
update operation of other method than the CN update, this method
can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the mSATA Key name Functions in the CN update mode
2
SSD must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot pro- [OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
gram. [MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality in the
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
boot program.
[UP] key Selects an item.
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not dis- [DOWN] key Selects an item.
played on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the main
program. (2) Operating procedures
• Firmware version check function a. Firmware update function
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 is eas- This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB memory
ier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this manual.) for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and
b. Purpose each option.
This function is used in the following cases: It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
• When an error occurs during firmware update operation other than • The update target ROM is automatically selected.
the CN update. • When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a section
• When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section other other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
than the boot program for some reasons during firmware update update operation of other method than the CN update.
operation of other method than the CN update, this method can be If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this method
used to update the firmware. cannot be used. On that case, the mSATA SSD must be replaced with 2
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be used. In a new one having the normal boot program.
2 such a case, the mSATA SSD must be replaced with a new one having When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not
the normal boot program. displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in the
main program (mSATA SSD). 2
c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on the a-1. Necessary items
MFP PWB and boot the machine. 1) Insert the mSATA SSD mounted on the MFP PWB of the 2
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to machine.
OFF (normal mode). 2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-
level lower directory.

a-2. Procedures 9) Press [OK] key.
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP PWB The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one min-
cover. ute.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. Display of file reading
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position Firm Update
Reading Data
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is con-

tinued.
Display of the firmware update process
Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
4) Turn ON the power.
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes more
than ten seconds to display the menu.) * The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under update
Display when booting is completed process is indicated on the right upper corner of the display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
Update Program Init
11) Check the update result.
Please wait Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the firm-
ware programs.
Display of the firmware update result
Version Check Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM
Conf : 00050000 Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
• OK: Update is completed successfully.

6) Select the firmware update mode. • NG: Update is failed.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key. • Not Update: Update is not executed.
Display of the firmware update mode 12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the DIP-
Firm Update SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine boots
From USB Memory up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
7) Press [OK] key. Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and the copier basic menu.
file selection menu is displayed. 15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
Display of file selection 16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
Firm Update
> F 0100P000.sfu
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).

Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and [DOWN]
key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: "> D")
displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.

MX-8090N
[9] MAINTENANCE Service Manual
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance

A. Counter check
Before execution of the maintenance, execute SIM22 to check the
counter values of the following counters to confirm consuming states
of each section.
1) Each consumable part counter
2) Each unit counter
3) Trouble counter, JAM counter
B. Counter reset
When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the main-
tenance, execute SIM24 to reset the following counters.
1) Maintenance counter
2) Each consumable part counter
3) Each unit counter
4) Trouble counter, JAM counter
C. Firmware version check and upgrading

Execute SIM22-5 to check the firmware version, and upgrade it as
needed. (SIM49-1)
D. Confirmation, adjustment
After completion of part replacement and cleaning, etc, execute the following procedures.
Items necessary to execute
Item SIM to be used
ADJ 3 Print engine image distortion adjustment / ADJ 3A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment) / 50-22
OPC drum phase adjustment / OPC drum phase adjustment (Automatic adjustment) /
Color registration adjustment Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Print engine section)
ADJ 7/SET1 Color balance/density adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
ADJ 7B Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment 46-74
(Automatic adjustment) (Basic adjustment)
Items to execute as needed

Item SIM to be used
ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment ADJ 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
ADJ 2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
ADJ 2C Transfer current/voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 7/SET1 Color balance/density adjustment ADJ 7A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
MX-8090N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value.
The display content is "Maintenance execution timing Code: OO."
The relations between the messages and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Code Counter name Display condition SIM26-38-A set value Print JOB Enable/Disable
TA Maintenance counter (Total) When 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. No relation Enable
When the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. 0 (Print continue) Enable
1 (Print stop) Disable
CA Maintenance counter (Color) When 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. No relation Enable
When the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. 0 (Print continue) Enable
AA Maintenance counter When 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. No relation Enable
(Both of Total and Color) When the set value of SIM21-1 is reached. 0 (Print continue) Enable
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
B. Primary transfer unit

TK1 Primary transfer unit print counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter,
and the use day counter.
C. Secondary transfer unit

TK2 Secondary transfer unit print counter When 300K is reaches. No relation Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter,
and the use day counter.
D. Fusing unit
FK1 Fusing belt print counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
FK2 Pressure roller print counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
Code Counter name Display condition SIM26-38-B set value Print JOB Enable/Disable
FK3 Fusing web send counter When 300K is reached. No relation Enable
FK3 Fusing web send counter When the fusing web end detection is ON. 0 (Print continue) Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, the fusing belt counter, the fusing web print counter, the
accumulated rotation number counter, and the use day counter.
E. OPC drum
DK OPC drum print counter (K) When 300K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
OPC drum accumulated number of rotations (K) when 1,000K rotations is reached.
D (C/M/Y) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) When 200K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
OPC drum accumulated number of rotations (C/M/Y) when 1,000K rotations is reached.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and the
use day counter.
F. Developer
VK Developer print counter (K) When 600K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
DV unit accumulated number of rotations (K) when 2,000K rotations is reached.
V (C/M/Y) Developer print counter (C/M/Y) When 400K sheets is reached, or No relation Enable
DV unit accumulated number of rotations (C/M/Y) when 2,000K rotations is reached.
G. Waste toner box

SIM26-38-A Print JOB
Code Counter name Display condition Display message
set value Enable/Disable
- When near end is detected. Waste toner full The waste toner bottle will be No relation Enable
detection switch ON needed soon. (Prepare a new one.)
- The pixel count from near end reaches Specified pixel count Please replace the waste toner No relation Disable
the specified value. bottle.
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears.
H. Toner cartridge
SIM26-38-A Print JOB
Code Counter name Display condition Display message
set value Enable/Disable
- Toner motor rotation time Specified time of (K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner (Near No relation Enable
rotations near end)
- Toner supply amount is decreasing. Toner remaining quantity (K/C/M/Y) Replace the toner No relation Enable
sensor output cartridge. (Near end)
- The Hopper Remaining Toner after Specified hopper Replace the toner cartridge. (K) No relation Disable for a JOB which
detection of near end reaches the remaining count (End) requires K toner
specified level.
- The Hopper Remaining Toner after Specified hopper Replace the toner cartridge. (C/M/ No relation Enable for monochrome,
detection of near end reaches the remaining count Y) (End) Disable for color
specified level.
3. Maintenance list
X: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
When Every Every Every Every Every Every

Section Unit No. Maintenance parts Remark
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
DSPF Document feed 1 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the
section tray unit other side must be also cleaned.
Document feed 2 Document pickup roller   Replace according to each paper
unit 3 Paper feed roller   feed counter value: Replace at
100K or after one-year use.
4 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the
other side must be also cleaned.
Lamp unit 5 Second scan section,  
scanning glass
6 Scanner lamp   Air-blow the LED section. (Do not
clean with alcohol)
Optical unit 7 Mirror  
8 Lens  
9 CCD  
DSPF unit 10 Separation roller   Replace according to each paper
feed counter value: Replace at
100K or after one-year use.
11 Torque limiter X X Replace according to each paper
feed counter value: 800K
12 No. 1 registration roller  
13 Transport roller 1  
17 Paper exit roller  
18 No. 1 scanning plate  
19 No. 2 scanning section  
white reference glass
20 Discharge brush X X Replacement reference:
When the brush bundle is
remarkably deformed.
21 OC mat  
Drive unit 23 Gears X X Apply to the specified position as
needed when checking.
(UKOG-0299FCZZ)
24 Belts - X
Transport drive 25 Belts - X
unit
Scanner Scanner unit 1 Table glass  
section 2 SPF glass  
3 Rails ✩ ✩ Apply to the specified position.
4 Drive belt X X
5 Drive wire X X
Lamp unit 7 Mirror  
8 Scanner lamp   Air-blow the LED section. (Do not
clean with alcohol)
Mirror unit 9 Mirror  
CCD unit 10 Lens  
11 CCD  
Tray paper Tandem paper 1 Paper pickup roller X  Replace according to each paper
feed feed tray 2 Paper feed roller X  feed counter value: Replace at
section 3 Separation roller X  200K or after one-year use.
- Transport paper guides  
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Tray paper Tray paper feed 6 Paper pickup roller X  Replace according to each paper
feed unit 7 Paper feed roller X  feed counter value: Replace at
section 8 Separation roller X  (70cpm:100K / 80cpm:200K) or
after one-year use.
10 Transport roller 9, 10 X 
Paper feed tray 13 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the
Manual Manual paper 1 Paper pickup roller X  Replace according to each paper
paper feed feed unit 2 Paper feed roller X  feed counter value: Replace at
section 3 Separation roller X  100K or after one-year use.
5 Transport roller 8 X 
7 Gate solenoid X X  Note1
8 Pick up solenoid X X  Note1
Paper Interface unit 1 Transport roller 6 X  X
transport 2 Transport roller 7 X  X
section 3 Transport idle roller X  X
Right vertical 5 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the
transport unit other side must be also cleaned.
6 Transport idle roller X  X
Vertical 7 Transport roller 11 X  X
transport unit 8 Transport roller 12 X  X
LCC transport 11 Transport roller 14 X  X
unit 12 Transport roller 15 X  X
13 Transport roller 16 X  X
PS lower unit 16 Transport roller 13 X  X
PS unit 18 Transport roller 17 X  X
19 Registration roller (drive) X  X
20 Registration roller (idle) X  X
23 Paper dust removing  
unit
LSU LSU 1 Dust-proof glass X X Clean as needed.
section LSU cleaning 2 Cleaning base X X
rod
Toner supply section 1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2 years.
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Developing Developing unit 1 Developer X  Replace at 600K or at the
section (monochrome) specified rotation number.
The storage period is 2 years.
2 DV blade X X Replace as needed.
3 DV side seals F/R X X Replace as needed.
4 Toner filter X 
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
- Developing unit (BK) -  When 3000K is reached, replace
unit.
Developing unit 1 Developer X  Replace at 400K or at the
(color) specified rotation number.
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
- Developing unit (CL) -  When 2000K is reached, replace
unit.
OPC drum OPC drum unit 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum
section (monochrome) counter value or when the
specified rotation number is
reached.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace
according to the blade counter
value or when the specified
rotation number is reached.
3 MC unit X 
4 Side seals F/R - X Replace as needed.
5 Toner reception seat - X Replace as needed.
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If
cleaning cannot delete the trouble,
replace.
7 DL unit - X Check if the LED is dirty, Clean as
(Discharge lamp unit) needed.
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover
(After-transfer discharge of the light shielding surface as
lamp unit) needed.
9 HP sensor X X Clean as needed.
10 Process suction port X X Clean as needed.
moltopren
- OPC drum unit -  When 3000K is reached, replace
unit.
OPC drum unit 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum
(color) counter value or when the
specified rotation number is
reached.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace
according to the blade counter
value or when the specified
3 MC unit X 
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If
cleaning cannot delete the trouble,
replace.
7 DL unit - X Check if the LED is dirty, Clean as
(Discharge lamp unit) needed.
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover
(After-transfer discharge of the light shielding surface as
lamp unit) needed.
moltopren
- OPC drum unit -  When 2000K is reached, replace
unit.
1 : ‘18/Mar.
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Transfer Primary 1 Primary transfer belt -  When replacing, apply CKOG-
section transfer unit 0345DS51(Y toner).
2 Primary transfer cleaner -  When 300K is reached, replace
blade together with the primary transfer
belt.
3 Primary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
4 Primary transfer belt - X Replace as needed.
drive gear
5 Primary transfer belt -  Clean with alcohol.
drive roller
follower roller
tension roller
8 Primary transfer idle -  Clean with alcohol.
roller
9 PTC opposed roller -  Clean with alcohol.
10 Transfer separation pawl -  Replace together with the primary
transfer belt.
11 Y auxiliary roller -  Clean with alcohol.
12 Primary transfer cleaner - X Replace as needed.
seals F/R
13 Primary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
15 Resist backup shaft -  Clean with alcohol.
16 Primary transfer - 
cleaning brush roller
17 Primary transfer - 
cleaning roller
18 Shatterproof seal - X Replace as needed.
1 19 CL brush idle gear 1N - 
20 CL brush idle gear 2N - 
21 CL brush drive gear N - 
22 1st cleaner joint gear N - 
- Primary transfer unit -  When 3000K is reached, replace
unit.
PTC unit 23 Charger wire -  Do not touch the wire with bare
hand.
24 PTC cleaner - 
25 PTC cleaner B - 
Registration 26 Image registration/ -  After the sensors were cleaned,
sensor unit density sensor never forget to execute Sim44-2
then execute Sim46-74 “Copy
color balance adjustment”.
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Transfer Secondary 28 Secondary transfer belt -  Never use alcohol or solvents for
section transfer unit cleaning.
When replacing, apply CKOG-
0345DS51(Y toner).
29 Secondary transfer -  When 300K is reached, replace
cleaner blade together with the secondary
transfer belt.
30 Secondary transfer belt -  When 300K is reached, replace
cleaning roller together with the secondary
transfer belt.
31 Secondary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
32 Secondary transfer idle - X Replace as needed.
gear
33 Secondary transfer belt -  Clean with alcohol.
drive roller
follower roller
35 Secondary transfer -  Clean with alcohol.
blade contact roller
backup roller
37 Secondary transfer - 
38 Secondary transfer - X Replace as needed.
cleaner seals F/R
39 Secondary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
- Secondary transfer unit -  When 3000K is reached, replace
unit.
Waste toner collection section 1 Waste toner box X X Replacement reference: 100K
under the standard environmental
conditions (20 - 25 degrees C 65
+/- 5%) at the color ratio of "7 : 3
(Black : Color)" in the print ratio
5% document mode.
1 : ‘18/Mar.
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Fusing Fusing unit 1 Fusing belt - 
section 2 Fusing roller -  When replacing, apply grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to the shaft
section.
1 3 Pressure roller -  When replacing, apply grease
section.
4 Separation plate -  Clean when a foreign material is
attached.
1 5 Lower separation pawl -  Clean when a foreign material is
attached.
6 Meandering suppress - 
collar
7 Heating roller - 
8 Fusing roller bearing - 
9 Heating roller bearing - 
1 10 Pressure roller bearing - 
11 Heat-insulating bush -  When replacing, apply grease
section.
1 12 Pressure roller gear - 
13 24T Gear -  Packed in Pressure roller lit “MX-
750LH”
14 Main thermistor X X
15 Sub thermistor 1 X X
16 Sub thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as
needed.
17 Lower thermistor 1 X X
18 Lower thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as
needed.
20 Gears X X
21 Web roller - 
22 Web guide shaft - 
23 Web pressure roller - 
bearing
25 Fusing paper exit - X 
detector
26 Fusing front paper pass - X 
detector
28 Web cleaning motor - X 
- Paper guides  
- Fusing unit -  Replace at 300K when replacing
the unit.
Paper exit/ Right door unit 1 Transport roller 19 X  X
reverse 2 Transport roller 20 X  X
section 3 Transport roller 21 X  X
5 Paper exit roller 2 X  X
6 Discharge brush X X
Paper exit unit 9 Paper exit roller 1 X  X
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Drive Tandem paper 1 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as
section feed drive unit needed when checking.
2 Belts - X
Vertical transport clutch - X 
upper (PTRC2)
Paper feed clutch - X 
(T1PUC)
(T2PUC)
Paper transport clutch - X 
(TTRC)
Paper feed 3 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as
drive unit needed when checking.
4 Belts - X
(C3PUC)
(C4PUC)
lower (PTRC1)
Transport drive 5 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as
unit needed when checking.
6 Belts - X
(MPUC)
Main drive unit 7 Gears - X Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ)
(BK) to the specified position as needed
when checking.
8 Shaft earth sections - X Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ)
to the specified position as needed
when checking.
9 Belts - X
10 Sensors - X For the reflection-type sensor, the
DV clutch - X 
Main drive unit 11 Gears - X Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ)
(CL) to the specified position as needed
when checking.
12 Shaft earth sections - X Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ)
to the specified position as needed
when checking.
13 Belts - X
14 Sensors - X For the reflection-type sensor, the
DV clutch - X 
Other 15 Fusing motor - X Replace at the specified number
of rotations: about 2,500K.
Filter section 1 Deodorant filter X 
3 Ozone filter X 
Note1:
The conditions of the clutches and solenoid differ depending on the paper pass conditions from the paper tray.
Refer to the table below for replacement of the clutches and solenoid.
Signal Manual
Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 Tray4 Remark
name paper feed
Paper feed solenoid (Tray 1) T1PUS 3000K
Paper feed solenoid (Tray 2) T2PUS 3000K
Paper feed solenoid (Tray 3) C3PUS 2000K
Paper feed solenoid (Tray 4) C4PUS 2000K
Paper pickup solenoid MPFS 3000K
Paper feed gate solenoid MPGS 3000K
Paper feed clutch (Tray1) T1PUC 2000K
Paper feed clutch (Tray2) T2PUC 2000K
Transport clutch (Paper feed tray 1, 2) TTRC 2000K
Paper feed clutch (Tray3) C3PUC 2000K
Paper feed clutch (Tray4) C4PUC 2000K
Paper vertical transport clutch (Lower) PTRC1 2000K 2000K
Paper vertical transport clutch (Upper) PTRC2 2000K 2000K 2000K
Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed) MPUC 3000K
Memo:
Note for cleaning the image registration/density sensor
In maintenance (DV/Drum) or in case of a service call (F2-78), clean the image registration/density sensors.
After the sensors were cleaned, never forget to execute Sim44-2 then execute Sim46-74 “Copy color balance adjustment”.
Greasing
Greasing is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and grease.
• When there are some noises.
• When a lot of jams occur frequently. (Check the jam history.)
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system

Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and
clean.
• When a trouble or a jam occurs due to a sensor or a detector. (Check the jam history.)
Torque limiter check and replacement

Torque limiter check and replacement is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and replace.
• When there are some noises.
• When a lot of jams occur frequently. (Check the jam history.)
Alcohol for cleaning

Be sure to use ethanol for cleaning.
Cleaning of the primary transfer mode detector (CL/BK)

• When replacing the OPC drum, remove the primary transfer unit and the developing unit, and clean them.
• Blow air to the light emitting section and light receiving section to remove the attached toner.
• Blow air also when the sensor is wiped and cleaned with waste cloth.
A. DSPF section

Unit No. Maintenance parts Remark
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Document feed 1 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
tray unit must be also cleaned.
Document feed 2 Document pickup roller   Replace according to each paper feed counter
unit 3 Paper feed roller   value: Replace at 100K or after one-year use.
4 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
must be also cleaned.
Lamp unit 5 Second scan section,  
scanning glass
6 Scanner lamp   Air-blow the LED section. (Do not clean with
alcohol)
Optical unit 7 Mirror  
8 Lens  
9 CCD  
DSPF unit 10 Separation roller   Replace according to each paper feed counter
value: Replace at 100K or after one-year use.
11 Torque limiter X X Replace according to each paper feed counter
value: 800K
17 Paper exit roller  
18 No. 1 scanning plate  
19 No. 2 scanning section  
white reference glass
20 Discharge brush X X Replacement reference:
When the brush bundle is remarkably deformed.
21 OC mat  
Drive unit 23 Gears X X Apply to the specified position as needed when
checking. (UKOG-0299FCZZ)
24 Belts - X
Transport drive 25 Belts - X
unit
22
10
12
22
13
14
4
11
3
2
22
20
1
18
22
19
15
4
16
8 17
21
9 22 25
7
23
24 23
7 25
6
5 24
24
23
B. Scanner section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Scanner unit 1 Table glass  
2 SPF glass  
3 Rails ✩ ✩ Apply to the specified position.
4 Drive belt X X
5 Drive wire X X
Lamp unit 7 Mirror  
8 Scanner lamp   Air-blow the LED section. (Do not clean with
alcohol)
Mirror unit 9 Mirror  
CCD unit 10 Lens  
11 CCD  
4
5
8
10
7 9
11
2 : ‘19/March.
C. Tray paper feed section

2 Unit No. Maintenance parts Remark
calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Tandem paper 1 Paper pickup roller X  Replace according to each paper feed counter
feed tray 2* Paper feed roller X  value: Replace at 200K or after one-year use.
3* Separation roller X 
4* Torque limiter X X Replace according to each paper feed counter
value: 800K
Tray paper feed 6 Paper pickup roller X  Replace according to each paper feed counter
unit 7* Paper feed roller X  value: Replace at (70cpm:100K / 80cpm:200K)
8* Separation roller X  or after one-year use.
9* Torque limiter X X Replace according to each paper feed counter
value: 800K
Paper feed tray 13 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
* NOTE: There are parts difference for 70cpm machine and 80cpm machine. Check with the parts guide.
1 2
3
4
5
1
2
10
7
12
5
4
3 6
13 9
12
8
11
10
7
13 12
9
12
8
11
D. Manual paper feed section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Manual paper 1 Paper pickup roller X  Replace according to each paper feed counter
feed unit 2 Paper feed roller X  value: Replace at 100K or after one-year use.
3 Separation roller X 
4 Torque limiter X X Replace according to each paper feed counter
value: 800K
7 Gate solenoid X X 
8 Pick up solenoid X X 
4
1
2
7
6
3
E. Paper transport section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Interface unit 1 Transport roller 6 X  X
Right vertical 5 Sensors X X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
transport unit must be also cleaned.
Vertical 7 Transport roller 11 X  X
transport unit 8 Transport roller 12 X  X
LCC transport 11 Transport roller 14 X  X
unit 12 Transport roller 15 X  X
PS lower unit 16 Transport roller 13 X  X
PS unit 18 Transport roller 17 X  X
19 Registration roller (drive) X  X
20 Registration roller (idle) X  X
23 Paper dust removing  
unit
22
20 12
19
13
23
18
22
22
4
16
11
15
8
10
10
5
1 2
F. LSU section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
LSU 1 Dust-proof glass X X Clean as needed.
LSU cleaning rod 2 Cleaning base X X
G. Toner supply section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. The storage period is 2 years.
H. Developing section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Developing unit 1 Developer X  Replace at 600K or at the specified rotation
(monochrome) number.
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
- Developing unit (BK) -  When 3000K is reached, replace unit.
Developing unit 1 Developer X  Replace at 400K or at the specified rotation
(color) number.
5 Bias pin X X
6 Connector X X
- Developing unit (CL) -  When 2000K is reached, replace unit.
3
5
6
I. OPC drum section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
OPC drum unit 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum counter value or
(monochrome) when the specified rotation number is reached.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace according to the
blade counter value or when the specified
3 MC unit X 
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If cleaning
cannot delete the trouble, replace.
7 DL unit - X Check if the LED is dirty, Clean as needed.
(Discharge lamp unit)
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover of the light
(After-transfer discharge shielding surface as needed.
lamp unit)
moltopren
- OPC drum unit -  When 3000K is reached, replace unit.
OPC drum unit 1 Drum -  Replace according to the drum counter value or
(color) when the specified rotation number is reached.
2 Cleaner blade -  Recommendable to replace according to the
blade counter value or when the specified
3 MC unit X 
6 Cleaning brush - X Check for clogging of the brush. If cleaning
cannot delete the trouble, replace.
7 DL unit - X Check if the LED is dirty, Clean as needed.
(Discharge lamp unit)
8 TCDL unit - X Clean the TCDL protection cover of the light
(After-transfer discharge shielding surface as needed.
lamp unit)
moltopren
- OPC drum unit -  When 2000K is reached, replace unit.
8
1 4
2
10
1 : ‘18/Mar.
J. Transfer section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Primary 1 Primary transfer belt -  When replacing, apply CKOG-0345DS51
transfer unit (Y toner).
2 Primary transfer cleaner -  When 300K is reached, replace together with the
blade primary transfer belt.
3 Primary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
4 Primary transfer belt - X Replace as needed.
drive gear
drive roller
follower roller
tension roller
8 Primary transfer idle -  Clean with alcohol.
roller
9 PTC opposed roller -  Clean with alcohol.
10 Transfer separation pawl -  Replace together with the primary transfer belt.
11 Y auxiliary roller -  Clean with alcohol.
12 Primary transfer cleaner - X Replace as needed.
seals F/R
13 Primary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
15 Resist backup shaft -  Clean with alcohol.
16 Primary transfer - 
17 Primary transfer - 
cleaning roller
18 Shatterproof seal - X Replace as needed.
1 19 CL brush idle gear 1N - 
20 CL brush idle gear 2N - 
21 CL brush drive gear N - 
22 1st cleaner joint gear N - 
- Primary transfer unit -  When 3000K is reached, replace unit.
PTC unit 23 Charger wire -  Do not touch the wire with bare hand.
24 PTC cleaner - 
25 PTC cleaner B - 
Registration 26 Image registration/ -  After the sensors were cleaned, never forget to
sensor unit density sensor execute Sim44-2 then execute Sim46-74 “Copy
color balance adjustment”.
Secondary 28 Secondary transfer belt -  Never use alcohol or solvents for cleaning.
transfer unit When replacing, apply CKOG-0345DS51
(Y toner).
29 Secondary transfer -  When 300K is reached, replace together with the
cleaner blade secondary transfer belt.
30 Secondary transfer belt -  When 300K is reached, replace together with the
cleaning roller secondary transfer belt.
31 Secondary transfer roller - X Replace as needed.
32 Secondary transfer idle - X Replace as needed.
gear
drive roller
follower roller
blade contact roller
backup roller
37 Secondary transfer - 
38 Secondary transfer - X Replace as needed.
cleaner seals F/R
39 Secondary transfer toner - X Replace as needed.
reception seal
- Secondary transfer unit -  When 3000K is reached, replace unit.
1 : ‘18/Mar.
1 19 20
12
13
14
1
21
16
17
14
12
2
10
7
8
18
6
8
18
32
22 38
11 28
3 39
30
33
18 35
5
3 31
18
15
9
36
34
37
38
23 29
24
27
25
26
K. Waste toner collection section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
1 Waste toner box X X Replacement reference: 100K under the
standard environmental conditions (20 - 25
degrees C 65 +/- 5%) at the color ratio of "7 : 3
(Black : Color)" in the print ratio 5% document
mode.
1 : ‘18/Mar.
L. Fusing section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Fusing unit 1 Fusing belt - 
2 Fusing roller -  When replacing, apply grease
(UKOG-0235FCZZ) to the shaft section.
1 3 Pressure roller -  When replacing, apply grease
4 Separation plate -  Clean when a foreign material is attached.
1 5 Lower separation pawl -  Clean when a foreign material is attached.
6 Meandering suppress - 
collar
7 Heating roller - 
8 Fusing roller bearing - 
9 Heating roller bearing - 
1 10 Pressure roller bearing - 
11 Heat-insulating bush -  When replacing, apply grease
1 12 Pressure roller gear - 
13 24T Gear -  Packed in Pressure roller lit “MX-750LH”
14 Main thermistor X X
15 Sub thermistor 1 X X
16 Sub thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as needed.
17 Lower thermistor 1 X X
18 Lower thermistor 2 X X Replace or clean with alcohol as needed.
20 Gears X X
21 Web roller - 
22 Web guide shaft - 
bearing
25 Fusing paper exit - X 
detector
26 Fusing front paper pass - X 
detector
28 Web cleaning motor - X 
- Paper guides  
- Fusing unit -  Replace at 300K when replacing the unit.
9
6 11
25
16
1
19
7
14
8
2 13
15 28
6
9
12
10
24
27
23
5
11 21
8 26
4 17
3 10 18 22 24
27
M. Paper exit/reverse section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
Right door unit 1 Transport roller 19 X  X
5 Paper exit roller 2 X  X
Paper exit unit 9 Paper exit roller 1 X  X
12
11
5
6
8
6
1
N. Drive section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2000K 3000K
Tandem paper 1 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as needed when
feed drive unit checking.
2 Belts - X
upper (PTRC2)
(T1PUC)
(T2PUC)
Paper transport clutch - X 
(TTRC)
Paper feed 3 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as needed when
drive unit checking.
4 Belts - X
(C3PUC)
(C4PUC)
lower (PTRC1)
Transport drive 5 Gears - X Apply to the specified position as needed when
unit checking.
6 Belts - X
(MPUC)
Main drive unit 7 Gears - X Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to the
(BK) specified position as needed when checking.
8 Shaft earth sections - X Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to the
specified position as needed when checking.
9 Belts - X
10 Sensors - X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
DV clutch - X 
Main drive unit 11 Gears - X Apply grease (UKOG-0307FCZZ) to the
(CL) specified position as needed when checking.
12 Shaft earth sections - X Apply grease (UKOG-0012QSZZ) to the
specified position as needed when checking.
13 Belts - X
14 Sensors - X For the reflection-type sensor, the other side
DV clutch - X 
Other 15 Fusing motor - X Replace at the specified number of rotations:
about 2,500K.
13
13
13
9 14
12
14
12
14
12
14
10 2
8
10
15
2
6
2
O. Filter section

calling 200K 300K 400K 600K 2,000K 3,000K
1 Deodorant filter X 
3 Ozone filter X 
MX-8090N
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Service
(1) Upper Manual
cabinet rear cover
1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
1. Disassembly of Units
A. External view section
No. Name
1 Upper cabinet rear cover
2 Rear cabinet
3 Right cabinet rear
4 Upper cabinet front right
5 Upper cabinet front left
6 Upper cabinet left
7 Upper cabinet right 1
8 Front cover
9 Right lower door
10 Right cabinet lower 1 2
11 Right lower door cover
12 Left cabinet rear
13 Left cabinet upper
(2) Rear cabinet
14 Toner cover 1) Loosen the screw at the bottom of the rear cabinet, and remove
15 Paper exit tray the rear cabinet.
16 Paper exit tray rear connection cabinet
15
16 2
5 7 2 3
2
14
3 2
8
4
11 2 1
10
9 2
(3) Right cabinet rear

1) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet rear.
1
6 2
2 13
12
MX-8090N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

(4) Upper cabinet front right (7) Upper cabinet right
1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet front right. 1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the screws, and remove the arm covers.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet front right.
(5) Upper cabinet front left

1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet front left.

(8) Front cover

1) Remove the band. Side the shaft, and remove the front cover.

2 2
(6) Upper cabinet left
1) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet left.
1
2
3

(9) Right lower door, Right cabinet lower 3) Remove the screw, and remove the right lower door cover.
1) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the right lower door.
2 1
2
1
1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
(11) Left cabinet rear

1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear.
2
1
2
1
4 3
4
3
3) Remove the screw, and right cabinet lower.

(12) Left cabinet upper
1) Open the front cover.
2) Open the tandem paper feed tray.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet upper.
1
1
(10) Right lower door cover

1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray, paper feed tray.
2) Open the right lower door.

(13) Toner cover, Paper exit tray, 4) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray rear connec-
Paper exit tray rear connection cabinet tion cabinet.
1) Open the toner cover. Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the
toner cover. 2
1
1
B. Operation panel section

No. Name
2) Remove the paper holding arm, and remove the actuator. 1 Operation panel unit
1
2
(1) Operation panel unit

3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray. 1) Remove the a screw and remove Arm lower cover R.

1
2
1

2) Remove the Arm lower cover F. 5) Remove the screw, and remove the Arm cover A.

3) Remove the screw cover, the screw and the Upper arm cover.

6) Remove the screw and the Upper arm cover B.

4) Turn the operation panel to make the cabinet line straight and
remove the Arm cover R.
7) Remove the screw and the Arm cover B.

8) Remove the reuse band, earth cable and 3 connectors. C. DSPF section
NOTE: In order not to break the connectors, insert the connectors
No. Name
vertically.
1 DSPF unit
NOTE: When insert the connectors, never twist the cables. 2 Front cabinet
3 Rear cabinet upper
4 Upper door unit
5 Document feed tray
6 Paper feed unit
7 Lamp unit
8 Optical unit
9 Delivery drive unit
10 Paper feed drive unit
11 DSPF control PWB
4 3
1
2
9) Remove the screws and the Panel. 5
10

6
9
8
11
7
(1) DSPF unit

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Disconnect the
connector from the SCN Mother PWB.
2
1

3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate. 2) Remove the front cabinet.
ĭ
2
3
Ĭ
1 4
(3) Rear cabinet upper

1) Open the upper door. Remove the screw, and remove the rear
cabinet.
4) Remove the screws, and remove the DSPF unit from the
machine.
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
ĭ
Ĭ
Ĭ Ĭ
Ĭ
(4) Upper door unit
1) Remove the front cabinet.
2) Remove the sprig. Remove the pressure release axis holder and
the screw, and remove the pressure release link lever.
4 2
(2) Front cabinet
1) Open the upper door, and remove the screw.
1
3

3) Remove the screw and remove the paper feed cover. 3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
document feed tray.
ĭ
Į
Ĭ
ĭ
4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle and remove the
snap band.
(6) Paper feed unit

2) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
3) Remove the screw and remove the paper feed cover.
ĭ
ĭ
į Ĭ
4) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle and remove the
5) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the upper door unit.
snap band.
ĭ
1
(5) Document feed tray


5) Remove the screw, and remove the document feed unit. 5) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum
plate. Remove the lower door.
1
2 1
3
2
(7) Lamp unit

3) Open the OC mat. 6) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the
white reference plate.
4) Disconnect the connector for lamp unit from the CONTROL PWB
7) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp unit.

(8) Optical unit (9) Delivery drive unit
1) Remove the upper door. 1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
2) Remove the lamp unit. 2) Disconnect the connector and open the edge saddle. Remove the
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide. snap band.
2 Į
Ĭ
Ĭ
4) Remove the CCD FFC from the CCD PWB.
3) Remove the screws and the drive unit.
When attaching the delivery drive unit, tighten the screw in the
order of (1) - (3).
5) Remove the screw, and remove the optical fixing plate. Remove
the optical unit.
Ĭ
ĭ
3
2
1 2

(10) Paper feed drive unit a. Attachment of belts
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper. 1) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw while applying tension.
2) Disconnect the connectors. Remove the harness from the wire
saddle.
Ĭ
ĭ
3) Remove resign E-ring, separation clutch and transport clutch.

NOTE: make sure that stopping section in the clutch is fit into the
plate during the assembly. 2) Loosen the screw. Tighten the screw again after reapplying ten-
sion in the direction of the arrow.
ĭ ĭ
4) Remove screws and the paper feed drive unit.

(11) DSPF control PWB D. Scanner section
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
No. Name
2) Remove the rear cabinet lower.
1 Scanner unit
Ĭ
ĭ
(1) Scanner unit

Ĭ
1) Remove the DSPF unit.
2) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and remove the rear cabi-
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screws. Remove the net.
DSPF control PWB.
3) Remove the left cabinet rear.
4) Remove the upper cabinet front right, upper cabinet front left,
upper cabinet left, and the upper cabinet right.
5) Remove the snap band. Remove the step screw, and remove the
duct unit.
ĭ
Ĭ 1
ĭ
1
Ĭ
ĭ 1 3
6) Remove the screw, and open the high voltage MC PWB mounting
plate downward.
1 1

7) Remove the screw and remove the plate. E. Tray paper feed section
No. Name
1 Tandem paper feed tray
2 Paper feed tray
3 Tray paper feed unit

8) Remove the screw and the snap band, and remove the document
detection unit.
1 (1) Tandem paper feed tray

3
1) Pull out the tandem paper feed tray.
9) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the scanner
unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the tandem paper feed tray.
2 1
2
2 1
1 1
2 1
1

(2) Paper feed tray F. Manual paper feed section
1) Pull out the paper feed tray, and lift and remove it.
No. Name
1 Manual paper feed tray
2 Manual paper feed unit
(3) Tray paper feed unit

1) Remove the right vertical transport unit.
2) Remove the right lower door cover.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum, and the paper guide.
(1) Manual paper feed tray

1) Open the right door unit.
2
2) Remove the screw, and remove the right door rear cabinet.
1
3
2
1
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
tray paper feed unit.
1
2
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right door front cabinet lower.
1
3
1 2

4) Remove the cover. Disconnect the connector. G. Paper transport section
1 No. Name
1 Interface unit
2 Right vertical transport unit
3 Vertical transport unit
4 LCC transport unit
5 PS lower unit
6 PS unit
7 Paper dust cleaner unit
8 Double feed sensor
9 CIS sensor
7
5) Remove the shaft. Remove the screw, and remove the manual 6
paper feed tray. 5
1
4
3
2
2
3
1
(1) Interface unit
1) Remove the tandem paper feed tray.
2) Remove the front cover.
interface unit.
(2) Manual paper feed unit 2
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 3
manual paper feed unit.
3 3 1
1
2
4
3
1

(2) Right vertical transport unit (5) PS lower unit
1) Remove the waste toner bottle. 1) Remove the LCC transport unit.
2) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the right vertical transport 2) Remove the PS unit.
unit. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the PS lower unit.
1
1
2
(6) PS unit
1) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit.
(3) Vertical transport unit
1) Remove the right vertical transport unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
2) Open the right door unit. nector.
vertical transport unit.
1
1
3
3
2 3 2
1
4) Remove the screw, and slide the PS unit to the front side and
remove it.
(4) LCC transport unit

1) Remove the right lower door and the right cabinet lower. 2
2) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the LCC trans-
port unit.
1

(7) Paper dust cleaner unit 3) Disconnect the connector (a). Remove the screw (b), mylar(c) and
1) Open the front cover. the DF R PWB (d). Remove the DFS shield sheet (e).
2) Pull out and remove the paper dust removing unit.
ἡ
ἥ
ἣ ἢ
4) Remove the screws.
(8) Double feed sensor

NOTE: Sensors and PDFS board must be replaced at the same time.
1) Remove the PS unit.
2) Remove the screw and remove the Double feed sensor cover.
2 5) Remove the screws and the board unit.

1

6) Disconnect the connector.

7) Remove the screw (a) and the DF S PWB (b). Remove the DFS H. LSU section
shield sheet (c).
No. Name
1 LSU

ἢ
(9) CIS sensor

1) Remove the CIS harness cover and clamp, remove the cables
from the harness guide and disconnect the connector.
(1) LSU
1) Remove the left cabinet upper.

2) Remove the screw and remove the CIS sensor.
1 2
1
3) Disconnect the connector from LSU. Remove the screw, and pull
out the LSU.

3) Disassemble the CIS sensor. 3
1

1
2

4) Disconnect the connector from LSU Driver board. Remove the I. Toner supply section
screw, and remove the LSU Driver board.
No. Name
1 Toner cartridge
1
Note for disassembling the LSUcnt PWB

Do not hold the right and left edges of the LSUcnt PWB when disas-
sembling.
* The board may be warped, resulting in solder separation of built-in
parts.
(1) Toner cartridge

1) Open the cover.
NG
Be sure to hold the upper and lower edges of the LSUcnt PWB when
disassembling.
2) Pull out and remove the toner cartridge.

CAUTION: When assembling, do not push abruptly. Insert slowly and
horizontally with your hand on it until it is inserted to the
bottom.
OK CAUTION: Do not install a toner cartridge of a different color. Be sure
to install a toner cartridge of the same color.
Note for assembling the LSUcnt PWB
When connecting in board-to-board, press these points to engage. Y

M
C
BK

J. Developing section 3) Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to confirm that
the arrow marks of the positioning release button are aligned
No. Name together, and push the positioning release button to open the
1 Development unit positioning unit.
CAUTION: Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to confirm
that the arrow marks of the positioning release button are
aligned together, and push the positioning release button to
open the positioning unit.
If the operation is executed without aligning the arrow
marks of the positioning release button, the primary trans-
fer belt may be damaged.
2 3

4
(1) Development unit 1

4) Release the lock, and pull out the developing unit and remove it.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft.
2
1
2
CAUTION: If the drum unit is abruptly inserted, developer may spill.
1
2 Insert slowly and horizontally by putting your hand on it.
1
CAUTION: Always keep the DV unit with developer in it horizontal
1 when handling.
Since this unit employs the developer refresh method, if the
DV unit is tilted, developer may fall into the waste toner
transport section because of its structure.

CAUTION: When installing the DV unit, check if the lock is certainly Note for installing the OPC drum unit
“Unlocked” as a figure below and insert the unit to the main CAUTION: Fit the marks as shown below to insert.
unit and then lock the lock lever.
CAUTION: Check that the bottom of the OPC drum unit is engaged in
8QORFNHG /RFNHG the machine rail before insertion.
K. OPC drum section

No. Name
1 OPC drum unit
(1) OPC drum unit

1) Remove the developing unit.
2) Release the lock, and pull out the OPC drum unit and remove it.
L. Transfer section
No. Name
1 Primary transfer unit
2 PTC unit
3 Registration sensor unit
4 Secondary transfer unit

(1) Primary transfer unit


2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft. CAUTION: Press the positioning release button securely before open-
ing the positioning unit.
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
4) Remove the screw, and pull out the primary transfer unit and
3) Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to confirm that remove it.
the arrow marks of the positioning release button are aligned
together, and push the positioning release button to open the
positioning unit. 2
CAUTION: When the power is turned OFF normally, the arrow marks
of the positioning release button are aligned. If, however,
the power is abruptly interrupted such as pulling the power
cord during operation, the arrow marks may not be aligned.
In such a case, turn the positioning release button clock-
wise to align the arrow marks. 1
1
2 3
(2) PTC unit

1) Open the positioning unit.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the PTC unit.
1

(3) Registration sensor unit M. Tone hopper section
1) Remove the developing unit (BK).
No. Name
2) Remove the OPC drum unit (BK).
1 Tone hopper unit
3) Remove the primary transfer unit.
4) Remove the PTC unit. 1) Remove the toner cartridge.
5) Remove the PS unit. 2) Remove the developing unit.
6) Disconnect the connector on the registration sensor. Remove the 3) Remove the OPC drum unit.
screw, and remove the registration sensor unit. 4) Remove the primary transfer unit.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the front frame bottle cover.
(1) Hopper cover unit

(4) Secondary transfer unit
1) To remove only the hopper cover unit, remove the screw, pull the
cover toward the front side, and lift the right side of the unit to
2) Remove the screw, turn the secondary transfer unit by 90 degrees remove.
to remove it to the rear side.
2
3
㽲
CAUTION: When attaching the cover, insert the pawls (4 positions) on

the left side of the cover securely.

(2) Hopper unit N. Waste toner collection section
1) Disconnect the connector (2 positions).
No. Name
1 Waste toner bottle
2 Positioning unit (Waste toner collection)
3 Waste toner transport unit

2) Remove the screw (3 pcs.).
CAUTION: When removing the screw, be careful not to hit the drum
drive shaft.
If the drum shaft is bent by applying a stress to it, the pic-
ture quality may be affected.
(1) Waste toner bottle

1) Open the right lower door. Remove the waste toner bottle.
CAUTION: When removing the waste toner bottle or when attaching
the bottle cap, be careful of dirt on the waste toner bottle.
3) Pull the unit to the front side, lift it upward, and remove the unit.
CAUTION: When attaching the unit, insert the boss at the back of the
pipe securely before tightening the screw.
4) When a new unit is installed, execute HP_K - Y of SIM24-5 to
clear the remaining quantity counter.
5) The hopper motor and the remaining quantity sensor can be
checked with SIM10-1 and 10-2.
When a new unit is installed, if the name of sensor corresponding
to SIM10-2 is highlighted in black, it may be connection failure of
the connector.

CAUTION: Since the removed waste toner bottle is dirty, attach the 3) Remove the screw of the positioning unit. Check to confirm that
bottle cap to it and put in the package of the spare waste the arrow marks of the positioning release button are aligned
toner bottle. together, and push the positioning release button to open the
positioning unit.
CAUTION: When the power is turned OFF normally, the arrow marks
of the positioning release button are aligned. If, however,
the power is abruptly interrupted such as pulling the power
cord during operation, the arrow marks may not be aligned.
In such a case, turn the positioning release button clock-
wise to align the arrow marks.
2 3
(2) Positioning unit (Waste toner collection)

1
CAUTION: Press the positioning release button securely before open-

ing the positioning unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft.
4) Remove the front cover and the left cabinet.

2 5) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
2
1 3
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
4
3

6) Remove the screw, the plate and the bearing. 9) Close the positioning unit. Remove the screw, and open the posi-
tioning unit again.

2
7) Remove the screw and the snap band and the E-ring and the
1
bearing, and remove the gear cover.
10) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning unit.

1
4 CAUTION: When the positioning unit is installed, the hook of the posi-
tioning unit is jumped by the spring. Therefore, press the
1
unit downward with your fingers to engage it with the main
body and install.
3
5
1
2 1
(3) Waste toner transport unit

1) Remove the LCC transport unit.
2) Remove the positioning unit.
1
3) Remove the snap band. Disconnect the connector from waste
toner transport unit. Remove the screw, and remove the waste
3 toner transport unit.

O. Fusing section The pressure lever is in front of the dotted line section.
(No pressure is applied.)
No. Name
1 Fusing unit
The pressure lever is over the dotted line section.

(A pressure is applied.)
(1) Fusing unit

2) Release the lock. Remove the screw, and pull out the fusing unit
to the right side.
3) Lift the front side of the fusing unit, store the rail in the front side,
then hold the handle of the unit to remove. [For MX-RB14, LC13 installed]
1) Remove the cap from the top screw.
2) Remove the screw (x3).
3) Remove the left top cover.
1
2
1
2

3

2

Check to confirm that the fusing pressure is released.

If the pressure is not released, the fusing unit cannot be removed.

P. Paper exit/Reverse section 3) Remove the screw, and remove the right door upper cabinet and
the right door front cabinet.
No. Name
1 Right door unit 1
2 Paper exit unit
2

4) Remove the screw. Remove the rail from step screw, and remove
the right door unit.
(1) Right door unit
1) Release the lock. Open the right door unit.
2) Remove the waste toner tray.


(2) Paper exit unit Q. Drive section
1) Remove the fusing unit.
No. Name
2) Remove the paper holding arm and the actuator.
1 Tandem paper feed drive unit
2 Paper feed drive unit
3 Transport drive unit
4 Main drive unit (BK), Main drive unit (CL)
5 Toner transport drive unit
1
2


(1) Tandem paper feed drive unit

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the angle.
1

paper exit unit.
3) Remove the reuse band. Disconnect the connector. Remove the

screw, and remove LCHM Drive board 1/2.

2
1
2
3 3

4) Remove LCHM Drive 1/2 PWB plate. 7) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the pul-
ley. Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
5
3
2
1
8) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the pul-
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PCU harness from ley. Remove the resin ring, and remove the pulley, and remove
saddle. Remove the screw, and remove the high voltage 2TC the belt. Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
PWB mounting plate.
3
1 1
1 2
1
6
2 5
2 4
1 7
3
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw and open the
PCU PWB mounting plate. 8
1
2 9) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
tandem paper feed drive unit.
2 3 2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2 1
2 1
2
2 2
1
2 2
2
2

(2) Paper feed drive unit 5) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover, and the rear cabinet. upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame.
plate downward.
1 1

2 6) Remove the screw, and remove the angle.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the filter holder.
Remove the exhaust duct RC2.
7) Remove the reuse band. Disconnect the connector. Remove the

screw, and remove LCHM Drive board 1/2.



8) Remove LCHM Drive 1/2 PWB plate. 11) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the pul-
2
1
4
9) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PCU harness from
saddle. Remove the screw, and remove the high voltage 2TC
PWB mounting plate. 5
1 1
1 12) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
paper feed drive unit.
2 2
2 1
2 1
3
1
1
3
2
10) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and open the PCU 2
1
PWB mounting plate.
1
1
2
(3) Transport drive unit

1
2 2) Remove the screw, and open the high voltage MC PWB mounting
plate downward.
1
2
1
2 1
1
1
2 1
2 1
2
2
2
2
3

3) Remove the screw, and remove the filter holder. 7) Remove the reuse band. Disconnect the connector. Remove the
Remove the exhaust duct RC2. screw, and remove LCHM Drive board 1/2.

8) Remove LCHM Drive 1/2 PWB plate.

5) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame.
9) Disconnect the connector, and remove the PCU harness from

saddle. Remove the screw, and remove the high voltage 2TC

PWB mounting plate.
1 1
1
2
2

1
3
10) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the pul-
5
3
2
1

11) Remove the resin ring, and remove the belt, and remove the pul- 7) Remove the screw, and open the high voltage MC PWB mounting
ley. plate downward.
3
1 1
2
1
12) Disconnect the connector, and remove the clamp. Remove the
screw, and remove the transport drive unit.
1 8) Remove the screw, and remove the filter holder.


(4) Main drive unit (BK), Main drive unit (CL)

1) Remove the primary transfer unit.
2) Remove the developing unit.
3) Remove the process unit.
4) Remove the PTC unit.
6) Disconnect the connector.


11) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel. 14) Remove the screw, and pull out the main drive unit (BK).
2
2
2
1
1
1
12) Disconnect the connector, and remove snap band. 1

1
15) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and pull out the
main drive unit (CL).
2 3
1 2
2
2
1
1
13) Disconnect the connector (1). Open the clamp, and set the har-
ness free (2). Disconnect the connector (3). Remove snap band
(4).
2 2
1
2 (5) Toner transport drive unit
plate downward.
3

3) Remove the screw, and remove the filter holder. 7) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
Remove the exhaust duct RC2. toner transport drive unit.
2 2 3 2 2
R. PWB section
No. Name
1 HL control PWB
2 High voltage 1TC PWB
3 SCN Mother PWB
4 High voltage MC / DV PWB
5 LCHM Drive 1/2 PWB
6 High voltage 2TC PWB
4) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet rear. 7 DC POWER PWB
5) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit 8 SUB AC POWER PWB
upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame. 9 SUB DC POWER PWB
10 AC POWER PWB
11 PCU PWB
12 Driver PWB
13 MFP control PWB / HDD
14 LSU control PWB / LSU Driver PWB *1
15 CIS PWB
16 DFS PWB
*1: Described in LSU section.

6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the clamp. Remove the

screw, and remove the HL-TC1 PWB mounting plate.

2

2
2 1
1 2

(1) HL control PWB, High voltage 1TC PWB 5) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
plate downward.
1 1

2 6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the HL

3) Remove the screw, and remove the filter holder. control PWB.
2 3 2
1
1
2 1 2

high voltage 1TC PWB.
2 3 2 1 2
2 2 2
1 1

(2) SCN Mother PWB 4) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
plate downward.
1 1

5) Remove the screw, and remove the plate.

2

6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screw. Disconnect the

connector, and remove the SCN Mother PWB.
CAUTION: Since the MFP control PWB and the SCN Mother PWB are
connected in board to board, be careful when disassem-
bling and assembling.
2 1 1 2
1
1
2
3 1
2
2 1 2
1 4

(3) High voltage MC PWB 4) Remove the screw, and open the MFP mother mounting unit
1) Remove the rear cabinet. upward. Hang the support plate on the machine frame.
high voltage MC PWB.
2 2 2
1

2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1
(4) LCHM Drive 1/2 PWB / High voltage 2TC PWB
plate downward.
6) Disconnect remove the reuse bands, the connectors, the screws

and remove LCHM Drive board 1/2.


7) Remove LCHM Drive 1/2 PWB plate. 6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
earth terminal. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
remove the AC cord mounting plate.
* 1 AC Code
4
1

high voltage 2TC PWB.
4 2 3 6
1 1 2 1
5 5
2 2
* AC Inlet
3
2
1
1
2 1 2 2 2 3
(5) SUB AC POWER PWB (For Europe only), DC POWER

PWB 6
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2 3
2) Remove the screw and remove the angle. 5
3) Remove LCHM Driver 1/2 PWB plate. 5
4) Remove the high voltage 2TC PWB plate.
PCU PWB mounting plate. 7) Remove the harness from saddle.
1
2 duct unit.
3
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2 2
1
1
2 1
2 1
2
2
2

9) Disconnect the connector. 12) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the DC
POWER PWB.
2 2 2
1
1 2
2 2
2 2 2
(6) SUB DC POWER PWB

SUB DC POWER PWB.
10) Remove the harness from saddle, and remove the snap band.
Remove the screw, and remove the AC PWB mounting plate. 2 2 2
3 1
1 2
2 2 2
2 2 2 2
(7) AC POWER PWB

2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the AC
2 POWER PWB.
2 2 2 2
2
1 1
2
1
SUB AC POWER PWB. (For Europe only)
2 1 2 2 1 1 2
1
1
2 2

(8) PCU PWB 3) Disconnect the connector from MFP control PWB. Remove the
1) Remove the rear cabinet. screw, and remove the MFP control PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from saddle.
Remove the screw, and remove the PCU PWB.
2 3 1 3 1 3

1 1

3 3

1
1
4 1

3 1 3 1 3
(9) Driver PWB

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from saddle.
Remove the screw, and remove the driver PWB.
4) Disconnect the connector from HDD. Remove the screw, and
2
remove the HDD unit.
3 2
3
1
1
3
3 2
3
1
1
4
3 3
1
1
(10) MFP control PWB, HDD
1) Remove the right cabinet rear.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP control unit.
5) Remove the screw from HDD, and remove the angle.
1 2
1
2 3
1 1

(11) DFS PWB / CIS PWB NOTE: When Assemble the boards, be sure the band position as
1) Remove the PS unit. the figure below.
2) Remove the step screw and remove the board unit.
4) Remove the screws and remove the DFS PWB and CIS PWB.
3) Disconnect the connectors.

&,63:%
')63:%
1 1

2. Maintenance (2) Lamp unit
A. DSPF section a. Second scan section scanning glass, scanner lamp
1) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp mounting plate.
(1) Document feed unit
a. Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller 1
1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed cover.
1
2
2) Remove the paper feed PG upper cover. 2) Clean the second scan section scanning glass.
3) Remove the pickup roller holder. Remove the document pickup 3) Clean the scanner lamp.
roller from the pickup roller holder.
4) Remove the paper feed roller.

(3) Optical unit 3) Clean the lens and CCD.
a. Mirror
1) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror base cover.
1 2
(4) DSPF unit

a. Separation roller
1) Remove the document feed unit.
2) Clean the mirror.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed PG lower cover.
2
1
3) Remove the revere pressure release lever, and remove the sepa-
ration roller.
b. Lens, CCD
1) Remove the screw, and remove the dark box. Remove the dust-
proof cover. 1
1 2
2 3
b. Torque limiter
1) Remove the document feed unit.
2) Remove the drive unit.
3) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the No. 1 registration roller
(Idle).
2) Remove the lens cover.

2

4) Remove the screw. Lift the document paper feed tray and remove d. Transport roller 1
the paper guide. 1) Open the upper door unit.
2) Clean the transport roller 1.
1
1 1
3
2
2
2
5) Remove the screw, and remove the support plate and the bearing.
Remove the roller shaft, and remove the torque limiter.
e. No. 2 registration roller
4 2) Remove the rear cabinet.
3 3) Remove the screw, and remove the left rear lower cabinet.
2
1
1
5
c. No. 1 registration roller

1) Remove the document feed unit. 4) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the PS knob.
2) Clean the No. 1 registration roller.
2
5) Remove the screw, and remove the paper guide.

Clean the No. 2 registration roller.
1
2
3
4

f. Paper exit roller, discharge brush h. Second scan section white reference glass, transport roller 2,
1) Remove the document feed tray. transport roller 3
2) Clean the paper exit roller. 1) Open the OC mat.
3) Check the discharge brush. 2) Open the lower door. Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum
plate. Remove the lower door.
CAUTION: when replacing the discharge brush, attach to the attach-
ment reference.
2 1
3
g. OC mat, No. 1 scan plate 3) Remove the screw, and remove the fulcrum plate. Remove the
1) Open the DSPF unit. white reference plate.
2) Clean the OC mat and No. 1 scan plate.

4) Use cleaner to clean the second scan section white reference b. Rails
glass. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Apply grease to each rail.
CAUTION: Be careful not to apply grease to the drive wire.
If grease is attached to the drive wire, clean it deliberately.
5) Clean the transport roller 2 and transport roller 3.
c. Drive belt, Drive wire

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the wire belt and the drive wire.
Also check to confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley sec-
tion is tightly wound without clearance.
B. Scanner section
(1) Scanner unit
a. Table glass, SPF glass
1) Remove the screw, and remove the glass holder. Remove the
table glass. Remove the screw, and remove the SPF glass.
Clean the table glass and SPF glass.
5 1

CAUTION: Set and fix the drive wires in the sequence of (1) - (7) as (3) Mirror unit
shown below. 1) Remove the table glass.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the 2) Clean the mirror.
mirror unit to the vicinity of the home position. Wind the
wire seven turns as shown in the figure, and fix the eighth
turn section with the screw. Then wind two turns further-
more around the pulley.
7
6
4 2
5
1
7
6
(4) CCD unit
4 1 7 8 9 10
a. Lens, CCD
5 1) Remove the table glass.
2 2) Remove the screw, and remove the dark box.
1
1
3
10 9 8 7 1
1
2
(2) Lamp unit

1) Clean the mirror and the waveguide stick and reflection sheet.
1
3) Clean the lens and CCD.

C. Tray paper feed section 2) Remove the separation roller.
(1) Tandem paper feed tray

a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller
1) Remove the paper guide.
c. Torque limiter
2) Lift the tandem paper feed. Remove the paper pickup roller and
the paper feed roller.
3 1
1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the separation roller.
b. Separation roller
1
2
3) Remove the torque limiter.

(2) Tray paper feed unit c. Transport roller 9/10, Transport roller 2/3
a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller 1) Remove the E-ring, the gear, the parallel pin, and the baring.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed lower unit.
1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Remove the paper guide.
5 6
4
3 2
1
3) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
2) Clean the transport roller 9/10 and the transport roller 2/3.
1 2
d. Torque limiter
b. Separation roller
1) Remove the E-ring, the gear, the parallel pin, and the baring.
1) Remove the paper feed tray. Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed lower unit.
2) Remove the separation roller.
5 6
4
3 2
1

2) Remove the spring. Remove the screw, and remove the reinforce- 5) Remove the E-ring and the coupling. Remove the separation
ment plate. Remove the lever. shaft, and remove the torque limiter.
2
2 2
3 1
1
2
3
4
5
D. Manual paper feed section

3) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring.
(1) Manual paper feed unit
a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller, Separation roller
1) Remove the cover.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
4) Shift the separation shaft, remove the bearing, and remove the
separation shaft.
1
2
1

3) Remove the cover. Remove the separation roller. c. Transport roller 8
1) Remove the cover.
1
b. Torque limiter
1) Remove the screw, and remove the reinforcement plate. Remove
the spring.
1 2

Clean the transport roller 8
2) Remove the E-ring, and slide the shaft. Remove the torque limiter. 1
3 1
2
3
2

E. Paper transport section (4) PS lower unit
(1) Interface unit a. Transport roller 13
a. Transport roller 6, Transport roller7
1) Clean the transport roller 6 and the transport roller 7.
(5) PS unit
a. Transport roller 17

a. Transport roller 11, Transport roller 12
1) Clean the transport roller 11 and the transport roller 12.
b. Registration roller (Drive), Registration roller (Idle)

1) Clean the registration roller (Drive) and the registration roller
(Idle).
a. Transport roller 14, Transport roller 15, Transport roller 16
1) Clean the transport roller 14 and the transport roller 15 and the
transport roller 16.
c. CIS sensor
1) Clean the CSI side “slant line marked area” with dry cloth.

F. LSU section G. Developing section
(1) LSU (1) Development unit
a. Dust-proof glass a. Developer / Upper DV blade
1) Open the front cover. CAUTION: Always keep the DV unit with developer in it horizontal
2) Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the LSU cleaning hole with the when handling.
cleaning base faced downward, and clean the dust-proof glass. Since this unit employs the developer refresh method, if the
DV unit is tilted, developer may fall into the waste toner
transport section because of its structure.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.
1
2
[Note for attaching the DV cover]

When attaching the DV cover, be careful of the following items:
1. Insert the convex portion in the angle shown below.
(2) LSU cleaning rod

a. Cleaning base
2) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cover.
2. Turn the cover to attach.
3) Remove the cleaning base from the lead edge of the LSU clean-
ing rod.
3. Check to confirm that three convex portions are securely

engaged.

2) Discharge old developer from the DV unit. b. DV blade / Doctor side seal
CAUTION: When discharging developer, rotate the coupling pulley in 1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor cover.
the rear side of the DV unit in the arrow direction while the CAUTION: When installing, check to confirm that the hook of the DV
operation. doctor cover is securely engaged with the positioning boss.
2
1
2) Check the DV blade.

CAUTION: When replacing the DV blade, attach it to the attachment
reference.
3) Check the Upper DV Blade.
CAUTION: After attaching the DV blade, check the DV blade for any
CAUTION: When replacing the upper DV blade, attach it to the attach-
deformation or wavering.
ment reference.
CAUTION: After attaching the upper DV blade, check it for any defor-
mation or wavering.
Wall surface reference
Rib reference
0mm 0.3mm
0.5mm
5LEUHIHUHQFH :DOOUHIHUHQFH
0mm

3) Check the Doctor side seal.

PP

CAUTION: When replacing the Doctor side seal, attach it to the attach-
MM MM ment reference.

PP

CAUTION: After attaching the Doctor side seal, check it for any defor-
mation or wavering.
4) Supply new developer into the DV unit. CAUTION: Check if there’s no gap between the wall and the Doctor
CAUTION: When supplying developer, rotate the coupling pulley in the side seal.
rear side of the DV unit in the arrow direction while the
operation.
MM MM MM MM

2IBREFERENCE
MM
MM
A
2IBREFERENCE
C
MM
MM
B D
A@ C@
B@ D@

c. DV side seals F/R
1) Check the DV side seals F/R. OK
CAUTION: When replacing the DV side seals F/R, attach them to the
attachment references.
CAUTION: When attaching the DV side seals F/R, be careful not to
cover the DV blade with the DV side seals.
DV BOX edge
Mark-off line reference
inside reference
0.3mm 0mm
0mm 0.3mm
Edge reference
Edge reference
0.3mm
0mm 0.3mm
0mm
NG
d. Toner filter
1) Remove the screw, and remove the filter cover. Remove the filter
holder.
2
1
3
H. OPC drum section
(1) OPC drum unit
a. Drum
1) Release the lock, and remove the drum.
CAUTION: Since the drum has directional property, be careful not to
mistake the installing direction when installing.
"F" mark is put on the drum front side.
CAUTION: When attaching the filter cover, do not rotate but attach
straight from the top. (See the figure below.)
CAUTION: When the OPC drum is removed, perform the following

procedures.

1) After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder (UKOG- 1) Before inserting the F-side drum flange into the process
0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum. UN,
2) slide it sideways to deform the fiber flow of the side seal.
fiber flow
NG
Side seal F
2) After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the OPC
drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic acid
Hit the edge of the moquette
powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
OK
NOTE: Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(5mm) of the OPC drum.
1) After inserting the F-side drum flange into the process
NOTE: Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above the UN,
black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly. 2) push the drum.
NOTE: When installing the drum, push the drum after inserting the F-
side drum flange into the Process UN so as not to reverse the fiber flow
fiber flow of the side seal F. OK
NG Side seal F
Side seal F
２
ĭ

b. MC unit 4) Remove the DL unit, and disconnect the connector from the DL
1) Remove the drum. unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the MC unit. CAUTION: When installing, check to confirm that the hook of the DL
* When removing the MC unit only, there is no need to remove unit is securely engaged with the positioning boss.
the drum.
1
1 2
2
CAUTION: Arrange the harness as shown below.

1) Bend the harness as shown below.
c. DL unit, Cleaner blade
1) Remove the MC unit.
2) Remove the drum.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the MC cover.
When attaching the cover, refer to the figure below.
OK
NG

5) Remove the screw, hold the projection of the cleaner blade, and 5) Check the toner reception sheet.
remove it. CAUTION: When replacing the toner reception sheet, attach it to the
attachment reference of the toner reception cover.
1
CAUTION: When replacing the toner reception sheet, it is not required
to remove the toner reception cover.
1
2
Difference-in-level
0.5mm 0mm
reference
1
0mm 0.5mm
Difference-in-level reference
d. TCDL unit, Toner reception sheet, Side seals F/R

1) Remove the MC unit.
2) Remove the drum.
3) Remove the harness cover. 6) Check the side seals F/R.
CAUTION: When the side seals F and R and the toner reception sheet CAUTION: When replacing the side seals F and R, it is not required to
are replaced, this procedure is not required. remove the toner reception cover.
CAUTION: When there is a clearance in the edge section of the side
seals after replacing the blade and when the side seal is
replaced, attach the seal to the attachment reference.
Also attach so that the rubber section of the cleaner blade
does not interfere with the side seal when the rubber sec-
tion is pushed in.
Be careful not to crush the toner reception sheet. Especially when
the side seals are replaced without changing the toner reception
sheet, turn over the toner reception sheet and attach the seals as
shown in the figure below.
Toner reception Toner reception

cover edge reference cover edge reference
+0 +0
+0.2mm +0.2mm
(Attach along it.) (Attach along it.)
㽲
㽳
Blade edge reference Blade edge reference

+0mm +0mm
+0.2mm +0.2mm
4) Remove the screw, and remove the TCDL unit. Disconnect the
connector from the TCDL unit. Sample of attachment
CAUTION: When the side seals F and R and the toner reception sheet Side seal R PO Side seal F PO
are replaced, this procedure is not required.
* When attaching the side moltopren, attach it by pushing

2
it onto the side of the toner reception cover.
1

e. Cleaning brush Countermeasures
1) Remove the MC unit. If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously, per-
2) Remove the drum. form the following countermeasures.
3) Remove the side seals R. 1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the plate and the gear. 2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
Check method
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt
and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following
method.
2 -Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image
2. Prior exposure prevention
3
NOTE: Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
1 NOTE: Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
NOTE: Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
1 Note
Countermeasures
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior expo-
5) Remove the screw, and remove the cleaning brush. sure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area
in the previously exposed section.
2) If the OPC drum is subject to stress by being exposed to strong
2
light, it may be recovered by leaving it in a dark and cool place.
If it does not be recovered, replace it with a new one.
6) Remove the coupling and the bearing from the cleaning brush.
2
1
Note for servicing the OPC drums

1. Prevent contamination
NOTE: Be careful not to leave fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC
drum surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
NOTE: When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum
with the protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached
to the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning
blade may flip.)

I. Transfer section c. Primary transfer toner reception seal
1) Remove the screw, rotate the primary transfer cleaner unit and
(1) Primary transfer unit
remove it.
a. Transfer separation pawl
1) Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the separa-
tion pawl and the spring from the holder.
CAUTION: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the
transfer belt with the separation pawl.
1
4
2 3
1
b. Primary transfer cleaning roller 2

1) Remove the screw, and remove the guide rail unit.
2
2) Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer toner recep-
tion seal.
1 2
1 1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer cleaning

roller.
3
1
2
4

1 : ‘18/Mar.
d. Primary transfer cleaner seal F/R, Primary transfer cleaner e. CL brush idle gear 1N, gear 2N, drive gear N. 1
blade. 1) Remove the screws and remove the waste toner transport pipe.
1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner unit.
2) Remove the primary transfer cleaner seal F/R.
CAUTION: When replacing the primary transfer cleaner seals F/R,
attach them to the attachment reference.
Ĭ
Edge reference Edge reference
0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm Ĭ
CAUTION: When assembling, pay attention to the direction of the D-

Edge reference
Edge reference
cut bearing.
0mm
0mm
CAUTION: After assembling, make sure that the roller rotates

smoothly.
0.5mm
0.5mm
3) Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer cleaner

blade.
2
1 2) Remove the Transfer CL F plate, remove the E-ring and remove
the gears.
Į
ĭ
Į
ĭ
İ
į

1 : ‘18/Mar.
f. Primary transfer belt 5) Fold the primary transfer unit 90 degrees to remove the primary
1) Remove the primary transfer cleaner unit. transfer belt.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the separation pawl unit. Remove CAUTION: Handle the primary transfer belt with care so as not to dam-
the screw, and remove the guide rail unit. age it.
CAUTION: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the CAUTION: Install the Primary Transfer Belt so that the printed lot num-
transfer belt with the separation pawl. ber is at the rear side.
CAUTION: When putting the separation pawl unit on a flat surface, put CAUTION: When installing, check to confirm that both ends of the pri-
is with the separation pawl facing upward in order to pre- mary transfer belt are not positioned over the transfer
vent against damage on the lead edge of the separation guide.
pawl.
1
4
1
2 2
3) Remove the screw on the front side of the primary transfer unit.
Turn the bearing 90 degrees. CAUTION: When you screwed the primary transfer fixing plate, Fix the 1
screws with the frame of the unit straight.
Top
1
2
4) Remove the screw, and slide the plate. NG

1 : ‘18/Mar.
1 CAUTION: There is no protrusion on the table where the Transfer UN g. 1st cleaner joint gear N 1
is to be placed. 1) Remove the primary transfer belt.
CAUTION: Tighten the screw so that it is not loose. 2) Remove the E-ring and remove the 1st cleaning joint gear N.
Bottom
1st cleaning
joint gear N
ķ
Į Ķ
ĵ
Ĵ
OK ĭ
Ĭ
ĳ
Ĳ
ı
İ
į
CAUTION: After replacement of the primary transfer belt, perform the h. Primary transfer belt drive roller, Primary transfer belt follower
following procedures. roller, Primary transfer belt tension roller, Primary transfer belt
1) With the primary transfer cleaner unit removed, apply Yellow toner idle roller
(CKOG-0345DS51) to the whole surface of the primary transfer 1) Remove the primary transfer belt.
belt. 2) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller, the primary transfer
belt follower roller, the primary transfer belt tension roller, and the
primary transfer belt idle roller.
2) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit.

3) Manually rotate the transfer belt drive gear to remove yellow toner i. PTC-opposing roller, registration backup roller, Y support
from the primary transfer belt clearly. roller
1) Remove the primary transfer belt.
2) Turn back the primary transfer unit.
Clean the PTC-opposing roller, the registration backup roller, and
the Y support roller.

j. Primary transfer roller (2) PTC unit
1) Remove the primary transfer belt. a. PTC cleaner B, PTC cleaner, Charger wire
2) Turn back the primary transfer unit. 1) Remove the front side cover of the PTC unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer roller.
Remove the primary transfer roller from the holder.
2) Remove the PTC cleaner B, and remove the PTC cleaner.

CAUTION: When removing and installing, be careful not to catch the
PTC cleaner with the charger wire.
CAUTION: When installing the PTC cleaner B, check to confirm that
the pawl of the PTC cleaner is securely engaged.
k. Primary transfer belt drive gear

1) Turn the coupling lock 90 degrees, pull out the pin and remove the
primary transfer belt drive gear.

CAUTION: After installation, check to confirm that the charger wire is
at the center of the cleaner pad.
3) Remove the rear side cover of the PTC unit.

4) Loosen the screw, and remove the round terminal of the charger (4) Secondary transfer unit
wire from the mounting plate. Remove the spring, and remove the
a. Secondary transfer belt follower roller, Secondary transfer
charger wire.
belt, Secondary belt cleaning roller
CAUTION: To handle the charger wire, hold the round terminal and do 1) Remove the screw, and remove the electrode holder.
not touch the wire section directly. Be careful to keep the
wire free from dirt, oil. CAUTION: When attaching the electrode holder, check to confirm that
the roller shaft is inserted into the bearing.
Do not twist or bend the wire.
1
2
4
1
2 2) Remove the screw, and remove the positioning shaft and remove
the spring.
(3) Registration sensor unit

a. Image registration/Density sensor
1) Open the shutter, and clean the image registration and the density
sensor.

3) Remove the sholder screw, and remove the secondary transfer

belt unit.
1
1

4) Unhook the lock for the cleaning roller and remove the cleaning 2) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the secondary
roller. transfer backup roller.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the bearing.
3) Clean the secondary transfer blade contact roller.

6) Remove the secondary transfer belt follower roller and the sec-
ondary transfer belt. Remove the bearing of the frame.
Clean the secondary transfer belt follower roller and the second- c. Secondary transfer roller
ary transfer belt. 1) Remove the secondary transfer belt.
CAUTION: When handling the transfer belt, use enough care to keep it 2) Remove the bearing and the spring, and remove the secondary
free from scratches and dirt. transfer roller.
CAUTION: When installing, be careful not to bring the transfer belt in
contact with the frame, etc., and not to break the transfer
belt.
CAUTION: When attaching the secondary transfer belt follower roller,
insert it from the vicinity of the secondary transfer belt fol-
lower roller.
CAUTION: After replacement, apply yellow toner (CKOG-0345DS51)
to the whole surface of the belt.
2
3 2
1
b. Secondary transfer belt drive roller, Secondary transfer belt

backup roller, Secondary transfer blade contact roller
1) Remove the secondary transfer belt.

CAUTION: Spring has mounting direction. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the secondary transfer cleaner
Fit the spring in the boss of the bearing. blade.
1
Rear side Front side
d. Secondary transfer toner reception seal

1) Remove the secondary transfer belt unit.
2) Check the secondary transfer reception seal.
CAUTION: When replacing the secondary transfer toner reception
seal, attach it to the attachment reference.
4) While rotating the secondary transfer cleaning brush roller in the
arrow direction, clean the roller.
CAUTION: Do not rotate the secondary transfer cleaning brush roller
in the reverse direction, If it is rotated reverse, the toner
reception seal may be damaged.
0mm 0.3mm
0mm
0.3mm
e. Secondary transfer cleaner seal F/R, Secondary transfer

cleaner blade, Secondary transfer cleaning brush roller
1) Remove the secondary transfer belt unit.
2) Remove the secondary transfer cleaner seal F/R.
CAUTION: When replacing the secondary transfer cleaner seals F/R,
attach them to the attachment reference. Also attach so f. Secondary transfer idle gear
that the secondary transfer cleaner seals F/R are not posi- 1) Remove the secondary transfer belt unit.
tioned over the secondary transfer cleaner blade. 2) Remove the spring. Remove the step screw and the spring, and
remove the gear holder. Remove the gear from the gear holder.
4
EDGEREFERENCE
&RAMECORNER
EDGEREFERENCE
MM
&RAMECORNER
MM
3 1
MM
MM
MM MM MM MM
"LADEEDGE "LADEEDGE
REFERENCE REFERENCE

3) Remove the C-ring, and remove the shaft and the secondary c. Web guide shaft, Web pressure roller bearing, Web pressure
transfer idle gear. roller, Web roller
web unit.
2 2
3
1 1
J. Fusing section
CAUTION: Handle the fusing belt unit integrally with the fusing unit
case.
Never attach the fusing belt unit to another unit. If it should
be attached to another unit, the meandering adjustment
function of the fusing belt turns into an unbalanced state,
3
resulting in breakage of the belt.
(1) Fusing unit 2
a. Transport roller 18
1) Clean the transport roller 18. 2
2) Remove the screws ( 1 ), and remove the rear lower paper guide.
b. Fusing front paper pass detector

1
1) Remove the screw, and remove the mounting plate. Disconnect
the connector and remove the screw, and remove the fusing front
paper pass detector.
1
2
4 3
5

3) Remove the screws ( 2 ), and remove the lower separation pawl 7) Remove the web guide shaft.
unit. CAUTION: When installing, fit the web guide shaft with the D-cut of the
mounting hole in the web guide shaft.
CAUTION: Before reassembling the unit, clean the guide shaft with
alcohol.
1
2
8) While pulling the web roller shaft, remove the web roller.
2
5) Remove the screws, and remove the web motor. 1
2
2
9) Remove the spring and the web pressure roller bearing, and
remove the web pressure roller.
1
6) Remove the screws, and remove the frame. Remove the screw,
and remove the holder.
CAUTION: When attaching the holder, adjust so that the actuator 3
presses over the web roller sheet.
CAUTION: Before reassembling the unit, clean the actuator with alco-
hol.
2
1
4
3
2

10) While pulling the web roller shaft, remove the web roller. e. Pressure roller gear, Pressure roller bearing, Pressure roller
1) Remove the web unit.
2) Remove the screws, and remove the cover.
1 1
2
1
1
CAUTION: After installing the web roller, turn the gear (A) in the figure
below until the blue line on the web sheet becomes visible. 3) Remove the screws, and remove the cover.
CAUTION: In case using the used web roller, wind the web sheet of
clean area to the nip of the pressure roller.
Reference for the rotation: Rotate the gear 4times.
2 2
1 1
(A)
4) Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Remove the screws,

and remove the rear transport unit.
Pressure roller
2 3
Web tension 1
Web rollor shaft
d. Lower separation pawl

2) Remove the lower separation pawl and the spring.
2


5) Remove the screws, and remove the pressure release unit. 8) Disconnect the connector of the heater lamp.
3
1
2
9) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
heater lamp.
6) Remove the screw and remove the Fusing middle paper guide.
CAUTION: When attach the paper guide, insert the paper guide under
the separation plate.
2
1
3
2
1
1
10) Remove the spring. Remove the screws, and remove the fixing
plate. Remove the pressure roller unit.
Remove the gear (No.5:24T gear).
Insert the pawl
into the square 1
hole and slide it 4
to attach.
1
Insert the
paper guide
under the
separation Insert the paper
plate. guide under the
separation plate.
7) Disconnect the connector of the heater lamp. Remove the screw, 5

and remove the holder.
3 2
3
2 3
2
1 2
NOTE: Before installing the pressure roller, clean the surface of

fusing belt and pressure roller with alcohol.
NOTE: After exchanging the roller, install the unit immediately or
cover the unit with sheet, in order to avoid attaching dust.

11) Remove the C-ring from the pressure roller, and remove the pres- 2) Remove the screws from the separation plate.
sure roller gear. Remove the pressure roller gear, and the frame.
1 2
2
3
4
1 2
4
3
2 g. Fusing paper exit detector

1
1) Remove the rear transport unit.
2) Remove the E-ring and the bearing. Remove the screw, and
remove the holder. Remove the fusing paper exit detector.
NOTE: When attaching the pressure roller, attach it with the protection
sheet on it. After completion of assembly, remove the protec-
tion sheet.
NOTE: When replacing the pressure roller, apply grease (JFE552) to
5
section A. In addition, wipe the pressure roller surface with
alcohol.
2 4
A 1
A
h. Heat insulation bushing, Heat roller bearing, Meandering
suppression collar, Heat roller
2) Remove the pressure roller unit.
3) Remove the separation plate.
4) Disconnect the connector of the fusing belt unit.
f. Separation plate
1) Remove the springs, and remove the separation plate.

5) Remove the screw, and remove the fuser belt unit. 8) Remove the C-rings, the heat insulation bushings, the heat bear-
ings, and the meandering suppression collars.
1
When replacing the insulation bush, apply grease (JFE552) to
section A.
2
1 A
A

CAUTION: Handle the fusing belt unit integrally with the fusing unit 9) Remove the heating roller.
case.
Never attach the fusing belt unit to another unit. If it should
be attached to another unit, the meandering adjustment
function of the fusing belt turns into an unbalanced state,
resulting in breakage of the belt.
6) Remove the screw, and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
heater lamp.
2
1 i. Fusing roller bearing, Fusing roller, Fusing belt
2 1) Remove the c-rings and fuser roller bearings.
1
3
7) Remove the springs.

2) Remove the screws, and remove the holder.
1
2

3) Remove the fusing roller, and the fusing belt. C. Other cautions
1) Do not put the fusing belt diagonally onto a work table.
2) Do not put anything on the fusing belt which is standing.

1
NOTE: When replacing the fusing roller, apply grease (JFE552) to

section A.
A A
[Handling of the fusing belt] 3) When inserting the fusing belt and the heat roller, be careful not to
Note that the fusing belt used in this model is different from the con- hit them on the belt edge.
ventional ones, and use enough care when handling as described
below.
A. Removal from the package

1) Insert your fingers inside the belt surface, and extend it with your
fingers to slowly lift and remove.
D. Warning!
Never execute the following items, which may cause breakage of the
belt.
1) Never press the surface with your fingers.
2) When putting the fusing belt on a work table, place it vertically on

the work table with care.
3) Never touch the outer surface of the fusing belt.
B. How to hold the belt when checking the belt surface

1) After removing the fusing belt as in A-1, stretch the belt surface
with your fingers from the inside for check.
2) Never hold the edge.

3) Never hit on the edge. K. Paper exit/reverse section
(1) Right door unit
a. Transport roller 19, Paper exit roller 2, Discharge brush
1) Remove the screws, and remove the cover.
2
j. Main thermistor, Sub thermistor 1, Sub thermistor 2
1) Remove the fusing belt.
2) Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Remove the main
thermistor, and the sub thermistor 1. Check the main thermistor,
and the sub thermistor 1.
2
1
2 3
1 1
1
1
2) Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
3) Remove the screw, and remove the sub thermistor 2. nector of the right paper exit upper unit. Remove the screw, and
Check the sub thermistor 2. remove the right paper exit upper unit.
Clean the transport roller 19, and the paper exit roller 2.
4
5
1
7
k. Lower thermistor 1, Lower thermistor 2
6
1) Remove the fusing belt unit.
2) Check the lower thermistor 1, and the lower thermistor 2. 1
2
1 3

3) Remove the screws of the right paper exit upper unit, and remove c. Transport roller 22
the paper guide. 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
1
1
2 1
(2) Paper exit unit

a. Paper exit roller 1
1) Remove the screws, and remove the fan cover.
4) Check the discharge brush. Clean the paper exit roller 1.
CAUTION: When replacing the discharge brush, attach as outlined in
the diagram below. 1
2
1
Edge reference
Edge reference
Edge reference
0mm
Edge reference
0mm
0.5mm
0.5mm
b. Discharge brush
1) Check the discharge brush.
CAUTION: When replacing the discharge brush, attach as referenced
in the diagram below.
b. Transport roller 20, Transport roller 21

1) Open the ADU open/close door, and clean the transport roller 20,
and the transport roller 21.
2
2
Edge reference Edge reference

0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
Edge reference
1
0mm
0.5mm

M. Filter section
L. Drive section (1) Deodorant filter
(1) Fusing motor 1) Remove the filter cover from the upper rear cabinet, and remove
the deodorant filter(X2).
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the upper cabinet rear cover and the
right cabinet rear. CAUTION: Each filter has mounting direction.
2) Remove the screws, and open the high voltage MC PWB mount-
ing plate downward.
1 1
(2) Toner filter, Ozone filter

1) Remove the screws from the rear cabinet, and remove the filter
cover.
2
2
2) Remove the screw, and remove the filter box.

2
3 2
4) Disconnect the connector from fusing motor. Remove the screws,

and remove the fusing motor.
2
2
1
2
3

3) Remove the toner filter (1) and the ozone filter (2) from the filter
box.
CAUTION: When attaching the ozone filter, slide it to the toner filter
side and insert it.

[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLINGService Manual
MX-8090N
1. HDD / mSATA SSD memory contents

A. HDD data contents
No. File system Stored data
S-1 Universal System storage data (for backup)
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH/Document filing)
I-2 Image data Image data (Temporary storage)
I-3 Image data Image data (User watermark/stamp)
I-4 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images
L-1 Not available ICU firmware
S-2 Universal Download font
User profile
User macro
Key operation storage data
Database system file
S-3 Universal System log
S-4 Universal Document filing (Database)
Job log (Database)
Job completion list
S-5 Universal Address book (database)
Account management information (database)
Paper property information (database)
Billing account information (database)
Individual setting information for direct web browsing
Cookie file for OSA application
S-6 Universal Database file
S-7 Universal Spool area for printer
S-8 Universal Print release stored data
Print release file management information (database)
S-9 Universal Work area for OCR
S-10 Universal Work area for application (user file used in USB direct print)
S-11 Universal eOSA application file
S-12 Universal User file saved in the SMB server
S-13 Universal Address book, account information
User data of set value etc which must not be erased when installing the DSK
L-2 Not available System storage data
B. mSATA SSD data contents

No. File system Stored data
L-101 Universal ICU firmware
Log data
Snapshot
S-101 Universal Font
Web help
Spdl
Option font ROM
S-102 Universal e-manual data
Watermark data
OCR dictionary data
S-103 Universal Backup data
S-104 Universal System storage data
I-101 Image data FAX / Internet FAX receive images (backup)
L-102 Not available swap area
MX-8090N VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1

2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
CAUTION: Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.
CAUTION: Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
CAUTION: Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before replace-
ment, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage data
cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD
storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
2 Image send series registration Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data (Sender’s information, Device cloning / Device cloning /
meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
3 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
4 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
5 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
7 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
8 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service or
WEB PAGE. User
10 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
11 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
12 Some of system setting data Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
13 User color profile Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE.
14 Cookie file for OSA application Not available Available Disable Disable Service
15 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
16 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)
17 Paper property information Not available Available Enable SIM56-02/ Enable SIM56-02/ Service or
Device cloning Device cloning user
18 Charging code information Not available Available Enable SIM56-02/ Enable SIM56-02/ Service
Device cloning/ Device cloning/
19 Print release saved data Not available Available Disable — Disable — —

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data
backed up cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is
When a new HDD
popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same model) In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must
normal but a program error is used * be replaced.
occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which is (used in the same model)
memory.) normal but a program error is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User or  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05, is
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
displayed.  Cancel with
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format the
to backup the image data from the HDD (BACKUP DATA) to
automatically formatted, there isHDD.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
no need to perform formatting
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data
procedure with SIM.
are given to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use SIM66-62
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
to backup the image data (ORIGINAL DATA) to the USB
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex machine. memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file type, and
 Formatting is automatically cannot be restored to the machine. The backup data are given
performed. to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, is Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory
displayed.  Cancel with is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
SIM16. and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format the (The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in
automatically formatted, there is HDD. the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
no need to perform formatting
procedure with SIM. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The memory shipping.
is cleared in order to keep compliance between the HDD data
and the image related memory and to prevent malfunctions.
(The memory must be cleared not only in the FAX model but in
the scanner and the Internet Fax models.)
Step 9 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup to
import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 10 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in Step
2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

C. Procedures necessary for mSATA SSD replacement
(1) mSATA SSD data and backup
Some mSATA SSD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some mSATA SSD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other can-
not.
If the mSATA SSD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the mSATA SSD refer-
ring to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the mSATA SSD.
(2) mSATA SSD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 ICU firmware/Snapshot Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
2 font Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
web help
spdl
3 Option FontROM Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-01 Service
4 e-Manual Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-03 Service
5 Watermark Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-05 Service
6 OCR dictionary data Available Available Disable --- Enable SIM49-06 Service
7 Backup data Not available Available Disable --- Disable --- ---
8 System setting value data file Available Available Enable SIM56-02/ Enable SIM56-02/Device Service or
Device cloning / cloning /Storage User
Storage backup backup
9 FAX/I-FAX reception image Not available Available Enable SIM66-62 Disable --- ---
data (backup)
Procedures
Step1 Use SIM56-2 to back up the mSATA SSD data to the USB flash drive.
Step2 Back up the mSATA SSD data by the device cloning function when the operation panel screen is customized.
Step3 Replace the mSATA SSD with a new one.
Step4 Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Step5 Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
Step6 Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the device cloning function.

[12] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
MX-8090N
Service Manual
1. Operation panel section

A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
6 3

HM_KEY Home Screen key Switch for home screen
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.
WU_KEY Power Save key Switch for power save

1 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. / Controls the touch panel.
2 USB connector PWB USB Interface
3 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
4 HM-KEY PWB Switch for home screen
5 Touch panel Touch panel
6 LCD LCD
B. Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB,
the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB. It displays the machine opera-
tion.
It is provided with the USB I/F which is used for the firmware update,
USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to
connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
A document size is detected by the document size detection PWB

(light emitting) and the document size detection PWB (light receiving).
The detection timing of document size is determined according to the
document size detection trigger sensor signal.
MX-8090N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 12 – 1

2. DSPF section
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
(1) Paper feed section
SPUFM
SPFC
SCOV
SPPD1 SPED1 SLUM
2
STUD
SPRDMD
4
SPED2
1
STLD
SPLS1
SPWS SPLS2

SCOV DSPF upper door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the upper door.
SLUM DSPF lift-up motor Lifts up or moves down the document feed tray.
SPED1 DSPF document upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the DSPF document.
SPED2 DSPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the document feed tray.
SPFC DSPF document feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the rollers in the document feed section.
SPLS1 DSPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPLS2 DSPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the document feed tray upper.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Detects pass of the document.
SPRDMD DSPF document random sensor Detects the document size in random document feed.
SPUFM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Detects the document width of the document feed tray upper.
STLD DSPF document feed tray lower limit sensor Detects the lower limit of the document feed tray.
STUD DSPF document feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the document feed tray.
No. Name Function/ Operation

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the document feed roller.
2 Document feed roller Performs the document feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 Torque limiter A fixed level of resistance is always provided for rotation of the separation roller to prevent double
feed.

(2) Upper transport section
SPUFM
STRC
SPPD2 STRRC

SPUFM DSPF document feed motor Drives the rollers, transport rollers and transport rollers in the document feed section.
STRC DSPF transport roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 1.
STRRC DSPF No.1 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 1 registration roller.

1 No. 1 registration roller (Drive) Performs registration of document transport.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from No. 1 registration roller to No. 2 registration roller.

(3) Lower transport section
SPUFM
SRRC
SPPD3
2
SPPD4 SPPD5
1
3
4
SOCD
SLCOV

SLCOV Lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the lower door
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the DDPF unit
SPUFM DSPF transport motor Drives the transport roller.
SRRC DSPF No.2 registration roller clutch Controls ON/OFF of No. 2 registration roller.

1 No. 2 registration roller (Drive) Make synchronization between the lead edge of a document and the scan start position.
2 Platen roller A pressure is applied to document to prevent fluctuations of document.
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document from the platen roller to the transport roller 3.
4 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the document exit roller.

(4) Optical section
1
1
1
2

DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF copy lamp Radiates light onto a document to allow the CCD to scan document images.

1 Mirror Sends the document image to the lens.
2 Lens Reduces the document image (light) and reflects it onto the CCD.
3 DSPF CCD PWB Scans the document image (optical signals) and converts it into electrical signals.

(5) Paper exit section
SPOM
SPOD
STMPS

SPOD DSPF document exit sensor Detects document exit of the document.
SPOM DSPF document exit motor Drives the document exit roller.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the stamp solenoid.

1 Document exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.

(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document size is detected by the DSPF document width sensor
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the DSPF document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from SPWS
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
below. SPLS1
When, however, documents of different sizes are mixed and set on the
document tray, the largest size is detected. SPLS2
Document length sensor

Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON (2) Timing chart
To increase the document replacement speed, pre-feed of the second and the later documents is performed for documents of A4/Letter or smaller
sizes. Therefore, a clutch is provided for each transport roller to perform individual control.
Scan transport speed 372mm/s 400dpi letter single transport
Copy key ON
SPUM
DSPF document feed motor
ON simultaneously with print start of each motor
OFF at 500ms after SPOD OFF of the last paper
SPFM
DSPF transport motor
Decelerates simultaneously with turning off SPOD to

SPOM reduce to 200mm/s for 18.9mm. Drives for 15mm,
DSPF document exit motor and returns to 372mm/s for 18.9mm.
(Common to all the paper sizes)
SPFC
DSPF document feed clutch
1 0
STRRC
DSPF No.1 registration roller
clutch
1
STRC ON simultaneously with SPPD2_ON

DSPF transport roller clutch OFF at 25.7ms after SPPD2_OFF
SRRC
ON at 12.3mm - 10ms (29ms) after SPPD3 ON (SIM adjustment)
DSPF No.2 registration roller
OFF at 10.4mm (28ms) after SPPD3 OFF
clutch
1
SPRDMD
DSPF document random sensor
SPPD1
DSPF document pass sensor 1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPOD
DSPF document exit sensor

3. Scanner section
MHPS
CLI
6
4 MIM
3

CLI Scanner lamp Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
2 Scanner lamp drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp.
3 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
4 No. 1 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
5 No. 2 mirror
6 No. 3 mirror

(1) Outline B
This section performs the following functions. G
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the R
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital signals
by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process section
(scanner control PWB).
(2) Detail description
a. Optical section drive R
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner motor G
(MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to drive the B
copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by the drive
wires. (Image data for 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from the
scanner control PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive
R G B
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage Red component Green component Blue component
generated in the CL LED Drive PWB according to the control signal image data image data image data
sent from the scanner control PWB.
c. Image scan/color separation d. Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con- 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three lines of into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, and 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). process section.
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue compo- CCD PWB
nents. This operation is called the color separation. Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
elements, R, G, and B. (6 Lines) R
G
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by the
B
CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direction is
performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner motor. Docu- Buffer
ment images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected to the
CCD. Timing
Generator
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the
scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically, but
performed with the image process technology (by the software).

4. Paper feed section
(1) Manual paper feed section
CPFM
MPUC
4
MPFD 1
2 3 MPFS
MPED
MPLD1
MPWD
MPGS

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in the manual paper feed tray.
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detector Detects entry of paper into the manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls pickup of paper. (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate.
MPLD1 Manual paper feed length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to prevent
double feed.
5 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 16.

(2) Tandem paper feed tray unit
T1PUS
T1PUC
CPFM
5
2 T1LUM
T1LUD
T1PED
1 T2PUC
T2PUS
T1SPD
3
T2LUD
5 T2PED
T2LUM
4
T2SPD
TNDSET
5
4
2
3
5 1

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section and the transport section.
T1LUD Tandem tray 1 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of the upper limit tandem tray 1.
T1LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 1) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T1PED Tandem tray 1 paper empty detector Detects presence of paper in tandem tray 1
T1PUC Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T1PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 1) Controls the paper pickup.
T1SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 1.
detector
T2LUD Tandem tray 2 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit position of tandem tray 2.
T2LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tandem tray 2) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
T2PED Tandem tray 2 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tandem tray 2.
T2PUC Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tandem tray 1 paper feed section.
T2PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tandem tray 2) Controls the paper pickup.
T2SPD Tandem tray 1 paper remaining quantity Detects the remaining paper quantity in tandem tray 2.
detector
TNDSET Tandem tray installation detector Detects installation of tandem tray.

1 Paper pickup roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Tandem 1, 2 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to prevent
against double feed.
5 Lift wire Transmits the drive power of the paper tray lift motor to the paper feed tray.

(3) Tray paper feed section
CPFM
C3LUM
C3PUS
C3PUC
C3LUD
C3PED 4
1 C4PUC C4LUM
2
3
PTRC1
C3PFD
8 C3SS1
C3SS2
C3SS3 C3SS4
7
12 9
C3SPD
11
C4PUS
10
C4LUD
4
C4PED
1 2
3
C4PFD
6 C4SS1
C4SS2
5 C4SS4
12 C4SS3
9
C4SPD
11
10
C4PWD

C3LUD Tray 3 upper limit detector (Lift home position Detects the upper limit position of tray 3.
detection)
C3LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 3) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C3PED Tray 3 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 3.
C3PFD Tray 3 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 3.
C3PUC Tray 3 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 3 paper feed section.
C3PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 3) Controls pickup of paper.
C3SPD Tray 3 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 3.
C3SS1 Tray 3 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 3 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C3SS2 Tray 3 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 3 is detected.
C3SS3 Tray 3 rear edge detector 3
C4LUD Tray 4 upper limit detector (Lift home position Detects the upper limit position of tray 4.
detection)
C4LUM Paper tray lift motor (Tray 4) Drives the lift of the paper tray.
C4PED Tray 4 paper empty detector Detects paper presence in tray 4.
C4PFD Tray 4 paper entry detector Detects paper entry from tray 4.
C4PUC Tray 4 paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the tray 4 paper feed section.
C4PUS Paper pickup solenoid (Tray 4) Controls pickup of paper.
C4PWD Casette 4 width detection Casette 4 width detection
C4SPD Tray 4 remaining quantity detector Detects the remaining paper quantity in tray 4.
C4SS1 Tray 4 rear edge detector 1 Either of rear edge 1 - 4 of tray 4 is detected to detect tray insertion.
C4SS2 Tray 4 rear edge detector 2 The paper size of tray 4 is detected.
PTRC1 Casette Vertical transport clutch Casette Vertical transport clutch control

1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Picks up paper to send to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Separation roller (Paper feed tray 3, 4) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
4 Torque limiter Applies a certain level of resistance power to rotation of the separation roller in order to prevent
against double feed.
5 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 4 to the transport roller 2.
6 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 to the transport roller 4.
7 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 3 to the transport roller 4.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 and the transport roller 3 to the transport roller 5.
9 Paper size detection plate This plate shifts its position in conjunction with the rear edge plate, and the rear edge is detected to
detect the paper size.
10 Lift plate Lifts paper to maintain the paper feed position at a certain level.
11 Regulation plate Regulates paper in the transverse direction.
12 Rear edge plate Regulates paper in the longitudinal direction.
(3) Tray paper feed

B. Operational descriptions a. Paper feed front operation
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller falls to
(1) Bypass
turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, sep-
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
arating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it to the
paper feed roller section. • The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate stops
at the specified position.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to prevent
against double feed with the separation roller. The manual paper feed
clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
Paper is sent to the registration roller by the manual transport roller.
(2) Tandem paper feed
a. Paper size for each paper feed tray
Paper tray 1 accepts paper of A4, 11” x 8.5”, or B5. Paper tray 2
accepts paper of A4 (11” x 8.5”) only.
b. Paper feed operation
1) When the copy/print operation is started, the motor (CPFM) and
the clutch (T1PUC) are turned ON to turn ON the solenoid
(T1PUS) at the timing of paper pickup. This rotates the takeup
roller and lowers it to pick up paper.
2) At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to the
transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to pre-
vent double feed of paper.

b. Paper feed operation c. Paper remaining detection
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch are • The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in total;
turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper empty. The
feeding paper. result is displayed.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper to d. Paper remaining quantity detection method
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to • The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rotations
prevent against double feed of paper. of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up operation of
the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit sensor.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

5. Paper transport section
(1) Interface pass unit
TTRC
CPFM
T1PPD1
T1PPD2

T1PPD1 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 1 Detects paper entry from tandem tray 1.
T1PPD2 Tandem tray 1 transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass from tandem tray 1.
TTRC Tandem tray transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of transport rollers 6/7.

1 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper from the tandem tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
2 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 6 to the transport roller 13.

CPFM
PTRC2
1
T2PPD1
DSW_RL
DSW_CS

CPFM Paper feed/Transport motor Drives the paper feed section and the transport section.
DSW_CS Transport cover open/close sensor Detects open/close of the vertical transport cover.
DSW_RL Right lower door open/close sensor Detects open/close of the right lower door.
PTRC2 Paper feed vertical transport clutch upper Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
T2PPD1 Tandem tray 2 transport sensor Detects the tandem tray 2 paper pass.


LCCM
LCHM2
LCHM1
LPPD
3

LCCM LCC transport motor Drives the LCC transport section.
LCHM1 LCC horizontal transport motor1 Drives the LCC transport section.
LCHM2 LCC horizontal transport motor2 Drives the LCC transport section.
LPPD LCC paper entry detector Detects paper transported from the LCC.


(4) PS lower unit
LCCM

LCCM LCC transport motor Drives the LCC transport section and the PS lower section.


(5) PS unit
RRM
THPS
PTD
PFM
3
PPD2

PFM PS front transport motor Drives the registration roller.
PPD2 Registration pre-detection Detects the paper in front of registration roller.
PTD Paper Lead Edge detector Detects paper lead edge after PS roller.
RRM Registration motor Drives the registration roller and controls ON/OFF timing.
THPS Transfer temperature thermistor Detects the around temperature of the 1st transfer drive roller.(Used for correction of color registration)

1 Transport roller 17 (Drive) Transports paper from transport roller 13 to registration roller.
2 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the tr0ansport timing of paper, and adjusts the relative relations
between images and paper.
3 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.

(6) PS unit 2
PS roller
PED cis PWB
PDFS PWB

PED cis PED cis sensor Detects the position of the transferred paper.
PDFS-R Double feed detection sensor-R Detects double or multi fed paper.
PDFS-T Double feed detection sensor-T Detects double or multi fed paper.
B. Operational description
(1) PS section
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the registration roller
with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls
ON/OFF of each transport roller. The registration roller controls the rel-
ative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The registration roller controls the relative positions of the transported
paper and transfer images. The registration roller is driven by the
transport motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer
images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
(2) PED cis sensor
a. Operation of Image position sensor
It detects the position of the paper transferred by the contact image
sensor (CIS) and automatically adjusts the off center.
CIS: Contact Image Sensor
It is a contact image sensor integrated with the light source, the lens
(Selfoc ) and the sensor.

(3) DFS sensor
a. Outline of Operation
The double-feed sensor is incorporated in the paper transport section
of 120/105cpm machines, and it detects double feed.
Paper transport stops when double feed is detected.
(1 sheet) (Double feed)

Ultrasonic
Ultrasound generator
Paper
Reflect
Secondary
radiation
Ultrasonic
sensor
Ultrasonic generator generates ultrasound during paper transport.

The level of reception of the ultrasonic sensor largely changes
(decreases) when double feed occurs. Double sheet feed is detected
in this method.
Block diagram
(DFS PWB)
Ultrasonic Ultrasound
generator Digital signal
generate output PCU
PWB
Ultrasonic sensor Detection
Amplifier circuit
b. Mechanism and operation of double-feed detection

The sensor is composed of ultrasonic generator part and ultrasonic
detector part. Double feed is detected using 220kHz ultrasound.
Operation when sheets of paper are normally fed one by one
Some of the ultrasound is reflected by the paper, but the ultrasound
reaches the sensor more than the specified level.
The sensor analog output level at that time is 300mV or more, and dig-
ital output level is "L."
Operation when double feed occurs
Most of ultrasound is reflected when double feed occurs, because the
stiffness of paper is high. As a result, the ultrasound which reaches
the sensor is weak, and less than the specified level.
At that time, the sensor analog output level is 300mV or less, the digi-
tal output level is "H."

6. LSU section
12 5
12
4
8
1 4
LSUFM
4
7
10 6
PGM
11
9
2
3
4
4

LIAM_BK/C/M/Y LSU tilt correction motor K/C/M/Y Correct the skew of LSU lens
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
TH1_LSU LSU temperature sensor 1 Detects the temperature in the LSU.
TH2_LSU LSU temperature sensor 2 Detects the temperature in the LSU.

1 LD PWB Controls drive and power of the laser diode.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams, and focuses on the polygon mirror. (sub scanning direction)
3 f lens 1 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
4 Reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser.
5 f lens 3 Converges laser beams on the OPC drum, making the laser scan speeds at both ends and the center the same.
6 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
7 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
8 LSU control PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control signal and the
MFPC PWB image data.
9 LSU thermistor 1 Measures the temperature in LSU.
10 LSU thermistor 2 Measures the temperature in LSU.
11 Collimator lens Arranges laser beams.
12 LSU tilt correction motor This motor is used to adjust the radiation angle of laser beams for the OPC drum. By turning this motor, the image skew can be
K/C/M/Y adjusted.

B. Operational descriptions Main scanning direction
(1) Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit are converted into REAR
laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC drum. Scanning
In this model, 4-laser system is employed where 4-laser diodes for direction
each color are radiated. The LSU unit is composed of the optical ele-
ment from laser to the polygon mirror, the primary system including the
mirror which assures light path, and the main scanning system.
(2) Composition
Primary system
Y
BK
C
M
FRONT
* Though four laser beams are actually radiated for one color, they
PGM are illustrated as one beam.
(3) Outline of LSU specifications
Scanning width: 329mm
Resolution: 1200dpi
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 80µm, Sub scan = 50 to 80µm
Laser power: Max.0.375mW/1Beam
LD wavelength: 775 - 800nm
Scanning system (4) Skew adjustment
When skew of lens unit is detected during Sim50-22 or “Auto color reg-
istration adjustment, Skew adjustment motor corrects the skew.
LD1 - 4 LD1 - 4 LD1 - 4 LD1 - 4
* Though four laser beams are actually radiated for one color, they
are illustrated as one beam.

7. OPC drum section
DM_Y
DHPD_Y
CCM_Y
DL2_Y 5
1
DM_M
CCMD_Y DHPD_M
4 CCM_M
DL_Y DL2_M
1
DM_C
CCHPD_Y 3
CCMD_M
GB-Y DHPD_C
2
CCM_C
DL2_C
DL_M 1
5 DM_K
MC-Y CCHPD_M 3 CCMD_C
2 DHPD_K
GB-M CCM_K
DL2_K
DL_C
1
5
MC-M CCHPD_C 3
2 CCMD_K
GB-C
DL_K
5
MC-C
CCHPD_K 3
2
GB-K
MC-K
B. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram 2
DEDY_R
DEDM_R
DEDY_L
DEDC_R
DEDM_L
DEDK_R
DEDC_L
Drum shaft DEDK_L

CCHPD_KCMY Charger cleaner home position sensor (K, C, M, Y) Detects the charger cleaner home position. (CCHP_KCMY)
CCMD_KCMY Charger cleaner shift sensor (K, C, M, Y) Detects and controls shift of the charger cleaner.
DEDK(C,M,Y)_L Drum encoder sensor R (KCMY) Detects the irregular rotation of drum shaft.
DEDK(C,M,Y)_R Drum encoder sensor L (KCMY) Detects the irregular rotation of drum shaft.
DHPD_KCMY OPC drum rotation sensor (K, C, M, Y) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum.
DL Discharge lamp Discharges the OPC drum surface.
DL2 After-transfer discharge lamp Discharges the OPC drum surface immediately after transfer.
DM_KCMY Drum motor Drives the cyan OPC drum.
GB Grid bias The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
MC Main charger The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.

1 OPC drum Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
3 Waste toner transport screw Transports remaining toner in the OPC drum unit to the waste toner collection section.
4 Discharge lamp Reduces the surface potential of the OPC drum.
5 After-transfer discharge lamp Reduces the surface potential of the OPC drum immediately after transfer.
C. Operational descriptions When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
(1) Operational description of the process unit
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the nega-
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. The tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, nega-
laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser tive charges are attracted by the positive charges in the aluminum
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. layer of the OPC drum.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced
out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
Aluminum
layer and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum surface voltage.
CGL Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
CTL radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the clean-
ing blade.
OPC drum
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to the
waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
Screen grid High voltage unit
Main corona unit
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied
to the screen grid.
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
Aluminum
OPC drum layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
Laser beams CGL CGL
CTL CTL
Lens

By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens, light is
radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum CGL,
positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, nega-
tive charges are attracted by the positive charges in the aluminum
layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on the
OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage of the OPC
drum.
(2) Improvement of color registration shift
To improve of color registration shift, the irregular rotation of the drum
shaft is detected directly by drum encoder and the detected irregular
rotation is corrected automatically.

8. Toner supply section
(1) Toner supply section
TNM_Y
TNM_M
TNM_C
TNM_K
TBFM
TNHM_Y
TNHM_M
TNHM_C
TFSD_Y TNHM_K
TFSD_M
TFSD_C
TFSD_K

TBFM Toner bottle fan motor Cools the surrounding of the toner bottle.
TFSD_KCMY Toner remaining quantity sensor Detects the remaining toner quantity.
TNHM_KCMY Hopper motor Transports toner.
TNM_KCMY Toner motor Transports toner from the toner bottle to the toner hopper unit.
(1) Outline
Adoption of the rotating toner bottle enables large capacity with a compact toner cartridge size.
When the remaining toner detection sensor in the toner hopper unit detects no toner, the toner bottle turns to supply toner to the toner hopper.
After supplying, full or empty status is detected at the toner hopper inside. Therefore even if the toner cartridge becomes empty, copying is not imme-
diately suspended because toner inside the toner hopper is used.

9. Developing section
DM_Y
DM_M
DVC_Y
GB_Y DM_C
3
TCS_Y DVC_M
1 GB_M DM_K
3
TCS_M DVC_C
1
GB_C
2
3
TCS_C
DVC_K
1
GB_K
2
3
TCS_K
1

DM_KCMY Drum motor Drives the developer and the drum.
DVC_KCMY Development drive clutch Clutch for development drive
GB-KCMY Developing bias Bias for development
TCS_KCMY Toner density sensor Controls the toner density in the developing unit.

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Mixing roller Mixing of developer
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner

B. Operational descriptions (1) Preliminary mixing system
This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gener- The preliminary mixing section is extended for rapid mixing of supply
ated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner. toner with developer and stable toner density.
Preliminary mixing section
(2) Developer refresh system

Developer deterioration suppression technology for the purpose of
charging stability and long-life of developer.
Waste developer is discharged from the developer exit port little by lit-
tle as shown in the figure below to maintain developer fresh.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported by
the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively charged
due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC compo-
nent) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher than
the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
Developer exit port

10. Transfer section
(1) Transfer section
6
1TURC
7 1TC_Y 1TUD_CL
1TURRC
1TC_M
8 BTM
4 1TC_C
1TUD_K 2TUM
1TC_K
1
2
4
3 PTCCM
5
3 PTC
3
2TC
3
9
15
12
10
14 PTCCHPD
13
11
16
WTM

(2) Transfer section 2
2TBMD_R
2TBMD_F
2TBMD_HP
2TBM

1TC-CMY Primary transfer output (CMY) Color transfer high voltage
1TC-K Primary transfer output (K) B/W transfer high voltage
1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL) Color transfer roller position detection
1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK) B/W transfer roller position detection (1TUD_BK)
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
1TURRC Primary transfer separation reverse clutch Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
2CL Secondary transfer brush roller output Cleans the secondary transfer section.
2DR Secondary transfer drive roller output Reduces toner splash in separation.
2TBM Secondary transfer belt skew correction motor Correct the skew of secondary transfer belt
2TBMD_F/R Secondary transfer belt skew detection sensor Detect the skew of secondary transfer belt
2TBMD_HP Secondary transfer belt skew correction motor home Detect the skew correction motor home position
position sensor
2TC Secondary belt transfer output Secondary transfer high voltage
2TUM 2nd Transfer motor Drives the 2nd transfer section.
BTM Transfer belt motor Drives the transfer belt.
PTC PTC output PTC high voltage
PTCCHPD PTC cleaner home position sensor Detects the PTC cleaner home position. (PTCHP)
PTCCM PTC cleaning motor Drives the PTC cleaner.
WTM Waste toner drive motor Transports waste toner.

1 Primary transfer cleaner blade Clean and remove residual toner from the primary transfer belt.
2 Primary transfer belt Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
3 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
4 Primary transfer idle roller Transfer belt follower.
5 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
6 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
7 Primary transfer belt tension roller Apply a tension to the transfer belt.
8 Belt CL brush Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
9 PTC opposing roller Roller to flow a PTC current.
10 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
11 Secondary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
12 Secondary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
13 Secondary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
14 PTC unit Reduces the positive charges on the primary transfer belt.
15 Registration backup roller Holds the belt position in the registration section in the process control.
16 Secondary transfer blade Cleans remaining toner on the secondary transfer belt.

(3) Process registration sensor section
PCSS
REGS_R /PCS R
REGS_C /PCS_C
REGS_F /PCS_F
PTCCHPD

PCSS Color image density sensor PWB reflection plate shutter solenoid Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
PTCCHPD PTC cleaner home position detection Detects the PTC cleaner home position.
REGS_C/PCS_C Color image density sensor/Image registration sensor C Detection of registration shift on the machine front (C) side, and detection of
the M/BK toner patch density.
REGS_F/PCS_F Color image density sensor/Image registration sensor F Detection of registration shift on the machine front (F) side, and detection of
the C toner patch density.
REGS_R/PCS_R Color image density sensor/Image registration sensor R Detection of registration shift on the machine front (R) side, and detection of
the Y toner patch density.

B. Operational descriptions b. Primary (intermediate) transfer roller separation mechanism
and contents
(1) Transfer
The primary transfer roller operates pressing all the rollers, separates
a. Transfer operation all the rollers, or presses only black depending on the operation mode.
a-1. Transfer operation When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) turns ON, the transfer cam
rotates to shift the primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm
linked with the cam in the arrow direction, performing separating oper-
ation of the roller.
All pressing
All separating
04#
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary transfer
belt by applying the positive high voltage to the primary transfer roller.
Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this strengthens
negative charges on the transfer belt, improving the secondary trans-
fer efficiency. Pressing only black
By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary transfer is
improved.
Then a high negative voltage is applied to the primary transfer belt to
transfer the toner images from the primary transfer belt to paper.
In the monochrome mode and the color mode, the black (K) transfer
voltage is selected.
A high positive voltage is applied to the secondary transfer belt drive
roller in order to improve the paper separation ability from the second- It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black with
ary transfer belt. the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_K) and the separation
detection arm.
a-2. Cleaning operation
1TUD_CL 1TUD_BK
Toner is cleaned by the secondary transfer cleaning blade, and trans-
All pressing ON OFF
ported to the waste toner section.
All separating OFF ON
Unnecessary toner remained on the secondary transfer belt is trans- Pressing only black OFF OFF
ferred to the primary transfer belt by making the polarity of the applying
voltage to the primary transfer belt. Then it is cleaned by the primary
transfer belt cleaning blade to be transported to the waste toner sec-
tion.

c. Secondary transfer belt skew adjustment (2) Image density detection and registration detection
The image density and the image registration are detected by the sen-
sors provided at the front, the center, and the rear of the frame.
a. Function and operation of the color image density sensor/
image registration sensor
a-1. Image registration sensor
The shift of the image registration (F, C, R) is detected.
a-2. Process control sensor/Image registration sensor
Process control sensor Image registration sensor

Rear Y R
Center M/BK C
Front C F
c-1. Belt skew detection. Sensitivity adjustment of the color sensor light receiving ele-
ments (Photo transistors)
Secondary transfer belt skew is detected by the sensor (a. 2nd trans-
fer belt skew detection sensor R) or (b. 2nd transfer belt skew detec- Purpose: To maintain the sensitivity of the light receiving elements
tion sensor F). even if the environmental conditions (temperature and humidity) vary.
When the belt skews (A) direction, (a) sensor detects it. Execution timing: This adjustment is executed in the process control
when the temperature or the humidity varies.
Method: Use the patch written on the primary transfer to adjust the
sensor sensitivity.
%
$
$
%
c-2. Belt skew correction.
When the 2nd transfer belt skew is detected, (a) 2nd transfer belt skew
correction motor operates (b) skew correction arm to twist the 2nd
transfer belt. Light emitting current of the sensor LED (Light emitting diode)
Purpose: To maintain the light emitting quantity of the sensor even if
the sensor LED is aged or the environmental conditions vary.
Execution timing: Every time when the process control is made.
Method: Reflection on the surface of the primary transfer belt is used
A
B A to adjust the sensor sensitivity.
$
%
$
%

b. High density process control operation (Toner patch generation and density correction operations)
1) When the machine enters the high density process control mode, the secondary transfer unit remains in the printing position.
2) While changing the DV bias voltage step by step, a number of toner patches in different densities are generated on the primary transfer belt.
Front: The C toner patch is generated.
Center: The Bk, M toner patch is generated.
Rear: The Y toner patch is generated.
3) Each toner patch density is detected by the image density sensor, and the DV bias correction voltage is calculated in the PCU PWB so that the
proper density is obtained from the relation between the DV bias voltage at the time when each toner patch is made and the toner patch density.
(3) Setting of process control execution conditions
a. General
The SIM44-62 function facilitates changing the process control execution conditions.
The SIM44-62 function also allows collective change of the set contents of SIM44-4 and SIM44-28 easily.
This is used to assure stable image qualities by executing proper operations of the process control according to the machine use status.
b. SIM44-62 function and use
• Changes the image density in the high density area.
• Changes the execution frequency of the process control.
c. Setting method
Enter the SIM44-62 mode, and select the set item.
• To change the image density in the high density area, select PROCON TARGET.
• To change the frequency of the process control operations, select PROCON MODE.
When PROCON TARGET is selected.
1) Select the density level.
Relation between the selected density level and the output image density
K ID DOWN (-2) Collectively change the value of the register K of the process control reference value (The high density process control target value decreases.)
K ID DOWN (-1) Collectively change the value of the register K of the process control reference value (The high density process control target value decreases.)
K ID UP (+1) Collectively change the value of the register K of the process control reference value (The high density process control target value increases.)
K ID UP (+2) Collectively change the value of the register K of the process control reference value (The high density process control target value increases.)
K NORMAL (0) Collectively change the value of the register K of the process control reference value to the default value
C ID DOWN (-2) Collectively change the value of the register C of the process control reference value (The C high density process control target value decreases.)
C ID DOWN (-1) Collectively change the value of the register C of the process control reference value (The C high density process control target value decreases.)
C ID UP (+1) Collectively change the value of the register C of the process control reference value (The C high density process control target value increases.)
C ID UP (+2) Collectively change the value of the register C of the process control reference value (The C high density process control target value increases.)
C NORMAL (0) Collectively change the value of the register C of the process control reference value to the default
M ID DOWN (-2) Collectively change the value of the register M of the process control reference value (The M high density process control target value
decreases.)
M ID DOWN (-1) Collectively change the value of the register M of the process control reference value (The M high density process control target value
decreases.)
M ID UP (+1) Collectively change the value of the register M of the process control reference value (The M high density process control target value increases.)
M ID UP (+2) Collectively change the value of the register M of the process control reference value (The M high density process control target value increases.)
M NORMAL (0) Collectively change the value of the register M of the process control reference value to the default

Y ID DOWN (-2) Collectively change the value of the register Y of the process control reference value (The Y high density process control target value decreases.)
Y ID DOWN (-1) Collectively change the value of the register Y of the process control reference value (The Y high density process control target value decreases.)
Y ID UP (+1) Collectively change the value of the register Y of the process control reference value (The Y high density process control target value increases.)
Y ID UP (+2) Collectively change the value of the register Y of the process control reference value (The Y high density process control target value increases.)
Y NORMAL (0) Collectively change the value of the register Y of the process control reference value to the default
Relation between the selected density level and the SIM44-4 set values
SIM44-62 PROCON TARGET (Selected density level)
Item (SIM44-4) Default Value ID DOWN (-2) ID DOWN (-1) Normal (0) ID UP (+1) ID UP (+2)
J Y_PAT TARGET ID 50 40 45 50 53 56
K M_PAT TARGET ID 50 40 45 50 53 56
L C_PAT TARGET ID 50 40 45 50 53 56
M K_PAT TARGET ID 45 35 40 45 50 55

3) Press [YES] key.
The SIM44-4 set value varies according to the selected density level.
4) Execute SIM46-74 to adjust the copy and printer color balance.
When PROCON MODE is selected.

1) Select the execution frequency level of the process control.
3) Press [YES] key.
The SIM44-28 set value varies according to the selected execution frequency level of the process control.
Setting level and application
HIGH QUALITY2 • The execution frequency of the process control is highest.
• It is set when the color image quality is given priority.
• Every time the power is turned ON, the process control is executed.
• The execution frequency of the process control is about 3 times greater than the normal setting.
• For a user who's main jobs are color jobs of more than 100 sheets/day with priority on the color image quality.
HIGH QUALITY1 • The execution frequency of the process control is high.
• It is set when the color image quality is given priority.
• Every time the power is turned ON, the process control is executed.
• For a user of about 100 sheets/day with priority on the color image quality.
NORMAL (Default) • The process control is executed in the normal frequency.
PRINT PERFORMANCE1 • The execution frequency of the process control is low.
• It is set when the job speed is given priority.
• The process control is executed in about 50% of the normal frequency during jobs.
• For jobs of 100 or less, the process control is executed after completion of the jobs.
PRINT PERFORMANCE2 • The process control is executed in the normal frequency.
• It is set when there are little color jobs and many monochrome jobs.
• The black process control is executed.
• The color process control is occasionally executed according to the color toner consumption.
• The color toner consumption is suppressed.

Relation between the selected mode and the SIM44-28 set values
SIM44-62 and PROCON MODE (process control
execution frequency level)
Item (SIM44-28) IMAGE IMAGE PRINT PRINT
QUALITY QUALITY Normal PERFOR PERFOR
2 1 MANCE 1 MANCE 2
A INITIAL When warming up after clearing the OPC drum and the developer unit counters. 0 0 0 0 0
B SW ON When supplying the power (when canceling power shut-off) 0 0 3 3 3
After passing the specified time from leaving READY continuously (Time can be
C TIME 0 0 3 3 3
changed by INTERVAL TIME)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning ON the power and after passing TIME. 0 0 0 0 2
The temperature and humidity in the machine are monitored in every 2 hours only
E HUM during a job, and the change in the temperature/humidity is above the specified 0 0 0 0 2
level compared with that in execution of the previous process control.
When a certain level of the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M position
F REV1 0 0 0 1 1
OPC drum unit is reached after the power is supplied.
When a certain level of the accumulated traveling distance of BK position OPC
G REV2_BK 0 0 0 0 0
drum unit is reached after execution of the previous density correction.
When a certain level of the accumulated traveling distance of M position OPC
H REV2_CL 0 0 0 0 0
drum unit is reached after execution of the previous density correction.
YES/NO setting of the display of the manual process control key by key
I REFRESH MODE 1 1 1 1 1
operations
After color job after passing a certain days from execution of the previous color
J DAY 1 1 1 1 0
process control. When next warming up if there is no color job.
The average print ratio is monitored in a certain interval, and the high print
K HI-COV 0 0 0 0 1
process control execution is judged.
L LO-COV Low print document continuous printing process control execution judgment 0 0 0 0 1
When the toner cartridge remaining quantity reached 25% or below, the process
M TonerCA-END 1 1 1 1 1
control interval is changed.
Enable/Disable setting of execution [REV2_BK], [REV2_CL], [HI-COV], and [LO-
N JOB_STOP 0 1 1 1 1
COV] judgment during a job.
O AVERAGE-PAGE Average print ratio paper number setting 3 3 3 3 3
P LIMIT PAGE Setting of the job connection number of sheets/limitation of the number of sheets 5 5 10 10 10
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value.
Q PIX_RATIO_BK 10 10 10 10 10
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count specified value.
R PIX_RATIO_CL 10 10 10 10 50
Setting of the leaving time when turning ON the power
S INTERVAL TIME 3 3 3 3 3
(including the sleep recovery time) (h: hour)
[HUM] temperature/humidity monitoring time
T HUM HOUR 2 2 2 2 2
Interval setting (10 minutes unit)
Area difference specified value when compared with the execution of the
U HUM_DIF 2 2 2 4 2
previous process control of "HUM"
[REV2_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance value magnification ratio
V BK_RATIO 5 15 15 30 30
setting (%)
[REV2_CL] M position OPC drum traveling distance value magnification ratio
W M_RATIO 5 15 15 30 30
setting (%)
[REV1_BK] BK position OPC drum traveling distance value magnification ratio
X REV1_RATIO 20 20 20 40 40
setting (%)
Y LOW_RATIO LOW mode process control execution interval 5 15 15 30 30
Setting of the magnification ratio of the upper limit of the M position OPC drum
Z COLOR BORDER 20 20 20 20 100
traveling distance when BK process control is executed.
Enable/Disable setting of the BK process control execution when monochrome
AA BK ONLY 5 5 5 5 6
printing is continued, and setting of the number of repetitions.
Interval of number of sheets of color patch making of process control between
AB P2P PV_CL 60 1 30 30 60
papers
Interval of number of sheets of BK patch making of process control between
AC P2P PV_Bk 60 30 60 60 60
papers
Used to judge the execution of HT process control. 1 - 255 40 Bias variation
AD HT_DIF 1 40 40 40 40
difference value
AE RG_ON_SYNC Power ON process control Synchronization / not synchronization switch 0 0 0 0 0
AF RG_TEMP_TIMER Power ON process control Synchronization / not synchronization switch 24 72 72 120 120
AG RG_PERM_TIMER Setting of the span from execution disable to enable 0 0 0 0 0
AH RG_HOUR_TIMER Setting of the span of timer execution 3 6 6 12 12
AI RG_BW_SYNC Enable/Disable setting of the registration adjustment in a monochrome job. 1 1 1 1 1
Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment between sheets, interval of
AX PAR_CNT SYNC 350 700 700 700 700
number of sheets
Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment between sheets, interval of
AY PAR_TIMER SYNC 15 30 30 30 30
time
Judgment of execution of the registration adjustment between sheets, difference
AZ PAR_TEMP SYNC 0 0 0 0 0
in temperature
Items out of application: MC_CLEAN_TIME, PTC_CLEAN_TIME_CL, PTC_CLEAN_TIME_BK, DRUM_REVERSE

11. Waste toner section
2TUM
WTM
WTBSET
WTFD

2TUM Secondary transfer motor Drives the secondary transfer section waste toner transport screw.
WTBSET Waste toner bottle detector Detects installation of the waste toner bottle.
WTFD Waste toner full detector Detects full of waste toner.
WTM Waste toner motor Transport waste toner.

12. Fusing section
FUFM
10
TH_US2 HL_UM FUM
/US/UW
TS S
TS M
TH_UM
TH_US1 POD1 WEBM2

1
9
2
HLPCD
7
4
TS L
PRM
9
FPFD
8 3
HL_LM TH_LM1
7
TH_LM2 6
WEBEND2

FPFD Fusing front paper pass detector Detects paper pass in front of the fusing section.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing section.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
HL_UW Heater lamp assist Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Detects the fusing pressure state.
POD1 Fusing paper exit detector Detects paper pass in the fusing section.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing pressure.
TH_LM/TH_LM_CS Fusing temperature sensor lower Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing roller (B).
TH_LM2 Fusing temperature sensor lower (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing roller (B).
TH_UM/TH_UM_CS Fusing temperature sensor upper (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt.
TH_US/TH_US_CS Fusing temperature sensor upper (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TH_US2 Fusing temperature sensor upper (Sub 2) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TS_L Thermostat lower (Main) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS_M Thermostat upper (Main) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS_S Thermostat upper (Sub) Shuts down the heater lamp circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
WEBEND2 Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.
WEBM2 Fusing web motor Drives the fusing web roller.

1 Fusing roller (F1) Heats the fusing belt.
2 Fusing roller (F2) The cushion layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller (B).
3 Fusing roller (B) Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
4 Transport roller Includes silicon oil in it and improves fusing separation and cleaning capabilities.
5 HL control PWB Drives the heater lamp.
6 Fusing web roller Cleans the fusing roller (B).
7 Discharge brush Discharges static electricity generated in the fusing section to the ground.
8 Separation plate Separates paper.
9 Separation pawl Separates fusing roller (B) when it is attached.
10 Fusing belt Heats the front surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
B. Operational descriptions (3) Fusing operation

Color toner (Y, M, C, and K) on paper is heated and pressed by the
(1) Outline of operations
fusing belt, fusing roller (F2), and fusing roller (B) to be fused on paper.
This machine employs the fusing system by the belt.
Toner in the four layers on the paper is fused by heating from up and
The features of the belt-type fusing system are as follows: down and both sides.
1) Short warm-up time The fusing belt, fusing roller (F2) which is provided with the cushion
2) Low power consumption layer, and fusing roller (B) realize the following operations.
3) Wide nip providing high fusing capability 1) The nip amount is increased and the heat capacity to paper is
(2) Heater lamp driving increased.
The surface temperature of the heat roller and the fusing belt detected 2) By pressing with the flexible roller, toner of many layers can be
by the fusing temperature sensor is sent to the PCU. If the tempera- fused without being deformed.
ture is lower than the specified temperature, the heater lamp lighting 3) An even pressure is applied to rough surface of toner (due to the
signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive circuit in the HL multi-layer composition).
PWB.
Fusing roller (F2)
When the power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned ON, the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp to light the lamp and heat the
fusing belt. Fusing belt Fusing roller (B)
A thermostat is provided as a safety device against an abnormally high
temperature in the heat roller and the fusing belt.
When the thermostat is opened, the AC power supply to the heater
lamp is cut off.
The heater lamp is arranged to fusing roller (F1) and fusing roller (B).
In heater lamp (HL_UM/US/UW), three lamps are integrated into one.
Heater lamp operations
Heater lamp Operation

Heater lamp upper Heats the center of the fusing roller (F1) and the
main (HL_UM) fusing belt.
Heater lamp upper Heats the edges of the fusing roller (F1) and the
sub (HL_US) fusing belt.
Heater lamp assist Heats fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
(HL_UW) Turns ON when warming up.
Heater lamp lower Heats fusing roller (B). Does not turn ON while
main (HL_LM) heater lamp upper main (HL_UM) and heater lamp Fusing roller
upper sub (HL_US) light up. (F2)
Fusing roller
(B)
Fusing belt

(4) Automatic pressure release system (5) Fusing section cleaning
Normally the upper and lower heat rollers are pressed. When, how- In this machine, the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web.
ever, the following conditions are satisfied, the pressure is released. The cleaning unit is composed of the web feed roller, the winding
• When the machine shifts to the preheat mode. roller, and the backup roller which presses the web onto the fusing
• When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode. roller (B) with the proper pressure.
• When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF. Residual toner on the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web which
• When the machine is left for 90 sec under the ready state. contains silicon oil.
• When in the envelope mode. Backup roller

• When a jam occurs.
a. Pressure release operation
The fusing pressure control motor (PRM) rotates to turn ON the fusing
pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level). When the specified time passes Winding side
after turning ON the fusing pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level) by
rotation of the fusing pressure control roller (PRM), the pressure
release motor stops to complete the pressure release operation.
Web sheet Feed side
HLPCD
Fusing roller (B)
(6) Web life end detection

The web life near end is detected by the web print counter. When the
life reaches 300K prints, the following message is displayed to notify
that the replacement timing is approaching.
(Maintenance required.: FK3)
The web life end is detected by the web end detector. When the life
end is detected, a job is forcibly interrupted even the job is being per-
formed.
After replacing the web with a new one, reset the web life counter and
b. Pressing operation
the web send counter to clear the life end state.
When the end user makes some operations or when the machine
receives the Job signal, the fusing pressure control motor (PRM)
rotates reversely to drive the pressure release lever to the pressing
state.
When the specified time passes from turning OFF the fusing pressure
detector (HLPCD), the pressure release motor stops to complete the
pressing operation.
HLPCD
(7) Fusing belt meandering alignment adjustment

The fusing belt meandering alignment adjustment is executed in the
production process.
This adjustment can be made only in the production process, and
must not be performed by the serviceman.
CAUTION: If a screw is tighten in a position which is not marked in red,
the belt may be broken.
When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure to
turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to confirm
that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main power
switch.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the power
is cut off before completion of the pressure release operation. If this
state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be deformed.

13. Duplex/paper exit section
(1) Duplex section
ADUFM_R
POD3 ADUM1
5
7
4
ADUFM_F ADUGS
TFD3
6
PRTPD DSW_ADU
FPRFM_R
APPD1 ADUM2
1
APPD2
FPRFM_F
2

ADUFM_F ADU transport cooling fan motor F Cools the ADU transport path.
ADUFM_R ADU transport cooling fan motor R
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUM1 ADU motor lower Drive the transport roller 19, 20 and the paper exit roller 2.
ADUM2 ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 21, 22.
APPD1 ADU paper pass detector 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU paper pass detector 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU open/close detector Detects open/close of the duplex (ADU) cover.
FPRFM_F Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor F Cools the fusing pressure roller.
FPRFM_R Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor R
POD3 Right paper exit detector Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray).
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector (Right paper exit tray) Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 20 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 19 to the transport roller 21.
4 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper to the right paper exit section.
5 Transport roller 19 (Drive) Transports paper to the right paper exit section or the ADU section.
6 Paper exit gate (ADU gate) Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the ADU section or to the right tray.
7 Reverse gate Discharges paper to the reverse gate right tray or selects the switchback transport path to the ADU section.

(2) Paper exit section
POFM_R
POM
POFM_F
TFD2
POD2

POD2 Paper exit tray detector Detects paper exit to the paper exit tray.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor F Cools paper after fusing.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor R
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detector Detects paper full in the paper exit tray.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper to the paper exit tray.

(1) Duplex
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport
roller 19 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper
exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
• When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
• By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is sent to
the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the lower side of
the ADU gate which lowers by its own weight.
• The transport rollers 21 and 22 are driven by the ADU motor lower
to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
• Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then trans-
ported to the machine again.
(2) Paper exit
• Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport
roller 19 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the paper
exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
• When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the paper
exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely. Paper is
passed through the right paper exit gate, and discharged to the right
tray.
• When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the paper
exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely. Paper is
passed through the right paper exit gate, and discharged to the right
tray.

1.
MX-8090N
'(5,9(5< 81,7 '63) 81,7
710B. 710B& 710B0 710B<
32' 32)0B)
633' 62&' 678' 63:6 63))$1 6/80 638)0
71+0B. 71+0B& 71+0B0 71+0B<
32' 32)0B5
32)0B) 7%)0 633' 6/&29 67/' 635'0' 63)& 6320 /(' 3:%
7)6'B. 7)6'B& 7)6'B0 7)6'B<
7)' 32)0B(;
+/B3&' 32)0B5 721(5B. 81,7 721(5B& 81,7 721(5B0 81,7 721(5B< 81,7 78'B&/ 633' 63(' 63/6 675& 237,21 &&' 3:%
)80 67036
)8)0 32)0B(; &580B. &580B& &580B0 &580B< 78'B. 633' 63(' 63/6 6755&
633' 632' 6&29 655&
Block diagram
)86(5 81,7 37&&0

320 :(%0 '0B. '0B& '0B0 '0B< %70 '63)FQW 3:%
A. System block diagram
350 37&&+3' '9&B. '9&B& '9&B0 '9&B< 785&

)3)' :(%(1'
5(*,67 6(1625
550 81,7
'+3'B. '+3'B& '+3'B0 '+3'B< 7855& 6&1027+(5 3:% 6&$11(5 81,7
7+B80 0,0
5(*6B)
3)0 '5,9(5 3:% +/B80 3&6B) '('.B5 '('&B5 '('0B5 '('<B5 /(' '5,9(5 3:% /(' 3:% &&' 3:%
7+B86
5(*6B&
2&6:
$'80 +/B86 3&6B& '('.B/ '('&B/ '('0B/ '('<B/ 256B/('
7+B86 23(5$7,21 81,7
5(*6B5 0+36
$'80 +/B/0 3&6B5 0$,1 '5,9( 81,7
728&+
7+B/0 3$1(/ 256B3'
237,21
/&&0 +/B8: 3&66 /9'6
7+B/0 ,& &DUG
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
&&0B. &&0B& &&0B0 &&0B< 2=)0 /&'

3:%
&&0'B. &&0'B& &&0'B0 &&0'B< 2=)0 .(< 3:% 237,21
36 81,7
7%0'B+3 352&(66B. XQ 352&(66B& XQ 352&(66B0 XQ 352&(66B< XQ
'6:B) 2=)0 )5217 86% :+B6&1
&&+3'B. &&+3'B& &&+3'B0 &&+3'B<
'6:B5 7%0'B5
237,21
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B< .(<%25' 6,,&$6WDQGDUG
33' '6:B&6 7%0'B) 9)0B%$
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B< 237,21
37' '6:B)8 7%0&0 3&8 3:% (), ,) 3:% )LHU\ %R[
7+B36 '6:B5/ 780 7RXFK 3$'

'9B. 81,7 '9B& 81,7 '9B0 81,7 '9B< 81,7
0& 3:%
'3) XQ /33' /&+0 7&6B. 7&6B& 7&6B0 7&6B<
7& 3:% 0)3)0 +'')0
2&$&,6
XQ /&+0 '97<3B. '97<3B& '97<3B0 '97<3B< +''
7& 3:%
UG &$66(77( UG &$66(77( 7$1'(0 7$1'(0 0)3& 3:%

QG 75$< QG 75$<
237,21 5,*+7 '225 81,7 :70 &66B &66B &3)0
5' ,)
32' 3:% :7%6(7 &38& &38& 733' 375& /68 81,7
7)' '6:B$'8 :7)' &/80 &/80 733' 733' 375& /68B7+ 237,21
/68 FQW 3:%
3573' $'8*6 &63' &63' 763' 763' 775& /68B7+ :+B/68
MX-8090N ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 – 1

03(' $33' &3:' 7386 7386 738& /' 3:% %' 3:%
7+ +8'
Service Manual
03)6 $33' &3)' &3)' 7/80 3*0

3:% 3:%
)35)0B) $'8)0B) +/ 3:% &386 &386 7/8' 7/8' 738& /68)0
36)0 /68
)35)0B5 $'8)0B5 &/8' &/8' 73(' 73(' 7/80 '5,9(5 /,$0
36)0 3:%
&3(' &3(' 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 71'6(7 &2,19(1'(5
03/' 03)'
67$786
3$3(5 )((' 81,7 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 ,1',&$725
03:' 03*6 /&& ),1,6+(5
/&&/&7 N ),1,6+(5
038&
0$18$/ 3$3(5 )((' 81,7 '&36
237,21
68% '&36
237,21
:+B3:%
$& 3:%
$& 68% 3:% :+B6: 06:
:+B/&& :+B&6 :+B&6 :+B71'
Ḣᕞྥࡅࡢࡳ
237,21
237,21 237,21 237,21 237,21
$& ,1 $& ,1
㻰㻯㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻲㻭㻺
㻰㻹㼋㻷㻛㻰㻹㼋㻯㻼㻻㻹㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻝㻛㻭㻰㼁㻹㻞㻛㻸㻯㻯㻹㻛㻞㼀㻮㻹㻯㻹㼂㻲㻹㼋㻾㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻮㻭㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻝㼋㻞㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻟㻛㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼀㻺㻹㼋㻷㻛㼀㻺㻹㼋㻯㻛㼀㻺㻹㼋㻹㻛㼀㻺㻹㼋㼅㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻱㼄㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㻝㼋㻞㻛㼃㻱㻮㻱㻺㻰㻞㻛㻲㻼㻲㻰㻛㻼㻻㻰㻝㻛㻼㻻㻰㻞㻛㻴㻸㻼㻯㻰㻛
㼀㻺㻴㻹㻛㻼㻾㻹㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻱㼄㼀㻲㻰㻞㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㼁㻛㻸㻼㻼㻰㻛㼀㻞㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻺㻰㻿㻱㼀㻛
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠㻴㼂㼃㼀㻮㻿㻱㼀㻛㻼㻾㼀㻼㻰㻛㻲㼃㻿
B. PCU PWB
㻵㻯㻠㻝㻴㻸㼋㻼㻻㼃㼋㻯㻺㼀㻛㼀㻯㻞㻼㻹㻯㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠

㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹㻴㻸㼋㼁㻿㻞㼀㻮㻹㻰㼋㻴㻼㻴㼂㻌㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞
㻔㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎㼕㼠㻕㻼㼃㻹㻼㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㻞㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾
㻵㻯㻞㻣㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻭㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㼎㼡㼟
㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹㻲㼁㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻱㼄㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻲㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻰㼍㼠㼍㻌㼎㼡㼟㻔㻟㻞㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㻾㼋㻸㻰㻛㼀㻮㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㼃㼀㻹㼋㻸㻰
㼄㻞
㼄㻓㼠㼍㼘㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠
㻝㻠㻚㻣㻠㻡㻢㻹㻴㼦㻵㻯㻟㻣㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻿㻾㻭㻹㻯㻟㻼㼁㻿㻛㻯㻠㻼㼁㻿㻛㼃㻴㼋㻯㻺㼀㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㼋㼂㼋㻸㻛㻯㻟㻼㼁㻯㻛
㻯㻸㻷㻔㻞㻹㼎㼕㼠㻕㻯㻠㻼㼁㻯㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻹㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻝㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻝㻼㼁㻿㻛㻼㼀㻾㻯㻝㻛㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯㻺㼀㻛
㼀㻮㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㼀㻮㻲㻹㼋㼂㼋㻸㻛㻲㼁㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻹㻼㼁㻯㻛㻸㻯㻯㻯㻛
㼃㼀㻹㼋㻰㻛㻾㻾㻹㼋㻱㻺㻛㻾㻾㻹㼋㻯㻺㼀㻝㻛㼋㻯㻺㼀㻞㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻾㼋㼂㻸㻛
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㼋㻱㻺㻛㻼㻲㻹㻌㻯㻺㼀㻛㻼㻲㻹㼋㻱㻺㻭㻮㻸㻱
㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞
㻹㻲㻼㻯
㻵㻯㻞㻜㼃㻱㻮㻹㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㼁㻺㼀㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻸㻻㻾㻜㻛
㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻝㻯㼂㼋㻯㻭㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻜㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻝㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻞㻛㻯㼂㼋㻿㻵㼆㻱㻟㻛
㻯㼂㼋㻿㼀㻭㻼㻸㻱㻛㻯㼂㼋㻰㼁㻼㻸㻱㼄㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㼃㼀㻲㻰㻛㼀㻝㻼㻱㻰㻛㼀㻞㻼㻱㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻠㻼㻱㻰㻛
㻿㻯㻺㻙
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻿㻯㻵㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻯㻟㻼㻲㻰㻛㻯㻟㻼㻱㻰㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻯㻿㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻸㻛㻲㼃㻿㻞㻛
㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻞㼀㻮㻹㻰㼋㻲㻛㻞㼀㻮㻹㻰㼋㻾㻯㻠㻿㻿㻝㻙㻿㻿㻠㻛㻯㻟㻿㻿㻝㻙㻠㻛㻯㻟㻿㻼㻰㻛㻯㻠㻿㻼㻰㻛
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠㻴㼂㻯㻾㼁㻹㻿㼠㼑㼜㼜㼕㼚㼓㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㼘㼍㼙㼜㻯㼛㼕㼚㻌㼂㼑㼚㼐㼛㼞
㻴㻸㻯㻸㻷㻝㻛㻴㻸㼋㼁㻹㻛㼀㻯㻝㻛㻹㻯㻛㻴㼂㼋㻾㻱㻹㻯㻾㼁㻹㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻸㻵㻭㻹㻛㻸㻯㻴㻹㻝㻛㻸㻯㻴㻹㻞㻰㻸㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻛㻸㻿㼁㻿㻿㼋㻯㻸㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻟㼋㼂㻯㼂㼋㻯㻻㻼㼅㻛㼀㻝㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㼀㻝㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㼀㻝㻿㻼㻰㻛㼀㻞㻿㻼㻰㻛
㻴㻸㼋㼁㼃㻛㻴㻸㼋㻸㻹㻰㻸㻞㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻯㼂㼋㻯㻸㻯㻻㻼㼅㻞㻠㼂㻹㼋㼙㼛㼚㻛㻞㻠㼂㻿㼋㼙㼛㼚㻛㻝㼀㼁㻰㼋㻯㻸㻛
㻸㻿㼁㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㻷㻛㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㻯㻛㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㻹㻛㻯㻯㻹㻰㼋㼅㻛
㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㻷㻛㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㻯㻛㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㻹㻛㻰㻴㻼㻰㼋㼅㻛
㻼㻹㻯㻼㼀㻯㻯㻴㻼㻰㻛㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛㻝㼀㼁㻰㼋㻷㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㻭㻼㻼㻰㻞㻛
㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻼㼃㻹㼀㻝㻸㼁㻰㻛㼀㻞㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻟㻸㼁㻰㻛㻯㻠㻸㼁㻰
㻵㻯㻝㻤
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻼㻹㻯㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻞㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻸㻯㻯
㻼㻿㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻿㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻟㼋㻸㻰
㻰㻯㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻲㻭㻺㻰㻯㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻰㻯㻮㼘㼡㼟㼔㼘㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻰㻯㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞

㼁㻭㻾㼀㻲㼁㻹㻛㼃㼀㻹㻛㻾㻾㻹㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㻞㼀㼁㻹㻼㻲㻹㻛㻮㼀㻹㻛㻰㻹㼋㼅㻛㻰㻹㼋㻹㻯㻯㻹㼋㻷㻛㻯㻯㻹㼋㻯㻛㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㻲㻵㻺
㻯㻯㻹㼋㻹㻛㻯㻯㻹㼋㼅㻰㻹㼋㻷㼋㻯㼃㻯㻯㼃㻛
㻵㻯㻠㻣㻰㻹㼋㻯㻸㼋㻯㼃㻯㻯㼃㻛
㻯㻼㼁㻰㻹㼋㻷㼋㻰㻛㻯㼋㻰㻛㻹㼋㻰㻛㼅㼋㻰
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟㻮㼁㻺
㻿㻯㻵㻼㼃㻹
㻻㻯㻭㻯㻵㻿㻵㻯㻟㻤
㻯㻸㻷㻮㼁㻺㼀㻵㻺㻳㻌㻲㻼㻳㻭㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻔㻰㼂㼀㼅㻼㻿㻱㻸㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅㻕㻛
㻯㻯㻴㻼㻰㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅㻛
㼀㻲㻿㻰㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㼅㻛㼋㻹
㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠㻰㼛㼡㼎㼘㼑㻌㼒㼑㼑㼐㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻰㼛㼡㼎㼘㼑㻌㼒㼑㼑㼐㻌㼐㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻻㼆㻲㻹㻝㼋㻞㼋㼂㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻮㻭㼋㼂㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻮㻭㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻻㼆㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻴㻸㼋㻼㻾㻰㻼㻲㻰㻼㻲㻯㻷㻛㼚㻳㻯㻿㻛㻰㼂㻯㼋㻷㻛㻰㼂㻯㼋㻯㻛㻰㼂㻯㼋㻹㻛㻰㼂㻯㼋㼅㻛㻰㻹㼋㻷㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㻹㼋㻯㼋㻸㻰㻛㻰㻹㼋㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛
㼚㼋㻳㻵㻺㻯㻛㻳㼁㼚㻰㻼㻯㼁㼋㼃㻻㻾㻷㻵㻺㻳㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㻰㻹㼋㼅㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻴㼂㻌㻱㼞㼞㼛㼞
㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻾㼋㼂㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻲㼋㼂㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻾㼋㻸㻰㻛㻼㻻㻲㻹㻞㼋㻱㼄㼋㻸㻰
㻝㼀㻯㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㻝㼀㻯㼋㻿㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛
㻹㻯㼋㻮㻷㼋㻱㻾㻾㻛㻹㻯㼋㻯㻸㼋㻱㻾㻾
㻵㻯㻞㻠
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻰㻯㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻵㻺㻲㻻㻌㻸㻭㻹㻼㻸㼛㼍㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼛㼞㼘㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠

㻼㼀㻯㻯㻹㻸㻱㻰㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟㻯㻵㻿㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㼋㼂㻸㻛㼀㻝㻼㼁㻯㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻯㻛㼀㻞㻸㼁㻹㻛㼀㻞㻼㼁㻿㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻲㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻾㻛

㻼㼀㻾㻯㻞㻛㼀㼀㻾㻯㻛㻼㻯㻿㻿㻛㻝㼀㼁㻾㻯㻛㻝㼀㼁㻾㻾㻯㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻾㼋㼂㻛㻹㻼㻲㻿㻛㻹㻼㻳㻿㻛㻴㼀㻯㻿㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㼅㻛㼋㻹㻛
㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻭㻰㼁㻳㻿㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㼋㼂㻛㻮㼀㻹㼋㻰㻛㻮㼀㻹㼋㻯㼃㻯㻯㼃㻛㻞㼀㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㻞㼀㼁㻹㼋㻯㼃㻛㻼㼀㻯㻹㻰㻛㻼㻼㻰㻝㻛㻹㻼㻲㻰㻛㻼㻻㻰㻟
㻵㻯㻥㻜㻲㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㻲㼁㻹㼋㻳㻭㻵㻺㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻰㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻳㻭㻵㻺
㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻵㻛㻻㻌㻰㼞㼡㼙㻌㻸㼍㼙㼜㻌㻻㼜㼑㼚㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻯㻼㻸㻰㻰㻸㼋㻻㻼㻱㻺㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅㻛
㻵㻯㻣㻤㻰㻸㼋㻻㻼㻱㻺㻞㼋㻷㻛㼋㻯㻛㼋㻹㻛㼋㼅
㻰㻛㻭㻌
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠
㼀㻿㻳㼋㻮㻷㻛㼀㻿㻳㼋㻯㻛㼀㻿㻳㼋㻹㻛㼀㻿㻳㼋㼅
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻾㻱㻿㼋㻾㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㻾㻱㻿㼋㻲㼋㻸㻱㻰㻛㻾㻱㻿㼋㻯㼋㻸㻱㻰
㻯㻵㻿㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㼂㻲㻹㼋㻾㼋㻸㻰㻛㻯㻼㻲㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛
㻹㼁㼄㻹㻼㻱㻰㻛㻰㻿㼃㼋㻭㻰㼁㻛㼀㻲㻰㻟㻛㻹㻼㻸㻰㻝㻮㼀㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻞㼀㼁㻹㼋㻸㻰㻛㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰
㻴㻯㻝㻡㻝㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻲㻼㻾㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㻝㼋㻸㻰㻛㻭㻰㼁㻲㻹㻞㼋㻸㻰㻼㼀㻰㻛㻲㻼㻲㻰
㻾㻰㻌㻵㻛㻲㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻸㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠
㻲㼁㻹㼋㻸㻰
㻵㻯㻢㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠

㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㼀㻴㼋㻹㻛㻴㼁㻹㼋㻹㻛㼀㻴㻝㼋㻸㻿㼁㻛㼀㻴㻞㼋㻸㻿㼁㻛㻯㻠㻼㼃㻰㼁㻹㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻹㼋㻰㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻯㻿㻛㼁㻿㻝㼋㻰㻛㻸㻹㻝㼋㻯㻿㻛㻸㻹㻝㼋㻰
㻿㼃㻼㻯㻿㼋㻲㻛㻼㻯㻿㼋㻾㻛㻼㻯㻿㼋㻯
㻾㻱㻳㻿㼋㻲㻛㻾㻱㻳㻿㼋㻾㻛㻾㻱㻳㻿㼋㻯
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻵㻯㻡㻤㻵㻯㻢㻢㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㻰㻱㻰㻷㼋㻾㻛㻰㻱㻰㻯㼋㻾㻛㻰㻱㻰㻹㼋㻾㻛㻰㻱㻰㼅㼋㻾㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻰㼂㼀㼅㻼㼋㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅㻛㼀㻯㻿㼋㻷㻛㼀㻯㻿㼋㻯㻛㼀㻯㻿㼋㻹㻛㼀㻯㻿
㻿㼃㻿㼃
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻵㻯㻡㻥㻵㻯㻡㻞㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠

㻰㻱㻰㻷㼋㻸㻛㻰㻱㻰㻯㼋㻸㻛㻰㻱㻰㻹㼋㻸㻛㻰㻱㻰㼅㼋㻸㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㼁㻹㻛㼁㻿㻝㻛㼁㻿㻞㻛㻸㻹㻝㻛㻸㻹㻞㻛㻹㻼㼃㻰㻛㻰㻼㻲㻭㼕㼚
㻿㼃㻿㼃
㻭㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠
㼀㻴㻼㻿
+''
USP
7%
C. MFP control PWB
/&'
6$7$ '63) 3DQHO
&1
/9'6
''52Q%RDUG 6OLGH ''52Q%RDUG
*% 6: *%
‫*ق‬E>[@[SFV‫ك‬ ‫*ق‬E>[@[SFV‫ك‬
*ESV
6$7$*HQ
''5 ''5
&18SGDWH /9'66FDQഫ /9'66FDQഫ
86%
+RVW
7<3($&1
/9'63DQHO
3DQHO&RQWURO
7RXFK3DQHO,&
86%,) ''5 ''5 86%,)

*3,2 6',) 6$7$,) 6',) 6$7$,)
+RVW ,) ,) +RVW 6&$1
$50[
'HEXJ/(' $6,& +6
1RQ,QWHUUXSWLRQDUHD 1RSRZHUVKXWGRZQ
/$1-$&. 21ZKHQ/$1VWDQGE\
8$57
5-
1RWXVHG
)3'/,1. )3'/,1.
/&'&,) /&'&,)
*ESV *3,2 7UDQVPLWWHU *3,2 7UDQVPLWWHU
/9'66FDQ਀
(WKHU3+< *0,, )3'/,1. )3'/,1. /9'66FDQ਀
(WKHU0$& 6&1,) (WKHU0$& 6&1,)
* 5HFHLYHU 5HFHLYHU
* *
57/)*
)3'/,1. /9'6/68
86%'HYLFH )3'/,1.
86% 0ESV 7UDQVPLWWHU 32) 7UDQVPLWWHU
86%,) 86%,)
'HYLFH /68,) /68,) /9'6/68
'HYLFH 'HYLFH /9'6/68&/. 6<1& /683:%
7<3(%&1 5HXV‫ڭ‬ /9'6
5HXV 5HFHLYHU
8$57 8$57 /9'6/68&/. 6<1&
8$57 6:
FK FK
,17 )/$6+',00 ,17
,17 ,QWHUUXSWLRQDUHD FK /9'6/68
0ELW[ ,QWHUUXSWLRQDUHD FK
Q)$;B3,&B,17
,17 2IIZKHQ/$1VWDQGE\ 3URJUDP ,17 )/$6+',00
FK FK
2IIZKHQ/$1VWDQGE\ /9'6/68&/. 6<1&
,&FK ,&FK 0ELW[
,17 )/$6+',00 (),B,)
&RQWUROOHU %DWWHU\ &RQWUROOHU 3URJUDP /9'63DQHO
:DNH8S 62&.(7 2SWLRQ
,17 ,17
6&$1ഫ /$1 :੄ग़ॿ )/$6+',00
FK FK 6&$1਀ /68 8$57
,&FK ,&FK 62&.(7
57&
&RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHU
,17 8$57ఁ୑ &3/'ৢਦ
,17
FK /RFDO%XV /RFDO%XV +'' /RFDO%XV
/RJLF FK /RFDO%XV /RJLF
,) ,) /9'63DQHO 8$57
6:
(WKHU0$& 8$57 3&,H,) ,&FK
3&83:%
3&,H,) (WKHU0$& 3&,H,) 3&,H,) 8$57
* FK ODQH &RQWUROOHU *3,2
ODQH * ODQH ODQH FK GHEXJ8$57
WR62&
3&,H[JHQ ,&
*ESV .+]
32) 3,&
%RDUGWR%RDUG&RQQHFWRU
0LFRQ
Q)$;B3,&B,17
3&,H[JHQ 86%+RVW
6HULDO&1 8$57 *ESV 7<3($&1
9HQGHU VHJ/(' 5[ )URQW
3&,
'HEXJ/('
&3/' 3&,H[JHQ
0DFK;2 3&,HB6ZLWFK *ESV 7RXFK3DQHO,&
8$57 $&5(2SW 3,&;**3 )URQW
5,& 6HULDO 56& 'HEXJ&1
&1 3HULFRP 3DQHO&RQWURO
9HQGRU &1 '5,9(5 63,
((3520 86%'
$&5(3:% 5[
.
2SW 'HEXJ/('
SRUW
8$57 86%
86%+8%
.H\%RDUG
8$57 2SW6WG
1)&&$5'
5HDGHU
3&,H[JHQ 86%+RVW 2SWLRQ
3LQ 7303:% *ESV
2SW 0ESV
+HDGHU
((3520 6&10RWKHU3:%
NE
60%XV'HEXJ
86% 3&,H,) *3,2 ,&FK
/3&,)
+RVWFK ODQH &RQWUROOHU
,&FK
&RQWUROOHU
6'00& 0,3, +' 86% 86% 63,,) *3,2

FK &6, $XGLR +6,& 8/3, 3:0

/9'6ESS/&'
6'00& H'3 H'3 '3/9'6
86% ,6 ,&FK ,&FK
FK &RQWUROOHU &RQWUROOHU '', 371
+RVWFK
86%
+RVWFK
,QWHO
[*HQ
86%
86% +RVWFK
+RVW (
GHEXJ8$57IURP3&8
4XDG*+] +68$57
5HXV8$57
9*$&1
9*$
'HEXJ
'3
'', ,&FK SLQ',3 ((3520
&RQWUROOHU 62&.(7 NE
''5/ 0HPRU\
&RQWUROOHU 60%XV
*%
((3520 ((3520
6$7$ 6$7$ 6'00& 3&8 3&8
FK FK 69,' 63'FK 63'FK
FK FK FK 8$57 63,
''5/
63,)ODVK62,&
$QDORJ
6: 0%
''5/ %,26
'XDO&KDQQHO *%
&1P6$7$ 6HULDO&1
'HEXJ
30,&
P6$7$66' :ULWH
*% &1
3URJUDP
D. Scanner control PWB
Scanner control PWB (1/2)
㻰㻿㻼㻲㼏㼚㼠㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻔㻰㻿㻼㻲㻌㼟㼕㼐㼑㻕㼀㼞㻾㻙㻾㻳㻮㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻌
㼀㼞㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㼀㼞㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻳㼛㼞㼛㼓㼚㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺
㼀㼞㻭㻲㻱㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞㻭㻿㻵㻯㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
㼀㼞㻺㼑㼣㻌㻵㻼㻰
㼀㼞㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥
㻰㻻㻯㻯
㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙
㻯㻼㼁
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂㻸㻰㻻㻝㻞㼂
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻㻝㻞㼂
㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻙㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻㻡㼂
㻯㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹㻔㼀㼛㻌㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻸㻰㻻
㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿㼀㻹㻼㻿
㻿㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻘㻌㼑㼠㼏
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻯㻼㼁㻌
㻯㻸㻷㻯㻸㻷
㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞㻔㻞㻡㻹㻴㼦㻕
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻲㻭㻺㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻰㻿㻼㻲㻌㻲㻭㻺
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥
㻹㻲㻼㻯㻼㼃㻮
㻿㻯㻺㻙㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻯㻺㼀㻼㼃㻮
㼀㼛㻌㻯㻼㼁
㻯㻯㻰㻙䠢㻌㻼㼃㻮
䠄㻹㼍㼕㼚㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠㻌㼟㼕㼐㼑䠅㻾㻱㼁㻿㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌
㼀㼞㼎㼍㼏㼗㻌㼟㼕㼐㼑
㼀㼞㻯㻸㻷㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼀㼞㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻲㻙㻾㻳㻮
㻭㻲㻱㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻌㻯㻼㼁㻌
㼀㼞
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠㻯㻸㻷㻯㻸㻷
㼀㼞㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌㻔㻞㻡㻹㻴㼦㻕
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㼟㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙㼀㼛㻌㻯㻼㼁㼓㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㼀㼞㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻌
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥㻔㻲㼛㼞㻌㻺㻵㻼㻰㻕
㻳㼛㼞㼓㼛㼚㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌
㻿㻯䠝㻺㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤㻾㻱㼁㻿㻌㼒㼛㼞㻌
㻭㻿㻵㻯㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠㼒㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌㼟㼕㼐㼑
㻺㼑㼣㻌㻵㻼㻰
㻰㻻㻯㻯
㻻㼞㼕㼓㼕㼚㼍㼘㻌㼟㼕㼦㼑㻌
㻰㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻯㻼㼁
㻱㻞㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟㼀㼛㻌㻯㻼㼁㼡㼍㼞㼠㻘㻌㼑㼠㼏
㻹㼕㼞㼞㼛㼞
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻔㻝㻹㼎㻕
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾㻌
㻹㻴㻼㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻲㼘㼍㼟㼔㻾㻻㻹
㻻㻯㻿㼃
㻸㻰㻻㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻭㼁㻰㻵㼀㻻㻾㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻝㻜㼂㻸㻰㻻㻝㻞㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻡㼂㻝㻞㼂
㻸㻰㻻
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻㻡㼂
㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂㻸㻰㻻㻟㻚㻟㼂
㼂㼍㼞㼕㼛㼡㼟㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼟㻌㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻲㻭㼄㻕
㻲㻭㼄㻌㼁㻺
㻔㻻㻼㼀㻕
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻔㻻㼚㻌㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐㻘㻰㻿㻼㻲㻯㻺㼀㻌㼑㼠㼏㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂㻰㻯㻰㻯䡶
䡶䢙㻡㼂㻸㻿
㻔㻲㻭㻺㻕㻌㻝㻞㼂㻰㻯㻰㻯䡶
䡶䢙㻞㻠㼂㻿㻝
㻔㻯㻯㻰㻛㻰㻿㻼㻲㻛㻲㻭㻺㻕㻌㻝㻞㼂㻰㻯㻰㻯䡶
䡶䢙㻞㻠㼂㻿㻝

㻔㼀㼛㻌㻿㻯㻭㻺㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻕㻌㻝㻚㻞㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻌㻿㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㻔㻻㼚㻌㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐㻘㻰㻿㻼㻲㻯㻺㼀㻌㼑㼠㼏㻕㻌㻟㻚㻟㼂㻡㼂㻸㻿
㻔㻲㻭㻺㻕㻌㻝㻞㼂㻞㻠㼂㻿㻝
Scanner control PWB (2/2) 㻔㻯㻯㻰㻛㻰㻿㻼㻲㻛㻲㻭㻺㻕㻌㻝㻞㼂㻞㻠㼂㻿㻝
㻾㼑㼏㼛㼢㼑㼞㼥㻌㼠㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞
㻿㻼㻱㻰
㻾㼕㼓㼔㼠㻌㼠㼞㼍㼥
㻼㻻㻲㻸㻭㻺㼏㼚㼠㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻌㻛㻌
㼀㼛㻌㻯㻼㼁㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼐㼑㼙㼍㼚㼐㻌㻛㻌
㻼㻵㻯㻼㻻㻲
㻼㻻㻲㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘
㻾㼥㼏㼚㼠㻛㻻㻲㻲㼏㼚㼠㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘
㼀㻼㻭㻺㻱㻸㻌㼁㻺㻼㻻㼃㻱㻾㻌㻷㻱㼅㻌㻴㻻㻹㻱㻌㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥
㻵㻞㻯㻌㼛㼞㻌㼁㻿㻮
㻴㻹㻛㼃㼁㻛㻱㻲㻵㻌㻸㻱㻰
㼂㼍㼞㼕㼛㼡㼟㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼟
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻿㼃㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘
㼂㼍㼞㼕㼛㼡㼟㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼟㻌㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㼀㻼㻕
㼂㼍㼞㼕㼛㼡㼟㻌
㻸㻯㻰㻌㼁㻺㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼟
㻔㻝㻡㻚㻠㻕㼂㼍㼞㼕㼛㼡㼟㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㼟㻌㻔㼒㼛㼞㻌㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌
㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻼㼃㻮㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌㼁㻿㻮
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻺㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻌
㻼㼃㻮㼁㻿㻮㻸㻯㻰㻌㻰㻭㼀㻭
㼁㻿㻮㻔㼀㻼㻕㻵㻞㻯㻌㼛㼞㻌㼁㻿㻮㻮㼁㻿㻌㻿㻱㻸
㼀㼛㼡㼏㼔㻌㻷㼑㼥㻌㻼㼃㻮
㼀㻼㻭㻰㻌㻸㻱㻰㻛㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥㼀㻼㻭㻰㻌㻸㻱㻰
㼀㼛㼡㼏㼔㻌㻼㻭㻰
㼀㻼㻭㻰㻌㼁㻿㻮
㻵㻞㻯㻌㼛㼞㻌㼁㻿㻮㻮㼁㻿㻌㻿㻱㻸
㻷㼑㼥㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐㻷㻱㼅㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㼁㻿㻮㻲㼞㼛㼙㻌㻯㻼㼁
㻱㻲㻵㻌㻵㻲㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻿㼅㻺㻯㻿㼅㻺㻯
㻔㻻㻼㼀㻕㻮㼁㻿㻌㻿㼃
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㼁㻿㻮㻔㼀㻼㻕
㻵㼙㼍㼓㼑㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍㻵㼙㼍㼓㼑㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍
㻿㼅㻺㻯㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤㻮㼁㻿㻌㻿㼃㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤
㻲㼕㼑㼞㼥㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥
㻵㼙㼍㼓㼑㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍
㻔㻻㻼㼀㻕
㻿㼅㻺㻯
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㻾㼤
㻸㻿㼁㼏㼚㼠㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻵㼙㼍㼓㼑㻌㼐㼍㼠㼍
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯㻌㼀㼤
㼁㻿㻮
㼃㻵㻲㻵㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥
㻵㻯㻌㻯㻭㻾㻰㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮
㻷㻱㼅㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻾㻱㻭㻰㻱㻾
㻲㻭㻺
㻹㻲㻼㻯
㻞㻠㼂㻛㻡㼂㼛㻛㻡㼂㻸㻛㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻴㻰㻰㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼟㼡㼜㼜㼘㼥
㻡㼂㻸㻿㻞㻠㼂㻿㻝㻛㻞㻠㼂㻿㻿㻞㻠㼂㻹㻡㻛㻡㼂㼛㻛㻡㼂㻸㻹㻡㼂㼛
㻾㼥㼏㼚㼠㻛㻻㻲㻲㼏㼚㼠㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘㻹㻭㻵㻺㻰㻯㻌
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻘㻌
㻰㻯㻯㻺㼀㻌㻿㼁㻮㻌㻰㻯㻌㻿㼁㻮㻌㻰㻯㻌㻼㼃㻮㼑㼠㼏
㻼㻻㻲㻌㼟㼕㼓㼚㼍㼘
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮

E. LSU PWB
LSU PWB (1/2)
㼀㻴㻞㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㻌㻞
㻞㻌
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌㻻㼡㼠㼜㼡㼠㼀㻴
㼀㼔㼑㼞㼙㼕㼟㼠㼛㼞㻌
㻿㻯㻸㻷㻛㼀㼄㻰㻛㻾㼄㻰㻟
㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑㻌㻮㼁㻿㻹㼕㼏㼞㼛㼃㼕㼞㼑
㻯㻿㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼠㼑㼏㼠㻔㻸㻰㻰㻕㻤㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㻿㻌㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻌㻷㻛㻯㻛㻹㻛㼅
㻯㼔㼕㼜㻌㼟㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻔㻱㻱㻼㻙㻾㻻㻹㻕㻤㽢㻤
㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻜㼉
㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㻵㻯
㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼㻵㻞㻯
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞㻛㻟㻛㻠㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㼅㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㻯㼁㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㼅㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲㻲㻭㻺

㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻹㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻹㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯
㼚㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻷
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻷㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻷
㻟㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲
㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞㻛㻟㻛㻠㻼㻠㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻞
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯㻼㻠㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝
㻲㼞㼛㼙㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻼㻟㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞㻛㻟㻛㻠
㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻵㼚㼜㼡㼠㻼㻯㼁㼋㼀㻾㻳
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻟㼋㼅㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻷䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
Q96<1&B< 㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㻼㻟㼋㻭㻰㻶
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㻛㻱㻯㻸㻷㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻰㻶㼋㼅
㻮㻰
㻲㻼㻰㻙㻸㻵㻺㻷㻛㻾㼑㼏㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻰㼀㼋㼅㻝㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㼅㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㼅㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻟㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㼅㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㼅㻠㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㼅㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠㻌
㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯㼋㻱㻺

㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻯㻕
㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹㼋㻱㻺

㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻯㼔㼍㼕㼚㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻹㻕
㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭㼋㻱㻺

㻔㻯㻸㻷㻙㻭㻕
㻵㻰㼇㻜㻦㻝㼉
㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼㻵㻞㻯
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻹㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻲㻭㻺
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㻯㻷
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲㻼㻠㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻞
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯㻼㻠㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻼㻟㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻞
㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻷㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㻟㼋㻹㼋㻭㻷㻞
Q96<1&B0
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㻛㻱㻯㻸㻷㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻟㼋㻭㻰㻶
㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻰㻶㼋㻹
㻮㻰㻹㻿㻱㼀㼋㻹㻛㼅㻠
㻠㼚㻵㻺㼀㻌㻿㼀䚷㻹㻛㼅
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻰㼀㼋㻹㻝㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻹㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻹㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻟㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻹㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻹㻠㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㻹㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻯㼔㼍㼕㼚

LSU PWB (2/2)
㻵㻰㼇㻝㻦㻜㼉
㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼㻵㻞㻯
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚㻿㻰㼋㻯㻸㻷
㻿㻰㼋㻯㻸㻷
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻿㻰㻯㻸㻷㼋㻱㻺㻮㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲㻲㻭㻺
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻸㻰
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻷㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚㻼㻠㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕㻞
㻼㼃㻮
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻠㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻼㻟㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㻟㼋㻯㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻷
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻟㻼㻟㼋㻭㻰㻶
㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻰㻶㼋㻯
Q96<1&B& 㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻠㼚㻵㻺㼀㻌㻿㼀䚷㻯㻛㻷
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㼚㼚㻏㻼㻞㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯㻛㻱㻯㻸㻷㼚㼚㻏㻼㻝㼋㻭㻷㻞㻟
㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻝㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻞㼋㻭㻷㻞㼚㼚㻏㻼㻜㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻮㻰
㻹㻲㻼㻯㻏㻼㻜㼋㻟㼋㻭㻷㻞㻻㻚㻯㻚
㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻿㻴
㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㼚㻼㻞㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲㼚㻼㻝㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻞
㼚㻼㻜㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻰㼀㼋㻯㻝㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻯㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻯㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻟㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻯㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻯㻠㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㻯㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻯
㻼㼞㼕㼚㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼀㼞㼕㼓㼓㼑㼞㻌㻯㼔㼍㼕㼚㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻹
㻻㻿㻯㻯㻸㻷㼋㻭
㻵㻰㼇㻝㻦㻝㼉㻿㻯㻸㻛㻿㻰㻭㻛㼃㻼㻵㻞㻯

㻵㻞㻯㻌㻮㼁㻿
㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻴㼍㼞㼐㻌㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻳㻹㼋㻯㻷
㻼㻳㻹㼋㻿㼀㻭㻾㼀
㻶㻻㻮㻱㻺㻰㼋㻵㻺㼀㼋㻷䠄㻼㻳㻹㼋㻮㻾㻱㻭㻷䠅㻟
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻵㻛㻲㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚㻻㻚㻯㻚㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻿㼥㼚㼏㼔㼞㼛㼚㼛㼡㼟㻌㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻳㻹㼋㻸㻻㻯㻷㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻯㼛㼙㼙㼡㼚㼕㼏㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚㻾㼑㼓㼕㼟㼕㼠㼑㼞
㻿㻯㻷㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚
㻾㻿㼂㼋㻰㻭㼀
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻾㻿㼀㻲㻭㻺㼋㻼㼃㻹
㻲㻭㻺㻻㻚㻯㻚㻻㻚㻯㻚
㻸㻿㼁
㼀㻾㻭㻺㻿㼋㻰㻭㼀㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻲㻭㻺㻿㼀㻭㻮㻸㻱㻲㻭㻺
㻸㻿㼁㼋㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻠
㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻼㻠㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻝㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻻㼟㼏㼕㼘㼘㼍㼠㼛㼞 6<6&/. 㻞
㻿㻛㻿㻼㻠㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻞㻔㻱㻺㻮㻕
㻔㻿㼅㻿㼀㻱㻹㻌㻯㻸㻷㻕
㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻼㻟㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟
㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻼㻟㼋㻷㼋㻭㻷㻞
㻱㻯㻸㻷㼚㻼㻟㼋㼃㻭㻵㼀㼋㻭㻷㻞
(&/.
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻛㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞
㻼㻟㼋㻭㻰㻶
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯 +6<1&
㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻰㻶㼋㻷
Q96<1&B.
㻠㼂㻿㼅㻺㻯
㻲㼞㼛㼙㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻰㻶㼋㼅㻛㻹㻛㻯㻛㻷
Q96<1&B<&0 㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟
㻴㼛㼞㼕㼦㼛㼚㼠㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚㻸㻰㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻹㻿㻱㼀㼋㻷㻛㻯㻠
㻱㻯㻸㻷 (&/.
䠄㻭㻼㻯㻌㻱㼠㼏㻚㻚㻚䠅
㻛㼂㼑㼞㼠㼕㼏㼍㼘㻌㻿㼏㼍㼚
㻴㻿㼅㻺㻯 +6<1& 㼀㼕㼙㼕㼚㼓㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻳㻭㻵㻺㼋㻲㻵㼄
㼚㼚㻏㻼㻞㼋㻭㻷㻝
㼚㼚㻏㻼㻝㼋㻭㻷㻝㻟
㼀㼛㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟㻏㻼㻜㼋㻝㼋㻭㻷㻝
㼚㼚㻏㻼㻜㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻏㻼㻜㼋㻞㼋㻭㻷㻝
㼚㻿㻱㻸㼋㻿㻴
㻻㻚㻯㻚
㼚㻼㻞㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻝
㼚㻼㻝㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻿㻰㻯㻸㻷㼋㻱㻺㻮㼚㻼㻜㼋㻸㼋㻭㻷㻝
㻠㼚㻸㻰㻱㻾㻾䚷㼅㻛㻹㻛㻯㻛㻷
㻮㻰
㻮㻰
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻭㻿㻵㻯
㻰㻛㻭㻌㻵㻛㻲㼀㼛㻌㻯㻴㻵㻼㻙㻝㻛㻞㻛㻟
㻟㻡䠖㻡㻤㻰㼀㼋㻷㻝㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻭䠖㻷㻝㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻞㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻮䠖㻷㻞㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻟㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻯䠖㻷㻟㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
㻰㼀㼋㻷㻠㻗㻙㻞
㻯㼔㼍㼚㼚㼑㼘㻌㻰䠖㻷㻠㻌㻯㼕㼞㼏㼡㼕㼠
9,'(2,)B$&7

2.
5 4 3 2 1
MainDCPS
AC PWB F101
Voltage
FUSE Conversion
AC CODE 1 NF +24VM1
+24VM2
D MAIN POWER SW +24VM3 D
AC IN F1 +24VM4
L
NF +24VM5
20A/250V
Voltage
Conversion
A. AC power line diagram
+ 5VOM
N + 5VLM
Power line diagram
F3
(1) AC power line diagram (USA)
T2.0AH/250V
SubDCPS
F101
Voltage
FUSE Conversion
WARM HEATER SET (OPTION ) NF +24VL1
+24VL2
+24VL3
+24VL4
+24VL5
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
WH-N 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 Voltage
SCN Conversion
WH-L RY1 HEATER + 5VLS
C C
NC
WH_CNT
NO
+24VM4
10W 10W
CS CS
㻯㻿
HEATER 1 HEATER 2
HL PWB
18W
㼀㻭㻺㻌㻯㻿 L1
TAN RY1
HEATER
INT24V2L
14W
LSU 㻸㻿㼁 HLPR

HEATER
10W
LCC 㻸㻯㻯
HEATER
B B

TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4
T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
4 HLOUT_UM 4 HLOUT_UW HLOUT_LM 4

T2 SSR1 T2 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 SSR4
1 1 1 1
HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
6 6 6 6
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
+/B80 +/B8: +/B/0

+/B86
76B/ 76B6
A A
76B0
)86,1*81,7
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
MainDCPS
AC PWB F101
Voltage
FUSE Conversion
AC CODE 1 NF +24VM1
+24VM2
D MAIN POWER SW +24VM3 D
AC IN F1 +24VM4
L
NF +24VM5
T10AH/250V
Voltage
F2 Conversion
+ 5VOM
N + 5VLM
T10AH/250V
F3 F4
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH250V
SubDCPS
(2) AC power line diagram (Europe)
F101
Voltage
FUSE Conversion
WARM HEATER SET (Option) NF +24VL1
+24VL2
+24VL3
+24VL4
+24VL5
WH-SW
WH PWB 10W
WH-N 㻿㻯㻺㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠 Voltage
SCN Conversion
WH-L RY1 HEATER + 5VLS
C C
NC
WH_CNT
NO
+24VM4
10W 10W
CS CS
㻯㻿
HEATER 1 HEATER 2
HL PWB
18W
㼀㻭㻺㻌㻯㻿 L3
TAN RY2
HEATER
L4 INT24V2L
INT24V2L
RY1
14W
LSU 㻸㻿㼁 L1 HLPR

HEATER
HLPR
10W
L2
LCC 㻸㻯㻯
HEATER
B B

TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4
T1 G T1 G T1 G T1 G
4 HLOUT_UM 4 HLOUT_UW HLOUT_LM 4

T2 SSR1 T2 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 SSR4
1 1 1 1
HLOUT_US
2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
7KHFRQQHFWRU 6 6 6 6
IRU:LWKVWDQG9ROWDJH7HVW
AC SUB PWB RY1
AC IN F1
L
T10AH/250V
㼐㼞㼍㼣㼑㼞
AC CODE 2 RY2 F3
N/F
F2 +/B80 +/B8: +/B/0
+/B86
N
T10AH/250V
A A
VR1
76B0 76B/
+24VM4
76B6
+24VM4 )86,1*81,7
HL_POW_CNT FW
Generating
Circuit 3.3VM
FW2
5 4 3 2 1
MAIN DCPS DRIVER PWB
90 90 TNM_K
$
) 90 $

TNHM_K
$
TNM_C
WEBM2 ,&
TNHM_C
POM $
$
TNM_M
(1) Main power line: 24V
PRM $
$
TNHM_M
$
PFM
B. DC power line diagram
$
TNM_Y
$
ADUM1
$
TNHM_Y
$
ADUM2
$
RRM
$
LCCM
$
2TBMCM 2TUM
FUM
,1790/ ,1790/
PCU PWB )(7 CPFM
) '6:B5
90
90 90 MC PWB HL PWB
'6:B) '9%6.0<&
2
1
3
,1790 ,1790 0&.0<& 4
)(7
*%.0<&
,1790 1TC PWB DM DRIVER PWB

7&.0<& ,1790
LCCM1
2TC PWB 7& DM DRIVER PWB
,1790
'5 LCCM2
,1790 37&
&$6(
)
90 90
90
DM_C LSU DRIVER PWB LIAM_K
90 90
,& CCM_K DM_M LIAM_C
CCM_C DM_Y LIAM_M
'9&B.'9&B&'9&B0'9&B<
CCM_M CLUCH LIAM_Y
2=)02=)02=)0 PED CIS PWB
CCM_Y FAN 9)0B%$
) 90
90 90
AC SUB PWB
90
,& PTCCM DM_K
WH PWB
T1LUM BTM
$
T2LUM WTM COIN
$
7386738603)603*6$'8*6 VENDER
C3LUM SOLENOID

$ &386&3863&66
375&375&738&738&&38&&38&
C4LUM CLUCH
$ 785&7855&038&/&&&775&
37& STATUS 36)036)09)0B5)35)0B)35)0B5$'8)0B)$'8)0B57%)0
FAN
32)0B)32)0B532)0B(;)8)0
$ INDICATOR
0;6/1 32)0B)32)0B532)0
9 9
DFS PWB DL2_K
'&'&
DL_K DL2_C
9 9
'&'& DL_C DL2_M
DL_M DL2_Y
DL_Y
SCN MOTHER LSU CNT PWB LD PWB

PGM
)
90 90 90
LSUFM
DSPF CNT PWB
SUB DCPS PCU PWB SLUM
$
SPUFM
)
96
'ULYHU SPOM
(2) Sub power line: 24V
67036
SOLENOID
SCN MOTHER PWB 93'
$
93'
)(7 675&655&
CLUCH
$ 6755&63)&
96 9 LED PWB

'&'& /'2 CCD PWB '&'&
$
9
/'2
96 9
/'2 CCD PWB
9
/'2
)
LVDS PWB SPFFAN
96 96 9 LCD UN
96
'&'&
$
9 TOUCH PANEL
'&'&
LED PWB
93' LED DRIVER PWB
,&
$ $$
93'
MIM
96
ORS LED PWB
$
MFPC PWB
96 96 96
$

9/
'&'&
HDD FM
MFP FM
) 96 96 LCC

0;/&0;/&;10;/&1
) 96 㻯㼁㻾㻸㻌㻵㻺㻿㻱㻾㼀㻱㻾㻲㻵㻺㻵㻿㻴㻱㻾

96
㻯㻻㻾㻾㻱㻯㼀㻵㻻㻺㻌
㼁㻺㻵㼀
)
96 96
0;5% 0;&) 0;)10;)1

MAIN DCPS PCU PWB
9/03' T1 PWB
9/0 9/03' 9/03' T2 PWB

(3) Main power line: 5VL
$
9/03'
'6:B)878'B.78'B&/37&&+3''+3'B<'+3'B0'+3'B&'+3'B.
SENSOR
&&0'B<&&0'B0&&0'B&&&0'B.
9/03'
32'32')3)'7)'+/3&'33'33'37'/33':(%(1'
SENSOR
763'733'733'763'733'&63'&63'&3)'&/8'&3('&3('&/8'&3)'
7)6'B<7)6'B07)6'B&7)6'B.&&+3'B<&&+3'B0&&+3'B&&&+3'B.
R-DOOR I/F PWB

9/03'
SENSOR
9/0
9/0
:7%6(7
SENSOR
9/0
'6:B&6'6:B5/71'6(7:7)'7%0'B)7%0'B5
SENSOR
3&6B)3&6B53&6B&7&6B<7&6B07&6B&7&6B.+8'B0
9/0
WTM
9/0
FUM LCHM1
9/0
LCHM2
9/0 LSU DRIVER PWB
9/0 PED CIS PWB
9/0 COIN VENDER
$
9 AC SUB PWB
9 9
/'2 '('<B/'('0B/'('&B/'('.B/
SENSOR
'('<B5'('0B5'('&B5'('.B5
9UHI9 &3:'

SENSOR
9UHI9

LSU CNT PWB LD PWB BD PWB
9/0
SCN MOTHER PWB 9UHI9
9
9/0 9/0
9/0 LCC
0;/&0;/&;1
DRIVER PWB
9/0 CURL
9/0 CORRECTION
UNIT
0;5%
SUB DCPS
SCN MOTHER PWB PCU PWB
92B'XW\
)(7 PRTPD
DSPF un
(4) Sub power line: 5VL
DSPF CNT PWB

CCD-R PWB
9/6 9/6 9/ 9/ 9
36: /'2 /'2
92B) $ 92B)
92B'XW\
9/ 9/
'&'&
CCD-F PWB
9/ 9/ 9
/'2 /'2
9/ EFI IF PWB

9/6 9 9
9/6 '&'& /'2
ORS PD PWB
9
'&'&
9/6
AUDITOR With external EFI server
- 86% 37&
9/6
86% 37& )(7
OCSW
-
9/6 92B) 9

MHPS /'2
-
9/6
)(7
86% 9/6 TOUCH PAD
37& IC CARD READER
9/6 9/6
$
86% 9/6
37& KEY BOARD
$
9/6
OPE un
86% LVDS PWB 9/6
37& FRONT USB
$
Without external EFI server
92B) 92B)
HOME KEY PWB
MFPC PWB

9/6
MAIN DCPS
92 92B)
$
37& REAR USBH

92
9/6
HDD
$
3,&
3.
292132-6 CN1 CN3 CN31
LIAM_BK_A 1 6 LIAM_BK_A LIAM_A 1 11 LIAM_A#
LIAM_BK_B 2 5 LIAM_BK_B LIAM_B 2 10 LIAM_B#
+24V 3 4 +24V LIAM_/A 3 9 LIAM_XA#
LIAM BK +24V 4 3 +24V LIAM_/B 4 8 LIAM_XB#
LIAM_BK_/A 5 2 LIAM_BK_/A LIAM_K_EN 5 7 LIAM_K_EN#
LIAM_BK_/B 6 1 LIAM_BK_/B LIAM_C_EN 6 6 LIAM_C_EN#
173977-6 353293-6 292206-6 LIAM_M_EN 7 5 LIAM_M_EN#
LIAM_Y_EN 8 4 LIAM_Y_EN#
24V4 9 3 24VM4
5VN 10 2 5VLM7
GND 11 1 DGND
292132-6 CN2 1-292207-1 1-353293-1 1-353293-1 1-292207-1
LIAM_C_A 1 18 LIAM_C_A
A. LSU, MOTHER
LIAM_C_B 2 17 LIAM_C_B
+24V 3 16 +24V
LIAM C +24V 4 15 +24V
LIAM_C_/A 5 14 LIAM_C_/A CN24
LIAM_C_/B 6 13 LIAM_C_/B 12 AK_CS_Y2#
173977-6 12 LIAM_M_A 11 AK_CS_Y1#
11 LIAM_M_B 10 AK_CS_M2#
10 +24V LSU 9 AK_CS_M1#
9 +24V 8 AK_CS_C2#
8 LIAM_M_/A 7 AK_CS_C1#
292132-6 7 LIAM_M_/B 6 AK_CS_K2#
LIAM_M_A 1 6 LIAM_Y_A DRIVER 5 AK_CS_K1#
LIAM_M_B 2 5 LIAM_Y_B 4 AK_RXD#
Actual wiring chart
+24V 3 4 +24V 3 AK_TXD#

LIAM M +24V 4 3 +24V 2 AK_SCLK#
LIAM_M_/A 5 2 LIAM_Y_/A PWB 1 DGND
LIAM_M_/B 6 1 LIAM_Y_/B 1-353293-2 1-292207-2
173977-6 1-353293-8 1-292206-8
CN25
30 DGND
CN5
29 SCK_LSU
292132-6 AK_CS_Y2 1 28 DGND
LD PWB AK_CS_Y1 2 27 RSV_DAT
LIAM_Y_A 1
AK_CS_M2 3 26 JOBEND_INT
LIAM_Y_B 2
AK_CS_M1 4 25 /JOBEND_INT_M
+24V 3
AK_CS_C2 5 24 /JOBEND_INT_K
+24V 4
LIAM Y AK_CS_C1 6 23 PCU_TRG
LIAM_Y_/A 5
AK_CS_K2 7 (NC) 22 (NC)
LIAM_Y_/B 6
173977-6 AK_CS_K1 8 21 VREF2
AK_RXD 9
179228-4 179228-4
AK_TXD 10 1 OZFM3_V 4 20 OZFM3_V
AK_SCLK 11 2 OZFM_CNT 3 19 /OZFM3_CNT
GND 12 3 GND 2 18 OZFM3_LD
1-353293-2 OZFAN 3
1-292207-2 4 OZFM3_LD 1 17 DGND
CN2 292254-4 (NC) 16 INT24V2

2-1470109-0 1-353908-5
LSU PWB Vref 20
DGND 19
BEAMDETECT 18 (NC) (NC) 15 /LSUSS_CL
TH2_LSU 17
nPCU_TRG 16 TH_M 4 14 TH_M
TH1_LSU 15 Temperature- GND 3 13 DGND
nJOBEND_INT_K 14 HUD_M 2 12 HUD_M
nJOBEND_INT_C 13 5VLM7 1 11 5VLM7
nJOBEND_INT_M 12
humidity sesor 179228-4
CN1 CN4 CN6 CN500 nJOBEND_INT_Y 11
+5V 1 7 +5V_LD TX25-120P-6ST-H1E TX24-120R-6ST-H1E JOBEND_INT 10 10 DGND
DGND 2 6 GND D-GND 1 1 D-GND nTRANS_RST 9 9 TH2_LSU
BD PWB nBD 3 5 BD #P0_K_AK1 61 TH1 2 2 TH1 61 #P0_K_AK1 nRSV_DAT 8 8 TH1_LSU
292250-3 4 GND D-GND 62 TH2 3 3 TH2 62 D-GND LSUASIC_RST 7 7 /JOBEND_INT_C
173977-3 3 TH1 3.3V 63 D-GND 4 4 D-GND 63 3.3V DGND 6 6 /JOBEND_INT_Y
2 GND WP_Y 64 nBD 5 5 nBD 64 WP_Y nTRANS_DAT 5 5 TRANS_RST
1 TH2 SCL_Y 65 D-GND 6 6 D-GND 65 SCL_Y nSCK_LSU 4 4 LSU_RST
292250-7 SDA_Y 66 +24V1 7 7 +24V1 66 SDA_Y DGND 3 3 TRANS_DAT
173977-7 WP_M 67 +24V1 8 8 +24V1 67 WP_M DGND 2 2 DGND
CN1 SCL_M 68 +24V1 9 9 +24V1 68 SCL_M +5V_LD 1 1 INT5V_LD
GND 1 SDA_M 69 P-GND 10 10 P-GND 69 SDA_M 2-1470107-0 1-353908-5
3-292208-0
LSU TH1 PWB TH1 2 WP_C 70 P-GND 11 11 P-GND 70 WP_C
292250-2 173977-2 SCL_C 71 P-GND 12 12 P-GND 71 SCL_C CN3 CN20
SDA_C 72 nPOLY_START 13 13 nPOLY_START 72 SDA_C DGND 1 1 D-GND
WP_K 73 nPOLY_LOCK 14 14 nPOLY_LOCK 73 WP_K 3.3VN 2 2 +3.3V
SCL_K 74 nPOLY_CK 15 15 nPOLY_CK 74 SCL_K PGND 3 3 P-GND SCN
CN1 SDA_K 75 D-GND 16 16 D-GND 75 SDA_K 24V 4 4 +24V
GND 1
D-GND 76 FAN_24V 17 17 FAN_24V 76 D-GND 5VN 5 5 +5V
TH2 2
LSU TH2 PWB D-GND 77 FAN_nREADY 18 18 FAN_nREADY 77 D-GND DGND 6 6 D-GND
173977-2
292250-2 5VLD 78 P-GND 19 19 P-GND 78 5VLD 292132-6 179228-6 179228-6 292132-6
MOTHER PWB PCU PWB
D-GND 79 #P2_AK2 20 20 #P2_AK2 79 D-GND
5VLD 80 #P1_AK2 21 21 #P1_AK2 80 5VLD CN1 CN26
D-GND 81 #P0_AK2 22 22 #P0_AK2 81 D-GND CH0_N 1 1 CH0_N
5VLD 82 SDCLK 23 23 SDCLK 82 5VLD CH0_P 2 2 CH0_P

D-GND 83 P4_Y_AK2 24 24 P4_Y_AK2 83 D-GND D-GND 3 3 D-GND
#P0_C_AK1 84 P3_Y_AK2 25 25 P3_Y_AK2 84 #P0_C_AK1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
CN3
#P2_AK1 85 nINT_Y_AK2 26 26 nINT_Y_AK2 85 #P2_AK1 CH1_N 5 5 CH1_N
+24V 1 1 24V
POLYGON #P1_AK1 86 MSET_Y_AK2 27 27 MSET_Y_AK2 86 #P1_AK1 CH1_P 6 6 CH1_P
GND 2 2 PGND
#P0_M_AK1 87 P4_Y_AK1 28 28 P4_Y_AK1 87 #P0_M_AK1 CH2_N 7 7 CH2_N
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START CN22
DT_Y3+ 88 P3_Y_AK1 29 29 P3_Y_AK1 88 DT_Y3+ CH2_P 8 8 CH2_P
/LOCKED 4 4 nPOLY_LOCK CN23
DT_Y3- 89 nINT_Y_AK1 30 30 nINT_Y_AK1 89 DT_Y3- D-GND 9 9 D-GND (NC) 1 (NC)
EXT.CLK 5 5 nPOLY_CK
MOTOR DT_Y4+ 90 nLDERR_Y 31 31 nLDERR_Y 90 DT_Y4+ D-GND 10 10 D-GND 5VO_DUTY 12 2 5VO
292231-5 353908-5 179228-5 292250-5 DT_Y4- 91 MSET_Y_AK1 32 32 MSET_Y_AK1 91 DT_Y4- CLK_N 11 11 CLK_N PRTPD_out 11 3 PRTPD_OUT
DT_Y1+ 92 P4_K_AK2 33 33 P4_K_AK2 92 DT_Y1+ CLK_P 12 12 CLK_P TxD_PCU 10 4 TXD_PCU
DT_Y1- 93 P3_K_AK2 34 34 P3_K_AK2 93 DT_Y1- CH3_N 13 13 CH3_N RxD_PCU 9 5 PCU_RXD
DT_Y2+ 94 nINT_K_AK2 35 35 nINT_K_AK2 94 DT_Y2+ CH3_P 14 14 CH3_P RES_PCU 8 6 RES_PCU
DT_Y2- 95 MSET_K_AK2 36 36 MSET_K_AK2 95 DT_Y2- D-GND 15 15 D-GND RTS_PCU 7 7 RTS_PCU
DT_K3+ 96 P4_K_AK1 37 37 P4_K_AK1 96 DT_K3+ D-GND 16 16 D-GND CTS_PCU 6 8 CTS_PCU
DT_K3- 97 P3_K_AK1 38 38 P3_K_AK1 97 DT_K3- CH4_N 17 17 CH4_N /POF 5 9 /POF_PCU
CN1 DT_K4+ 98 nINT_K_AK1 39 39 nINT_K_AK1 98 DT_K4+ CH4_P 18 18 CH4_P PCU_DEBUG_RX 4 10 /TXD_LOG#
1 24V DT_K4- 99 nLDERR_K 40 40 nLDERR_K 99 DT_K4- ECLK_LSU_N 19 19 ECLK_LSU_N DGND 3 11 DGND
2 nFANRDY DT_K1+ 100 MSET_K_AK1 41 41 MSET_K_AK1 100 DT_K1+ ECLK_LSU_P 20 20 ECLK_LSU_P DGND 2 12 DGND
Board to Board
LSU FAN 3 PGND DT_K1- 101 P4_C_AK2 42 42 P4_C_AK2 101 DT_K1- D-GND 21 21 D-GND DGND 1 13 DGND
440129-3 440055-3 DT_K2+ 102 P3_C_AK2 43 43 P3_C_AK2 102 DT_K2+ D-GND 22 22 D-GND 1-353293-2 1-353293-3
1-292207-2 1-292207-3
DT_K2- 103 nINT_C_AK2 44 44 nINT_C_AK2 103 DT_K2- HSYNC_LSU_P 23 23 HSYNC_LSU_P
DT_C3+ 104 MSET_C_AK2 45 45 MSET_C_AK2 104 DT_C3+ HSYNC_LSU_N 24 24 HSYNC_LSU_N
DT_C3- 105 P4_C_AK1 46 46 P4_C_AK1 105 DT_C3- VSYNC_Y_P 25 25 VSYNC_Y_P
DT_C4+ 106 P3_C_AK1 47 47 P3_C_AK1 106 DT_C4+ VSYNC_Y_N 26 26 VSYNC_Y_N
DT_C4- 107 nINT_C_AK1 48 48 nINT_C_AK1 107 DT_C4- D-GND 27 27 D-GND
DT_C1+ 108 nLDERR_C 49 49 nLDERR_C 108 DT_C1+ D-GND 28 28 D-GND
DT_C1- 109 MSET_C_AK1 50 50 MSET_C_AK1 109 DT_C1- VSYNC_M_N 29 29 VSYNC_M_N
DT_C2+ 110 P4_M_AK2 51 51 P4_M_AK2 110 DT_C2+ VSYNC_M_P 30 30 VSYNC_M_P
DT_C2- 111 P3_M_AK2 52 52 P3_M_AK2 111 DT_C2- VSYNC_C_P 31 31 VSYNC_C_P
DT_M3+ 112 nINT_M_AK2 53 53 nINT_M_AK2 112 DT_M3+ VSYNC_C_N 32 32 VSYNC_C_N
DT_M3- 113 MSET_M_AK2 54 54 MSET_M_AK2 113 DT_M3- D-GND 33 33 D-GND
DT_M4+ 114 P4_M_AK1 55 55 P4_M_AK1 114 DT_M4+ D-GND 34 34 D-GND
DT_M4- 115 P3_M_AK1 56 56 P3_M_AK1 115 DT_M4- VSYNC_K_N 35 35 VSYNC_K_N
DT_M1+ 116 nINT_M_AK1 57 57 nINT_M_AK1 116 DT_M1+ VSYNC_K_P 36 36 VSYNC_K_P
DT_M1- 117 nLDERR_M 58 58 nLDERR_M 117 DT_M1- D-GND 37 37 D-GND
DT_M2+ 118 MSET_M_AK1 59 59 MSET_M_AK1 118 DT_M2+ D-GND 38 38 D-GND
DT_M2- 119 D-GND 60 60 D-GND 119 DT_M2- D-GND 39 39 D-GND
#P0_Y_AK1 120 120 #P0_Y_AK1 D-GND 40 40 D-GND
DF50-40DP-1V(51) DF50S-40DS-1C DF50S-40DS-1C DF50-40DP-1V(51)
SCN MOTHER PWB CN13 CN7
LVDS PWB
CN1 CN12 1 41
FH48-50S-0.5SV FH48-50S-0.5SV GND GND
2 40
NLCD_DISP NLCD_DISP
50 50 3 39
GND GND EFI_READY LCD_SEL
49 49 4 38
GND GND TPL/LCD_SEL TP_SEL
48 48 5 37
GND GND GND GND CN4
47 47 6 36
GND GND LCD_DATA3+ LCD_DATA3+
46 46 7 35
GND GND LCD_DATA3- LCD_DATA3- 1
45 45 8 34 GND
GND GND GND GND 2
44 44 9 33 GND
GND GND LCD_CLK+ LCD_CLK+ 3
43 43 10 32 GND
GND GND LCD_CLK- LCD_CLK- 4
42 42 11 31 GND
GND GND GND GND 5
41 41 12 30 GND
GND GND LCD_DATA2+ LCD_DATA2+ 6
40 40 13 29 GND
CN_AFE_SDO CN_AFE_SDO LCD_DATA2- LCD_DATA2- 7
39 39 14 28 GND
AFE_SDTO CN_AFE_SDI GND GND 8
AFE_SCLK
38 38
AFE_SCLK LCD_DATA1+
15 27
LCD_DATA1+
GND
9
LCD module
37 37 16 26 GND
AFE_CS AFE_CS LCD_DATA1- LCD_DATA1- 10
36 36 17 25 GND
NRES_CCDAD NRES_CCDAD GND GND 11
35 35 18 24 GND
GND GND LCD_DATA0+ LCD_DATA0+ 12 30
34 34 19 23 GND GND
A3.3V A3.3V LCD_DATA0- LCD_DATA0- 13 29
33 33 20 22 REVERSE REVERSE
A3.3V A3.3V GND GND 14 28
32 32 21 21 SEL6/8 SEL6/8
A3.3V A3.3V /CCFT /CCFT 15 27
31 31 22 20 GND GND
A3.3V A3.3V /XL(X2) INT 16 26
30 30 23 19 TX_OUT3+ RX3+
A3.3V A3.3V YH(Y2) TTP_RES 17 25
29 29 24 18 TX_OUT3- RX3-
A3.3V A3.3V /YL(Y1) SCL 18 24
28 28 25 17 GND GND
GND GND XH(X1) SDA 19 23
27 27 26 16 TCLK+ RXCLK+
A5V A5V GND GND 20 22
26 26 27 15 TCLK- RXCLK-
A5V A5V 5V_LVDS NC 21 21
25 25 28 14 GND GND
24 24 29 13 TX_OUT2+ RX2+
GND GND 5V_LVDS NC 23 19
23 23 30 12 TX_OUT2- RX2-
22 22 31 11 GND GND
A10V A10V GND GND 25 17
21 21 32 10 TX_OUT1+ RX1+
B. Operation panel, Scanner
GND GND NC GND 26 16

20 20 33 9 TX_OUT0- RX1-
CN_TA_N CN_TA_N 24V_LVDS 24V_LVDS 27 15
19 19 34 8 GND GND
CN_TA_P CN_TA_P 24V_LVDS 24V_LVDS 28 14
18 18 35 7 TX_OUT0+ RX0+
GND GND 24V_LVDS 24V_LVDS 29 13
17 17 36 6 TX_OUT0- RX0-
CN_TB_N CN_TB_N 24V_LVDS 24V_LVDS 30 12
16 16 37 5 GND GND
CN_TB_P CN_TB_P GND GND 31 11
15 15 38 4 GND GND
GND GND GND GND 32 10
14 14 39 3 3.3V VCC
CN_TC_N CN_TC_N GND GND 33 9
13 13 40 2 3.3V VCC
CN_TC_P CN_TC_P GND GND 34 8
12 12 41 1 GND GND
GND GND GND GND 35 7
11 11 GND GND
CN_TCLK_N CN_TCLK_N 36 6
10 10 FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE-41HL FI-RE41HLS-M FI-RE41S-VF CCFT_OUT DIMMING
CN_TCLK_P CN_TCLK_P 37 5
9 9 DISP_OUT ENLED
GND GND 38 4
8 8 12V 12V
CN_TD_N CN_TD_N 39 3
7 7 12V 12V
CN_TD_P CN_TD_P 40 2
6 6 12V 12V
GND GND 41 1
5 5 12V 12V
CN_TE_N CN_TE_N
4 4
CN_TE_P CN_TE_P CN7 FI-RNE41SZ-HF FI-RE41HL FI-X30HL
3 3
SCNCNT_SE2 SCNCNT_SE2
2 2 41
SCNCNT_SE1 SCNCNT_SE1 GND
1 1 40
GND GND NLCD_DISP
39
LCD_SEL
38
TP_SEL
37
GND
36
LCD_DATA3+
35
LCD_DATA3-
CCD PWB 34
GND
33
LCD_CLK+
32
LCD_CLK-
31
GND
30
LCD_DATA2+
29
LCD_DATA2-
28
GND
27
LCD_DATA1+
26
LCD_DATA1-
25
GND
24
LCD_DATA0+
23
LCD_DATA0-
22
GND
21
/CCFT
20
INT
EFI-IF PWB 19
TTP_RES
18
SCL
17
SDA
CN2 16
GND
1 3 15 CN3
NC
MHPS
GND
2 2
MHPS
GND
14
NC 1 13
Touch panel
3 1 13 GND GND
5VN+R 5VN+R NC 2 12
MHPS 12 TPUSB_D- TPUSB_D-
173977-3 173977-3 NC 3 11
292132-3 11 TPUSB_D+ TPUSB_D+
GND 4 10
10 GND GND
GND 5 9
9 (NC) (NC)
24V_LVDS 6 8
8 (NC) (NC)
24V_LVDS 7 7
7 5V_MTP 5V_MTP
24V_LVDS 8 6
6 INT INT
S6B-PH-K-S 24V_LVDS 9 5
5 SDA SDA
1 CN3 GND 10 4
MIM_XB 4 SCL SCL
2 4 GND 11 3
NC MIM_XB 3 I2C/USB_SEL I2C/USB_SEL
3 3 GND 12 2
MIM_B MIM_B 2 MTP_RES MTP_RES
4 2 GND 13 1
MIM_A MIM_A 1 GND GND
5 1 GND
NC MIM_XA
MIM MIM_XA
6 FI-RE41S-VF 1-292227-3 1-353908-3 502380-1300 502386-1370
179228-4 FI-RE41HLS-M
292132-4
PHR-6

CN5
CN7
1
1 GND
NC 2
2 NPOW_SW
EFI_KEY 3
3 NHM_KEY
POW_L_G 4
4 NWU_KEY
WU_LED 5
5 EFI_SW
SEG0(HM_LED) 6
6 WU_LED
NC 7
LED PWB 7 POW_LED
NC 8
8 SEG0(HM_LED)
NC 9
1 9 EFI_LED
LED_ANODE GND 10
2 10 5VO
NC
3
LED DRV PWB GND
11
11
12
/BZR
1
CN1
LED_CATHODE NC
12 GND GND
/BZR CN1 2
13 NC
502386-0370 502380-0300 CN2 CN1 CN1 5VO 1-353908-2 1-292230-2 3
14 NPOW SW POWER KEY PWB
1 1 5 1-353908-3 GND
LED_ANODE 24VPD 24VPD 13 DF13-3S-1.25C(41)
2 2 4 NPOW SW DF13C-3P-1.25V(21)
GND 24VPD 24VPD 12
3 3 3 NHM KEY
LED_CATHODE LAMP LAMP 14 11
4 4 2 NC NWU KEY
LED_ANODE GND GND 15 10
5 5 1 nHOME_KEY NC
GND GND GND 16 9
6 NC EFI SW
LED_CATHODE 17 8
5597-05CPB7F GND WU LED
5597-05APB7F 18 7
440129-6 5V POW LED
6
LED PWB 1
440055-6
NC
19
20
SEG0
5
LED_ANODE NC EFI LED
2 21 4
NC NC 5VO
3 22 3
LED_CATHODE NC BZR
23 2
nWU_KEY GND
502380-0300 24 1
502386-0370 NC GND
25 CN1
SEG1
26 1-292227-4 1-353908-4
nPWRSW 10
WU LED
1-353908-3 9
2-292208-6 5VO
2-353294-6 8
POW LED
7
NC
CN14 6
GND
CN4 5
7 NWU KEY
1 1 NC 4
6 1
OCSW
2 2
/OCSW CN_PDSEL0
5 2
CN_PDSEL0 3
NHM KEY
EFI SW
HM-KEY PWB
GND GND CN_PDSEL1 CN_PDSEL1 2
3 3 4 3 SEG0(HM_LED)
5VN+R 5V CN_PDSEL2 CN_PDSEL2 1
OCSW 4 3 4 EFI LED
24V +5V +5V
179228-3 5 2 5
/SIZE_LED1 CN_PD CN_PD
ORS-PD DF13-10S-1.25C(41) DF13C-10P-1.25V(21)
6 1 6
/SIZE_LED2 GND GND
179228-6 179228-7 179228-6
292132-6 292132-7 292250-6
24V
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
GND
ORS LED PWB
SRA-01T-3.2
DSPF original upper limit detect
3
5V_SPED1
2
GND
1
SCN Mother PWB DSPF CCD PWB CCN10 SPED1 SPED1
CN9 CN6 12
5V_SPED1 173977-3
1 1 CN4 CN1 13
GND GND GND
2 2 1 1 14 DSPF original random detect
NCTS_SCN nRST_DSPF GND GND D_SPED1
C. DSPF
3 3 2 2 15 3
DSDATA_3P DSDATA_3P AFE_SDO AFE_SDO 5V_SPRDMD 5V_SPRDMD
4 4 3 3 16 2
NRTS_SCN nCTS_DSPF AFE_SDIO AFE_SDIO GND GND
5 5 4 4 17 1
DSDATA_3N DSDATA_3N AFE_SCLK AFE_SCLK D_RANDOM SPRDMD
6 6 5 5 18 SPRDMD
RXD_SCN TXD_DSPF RES_CCDAD RES_CCDAD /D_SPFC
7 7 6 6 19 173977-3
GND GND CCD_SEL CCD_SEL +24V
8 8 7 7 20
TXD_SCN RXD_DSPF GND GND (NC) DSPF paper feed clutch
9 9 8 8 21
DSCLK_P DSCLK_P A3.3V A3.3V (NC)
10 10 9 9 22 2
GND GND A3.3V A3.3V (NC) /D_SPFC
11 11 10 10 1-353293-1 1
DSCLK_N DSCLK_N A3.3V A3.3V +24V
12 12 11 11
DSPF_INT DSPF_INT A3.3V A3.3V SPFC
13 13 12 12
GND GND A3.3V A3.3V 173977-2
14 14 13 13
GND GND GND GND
15 15 14 14 DSPF upper door open/close detect
DSDATA_2P DSDATA_2P A5V A5V
16 16 15 15 3
RES RES A5V A5V CCN10 5V_SCOV
17 17 16 16 2
DSDATA_2N DSDATA_2N A5V A5V GND
18 18 17 17 1 1
DSPFUP DSPFUP GND GND (NC) SCOV
19 19 18 18 2 SCOV
GND GND A10V A10V (NC)
20 20 19 19 3 173977-3
TXD_DSPF_LOG D_CPU_TXD A10V A10V 5V_SCOV
21 21 20 20 4
DSDATA_1P DSDATA_1P GND GND GND
22 22 21 21 5 DSPF paper feed tray upper limit detect
SPED SPED TA_N TA_N D_SCOV
23 23 22 22 6 3
DSDATA_1N DSDATA_1N TA_P TA_P 5V_STUD 5V_STUD
24 24 23 23 7 2
GND nLVDS_STBY GND GND GND GND
25 25 24 24 8 1
GND GND TB_N TB_N D_STUD STUD
26 26 25 25 9 STUD
NC/(RXD_DSPF_LOG) NC TB_P TB_P 5V_SPPD1
27 27 26 26 10 173977-3
DSDATA_0P DSDATA_0P GND GND GND
28 28 27 27 11
NPOF nPOF TC_N TC_N D_SPPD1
29 29 28 28 DSPF paper pass detect 1
DSDATA_0N DSDATA_0N TC_P TC_P 1-353293-1
30 30 29 29 3
GND GND GND GND 2-292208-2 5V_SPPD1
30 30 2
DF50S-30DS-1C DF50S-30DS-1C TCLK_N TCLK_N GND
DF50-30DP-1V(51) DF50-30DP-1V(51) 31 31 1
TCLK_P TCLK_P SPPD1
32 32
GND
33 33
GND
173977-3
SPPD1
TD_N TD_N
34 34
CN6 CN5 TD_P TD_P
35 35
GND GND
1 14 36 36
GND GND TE_N TE_N
2 13 37 37
GND GND TE_P TE_P
3 12 38 38
24V 24V GND GND 292254-3
4 11 39 39 DSPF paper pass detect 2
24V 24V AFE_CS AFE_CS
5 10 40 40 3 1 3
24V 24V GND GND GND GND
6 9 2 2 2
24V 24V SPPD2 SPPD2
7 8 FH48-40S-0.5SV FH48-40S-0.5SV 1 3 1
12V 12V 5V_SPPD2 5V_SPPD2
8 7
5V
9 6
5V 173977-3 173977-3
173977-3
SPPD2
5VO 5VO
10 5
5VO_DUTY 5V_SPF CN1001
11 4 DSPF paper pass detect 3
3.3V 3.3V
12 3 1 3
3.3V 3.3V SPFFAN_+V CN1 5V_SPPD3
13 2 2 2
GND GND SPFFAN_GND GND
14 1 3 16 1
GND GND SPFFAN_SIG GND SPPD3
1-353293-4 1-353293-4
SPFFAN 17 SPPD3
SPPD2
179228-3 18 173977-3
1-292207-4 1-292207-4 292132-3 5V_SPPD2
19
5V_SPPD3
20
GND
21 DSPF paper pass detect 4
SPPD3
22 3
5V_SPPD4 5V_SPPD4
23 2
GND GND
24 1
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 SPPD4 SPPD4
25 SPPD4
5V_SPPD5
26 173977-3
GND
27
SPPD5
28
5V_SLCOV
29
GND
DSPF control PWB 30
SLCOV
3 292254-3 DSPF paper pass detect 5
5V_STLD 1-353293-5
2 3 1 3
GND 5V_SPPD5 5V_SPPD5
1 2 2 2
STLD GND GND
1 3 1
STLD 173977-3
173977-3
SPPD5 SPPD5 SPPD5
173977-3 173977-3
3
5V_SPF
2 DSPF lower door open/close detect
GND
1
SPED2 SPED2 CCN13 2
173977-3 GND
1 1
5V_STLD ROCD
2
GND
3
D_STLD 173977-2
SLCOV
4
OPTION 5V_SPF
5
292254-4 GND
6 DSPF open/close detect
D_SPED2
1 4 7 3
+24V +24V 5V_SOCD
2 3 8 2
/D_STMPS /D_STMPS GND
3 2 9 1
D_STSET D_STSET SOCD
4 1 10
STMPS 179228-4
GND
173977-4
11
GND
173977-3
SOCD
5V_SPOD
12
ARSU1 GND DSPF transport roller clutch
13
D_SPOD
2
1-353293-3 /D_STRC
1-292207-3 1
+24V
3 1
5V_SPOD 5V_SOCD
GND
2
GND
2
173977-2
STRC
1 3

D_SPOD SOCD
SPOD 4 DSPF delivery motor
173977-3 /D_STRC
5
+24V
6 7
SPUFM_LD SPUFM_LD
7 6
SPUFM_CW SPUFM_CW
8 5
SPUFM_BRAKE SPUFM_BRAKE
9 4
SPUFM_CLK SPUFM_CLK
10 3
PGND (NC)
11 2
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
+24V
12 1
PGND
SPUFM
/D_STRRC +24V
13
+24V
14 173977-7 292132-7
/D_SRRC
15
CCN8 +24V
1 1-353293-5 DSPF first resist roller clutch
/D_LUMBOUT /D_LUMBOUT 3-292208-0
2 2
/D_LUMAOUT /D_LUMAOUT /D_STRRC
3 1
SLUM D_LUMBOUT D_LUMBOUT +24V
4
D_LUMAOUT D_LUMAOUT
+24V
5
+24V 173977-2
STRRC
PHR-5
440054-5
DSPF second resist roller clutch
2
/D_SRRC
1
+24V
CCN9
173977-2
SRRC
4 1 DSPF original length detect (short)
/D_SPUMBOUT /D_SPOMBOUT
3 2 3
/D_SPUMAOUT /D_SPOMAOUT 5V_SPLS1
2 3 2
SPOM D_SPUMBOUT D_SPOMBOUT GND
1 4 1
D_SPUMAOUT D_SPOMAOUT D_SPLS1
173977-4 173977-4 SPLS1
292132-4 CCN12 173977-3
1
5V_SPLS1
2
GND 292254-3 DSPF original width detect
3
D_SPLS1
CN1 CN7 4 3 1 1
GND GND GND
5 2 2 2
1 1 D_SPWS D_SPWS D_SPWS
LED_ANODE LED_ANODE 6 1 3 3
2 2 +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V
GND GND 7
LED_CATHODE/
3 3
LED_CATHODE/ D7
5V_SPLS2
8 173977-3
179228-3
SPWS
LED PWB 4 GND
502380-0300 LED_ANODE/ 9
502386-0370 5 D_SPLS2
GND
6
LED_CATHODE 353293-9 DSPF original length detect (long)
292207-9
179228-6 3
292132-6 5V_SPLS2
2
GND
CN1 1
D_SPLS2 SPLS2
1
LED_ANODE 173977-3
2
GND
3
LED PWB LED_CATHODE/
502386-0370 502380-0300
Cassette 4 rear edge detect
2-292253-2 Tandem tray 1 lift up motor
GND 1 (NC) CN3 1 GND
GND 2 16 DGND
C4SS1 3 15 C4SS1 2 T1LUM T1LUM
C4SS2 4 14 C4SS2 173977-2
C4SS C4SS3 5 13 C4SS3
CN2 Tandem tray 1 PWB
C4SS4 6 12 C4SS4
11 DGND DGND 12
292250-6 173977-6
10 C3SS1 T1LUM# 11 1-292254-0
9 C3SS2 5VLMPD 10 1 5VNPD 10 1 5VNPD
Cassette 3 rear edge detect 8 C3SS3 DGND 9 2 GND 9 2 GND
7 C3SS4 T1LUD 8 3 T1LUD 8 3 T1LUD T1 PWB
GND 1 (NC) T1PED 7 4 T1PED 7 4 T1PED
6 DGND
GND 2 DGND 6 5 GND 6 179228-4
5 C4LUM# 292250-4
C3SS1 3 T1SPD 5 6 T1SPD 5
4 DGND
C3SS2 4 5VLMPD 4 7 5VNPD 4
C3SS 3 C3LUM#
C3SS3 5 DGND 3 8 GND 3
C3SS4 6 (NC) 2 (NC)
T2SPD 2 9 T2SPD 2 Tandem tray 1 paper remain detect
(NC) 1 (NC)
292250-6 173977-6 5VLMPD 1 10 5VNPD 1
1-353293-6 3 GND
1-353293-2 1-179228-0 2 T1SPD
Cassette 4 lift up motor 1-173977-0
(NC) 32 (NC) 1 5VNPD
24VM4 24
P-GND 1 31 5VLMPD
/T1PUS 23 179228-3
T1SPD
C4LUM 2 30 C4SPD Tandem tray 2 paper remain detect
C4LUM 29 DGND 5VLMPD 22
2-292253-2 173977-2
28 5VLMPD DGND 21 3 GND
Cassette 3 lift up motor 27 C3SPD T2LUD 20 2 T2SPD
26 DGND T2PED 19 1 5VNPD T2SPD
P-GND 1 5VLMPD 18
25 /PTRC1 179228-3
C3LUM C3LUM 2 24 24VM4 T1PPD1 17
2-292253-2 173977-2 23 /C4PUC DGND 16 Tandem tray 1 paper feed solenoid
22 24VM4 5VLMPD 15 292254-2
Cassette 4 paper remain detect 21 /C3PUC T1PPD2 14 1 24V3 2
5VNPD 1 DGND 13 2 T1PUS 1
20 24VM4
C4SPD 2 1-353293-2 173977-2 179228-2
T1PUS
19 C4PWD 2-292208-4
D-GND 3
18 DGND
C4SPD 173977-3 17 VREF
Tandem tray 2 PWB
Cassette 3 paper remain detect
5VNPD 1 1-353293-6 3-292208-2 1 5VNPD
C3SPD 2 2 GND
C3SPD D-GND 3 3 T2LUD
4 T2PED
Paper feed vertical transport clutch lower
173977-3
292250-4
T2 PWB
292254-2 173977-4
2 PTRC1 1
1 24V4 2
PTRC1 179228-2 173977-2
Interface pass Unit
D. Cassette, Paper feed, Registration
Cassette 4 paper feed clutch 292254-2 292254-6 Tandem tray 1 enter paper detect
2 C4PUC 1
PCU PWB 1 5VNPD 6 1 5VNPD
1 24V4 2 2 T1PPD1 5 2 T1PPD1
C4PUC 179228-2 173977-2 3 GND 4 3 GND T1PPD1
Cassette 3 paper feed clutch 4 5VNPD 3 173977-3
292254-2 5 T1PPD2 2
2 C3PUC 1 6 GND 1
1 24V4 2 Tandem tray 1 transport detect
C3PUC 179228-2 173977-2 173977-6 173977-6 1 5VNPD
Cassette 4 paper width detect 292254-3 2 T1PPD2
BR 3 C4PWD 1 3 GND T1PPD2
GY 2 GND 2 173977-3
C4PWD BL 1 VREF 3
179228-3
173977-3
Cassette 4 enter paper detect

5VNPD 1
C4PFD 2
C4PFD GND 3
173977-3
CN6 Waste toner motor
Cassette 4 upper limit detect (NC) 30 (NC)
5VNPD 1 (NC) 29 (NC) 1-292254-3 292254-7 B8B-ZR
C4LUD 2 1-292215-1 CN5 24VM4 28 1 24V4 13 1 24V4 7 8 24V4
C4LUD GND 3 11 5VNPD 1 11 5VLMPD DGND 27 2 GND 12 2 GND 6 7 GND
173977-3 10 C4PFD 10 C4PFD 5VLM1 26 3 5VN 11 3 5VN 5 6 5VN
2
Cassette 4 paper empty detect 9 GND 3 9 DGND /WTM_D 25 4 WTM_D 10 4 WTM_D 4 5 WTM_D
5VNPD 1 8 5VNPD 4 8 5VLMPD /WTM_CK 24 5 WTM_CK 9 5 WTM_CK 3 4 WTM_CK WTM
C4PED 2 7 C4LUD 5 7 C4LUD DGND 23 6 GND(WTM_CW) 8 6 GND(WTM_CW) 2 3 GND(WTM_CW)
C4PED GND 3 6 GND 6 6 DGND WTM_LD 22 7 WTM_LD 7 7 WTM_LD 1 2 WTM_LD
173977-3 5 5VNPD 7 5 5VLMPD 5VLM1 21 8 5VN 6 (NC) 1 (NC)
173977-7 179228-7
4 C4PED 8 4 C4PED DSW_CS 20 9 DSW_CS 5 ZHR-8
Cassette 4 paper feed solenoid 3 GND 9 3 DGND DGND 19 10 GND 4
292254-2
2 24V4 1 2 24V4 10 2 24VM4 5VLM1 18 11 5VN 3
1 C4PUS 2 1 C4PUS 11 1 /C4PUS DSW_RL 17 12 DSW_RL 2
C4PUS 179228-2 173977-2 1-353293-1 1-353293-1 DGND 16 13 GND 1
1-353293-1
1-173977-3 1-173977-3
Cassette 3 enter paper detect 1-292215-1 1-353293-5
5VNPD 1 11 5VNPD 1 22 5VLMPD Transport cover open/close detect
5VLMPD 15
C3PFD 2 10 C3PFD 2 21 C3PFD 1 5VN
LPPD 14
GND 3 9 GND 3 20 DGND 2 DSW_CS
DGND 13
C3PFD 173977-3 8 5VNPD 4 19 5VLMPD
5VLMPD 12
3 GND DSW_CS
7 C3LUD 5 18 C3LUD 173977-3
Cassette 3 upper limit detect T2PPD1 11
6 GND 6 17 DGND
5VNPD 1 DGND 10 Right lower door open/close detect
5 5VNPD 7 16 5VLMPD
C3LUD 2 5VLM1 9 1 5VN
4 C3PED 8 15 C3PED

GND 3 TNDSET 8 2 DSW_RL
C3LUD 3 GND 9 14 DGND
173977-3 DGND 7 3 GND
2 24V4 13 24VM4
Cassette 3 paper empty detect 1 C3PUS
10
11 12 /C3PUS
5VLM1 6 173977-3
DSW-RL
WTFD 5
5VNPD 1 1-353293-1 1-353293-1
1-353293-1 2-292208-2 DGND 4 292254-3 LCC enter paper detect
C3PED 2
WTBSET 3 1 5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD
C3PED GND 3
173977-3 DGND 2 2 LPPD 2 2 LPPD
5VLM1+R 1 3 GND 1 3 GND LPPD
Cassette 3 paper feed solenoid 292254-2 179228-3
3-292208-0 1-353908-5 173977-3 173977-3
2 24V4 1
1 C3PUS 2
C3PUS 179228-2 173977-2
Process control shutter solenoid 292254-2
2 24VM4 1 292254-3 Tandem tray 2 transport detect
1 /PCSS 2 CN16 1 5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD
2 T2PPD1 2 2 T2PPD1
PCSS 179228-2 173977-2 2-292215-0 22 (NC)
3 GND 1 3 GND
Resist sensor rear 20 24VM4 1 21 24VM4 T2PPD1
19 /PCSS 2 20 /PCSS 179228-3 173977-3 173977-3
5VLM6 1 18 5VLM6 3 19 5VLM6
D-GND 2 17 DGND 4 18 DGND
REGS_R_LED# 3 16 REGS_R_LED# 17 REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R/ REGS_R 4 15 REGS_R
5
6 16 REGS_R
PCS_R 5 14 PCS_R 7 15 PCS_R Tandem tray 1,2 open/close detect signal
PCS_R 173977-5 13 5VLM6 8 14 5VLM6 1 5VN
12 DGND 9 13 DGND 2 TNDSET
Resist sensor center 11 REGS_C_LED# 10 12 REGS_C_LED# 3 GND
1-353293-1
10 REGS_C 11 179228-3
TNDSET
5VLM6 1 9 PCS_C 12
D-GND 2 8 5VLM6 13 Waste toner full detect
REGS_C_LED# 3 7 DGND 14
REGS_C/ REGS_C 4 6 REGS_F_LED# 15
1 5VN
2 WTFD
PCS_C 5 5 REGS_F 16 3 GND WTFD
PCS_C 173977-5 4 PCS_F 17 179228-3
3 PTCCHPD 18 11 REGS_C
Resist sensor front 2 DGND 19 10 PCS_C Waste toner box sensor
1 5VLMPD+R 20 9 5VLM6 1 WTBSET
5VLM6 1 2-353293-0 2-353293-0 8 DGND 2 GND
D-GND 2 7 REGS_F_LED# 3 5VLM1+R WTBSET
REGS_F_LED# 3
REGS_F/ REGS_F 4
6
5
REGS_F
PCS_F
179228-3
PCS_F 5 4 PTCCHPD
PCS_F 173977-5 3 DGND
2 5VLMPD+R
PTC cleaner home position detect (NC) 1 (NC)
PTCCHPD 1 1-353293-1 2-292208-2
DGND 2
PTCCHPD 5VLMPD+R 3
173977-3
QR/P4-40*-C(01) 292215-9 292254-3 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor F
1 FPRFM2_V 1 9 FPRFM1_V 1 3 FPRFM1_V 1
2 FPRFM2_LD 2 8 FPRFM1_LD 2 2 FPRFM1_LD 2
3 MPGS 3 7 D-GND 3 1 D-GND 3 FPRFM_F
4 24V4 4 173977-3 179228-3
5 MPFS 5
PCU PWB 6 24V4 6 292254-3 Fusing pressure roller cooling fan motor R
CN12 (1/2) 7 +24V 7 6 FPRFM2_V 4 3 FPRFM2_V 1
5VO+R 1 8 +24V 8 5 FPRFM2_LD 5 2 FPRFM2_LD 2
PRTPD 2 9 +24V 9 4 D-GND 6 1 D-GND 3 FPRFM_R
5VLMPD 3 10 +24V 10 173977-3 179228-3
5VLM4 4 11 5VN 11 ADU transport way detect 2
DGND 5 12 GND 12 3 5V_LED 7 3 5V_LED
SIN3 6 13 SIN3 13 2 D-GND 8 2 D-GND
<SELIN1> 7 14 SELIN1 14 1 APPD2 9 1 APPD2
APPD2
<SELIN2> 8 15 SELIN2 15 353908-9 353293-9 173977-3
<SELIN3> 9 16 SELIN3 16
APPD1 10 17 APPD1 17
APPD2 11 18 APPD2 18
MPWD 12 19 POD3 19
FPRFM2_LD 13 20 5VNPD 20
POD3 14 21 FPRFM1_V 21
MPFD 15 22 MPFD 22
ADUFM_F_V 16 23 MPWD 23
ADUFM_R_V 17 24 ADUM2_B 24
/ADUFM_F_CNT 18 25 ADUM2_A 25
/ADUFM_R_CNT 19 26 ADUM2_XB 26 ADU gate solenoid
1-353908-9 27 ADUM2_XA 27 292254-2
28 ADUM1_B 28 1 24V4 2
24VM4 35 29 ADUM1_A 29 2 /ADUGS 1 ADUGS
24VM4 34 30 ADUM1_XB 30 179228-2 179228-2
24VM4 33 31 ADUM1_XA 31
FPRFM1_V 32 32 ADUGS 32 292215-8 292254-4 ADU transport cooling fan motor F
FPRFM2_V 31 33 24V4 33 8 ADUFM1_V 1 4 ADUFMV 1
/MPFS 30 34 PRTPD 34 7 /ADUFM_F_CNT 2 3 /ADUFM_F_CNT 2
/MPGS 29 35 5VO+R 35 6 D-GND 3 2 D-GND 3 ADUFM_F
/ADUGS 28 36 /ADUFM_R_CNT 36 5 ADFM1_LD 4 1 ADFM1_LD 4
TBFM_V 38 37 ADUFM2_V 37 173977-4 179228-4
TBFM_LD 37 38 /ADUFM_F_CNT 38
DGND 36 39 ADUFM1_V 39 292254-4 ADU transport cooling fan motor R
E. Right door, Manual paper feed
PTC_ERR 27 40 FG 40 4 ADUFM2_V 5 4 ADUFMV 1

2TC_ERR 26 S P 3 /ADUFM_R_CNT 6 3 /ADUFM_R_CNT 2
HY_REM_TC2 25 SRA-21T-4 SRA-01T-3.2 2 D-GND 7 2 D-GND 3
/TC2_LD#
/TC2_CLK#
24
23
1 ADFM2_LD 8 1 ADFM2_LD 4
ADUFM_R
353908-8 353293-8 173977-4 179228-4
/TC2_DATA# 22
DGND 21
INT24V2 20
3-292208-8 1-353908-9 Toner bottle cooling fan motor
292254-3
3 TBFM_V 1
2 TBFM_LD 2
1 GND 3 TBFM
179228-3 179228-3
SMP-06V-NC
1 MPLD1 1
2 D-GND 2
3 5V_LED 3
4 5VN 4
1-292215-2 5 MPWD 5
12 ADUM1_XA 1 6 D-GND 6
11 ADUM1_A 2
10 ADUM1_B 3
9 ADUM1_XB 4
8 +24V 5
7 +24V 6
6 ADUM2_XA 7 R-DOOR
5 ADUM2_A 8
4 ADUM2_B 9
3 ADUM2_XB 10 I/F PWB
2 +24V 11
1 +24V 12
CN1
1-353293-2 1-353908-2
1 5VN
2 GND
3 SIN3
4 SELIN1 CN3
5 SELIN2 (NC) 32 (NC)
6 SELIN3 TH_M 31 (NC)
7 APPD1 D-GMD 30
8 APPD2 HUM_D 29 (NC)
(NC) 9 ADUD3 5VN 28 (NC)
10 POD3 5V_LED 27 (NC)
(NC) 11 MPFD D-GND 26
(NC) 12 FAX_D FPRFM1_LD 25
(NC) 13 MPWD 5V_LED 24 (NC)
(NC) 14 TH_M D-GND 23
(NC) 15 HUM_D ADFM2_LD 22
16 5VNPD D-GND 21 BU10P-TZ-S

1-1470107-6 MPWD 20 (NC) 1 MPED 10
1-1470108-6
5VN 19 2 D-GND 9
5V_LED 18 3 5V_LED 8
D-GND 17 4 24V4 7
MPLD1 16 5 /MPFS 6
5V_LED 15 (NC) 6 5V_LED 5
D-GND 14 7 D-GND 4
ADFM1_LD 13 8 MPFD 3
5V_LED 12 9 /MPGS 2
D-GND 11 10 24V4 1
MPFD 10 (NC) CZHR-10V-S
5V_LED 9
D-GND 8
MPED 7
5V_LED 6
BU03P-TZ-S
D-GND 5
3 5VO+R 1
APPD2 4
ADU motor 2 (NC) 2 D-GND 2
5V_LED 3
(NC) 1 PRTPD 3
D-GND 2 CZHR-03V-S
292250-6 FAX_D 1 (NC)
ADUM2_/A 1
INT24VI 2 3-1470108-2 3-1470107-2
ADUM2_/B 3 292215-3 ADU transport way detect 1
ADUM2 ADUM2_A 4 3 5V_LED 1 3 5V_LED
INT24VI 5 2 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
ADUM2_B 6 1 APPD1 3 1 APPD1 APPD1
353293-3 173977-3
179228-6 353908-3
CN2
ADU motor 1 (NC) 16 (NC) ADU transport open/colse detect
5V_LED 15 (NC) 3 5V_LED
292250-6 D-GND 14 2 D-GND
ADUM1_/A 1
APPD3 13 (NC) 1 DSW_ADU DSW_ADU
INT24VI 2 179228-3
5V_LED 12
ADUM1_/B 3
D-GND 11
ADUM1_A 4
ADUM1 APPD1 10 MX-TR14 Right tray delivery detect
INT24VI 5
5V_LED 9
ADUM1_B 6 3 5V_LED
D-GND 8
179228-6 2 D-GND
DSW_ADU 7 BU06P-TZ-S
1 POD3 POD3
5V_LED 6 6 5V_LED 1
D-GND 5 5 D-GND 2 03XR-6H-P
POD3 4 4 POD3 3 Right tray delivery full detect
5V_LED 3 3 5V_LED 4 3 5V_LED
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3 TFD3
CZHR-06V-S
1-1470108-6 1-1470107-6 06CZ-6H 03XR-6H-P
Right door Unit Second Transfer Unit
DRIVER PWB DF11-6DS-2C

+DF11-6DP-SP2(05)
CN4 (2/2) 292254-6
GND
GND
GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
2TBMCM_A 1 1 2TBMCM_A 6
2TBMCM_XA 2 2 2TBMCM_XA 5 1 3 5 2 4 6
F. Secondary Transfer Unit
2TBMCM_B 3 3 2TBMCM_B 4
2TBMCM_XB 4 4 2TBMCM_XB 3
+24V 5 5 +24V 2
+24V 6 6 +24V 1
1-292207-4 1-353908-4 179228-6 179228-6
1-179228-2 1-179228-2 Second transfer belt

1 5VNPD 12 meandering detector R
2 GND 11 1 5VNPD
3 2TBMD_R 10 2 2TBMD_R 2TBMD_R
PCU PWB 4 2TBMD_F 9 3 GND
5 2TBMD_HP 8 179228-3
CN36 6 GND 7
7 2TBMCM_A 6
5VLM2 1
8 2TBMCM_/A 5 Second transfer belt
2TBMD_R 2
9 2TBMCM_B 4 meandering detector F
2TBMD_F 3
10 2TBMCM_/B 3 1 5VNPD
DGND 4
11 +24V 2 2 2TBMD_F
2TBMD_HP 5 2TBMD_F
12 +24V 1 3 GND
DGND 6
292207-6 353908-6 1-292254-2 179228-3
QR/P4-12*-C(01)
1 5VNPD 1
2 2TBMD_R 2
3 2TBMD_HP 3 Second transfer cam
4 2TBMCM_A 4 detect switch
5 2TBMCM_/A 5 1 2TBMD_HP
2 GND 2TBMD_HP

6 +24V 6
7 GND 7 179228-2
8 2TBMD_F 8
9 GND 9
10 2TBMCM_B 10
11 2TBMCM_/B 11
12 +24V 12 Second transfer belt meandering
S P compensation motor
292132-6
1 2TBMCM_A
2 2TBMCM_B
3 +24V
4 +24V 2TBMCM
5 2TBMCM_/A
6 2TBMCM_/B
179228-6
CONTACT PED CIS PWB 2-292216-6 CN14
PCU PWB 292254-4 292254-2
Manual paper feed clutch
1 (NC) 13 (NC) 1 (NC) 4 MPUC 1 2 MPUC 1
IMAGE SENSOR CN5 2 (NC) 12 (NC) 2 (NC) 3 24V4 2 1 24V4 2
CN3
PW23-RD007L2-3 CN7
+24V-PS 9
GND2 8
3
4
24V4
GND
11
10
3 24VM4
4 DGND
2 LCCC
1 24V4
3
4
179228-2 179228-2
MPUC
SIG 1 1 GND FRM_CIS 7 5 FRM_OCACIS 9 5 FRM_OCACIS 179228-4 179228-4
GND 2 2 SIG CLK_CIS 6 6 CLK_OCACIS 8 6 CLK_OCACIS Main body delivery detect
3.3V 3 3 3.3V PAGE_CIS 5 7 PAGE_OCACIS 7 7 PAGE_OCACIS 3 GND
SI 4 4 SI ADD_CIS 4 8 ADD_OCACIS 6 8 ADD_OCACIS 2 POD2
CIS_CLK 5 5 CIS_CLK TXD_CIS 3 9 TXD_OCACIS 5 9 TXD_OCACIS 1 5VNPD
173977-3
GLED 6 6 GLED RES_CIS 2 10 RST_OCACIS 4 10 RST_OCACIS CN10
POD2
24V4 7 7 24V4 RXD_CIS 1 11 RXD_OCACIS 3 11 RXD_OCACIS
353293-9 /MPUC 1 Main body delivery full detect
353908-7 292207-7 292207-9 12 5VN 2 12 5VLM5
IL-Z-7S-S125C3 24VM4 2 1-292254-4
CN4 13 GND 1 13 DGND 3 GND
DGND 3 14 GND 1
GND2 5 (NC) 1-353293-3 1-353293-3 1-353293-3 2 TFD2
POD2 4 13 POD2 2
GND2 4 (NC) 5VLMPD 5 12 5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD
173977-3
5VN 3 (NC) DGND 6 11 GND 4
TFD2
5VN 2 TFD2 7 10 TFD2 5
GND2 1 5VLMPD 8 9 5VNPD 6 292254-4
Delivery cooling fan motor F
292207-5 2-353293-5 POFM_F_V 9 8 POFM_V 7 4 POFM_V 1
/POFM_F_CNT 10 7 POFM_F_CNT 8 3 POFM_F_CNT 2
DGND 11 6 GND 9 2 GND 3 POFM_F
POFM_F_LD 12 5 POFM_F_LD 10 1 POFM_F_LD 4
POFM_R_V 13 4 POFM_V 11 173977-4 179228-4
Double feed /POFM_R_CNT
DGND
14
15
3 PFM_R_CNT 12
2 GND 13 292254-4 Delivery cooling fan motor R
POFM_R_LD 16 1 POFM_R_LD 14 4 POFM_V 1
detect PWB CN7 POFM_EX_V 17 1-179228-4 1-173977-4 3 PFM_R_CNT 2
G_nCS 6 14 n_GCS 26 14 nGCS /POFM_EX_CNT 18 2 GND 3 POFM_R
PDFS-T PWB GUn_D 5 15 GUnD 25 15 GUnD DGND 19 1 POFM_R_LD 4
G. Paper exit, Transport, PS
CN1 CN3 G_nINC 4 16 n_GINC 24 16 n_GINC POFM_EX_LD 20 173977-4 179228-4

WAVE_out_M 1 1 WAVE_out_M DP_out 3 17 DPF 23 17 DPF 2-353908-0
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 2 GND 2 18 GND 22 18 DGND Delivery motor
292231-3 WAVE_out_P 3 3 WAVE_out_P DP_in 1 19 DPFCK 21 19 DPFCK
353908-3 353908-3 292231-3 292231-6 353293-6 292254-6 29250-6
1 POM_B 6 1 POM_B
2 +24V 5 2 +24V
3 POM_A 4 3 POM_A
CN6 4 POM_XB 3 4 POM_XB POM
PDFS-R PWB +12V 5 20 12V 20 20 12V 5 +24V 2 5 +24V
CN2 CN4 GND2 4 21 GND 19 21 DGND 6 POM_XA 1 6 POM_XA
+12V 2 4 +12V DPFAout 3 22 DPFAin 18 22 DPFAin 173977-6 173977-6 173977-6
WAVEin 1 3 WAVEin GND2 2 23 GND 17 23 DGND
292231-3 GND 3 2 AGND (NC) 1 (NC)
353908-3 (NC) 1 (NC) 292231-5 353293-5
353908-4 292231-4 (NC) 24 CISFM_V 16 24 CISFM_V 292254-4
Delivery exhaust fan motor
(NC) 25 CISFM_LD 15 25 CISFM_LD 4 POFM_EX_V 1
(NC) 26 GND 14 26 DGND 3 POFM_EX_CNT 2
1-353293-3 1-353293-3 1-353293-3 2-292208-6 2 GND 3
1 POFM_EX_LD 4
POFM_EX
First transfer separate K detect CN13 179228-4 179228-4
292215-3
5VNPD+R 3 1 5VNPD+R 3 13 5VLMPD+R
GND 2 2 GND 2 14 DGND /LCCC 21
1TUD_K 1TUD_K 1 3 1TUD_K 1 15 1TUD_K 24VM4 22 Fusing pressure release detect
173977-3 353293-3 353293-3 DGND 23 3 GND
HLPCD 24 2 HLPCD
5VLMPD 25 1 5VNPD HLPCD
Paper front edge detect 292215-9 5VLMPD+R 26 179228-3
GND 3 1 GND 9 16 DGND DGND 27
PTD 2 2 PTD 8 17 PTD DSW_FU 28 Front door upper open/close detect
PTD 5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 7 18 5VLMPD FUFM_V 29 3 5VNPD+R
173977-3 /FUFM_CNT 30
4 GND 6 19 DGND 2 D-GND
5 PPD2 5 20 PPD2 DGND 31 1 DSW_FU DSW_FU
GND 3 6 5VNPD 4 21 5VLMPD FUFM_LD 32
179228-3
PPD2 2 7 GND 3 22 DGND /FUM_GAIN 33
5VNPD 1 8 THPS 2 23 THPS_PPD1 FUM_LD 34 Fusing cooling fan motor
PPD2 173977-3 292254-4
9 NC 1 24 5VLMPD /FUM_CK 35
292254-2 4 FUFM_V 1
353293-9 353293-9 /FUM_D 36
1 GND 2 1-353293-2 3 FUFM_CNT 2
5VLM3 37
2 THPS 1 2 GND 3
DGND 38 FUFM
THPS 1 FUFM_LD 4
179228-2 173977-2 DGND 39
179228-4 179228-4
292132-9 INT24V2L 40
24V 1 1 24VM4 4-292208-0 2-353908-0
24V 2 (NC) 2 DGND Fusing motor
P-GND 3 3 /BTM_CK
P-GND 4 (NC) 4 /BTM_D 292132-7
BTM_CK 5 5 BTM_LD (NC) 7 FUM_CW/CCW
BTM BTM_D 6 6 /BTM_CWCCW 6 FUM_GAIN
BTM_LD 7 7 24VM4 5 FUM_LD
CW/CCW 8 8 /1TURC 4 FUM_CK
GAIN 9 (NC) 9 24VM4 3 FUM_D
179228-9 10 /1TURRC 2 5VN
11 PTCCM_B 1 D-GND FUM
12 PTCCM_A 179228-7
First transfer separate rotation clutch 292254-2 292254-6
1-353908-2 2-292208-4
2 24V4 1 6 24V4 1 1-1123722-2
1 1TURC 2 5 1TURC 2 1 DGND 1 2 P-GND
1TURC 4 24V4 3 2 INT24V2L 2 1 INT24V2L
179228-2 173977-2
3 1TURRC 4 172233-1 172165-1 1-1123722-2

First transfer separate reverse clutch 2 PTCCM_B 5
292254-2 1 PTCCM_A 6
2 24V4 1 173977-6 179228-6
1TURRC 1 1TURRC 2
179228-2 173977-2
CN15(1/2) 292254-2
Tandem tray 1 paper feed clutch
PTC cleaner motor /T1PUC 13 2 T1PUC 1
CN1 24VM4 12 1 24V4 2
PTCCM_B 1 /T2PUC 11 179228-2 179228-2
T1PUC
(NC) 2 (NC) 24VM4 10
PTCCM PACCM_A 3 /TTRC 9
292250-3 173977-3 24VM4 8 292254-2
Tandem tray 2 paper feed clutch
/PTRC2 7 2 T2PUC 1
24VM4 6 1 24V4 2
292132-9 CN26
24VM4 5
INT24V2L 1 1 INT24V2L /T2PUS 4
179228-2
T2PUC
INT24V2L 2 (NC) 2 DGND DGND 3 179228-2
P-GND 3 3 /2TUM_CK T2LUM# 2
Tandem transport clutch
P-GND 4 (NC) 4 /2TUM_D 292254-2
(NC) 1 (NC) 2 TTRC 1
/2TUM_CK 5 5 2TUM_LD
/2TUM_D 6 6 /2TUM_CW 2-292141-6 1-179228-3 1 24V4 2 TTRC
2TUM 2TUM_LD 7 179228-2 179228-2
292132-6
/2TUM_CW 8
179228-6
GAIN 9 (NC) Tandem vertical transport clutch upper
179228-9 292254-2
2 PTRC2 1
1 24V4 2 PTRC2
Cassette paper feed motor 179228-2 179228-2
292132-7 CN15 (2/2) Tandem tray 2 paper feed solenoid

INT24V2L 1 26 INT24V2L 292254-2
P-GND 2 25 DGND 1 24V4 2
(NC) 3 (NC) (NC) 24 DGND 2 T2PUS 1
CPFM_CK 4 (NC) 23 5VLM5
CPFM_D 5 22 /CPFM_D
179228-2 179228-2
T2PUS
CPFM CPFM_CW/CCW 6
CPFM_LD 7
21 /CPFM_CK
20 CPFM_LD
Tandem tray 2 lift up motor
179228-7 (NC) 19 /CPFM_GAIN 1 GND
18 CPFM_CW/CCW
2 T2LUM
17 VFM_R_V 179228-2
T2LUM
292254-4 292254-4 16 /VFM_R_CNT
1 VFM_R_V 4 1 VFM_R_V 4 15 DGND
2 VFM_R_CNT 3 2 VFM_R_CNT 3 14 VFM_R_LD
3 GND 2 3 GND 2 1-179228-3
2-292141-6
4 VFM_R_LD 1 4 VFM_R_LD 1
173977-4 173977-4 179228-4
PCU PWB CN33
RESERVE_FAN1_V 16 (NC)
(NC) 17 (NC)
DGND 18 (NC)
RESERVE_FAN1_LD 19 (NC)
H. LCC transfer section
(NC) 21 (NC)
DGND 22 (NC)
(NC) 25 (NC)
DGND 26 (NC)
DGND 28 (NC)
RESERVE_OUT1 29 (NC)
24VM4 30 (NC)
1-353908-5
LCC horizontal transport

motor 1 PWB
292132-8 292132-6
INT24V2 1 8 INT24V2 INT24V2 1
CN28 DGND 2 7 GND INT24V2 2 LCC horizontal
1 24V3 1 1 24VM3 LCHM1_FULL 3 6 LCHM1_FULL B 3 transport motor 1
2 /LED1 2 2 /LED1 LCHM1_VREF 4 5 LCHM1_CW/CCW /B 4
MX-SL10N 3 /LED2 3 3 /LED2 LCHM1_EN 5 4 LCHM1_VREF /A 5 292250-6
4 /LED3 4 4 /LED3 LCHM1_CLK 6 3 LCHM1_EN A 6 1 /A
SMP-04V-NC 179228-4 292132-4 5VLM2 7 2 LCHM1_CLK 179228-6 2 INT24V2
DGND 8 (NC) 1 5VLM2 3 /B
INT24V2 9 173977-8 4 A
DGND 10 5 INT24V2
LCHM1

LCHM2_FULL 11 6 B
LCHM2_VREF 12 LCC horizontal transport 179228-6
LCHM2_EN 13
LCHM2_CLK 14
motor 2 PWB
5VLM2 15 292132-8 292132-6
1-353293-5 8 INT24V2 INT24V2 1
3-292208-0
7 GND INT24V2 2 LCC horizontal
6 LCHM2_FULL B 3 transport motor 2
5 LCHM2_CW/CCW /B 4
4 LCHM2_VREF /A 5 292250-6
3 LCHM2_EN A 6 1 /A
2 LCHM2_CLK 179228-6 2 INT24V2
1 5VLM2 3 /B
173977-8 4 A
5 INT24V2
LCHM2
6 B
179228-6
I. DRIVER PWB
DRIVER PWB Toner motor C

CN1 1-292215-8 292132-6
TNM_C_/B 1 18 TNM_C_/B 1 6 TNM_C_/B
TNM_C_/A 2 17 TNM_C_/A 2 5 TNM_C_/A
PCU PWB CN8 CN10
+24V 3
+24V 4
16
15
+24V
+24V
3
4
4
3
+24V
+24V TNM_C
502790-6491 502790-6491
TNM_C_B 5 14 TNM_C_B 5 2 TNM_C_B
GND 1 64 GND
TNM_C_A 6 13 TNM_C_A 6 1 TNM_C_A
PRM_XB 33 TNM_K_A 2 63 TNM_K_A 32 PRM_XB 173977-6
TNM_M_/B 7 12 TNM_M_/B 7
WEBM2_A 34 TNM_K_B 3 62 TNM_K_B 31 WEBM2_A
TNM_M_/A 8 11 TNM_M_/A 8
WEBM2_B 35 TNM_K_/A 4 61 TNM_K_/A 30 WEBM2_B
WEBM1_A 36 TNM_K_/B 5 60 TNM_K_/B 29 WEBM1_A
+24V 9
+24V 10
10
9
+24V
+24V
9
10
Toner motor M
WEBM1_B 37 TNM_C_A 6 59 TNM_C_A 28 WEBM1_B
TNM_M_B 11 8 TNM_M_B 11 292132-6
RRM_CLK 38 TNM_C_B 7 58 TNM_C_B 27 RRM_CLK
TNM_M_A 12 7 TNM_M_A 12 6 TNM_M_/B
RRM_EN 39 TNM_C_/A 8 57 TNM_C_/A 26 RRM_EN
TNM_Y_/B 13 6 TNM_Y_/B 13 5 TNM_M_/A
RRM_CNT1 40 TNM_C_/B 9 56 TNM_C_/B 25 RRM_CNT1
TNM_Y_/A 14 5 TNM_Y_/A 14 4 +24V
RRM_CNT2
POM_A
41
42
TNM_M_A 10
TNM_M_B 11
55 TNM_M_A
54 TNM_M_B
24
23
RRM_CNT2
POM_A
+24V 15
+24V 16
4
3
+24V
+24V
15
16
3
2
+24V
TNM_M_B
TNM_M
POM_B 43 TNM_M_/A 12 53 TNM_M_/A 22 POM_B
TNM_Y_B 17 2 TNM_Y_B 17 1 TNM_M_A
POM_XA 44 TNM_M_/B 13 52 TNM_M_/B 21 POM_XA 173977-6
TNM_Y_A 18 1 TNM_Y_A 18
POM_XB 45 TNM_Y_A 14 51 TNM_Y_A 20 POM_XB
POM_CNT 46 TNM_Y_B 15 50 TNM_Y_B 19 POM_CNT 1-292207-8 1-353293-8 1-353293-8
ADUM1_A 47 TNM_Y_/A 16 49 TNM_Y_/A 18 ADUM1_A Toner motor Y
ADUM1_B 48 TNM_Y_/B 17 48 TNM_Y_/B 17 ADUM1_B
292132-6
ADUM1_XA 49 TNHM_A 18 47 TNHM_A 16 ADUM1_XA
6 TNM_Y_/B
ADUM1_XB 50 TNHM_B 19 46 TNHM_B 15 ADUM1_XB
5 TNM_Y_/A
ADUM1_CNT 51 TNHM_/A 20 45 TNHM_/A 14 ADUM1_CNT
4 +24V
ADUM2_A
ADUM2_B
52
53
TNHM_/B 21
TNHM_Y_EN 22
44 TNHM_/B
43 TNHM_Y_EN
13
12
ADUM2_A
ADUM2_B
3
2
+24V
TNM_Y_B
TNM_Y
ADUM2_XA 54 TNHM_M_EN 23 42 TNHM_M_EN 11 ADUM2_XA
1 TNM_Y_A
ADUM2_XB 55 TNHM_C_EN 24 41 TNHM_C_EN 10 ADUM2_XB 173977-6
ADUM2_CNT 56 TNHM_K_EN 25 40 TNHM_K_EN 9 ADUM2_CNT
PFM_CLK 57 2TBMCM_A 26 39 2TBMCM_A 8 PFM_CLK
PFM_EN 58 2TBMCM_B 27 38 2TBMCM_B 7 PFM_EN
59 2TBMCM_XA 28 37 2TBMCM_XA 6 PFM_CNT
PFM_CNT
LCCM_A 60 2TBMCM_XB 29 36 2TBMCM_XB 5 LCCM_A
Toner hopper motor K
LCCM_B 61 PRM_A 30 35 PRM_A 4 LCCM_B CN2 1-292215-2 292132-6
LCCM_XA 62 PRM_B 31 34 PRM_B 3 LCCM_XA TNHM_K_/B 1 12 TNHM_K_/B 1 6 TNHM_K_/B
LCCM_XB 63 PRM_XA 32 33 PRM_XA 2 LCCM_XB TNHM_K_/A 2 11 TNHM_K_/A 2 5 TNHM_K_/A
LCCM_CNT 64 1 LCCM_CNT +24V 3 10 +24V 3 4 +24V
+24V 4
TNHM_K_B 5
9 +24V
8 TNHM_K_B
4
5
3
2
+24V
TNHM_K_B
TNHM_K
TNHM_K_A 6 7 TNHM_K_A 6 1 TNHM_K_A
173977-6
TNM_K_/B 7 6 TNM_K_/B 7
TNM_K_/A 8 5 TNM_K_/A 8
+24V 9
+24V 10
4 +24V
3 +24V
9
10
Toner motor K
TNM_K_B 11 2 TNM_K_B 11 292132-6
TNM_K_A 12 1 TNM_K_A 12 6 TNM_K_/B
5 TNM_K_/A
1-292207-2 1-353293-2 1-353293-2
4 +24V
3
2
+24V
TNM_K_B
TNM_K
1 TNM_K_A
173977-6
292254-6 CN5
6 POM_B 1 6 POM_B
5 +24V 2 5 +24V
4 POM_A 3 4 POM_A Toner hopper motor Y
3 POM_XB 4 3 POM_XB
2 +24V 5 2 +24V CN3 1-292215-9 292132-6
1 POM_XA 6 1 POM_XA TNHM_Y_/B 1 19 TNHM_Y_/B 1 6 TNHM_Y_/B
TNHM_Y_/A 2 18 TNHM_Y_/A 2 5 TNHM_Y_/A
179228-6 173977-6 353293-6 292207-6
+24V 3 17 +24V 3 4 +24V
+24V 4
TNHM_Y_B 5
16
15
+24V
TNHM_Y_B 5
4 3
2
+24V
TNHM_Y_B
TNHM_Y
TNHM_Y_A 6 14 TNHM_Y_A 6 1 TNHM_Y_A
TNHM_M_/B 7 13 TNHM_M_/B 7 173977-6
1-292215-2 CN6 TNHM_M_/A 8 12 TNHM_M_/A 8
1 ADUM1_XA 12 1 ADUM1_XA
2 ADUM1_A 11 2 ADUM1_A
+24V 9
+24V 10
11
10
+24V
+24V
9
10
Toner hopper motor M
3 ADUM1_B 10 3 ADUM1_B TNHM_M_B 11 9 TNHM_M_B 11 292132-6
4 ADUM1_XB 9 4 ADUM1_XB TNHM_M_A 12 8 TNHM_M_A 12 6 TNHM_M_/B
5 +24V 8 5 +24V TNHM_C_/B 13 7 TNHM_C_/B 13 5 TNHM_M_/A
6 +24V 7 6 +24V TNHM_C_/A 14 6 TNHM_C_/A 14 4 +24V
7
8
ADUM2_XA
ADUM2_A
6
5
7 ADUM2_XA
8 ADUM2_A
+24V 15
+24V 16
5
4
+24V
+24V
15
16
3
2
+24V
TNHM_M_B
TNHM_M
9 ADUM2_B 4 9 ADUM2_B TNHM_C_B 17 3 TNHM_C_B 17 1 TNHM_M_A
10 ADUM2_XB 3 10 ADUM2_XB TNHM_C_A 18 2 TNHM_C_A 18 173977-6
11 +24V 2 11 +24V (NC) 1 (NC) 19 (NC)
12 +24V 1 12 +24V
1-353908-2 1-353293-2 1-353293-2 1-292207-2
1-292207-8 1-353293-8 1-353293-9 Toner hopper motor C
292132-6
6 TNHM_C_/B
5 TNHM_C_/A
4 +24V
3
2
+24V
TNHM_C_B
TNHM_C
PS front transport motor 1 TNHM_C_A
173977-6
292250-6
PFM_/A 1 1-292215-2 CN7
+24V 2 1 PFM_B 12 1 PFM_B
PFM_/B 3 2 PFM_/B 11 2 PFM_/B
PFM PFM_A
+24V
4
5
3 PFM_/A
4 PFM_A
10
9
3
4
PFM_/A
PFM_A
292254-6
PFM_B 6 5 +24V 8 5 +24V
1 2TBMCM_A 6
6 +24V 7 6 +24V
2 2TBMCM_XA 5
179228-6 7 RRM_B 6 7 RRM_B
3 2TBMCM_B 4
8 RRM_/B 5 8 RRM_/B
4 2TBMCM_XB 3
9 RRM_/A 4 9 RRM_/A CN4
5 +24V 2
10 RRM_A 3 10 RRM_A 2TBMCM_A 1 6 +24V 1
11 +24V 2 11 +24V 2TBMCM_XA 2
179228-6 179228-6
12 +24V 1 12 +24V 2TBMCM_B 3
1-353908-2 1-353293-2 1-292207-2 2TBMCM_XB 4
PS motor +24V 5
+24V 6 292254-8
DF1BZ-6P-2.5DS PRM_A 7 8 PRM_A 1
RRM_A 1 PRM_XA 8 7 PRM_XA 2
+24V 2 PRM_B 9 6 PRM_B 3 Fusing pressure
RRM
RRM_/A
RRM_B
3
4
PRM_XB 10
+24V 11
5
4
PRM_XB
+24V
4
5
release motor
+24V 5 +24V 12 3 +24V 6 292132-6
RRM_/B 6 WEBM2_A 13 2 WEBM2_A 7 6 PRM_/B
DF1B-6S-2.5R WEBM2_B 14 1 WEBM2_B 8 5 PRM_/A
4 +24V
1-292207-4 1-353908-4 179228-8 179228-8
3
2
+24V
PRM_B
PRM
1 PRM_A
179228-6
CN8
LCC enter paper motor 1 LCCM_/B
2 LCCM_B
DF1BZ-6P-2.5DS 3 LCCM_A
LCCM_A 1 4 LCCM_/A
+24V 2 5 +24V
LCCM_/A 3 6 +24V
LCCM LCCM_B
+24V
4
5
353908-6 292207-6
LCCM_/B 6
DF1B-6S-2.5R

SRA-21T-3
BS-K 1 DV-K 1TC PWB SRA-21T-3
1-1123722-3 MC PWB
SRA-21T-3 CN1 1TC-K 1TC-K
292132-8 PS-250
MC-K MC-K 1 INT24V2
PS-250 SRA-21T-3
2 GND
SRA-21T-3 3 /TC1_DATA 1TC-C 1TC-C
4 /TC1_CLK PS-250
GB-K 1 GB-K
1-1123722-2 5 /TC1_LD SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-3 6 HV_REM_MC
7 1TC S-ERR 1TC-M 1TC-M
8 1TC O-ERR PS-250
PCU PWB 179228-8 SRA-21T-3
BS-C 1 DV-C
1-1123722-3 1TC-Y 1TC-Y
SRA-21T-3 CN1 PS-250
CN23(1/3) CN23(2/3)
MC-C MC-C 1-292132-0
PS-250 40 INT24V2 INT24V2 1
INT24V2 1 39 DGND DGND 2
SRA-21T-3 GND 2 38 /MC_DATA# /TC1_DATA# 3 292254-4 Ozone fan motor 1
GB-C 1 GB-C /MC_DATA 3 37 /MC_CLK# /TC1_CLK# 4 4 OZFM1_V 1
1-1123722-2 /MC_CLK 4 36 /MC_LD# /TC1_LD# 5 3 OZFM_CNT 2
SRA-21T-3 /MC_LD 5 35 /MC_LD2# HV_REM_MC 6 2 GND 3
/MC_LD2 6 34 HV_REM_MC 1TC_S_ERR 7 1 OZFM1_LD 4
OZFM 1
HV_REM_MC 7 33 MC_BK_ERR 1TC_O_ERR 8
J. High voltage, CRUM
179228-4 179228-4
BS-M 1 DV-M MC BK ERR 8 32 MC_CL_ERR OZFM1_V 9
1-1123722-3 MC CL ERR 9 31 24VM4 /OZFM1_CNT 10
SRA-21T-3 24VM4 10 30 1TUD_CL DGND 11
1-173977-0 29 DGND OZFM1 LD 12 292254-4 Ozone fan motor 2
MC-M MC-M 28 5VLMPD+R OZFM2_V 13 4 OZFM2_V 1
PS-250
27 INT24V2L /OZFM2_CNT 14 3 OZFM_CNT 2
SRA-21T-3 26 DGND DGND 15 2 GND 3
GB-M 1 GB-M 25 HL_PR
24 HLOUT_UM
OZFM2_LD 16 1 OZFM2_LD 4
OZFM 2
1-1123722-2 VFM_BA_V 17 179228-4 179228-4
SRA-21T-3 23 HLOUT_UW /VFM_BA_CNT 18
22 HLOUT_LM DGND 19
21 HLOUT_US VFM_BA_LD 20
2-353293-0
BS-Y 1 DV-Y 4-292208-0 4-292208-0 2-353908-0
1-1123722-3 292254-4 Inner ventilation fan motor BA
SRA-21T-3 4 VFM_BA_V 1
MC-Y MC-Y 3 VFM_BA_CNT 2
PS-250 2 GND 3 VFM_BA
SRA-21T-3 1 VFM_BA_LD 4
GB-Y 1 GB-Y 179228-4 179228-4

1-1123722-2
F.G
SRA-21T-4 292215-3
5VLMPD+R 3 1 5VLMPD+R 3
GND 2 2 GND 2
1TUD_CL 1TUD_CL 1 3 1TUD_CL 1
173977-3 353293-3 353293-3 2TC PWB SRA-21T-3
2TC 2TC
PS-250
CRM K 292254-4 1-292254-5 CN21
CRM_K_DT 1 4 CRM_K_DT 1 1 CRM_K_DT 15 1 CRM_K_DT# SRA-21T-3
CRM_K_CK 2 3 CRM_K_CK 2 2 CRM_K_CK 14 2 CRM_K_CK# 2DR 2DR
CRM_K_CK/CRM_K_DT 5VCRUM 3 2 5VCRUM 3 3 5VCRUM 13 3 CRM_K_5V PS-250
GND 4 1 GND 4 4 GND 12 4 DGND
TSHR-04V-K 179228-4 179228-4 5 CRM_C_DT 11 5 CRM_C_DT#
6 CRM_C_CK 10 6 CRM_C_CK#
7 5VCRUM 9 7 CRM_C_5V CN1
8 GND 8 8 DGND (2/2)CN12 292132-8
CRM C 292254-4 9 GND 7 9 DGND INT24V2 20 1 INT24V2
CRM_C_DT 1 4 CRM_C_DT 1 10 5VCRUM 6 10 CRM_M_5V DGND 21 2 GND
CRM_C_CK 2 3 CRM_C_CK 2 11 CRM_M_CK 5 11 CRM_M_CK# /TC2_DATA# 22 3 /TC2_DATA
CRM_C_CK/CRM_C_DT 5VCRUM 3 2 5VCRUM 3 12 CRM_M_DT 4 12 CRM_M_DT# /TC2_CLK# 23 4 /TC2_CLK SRA-21T-3
GND 4 1 GND 4 13 GND 3 13 DGND /TC2_LD# 24 5 /TC2_LD
TSHR-04V-K 179228-4 179228-4 14 5VCRUM 2 14 CRM_Y_5V PTC PTC
HV_REM_TC2 25 6 HV_REM_TC2 PS-250
15 CRM_Y_CK 1 15 CRM_Y_CK# 2TC_ERR 26 7 2TC_ERR
1-179228-5 1-173977-5 1-353293-5 SRA-21T-3
PTC_ERR 27 8 PTC_ERR 1123723-2
292254-4 179228-8
CRM M 3-292208-8 1-353908-9 VCASE 1 VCASE
GND 4 1 GND 4 1-1123722-2
5VCRUM 3 2 5VCRUM 3
CRM_M_CK/CRM_M_DT CRM_M_CK 2 3 CRM_M_CK 2
CRM_M_DT 1 4 CRM_M_DT 1
TSHR-04V-K 179228-4 179228-4
CRM Y 292254-4
GND 4 1 GND 4
5VCRUM 3 2 5VCRUM 3

CRM_Y_CK/CRM_Y_DT CRM_Y_CK 2 3 CRM_Y_CK 2
CRM_Y_DT 1 4 CRM_Y_DT 1
TSHR-04V-K 179228-4 179228-4
Toner full sensor K 292254-3

5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 1
TFSD_K 2 2 TFSD_K 2 292254-4 Delivery cooling fan motor 2 F
TFSD_K GND 3 1 GND 3
4 POFM2_F_V 1
DF3-3S-2C 179228-3 179228-3 1-353293-5 CN35 3 POFM2_F_CNT 2
1-292254-3 3-292208-0
POFM2_F_V 1 2 GND 3 POFM2_F
1 CRM_Y_DT 13 16 CRM_Y_DT# 1 POFM2_F_LD 4
/POFM2_F_CNT 2
2 5VNPD 12 17 5VLMPD
DGND 3 179228-4 179228-4
3 TFSD_K 11 18 TFSD_K
292254-3 POFM2_F_LD 4
Toner full sensor C 4 GND 10 19 DGND DGND 5
5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 1 5 5VNPD 9 20 5VLMPD POFM2_R_V 6 Delivery cooling fan motor 2 R
TFSD_C 2 2 TFSD_C 2 6 TFSD_C 8 21 TFSD_C 292254-3
POFM2_R_LD 7
TFSD_C GND 3 1 GND 3 7 GND 7 22 DGND
DGND 8 3 POFM2_R_V 1
DF3-3S-2C 179228-3 179228-3 8 GND 6 23 DGND POFM2_EX_V 9
9 TFSD_M 5 24 TFSD_M 2 POFM2_R_LD 2
4 25 5VLMPD /POFM2_EX_CNT 10 1 GND 3
POFM2_R
10 5VNPD
DGND 11 179228-3 179228-3
292254-3 11 GND 3 26 DGND
Toner full sensor M 27 POFM2_EX_LD 12
12 TFSD_Y 2 TFSD_Y 1-353908-2
GND 3 1 GND 3 1-292207-2
13 5VNPD 1 28 5VLMPD
TFSD_M 2 2 TFSD_M 2 (NC) 29
TFSD_M 5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 1 1-179228-3 1-173977-3 (NC) 292254-4 Delivery cooling fan motor 2
(NC) 30 (NC) 4 POFM2_EX_V 1
DF3-3S-2C 179228-3 179228-3 3 POFM2_EX_CNT 2
2 GND 3 POFM2_EX
1 POFM2_EX_LD 4
Toner full sensor Y 292254-3 179228-4 179228-4
GND 3 1 GND 3
TFSD_Y 2 2 TFSD_Y 2
TFSD_Y 5VNPD 1 3 5VNPD 1
DF3-3S-2C 179228-3 179228-3
DV unit (BLACK) Drum motor M
292215-7 292132-7
1 /DVTYPSEL_K 7 1 24V3
2 GND 6 2 P-GND
Toner concentration sensor K 3 DVTYP_K 5
PCU PWB (NC) 3 (NC)
TSG_K# 1 4 TSG_K 4 4 DM_M_CK DM_M
5VN 2 5 5VN 3 CN19(2/2) 1-292254-1 5 DM_M_D
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 2 1-292215-4 1-292215-4 CN17 24VM3 14 11 24V3 1 6 CW/CCW
14 14
TCS_K GND 4 7 GND 1 1
2
/DVTYPSEL_K
GND 13
1
2
/DVTYPSEL_K
GND 13
1 /DVTYPSEL_K
2 DGND
DGND 15 10 P-GND 2 7 DM_M_LD
51021-0400 353908-7 353293-7 /DM_M_CK 16 9 DM_M_CK 3 179228-7
3 DVTYP_K 12 3 DVTYP_K 12 3 DVTYP_K
/DM_M_D 17 8 DM_M_D 4
4 TSG_K 11 4 TSG_K 11 4 TSG_BK
/DM_M_CWCCW 18 7 CW/CCW 5 DV drive clutch M
5 5VN 10 5 5VN 10 5 5VLM6 292254-2
DV unit (CYAN) DM_M_LD 19 6 DM_M_LD 6
6 TCS_K 9 6 TCS_K 9 6 TCS_K
/DVC_M 20 5 DVC_M 7 2 DVC_M 1
292215-7 7 GND 8 7 GND 8 7 DGND
24VM3 21 4 24V3 8 1 24V3 2
1 /DVTYPSEL_C 7 8 /DVTYPSEL_C 7 8 /DVTYPSEL_C 7 8 /DVTYPSEL_C DVC_M
DHPD_M 22 3 DHPD_M 9 179228-2 173977-2
2 GND 6 9 GND 6 9 GND 6 9 DGND
DGND 23 2 GND 10
Toner concentration sensor C 3 DVTYP_C 5 10 DVTYP_C 5 10 DVTYP_C 5 10 DVTYP_C Drum phase detect M
5VLMPD+R 24 1 5VNPD+R 11
TSG_C# 1 4 TSG_C 4 11 TSG_C 4 11 TSG_C 4 11 TSG_C 1 DHPD_M
(NC) 25 (NC) 1-173977-1 1-179228-1
5VN 2 5 5VN 3 12 5VN 3 12 5VN 3 12 5VLM6 2 D-GND
13 13 (NC) 26 (NC)
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 2 TCS_C 2 TCS_C 2 13 TCS_C 3 5VNPD+R DHPD_M
2-292208-6 1-353293-3
K. Process, DL, DV
TCS_C GND 4 7 GND 1 14 GND 1 14 GND 1 14 DGND 179228-3

51021-0400 353908-7 353293-7 1-353293-4 1-353293-4 1-353293-4 1-353293-4 1-353293-4
Drum motor C
CN20 1-292254-1 292132-7
DV unit (MAGENTA) 24VM3 1 11 24V3 1 1 24V3
292215-7 1-292215-5 1-292215-5 DGND 2 10 P-GND 2 2 P-GND
1 /DVTYPSEL_M 7 1 /DVTYPSEL_M 15 1 /DVTYPSEL_M 15 15 /DVTYPSEL_M /DM_C_CK 3 9 DM_C_CK 3 (NC) 3 (NC)
2 GND 6 2 GND 14 2 GND 14 16 DGND /DM_C_D 4 8 DM_C_D 4 4 DM_C_CK DM_C
Toner concentration sensor M 3 DVTYP_M 5 3 DVTYP_M 13 3 DVTYP_M 13 17 DVTYP_M /DM_C_CWCCW 5 7 CW/CCW 5 5 DM_C_D
TSG_M# 1 4 TSG_M 4 4 TSG_M 12 4 TSG_M 12 18 TSG_M DM_C_LD 6 6 DM_C_LD 6 6 CW/CCW
5VN 2 5 5VN 3 5 5VN 11 5 5VN 11 19 5VLM6 /DVC_C 7 5 DVC_C 7 7 DM_C_LD
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 2 6 TCS_M 10 6 TCS_M 10 20 TCS_M 24VM3 8 4 24V3 8 179228-7
TCS_M GND 4 7 GND 1 7 GND 9 7 GND 9 21 DGND DHPD_C 9 3 DHPD_C 9
51021-0400 353908-7 353293-7 8 /DVTYPSEL_Y 8 8 /DVTYPSEL_Y 8 22 /DVTYPSEL_Y DGND 10 2 GND 10
9 GND 7 9 GND 7 23 DGND 5VLMPD+R 11 1 5VNPD+R 11 292254-2
DV drive clutch C
1-179228-1 2 DVC_C 1
10 DVTYP_Y 6 10 DVTYP_Y 6 24 DVTYP_Y 1-353293-1 1-173977-1
11 TSG_Y 5 11 TSG_Y 5 25 TSG_Y 1 24V3 2 DVC_C
DV unit (YELLOW) 12 5VN 4 12 5VN 4 26 5VLM6 179228-2 173977-2
13 TCS_Y 3 13 TCS_Y 3 27 TCS_Y Drum phase detect C
292215-7 14 GND 2 14 GND 2 28 DGND
1 /DVTYPSEL_Y 7 15 (NC) 15 (NC) 1 DHPD_C
1 1 2-292208-8
2 GND 6 2 D-GND
Toner concentration sensor Y 3 DVTYP_Y 5 1-353293-5 1-353293-5 1-353293-5 1-353293-5 1-353293-4 3 5VNPD+R DHPD_C
TSG_Y# 1 4 TSG_Y 4 179228-3
5VN 2 5 5VN 3
TCS_Y TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 2 Drum motor Y
GND 4 7 GND 1
1-292254-1 292132-7
51021-0400 353908-7 353293-7
24VM3 12 11 24V3 1 1 24V3
DGND 13 10 P-GND 2 2 P-GND
/DM_Y_CK 14 9 DM_Y_CK 3 (NC) 3 (NC)
Drum motor K /DM_Y_D 15 8 DM_Y_D 4 4 DM_Y_CK DM_Y
/DM_Y_CWCCW 16 7 CW/CCW 5 5 DM_Y_D
292132-7 DM_Y_LD 17 6 DM_Y_LD 6 6 CW/CCW
24V3 1 /DVC_Y 18 5 DVC_Y 7 7 DM_Y_LD
P-GND 2 24VM3 19 4 24V3 8 179228-7
(NC) 3 (NC) DHPD_Y 20 3 DHPD_Y 9
DM_K_CK 4 DGND 21 2 GND 10
DM_K DM_K_D 5 5VLMPD+R 22 1 5VNPD+R 11 292254-2
DV drive clutch Y
CW/CCW 6 1 DVC_Y 2
DM_K_LD 7 2-292208-2 1-353293-1 1-173977-1 1-179228-1
CN18 2 24V3 1 DVC_Y
179228-7 1-292254-1 173977-2
(NC) 1 (NC) 179228-2
1 24V3 11 2 24VM3
DV drive clutch K 292254-2 2 P-GND 10 3 DGND
Drum phase detect Y
3 DM_K_CK 9 4 /DM_K_CK 1 DHPD_Y
1 DVC_K 2 2 D-GND
4 DM_K_D 8 5 /DM_K_D
DVC_K 2 24V3 1 3 5VNPD+R
7 6 /DM_K_CWCCW
173977-2 179228-2
5 CW/CCW
6 DM_K_LD 6 7 DM_K_LD
179228-3
DHPD_Y
CN39
7 DVC_K 5 8 /DVC_K
Drum phase detect K 8 24V3 4 9 24VM3 (NC) 1 (NC)
(NC) 2 (NC) 1-292254-0 MC cleaner move detect Y
DHPD_K 1 9 DHPD_K 3 10 DHPD_K
D-GND 2 10 GND 2 11 DGND CCMD_Y 3 10 CCMD_Y 1 1 CCMD_Y
DHPD_K 5VNPD+R 3 11 5VNPD+R 1 12 5VLMPD+R DGND 4 9 GND 2 2 D-GND
179228-3 1-179228-1 1-173977-1 1-353293-2 5VLMPD+R 5 8 5VNPD+R 3 3 5VNPD+R CCMD_Y
K CCM_Y_A 6 7 CCM_Y_A 4 179228-3
10 CCM_Y_B 7 6 CCM_Y_B 5
MC cleaner move detectCCMD_K 1 CCMD_K
1 CCMD_K 13
D-GND 2 2 GND 9 14 DGND DGND 8 5 GND 6
CCMD_K 5VNPD+R 3 3 5VNPD+R 8 15 5VLMPD+R DL_Y# 9 4 DL_Y 7
MC cleaner motor Y
CN1 292250-3
179228-3 4 CCM_K_A 7 16 CCM_K_A DL2_Y# 10 3 DL2_Y 8
1 CCM_Y_A
5 CCM_K_B 6 17 CCM_K_B CCHPD_Y 11 2 CCHPD_Y 9
2 (NC)
MC cleaner motor K 6 GND 5 18 DGND 5VLMPD+R 12 1 5VNPD+R 10
3 CCM_Y_B
179228-3
292250-3 CN1
CCM_K_A 1
7 DL_K 4 19 DL_K# 1-173977-0
1-179228-0
CCM_Y
8 DL2_K 3 20 DL2_K# 1-353293-2
(NC) 2 9 CCHPD_K 2 21 CCHPD_K Process unit (YELLOW)
CCM_K CCM_K_B 3 10 5VNPD+R 1 22 5VLMPD+R
179228-3
1-179228-0 1-292254-0 1-173977-0 (NC) 23 (NC)
(NC) 24 (NC) QR/P8-8*-C 2-292173-3 Discharge lamp Y
Process unit (BLACK) 2-292208-4 (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC) 3 GND
1-353293-2
7 GND 7 2 GND
2-292173-3 6 DL_Y 6 1 DL_Y DL_Y
Discharge lamp K QR/P8-8*-C
5 DL2_Y 5 179228-3

GND 3 (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC)
4 CCHPD_Y 4
GND 2 7 GND 7
3 5VNPD+R 3 2-292173-3 Transfer rear dsicharge lamp Y
DL_K DL_K 1 6 DL_K 6
179228-3 5 DL2_K 5 CN19(1/2) (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 3 GND
4 CCHPD_K 4 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 2 GND
(NC) 1 (NC)
Transfer rear dsicharge lamp K 2-292173-3 3 5VNPD+R 3 S P 1 DL2_Y DL2_Y
(NC) 2 (NC) 179228-3
1-292254-0
GND 3 (NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 1-292254-0 (NC) 3 (NC) CCMD_M 13 10 CCMD_M 1
GND 2 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 CCMD_C 10 4 CCMD_C MC cleaner HP detect Y
DGND 14 9 GND 2
DL2_K DL2_K 1 P S 2 GND 9 5 DGND 3 GND
179228-3 5VLMPD+R 15 8 5VNPD+R 3
3 5VNPD+R 8 6 5VLMPD+R 2 CCHPD_Y
CCM_M_A 16 7 CCM_M_A 4
4 CCM_C_A 7 7 CCM_C_A 1 5VNPD+R CCHPD_Y
MC cleaner HP detect K CCM_M_B 17 6 CCM_M_B 5 179228-3
5 CCM_C_B 6 8 CCM_C_B
5
DGND 18 GND 6
GND 3 6 GND 5 9 DGND
DL_M# 19 4 DL_M 7
CCHPD_K 2 7 DL_C 4 10 DL_C
DL2_M# 20 3 DL2_M 8
CCHPD_K 5VNPD+R 1 179228-3 8 DL2_C 3 11 DL2_C
CCHPD_M 21 2 CCHP_M 9
9 CCHPD_C 2 12 CCHPD_C 22 1
5VLMPD+R 5VNPD+R 10 MC cleaner move detect M
10 5VNPD+R 1 13 5VLMPD+R
23 (NC)
(NC) 1-173977-0 1-179228-0 1 CCMD_M
1-353293-3 2-292208-6
MC cleaner move detect C 1-179228-0 1-173977-0 (NC) 24 (NC) 2 D-GND
CCMD_C 1 1-353293-2 3 5VNPD+R CCMD_M
2-292208-4
D-GND 2 179228-3
CCMD_C 5VNPD+R 3
179228-3 MC cleaner motor M
MC cleaner motor C CN1 292250-3
292250-3 CN1 1 CCM_M_A
CCM_C_A 1 2 (NC)
(NC) 2 3 CCM_M_B CCM_M
CCM_C CCM_C_B 3 179228-3
179228-3
Process unit (MAGENTA)
Process unit (CYAN)
Discharge lamp C QR/P8-8*-C 2-292173-3 Discharge lamp M
2-292173-3 QR/P8-8*-C (NC)
GND 3 (NC) (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC) 3 GND
8 8 (NC)
7 GND 7 2 GND
GND 2 7 GND 7
6 DL_M 6 1 DL_M DL_M
DL_C DL_C 1 6 DL_C 6 179228-3
5 DL2_M 5
179228-3 5 DL2_C 5
4 CCHPD_M 4
4 CCHPD_C 4 2-292173-3 Transfer rear dsicharge lamp M
Transfer rear dsicharge lamp C 2-292173-3 3 5VNPD+R 3
3 5VNPD+R 3 (NC) 3 GND
GND 3 2 (NC) 2 (NC)
(NC) 2 (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 2 GND
GND 2 1 (NC) 1 (NC)
(NC) 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 1 DL2_M DL2_M
DL2_C DL2_C 1 P S S
179228-3 P 179228-3
MC cleaner HP detect C 3 GND

MC cleaner HP detect M
GND 3 2 CCHPD_M
CCHPD_C 2 1 5VNPD+R CCHPD_M
CCHPD_C 5VNPD+R 1 179228-3
179228-3
L. Process (Encoder)
PCU PWB
CN27
(NC) 1 292215-7 292250-3 Drum Encoder 1K
DGND 2 7 GND 1 3 GND
DEDY_L 3
3.3V 4
6
5
DEDY_L
3.3V
2
3
2 DEDK_L
1 3.3V
DEDY_L
DGND 5 4 GND 4 173977-3
DEDY_R 6 3 DEDY_R 5
3.3V 7 2 3.3V 6
DGND 8 (NC) 1 (NC) 7 (NC) 292250-3 Drum Encoder 2K
DEDM_L 9 353293-7 353293-7 3 GND
3.3V 10
DGND 11
2 DEDK_R
1 3.3V
DEDY_R
DEDM_R 12 173977-3
3.3V 13
1-353293-3
292215-7 292250-3 Drum Encoder 1K

7 GND 1 3 GND
6 DEDM_L 2
5 3.3V 3
2 DEDK_L
1 3.3V
DEDM_L
4 GND 4 173977-3
3 DEDM_R 5
2 3.3V 6
(NC) 1 (NC) 7 (NC) 292250-3 Drum Encoder 2K
DGND 14 353293-7 353293-7 3 GND
DEDC_L
3.3V
15
16
2 DEDK_R
1 3.3V
DEDM_R
DGND 17 173977-3
DEDC_R 18
3.3V 19
DGND 20
DEDK_L 21
3.3V 22
DGND 23
DEDK_R 24
3.3V 25
(NC) 26
2-292208-6 1-353293-3
292215-7 292250-3 Drum Encoder 1K

7 GND 1 3 GND
6
5
DEDC_L 2
3.3V 3
2 DEDK_L
1 3.3V
DEDC_L
4 GND 4 173977-3
3 DEDC_R 5
2 3.3V 6
353293-7 353293-7 3 GND
2 DEDK_R
1 3.3V
DEDC_R
173977-3
292215-7 292250-3 Drum Encoder 1K

7 GND 1 3 GND
6
5
DEDK_L 2
3.3V 3
2 DEDK_L
1 3.3V
DEDK_L
4 GND 4 173977-3
3 DEDK_R 5
2 3.3V 6
353293-7 353293-7 3 GND
2 DEDK_R
1 3.3V
DEDK_R
173977-3

CN9
1 1 5
5VLM +5VLM
2 2 4
GND D-GND
3
+24VM1
172165-1 172233-1 2
AC PWB +24VM1
PS-250(WH) 1
1
MSW MAIN DC PWB P-GND
DRIVER PWB
N1_SWOUT
CN2 1-1123722-5 1-1123723-5
N1_SWOUT 1
CN1 CN101
L1_SWOUT 2 1
1 L1_SWOUT 1
L_IN DF22R-2S-7.92C(28) D-GND
2 2
N_IN DF22R-2P-7.92DSA(05) PS-250(WH) D-GND
3
D-GND
DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) 4
+5VO
5
FND5.5-5 +5VLM SCN MOTHER PWB
6
+5VLM
PS-250(RD) 7 CN22
+5VLM
CN3 1 1
L1_SWIN +5VO
L1_SWOUT 2 1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7 2
P-GND
N1_SWOUT 1 3
+24VM5
1 4
N1_SWIN CN102 P-GND
DF22L-2P-7.92DSA(05) DF22L-2S-7.92C(28) 5
1 +24VS5
PS-250(RD) DC CNT1 6
2 D-GND
NC 7
3 +5VLM
HL PWB CN5 DC CNT2 8
3.3V
L_DCPS 1 9
292133-3 179228-3 GND
(NC) 2 CN1
(NC) 3 3 1-1123722-9 1-1123723-9
L_DCPS
(NC) 4 2
CN4 (NC)
CN1 N_DCPS 5 1 CN19
N_DCPS
1 1 1
L_HL1 L_HL NOFF CNT
2 2 2-1717011-4 1-1123722-5 1-1123722-3 1-1123724-2 2
N_HL1 N_HL NRY CNT
CN103 3
GND
DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22R-2S-7.92C(28) DF22R-2P-7.92DSA(05) 1 4
FW NOFF CNT
CN10 2 5
P-GND NRY CNT
L_SUB_DCPS 1 3
P-GND
(NC) 2 4 179228-5 292132-5
P-GND
N_SUB_DCPS 3 5
P-GND
CN21
M. Power supply (North America)
1-1123722-3 6
P-GND
1-1123724-2 7 1
P-GND P-GND
8 2
P-GND +24VS1
3
D-GND
1-1123723-8 1-1123722-8 4
D-GND
5
+5VLS
6
+5VLS
CN104 2132781-6 1-1123723-6

1
+24VM1
2
+24VM1
3
+24VM2
4
+24VM3
5
+24VM3
6
+24VM4
7 CN18
+24VM5
1
1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7 D-GND
2
+5VHD
2132781-2
1-1123723-2
SUB DC PWB
CN104
1
+24VS1
2
+24VS1
3
+24VS2
4
+24VS3
5
+24VS3
6
+24VS4
7
+24VS5
1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7
CN1
3
L_SUB_DCPS CN34
2
(NC) 1
1 GND
N_SUB_DCPS 2
3.3V
1-1123722-3 1-1123724-2 CN101
1-1123722-2 1-1123723-2
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
D-GND CN1
4
+5VO 1
5 D-GND
+5VLS 2
6 +5VLM
+5VLS 3
7 D-GND
+5VLS 4
+5VLM
5
1-1123723-7 2132781-7 P-GND
6
+24VM4
7
P-GND
CN102 8
+24VM3
1 9
DC CNT1 P-GND
2 10
NC +24VS1
3
DC CNT2
1-1123722-0 1-1123723-0
292133-3 179228-3

CN103
1
FW
2
P-GND
WH PWB P-GND
3
PCU PWB
4
P-GND
5
P-GND
6
P-GND
7
P-GND
8
P-GND
1-1123723-8 1-1123722-8
1 1
+24VM2
2 2
CN2 FW
3 3
3 1 1 1 1 +5VLM
WH-L(SCN) WH-L(SCN) WH-L(SCN) 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 D-GND
(NC) WH-N(SCN) WH-N(SCN) 5 5
1 +5VLM
6 6
WH-N(SCN)
172233-1
172165-1 ELR-02V ELP-02V
SCN warm heater 7
D-GND
7
3-1123724-2 3-1123722-3 +24VS2
8 8
P-GND
9 9
P-GND
10 10
CN3 +24VS3
11 11
3 1 1 P-GND
WH-L(LSU) WH-L(LSU) 12 12
2 2 2 +24VS4
(NC) WH-N(LSU) LSU warm heater
1
WH-N(LSU) 172162-1 172170-1
ELR-02V ELP-02V
1-1123722-3
1-1123724-2
CN9
SRA-51T-H5 1 5VLM 1 5 +5VLM
AC PWB 2 GND 2 4 D-GND
PS-250(WH) MAIN DC PWB 3
CN2
MSW 172165-1 172233-1 +24VM1
1 2 +24VM1
N1_SWOUT CN101 1 DRIVER PWB
CN1 N1_SWOUT 1 P-GND
1 L1_SWOUT 2 D-GND 1
Live_in L_IN 1 2 1-1123722-5 1-1123723-5
2 L1_SWOUT D-GND
F-GND N_IN DF22R-2P-7.92DSA(05) D-GND 3
Neutral_in DF22R-2S-7.92C(28) 4
PS-250(WH) +5VO
DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) 5
INLET +5VLM
+5VLM 6
+5VLM 7
PS-250(RD) SCN MOTHER PWB
CN3 1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7
1
L1_SWIN CN22
L1_SWOUT 2 1
CN102 +5VO
N1_SWOUT 1 2
1 DC CNT1 1 P-GND
N1_SWIN 3
DF22L-2P-7.92DSA(05) DF22L-2S-7.92C(28) NC 2 +24VM5
PS-250(RD) 4 P-GND
DC CNT2 3 5
CN5 +24VS5
292133-3 179228-3 6 D-GND
1 7 +5VLM
L_DCPS CN1 8
L_HL2 2 3.3VM
3 3 9 GND
AC5 (NC) L_DCPS
N_HL2 4 2 (NC)
CN4 5 1 1-1123722-9 1-1123723-9
N_DCPS N_DCPS
1 L_HL CN19
N. Power supply (Europe)
2 N_HL 2-1717011-4 1-1123722-5 1-1123722-3 1-1123724-2

1 NOFF CNT
CN103 2
DF22R-2P-7.92DSA(05) CN10 1 NRY CNT
FW 3 GND
L_SUB_DCPS 1 P-GND 2 4
3 NOFF CNT
(NC) 2 P-GND 5 NRY CNT
N_SUB_DCPS 3 P-GND 4
P-GND 5 179228-5 292132-5
1-1123724-2 1-1123722-3 P-GND 6
P-GND 7 CN21
P-GND 8 1 P-GND
2 +24VS1
1-1123723-8 1-1123722-8 3 D-GND
4 D-GND
HL PWB 5
6
+5VLS
CN104 +5VLS
+24VM1 1 2132781-6 1-1123723-6
+24VM1 2
+24VM2 3
+24VM3 4
CN2
+24VM3 5
L_HL2 1 6 CN18
2 +24VM4 1
(NC) +24VM5 7 +12V
(NC) 3 2 +5VLS
N_HL2 4 1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7 3 D-GND
4 D-GND
1-1565033-2 1-1123722-4
2132781-2 1-1123723-2
AC SUB PWB
SUB DC PWB
CN1 CN2 CN34
CN104 1 GND
L_HL1 1 1 L_HL2
+24VS1 1 2 3.3VM
HL1 N_HL1 2 2 N_HL2
+24VS1 2
+24VS2 3 1-1123722-2 1-1123723-2
DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22R-2S-7.92C(28) DF22R-2P-7.92DSA(05) 4
+24VS3 CN1
CN4 +24VS3 5
1 D-GND
+24VS4 6
L2_HL 1 2 +5VLM
+24VS5 7
(NC) 2 3 D-GND
N2_HL 3 4 +5VLM
DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22-2EP-7.92C CN1 CN1 1-1123723-7 1-1123722-7 5 P-GND
1 L_HL2 1 1 L_IN 1-1123724-2 1-1123722-3 3 L_SUB_DCPS 6 +24VM4
2 N_HL2 2 2 N_IN 2 (NC) 7 P-GND
1 N_SUB_DCPS 8 +24VM3
DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05) 9 P-GND
1-1123722-3 1-1123724-2 CN101 10 +24VS1
D-GND 1
D-GND 2 1-1123722-0 1-1123723-0
D-GND 3
+5VO 4
3 L2-HL 3
SRA-51T-H5 +5VLS 5
Live_in 2 (NC) 2
+5VLS 6
F-GND 1 N2-HL 1
+5VLS 7
Neutral_in
172166-1 172234-1 1-1123723-7 2132781-7
PCU PWB
INLET
N2-HL 1 CN102
L2-HL 9 1
5 DC CNT1
GND NC 2
WH-N(LCC) 12 3
4 DC CNT2
WH-L(LCC)
(NC) 3
292133-3 179228-3
ELR-12V

CN103
FW 1
P-GND 2
P-GND 3
P-GND 4
P-GND 5
P-GND 6
P-GND 7
P-GND 8
1-1123723-8 1-1123722-8
CN2 1 1
+24VM2
WH-L(SCN) 3 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 1 WH-L(SCN) 1 2 FW 2
(NC) 2 2 WH-N(SCN) 2 2 WH-N(SCN) 2 3 +5VLM 3
WH-N(SCN) 1 SCN warm heater 4 D-GND 4
3-1123722-3 172233-1 172165-1 ELR-02V ELP-02V 5 +5VLM 5
3-1123724-2 6 D-GND 6
7 +24VS2 7
8 P-GND 8
CN3 9 P-GND 9
1 WH-L(LSU) 1 10 +24VS3 10
WH-L(LSU) 3
2 WH-N(LSU) 2 11 P-GND 11
(NC) 2 LSU warm heater 12 +24VS4 12
WH-N(LSU) 1
ELR-02V ELP-02V
1-1123722-3 172162-1 172170-1
1-1123724-2
WH PWB
Power cooling fan 1 292254-3
1 PSFM1_V 3
2 GND 2
PSFM1 3 PSFM1_LD 1
179228-3 179228-3
Power cooling fan 2 292254-3

1 PSFM2_V 3 PCU PWB
2 GND 2
O. LCC, Finisher
PSFM2 3 PSFM2_LD 1
179228-3 179228-3
1 5VLM 1
2 GND 2
172165-1 172233-1
CN4
1 PSFM_V
2 PSFM1_LD
3 DGND
4 PSFM_V
5 PSFM2_LD
292254-6 6 DGND
1 /TXD_FIN 1 6 /TXD_FIN 1 7 /TXD_FIN
2 /RXD_FIN 2 5 /RXD_FIN 2 8 /RXD_FIN
3 DTR_FIN 3 4 DTR_FIN 3 9 DTR_FIN
4 DSR_FIN 4 3 DSR_FIN 4 10 DSR_FIN
5 RES_FIN 5 2 RES_FIN 5 11 RES_FIN
6 +24VS3 6 1 FW 6 12 (NC)GND
7 +5VLM 7 179228-6 179228-6 13 24VM4
FINISHER 8 D-GND 8 14 WH_CNT
9 P-GND 9 1-353908-4
10 FG 10
11 +24VS4 11
12 P-GND 12
ELP-12V ELR-12V
SRA-21T-4
1 +24VM2 1 1 +24VM2 1
+24VM2 a
2 FW 2
DSW-R DSW-R b 172156-1 172164-1 3 +5VLM 3
4 D-GND 4
PA-187-2V 5 5
+5VLM
6 D-GND 6
7 +24VS2 7
8 P-GND 8
CN11 9 9
P-GND
INT24VM2 1 2 INT24VM2 2 10 +24VS3 10
GND 2 1 24V2OUT 1 11 P-GND 11
PCU PWB 24V2OUT 3 12 +24VS4 12
24V2IN 4 172165-1 172157-1
172170-1 172162-1
1-1123723-4 1-1123722-4
a
INT24VM2
DSW-F b
DSW-F
PS-187-2V

1 LCC_D 1 292254-7
2 (NC) 2 1 LCC_D 7 28 LCC_D
3 /TXD_LCC 3 2 /TXD_LCC 6 27 /TXD_LCC
4 /RXD_LCC 4 3 /RXD_LCC 5 26 /RXD_LCC
5 DTR_LCC 5 4 DTR_LCC 4 25 DTR_LCC
6 /DSR_LCC 6 5 /DSR_LCC 3 24 /DSR_LCC
7 RES_LCC 7 6 RES_LCC 2 23 RES_LCC
8 FG 8 7 TRC_LCC 1 22 (NC)GND
9 +5VLM 9 21 TRC_LCC
LCC 10 D-GND 10 179228-7 179228-7 20 HL_POW_CNT
11 +24VS2 11 19 3.3V
12 P-GND 12 18 24V4
13 TRC_LCC 13 17 GND
14 (NC) 14 16 FW2
15 (NC) 15 15 FW
SRA-21T-4 1-353908-4 2-292208-8
ELP-15V ELR-15V 2-353294-8
CN1 292254-5
3.3V 1 5 3.3VM 1
FW 2 4 FW2 2
24V 3 3 +24VM4 3
ACSUB PWB GND 4 2 GND 4
HL_POW_CNT 5 1 HL_POW_CNT 5
292132-5 173977-5 173977-5 179228-5
292254-5
Fusing unit CN5
1 N-HL(US) CN7
(NC) 2 N-HL(US) HL_US 7
DF63A-2EP-3.96C DF63-2S-3.96C
Drawer A 1-1123722-2 1-1123723-2 HL_LM 6
2 L-HL(UM/UW) 2 Body side:1-292240-2 HL_UW 5
1 L-HL(LM/US) 1 Fusing side:1-292239-2 HL_UM 4
CN4
/HL_PR 3
4 (NC) 4 1 N-HL(UW)
GND 2
D1.25-M3(Ni) INT24V2L 1
3 N-HL(UM) 3 2 N-HL(UM)
292132-7 173977-7
DF22-2S-7.92C(28) DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05)
2 N-HL(UW) 2
TS_S CN3
D1.25-M3(Ni) 172167-1 172159-1
1 L-HL(UM/UW) 1 1 L-HL(UM/UW)
D1.25-M3(Ni) 4 L-HL(LM) 4 2 L-HL(LM/US)
3 L-HL(US) 3 3 N-HL(LM)
2 L-HL(UW) 2 DF22L-3P-7.92DSA(05)
D1.25-M3(Ni) 1 L-HL(UM) 1 DF22L-3S-7.92C(28)
TS_M HL PWB
D1.25-M3(Ni) 5 A1 TH_LM A1 1
D1.25-M3(Ni) 4 A2 TH_LM_CS A2 2
3 A3 GND A3 3
2 A4 TH_LM2 A4 4 (3/3) CN23
1 A5 GND A5 5
INT24V2L 27
353908-5 353908-5
GND 26
/HL_PR 25
HL_UM 24
1 B1 TH_UM B1 7 HL_UW 23
2 B2 TH_UM_CS B2 6 HL_LM 22
3 B3 GND B3 5 CN9 HL_US 21
2 L-HL(US) 2 3 N-HL(US) 3 4 B4 TH_US1 B4 4 1 TH_UM
P. Fusing 200V (North America)
HL _US 5 B5 TH_US1_CS B5 3 2 TH_UM_CS

4-292208-0 2-353293-0
1 L-HL(UW) 1 2 N-HL(UW) 2 6 B6 GND B6 2 3 GND
HL _UW 7 B7 5VNPD B7 1 4 TH_US
3 L-HL(UM) 3 1 N-HL(UM) 1 5 TH_US_CS
172234-1
HL _UM 353908-7 353908-7 6 GND
172166-1 DF63-3S-3.96C DF63A-3EP-3.96C
7 TH_LM
8 TH_LM_CS
9 GND
TS_L 10 TH_US2
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) 11 GND
1-353908-1
2 L-HL(LM) 2 1 N-HL(LM) 1
Drawer B
Body side:1-292240-2
1 (NC) 1 HL_LM 172156-1 172164-1 Fusing side:1-292239-2
DF63A-2EP-3.96C DF63-2S-3.96C 4 (NC) 4
3 N-HL(US) 3
22 5VNPD
21 WEBEND2
2 N-HL(LM) 2
Fusing lower thermistor 20 GND
19 5VNPD
292156-3 1 L-HL(LM/US) 1
18 FPFD
2 TH_LM 2
TH_LM1 17 GND
1 TH_LM_CS 3
16 GND
3 GND 1
(non-contacting) 15 POD1
179228-3 179228-3 14 5VNPD
Fusing lower thermistor 2 13 TH_LM2
12 GND
292156-2 1-353908-1 2-292208-2
TH_LM2 1 TH_LM2 2
2 GND 1
(contacting) 179228-2 179228-2
CN7
Fusing upper thermistor main 1 24V4
3 /CV_COPY
292156-3
5 /CV_START
2 TH_UM 2
TH_UM 7 /CV_CLCOPY
1 TH_UM_CS 3
9 /CV_STAPLE
3 GND 1
(non-contacting) COIN 11 /CV_DUPLEX
179228-3 179228-3 13 /CV_SIZE0
Fusing upper thermistor sub VENDER 15 /CV_SIZE2
2 P-GND
292156-3
4 /CV_COUNT
2 TH_US 2 CN30
TH_US1 6 /CV_CA
1 TH_US_CS 3
8 /CV_COLOR1 5VN 1

3 GND 1
(non-contacting) 10 /CV_COLOR0 /TxD_LOG 2
179228-3 179228-3 12 5VN /RxD_LOG 3
14 /CV_SIZE1 GND 4
16 /CV_SIZE3 (NC) 5
Fusing rear detect 1-1470109-6 440054-5
175489-3
GND 3 5 A1 GND A1 1
POD1 2 4 A2 POD1 A2 2 PCU PWB
POD1 5VNPD 1 3 A3 5VNPD A3 3
179228-3 2 A4 WEBM2_A A4 4
1 A5 WEBM2_B A5 5
353908-5 353908-5
WEB cleaning motor 2 292156-2
1 WEBM2_A 2 Fusing drawer connector placement
WEBM2 2 WEBM2_B 1 1 B1 TH_US2 B1 7
179228-2 179228-2 2 B2 GND B2 6 1-292239-2 1-292240-2
Fusing upper thermistor sub 2 3 B3 5VNPD B3 5
4 B4 FPFD B4 4
292156-2 5 B5 GND B5 3 Fuser unit I/F Drawer Fuser unit I/F Drawer
TH_US2 1 TH_US2 2 6 B6 WEBEND2 B6 2
2 GND 1 7 B7 GND B7 1
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
4 3 3 4
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
(contacting) 179228-2 179228-2 353908-7 353908-7

B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
1 2 2 1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Fusing enter paper detect

175489-3
5VNPD 1 View from Fuser unit side View from Body unit side
FPFD 2
FPFD GND 3 292254-8
179228-3 1 PRM_A 8
2 PRM_XA 7
3 PRM_B 6
4 PRM_XB 5
WEB end detect 2 5 +24V 4
175489-3 6 +24V 3
5VNPD 1 7 WEBM2_A 2
WEBEND2 2 8 WEBM2_B 1
WEBEND2 D-GND 3 179228-8 179228-8
179228-3
Fusing unit
DF63A-2EP-3.96C DF63-2S-3.96C CN5
2 L-HL(UM/UW) 2 1 L-HL(US) CN7
1 L-HL(US) 1 2 (NC) HL_US 7
Drawer A 3 N-HL(US) HL_LM 6
1-1123722-3 1-1123724-2 HL_UW 5
Fusing side:1-292239-2 HL_UM 4
CN4
/HL_PR 3
4 L-HL(UM/UW) 4 1 N-HL(UW)
GND 2
TS_S 172167-1 172159-1 3 N-HL(UM) 3 2 N-HL(UM)
INT24V2L 1
D1.25-M3(Ni) 4 L-HL(LM) 4 DF22-2S-7.92C(28) 292132-7 173977-7
D1.25-M3(Ni) DF22-2P-7.92DSA(05)
3 L-HL(US) 3 2 N-HL(UW) 2
2 L-HL(UW) 2 CN3
D1.25-M3(Ni) 1 L-HL(UM) 1 1 (NC) 1 1 L-HL(UM/UW)
2 L-HL(LM)
3 N-HL(LM)
TS_M DF22L-3S-7.92C(28) DF22L-3P-7.92DSA(05)
D1.25-M3(Ni)
D1.25-M3(Ni)
HL PWB
5 A1 TH_LM A1 1
4 A2 TH_LM_CS A2 2
Q. Fusing 200V (Europe)
3 A3 GND A3 3
2 A4 TH_LM2 A4 4 (3/3) CN23
1 A5 GND A5 5
INT24V2L 27
353908-5 353908-5
GND 26
/HL_PR 25
2 L-HL(US) 2 HL_US 3 N-HL(US) 3 HL_UM 24
1 B1 TH_UM B1 7 HL_UW 23
1 L-HL(UW) 1 2 N-HL(UW) 2 2 B2 TH_UM_CS B2 6 HL_LM 22
HL_UW 3 B3 GND B3 5 CN9 HL_US 21
3 L-HL(UM) 3 1 N-HL(UM) 1 4 B4 TH_US1 B4 4 1 TH_UM 4-292208-0 2-353293-0
172234-1 172166-1
HL_UM DF63-3S-3.96C DF63A-3EP-3.96C 5 B5 TH_US1_CS B5 3 2 TH_UM_CS
6 B6 GND B6 2 3 GND
7 B7 5VNPD B7 1 4 TH_US
353908-7 353908-7 5 TH_US_CS
TS_L 6 GND
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) 7 TH_LM
8 TH_LM_CS
9 GND
10 TH_US2
11 GND
1-353908-1
2 L-HL(LM) 2 1 N-HL(LM) 1
1 (NC) 1
HL_LM 172156-1 172164-1
DF63A-2EP-3.96C DF63-2S-3.96C Drawer B
Fusing side:1-292239-2
4 L-HL(US) 4
3 N-HL(US) 3
22 5VNPD
21 WEBEND2
2 N-HL(LM) 2
20 GND
19 5VNPD
1 L-HL(LM) 1
18 FPFD
Fusing lower thermistor 17 GND
292156-3 16 GND
2 TH_LM 2 15 POD1
TH_LM1 1 TH_LM_CS 3 14 5VNPD
3 GND 1 13 TH_LM2
(non-contacting) 179228-3 179228-3
12 GND
1-353908-1
2-292208-2
Fusing lower thermistor 2
292156-2
TH_LM2 1 TH_LM2 2
2 GND 1
(contacting) 179228-2 179228-2
Fusing upper thermistor main CN7

292156-3 1 24V4
2 TH_UM 2 3 /CV_COPY
TH_UM 1 TH_UM_CS 3 5 /CV_START
(non-contacting) 3 GND 1 7 /CV_CLCOPY
179228-3 179228-3 9 /CV_STAPLE
11 /CV_DUPLEX

Fusing upper thermistor sub
COIN 13 /CV_SIZE0
15 /CV_SIZE2
292156-3 2 P-GND
TH_US1 2 TH_US 2
VENDER 4 /CV_COUNT
1 TH_US_CS 3 6 /CV_CA CN30
(non-contacting) 3 GND 1 8 /CV_COLOR1 5VN 1
179228-3 179228-3 10 /CV_COLOR0 /TxD_LOG 2
12 5VN /RxD_LOG 3
Fusing rear detect 14 /CV_SIZE1 GND 4
175489-3 16 /CV_SIZE3 (NC) 5
GND 3 5 A1 GND A1 1 1-1470109-6 440054-5
POD1 2 4 A2 POD1 A2 2
POD1 5VNPD 1 3 A3 5VNPD A3 3
179228-3 2 A4 WEBM2_A A4 4
1 A5 WEBM2_B A5 5 PCU PWB
353908-5 353908-5
WEB cleaning motor 2 292156-2
1 WEBM2_A 2
WEBM2 2 WEBM2_B 1 1 B1 TH_US2 B1 7
179228-2 179228-2 2 B2 GND B2 6
Fusing upper thermistor sub 2 3 B3 5VNPD B3 5
4 B4 FPFD B4 4
292156-2 5 B5 GND B5 3
TH_US2 1 TH_US2 2 6 B6 WEBEND2 B6 2
2 GND 1 7 B7 GND B7 1 Fusing drawer connector placement
(contacting) 179228-2 179228-2 353908-7 353908-7
1-292239-2 1-292240-2
Fusing enter paper detect
175489-3 Fuser unit I/F Drawer Fuser unit I/F Drawer
5VNPD 1
FPFD 2
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
FPFD GND 3 292254-8 4 3 3 4

179228-3 1 PRM_A 8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
2 PRM_XA 7 1 2 2 1
3 PRM_B 6
4 PRM_XB 5
WEB end detect 2 5 +24V 4 View from Fuser unit side View from Body unit side
175489-3 6 +24V 3
5VNPD 1 7 WEBM2_A 2
WEBEND2 2 8 WEBM2_B 1
WEBEND2 D-GND 3 179228-8 179228-8
179228-3
SCN BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
1 SHIELD3 6
MOTHER PWB 2 DGND3 5
3 D3+ 4
4 D3- 3
IC Card
5 VBUS3 2
(NC) 6 (NC) 1
CZHR-06V-S CZHR-06V-S
HDD CN25
MFP PWB Shield3 10
SATA POWER DGND3 9
12V 15 (NC) D+ 8
12V 14 (NC) D- 7 Operation panel unit
12V 13 (NC) CN27 VBUS3 6
DGND 12 1 DGND Shield1 5
179228-5
DGND 11 2 5VHD FSUB_GND 4
DGND 10 3 DGND FSUB_D+ 3 LVDS PWB
+5VHD 9 FSUB_D- 2
179228-3 292132-3 USB connector PWB
+5VHD 8 FSUB_VBUS 1
+5VHD 7 DF50A-10P-1V(51) DF50A-10S-1C CN6 CN2 CN1 USB-A
DGND 6 10 GND_POWER SHIELD1 1 1 SHIELD1 SHELL -
DGND 5 9 FSUB_VBUS DGND1 2 2 DGND1 DGND1 4
R. HDD, KEYBOARD, USB
DGND 4 8 FSUB_D- D1+ 3 3 D1+ D1+ 3

3.3V 3 (NC) 7 FSUB_D+ D1- 4 4 D1- D1- 2 Front USB
3.3V 2 (NC) 6 FSUB_GND VBUS1 5 5 VBUS1 VBUS1 1
3.3V 1 (NC) 5 D-GND 2-292173-5 179228-5 292132-5
4 TPUSB_VBUS
CN29 3 TPUSB_D-
SATA SIGNAL 2 TPUSB_D+
GND 1 1 GND SRA-01T-3.2
CN11 1 D-GND
SATA_TXP 2 2 SATA_TXP (NC) 1 1-353908-0 1-292230-0
SATA_TXN 3 3 SATA_TXN (NC) 2
GND 4 4 GND (NC) 3
SATA_RXN 5 5 SATA_RXN D-GND 4
SATA_RXP 6 6 SATA_RXP D-GND 5
GND 7 7 GND (NC) 6 SRA-01T-3.2
IMSA-9813B-07Y901 (NC) 7
(NC) 8
D-GND 9
D-GND 10
(NC) 11
502382-1172 502380-1100
CN21 Americas:STANDARD
1 VBUS Keyboard unit
2 D- Other:OPTION
REAR USB-H 3 D+
4 GND
UAR27-4K5J00 CN24
(TYPE-A) NC 1 BU11P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
KEYBD_VBUS 2 11 KEYBD_VBUS 1 1 KEYBD_VBUS 1 KEYBD_VBUS
KEYBD_D- 3 10 KEYBD_D- 2 2 KEYBD_D- 2 KEYBD_D-
CN5 KEYBD_D+ 4 9 KEYBD_D+ 3 3 KEYBD_D+ 3 KEYBD_D+
1 VBUS KEYBD_GND 5 4 KEYBD_GND 4 KEYBD_GND
8 KEYBD_GND 4
2 D- GND_POWER 6 5 GND_POWER 5 GND_POWER
7 GND_POWER 5
REAR USB-D 3 D+ 6 FG 6 FG
502382-0670 502380-0600 6 (NC) 6
4 GND
5 (NC) 7 PAP-06V-S PALR-06V
(TYPE-B) UBR23-4K2200 4 (NC) 8
3 D-GND 9 KEYBOARD
2 D-GND 10 SRA-01T-3.2
CN6 1 (NC) 11
1 MDI_0+ CZHR-11V-S
2 MDI_0- CZHR-11V-S CZHR-07V-S
3 MDI_1+
4 MDI_1- 1 (NC) 7
5 MDI_2+ 2 (NC) 6
6 MDI_2- 3 (NC) 5
7 MDI_3+ 4 D-GND 4
8 MDI_3- 5 D-GND 3
LAN 9 VCC 6 (NC) 2
10 GND 7 (NC) 1
11 RLED(A) BU07P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
12 RLED(K)
13 LLED(A)

14 LLED(K)
24-010139U13-1
CN15 292254-4 HDD cooling fan motor
+12V 1 4 +12V 1
PWM_RSVFAN 2 3 PWM_RSVFAN 2
P-GND 3 2 P-GND 3 HDD FAN
LOCK_RSVFAN 4 1 LOCK_RSVFAN 4
292132-4 173977-4 173977-4 179228-4
CN7
DBR30-091F100
1 CD
Board to Board
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND CN17 MFP cooling fan motor
RS232C 6 DSR +12V 1
7 RTS PWM_RSVFAN 2
8 CTS P-GND 3
9 RT LOCK_RSVFAN 4
MFP FAN
292132-4 179228-4
Office2 only
CN31
VBUS_WIFI 1
USB_WIFI_D- 2
USB_WIFI_D+ 3
WIFI_GND 4
SHEILD 5
DF50A-5P-1V
Operation panel unit
CN25
LVDS PWB USB connector PWB
DF50A-10P-1V CZHR-06V-S
CN6 CN2
GND_POWER 10 1 SHIELD4 6 1-292230-0 2-292173-5 292132-5 USB-A
ICC_GND 9 2 DGND4 5
10 GND_POWER SHIELD1 1 1 SHIELD1 SHELL -
ICC_D+ 8 3 D4+ 4
9 FSUB_VBUS DGND1 2 2 DGND1 DGND1 4
ICC_D- 7 4 D4- 3
ICC_VBUS 6 5 VBUS4 2
IC Card 8 FSUB_D- D1+ 3 3 D1+ D1+ 3
7 FSUB_D+ D1- 4 4 D1- D1- 2 Front USB
(NC) 6 (NC) 1 EFI IF PWB 6 FSUB_GND VBUS1 5 5 VBUS1 VBUS1 1
BU06P-TZ-S(LF)(SN) 5 GND_POWER 179228-5 179228-5
4 TPUSB_VBUS
3 TPUSB_D-
CN9 CN11 2 TPUSB_D+
GND_POWER 5 502382-1170 SRA-01T-3.2
DF50-20DP-1V(51) 1 TPUSB_GND
FSUB_GND 4
20 (NC) TPUSB_VBUS 1 1-353908-0
FSUB_D+ 3
18 (NC) TPUSB_D- 2
FSUB_D- 2
16 (NC) TPUSB_D+ 3
FSUB_VBUS 1
14 (NC) TPUSB_GND 4
DF50A-10S-1C GND_POWER
12 (NC) 5
VBUS3 SRA-01T-3.2
10 (NC) 6
8 (NC) D3- 7
6 (NC) D3+ 8
CN24 4 (NC) DGND3 9
502382-0670 2 (NC) SHIELD3 10
GND_POWER 6 9 GND_POWER PADLED 11
KEYBD_GND 5 7 KEYBD_GND 502380-1100
KEYBD_D+ 4 5 KEYBD_D+
KEYBD_D- 3 3 KEYBD_D-
S. EFI (Option), USB, INTERFACE
KEYBD_VBUS 2 1 KEYBD_VBUS
NC 1 DF50S-20DS-1C
502380-0600
CN11
502382-1170
(NC) 11 (NC)
Keyboard unit
D-GND 10 (NC) CN10
502382-0670
D-GND 9 (NC)
NC 1 BU11P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
(NC) 8 (NC)
(NC) 7 (NC) KEYBD_VBUS 2 11 KEYBD_VBUS 1 1 KEYBD_VBUS 1 KEYBD_VBUS
(NC) 6 (NC) KEYBD_D- 3 10 KEYBD_D- 2 2 KEYBD_D- 2 KEYBD_D-
D-GND 5 (NC) KEYBD_D+ 4 9 KEYBD_D+ 3 3 KEYBD_D+ 3 KEYBD_D+
D-GND 4 (NC) KEYBD_GND 5 8 KEYBD_GND 4 4 KEYBD_GND 4 KEYBD_GND
(NC) 3 (NC) GND_POWER 6 7 GND_POWER 5 5 GND_POWER 5 GND_POWER KEYBOARD
(NC) 2 (NC) 502380-0600 6 VBUS3 6 6 FG 6 FG
(NC) 1 (NC) 5 D3- 7 PAP-06V-S PALR-06V
4 D3+ 8
3 DGND3 9
2 SHIELD3 10 SRA-01T-3.2
CN28 CN17 1 PADLED 11
TX25-60P-12ST-H1E_DIP TX24-60R-6ST-HIE_DIP
CZHR-11V-S CZHR-11V-S
USB_DET 1 1 USB_DET
LCD_EFI_CPU 31 /E_RDY 2 2 /E_RDY 31 LCD_EFI_CPU
/PRTC_RDY 32 /PRTC_INSTL 3 3 /PRTC_INSTL 32 /PRTC_RDY
nCTS_FAX_D_EFI 33 WakeUp_MFP 4 4 WakeUp_MFP 33 nCTS_FAX_D_EFI BU07P-TZ-S(LF)(SN)
RXD_FAX_D_EFI 34 nRTS_FAX_D_EFI 5 5 nRTS_FAX_D_EFI 34 RXD_FAX_D_EFI 1 VBUS3 7
EFI_EN 35 TXD_FAX_D_EFI 6 6 TXD_FAX_D_EFI 35 EFI_EN 2 D3- 6
5VLS 36 DVI_DET 7 7 DVI_DET 36 5VLS 3 D3+ 5
5VLS 37 3.3VM 8 8 3.3VM 37 5VLS 4 DGND3 4
5VLS 38 3.3VM 9 9 3.3VM 38 5VLS 5 SHIELD3 3 MX-PX13
5VLS 39 3.3VM 10 10 3.3VM 39 5VLS 6 PADLED 2
5VO 40 /WAKEUP 11 11 /WAKEUP 40 5VO 7 RESERVE 1
5VO 41 GND 12 12 GND 41 5VO CZHR-07V-S
GND 42 VSYNC_Y- 13 13 VSYNC_Y- 42 GND
PRT4+ 43 VSYNC_Y+ 14 14 VSYNC_Y+ 43 PRT4+
PRT4- 44 GND 15 15 GND 44 PRT4-
GND 45 VSYNC_M+ 16 16 VSYNC_M+ 45 GND
PRT3+ 46 VSYNC_M- 17 17 VSYNC_M- 46 PRT3+
PRT3- 47 GND 18 18 GND 47 PRT3-
GND 48 VSYNC_C- 19 19 VSYNC_C- 48 GND
ECLK_EFI+ 49 VSYNC_C+ 20 20 VSYNC_C+ 49 ECLK_EFI+

ECLK_EFI- 50 GND 21 21 GND 50 ECLK_EFI-
GND 51 VSYNC_K+ 22 22 VSYNC_K+ 51 GND
PRT2+ 52 VSYNC_K- 23 23 VSYNC_K- 52 PRT2+
PRT2- 53 GND 24 24 GND 53 PRT2-
GND 54 ECLK_ENG- 25 25 ECLK_ENG- 54 GND
Board to Board
PRT1+ 55 ECLK_ENG+ 26 26 ECLK_ENG+ 55 PRT1+
SCN PRT1- 56 GND 27 27 GND 56 PRT1-
GND 57 HSYNC_ENG+ 28 28 HSYNC_ENG+ 57 GND CN12
PRT0+ 58 HSYNC_ENG- 29 29 HSYNC_ENG- 58 PRT0+ UBR24-4K2G00
PRT0- 59 GND 30 30 GND 59 PRT0- 5V 1
MOTHER PWB GND 60 60 GND D- 2 EFI USB
D+ 3
GND 4
CN14 CN1
XM4M-2432-1312 047272-0001
1 TXA2- EQL_RXIN0+ 1
2 TXA2+ D-GND 2
3 D-GND EQL_RXIN0- 3
4 D-GND TXOUTEQL_ 4
5 D-GND D-GND 5
6 DDC_SCL TXOUTEQL+ 6
7 DDC_SDA EQL_RXIN2+ 7
8 D-GND D-GND 8
9 TXA1- EQL_RXIN2- 9
10 TXA1+ EQL_RXIN3- 10
11 D-GND D-GND 11
EFI DVI 12 D-GND EQL_RXIN3+ 12
13 D-GND /WAKEUP_R 13
14 DDC_V5_DVI /ERDY_R 14 EFI Display Port
15 D-GND TXOUT+ 15
16 TXACHPD_ D-GND 16
17 TXA0- TXOUT- 17
18 TXA0+ /PROGRAMN_R 18
19 D-GND D-GND 19
20 D-GND /FPGARST_R 20
21 D-GND D-GND 21
22 D-GND D-GND 22
23 TXAC+ D-GND 23
24 TXAC D-GND 24
MX-8090N
[14] SERVICE TOOL Service Manual
Name Part code Note

Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11
Scanner adjustment chart UKOG-0356FCZZ
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Yellow powder CKOG-0345DS51 Primary / secondary transfer belt
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Conduction grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ Fusing roller / Presser roller / Bush
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ DSPF paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ Scanner rail
MX-8090N SERVICE TOOL 14 – 1

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. RESERVED.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2018 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
x Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Windows® 8,
Windows® 8.1, Windows® Server 2003, Windows® Server 2008,
Windows® Server 2012 and Internet Explorer®
are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
and other countries.
x PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
x Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc.
x IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
x Acrobat® Reader Copyright® Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
x PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
x Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
x All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions BU
First edition: December 2017

Latest edition: March 2019

SM MX-8090N S3e PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SM MX-8090N S3e PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

[14] SERVICE TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

2. Warning for servicing

MX-8090N NOTE FOR SERVICING – i

• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

• Place of much dust

• Place near a wall

• Unstable or irregular surface

MX-8090N NOTE FOR SERVICING – ii

MX-8090N NOTE FOR SERVICING – iii

*1: Option for 2nd MX-LC13

MX-PF10 AR-SU1 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-SCX1 MX-SCX2

MX-8090N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

*1: Option for North America.

Model name Weight

*1: Excluding consumable parts.

MX-8090N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

B. Engine speed (ppm)

Heavy Paper 1/2 (Low speed 1)

(2) Multi Bypass

Heavy Paper 1/2 (Low speed 1)

*1: Envelope : Monarch, Com-9, Com-10, DL, C4, C5, C6

C. Printable area Tone Copy Writing

Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder) *1:image send only

Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass tray

Paper type Tray 4 Multi bypass tray (Option)

(3) Size of paper which can be fed

Tray 1 Tray 2 Multi bypass

I. Paper exit section

Exit location Center (option) Right side (option)

(2) Size of paper which can be discharged

CPU ARM11: 600MHz B. Job Effectiveness

*1: The capacity depends on procurement and sourcing situation.

Memory area Boot/Program area

*1: Result may change depending on conditions.

Mode Sub mode Scanner

200 V (North America, etc.) 200 V (Europe, etc.)

*1: Power switch ON, de humidity heater OFF

6. Dimensions and Weight

1. Supply system table

B. Europe, Eastern Europe, Australia, New Zealand

C. Asia, Hong Kong

MX-8090N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

MX-8090N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2

MX-8090N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3

MX-8090N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4